§§§
§ț¢&#*（&）
§.ş，
Ķišķ;
∞
SY-
ſaeſº，
¿
|×

W
# , \
t
A 1 & Y.
{
-*-
• MII
& && &$#& &$#& &&g-gº-º: ss-
H H (
J , ; } }}
O
(..) IT
\}}
�~
- - -þ=
�
};·
•
��^^
tº:
4)N }}
Hº SITY
4
UNIV. I
{ }}
N ºf
4
I) P3 Y
N 'I*E
iſ .",
º
3.333
&@*& & Cº. &&. &&g-
IPR H
º
zº
*>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>*
Ş
§§
¿?
§§
$
&&&&
§§§:ſſä ººżš Ť Ť



ș
\
' º
*
*…
3#|
}
|
|
·*·|
-*}
|
|
*}
×
-}
*
&
&
*
��
t
-~^
, S.
ſå
· · · · · · -·-· ·-• & ·
ș ș*… --★ →e， → （A，–-~ ~ ~ ~ ~ *~*-– — · §-&---;---º. -- ----*


OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING.
BY A. P. DAVIs, M. D., D. O.,
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
A Graduate of the American School of Osteopathy, Kirksville, Missouri.
FRED. L. ROWE,
CINCINNATI, O.
1899.
Copyright, 1898, by
A. P. DAVIs, M.D., D.O.
DEDICATION.
This work is lovingly dedicated to her whose life has
been linked with mine for forty-three years, and who has
devoted her whole married life to assist me in ameliorating
the sufferings of my fellowmen, through my many struggles
to attain a knowledge of the human system, the various
studies that make up the curriculum of a physician's quiver.
Through all these years her constancy has not lagged, and is
eminently deserving of this tribute from a loving and devoted
husband. A. P. DAVIs, AUTHOR.
INTRODUCTION.
It is not so much a matter of ſame on my part, nor the
glory of popular praise, in presenting this book to the world
aS an individual production, as it is to present facts. Every
man has more or less pride in himself, who amounts to any-
thing as a leader of the people or who wishes to aspire to a
promulgator of a great thought, and I hope to be pardoned
for any seeming presumption in presenting this volume for
consideration. No subject claims audience of so large a num-
ber of people as that which concerns their personal welfare,
and this being of that nature—the physical welfare of the
race—we hope that the principles laid down and elucidated
herein will receive careful consideration, investigation, and
after trial, the approval of every one interested in health. It
would be presumptuous on the part of the author to claim
perfection, but we have studied the principles involved most
carefully, and hope that we have consummated much that will
be invaluable to the reader, and be in some measure a means
of showing to the world, in a clear, concise form, the pecu-
liar marvelousness and untold benefits of this great science,
so that it may indeed be a blessing to mankind. &
Our only apology for offering this volume is that the
subject has not been clearly presented to the public, nor to
the profession in such a manner as to be understood. The
sketches sent forth through journals have scarcely indexed
the meaning of, nor the science in a manner that brought out
VI OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
anything more than ridicule and repugnance. This science
deserves the closest scrutiny and the most searching investi-
gation, for it is surely worthy, and will be the leading science
of healing at no distant day. Our illustrations will be most
interesting to the reader, in that they exhibit fully the applica-
tion of the principle in detail so clearly that the science stands
out to view in the clearest light possible, and at once attracts
intense attention. Special pains have been taken to prepare
this series of manipulations so as to be easily understood and
used by all persons who carefully study the philosophy
involved.
THOUGHTS FOR SPECIAL CONSIDERATION.
It is not the design of this work to embrace all other
sciences and specialties, in order to make a show of wisdom—
our sole object being to present the reasons for the application
of this science, and to demonstrate its place among other
means of healing. If the reader will carefully survey the
premises, investigate the philosophy and note the results, a
just estimate of the value of the science may be placed on it,
and its proper place assigned for it. -
Unobstructed circulation of fluids to and from the heart,
in all parts of the body, and uniting the forces and removing
the pressure, constitute the basic principles of this philosophy,
and the means of promoting these ends is the only object of
this book.
Disease, according to the common acceptation of the
term, being only the product of impeded circulation, the
desideratum in all of the manipulations, moves and adjust-
ments shown, illustrated and explained in this work, will be
conceded by the careful reader who desires to know. There
is no secret, arcane abstruseness aimed at, but the practical
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. v1.1
uses and results of the science to ameliorate suffering human-
ity, to set free what is and has been bound, “lo, these many
y
years,” not by word only, but through the means God has
given us.
The field of surgery, gynecology, obstetrics and other
departments of the healing art are not considered in detail,
nor is it the object of this treatise to embrace, but the princi-
ples illustrated will be alike useful to the one as the other.
When it is considered that obstruction causes a larger per cent.
of pathological conditions than anything else, and all other
things combined, the importance of the thought we have
labored to impress on the mind of the reader, will be realized.
The various methods recommended and shown will be
found adequate, properly applied, to afford much satisfaction,
great relief, many cures thought to be beyond the power of
known remedies to reach. -
Tt is as much of an impossibility to send communications
over electric wires without continuity of contact as it is to
cure disease without freedom of communication of terminal
end nerve footlets or freedom of the circulation of the fluids of
the body; and the reason that Osteopathy shows up so bril-
liantly, is because it succeeds in taking off the pressure and
permits vital fluids to move on. Co-ordination in the physi-
cal body is as essential as Faith in the spiritual body. We are
not dealing in uncertainties, if we understand ourselves, nor
do we need to conjecture results, for they follow with as
much assurance as effect follows cause. This science, then,
becomes a necessity in the curriculum of the healing art.
Those who have had most experience with Osteopathy are
the most ardently impressed in its favor. It wears favorably
with acquaintance. &
VIII OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The author of this work is largely indebted to the many
authors on Pathology for many ideas contained, and especial
respects should be paid to Dr. Daniel E. Hughes, author of
“Practice of Medicine”; Auvard, Ranney, Tyson, Buchanan,
Pratt, and Kirke. It is not so much the matter of pathology
that we had in view in writing this work, as to show when,
where and how to apply Osteopathy with some science and
intelligence. The illustrations presented in this work are
sufficiently plain to be comprehended, and applied in the most
of the pathological cases mentioned, successfully.
We sincerely commend this volume to those who desire
to learn what Osteopathy is, and some of its capabilities and
possibilities, as far as known to the present date.
That there will be improvement in its application, is not
a question, but the philosophy seems to be fairly well demon-
strated, even though automatically applied in many instances
by persons whose attainments are meager, to say the least of
them, to the astonishment of many a skilled scientist, proving
its merits, though ignorantly applied.
We hope that those who become healers may study to
fathom its profundity, and apply it satisfactorily, beneficially,
and curatively to ameliorate suffering humanity. . .
Respectfully submitted,
THE AUTHOR.
BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH.
Andrew P. Davis, M.D., D.O., the subject of this sketch,
was born in Allegany County, New York, on the Ioth day of
March, A. D. 1835, of religious parents. The paternal side
was of Scotch and Welsh descent and his maternal side of
Irish extraction, very nearly the original, his grandparents
being quite prominent in Revolutionary times. . .
He derived much of his energy and tenacity from th
paternal side of the house, and his finer qualities from the
maternal side. A most remarkable combination of char-
acter for versatility, embracing all of the qualities of the sturdy
and the most refined. His career began amidst the most
adverse environments, his parents having emigrated to
Western Indiana when he was only a child, four years of age,
and settled in the rural district of the State (Indiana), where
during the next ten years his companionship was the older
and younger brothers, the hills, forest, rivulets, rocks and rills.
At the age of fourteen his father died, leaving him with but
little of this world’s goods; and with but a meager schooling
and but little knowledge of books or things. Cast out among
strangers, trained by an educated guardian, sent to school
and college for three years, became a teacher of district
schools, married at the age of twenty-one, began life amidst
difficulties but seldom realized at the present day; teaching
school winters and laboring on a farm during the summer and
fall months, studying nights—he formed the habit of self-
reliance, and had for his books the most meager, such authors
as “Samuel Thompson's Life and Practice of Medicine,”
“Robinson Crusoe,” “Pilgrim's Progress,” Davies' Arith-
metic, Kirkham's Grammar, and Olney's Geography and the
Sunday-school Libraries of his county-seat. The first effort
(IX) - -
X OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to formulate a life of study for a purpose began in the year
1861, when politics raged so hotly as to culminate in a
national revolution and freedom of the slave; he was taken
into custodianship, professionally, by a learned gentleman,
who drilled, trained and graduated him in the Regular School
of medicine, and supervised his early practice for several
years; but the inconsistencies of the Regular practice were too
palpable for his discerning mind, and he investigated, studied,
and graduated in the Homoeopathic School eleven years after
his graduation in the Regular School. He also graduated in
Ophthalmology and Otology, Orificial Surgery, and studied
the Junod System of Hemaspasia; then Therapeutic Sarcog-
nomy, Mental Science, Christian Science, Hypnotism, and
finally Osteopathy, mastering it and reducing it to a science,
working out the 1most difficult problems in the healing art,
consequent upon the freedom of the circulation of the fluids of
the body. This science seems to be adequate to occupy his
whole mind, and its marvelous, far-reaching philosophy fur-
nishes him with sufficient depth of thought to satisfy his most
ardent zeal, versatility, life. He is now one of the most thor-
ough teachers and practitioners of this science in the country,
and is perfectly adapted to unfolding the science in every
respect.
Possessing that quality of brain that is calculated to
search out the most minute details of the finer structures of
things, he is just the man to bring out all of the relationships
of this science to the art of healing and show the contrast of
the various systems purporting to be remedial agencies for
pathological conditions. Whatever he undertakes to investi-
gate he thoroughly develops to perfection, making every part
stand out in its true light, so that it may be known and read
of all men. While it is a recognized fact that other minds
claim the discovery of the principle upon which Osteopathy is
founded, it is also a fact that until Dr. Davis took hold of the
subject, Osteopathy was in its crudest state, meagerly known
only within the narrow limits of a few counties, and had been
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. XI
recognized by but few men of note; that, after he had fully
investigated, adopted, and began to realize what was in it,
and what a boon it might be to suffering humanity, he
indorsed it, gave his influence thereto, recommended it to the
leading men of the State in which its originator resided, and
became the first teacher in the first Osteopathic School in the
world, and aided in setting it on foot, and has not ceased to
sound its praises and demonstrate its worth at all times and
in all places, until now he is the head of the Quincy Osteo-
opathic Institute (succeeded by Dr. E. L. Willis, May 1st,
1898), in the city of Quincy, Illinois, and students and
patients are daily receiving the benefits of this marvelous and
scientific method of curing disease without drugs—simply by
the proper adjustment of the system to itself through a series
of physical manipulations. The curriculum of studies essen-
tial to the comprehension of this science consists of Anatomy,
Physiology and Pathology. Diseases are recognized as only
the result of the interruption of the onward flow of the fluids.
of the body; in their various rounds to build up and tear down
the various tissues in itself, and that when these tissues are
normally built up and the waste material properly eliminated,
health is the inevitable result. All of the deviations from a
normal state may be, and are, restored by the proper adjust-
ment through physical manipulations of the system to itself.
F. L. ROWE.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v.
Biographical Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IX.
Index to Plates . . . . . . . . . . . e e º e º 'º . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XIV.
Description of Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Fundamental Principles of Osteopathy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
The Philosophy of Application of these Principles......... 48
The Ultimate or Physiological Constituents of the Body.... 51
The Warfare Among Doctors Still Exists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Can this Science Be Relied on in Emergencies?........... 75
What Is Osteopathic Treatment?... . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .... 76
Mechanism of the Respiratory System........... ... ...... 83
The Positive and the Negative Forces in the Human Body... 88
The Science as It Is at the Present Date............... ... '91
The Controlling Influences of Certain Localities.......... 92
Misplaced Application of Osteopathy.................... 94.
An Intellectual Appreciation of the Science... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Adaptability a Prerequisite to Success. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
The People Demand an Intelligent Reason for a Thing..... IoI
The Formation of Material from the Food into Blood...... IO2
The Elementary Constituents of the Human Body. . . . . . . . . Io9
The Absolute Essentiality of Tissue Elements in the Blood... IIo
Heat and Cold . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... • - - - - - - II2
The Value of the Tissue Elements Considered............. 117
Do Not Confound these Elements with Medicines. . . . . . . . II9
Freedom of Circulation Essential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2O
Muscular Contraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Obstruction Produces Disease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I27
Full, Deep Inspirations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I31
Definitions—Disease, Pathology, Etiology, Histology,
Symptomology, Diagnosis, Prognosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I33
The Importance of the Nervous System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I35
The Vaso-Motor Nerve Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I44
Nerve Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I48
The Role the Spinal System Occupies in this Treatment.... 149
The General Outline of Spinal Nerve Influence. . . . . . . . . . . . I5I
XII
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. XIII
Nerve Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tº @ gº e º e º 'º e º 'º e º ſº e º e º 'º e I56
The Nervous System as a Guide to Diagnosis.......... . . . I60
Considerations Extraordinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I64
The Order of the Spinal Nerves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I68
Cervical and Dorsal Nerves. . . . . . . . . & Cº º º º • * * * * * * * * * * * ... I73
The Spinal Nerves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
The Brachial Plexus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Nerves of the Upper Extremity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... I8o
The Dorsal Nerves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
The Lumbar and Sacral Nerves. . . . . . . . . . ‘e e s e a e º s & e s a s a I84
Distribution of the Branches of the Lumbar Plexus. . . . . . . I86
Distribution of the Branches of the Sacral Plexus . . . . . . . . 187
The Sympathetic Nervous System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I88
Distribution of the Nerves of Leg and Foot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I90
General and Special Treatments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I9I
Special Moves for Specific Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I95
General Treatment Necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I97
Special Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2OI
Various Movements in Different Pathological Conditions. . . 205
Table for Convenient Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2O7
Special Instructions as to Manipulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2O7
Dislocation of Bones—Cause of... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2II
Examinations—Conditions to Be Observed. . . . . . . . . • - - - - 2 I2
Dietetics—Regarding Food During Sickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2I4.
Suggestive Therapeutics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Orificial Surgery—Its Philosophy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Reducing Dislocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fevers and Their Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Acute General Diseases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Blood, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Respiratory System, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Physical Diagnosis of Diseases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . 346
Nasal Passages, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Mouth, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Pharynx, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Bronchial Tubes, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Lungs, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Pleura, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
XIV OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PAGE
Circulatory System, Diseases of the... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Heart, Methods of Physical Examination of the... . . . . . . . . 461
Heart, Diagnosis of Valvular Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Nervous System, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Stomach, Diseases of the.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Liver, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Biliary Passages, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Kidneys, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
The Urine and Its Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Peritoneum, Diseases of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Intestinal Canal, Diseases of the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Skin, Diseases of the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Eye Diseases, Application of Osteopathy to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Osteopathy in Obstetric Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Obesity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Index to Diseases and Their Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
INDEX TO PLATES.
Plate Ia-First of General Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4I
Plate I.b.—Continuation of Plate I.a... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Plate II.-Treatment of Side of Neck Muscles. . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Plate III.-Stretching of Neck Muscles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Plate IV.-Vibration of Neck Muscles, Patient Recumbent. . 73
Plate V.-Angle of Jaw Movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8I
Plate VI.a.—Treatment of the Ears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Plate VI.b.—Ear Extension Backward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Plate VII-Vibration of Temples and Forehead. . . . . . . . . . . IO5
Plate VIII.-Stimulation of Supraorbital Nerves. . . . . . . . . . II3
Plate IX.a.—Vibration of Sides of Nares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2I
Plate IX.b.—Stimulation of Lacus Lachrymales. . . . . . . . . . . I29
Plate X-Vibration of Facial Muscles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Plate XI.-The Divulsion of the Nares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I45
Plate XII-Manipulation of Muscles of the Neck. . . . . . . . . I53
Plate XIII-Raising of the Clavicles, on Table. . . . . . . . . . . I61
Plate XIV.a.—Arm Movement, Patient on Table........ . 171
Plate XIV.b.—Continued Arm Movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I99
Plate XV-Treatment of Back of the Neck
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. XV
- PAGE
Plate XVI.-The Flux and Diarrhea—Movement for...... 219
Plate XVII.-Showing Flexion of Lower Limb. . . . . . . . . . . 229
Plate XVIII-Manipulation of Sciatic Nerve. . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Plate XIX-Vibratory Movement of Knee and Hip Joint. . 249
Plate XX-Showing Adduction of Thigh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Plate XXI-Conclusion of Movement Shown on Plate XX. 269
Plate XXII.-Showing Abduction of the Thigh. . . . . . . . . . . 279
Plate XXIII-Conclusion of Abduction of the Thigh. . . . . 289
Plate XXIV.-The Method of Treating the Saphenous Vein. 299
Plate XXV-The Manipulation of the Adductors. . . . . . . . . 309 .
Plate XXVI-Treating Fibula and Leg Muscles. . . . . . . . . 3I9
Plate XXVII.-Stretching Muscles of Back of Leg. . . . . . . . 329
Plate XXVIII.-Stretching Tendo Achilles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Plate XXIX-Treatment of Outside of the Thigh. . . . . . . . . 349
Plate XXX-Expansion of Chest by Two Persons. . . . . . . . 359
Plate XXXI-Back and Shoulder Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Plate XXXII.-Manner of Expanding Diaphragm. . . . . . . . 379
Plate XXXIII-Showing Manner of Liver Treatment. . . . . 389
Plate XXXIV.-Manipulation of Bowels for Constipation. . .399
Plate XXXV.-Showing the Percussion of Bowels. . . . . . . . 4O9
Plate XXXVI—Showing Vibratory Movement of Viscera. . 419
Plate XXXVII-Manner of Treating the Soft Palate. . . . . . 429
Plate XXXVIII.--Dorsum, Leg-Extension Treatment. ... 439
Plate XXXIX-Dorsum Treatment of Kidneys. . . . . . . . . . 449
Plate XL-Scapula, Dorsum and Shoulder Treatment. . . . . 459
Plate XLI.-Spinal Concussion, Knuckle Treatment. . . . . . 469
Plate XLII-Liver, Chest and Side Treatment. . . . . . ‘e e s s a 479
Plate XLIII–Manipulation of Spine, Dorsal Treatment... 489
Plate XLIV.-Arm Extension, Upright Treatment. . . . . . . . 499
Plate XLV.-Method of Stimulating Vaso-motor Nerves. . 509
Plate XLVI-Extenso-rotary Neck Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . 519
Plate XLVII.-Manipulating Muscles of Back of Neck. . . . 529
Plate XLVIII.-Chin-Occipital-Neck Extension. . . . . . . . . 539
Plate XLIX-Vibratory Movements, Neck and Back. . . . . . 549
Plate L-Showing Manipulations of Neck and Throat. . . . . 559
Plate LI.-Shoulder and Arm Raising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Plate LII–Showing How to Strain Elbow Joint. . . . . . . . . . 579
Plate LIII.-Raising Clavicle, Patient Sitting Up . . . . . . . . . 589
XVI OSTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PAGE
Plate LIV-Raising Chest Muscles and Treating Spine. ... 599
Plate LV—Knee-Chest Expansion Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Plate LVI.-Side of Neck and Shoulder Treatment. . . . . . . . 619
Plate LVII-To Raise Clavicle, Arm Leverage. . . . . e e s e e s 629
Plate LVIII-Manipulation of Goiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Plate LIX-Throat Treatment for Diphtheria, etc. . . . . . . . . 649
Plate LX.—Chest and Spinal Cord Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Plate LXI.-Chest Expansion and Spinal Stimuli. . . . . . . . . 669
Plate LXII-To Stretch Chest Muscles and Cord. . . . . . . . . 679
Plate LXIII.a.-Chest Expansion and Back Treatment. ... 689
Plate LXIII.b.—Different Position of Plate LXIII.a... . . . . 699
Plate LXIV—Treating Back, Lying on Couch........... 709
Plate LXV.—Showing Plate LXIV. Continued. . . . . . . . . . . 719
Plate LXVI.-Showing How to Extend Pectoral Muscle. . . 729
Plate LXVII-Treating Shoulder and Side Muscles. . . . . . . 739
Plate LXVIII.-Spine, Liver and Stomach Treatment. . . . . 749
Plate LXIX-Manipulation of Locomotor Ataxia. . . . . . . . 759
Plate LXX.—Showing Treatment for Eye Troubles. . . . . . . 769
Plate LXXI.-Flexing Limb on Thigh and Abdomen. . . . . 779
Plate LXXII−Showing Various Dorsal Treatments. . . . . . 789
The Cervical Plexus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
The Brachial Plexus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I79
The Brachial Plexus and Nerves of the Upper Extremity... 181
Distribution of Branches of the Lumbar and Sacral Plexuses 185
Cerebro-Spinal and Sympathetic Nervous Systems. . . . . . . . . 189
Skeleton with Capsular Ligaments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .795
The Lymphatic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8OI
Action of the Muscular System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Muscular System (Front View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8II
General Distribution of the Nervous System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
The Distribution of Nerves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
The Sympathetic Nerve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Sympathetic Nerve Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Vaso-motor Filaments and Solar Plexus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Nerve Plexuses—Deeper Structure and Plexuses. . . . . . . . . . 835
The Arterial System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Systemic Circulation of the Blood—Veins and Arteries. . . . . 843
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.
PLATES NO. I.a AND I.b.
Place the patient on the table, or bed, on the back, all
the muscles limp as possible, neck bare of clothing, ties, etc.
Put both hands, fingers touching at the spines of vertebrae,
hands at the side of the neck, head of patient well up to the
head of table; raise the neck with both hands, letting the fore-
fingers pull hardest, so that the head will incline to droop
somewhat, pressing the person against the top of the head of
patient, and when the neck is well bent and stretched upwards,
move backward from head of the patient yourself, raising the
fingers next to the occiput so as to level the head, and let it
down on the table. This move should be done two or more
times. The object of this move is to stretch the neck mus-
cles, stimulate the general circulation, and thereby start dor-
mant conditions of all of the fluids in that region, arouse the
vasomotor nerves, regulating the caliber of all of the blood
vessels in the body; and determines normal or abnormal con-
tour of the vertebrae themselves, the softness or rigidity of the
various muscles of the neck, condition of the venous and lym-
phatic vessels, glands, etc.
PLATE NO. II.
Place the heel of each hand on each side of the head of the
patient, on the mastoid portion of it, behind the ears, putting
the fingers as near together as may be; drop the fingers of one
hand to the junction of the occiput and neck; now roll the
head over on that hand by pressing with the heel of the other
hand, pressing at the same time with the palm of the fingers
against the side of the neck, inclining to pull the finger ends
upward, and enforcing that move by the pressure of the palm
(I)
2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of the other hand, or rather the heel of the hand against the
side of the head, back of the ear (as seen in the plate). Con-
tinue these moves several times, moving the fingers on the
sides of the neck up and down over the muscles, catching fin-
gers at a new point on the neck each turn of the head, with
the fingers of the hand underneath the side of head and the
neck. The fingers of the hand that rolls the head over on the
other hand need not be pressing on the neck as the heel of
said hand rolls the head over on the opposite hand, but may
be lifted up therefrom in an easy, graceful curve, but drawn
down when pressure is to be made on the neck of that side.
The object of this move, or these moves, is to free the circu-
lation of the blood and other fluids in all of the muscles of
the neck, removing any and all rigidity, contraction of mus-
cles, etc.
PLATE NO. III.
Place the hand under the neck, fingers ending near mas-
toid process of Occipital on opposite side, other hand under
chim of patient; pull easily, firmly and steadily in a direct line
lengthwise until you perceive that the body is moved enough
to move the feet of the patient, and, holding the hands and
body taut, at the same time turning the head on toward
finger ends of hand on back of head, pressing moderately with
finger ends, and before slackening hold turn head till straight
with body; then let go. Change the hands and repeat same
process on opposite side of head. This, you perceive,
stretches the neck muscles, and cervical vertebrae as well,
thoroughly.
The stretching of the spine is done as follows: An assist-
ant takes hold of the feet, and the operator takes hold of
the patient under, or by the arms or wrists, and gentle and
steady extension is made. If patient lies on face, a second
assistant may be of service in adjusting spine for any devia-
tions found, such as curvature, contracted muscles along
spine, atrophied, shrunken or affected muscular structure.
t
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 3
This treatment is greatly beneficial in all spinal affections, in
a large variety of pains, lameness, rheumatic or neuralgic,
Sciatica, lumbago, etc. It relieves spinal congestion in cere-
bro-spinal meningitis. The stretching of the spinal cord will
be advisable for a great many affections, and properly per-
formed, frequently produces the most marvelous results im–
aginable. Lameness that has existed for years frequently
yields at once. Remember that the important thing to do is to
take off the pressure. Freedom's holy influence blesses man-
kind physically, as well as morally, spiritually. “Freedom!”
PLATE IV. g
With the tips of the fingers of both hands placed near the
cervical vertebrae, hands at the sides of the neck, pressing
gently against the neck with ends of the fingers, move the
hands rapidly in such a way as to move the muscles of the
side and back of the neck upwards, downwards and sidewise,
vibrating, for several successive moves. -
PLATE. V.
Place the fingers (one or more) at the angle of the jaw;
have the patient open the mouth widely; at the instant the
mouth is opened draw the fingers up firmly to the side of the
head, back of the ear, stretching the skin and adjacent and
subjacent tissues at the same time; and as the patient closes
the mouth, loosen the pressure of the fingers. Do this two
or three times, being careful not to produce pain by holding
the fingers in position as the jaw is closing.
PLATES VI.a AND VI.b.
The ear movement is made as follows: Place the end of
the forefinger palmar surface on the Tragus (the little
protuberance just below and in front of the meatus-auditorius
externus), the ear being held between first and second fingers;
move them quite vigorously up and down several times, then
press them backwards with a steady but rather sudden jerk,
and revolve the integument with the whole ear several times.
4. OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PLATE VII.
Place the fingers, the pulps of them, on the temples, and,
with an up and down or rotary movement, vibrate in and over
and around in all directions on the temples for several quick,
successive movements, and at the same time dropping the
thumbs on the forehead and vibrating them over every part
of it, upwards and downwards.
PLATE VIII.
This movement is made by placing the palmer portion of
the thumbs on either side of the nose, pulling them upwards
and outwards over the eyebrows across the supraorbital notch
two or three times, with moderate pressure.
PLATE IX.a
Put the thumb on one side of the nose, fingers on other
side, compress slightly, and move them up and down the
length of nose, pulling skin at the same time, moving quite
rapidly for several successive moves. Then—
PLATE IX.b
Put thumb and index finger of either hand on papillae
lachrymale at inner canthus of eyes, squeeze gently, then, fin-
ger and thumb in position, gently push them down to the
sides of the nose with a sudden push, being careful to hold
them together so as not to spread out and run them into the
eyes. Two or three vigorous motions should be made.
PLATE X.
This move is made by placing the thumbs on either side
of the alae of the nose, and using pressure on the malar bone,
letting the thumbs slide downwards and outwards on the
under edge of the malar processes of the superior maxillary
bones. Repeat the movements two or more times.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 5
PLATE XI.
Introduce the forefinger of each hand into the nostrils
and place the thumbs on outside; press them together, then
pull nostrils outward (straight), stretching moderately so as
to dilate the sphincter alae. This is one of the treatments for
catarrh. -
PLATE XII.
The movements of the muscles of the neck are shown in
this plate, and being important, it is essential that they be well
understood. This movement, or the movements, are made
by standing at the side of the patient, the operator placing
the hand on the forehead of the patient, the other hand on the
side of the neck, fingers close to the cervical vertebrae, but not
beyond the vertebrae of the side of the neck the hand is placed,
the fingers forming a gentle curve, and the tips pressing
evenly and vertically on neck; and now, with a rolling motion
of the head, done by the use of the hand of the operator, on
forehead, pushing forehead from him, and at the same time
pulling the other hand toward himself, the operator being
careful not to let the fingers slip over the skin, but pulling the
skin and deeper structures with the fingers, using sufficient
pressure to do so, and yet not hard enough to be painful or
uncomfortable to the patient. The hand should course up
and down on the neck, being particular to manipulate all of
the side of the neck with that sort of a motion; then change
sides of table ; get around on the other side and go through
the same process as on side left. The moves should cover
every portion of the neck, and should be thoroughly done so
as to reduce all of the rigidity that exists in the neck muscles
at One sitting, if possible.
PLATE XIII.
THE RAISING OF THE CLAVICLEs.
Standing at the side of the patient, place the arm of
patient at the side of the body, flexed at elbow, catch hold of
6 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
arm at elbow with hand, right arm of patient with right arm
of operator, push the arm upwards gently. This pushes the
clavicle upwards, and away from the first rib somewhat; now
place the fingers of the other hand between the neck and
clavicle, gently pull it outwards and at the same time raise the
arm up to a level with the shoulder, keeping it on the level
with the body, sliding it up on the table to that height; then
let go with both hands, as you have the clavicle sufficiently
raised for one time. This is the manner of raising the clavicle
while patient is lying on the back of the operating table.
PLATES XIV.a AND XIV.b.
THE MOVEMENT OF THE ARM WHILE THE PATIENT LIES
ON THE TABLE AND ON THE SIDE.
Standing at the side of the table, patient lying with face
toward operator, relaxing as much as possible every muscle
in the body, the patient is taken hold of by the operator, by
the wrist, the fleshy part of the wrist next to the palmer sur-
face of the operator, the forefinger extending between the
thumb and forefinger of the patient, which gives secure and
easy control of the movements to be made by the operator.
The hand of the operator now should be placed with the
fingers somewhat gently curved, the pulps of the fingers near
the spinous processes of the dorsal region, beginning midway
between scapulae and on the side of spines next to operator,
keeping patient on the side, leaning a little from the operator,
close to edge of the operating table, and the operation should
be at the side of the table, pretty nearly opposite the patient’s
shoulders, with foot extended beyond the head of the table,
and the other foot placed so as to brace the body firmly and
comfortably. Now extend the arm upward loosely to the
side of the head, trying its natural position to the side of the
head without straining, having hold of hand or hand and
wrist as aforementioned, and the hand as before stated near
spines of dorsal vertebrae; pressing gently two moves are made
at once, simultaneously—the arm is extended, and at the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 7
same moment there is sudden pressure made in the back,
then the hand on the back should be firmly held in place
while the patient's elbow is bent, flexed, upon itself, and sud-
denly brought back, with the hand closed around the wrist,
to the side, over the arm of the operator (see Plate XIV.b)
with a sudden movement. This sort of a movement is to be
repeated a number of times; the operator moving the fingers
down the side of the dorsal vertebrae, an inch Or two at a time,
so as to cover all the space in the different moves as far down
the back as the tenth or twelfth dorsal vertebra. This may be
repeated two or three times. This should be done on both
sides the same way. This constitutes all of the dorsal treat-
ment from the arm movement. The reader will not confound
this movement with other dorsal treatments, remembering
that this is the arm movement on the table for the back treat-
ment. This move is an important one, and should be thor-
oughly understood, for upon the right kind of execution of it
depends important results. These movements will be often
referred to in the body of this work.
PLATE XV.
NECK MOVEMENT.
Patient lying on the back, the operator places his hand
under neck, finger ends on opposite side of cervical vertebrae,
pressing gently on muscular structure, and holding fingers
in that position, with other hand on the forehead of the
patient, rotates it from him, toward ends of fingers of hand
under neck, thus pushing muscles away from their moorings,
as it were, continuing this process from base of skull clear
down the cervical vertebrae to the shoulders, or first dorsal
vertebra. This is to be done on both sides of the neck,
changing hands, of course. Notice position in this plate.
PLATE XVI.
For PAINS IN THE BACK, DIARRHOEA, ETC.
The patient being seated on a stool, the operator, seated
behind on another stool, places hands under arms of patient
8 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
in such a manner as to include the shoulders, and placing the
knees on either side of the spinous processes, gently draws the
shoulders backward, and rolls the body of patient either way,
using his knees as pivotal points against sides of spines, in the
lumbar region, gradually pulling body upward as the body of
operator is inclined backward. This stimulates the nervous
system in that region and stretches the lumbar muscles, takes
off the pressure, and relieves distress. This move may be
utilized in the treatment of diarrhoea, flux, kidney troubles,
by placing the knees in the proper position on the sides of
vertebrae, in lower dorsal and lumbar region. This will be
fully explained elsewhere in this book.
PLATES XVII. AND XVIII.
THE MANIPULATION OF THE HIP JoſNT.
The patient lying on the back, the operator takes hold
of the ankle, flexes the leg, presses it against or toward the
abdomen, rotates it to ascertain whether the articulation is
normal, adducting and abducting it as well as flexing and
extending it. Then hold the leg at the knee in either one of
the methods desired, flex the thigh up on or toward the abdo-
men, placing the fingers of the other hand just above the
sacroiliac junction, pressing firmly with the ends of the
fingers, and rotate the knee outward, downward and back-
ward, repeating this process several times, bringing the
fingers down a line half way between the ischium and the
great trochanter, following the course of the great sciatic
nerve as nearly as possible. The pressure may be modified
according to effect desired. The various methods of holding
the leg may be seen in the plates. The various methods of
reducing luxations of the hip joint, described in books on the
Science of surgery, are familiar to surgeons, and, being duly
explained in this book, need not be mentioned here. But the
adduction and abduction are frequently used in the various
muscular contractures in the hips and thighs which cause
pain, rheumatism and kindred affections, such as neuralgia,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 9
varicose veins, ulcers, etc., that will not down of their own
accord, but will recover if the proper manipulations of the
hip joint are made. We have other movements of the
hips that demand our special attention.
PLATE XIX.
The patient lying on the back, the operator should take
hold of the ankle, placing the other hand below the knee;
flex the leg upon the thigh and press the thigh well toward
the abdomen; raise the foot a little, and press the thigh fur-
ther toward the abdomen, and while thus taut, hold it quite
firmly with the hand just below the knee, and with the hand
holding the ankle move the foot from the other leg, describ-
ing about an eighth of a circle, moving it backward and
forward a few times; this vibrates the hip and knee joints.
PLATE XX.
With the hand holding the ankle, and the other one
holding the leg below the knee joint, and the leg flexed on the
thigh, and the thigh on the abdomen, and held there firmly,
pass the hand from below the knee above the knee, as in
Plate XVII., and gently push the knee toward its fellow
over the other thigh, at the same time bringing the ankle
outward, and as the leg is brought to a straight line letting
the hand above the knee come down on it as it comes to a
level with the other limb. This last move should be made in
a quick and rotary manner, coming down suddenly with the
leg on the table.
- PLATE XXI.
This plate is the finishing of Plate XX. This manipula-
tion should be gone through with two or three times each
treatment.
PLATE XXII.
The stretching of the adductor muscles is done in the
following manner: Take hold of the ankle with one hand,
flex the leg upon the thigh, turn knee outward, foot at right
IO OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
angles with other leg, knee pressed down with other hand,
the hand above the knee, pressing firmly and steadily, contin-
uously, while the hand holding the ankle draws the leg down
with a quick jerk to a straight line, and the forefingers of the
other hand pressing against the side of the leg thus extended
So as to suddenly go against the side of the leg as it stops,
with a sudden stop. This gently jerks the hip joint, as well
as the knee joint, with a slight shock. -
PLATE XXIII.
This plate shows the conclusion of Plate XXII. very
perfectly, with the hand beside the leg, and just above the
knee.
PLATE XXIV.
VARIcos E. VEINs. VARIcose ULCER TREATMENT.
Place patient on the back, on operating table, take hold
of the leg just below the knee, flex the leg on the thigh, and
with the other hand take hold of the thigh about two inches
below the bend of the hip joint, fingers about the middle of
the front of thigh, fingers forming a gentle curve, gently
grasping the muscular structure; hold firmly and at the same
time flex the thigh more against the abdomen, directing the
knee toward the opposite shoulder of the patient in a slightly
outward circular rotary movement, and at the same instant
squeeze the fingers down on and inclosing the front part of
thigh and pulling the elbow slightly backward and the wrist
with an outward, backward, circular move, repeating these
moves several times. This is for the purpose of freeing the
veins in that region, especially the Saphenous, which empties
the blood from the deeper veins of the thigh into the femoral
vein. The closure of this vein (saphenous) causes that con-
dition called varicose veins of the leg.
PLATE XXV.
VARIcos E. VEIN TREATMENT CONTINUED.
Letting the foot rest on the table, knee at right angle,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I I
patient on the back, take hold of the side of knee with one
hand, the other hand with fingers slightly curved around on
and under inside of the muscles low down on thigh, pull the
ends of fingers against the muscles and at the same time push
the leg and knee inward toward other leg, carefully moving
all the muscles of the inside of the thigh as far up as the
adductor brevis, and then the move as shown in Plate XXIV.
may be repeated in the treatment. This is the most important
movement in the treatment for varicose veins, for stoppage
of the blood in the deeper veins and the saphenous vein means
trouble below in leg.
PLATE XXVI.
A FURTHER TREATMENT OF THE LIMB to FREE THE VENOUS
CIRCULATION, WARM THE FEET AND REMOVE
OBSTRUCTIONS TO RETURN CIRCULATION.
The patient lying on the back, catch hold of the ankle,
other hand placing thumb resting on tibia about the insertion
of quadriceps extensor muscle, fingers of the hand under head
and back of fibula, grasping that bone, using some compres–
sion; flex the leg on the thigh several times, bring considera-
ble pressure to bear each time, and lower the fingers into the
posterior peroneal space, using the leg as a lever to Squeeze
the muscular tissue and deeper structures in that region,
extending and flexing the leg repeatedly. This is an excel-
lent move to aid the return circulation of the fluids.
PLATE XXVII.
THE METHOD Used to WARM THE FEET.
The patient lying on the back, take hold of the ankle
with one hand, place the other hand above the knee on the
lower end of thigh, raise the leg with hand holding ankle,
press firmly with other hand above knee, stretching all of the
back muscles of the leg. Let the knee bend a little, and bring
the pressure against the thigh with other hand suddenly,
though gently, several times, and the feet warm up as if by
magic. A still better way to increase the circulation of the
I 2 OSTEOPATHY II.LUSTRATED.
blood in the leg and foot is to place the leg on the shoulder,
lock both hands around the thigh just above the knee, mov-
ing up so as to let the leg flex at the knee, and spring the
hands gently towards operator, bringing the leg straight with
a sudden jerk—not strong, but easily, as prudence may dic-
tate in each given case. This move may be made several
times at one sitting, and no treatment will bring better results
for cold feet. It will be referred to frequently for various
other affections. -
PLATE XXVIII.
This move should not be ignored, for it has its uses, and
is frequently needed. The operator should take hold of the
tendo achilles with one hand, holding it in such a manner as
that the ankle may be firmly fixed, catching hold of the foot
with the other hand, more nearly or around the toes, placing
his shoulder or chest against the inner side of the forearm to
steady his moves; now gently push the toes and metatarsal
bones toward the front part of the tibia, pulling firmly in
heel, counterbalancing the pressure made by the other hand.
This stretches the muscular fibers of the back of the leg and
lengthens them, equalizing the muscular strength of all the
muscles of the leg. While the hands are thus holding the
foot, rotation may be made to adjust any displacements of
bones existing in the foot or ankle.
PLATE XXIX.
OUTSIDE OF LEG AND THIGH TREATMENT.
Place the patient on the back, flex the leg opposite,
take hold of the knee, inside of opposite side of patient (to
operator), and pressing knee outward, pulling inward with
hand holding muscles of thigh, following course of sciatic
nerve—that is, half way between the ischium and the great
trochanter, pulling the muscles quite firmly, going over the
parts two or more times. This treatment not only frees the
Imuscular tissue on the outside of the thigh, but stretches the
muscles on the inside of thigh, and in cases of Sciatica or rheu-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I3
matism, myalgia or diseases resulting from contracted mus-
cles and sluggish circulation in that part of the body, is what
should be done.
PLATE XXX.
For THE ExPANSION OF THE CHEST, RELIEVING MANY
AFFECTIONS OF THE VISCERA IN CHEST.
The patient lying on the back, two persons, one on each
side of table, take hold of the wrist of patient, with the other
hands placed near the sides of spinous processes, pressing
firmly, beginning about the first dorsal vertebrae (each oper-
ator on his own side of the body next to him), with the arm
of patient stretched strongly upwards and outward, as
well as backwards and downwards, using the arms as levers
and the ends of fingers as fulcrums, and at the same time hav-
ing the patient inhale deeply; the arms are returned to the
sides of patient with a sudden push and down on table to side
of patient. This process should be repeated, moving the
hand of operator down spine an inch or two each time the
operation is repeated, going down as low as the tenth dorsal
vertebra. The angles may vary from a right angle to a ver-
tical, pulling up to the side of the head. If there is no assist-
ant, one operator may treat one side at a time. This is a most
excellent way to expend the chest, and the patient invariably
feels better. Care should be exercised in all the moves made,
and due regard to the comfort of the patient. The various
manipulations should be made with the view to benefit, and,
not to exhibit skill simply for the sake of praise as a mechanic,
15ut for the good of the one operated upon. Disgrace always
follows an awkward manipulator; justly, too. -
PLATE XXXI.
This plate represents the arm and Scapular movement,
and comes in the general treatment, and by it the Scapula is
moved, raised from its moorings, and the pectoral muscles,
deltoid, coraco-brachialis, teres major and minor, latissimus
dorsi, trapezius, supra- and sub-scapular muscles, stretching .
I4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
muscular fiber and aiding in promoting free circulation of the
blood and other fluids in muscles and tissue involved in them.
The patient lying on the side, the operator takes hold of the
elbow with one hand, and puts the end of his fingers of the
other hand at the upper and posterior border of the scapula,
pushes the elbow backward, and edging the fingers of the
other hand under the edge of the scapula, moving fingers
downward at each move of the elbow backwards, until lower
edge of Scapula is reached.
PLATE XXXII.
STRETCHING THE DIAPHRAGM.
Place the patient on the back on a table, hands down to
the sides, limp, relaxed; the operator, standing at the head of
the patient, reaches arms down to the lower edge of the chest,
in front and on either side of sternum, placing fingers of both
hands at the junction of ribs and abdomen, as if to take hold of
ribs, and while holding there require the patient to take a deep
inspiration, expanding and drawing up the chest as well as the
abdominal muscles; then have patient let go—that is, cease to
hold—suddenly (this relaxes all of the muscles made taut by
the inhalation), and just at that instant put the ends of the
fingers under lower edge of ribs and pull steadily upwards and
outwards, using moderate strength. This surely does the
work effectually. It is a means of overcoming much of the
constriction around the waist caused by heavy skirts in
females, and tight lacing of former years (of course, we have
no tight lacing now!), and freeing the lower tension and con-
striction caused by contracted abdominal muscles.
PLATE XXXIII.
TREATMENT OF THE LIVER,
The patient should be in a recumbent position, lying on
the back, a little inclined to the left side, the operator on the
left side of patient, right hand with fingers somewhat curved,
ends placed on right side of spinous processes between the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I5
sixth and the tenth dorsal vertebra, with left hand (the heel
of it) or the ends of fingers placed on abdomen at or under
edge of the ribs on right side of patient, and while pulling
with the right hand, he presses ends of fingers of left hand
against liver, circling the entire edge of that side of the body,
having regard to the susceptibility of the patient as regards
pressure. The kneading of the liver should be done gently,
but thoroughly.
PLATE XXXIV.
TREATMENT FOR CONSTIPATION.
After the liver has been treated as directed in Plate
XXXIII., while the right hand is in position as shown in that
plate, and the patient on the back, let the operator place the
fingers of the left hand on the left side of the abdomen, down
in the region of the sigmoid flexure, pressing gently with the
fingers, and at the same time pull gently with the right hand
against the right side in the region of the liver, moving the
fingers of the left hand upwards, along the course of the
descending colon, pressing at short intervals as the other hand
is drawing against the side and liver.
PLATE XXXV.
This plate shows the manner of percussion of the abdomen
with the finger ends all gathered in a bunch, each hand. The
Object of this treatment is to arouse peristalsis of the intest-
ines; and it often does it while patient is receiving it to that
of desire to empty the bowels at once. The patient lying on
the back, abdominal muscles relaxed, begin with one hand
at the iliocaecal valve region of the abdomen, begin the tap-
ping and alternate the taps with the ends of the fingers, up,
ascending colon to the hepatic flexure, then across abdomen
to splenic flexure, thence down descending colon to sigmoid
flexure. Repeat this process the same way several times, not
tapping heavily, and your efforts will be crowned with satis-
factory success for constipation; but the other methods used
for constipation should not be neglected, remembering all the
I6 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
time that the hepatic secretion, called bile, is an irritant that
stimluates the mucous membrane of the intestinal tract, and
is set in motion and action through the splanchnic nervous
system. The next number of our plates represent another
step in the manipulation of the abdomen that is very effica-
cious in relieving constipation, peristalsis, etc.
PLATE XXXVI.
The patient lying on the back, the operator places one
hand, spread out and covering as much of the abdomen as one
hand will, placing the other hand on his own, over abdomen of
patient, using gentle pressure rotates from left to right slowly
and firmly for several moments, then disengages his hands and
goes through a process of kneading for a little time; then
repeat the rotary process and the percussing (tapping) process.
These measures should be applied at least every other day to
insure satisfactory results in cases of chronic constipation.
There are other manipulations sometimes necessary in the
cure of constipation that will receive attention at the proper
place in this book.
PLATE XXXVII.
THROAT TREATMENT For CATARRH.
The patient, either lying on the back or sitting up on a
chair or stool, head inclined backward, mouth wide open, the
finger of the operator is put into the mouth just behind the
last upper molar tooth, palm of finger looking forward; begins
by gentle pressure at that place, and follows posterior border
of soft palate across to opposite side, and back to place of
beginning, not pressing too hard, only moderately. This
stimulates the palatine nerve filaments and aids in removing
venous stasis, the direct cause of the condition resulting there-
from, called catarrh. This should be done three times a
week, and should be the finishing-up treatment each time the
general treatment is given for catarrh. Care should be exer-
cised that bruising be avoided, as the palate is fragile. The
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 17
finger should be thoroughly cleansed, with due regard to
hygienic results, and in fastidious patients the cleansing will
be a matter of intense consideration.
PLATE XXXVIII.
DoRSUM TREATMENT.
The patient lying on the table or mattress, face down,
the operator takes hold of the patient’s foot, opposite the side
he is on, places the heel of one hand about the middle of the
back, on opposite side of spinous process, pressing firmly
downward and outward, raising the foot, drawing the whole
limb upwards and in a gentle curve, springing the back a lit-
tle beyond the comfort of the patient. The patient should
be inert, all of the muscles relaxed as regards his holding is
concerned, or stiffening himself. Each time the leg is thus
raised and sprung against the hand as the fulcrum, it should
be lowered to the table, the hand moved the width of it down
the spine, and this may be repeated several times at one sit-
ting, the patient’s head resting on side of face turned toward
operator. This tends to relax the muscles on opposite side
of body. The other side of back should be treated the same
way at the same sitting. The ease with which this treatment
is given is greatly increased by the operator getting up on
the table at the side of the patient, his foot—one of them—
placed on the mattress beside the leg of patient, the body rest-
ing on the other knee, up near the arm of patient, same side.
The results of this treatment are apparent in many patholog-
ical conditions, as will be adverted to elsewhere at various
times, as occasion requires, in this work.
PLATE XXXIX.
BACK MOVEMENT.
Operator on the side of table, standing. The patient
reclining on the couch or table, on the stomach, face down-
ward, all of the muscular system as nearly relaxed as may be,
lying near the edge of the table, next to operator. The man-
ipulator, using whichever arm most convenient, places arm
18 ostEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
underneath the limbs of patient, just above the knees, placing
the other hand about the middle of the back, finger knuckle
placed on one side of spinous processes and thumb on the
other; he presses firmly, inclining to push upwards, and at the
same time raises the limbs upward, making the back form a
gentle curve, holding it there and swinging it from side to
side a time or two, then halting on a line with the body,
increasing the pressure on the back by gently raising the
limbs a little higher, then lowering the limbs to the table.
This should be repeated several times, moving the pressure
down the back, covering the whole of the lumbar region at
one sitting. One operator may do this on reasonably light
persons without straining himself, and to great advantage of
the patient, which will be further explained elsewhere.
PLATE XL.
A CHEST AND BACK Movement.
The patient lying on the couch, face down, and face
turned from operator, the operator places the one hand on the
back of subject about the middle of dorsal region, on the
opposite side of spinous processes, heel of hand pressing on
the body close to the spines of dorsal vertebrae, in such a
position as to press muscular tissue away from their moor-
ings, then place the other hand under the axilla of opposite
arm of patient, pulling shoulder toward, and pushing with
hand on back from the line of axis of the body. This should
be done on both sides, moving hand down the back a little
each move.
PIATE XLI.
The patient lying on the stomach, perfectly relaxing the
whole system as nearly as possible, arms lying loosely to the
side or hanging off the side of table, face looking away from
Operator, the thumbs and fingers are placed on either side of
the Spinous processes, near them; the operator makes a Sud-
den, springing push downward with both hands, beginning
at upper edge of Scapulae, and at each such sudden pressure
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 39
moves down the back, stopping at the last lumbar vertebra.
If the operator is strong, the table not too high, this treat-
ment may be properly done while standing on the feet, but
where the operator is small, the patient large, it is better done,
easier and more effectually, when the operator places himself
on the table beside the patient, on his knees. This gives
more ease in producing the necessary sudden pressure; but
the hardness of these shocks must be governed by the case
treated, susceptibility of force, and effect desired.
PLATE XLII.
A LIVER AND SIDE TREATMENT.
Place the patient on a chair or stool, the operator, stand-
ing at One side, places one arm around the shoulders and neck
of patient, placing hand in front of upper chest region and
holding shoulder so as to control it, places the other arm
across front of chest, with hand to opposite side, finger ends
placed at the sides of the spines, beginning about the sixth
dorsal, and then pull the side forward (toward operator),
using the arm around neck and shoulder as an antagonizer,
pushing shoulder backward, while the other hand is pulling
forward, the fingers endeavoring to draw the muscles from
the vertebrae, as shown in the plate. This is one of the man-
ipulations used in treating the liver, colic, pleuritic and lung
affections that may be frequently utilized.
PLATE XLIII.
THE “PULL-BAcK” TREATMENT.
Place the patient on a table, lying on the side; the arm
uppermost should curve under the neck and reach back to
and catch hold of the edge of the table he is lying on, so as to
keep from being turned off of the table during the treatment.
Let operator take hold of patient’s ankle with one hand (the
one above), place the thumb and fingers of the other hand on
either side of the spinous processes about midway of the back,
pressing firmly, inclining to push upwards, pull the foot and
2O OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
leg gently backward, giving to the motion a sort of a spring,
then let it go to its normal position. Repeat this movement
Several times, moving the fingers down an inch or so at a time
as the leg is drawn backward. This move not only stimu-
lates the terminal filaments of the spinal and sympathetic
nerves, but it stretches the abdominal muscles and the anter-
ior muscles of the thigh, and can be extended on down the
thigh over the course of the great sciatic nerve, as in the
treatment for Sciatica and uterine affections mentioned else-
where, more particularly that of amenorrhea and affections
due to abnormal functions of these organs caused by capillary
congestion.
PLATE XLIV.
The patient seated on a chair or stool, the operator
standing in front, knees between operator's knees, so as to
steady the body on stool, the operator takes hold of the wrist
of patient with one hand, places the other hand and arm on
same side of patient in such a manner as to let the fingers
press on the sides of spinous processes on the side next to
operator, and up between scapulae, about the fourth or fifth
dorsal vertebra, fingers gently curved, so as to apparently
grasp the muscular tissue under skin, and now, with the arm
extended, carrying arm of patient upward, places same to the
side of the neck (of operator), straightens himself upward and
backward, stretching all of the muscles of the side of the
patient, then holding them in that position, pushes the arm
backward gently, firmly, steadily, cautiously, as far backward
as a line of the back of the head of patient; then, having a firm
hold of the wrist of patient, fingers of the other hand still in
position on the sides of spines, bends the elbow of patient at
right angles and pushes it down over arm to the side of
patient, firmly, suddenly. Repeat this move several times,
lowering the hand on the back each time the width of the fin-
gers, covering locality on the back as low down as the lower
edge of ribs. The other side should usually be treated the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2 I
same way. A moment's reflection shows the importance of
these moves in raising all of the chest, side and intercostal
muscles.
PLATE XI.V.
The patient sitting on a stool, chair, bed or bench, the
operator, standing in front, places both hands around neck,
letting fingers meet posteriorly, with ends of same somewhat
curved, pulps of ends of fingers pressing against back of neck
on either side of cervical spinous processes, with the thumbs
looking upward at the sides of the head, steadies the head
of patient, pulls gently, yet firmly with fingers, and steadying
head with hands, inclines to bend neck forward and head
backward at the same time, making gentle pressure on back
of neck, embracing vasomotor region, holding the fingers in
position for a moment, then changing fingers to other points
on neck and giving springing motions of neck. This is one
of the moves for headache, and comes in the general treat-
ment, and utilized in the treatment of many diseases, stiffness
of the muscles of the neck, neuralgia, rheumatism, spinal
affections, etc. -
PLATE XLVI.
This plate is designed to represent the continuation of
Plate XLV. Whilst the hands are holding the neck, fingers
inearly meeting at back of neck, close the hands somewhat,
raising one elbow and lowering the other, rotate the head
partially on its axis, going through that motion, raising first
one elbow, then the other, inclining to press upward at the
same time, so as to stretch the muscles on all sides of the
neck while the movements are being executed; then finish the
movement by closing the finger-ends against the sides of the
spines of the cervix, pressing so on the fingers as to pull the
muscles of the sides of the vertebrae forward, changing posi-
tions of fingers two or three times before letting the patient
go. This movement should be done with caution, so as not
22 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to dislocate the vertebrae. This.treatment will relieve much
contracture of the cervical muscles, and greatly aid in reliev-
ing congestion of the head.
PLATE XLVII.
TREATMENT OF THE MUSCLEs of BACK OF NEck.
The patient sitting up, the operator places one hand on
the forehead, the other on the back of the neck, one or more
fingers on one side of spinous processes, the thumb on the
other side, and both close up to the atloid-occipital junction,
where the finger and thumb are made to press gently—or
even strongly, as the comfort of patient seems more or less
susceptible to impression—then counterpress with other
hand against the forehead, inclining to push upward with the
thumb and fingers on neck. Lower the finger and thumb a
little and repeat movements until all of the cervical region is
gone over. This move not only stimulates the nerves in the
vasomotor region, but stretches the muscles on front and
back of the neck, aiding in removing much congestion of the
venous blood and the lymphatics, emptying them into the
large jugulars.
PLATE XLVIII.
This plate represents a neck treatment, and a method of
stretching the muscles in many cases where movement is not
so much needed as stretching the whole muscular system
upward, and at the same time controlling nerve influence as
well as arterial circulation, venous and lymphatic activity. It
is curative for many severe headaches.
The arm of the operator should be placed under the
chin, the bend of the elbow receiving the chin, and the arm
so held as not to choke the patient, the fingers and thumb Of
other hand situated on either side (both sides) of the spinous
processes of vertebrae, up close to the base of skull, rather
firmly pressed; lift chin gently with the arm, pulling upwards,
and at the same time pressing with finger and thumb against
back of neck. The head should be tilted gently backward
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 23
and forward several times, using gentle upward tilt each time.
This should be done easily, but firmly, changing the position
of thumb and fingers so as to cover all of the cervical verte-
brae at one sitting.
PLATE XLIX.
VIBRATORY Movements.-Continue D Down BACK.
The patient being seated on a stool or chair, the operator
bends head of patient forward against chest, places the ends
of the fingers of both hands close up to the edge of occiput,
just posterior to mastoid processes on either side of neck, and
with quick successive movements, holding finger ends against
the skin so as not to slip, but move the skin with the fingers;
1makes movements with ends of fingers, held steadily toward
spinous processes and back towards ears of patient, several
times rapidly; then moves ends of fingers downward, and goes
through same sort of moves, continuing this until these
moves include the muscles of back of neck down to top of
shoulders. This is a thrilling, vigorous, exhilarating treat-
ment, and aids in promoting circulation of the blood, regulat-
ing it, and stimulating recurrent nerves along side and back
of neck in all of the cervical region, and embraces the spinal
accessory as well, on either side of spine all the way— or any-
where over body.
THE VIBRATORY MOVE ON BACK MUscLEs.
The patient lying on the face, on table or mattress, the
operator, standing at the head of patient, places the tips of
fingers on either side of spinous processes, pressing on pulp-
ends of fingers moderately firm, moves them up and down the
sides of the spines, or in a vibratory manner, changing them
to different localities at short intervals, so as to frictionize all
of the muscles along the whole length of the back. This
same sort of a vibratory move may be used in various places
on the body, depending on what is indicated in the various
pathological conditions. This is a most excellent and effect-
24 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ual means of soothing the system, of increasing surface capil-
lary activity, and stimulating peripheral nerve action.
PLATE L.
This plate shows a special movement for sore throats,
catarrh, enlarged tonsils, etc. The patient lying on the back
on a bed or table, the operator, standing at the side, places
one hand on the forehead, the other across the upper part of
the chest, not letting either hand or arm rest on the patient,
but places one or two of the fingers on the opposite side of the
neck, pressing pulps of fingers against side of neck; push the
head with a rolling move over toward opposite side, and at
the same time holding the fingers steadily on the skin on the
side of the neck so as to seemingly pull the deeper tissue
toward him, then bring the head back to former position;
repeat process a number of times, placing the fingers at differ-
ent places on the side of neck at each and every turn of the
head from you. Cover all that side of the neck thereby, then
do the same on the other side of the neck. Continue moves
for several minutes.
PLATE LI.
The patient seated on a stool, the operator takes hold of
wrist with one hand, places the other forearm in axilla of
patient, extending arm and pulling up in axilla hard enough
to distinctly raise the shoulder of the patient, being careful
not to use greater strength than simply to lift the shoulder
joint slightly upward, the arm being drawn down to the side
of the patient, with the hand of the operator, as seen in the
plate. This is an excellent movement for lifting the whole
shoulder joint, including the clavicle and scapula on either
side, as well as both sides. It stretches the serrati muscles,
and all of the muscles inserted or attached to the arm, and
liberates much of the impeded circulation of venous blood in
the whole arm, aiding in the cure of many diseased and semi-
ankylosed shoulder joints. Much good may be accomplished
by this movement, which should be done on both sides.
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 25
PLATE LII.
After raising the shoulder joint, as seen in Plate LI.,
the patient sitting on a chair or stool, the operator takes hold
of the arm of patient at wrist with one hand, and with the
other hand just above the elbow, thumb above, and all of the
fingers encircling the arm, letting the finger ends rest above
external condyle of humerus, in contact with ulnar nerve as
nearly as may be where it passes around the condyle of
humerus, holding arm of patient against the body in such a
manner as that the back of arm shall rest against the body of
the operator; and now bend the arm gently backward, spring-
ing it a little, then, letting up with the springing backward
pressure, holding the arm in position against the body, with
the hand holding the wrist, roll the forearm toward the body
of the patient, describing as nearly as may be a half circle,
squeezing the fingers of the hand holding the arm above the
elbow, so as to pull all the muscles forward, and articulate the
elbow joint briskly for several successive moves at one sitting.
Then treat the other likewise. Do not fail to recognize the
fact that this move assists in freeing the muscles, the nerves,
blood vessels, etc., in that quarter of the body.
PLATE LIII.
To RAISE CLAVICLE.
The patient sitting up, the operator, standing at the side,
takes hold of wrist of patient and places the other hand at
the side of the neck, with the second finger on upper margin
of the clavicle, about half way between the two ends, the third
and fourth fingers resting on the side of the neck, and the
forefinger placed above or at the inside of clavicle, in as easy
a position as may be; now raise the arm gently, and at the
same time push the finger down between the neck and cla-
vicle, then carry the arm to the other side of neck of patient
as if to place hand on opposite shoulder, extending it some-
what, which causes the clavicle to be moved outward. This
should be repeated, and the other clavicle served in the same
26 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
way. This is one way to raise the clavicle, and not the least
important, either; and, being used in almost every general
treatment, should be done with perfect ease, and dexterously,
and need not be painfully done to the patient.
PLATE LIV.
To RAISE CHEST MUSCLEs, AND TREAT SPINE.
The patient sitting on a stool, body as near erect as may
be, the operator, standing directly behind, takes hold of the
patient at the wrist, letting thumb rest on the palm of
patient's hand, with fingers encircling patient’s wrist, one foot
placed at the side of the patient (at the side the arm is to be
manipulated), the other foot placed farther to the rear, the
thumb of the other hand placed on the side of spinous process
about the upper dorsal vertebra, on the side of processes next
to arm to be manipulated; then, being in such a position as to
be able to follow the arm to the side of patient, cause the arm
to rotate inwards, upwards and backwards, and just as the
arm is being brought over the shoulder axis, wrist about even
with top of head, the thumb, used as a fulcrum, is suddenly
pressed against the back at the side of the spine, and the arm
drawn suddenly toward the line of axis of thumb, and as Sud-
denly the thumb pressure is made, so that a sudden stop is
now made as the wrist is drawn a little beyond the posterior
border of the shoulder, and then the arm is allowed to resume
its position at the side of patient. The same move is
repeated, the operator bringing the thumb down an inch or so
at each manipulation, as aforementioned and described. Care
should be taken in this move that the circular move is adhered
to, for if the arm is drawn up to the side of patient, pain is
experienced in the shoulder joint, and care should be had not
to wrench the shoulder out of joint. This is one of the most
difficult movements to properly execute, without personal
showing—similar to the one made on the table, with arms
extended. It is an important move, for all of the intercostals
and chest muscles are involved in it, and as the arm is such an
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 27
important lever, this move becomes the more important.
This move will be very frequently referred to in the treatment
of disease.
PLATE LV.
THE KNEE CHEST ExPANSION.
The patient being seated on the stool or chair, the oper-
ator takes hold of patient by the arms (above the elbows—
hands outside of), holding arms steadily, places the knee on
the back between the scapulae, foot turned to one side so that
the side of the knee will be against the back, and not the end
of the knee, so as to produce pain; now gently pull upon the
arms, pushing with the knee as a fulcrum, having patient at
the time inhale deep inspiration, the arms being pulled
upward and backward at the time. This should be repeated
three or four times, letting the knee be moved down each
time two or more spaces of vertebrae. When it is known that
this move takes off the pressure from nearly all of the chest
muscles, the thoracic viscera, relieving many supposed incur-
able pathological conditions, its importance will be recog-
nied. Asthma is usually relieved at once by this move;
painful inspiration, pleurisy, heart troubles and many other
conditions are treated in this way. There will be frequent
references to this move in the body of this book, and its
importance will not be overlooked when tried by the
operator. > -
PLATE LVI.
SHOULDER AND NECK TREATMENT.
The patient seated on a stool or chair, the operator,
standing in front, takes hold of the wrist of the patient with
one hand, places the other hand on the shoulder of patient,
raises the arm with one hand, and with the fingers of other
hand extended, grasps the supra- and infra-Scapular region,
pushes arm upward and backward, pulling and grasping the
side, top and back of shoulder region with a gently gripping
motion, as the arm is pushed upward and backward, so as to
28 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
in several such moves embrace all that side of the neck and
shoulder; then treat the other side in the same manner, at the
same sitting. Care in making these moves stimulates the
health region of the body in such a way as that much relief
is experienced at once by the patient. -
PLATE LVII. -
RAISING CLAvici.E.—HEART TREATMENT AND GOITER.
The patient sitting up, the operator places himself as
follows: Standing beside the patient, and taking hold of the
arm at the elbow, the elbow bent, forearm flexed, and with
the other arm holding the other shoulder, and letting the fore-
arm cross the side and front of the chest to the opposite side,
he places the thumb above the clavicle, and as the arm of the
patient is drawn up by the operator, the thumb is gently
pressed behind the clavicle so as to push it outward as the
arm on that side of the body on which the clavicle is to be
raised; he now pulls the arm steadily and firmly backward and
upward, pressing against the clavicle at the same time, then
lets go arm at once. This is one of the methods of raising
the clavicle, and should be used for goiter as a first move, as
it presses the clavicle away from the large veins which carry
the blood from the head to the heart, thus aiding in relieving
the pent-up blood in the thyroid gland, that produces enlarge-
ment of that gland. This, and “a particular altitude on the
mountains of Switzerland,” produce goiter; and the Osteo-
path cures them. It requires a treatment two or three times
each week for months in some cases, but there are some cases
cured in a few treatments. The soft variety yields more
readily.
PLATE LVIII.
GOITER MANIPULATION.
Seat the patient on a stool or chair, the operator stand-
ing behind patient, both hands are placed around the neck,
letting the finger of each hand touch and be placed on the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 29
sides and posterior borders of the tumor, thumbs on or near
the temples; begin a sort of rotary motion of the head, press-
ing with the fingers on the tumor, gradually encroaching on
the tumor from behind forward, as each rotary move is made,
as shown in the plate. The clavicle should be raised previous
to beginning the pressure on tumor. Several moments
should be used in this treatment at each sitting, and treatment
should be made three times a week. While some cases are
easily reduced to normal size, there are others which require
months of steady treatment to effect. The soft goiter read-
ily yields to this sort of treatment. This movement greatly
aids in freeing stiffness of the neck muscles, freeing the pent-
up venous blood, the lymph as well, so that it cures many
troubles of the neck and throat. It is a good movement
indeed.
PLATE LIX.
DIPHTHERIA AND SORE THROAT.
The patient being seated on a stool, the operator, stand-
ing at the back, places one hand on the forehead, the other on
the side of the neck, fingers gently curved so as to grasp the
skin, and as the head is rolled toward opposite side of neck,
the hand on neck on opposite side grasps the skin up close to
the posterior angle of lower jaw, or anywhere at the side of
the neck, pulling the hand gently as the head is pushed or
turned in that direction, and then head returned to its normal
condition, face looking straight in front of body; then same
move is repeated a number of times, the fingers being placed
in different places on the neck, and so on until all of the mus-
cles of that side of the neck are thoroughly manipulated.
This sort of treatment is requisite in many diseased or con-
gested conditions of the neck, and is one of the treatments for
goiter, diphtheria, tonsilitis, croup, wry neck, headache, etc.
PLATE LX.
UPPER CHEST ExPANDER.
The patient sitting on a chair or stool, the operator,
3O OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
standing in front, holding patient's knees between his, places
hands on either side of the neck of invalid, so as that his fin-
gers press on either side of dorsal vertebrae in the scapular
region, well up to the top, the patient locking hands back of
his neck, holding tightly, but not holding elbows stiff; the
operator, pressing fingers against sides of spinous processes,
at the same time pressing the arms of patient outward, using
his own fingers as the fulcrum, and the arms of the patient as
levers, spreading his own arms so as to push the patient's
arms backward and outward at the same time, thus causing
expansion of the chest of patient. The fingers should be
placed lower as each move is made, so as to cover several
Successive localities down the dorsal region, and at the same
time pulling the hands upward and outward each move,
stretching the chest muscles thereby. The importance of
this move may be readily appreciated in all diseases of the
chest.
PLATE LXI.
A CHEST ExPANDER AND SPINAL STIMULI.
The patient seated on a stool, the operator standing
before him, the hands locked back of the neck; the operator
places the arm on one side of the neck, hand extending back-
ward, he places fingers on opposite side of spinous processes;
taking hold of the elbow of patient, pushes arm backward,
and at the same time presses against the back, so as to press
the muscles away from the spines, using considerable force,
and at the same time letting the other arm be held so as not
to displace the (his) fingers on the back—that is, manages to
steady the shoulders during these moves. The hand of the
operator is lowered a little each move that is made, to press
the muscles from spines. The importance of this move may
be readily understood in the treatment of diseases of the chest,
shoulder joint, and in asthmatic and heart affections, as well
as of the lungs.
. A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 3 I
PLATE LXII.
SPINAL CORD STRETCHER AND STIMULANT.
The patient being seated on a stool, the hands locked
and raised perpendicularly over the head, the operator, stand-
ing at the side or nearly so of patient, places his elbow through
the loop thus formed, with elbow pointing forward of patient,
puts his own hand in the locked hands of the patient, and if
the patient is heavy, brings hands up to the side of his own
neck, then steadies it there, pressing thumb and fingers on
either side of the spines on dorsum, beginning as high up as
the middle of scapulae; he now raises the arms and patient
upward, rather inclining the body backward against his fin-
gers, which are against the back. In the succession of these
moves, the fingers are to be gradually lowered each move
until the whole dorsal vertebrae are covered by the fingers,
stretching the body of the patient upward as much as may be,
regarding comfort. This movement enters into a series of
manipulations that serve to move all of the muscles of the
body and chest, both in front and rear, as well as on both
sides. It should be done carefully and dextrously, and will
be of great benefit many times. Consumptives derive great
benefit from this manipulation, as it stretches the pectoral
muscles, Serratus muscles, raises the clavicles, the intercostal
spaces, and at the same time stretches the abdominal muscles,
removing congestion of venous blood, and has a wonderfully
exhilarating effect on the whole person.
PLATE LXIII.a
CHEST, ARM AND BACK Movement.
Place patient on a chair or stool, the Operator standing
in front, takes hold of both hands around wrists, and assist-
ant standing behind patient, places thumbs or fingers on
either side of Spinous processes, well up between scapulae,
holds them at this point as the operator raises the arms of the
patient, upwards, pressing them backward by side of head, so
as to stretch the pectoral, intercostal and all of the chest mus-
32 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cles upward, and now, with a quick drawing forward of the
arms, brings both hands down in front of patient, when the
operation is repeated, the assistant moving thumbs down
spine one or two inches each time until the back is treated as
far as the tenth or twelfth vertebrae, using pressure as if
directing thumbs upward each time, raising muscles from the
spinous processes, outward as well as upward. These move-
ments relieve many chest difficulties that other means fail to
reach. Patient should take deep inspirations each move-
Inent.
PIATE LXIII.b
This plate represents the position of patient and opera-
tors of preceding plate, in the position when manipulation
begins, and when arms of patient are brought forward after
each move of raising arms above head and backward toward
assistant. - -
PLATE LXIV.
ONE TREATMENT FOR PAINS IN BACK.
The patient seated on the table, couch or chair, the oper-
ator, at the side, places one arm in front of the body so as to
embrace the shoulder of the patient between his own arm
and shoulder, taking hold of the arm—it flexed at the elbow,
So that it may be used to draw the patient upward as patient
is inclined backward. The operator now places thumb and
fingers of other hand on either side of the dorsal spines about
the fourth dorsal vertebra, placing his neck behind the neck
of patient, patient resting neck on neck of operator, and fin-
gers in place on the back, pulls patient backward and upward,
and inclining backward until the elbow of operator rests on
the table directly back of patient; then raises patient in sit-
ting posture, relaxing all holds, placing fingers on the back a
little lower, presses fingers on the back; repeats these moves
until the whole spine is thus treated, observing to draw his
own elbow toward his own side of the table, so as to give
room for the body of patient to come as low as may be to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 33
receive due pressure upward each move, as the body of patient
inclines backward. This treatment should include all of the
dorsal from the fourth clear down to the last lumbar, being
particular to control the amount of pressure on the sides of
the spinous processes according to the susceptibility of the
patient, and as the necessity demands. This treatment is
essential in many pathological conditions, and should be util-
ized when needed. -
PLATE LXV.
Same as LXIV., only the inclined position, with neck of
patient on neck of operator, showing how movement is made,
and elbow on the table.
PLATE LXVI.
This move is for stretching the pectoralis, major and
minor, coraco-brachialis, and Supra-Scapular muscles. Use-
ful in many shoulder troubles, rheumatism, paralysis, etc.
The operator, standing behind patient, places his arm directly
across the upper and front of chest, embracing the shoulder
On the side opposite the arm to be treated, so as to steady the
chest, letting the point of shoulder be fixed; extends arm to
the opposite shoulder (the one to be treated), gathering the
muscles under the patient’s arm with his own fingers, and
with his other hand holding the elbow of the patient, pulls
arm backward and upward, and at the same time counter-
pulling with the fingers under the arm with the hand placed
there, holding the muscles, stretching them with caution,
gradually increasing the stretching as the arm and muscles
become more pliable. This manipulation and the one suc-
ceeding (No. LXVII.), may be used quite frequently for many
seemingly stiff and immobile shoulder joints, to great advan-
tage, as well as for rheumatism, neuralgia, and to reinstate
normal circulation in muscles of the arm.
34 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PLATE LXVII.
The operator, standing behind the patient, takes hold of
wrist of patient with one hand, standing against the side and
back of, so as to steady the body, places other hand under
lower, outer aspect of shoulder joint, embracing with his fin-
gers the several muscles under the arm in his own grasp, pull-
ing the arm of patient directly forward and across the front
of the chest, antagonizing the hold of muscles under arm with
the hand holding the wrist. This stretches various muscles
at the side, back and under arm—serratus, teres, latissimus
dorsi, biceps, etc., and takes off the pressure, increases capil-
lary circulation and relieves pain in shoulder very often like
magic.
PLATE LXVIII.
SPINAL AFFECTIONS.
The patient seated on a moderately low stool, the oper-
ator standing in front, patient having hands locked and placed
at back of neck, the operator extends arms under those of
the patient, back, so as to let ends of fingers be placed on
either side of the dorsal vertebrae, beginning with fingers
anywhere, according to object intended in the treatment,
using such pressure as desirable, or needed to raise, and at the
same time tilt the body of the patient from side to side as the
pressure is being made on the sides of the spinous processes
by the fingers, letting the whole body be suspended as nearly
as may be, while these moves are being made. The operator
may begin with hand down as low as the sacro-lumbar verte-
brae, or anywhere between the scapulae. This treatment is
essential in many spinal affections, constipation, lung and
liver torpor, spinal irritation, backache, lumbago, amenorrhea.
The arms rest on arms of operator as these movements are
being made, and if the knees of patient are embraced between
the knees of operator, steadiness is the better maintained, and
a more complete control of patient secured. These moves
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 35
may embrace any part or all of the lower dorsal or lumbar
regions of the back.
PLATE LXIX.
ScLATICA AND LocoMotoR ATAXIA.
The patient being seated on a stool or chair, the oper-
ator places himself behind the patient, takes hold of the knee
on the one side, places other hand, with thumb and fingers—
or simply the thumb–against the side of sacrum, over sciatic
nerve, raises knee by gentle pulling of hand, while pressure is
made with thumb over sciatic nerve, in a somewhat rotary,
springing motion, aiming to use considerable pressure on
sciatic. This move may extend the whole length of sacrum
or lumbar region, or both.
PLATE LXX.
TREATMENT FOR EYE TROUBLEs.
The patient seated on a chair or lying on a couch, or in
any position the operator may elect for convenience, the edge
of upper lid is raised at the outer canthus with thumb and fin-
ger of one hand, and the index finger of the other is intro-
duced into the eye at the outer canthus, and carried as far
back as the retrotarsal fold—the posterior border of upper
eyelid; the thumb placed on outside of eyelid in juxtaposition
to the finger, and compression is made of thumb and finger
together, and a gradual stretching of the lid, pulling it from
the eyeball, and at the same time compressing granules on
inside of lid, moving finger in the eye to inner canthus—that
is, the inner edge of the eye—clear up to the side of the nose;
then, with a sudden move, take the finger out of the eye.
This is the upper eyelid treatment for granulated eyelids, and
should be done every three to five days. No lubricant should
loe used on the finger, but the fingers used in and about the
eyes should be well cleansed with good soap and water, nails
made smooth and clean, and after the above treatment patient
should bathe eyes in water, with a teaspoonful of salt to each
36 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
pint of water used. If there are granules or enlarged follicles
on inside of lower lid, introduce end of forefinger into outer
canthus so as to let palm of finger be down toward inferior
border of eye, facing the orbital plate of superior maxillary
bone, pressing finger on upper edge of that bone, carrying all
of the tissue against the curved portion of it, and pressing
somewhat firmly the tissue before the finger down on that
plate, carrying the finger to the inner canthus of the eye, and
turn palmer surface tupward as it is removed to the side of the
nose, pressing the whole surface of the inner canthus, and
on that portion called the lacus lachrymalis, coming out of
the eye quickly—not with any delay or rubbing motion. Get
away from the eye when done treating it, at once. Patient
will then bathe eyes with the Salt and water solution above
named, either warm or cold, as seems most pleasant. This
treatment should be repeated as often as once in five or eight
days. There is great benefit to be derived from this treat-
ment. It takes off the pressure of contracted lids, which
causes ulcers of the cornea, and perpetuates them, and cures
ectropium, entropium, as well as almost all other inflamma-
tions of the lids and eyeball, blepharitis-marginalis, etc. Ref-
erence will be had to this plate frequently. The two plates
represent the treatment of both eyelids, for all sorts of eye
troubles—chronic especially.
PLATE LXXI.
FLEXING KNEE ON THIGH AND THIGH ON ABDOMEN.
Patient lying on back on couch or table, operator seizes
leg just below knee and proceeds to bend limb at the knee and
thigh, doing so strongly, stretching muscles of the whole
limb, and while in that position the hip joint may be manipu-
lated with other hand and fingers, beginning on sides of lum-
bar vertebrae, as high up as desirable to liberate muscles of
that area, and proceed to treat along down the course of the
sciatic nerve, bringing the limb outward and downward each
time the fingers are pressed upon area covered by them.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 37
This is the method of moving hip joint in nearly all of the
ailments of the hip joint, and in confinement to rest the
loins and hips after parturition. It soothes, rests, stimulates,
promotes free circulation of the blood, and very often relieves
all or any of the muscles of the hip joint of pain, or the limb
from Soreness.
PLATE LXXII.
VARIOUs DoRSAM TREATMENTs.
The patient seated on a stool or chair, the operator places
hands under patient’s arms, placing his finger-tips against the
sides of the spinous processes, gently lifting the body of
patient and swaying him from side to side, using alternate
pressure each move, changing position of hands each Sway,
beginning either at sacro-lumbar junction, or anywhere along
the spine, according to effect desire. This movement is used
for many conditions of the spine and abdominal viscera.
OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES.
It is a fairly well established fact that physicians regard
the administration of drugs uncertain in their effects in the
treatment of disease. The chronic affections uncured, and by
drugs uncurable, demonstrate to a certainty the unreliability
of their action as curative agencies. The presumption that
drugs act in some mysterious manner, and have a special
affinity for diseased structure, finding their way to patho-
logical parts, unite with a particular form of diseased struc-
ture, wrest its progress, hurl it from its moorings, and leave
the parts cleansed, purified, swept and garnished, healthy, is
an untenable and untrue premise to assume, the results fail-
ing to justify. -
To assume that anybody needs anything but the normal
elements to maintain health is to distrust perfection in crea-
tion, and to regard foreign substances as curable or in any
respect compatible when diseased is to assume a theoretical
improbability, for the restoration of the normal constituents
of the body restores the balance of power caused by deficiency
of elements. Restore the elements, and health is re-estab-
lished. The freedom of the circulation of all the fluids of the
body restores vitality. -
That any one of ordinary intelligence should presume to
assert that humanity is a machine, or that any one should
compare a man to a machine, is surely not to be considered
tenable nor applicable, yet he is composed of all the ele-
ments that go to make up all the machinery in the world, but
(38)
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 39
is not a machine in any sense whatever. The comparison is
ridiculously inconsistent, to say the least of it, for he embraces
every element in nature, rising from the earth, containing
mineral, vegetable, animal, and reaching his acme in spirit-
uality—controlled by a divine mind, acted upon through a
set of cords originating in cranial centers, conducting the
divine impression to the remotest atoms in the farthest-off
locality in the various apartments of the house we live in,
called the physical body. -
That mind formed this wonderful structure, that it per-
meates every part of it, that this mind is conveyed through
tubes we call nerves, and that through these nerves super-
vision—or the mind through these nerves regulates the man-
ufacture, absorption, the assimilation, elimination, and every
chemical change necessary to the conversion of the food eaten
into the various tissues, bone, muscle, etc., is not questioned
at the present day. But to assume that the body is a mere
machine, is surely begging the question and mocking Deity.
The marvelousness of the science of the adjustment of
the system to itself, and the complete and sometimes the
almost miraculous change produced in the tissues through the
application of the principles of Osteopathy, place it in the
front ranks as the most stupendous fact of the nineteenth cen-
tury. The practitioner is often appalled to witness the re-
sults. To the Osteopath, whose eyes have seen and whose
hands have figured in producing these wonderful changes, it
is commonplace, but to the one who has thought it possible
to cure disease only through the administration of medicine,
such a result—the relief of pain, the cure of long-lasting ills—
by a simple adjustment of the system, by a slight manipulation
or move of a muscle, it becomes astonishing!
The philosophy of curing disease by this science is sim-
ple, rational, certain, safe. The human system is composed
of sixteen elements. These elements are derived from the
food eaten and the water drank, and the atmosphere that sur-
rounds him. All these various elements are manufactured
40 ostEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
, and made ready to assimilate as they pass through the various
tubes of which the whole structure of man consists, changing
from the one element to another, according to the supply and
demand in the various tubes through which the food—the
blood—passes. As the blood passes from the heart and
enters into the arteries, thence into the capillaries, certain ele-
ments are given off through the walls of the capillaries, enter-
ing the surrounding tissue, taking the place of the used-up
tissue which is drawn into the lymphatics, to be ushered into
the venoles, thence into the larger veins, mixed with the var-
ious debris, including all of the chemical constituents from the
various tissues of the body, pushed onward into the right side
of the heart, thence thrown into the lungs, to again undergo
chemical changes—to be renovated, purified, cleansed, made
over, then returned to the left side of the heart, thence to be
carried through the arteries to every part of the system. And
so on as long as life in that body lasts. The system possesses
the power, being under the control of mind, to continue this
same process every moment of time that we live. When
there are no obstructions or interference in this natural pro-
cess, health is said to exist. When every organ in the body is
performing its function, or functions in a natural way, we are
not cognizant of pain or disease; but let any interference with
the onward flow of any of the fluids of the body take place, a
change occurs—chemical change. This change results in a
disturbance of the molecules of the whole body. When the
blood does not circulate normally, we at once recognize dis-
ease-producing elements somewhere in the body, and to the
extent of the obstruction will be the result pathologically. To
make this matter easily understood, to elucidate this subject,
is the object of this book. If the reader carefully follows me
in my delineations, there will come into his mind, and he will
master the most marvelous science that the world has ever
had presented to it. To take hold of a person, adjust the sys-
tem in such a manner as to free the circulation of all of the
fluids of the body, and through that process change all of the
PLATE I.a.-First of General Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM of HEALING. 43
chemical elements from an unnatural to a natural condition,
seems incredible to the one uninformed. That this can be
done is perfectly compatible with truth. No remedial system
ever devised by man can boast of such a result. The larger
percentage of the abandoned ills of the flesh yield to this treat-
ment. There are no medicines necessary, neither does this
book recommend drugs.
We have tried the various systems claiming to possess all
there is in the healing art, demonstrated to our satisfaction
that there is a better way to relieve affliction in the way of
disease than is known by either of the medical schools, and
that this book will contain the full and complete science of
healing without drugs, and that no individual need falter to
use it according to the instructions contained herein.
The philosophy concerning this method of healing can
not be overthrown, and will be accepted wherever practiced,
and by all who desire to be cured or cure others without let or
hindrance. It needs no legislative bolstering up. It carries
with it weight of evidence of its efficacy in every trial, properly
applied. There is no harm or bad effects following a right
use of this science, if used according to the directions given in
this book. Each move or manipulation is shown and fully
explained herein, so that nothing is wanting to make this
work attractive and useful to the community adopting it, and
the physicians will soon become its warmest advocates.
Osteopathy is a term applied to a particular process of
healing wherein the bones of the human system are regarded
as, in some way, factors in producing that condition called
disease. This may be further defined by regarding the defini-
tion of the parts of the word itself, although strictly speaking,
misapplied. The word os means mouth, bone, and is a
symbol for osmium, a heavy metallic element belonging to the
platinum group. Osteo is a prefix, signifying connection
with or relating to bone, and pathos, the faculty of arousing
sympathy, emotion, passion, Suffering, feeling—disease.
The most reasonable definition of the word is, resulting from
44 OSTEOPATHIY ILLUSTRATED.
obstruction. Hence Osteopathy is a term that is used to
designate pathological conditions, caused by the interrupted
flow of the fluids of the body, or pressure due to contracted
muscle or muscles, or irritation of nerves or nerve centers,
paralyzing nerve function.
This may be better understood by stating that disease is
the result of partial or complete stasis of the fluids in general
or particular, anywhere in the body, and the result, name or
nature is wholly due to the parts or tissue involved.
That disease should result from pressure, and that a
physiological condition can be established by taking off the
pressure, seems hard to believe, after having had centuries of
instruction otherwise. Any discovery out of the ordinary
receives little attention, especially when old ideas are deeply
rooted and become a part of ourselves. To presume, in the
face of long established, time-honored methods, stereotyped
customs, that we are “weighed in the balances and found
wanting” in the real facts, starts up a feeling of resentment
in us that knows no bounds, and we are ready to rise up in our
strength, dignified manhood, and denounce it as an inter-
loper, a fraud, unworthy the consideration of intelligence, and
are ready to stamp it out of existence, were it, possible, simply
because it does not comport with our long-cherished views.
This has been the history of mankind in all of the ages past.
Humanity is the same now it always was, and any new method
or principle out of the common course of events must expect
opposition until it proves itself worthy a place in the archives
of established usages—becomes a necessity, in harmony with
general thought. Then, if truly meritorious, the new acqui-
sition takes place alongside of the great mass of material that
the world regards with complacency. That Osteopathy
should be an exception in this regard should not be presumed.
We do not anticipate miraculous transitions of mentality all
of a sudden, but we regard this step as one that is greatly in
advance, deserving of more attention, based upon stronger
claims, more easily understood, far more efficacious in results,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 45
*
decidedly more in line with reason, philosophy; and fraught
with better satisfaction than any method, or all of the means,
ever devised or used by professed Scientific men, or the var-
ious Schools, in any or all of the ages past, in relieving human-
ity of physical sufferings or pathological conditions—and that,
too, in the least harmful manner. This will be found true
after you shall have completely mastered the science and
applied it to the various and multifarious pathological states
recognized as disease. -
Whilst we are greatly obliged and truly thankful that Dr.
Gowers classified the action of the nervous system, and that
Dr. A. T. Still first promulgated to the world the possibility
of complete or partial dislocation of bone or bones producing
pain, disease, yet we are not willing to concede to either one
the honor of originating or developing the philosophy of cure
to its present standing, or application to the cure of disease.
Necessity, in this science, as in all other relationships in life,
is the mother of inventions. When it is considered that those
who assumed the premise that all diseases were curable by
the application of Osteopathic principles, it required more
than one brain to formulate and devise means or improvise
manipulations adaptable to the various pathological condi-
tions found at various times in the human system—all of them
presenting different symptoms, different pathological states,
in different parts of the body, in different climates, latitudes,
in different races, at different ages, and in different tempera-
ments, involving altogether different structures. It has
taken no little time, much thought, a fair understanding of
the system, anatomically, physiologically—with much
patience, a host of patients, labor, comparison, will-power,
mechanism, and perseverance by many minds—to demon-
strate the exact status of this science. This is, then, the
result of a combination of mental, as well as physical forces,
formulated and systematized so that it can be reasonably
explained and elucidated and applied as a means, and in most
cases of cure, that is, to say the least of it, surprising.
46 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The how it does it seems to be the hardest thing to show
the mass of people. That they should demand it—an explan-
ation and a perfect elucidation of its workings—is a greater
mystery than the science itself. They gulp down any sort of
a “bolus” from other doctors, and never for a moment think
of asking a reason; “that is medicine—we are used to it—it
physics, pukes, or relieves pain”—that is all the patient
desires. But let some one propose to relieve pain, cure dis-
ease, by a mechanical process—adjust the system to itself,
take off the pressure, or remove the cause of his ailment—he is
at once denounced as a quack, a fraud, unworthy to do busi-
iness in a civilized community; and persecuted, maligned,
insulted, prosecuted, and that, too, by the very men who, if
called upon to “give a reason for the hope (of a cure) within
them,” could not do so. We are not shooting at random
along these lines, for we know whereof we affirm, and claim
to be able to demonstrate the efficacy of the practice of Oste-
Opathy, and to know that medication, as it is understood,
practiced, applied, is not comparable in any respect with Oste-
opathy. That there is efficacy in certain elements, and cer-
tain antidotes to poisons, we hesitate not to affirm, and that
there are times when these should be used; but that there is
power in medicine to cure diseases seems altogether un-
tenable, unphilosophic, unreasonable and unnatural. Our
practice for years has proven the utter fallibility of curing
disease by the use of drugs. Elements supplied, when needed,
should be done as you would supply food, not as a medicine—
in no instance whatever.
It has taken thirty-five hundred years (since the days of
Asa) to educate the people up to the idea that medicines taken
into the system did in some way cure disease, notwithstand-
ing it is said that “Asa, when he was sick, resorted to his phy-
sician instead of to his God, and he slept with his fathers”;
and people for the very same reason have gone to BED too
EARLY in consequence of resorting to physicians. There seems
to be no let-up in that direction, and the people continue to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 47
believe that medicines are essential to the cure of their dis-
eases. To argue to the contrary seems futile. The dark pall
that broods over the world to-day, the wand that holds in
surveillance vile, and makes slaves of us all, rests in and orig-
inates from education along this mysterious pathway, and
like a weird, spectral ghost, holds enwrapped in its strong
and sinewy arms, with a deathlike embrace, every nation, race
and tribe of people.
To lift the veil, to uncover and expose to view this
mighty, time-honored custom, and with one fell stroke erase
it from the pages of history, blot it out of the memory of
man, and give it no place, and discard it as unworthy of
further consideration, to declare annihilation, to end its rav-
ages, seems herculean to say the least of it. The hardest thing
to induce mankind to do is “to repent,” to acknowledge their
wrongs. It is so easy to float with the tide that we seldom
make an effort to change our course, and the large majority
of mankind float on down the stream, out into the great
ocean of life, regardless and unmindful of how they do so.
All down the ages men have arisen who have “moved the
waters”—produced a ripple and started streams which have
influenced the direction of the current of human thought;
and these, like oases in the desert, created an interest that
lifted the race a step higher. Great reformers in all ages have
been the beacon lights that led the nations out of bondage.
The discovery of forces, the union of substances newly dis-
covered, the combination of elements unthought of before,
have evolved results that bring us to a realization of our
advancement, ascending higher and higher into a clearer
light. This has been the case in almost every department of
thought, except the restoration of our own bodies from phys-
ical ills; in this, stereotyped customs have engulfed the people
for ages. While a knowledge of the structure of the human
system has increased, its relationships with itself and the rest
of the world, yet a scientific, clear, unmistakable method of
righting our physical wrongs—in a word, curing our ills—
48 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
seems to have been sadly neglected, and in the strife to pre-
sent something new, or to discover some “fountain of life”
that would perpetuate existence, the results are confusion
worse confounded, and the question still rings in our ears,
“Is there no balm in Gilead, is there no physician there?”
After all our experience, it is quite well decided that the so-
called medicine theories are frauds. The uncertainties of
the actions of medicines are almost universally recognized.
THE PHILosophy of APPLICATION OF THESE PRINCIPLES.
The reader is wont to ask, “How can you apply Oste-
opathy to the treatment of all diseases?” The very reason that
the vendor of his “patent medicine” recommended it to the
cure of all diseases, no matter of what character or type or
stage, at once brought to mind the utter impossibility of its
application in the cure of anything. While in the instance
named there is but one thing to consider, and that is that dis-
ease is not dependent upon a supposed “materies morbi,”
that can be neutralized by a compound, or a single drug, but
upon d series of causes that ultimately culminate in impedi-
ment or obstruction of the circulation of vital and other fluids
in the body, that no compound or medicine can possibly
reach, and that can only be removed by a physical effort on
the part of self or some one else. This is the reason that
there is such a wide range of usefulness for the practice or
application of Osteopathy in the practice of the healing art.
There is scarcely a pathological condition thought of, dis-
covered to exist, or that ever will exist, wherein this science
will not be usefully and necessarily demanded. It is kalei-
doscopic in its application to the cure of diseases or patho-
logical conditions. And while we shall have occasion to
name a great many diseases, the application of the principles
represented in this book will be apparent when once applied.
There are many things that we shall never know, and we
shall often be astonished at results in our application of this
philosophy, but the end will justify the means employed, if
PLATE. I.b.-Continuation of Plate I.a.

-: * ~ * *
�
… --w---- → -+ - - -， *-º-）.-
«?
*
?
----�
*
*·
•
�|-
•w:_
�
■*
·ș« ^
«*»*ºr `.
|---w·
-&Lºa,
* ·«.
„w^•^-
·ș* * **
\º|-！ »
* * *-·
··; ·*
ºs
** .
*ș
****··ș--
.*.**...* --*·�* ** *
|-�* * * * * * * * * * ,· · * *>| ... . . . . t （h-* （ . ）,



A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 5 I
properly done, and conditions thought to be incurable will be
seen to change for the better as these principles are applied.
To even relieve and cure a few cases of acute or chronic suf-
fering would seem to justify the necessity of presenting this
book, but when this is done without doubt, and hundreds of
conditions are alike changed satisfactorily to both applicant
and manipulator, the value of the science will increase in esti-
mation, wherever known and by whomsoever utilized. It is
not a “try system,” and try again, but a reliable certainty, appli-
cable in all pathological conditions, an aid at least in amelior-
ating the ills that “flesh is heir to” in mankind. The medical
profession will soon adopt its philosophy, apply it in their
practice, and often wonder why they had not applied it long
ago. Results will satisfy all of its merit, and prejudice will
wane as investigation progresses. It only needs proof of
efficacy, and that will come by application, to convince the
medical profession of the importance of this simple method of
cure, and gain their hearty support of it.
THE ULTIMATE OR PHYSIOLOGICAL CONSTITUENTS OF THE
BODY. -
When it is known that the “blood is the life of man,” and
that it contains sixteen elements, and that these are combined
in various quantities to form the compounds of all the tissues
of the body, and that but three of these, viz.: Oxygen, nitro-
gen and hydrogen, occur in their free state, it will dawn upon
the reader that to be a proper physical being called man, these
elements must exist in the body. The formation of these
various compounds in the body begins in and is largely deriv-
able from the food eaten. The manufacture of these ele-
ments from the food is superintended and controlled by the
organic nervous system. This nervous system originates in
the head. It is distributed all over, through, in, to, and every-
where in every tissue of the body. The circulation of the
fluids of the body is under the supervision of this system of
nerves. Culminating in large numbers, and terminating at
52 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the upper and posterior part of the cervical region, they con-
stitute the so-called “vaso-motor nervous system,” and here
we are enabled to start forces that control every artery, capil-
lary and tube that convey fluid, throughout the whole physi-
cal organism, regulating even the action of the heart. This
same nervous system permeates every gland, controls the
secretion therein, superintending the combination of the
various parts of the body, so that no “schism” occurs—that
is, in a natural way. These various elements are manufac-
tured from the food eaten, and made soluble, miscible, affini-
tized by the special direction and control in every part of the
body by the sympathetic nervous system, having the sole
management of the “house we live in.”
To understand this essential department fully, thoroughly,
simplifies every effort on our part to know the process of
these unrevealed processes that are constantly going on in
our bodies, and account for the repair and waste that con-
stantly go on in this marvelous structure, denominated the
“form divine.” A system of healing, based on a knowledge
of the various constituents of which this body is composed, a
knowledge of each and every part; a knowledge of the laws
governing its every change, the combinations of these various
elements in every part of the body; the manufacture of this
and that element and their especial part to be carried to and
deposited in, so much of this and so much of that particular
element, and to form each and every part in a certain form
and maintain it in that form for “three score and ten years,”
ºis Surely an interesting subject to study. And when we un-
dertake to explain to the reader that disease exists only as a
consequence of incoordination somewhere in the system with
every other part, and to cure our ills by coordinating the var-
ious parts of the body with every other part, cures disease,
and that without drugs, we are confronted with opposition of
the fiercest character, and if we lived only two hundred years
earlier, our carcass would receive the same fate as others
have for even expressing simpler truths. Before we are
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 53
through with this subject we hope to make it so clear that
all may see it in its true light. We must understand that the
blood contains all of the elements. These elements are dis-
tributed everywhere through the arterial system.
When there are no obstructions, and the fluids of the
body everywhere circulate, the nervous systems performing
their functions normally, the changes occur naturally, and the
elimination is not interfered with, is there any reason why that
sort of a system is not healthy? But suppose undue pressure
is made somewhere, that impediment to the normal flow of
the fluids should occur, does it not stand to reason that there
would necessarily be an accumulation at that particular part;
that pressure would be at once produced right there, and if
continued, increase, and that this would involve other struc-
tures in that neighborhood, continuing to increase and
spread until there existed that condition we call congestion?
If this same thing occurred in a stream of water, and the sup-
ply from above continued, what would we call it? A flood,
wouldn't we? And suppose we raised the embankment higher,
would not our fluid (water) accumulate until it covered all
the country up to the very source of the fountain from whence
it originated? This illustration is surely simple enough to be
understood and comprehended by the simplest of observers.
To further illustrate this simple, though unknown proposi-
tion by the masses (including many so-called physicians), we
raise the curtain still higher and throw in a greater flood of
light. Suppose this accumulation is in some important blood
vessel?—what then? The accumulation would necessarily
press against the walls of the vessel untilexpansion (dilatation)
took place, and if in a vein we would call it venous congestion,
or varicosity of veins. If in an artery, we would name it
aneurism. We therefore unhesitatingly assert that almost
every pathological condition described under the various
names in all of our leading medical books is traceable to this
state (barring poisons—and these do indirectly by paralyz-
ing nerve centers, and these being unable to control mobility
54 osteoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of the parts to which they are distributed, congestion ensues,
and always in proportion to the centers involved). The im-
portance of the circulation of all of the fluids of the body, from
its introduction into the system until it passes out, can not
be too highly considered, if health be a desideratum. The
elements are held in solution in the watery fluid of the body,
and this constitutes about seventy per cent. of the whole body.
All of the inorganic compounds are held in solution in the
watery portions of the blood.
The organic constituents of the body consist of urea,
uric acid, xanthin, hypoxanthin, hippuric acid, kreatin, lactic
acid, lecithin, neurin, cerebrin, leucin, tyrosin, and choles-
terin. These substances are essential to the elaboration of
cells. We could not exist without these elements. It is a
Strange, but singular fact, that the exact proportion or equiv-
alents of these substances are maintained by supply and de-
mand, and that all these constituents are divisible into proxi-
mate elements, principles and ferments, and that they are
normally prepared in the body by the glandular system.
Hence to furnish all of these elements, to keep up the supply,
to distribute them to the various parts of the body where they
belong, to build up this and that bone or muscle, due regard
must be had to the proper adjustment of the system to itself,
so that there be no undue pressure anywhere, to interfere with
normal action of every part. The importance of these ele-
ments will become more apparent when the reader is informed
that the offices of the various parts of the body are influenced
wholly by the presence of these elements, and that the sympa-
thetic nervous system superintends the manufacture of these
chemical constituents from the material in the body itself,
received through the food or the atmosphere by inhalation or
absorption, and that the five hundred and twelve muscles of
our body would become stiffened and immobile without that
element called Kreatin. This substance contains carbon,
oxygen, hydrogen and nitrogen, chemically combined in due
proportion. Then, without Hemoglobin, there might be cir-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 55
culation of the fluids throughout the body for a time, but it
would soon be without oxygen, for oxygenation could not
take place without this substance. In order to have impulse
through the nerves we must have that element called Cerebrin,
and an essential to the communication of thought is found in
Lecithin and Phrenosin. When we consider that six of the
elements of the body are contained in Albumen, it is essential
that there be an assimilation of it, but without Tyrosin and
Leucin there would be none, nor would there be epithelial
cells; and in the elimination of dead cells it is necessary that
Xanthin be present. Cholesterin has for its office the super-
vision of the growth of young cells and the removal of old
ones. The oxygenation of the cells requires the presence of
Cystin and Sulphur, together with its preceding presence of
Hemoglobin. Protagon assists in the assimilation of albu-
men, and Inosit is necessary to the fluidization of lymph and
the flexibility of muscular tissue.
These particular and wonderful chemical constituents,
all essential to the existence of man as he is to-day, are all
evolved from the blood, and when all parts of the system are
performing their proper functions these products make up
the sum total of the physical organism, but when outside
influences are brought to bear and new compounds intro-
duced among them, untold mischief results, all due to incom-
patibility. This is the principal reason why medicines do so
much harm, and why the true physiologist so persistently op-
poses them. The long-cherished theory that some peculiar
materies morbi, acrid humors, malaria, etc., in the blood,
cause disease, has no foundation in fact, and in the light
of what we here assert and fully demonstrate, does not appear
reasonable or possible. Theories must give way to facts.
We most earnestly and respectfully assert that when every
part of our physical system is properly adjusted, so that a
perfectly free circulation of all of the fluids of the body, in the
body, exist, we have health. We further assert that no sort of
so-called Bacteria causes disease, and that they do not, nor
56 osteopathy ILLUSTRATED.
can they exist in healthy blood, but are found only in morbific,
broken-down tissue, always the result of the impediment
somewhere in the normal circulation of some or all of the
fiuids in the parts where said “bugs” are found. And we
further assert that when a proper restoration of the circulation
is brought about, the proper hygienic environments prevail,
the poisons are eliminated. To clothe, to enshroud, disease
with a mantel of mysterious morbific matter, and to theorize
on mooted opinions, give us no satisfaction.
Contrast, if you please, the time-worn repetitions of an-
tiquated theories which have been forced upon the people by
the learned doctors, with the plain, tangible, physiological
facts, illustrated and fully demonstrated, and which any one
may verify with perfect satisfaction, and you will conclude
that we have sufficient reason to present our claims, princi-
ples, practice, to the world as the most rational, satisfactory,
perfect system of healing ever devised or invented, supposed
or suggested by the learned in all of the ages past! This is no
dream, no idle speculation, no myth, no mystery, but the
plain, simple, unvarnished, heaven-born truth, the marvelous
light that is destined to bless the unborn nations now in the
womb of nature, and not only that, but lift the dark cloud
from the living habitations, where misery, disease and death
brood over them. Let the world know that something rea-
sonable, logical, true, stands with open arms to lead them out
of bondage from the agonies of disease, and place them on
freedom's side of life, to breathe without pain or distress the
free air of heaven, without drugs, and then the line of march
will begin—rejoicing will be the watchword instead of despair.
That there ever should have been such a delusion as that
held out by medical men to the afflicted that medicines cure
disease, seems appalling! That a necessity should arise for
Some foreign substance, wholly incompatible with every tis-
Sue, every element in the body, to cure disease, is altogether
unreasonable, unphilosophical. Regarding the elements that
make up the physical organism as sufficient, not only in num-
PLATE II.-Treatment of Side of Neck Muscles.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 59
ber, form, size, but properly proportioned, combined, and that
any addition thereto is a source of disturbance, confusion,
causing increased effort or chemical change, whereis the logic,
the reason, the necessity of such agencies? Especially when
the proper adjustment of the system to itself, the coordination
of every part, is restored without? It is only hypothesis, to
say the least of it, that medicines benefit or in any way sup-
ply the demand. In the large majority of instances they are
injurious. To assume that any one of the various systems
of medicine is correct, contradicts the assumption of the
claimants of all the rest. That they are all fallible places them
on a level, and to disprove the efficacy of the one disproves
them all. The world-renowned Dr. Hufeland made this re-
markable statement once in his work: “Man has two great
enemies to fight—Sickness and Doctors.” He might have
added “drugs.” The famed, the great Professor Wunderlich
wrote in 1852: “Instead of investigation, we find Empiri-
cism; instead of facts, we have theories; instead of correct con-
clusions, dogmatic rules; instead of ascertaining causes, we have
useless talk.” And Dr. Richter, in his work on “Medicine,”
said: “No science is so full of erroneous conclusions, mis-
takes, lies, dreams, as the so-called Science of Medicine!”
Many who would get well if left alone, are killed by the art of
doctors. If one sees a physician take a pen to write a pre-
Scription, he feels like saying: “I,ord, forgive him, for he
knows not what he does.” We are wont to say that had there
never been doctors, mortality, prior to a good old age, would
have been rare. We might quote authorities denouncing the
use of medicines, but the masses already know too well that
poisons kill, and that they are uncertain commodities in a
diseased stomach. -
In the course of investigation in the field of this science
we desire to say to the reader that our design in writing such
a work is not to advance theories, but to present facts, and
that what this volume contains can be relied upon as correct.
The illustrations, with the descriptions of each illustra-
6o OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
{
tion, reveal the most marvelous system of healing—or show-
ing how nature heals—ever imagined. Nothing like an elab-
oration of all of the principles and the philosophy of this
method has ever appeared in print, so that a correct under-
standing or an approach thereto could be had, and we are
assured that, when the physician or the intelligent layman
reads the pages following, a revelation of the whole science
will stare him in the face and appeal to his or her judgment as
tangible, rational, plausible, practical, applicable, correct.
We have no pusillanimous crouching nor egotistic dogmatism
to thrust; instead, plain, unvarnished delineations of great,
broad, philosophical principles which lie on the very surface
and become fuller, larger, more attractive, satisfying the more
they are studied, unfolded, learned. To assert that all of
Osteopathy is now known, seems to the thinking mind untruth,
for a science is only “a knowledge of facts,” and to say we have
all of the knowledge of all of the facts of any particular set of
agencies is to assume divine power, and it is not the province
of humanity to assume. Osteopathy, as expressed at one
time by Dr. A. T. Still, “was like a squirrel in a hole in a tree,
with its ears or the point of its tail just outside—the body was
not yet discovered.” While this was a crude way to express
it, it had some semblance of truth in it.
There have been such jargon and confusion, and so much
contradiction in undertaking to define what is claimed for
Osteopathy, that I refrain from the strife by simply defining
what it does, and how to apply it to and for the cure of dis-
ease. One remedy after another has been extolled for its
wonderful properties in the cure of disease, held mighty sway
for a brief period, and been superseded by some other sup-
posed to be more potent; and others in like manner, until the
pages of ponderous volumes have been filled with remedies
called medicines, and the brains of great and learned physi-
cians have been taxed to their utmost to learn which should
be used in the various diseases that afflict mankind. Each
particular symptom has been the suggestion to try a special
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 6I
drug, until symptoms have increased, remedies failed, and
the long list of remedies and symptoms continue to increase,
until now “the books will hardly contain” the symptoms and
the remedies prescribed for human ills. Can any one of ordi-
nary intelligence come to any other conclusion than that the
whole so-called theory of medicine is a stupendous fraud? Can
any one wonder that four years is a very limited term to learn
medicine? And when it is learned, what is there in it worthy
a rational man's consideration for one moment? Confusion,
worse confounded! Uncertainty, disappointment, confront
the practitioner of any and all of the various systems which
presume to regard medicines as essential to the cure of dis-
ease!
It would seem that enough has been said, enough exper-
ienced by the afflicted to convince any rational person that, as
medicines and the knowledge of their effects, their therapeutic
properties, become known by the various practitioners of the
various systems of medicine, a mitigation of the suffering, a
shortening of the time that disease holds sway, should be
secured; that the rate of mortality should lessen, and that the
acute affections should be cured, and chronic diseases
thwarted entirely. But all of the boasted efficacy of remedies,
glowing advertisements of cures performed, or said to have
been, have for their object the increase of the exchequer of
the advertiser, and disease, like an armed foe, stalks forth
abroad in the land, laying hold of the innocent as well as the
stalwart sinner, and, despite the dosings of potent remedies,
they soon become “food for worms.”
If we had nothing better to offer humanity than a “bundle
of lies,” our conscientiousness would compel us to relinquish
our claims as a contributor to the already overburdened effort
to do something to arrest, to delay the visitations of the
wielder of the “scythe of time,” and we would cease our
further efforts in that direction now and forever. But, having
searched the labyrinthian records adown the ages for some-
thing reasonable, something that had power to conquer, or
62 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
hold in check the “fell destroyer,” and at least give to the
world a breathing spell, and searched in vain in and among
the archives of ancient and modern lore, along the lines
where medicines have made their dark and sickening records,
I had almost concluded to abandon the effort, until, like the
“prodigal son,” “I came to myself,” found that there is in
every human being sufficient self-sustaining power, properly
coordinated, to resist all of the ills that “flesh is heir to,” if
We only knew how to set it in order when, from any cause, it
were out of order. And having learned that even this could
be done by the adjustment of the system to itself, we
renounced the uncertainty and became an enthusiast and an
advocate and practitioner of the certainty. To the individual
who has watched with bated breath to see the effects of a
dose of medicine to result favorably, and writhe in agonies
of disappointment—to see the patient die in agony that we
now could avert—is only compensated by the fact that in
teaching others the better way, we may preclude the possi-
bility of such from experiencing the same kind of disappoint-
ment, snatch the sufferer from the immediate jaws of death,
reinstate him to his former healthful condition, save a soul
from premature death and its consequences—for a time at
least. How many children are sacrificed every year by the
use of medicines, that might be saved, cured, by the applica-
tion of common-sense principles, that this book teaches? We
rejoice in the fact that we have learned how to relieve so
many so easily, quickly, that other systems utterly failed to
even benefit. These simple means may be learned by all who
can tell the difference between good and evil, and the ignor-
ance of medical men will become so manifest that all may see
it. To persecute and prosecute persons for being able to
relieve their fellow-creatures will then become a thing of the
past, and every community will demand of the practitioner a
reason for his methods of cure. • ge
In some localities, those who learn to treat disease and
cure people by this new method, will be maligned, abused,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 63
persecuted, and possibly prosecuted by the doctors. That
was the case even with the Great Teacher, the Divine
Healer—Christ. Not only did the Healer receive indignity
from the hands of the scientists, but the poor victim, as soon
as it was ascertained that he had received benefit from a
source out of the ordinary and prescribed code, shared the
same fate, if not a worse abuse. It is even so now, after a
lapse of nearly 2000 years, and the “assisters of nature,” as
they style themselves, and especially that honorable body, the
State Board of Health (?), will deny the new healer the right to
practice his art on the ground of being irregular/—for lack
of being recognized by their Code of Ethics. It is an estab-
lished fact that, whenever any man arose and advanced or
advocated a clearer idea, a clearer vision or more plausible
method of doing a thing than the rest of his fellows, an-
nounced a better way, brought it far enough forward
to demonstrate its superiority over established customs, the
scientists, the representatives of established theories and cus-
toms, began to malign, to abuse, to oppose. It is reasonable
that this should continue, for the same spirit of envy rankles
in mankind as always did, and the spirit of persecution is as
manifest now against a truth by the false as ever. It matters
not how many a poor misfortunate has suffered at the hands
of physicians, been consigned to linger with some painful
affliction through long years—the remainder of their days,
and recovered under the new regime, that jealous hatred in the
dominant Schools of healers continues to crop out, to grow,
and to reek its vituperations against the new science, and
thrust its venomous sting into its victim with a zeal worthy
only of the right. Everything that envy and hatred could
invent, every deep-laid scheme, has been used against every
worthy advancement in all of the ages past, including religion
itself, as well as the advancement in knowledge of any new
discovery made or proposed to be promulgated. That there
should be such a spirit seems so unreasonable, so irreconcil-
able to the spirit of common honesty, is the strangest phe-
64 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
nomenon imaginable, and contrary to the very interest of
humanity. There are some men whose minds are so blunted
with prejudice, the child of ignorance, and others so self-
opinionated, that nothing but the very thunderbolts of the
crack of doom can ever arouse them to a sense of justice.
Malignity stands out in every wrinkle on their venomous fea-
tures, and springs into hideous and unsightly visage in every
shade and shadow of their existence. Such people are not
the sort we expect to influence for good—they are sealed—
their place is already assigned—their sins “go beforehand”;
but to arouse to consideration the respectable of the medical
profession, and to have them lay aside their moss-covered
prejudice and investigate the character of the claims of this
new science, we heartily desire. - .
We know that if the least spark of the shimmerings
from the marvelous light of this science should cross their
benighted pathway, they can not withstand the magical
warmth of its genial rays, but will learn what it meaneth.
If we could draw the curtain aside that hides the real
facts from the people regarding the laws “regulating the prac-
tice of medicine,” so that they could perceive that, instead of
said laws protecting the people, they are simply protecting
the doctors, legalizing them in the administration of poisons,
it would throw a different light on the whole subject. What
right has any body of men to prescribe another's choice as to
what physician he or she shall employ, any more than to pre-
scribe what church he or she shall attend? What right has
the Legislature to make laws to legalize the use of poison,
under the pretense of it being a medicine? The right of
choice is the strongest principle in the whole range of human
action. The will of man as regards his own welfare is the
most sacred right in all the realms of his physical existence,
and for a law to be palmed off on the people just because a
few poison venders formulate it and lobby it through the
legislative branches of the law-making powers, to satisfy the
perverted malice of designing men, is to perpetrate upon the
Plate III.-Stretching of Neck Muscles.


A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 67
people the grandest farce conceivable or imaginable. What
do such enactments strike at? The very foundation of
human liberty; the sacred rights of man to use the gifts or in-
telligence that God has endowed him with, and the skill which
he himself has acquired. Such proceedings partake of the
very nature of the “star chamber,” whose decrees led to a
revolution and the death of a great king of England on the
scaffold. The very idea of there being such a thing—an
Executionary Board in any civilized State—a Medical Board
of Health to control and regulate a set of poison vendors, and to
lave their powers extended to ostracize everybody else who
is not competent to administer poisons to the sick! Where is
the justice in legalizing a class of people to deal out poisons
to persons simply because they are diseased? While the
masses are slow to act, slow to realize their privileges, yet we
venture to predict that when the people learn that they can
be cured without poisons introduced into their systems, the
medical Code of Ethics, as it now is, will lose its influence,
and the statute-makers will erase from its pages the disgrace-
ful, unjust class-laws now on them, and leave the people the
right of choice as to their manner or method of being treated
when sick. When it is known that sickness is largely the
result of ignorance on the part of the individual, or those hav-
ing supervision of them, the thought will turn to the educa-
tion of the masses along the lines of information in regard to
the physiology of the body, the laws that govern it, both in
health and disease, and not confide in the limited and selfish
dictations of a few designing men, denominated “Health
Boards.” Our object in writing this book is to free the mind
from every form of slavery, remove from our environments
every vestige of influence that tends to circumscribe the pow-
ers within us, start the forces that are God-given naturally,
remove all sources of irritation from the conception to the
last hour of physical life, and then we may expect a race to
come forth whose actions will harmonize with each other, and
strife and animosity be wiped out of existence.
68 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
To cure diseases without medicine to the medical pro-
fession seems unreasonable from the fact that too much stress
has been put upon the modus operandi of drugs, and the pre-
vailing belief is that unless the sick take medicine his recovery
from disease is doubtful, to say the least of it, and if he should
die without medication, and especially from some one recog-
nized by the Board of Health, the friends of the patient have
committed a crime, or an unpardonable offense. Habit has
so fixed itself on the mind of the people, and custom has so
stereotyped the habit, that it is hard to erase these long-cher-
ished usages. We hope that those who read and study this
book may see and know that medicines have no place in the
curriculum of treating the afflicted when they are said to be
sick. Wherever prejudice is laid aside, this method investi-
gated and the results compared, the decision will be on the
side of recovery without drugs. When the reader shall have
learned that diseases of the most malignant type and under
the most unfavorable circumstances yield to this method of
treatment, prejudice will begin to wane. But so “long as our
craft is in danger” (drug systems), there will be a howl. The
people, without knowing anything of the science, or the
method practiced, have been wont to associate this method
of cure with that of some of the mental methods of cure; but
to such we would remark that Osteopathy is a system of
manipulations which adjust the human system to itself, tak-
ing off the unnecessary pressure, removing obstructions
wherever present, any and every where, in or on the body,
thereby permitting the circulation of the fluids of the body to
continue uninterrupted, as is the case when the body is in a
normal state. There are no secret processes to mystify the
patients, nor mental mumbling of the so-called healer, no
secret electrical or magnetic influence that is hidden away
in the sleeves of the operator; but a simple, matter-of-fact
adjustment of the system to itself, resulting in restitution of
mental and physical forces that we recognize in health. There
are thousands already who bear testimony to the efficacy of
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 69
this most rational method of healing. We shall endeavor to
make it so clear, plain and comprehensive that any one of
ordinary intelligence may apply it to the cure of every form
and condition known as disease. The medical fraternity will
be astonished beyond measure when they shall have learned
that diseases considered incurable by any known drug, are
readily cured by the merest tyro in Osteopathy!
The domestic who administers a drug does not in any
way change the effect of it. The proper adjustment of the
system to itself, by whomsoever qualified, mentally or physi-
cally, to do so, does not change the result; and when the com-
mon people learn that diseases can be cured by this method,
and not run the risk of being killed by medicine, however
scientifically administered, is it not reasonable that they will
adopt it? Who, then, will find fault? What necessity, then,
of having “statute regulations”? Every man can relieve his
fellow-man whenever occasion demands, and no time lost
sending for a “nature-assister” called a doctor, to give medi-
cine and expect results. -
As long as the medical profession continue to hunt
“bugs” and attribute the diseases to them, advancement
will be impeded, but when it is known that healthy blood
excludes such a possibility, and that healthy blood results
from normal circulation, they will cease their search for new
bugs, or bug theories, and go to work to learn how to pro-
mote the normal circulation of the blood and other fluids of
the body—in itself causing every disease known to
mankind. The Bacteria or Germ theory of disease is now the
great fad of the nineteenth century. The Malaria theory was
twenty-five years ago the prime cause of disease in this coun-
try, and quinine the remedy. Virchow advocated the Cell
theory of disease, and asserted that in health the cells were
healthy, and in disease they were diseased. Wonderful light
this! The question as to how they got wrong was never
demonstrated, neither did any man ever discover a remedy to
right them, nor is there a man in all of the medical ranks who
7o OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
has ever dared to propose a remedy or series of remedies that
can be relied upon that will set them right when wrong—in
the way of medicine, whether mineral or vegetable. The
Germ theory is surely the shallowest idea ever advanced, yet
the whole medical profession bases its whole theory of dis-
ease on it, notwithstanding the signal failures on every hand.
To presume to claim that any theory of medicine has a
shadow of a right to claim a scientific basis would be such a
palpable contradiction of facts that no sensible one in the
ranks of any one of them would dare to assume. The truth
is, the whole so-called science is a stupendous jargon of em-
piricism, hypothesis and experimentation, changing every
one or two decades to something else, or basing their theory
of cause on something else than what to them seemed estab-
lished, and per consequence change their remedies to suit
their new theories. Now who can truthfully assert that such
a heterogeneous course has any semblance of reliability?
Every new drug added to the list of therapeutics is blazoned
forth in red ink and regarded as superior to every predecessor,
and the old ones laid on the shelf as a back number—super-
seded. What do you think of such a system? Can you
afford to rely upon it when disease lays hold on your nearest
and dearest friend, a husband, a wife, a darling child, and a
loving and beloved son or daughter? The “try systems” are
exceedingly doubtful, to say the least of them. After two
thousand years of such jargon, uncertainty, and signal fail-
ures, these very same medicine vendors boast of being the
arbiters of health in every community—the Regular Profes-
sion! These are the men who denounce as “quacks” every
system that differs from or prescribes for the sick differently
from their prescribed rules, and not only persecute, but
threaten and often do prosecute the offender, and denounce
him as being unworthy the rights of citizenship in any com-
munity, and recommend punishment and excommunication
from civilized society! Yet they must remain to deal out
their poisons to innocent, helpless victims without let or hin-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 71
drance as the arbiters of health and happiness! These are the
very men who hound Legislatures, armed with and recom-
mending proscriptive legislative enactments to “regulate the
practice of medicine,” and claim to “protect the masses from
infamous quackery,” when they are the guilty parties them-
selves. A system so rotten that it needs legal protection is
surely far gone into degeneracy, and should quietly die a
natural death. -
THE WARFARE AMONG DOCTORS STILL, EXISTS.
Doctors of the same school are frequently and almost
incessantly calumniating each other, and no matter how well
selected the remedy in a given case, if another doctor is called
he is wont to remark that “this or that would have done bet-
ter,” and the patient “would have done better had the former
doctor known his business.” Diagnosis all wrong—treat-
ment inappropriate. The family is frequently reproved for
calling “that quack.” The jealousy, ignorance, impudence
and selfishness—rivalry, that exist among doctors even of
the same school are disgraceful, but between opposite meth-
ods they are simply the culmination of premeditated hatred,
often expressed in unbecoming qualifying adjectives of intense
emphasis, reptilious in character. No other professionals
revel in such vituperative methods. Why the doctors of the
various schools do so is a mystery. If the doctor loved his
calling, not simply for the money in it, and that he tries to
get out of it, it would engender in him quite a different spirit.
To love a thing there must be implicit confidence in it; then
he will respect the object of affection, then it will not be
regarded as a “dead letter”—as a degraded and hideous, grin-
1ming skeleton, but worthy his noblest efforts to elevate it to
its highest possible sphere. - iº
The large majority of the practitioners of to-day have
absolutely no confidence in medicine, for the curative proper-
ties almost always leave him in the lurch, and their suffering
72 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
patients consoled with the idea of simply “temporary relief,”
and morphine or other sedative or pain-paralyzer admin-
istered, and the patient informed that there is “no cure for
him,” and he may content himself to bear his affliction as long
as he or she lives. The result is generally understood. It is
generally a money consideration, and the doctor aims to get
out of his suffering, deluded patient what money he can, and
then recommend him to some other one of his kith, or recom-
mend “climate” as the last resort! It is only a question of
how much he can get out of his victim in many instances, and
he crawls, snake-like, to the well-to-do, the rich, looks down
on the poor as a misfortunate, and his soul, if he possesses any,
is in his pocket, and he worships at the altar of Mammon, and
to that all of his energies are bent—the great cause of truth
and humanity, and a noble profession (that of relieving the
afflicted), ignored, everything noble, holy, and sacred tram-
pled upon. There is nothing more holy in life than to succor
humanity from affliction! What is more glorious, and what
recompense equals the gratitude that is often seen in the tear-
bedeved, quivering eye and lip of the one relieved? If all our
aims are happiness, then how happy any one should be if he
is permitted to be an instrument of inestimable good to his
fellowmen by the rendition of his best efforts in doing good to
the afflicted! Life at best has its sorrows, and if everybody
would strive to alleviate the condition of others, earth would
“blossom as the rose,” and the “New Heaven” would environ
the race!
To be happy, we must get back to first principles, and
cease to follow opinions. Then our steps will be guided by
the eternal laws of right. Here is where we would have all to
return—in the matter of health as well as regards matters of
faith; then strife will have no room to distract or mar our hap-
piness. All should be interested in this.
PLATE IV.-Vibration of Neck Muscles, Patient Recumbent.




A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 75
CAN THIS SCIENCE BE RELIED ON IN EMERGENCIESP
We would remark in the most emphatic terms, we have
found it so for five years, after having tried all other means
for Over thirty-five years. We would not have the reader to
understand that any and all methods combined are universally
successful in averting death under certain circumstances and
conditions, but we do say that, more than any other system
now in vogue, known or practiced by anybody to cure dis-
ease, Osteopathy is nearer a universal means of relief and
cure of the ills of the flesh than any other ever tried, used or
employed. I especially emphasize the necessity of recogniz-
ing the tissue elements, for without them—which make up
the body—all of the manipulations known would be ineffect-
ual in curing diseases caused by lack of them.
That there is good in something else, and many things
now in vogue, I pretend not to deny. That universality of
application to every pathological state exists only in what is
now recognized as Osteopathy, I pretend not to claim, yet the
principles that underlie all remedial agencies do exist, and
may be and are appropriate in all, there is no denying. The
methods used are sometimes at variance with results intended,
when, if the how to apply it were understood, results would be
different—generally satisfactory.
Surgery occupies an important place in the treatment
successfully of many pathological conditions, that many Oste-
opaths are wont to ignore or are wholly ignorant of. The
removal of nerve-depressing influences require the knife some-
times, and should be recommended and surely used when
mecessary. Then nature is permitted to assert itself, and the
result is a cure, when, if the operation had not been per-
formed, the case would have continued. The egotistic dog-
matist often manifests obstinate imbecility, to his or the
patient’s disadvantage. When it is fully understood that
“taking off the pressure” is the text of our discourse, and
that it is essential to a cure, the means will be used to do so
in the best manner possible. The measures recommended in
76 OSTEOPATHY II. LUSTRATED.
this work are not mere experiments, but the result of matured
thought and actual experience.
There are efforts made to write out what “Osteopathy
means” by incompetent persons—men whose limitations are
perceptibly circumscribed mentally, and the marks of defi-
ciency, intellectually, show in every line, on every page,
in every sentence; so that distrust, rather than confidence, is
created in the science, when, if intelligence had stood out
more conspicuously, Osteopathy would have, ere this, re-
ceived respectable approval, whereas now its advocacy is
regarded as questionable, simply because of its being prac-
ticed by such persons as are known to have no qualifications
along the lines of the profession practicing the healing art.
That is the most remarkable part of this science. Its appli-
cation, even automatically, surpasses in efficacy other systems
supported by the lore of ages! Yet, it is nevertheless a notor-
ious fact that there is need of proper presentation of the great
principles governing it to lift it up into the sphere of appre-
ciative individuals, so that its good may be realized by all.
Books and periodicals are being written on this subject,
and the masses will soon be in possession of the knowledge of
the grandest science discovered relating to, and having for
its object the cure of diseases, and that, too, without drugs!
whAT Is OSTEOPATHIC TREATMENTP
We mean by Osteopathic treatment: The manipulation
of the various parts of the body of the person who is afflicted
with pain or disease, so as to liberate any and all undue press-
ure, such as over-contracture of muscles, pressure on a nerve
or blood-vessel which, interfering with the normal circula-
tion, produces that condition called disease. These, we
contend, produce all of the various phenomena denominated
Pathology. Whether the pressure be due to a partial or
complete dislocation of a bone, contracture of a muscle, or
muscular fiber of one or more muscles, the object of these
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 77
manipulations is to free the system everywhere, in every part
of the body, so that perfect harmony in all parts of the body
may exist. To do this, a knowledge of the human system
is of first importance to be a successful Osteopath. Whatever
pathological condition found anywhere in the system, our
motto is, “take off the pressure,” in order to a cure. Then we
observe returning health in that body, no difference what
peculiar name given to the affection. If there is heart trou-
ble, no means relieves until the pressure is removed that pro-
duces it. Whether the intercostals are contracted, lessening
the chest capacity, or whether the clavicle be drawn down so
that pressure is made upon the neck veins, or pressure is
made upon the nerves in the neck leading directly to, and
controlling the heart's action, or interfering with the normak
control; or whether there be congestion of the lungs, pro-
ducing pressure upon the pericardium or the blood vessels—
the thing to be done, to cure, is to take off the pressure.
If there is interference of functional action of a nerve
anywhere, that condition is continued as long as there is
undue pressure on that nerve. If the muscles contract down
on any one or more of the recurrent nerves of the neck, func-
tion of that or those nerves is interfered with. If there is
headache, due to the capillary congestion, cutting off the flow
of blood through the capillaries—or in the tissue in the part,
what other thing to be done than taking off the pressure and
let the blood or fluids continue? If we have enlarged tonsils,
is it not on account of arrest of flow of the blood or other
fluids in the tonsils? That being the case, what is the indica-
tion? Remove the obstruction. We have a wry neck—the
sterno-cleido-mastoid has lost its balance—irritation of the
nerve that controls its action exists—contraction ensues, the
head is out of balance—the neck is drawn, mobility is difficult
or arrested, every muscular fiber in that muscle is crying:
Take off the pressure. The mucous membrane is all red, con-
gested, catarrh is present; pain in the frontal sinuses exists—
a thin watery exudate is present—soon it thickens—chronic
78 OSTEOPATHIY ILLUSTRATED.
coryza is the result. What is the matter now? What causes
this affection? Capillary congestion. The veins of the neck
are pressed upon. The jugulars are distended, the return
current of blood is obstructed. What is to be done? Take
off the pressure—keep it off, and your catarrh gets well.
Contraction of the muscular fibers in a muscle tightens an
aponeurosis, a tendon, a ligament—this is perhaps drawn
across a nerve; it may draw a bone partially out of its rela-
tionship, distort a number of muscles, each in turn contract-
ing its fibers, produce undue pressure on nerves, blood ves-
sels, or lymphatics; pain ensues, fluids increase in the parts,
pressure increases, pain intensifies—rheumatism ensues,
mobility ceases or is lessened, and much disturbance of the
whole system is noticeable—perhaps there is increase of tem-
perature, amounting to a fever; the trouble goes on increas-
ing, inflammation ensues, finally breaking down of the tissue
begins—suppuration closes the climax! All this in conse-
quence of abnormal pressure—which, if it had been taken off,
the whole phenomena, as portrayed, would not have been.
We go on down the neck; out of the sides of the cervical
vertebrae to nerve bundles that terminate in various muscular
fibers on the shoulder, and supply the arm and forearm, wrist
and hand with nerves—these are pressed upon by muscular
contraction—pain or paralysis ensues. What is the means
of relief now but to take off the pressure? We proceed on
down the spinal column: important and controlling influences
are met with at every step of our advance, and we find that
one of the ribs has become distorted, a vertebra is out of line,
some muscle is contracted, pain exists in and around the
heart, there is dyspepsia, the liver is torpid, cardialgia ensues
––acidity of the stomach is perceived—it becomes a common
thing to eructate acid. Now, what is the indication? Will
medicine correct the difficulty? remove the cause? adjust the
distortion? Is it reasonable to expect drugs to correct this
difficulty? What is the indication? Answer—Take off the
pressure. We pursue our examination along down the ver-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 79
tebrae, and now we are between the scapulae. Here, be-
tween the fifth and the sixth vertebra we meet with a set
of nerve filaments that seem to control (or supply influences
that control) the digestive system; regulate the secretions of
the liver, stomach, pancreas, and thereby promote order in
digesting the food, and prepare it for absorption, and con-
trol the negative forces of the so-called solar plexus. Here
we reach nerve filaments that, being stimulated by our manip-
ulations, regulate digestion, relieve pain and cure stomach
and liver troubles by restoring normal secretion in the organs
themselves. Passing on down to the eleventh dorsal verte-
bra and including the twelfth, we encounter nerve filaments
that go directly to the kidneys, control its secretive and elim-
inating powers, and restore normal action of these marvelous
and truly important organs. Descending still further, we at
Once come to plexuses of nerve filaments that actually con-
trol generation, superintending the animal portion of the
human body, and exercise influences that are the marvel of all
ages and all thought! Through these nerves we connect the
animal with the spiritual man-starting forces at or near the
Second and third lumbar vertebrae that superintend, in both
Sexes, the procreative organs, with all their marvelous conse-
quences, making life pleasurable or miserable, according to
the freedom or pressure along the lines of distribution. Our
observations continue to become interesting the farther we
go, for out of this lumbar region are nerves that go to and
superintend the various organs in the pelvic cavity, as well as
communicate through end fibers, with the brain itself, and
receive in turn directions how to regulate the restorative and
eliminative processes of the lower abdominal viscera, colon,
rectum, genitalia, etc. Here we reach the fibers of nerves
that pass on down the lower limbs, and that control muscular
action, blood supply, nutrition, elimination and circulation of
the fluids of these parts.
Thus we see that we reach the whole person through our
manipulations, exercising an influence over every part. This
8O OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
is done with a certainty that no other system of healing ever
devised by mortals can boast of. When the reader compre-
hends the fact that the nervous system controls the whole system,
a large amount of light opens up and shines forth as clear as
the sun at noon-day. The manipulations that seem so simple
at first sight, become matters of exceeding interest; his faith
enlarges, his former prejudice softens down, melts away in the
azure light of the first dawnings of a great truth that almost
produces blindness on account of its marvelous brightness.
To be able to take hold of a person and so adjust the system
to itself that diseases of all kinds are dispelled, is surely a con-
sideration that becomes peculiarly, as well as intensely, inter-
esting to contemplate. To do this without introducing drugs
into the stomach adds importance to the process. Hundreds
of cases pronounced incurable by a large number of as good
physicians as medical schools produce, and as long practice
and experiment have qualified, cured by this system of treat-
ment, increase our interest in the science, so that it becomes
a matter of no small consideration.
The results following the proper application of Oste-
opathy are constantly accumulating, and as the evidence in-
creases, the faith of the afflicted enlarges and trials are made,
so that proof becomes obtainable from various sources
supremely favorable to its adoption. The demand for the
practitioners of this science is more than the supply, and
thousands of places are offering opportunities to show their
appreciation of a system of healing their diseases without
medication from drug-doctors. The great difficulty to over-
come is the prejudice of the people whose education along
the lines of medical practice has moulded their habits into a
particular form, and investigation denied a hearing, and evi-
dence rejected, so that it is impossible to convince such until
force of circumstances compels them to do so. No new truth
is at once popular, nor does it ever find a lodgment in the
public mind at once.
Osteopathy was practiced many years before it was
PLATE V.-Angle of Jaw Movement.


* * … »
~*----



A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 83
known in the small section of the country where it was born.
Any great truth is difficult to find adherents readily. This
being sought for and demanded, will be hailed with delight
when once investigated. This is being done with wonderful
rapidity and avidity, as its effects are seen and experienced.
THE RESPIRATORY PROCESS—MECHANISM OF.
There are two stages of this process. The one is termed
inhalation, the other erhalation. The one is the receiving of
air into the lungs, and the other is expelling it. These are
both performed by the action of the chest muscles. To study
the composition of air inhaled, and the changes resulting in
the air while it is being drawn into the lungs and passing
through the air cells in the lungs, and to note its changed
condition as it passes out of the lungs, the reader is referred
to works on physiology, as a description of the physiology of
the human system is not the province of this volume. We
have to do with the mechanism of the process of respiration.
The muscular system arranged around the chest is peculiarly
adapted to this process, and by expansion and contraction
of the muscular fibers of these muscles complete control of
the quantity of atmosphere is had. The respiratory process
is performed very largely by the exercise of the will, especially
the quantity of air received in the lungs in the act of inspira-
tion. Many persons live on a limited amount of air, while
others exercise almost, if not quite, the full capacity of their
breathing apparatus.
That the proper use of all of the capacity of the breath-
ing apparatus be made, the very nature of the structure of
the human body would at once admit, but there are so many
who do not recognize the importance of breathing, that never
do use all of the lungs, it is strange that more people are not
sick than there are. Every drop of the blood that circulates
through the human body, to be healthy, must have oxygen,
and no other way being provided for oxygenation (except
84 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
through the skin) of this fluid except as it passes through the
capillaries in the lungs, it becomes a matter of vital interest
to afford opportunity to use all of the capacity provided for
breathing or inhaling the purifying material, oxygen. The
proper appreciation of this process of nature's method of
“purifying the blood” would do away with the idea of medi-
cine “purifying blood” (a thing it has no adaptation to do, and
never did nor can do), and a universal use of the proper means
provided to purify the blood would not only prevent, but
cure, many diseases that already exist. Breathing is a neces-
sity to life in the body, hence important. The part that oxy-
gen plays in the body should not be lost sight of. If there is
nothing the matter with the lungs, and a proper condition of
the muscular system that controls the action of the chest
exists, there can be no reason why all of the lungs should not
be used. The necessity of it becomes apparent when it is
understood that this is the means provided to oxygenate the
blood. How this purification is brought about, we under-
stand, is by an exchange of gases as the blood passes through
the capillaries of the lungs on the sides, through the connec-
tive tissue (in the capillaries of the lungs). The oxygen is
admitted and the carbonic-oxide is exhaled. It may be
readily seen that, in case a part of the lungs is not filled with
air, there can not take place that exchange of gases, and in
consequence, the blood that should be purified by oxygena-
tion fails to receive any oxygen, and passes back through the
pulmonary veins as impure blood, and the arterial blood that
nature designed to be pure—fitted especially to renew the
waste that is constantly going on in all parts of the body, and
needs new, pure material to supply—has to put up with this
half-purified substance, and the result is seen in poor health.
What else could be reasonably expected? The importance
of breathing should never be lost sight of. The essentiality
of pure blood should receive greater consideration than many
are wont to give it, if continued good health or a return to
health be a desideratum. From this storehouse of purified
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 85
blood every part of this complicated house we live in is
rebuilt. Every tissue is made up from the substances drawn
from the blood, and if the material from which the tissue is
made be deficient, the tissue itself must necessarily be. That
state of the blood called pure we understand to be a state
brought about by a giving out of the carbonic-oride, and the
reception of oxygen. It will be remembered that as the
blood passes through the capillaries at the ends of the arter-
ioles, certain elements are given up; these elements supply the
parts, and the residue passes on into the venoles, and the
waste material in the locality of the capillaries is converted
into fluid or gas, and passes into the lymphatics and thence
into the small tubes called venoles, to mix with the unused
elements qf the arterial blood, and this mixture is carried
back to the heart, the right side, thence thrown on into the
lungs. The poisonous elements are here rearranged, rejuve-
nated, and all this takes place as the blood passes through the
lung capillaries. In the one instance (at the ends of the
arterioles) there is a giving-out process of elements, and at the
other end (in the lung capillaries) there is a receiving, as well
as a giving-up, process. Now this blood that is made over in
the lungs, remember, is our precious material, by which we
are to be renewed and kept healthy, to be drawn from.
Nature has made this especial provision, and she accepts no
other means. She makes and keeps pure all her supplies at
all times, watching over every part of every element and tissue
in our body by a great system of nerves called the sympa-
thetic, that never slumber nor sleep while we live. To inter-
fere with her marvelous processes always results in confusion
in every department of the wonderful structure called the
human body. - -
Starting back from the lungs, this blood should contain
every element necessary to the uses intended, and if it has
these elements, perfect harmony is maintained, and no unnat-
ural changes occur in any portion of the body, but perfection
characterizes the whole process of tissue building, removal
86 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of waste material; harmony reigns, and the body exper-
iences neither pain nor disturbance. But let there be inter-
ference anywhere in the harmony of this perfect process,
changes occur, disturbance disarranges the molecular rela-
tionships of the normal elements, confusion starts, and the
order being changed, the whole system feels the shock and
the sympathy begins—disease is what we term the result. To
cure this disease we must restore the harmony.
We should begin at the starting place to restore har-
mony, and we conclude that the beginning place is in the
blood-manufacturing and purification department—the one
to first consider. It is said that “the life is in the blood,” and
if so, that fluid must contain the elements of life. These, we
have been informed by physiologists, contain sixteen ele-
ments. During the process of gestation the foetus derives
all these elements from the blood of its mother through the
foetal circulatory process. We start with a human being
already made, possessing life with all of its elements.
To maintain the normal arrangement it is a demon-
strated proposition, that, as soon as the new relationship
begins, air is the first essential to start the respiratory pro-
cess. This must be maintained during the life of the being.
The air contains properties that start expansion. It pos-
sesses substance or substances that fill spaces in the structure
of the body called lung tissue, arranged in the form of six-
sided cells, at the ends of tubes, through which air is admitted
and fills these cavities, which, it is said, number many mil-
lions; and these cells are so constructed that air passes directly
through their walls into the fluid that circulates between them
in their walls, and the changes from one state to another
ensue at once—in the capillaries. Whether this is done in
the lungs or in the skin of the body, it is essential to the puri-
fication of the blood, and the renovation of it so that the tis-
sue elements shall be in it when it starts on its mission of dis-
tribution from the lungs through the heart (its left side),
thence through the arteries into the various parts of the body.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 87
This newly-formed blood furnishes material that supplies the
glandular system, and as it circulates therein the sympathetic
nervous system directing the action of the secretory appara-
tus of the gland in such a way as to manufacture just such
material as is needed in the particular locality of the gland,
and for the uses to which it is appropriate. In the salivary
glands a secretion is directed to the mucous membrane of
the fauces, for the moistening of the food during mastication.
This is the first step in the process of use of secretion in the
digestive system, and this secretion, be it remembered, is
drawn from the blood. The next step in the preparation of
the food for digestion takes place in the stomach, and there
another sort of secretions is manufactured, and one of these
furnishes the cardiac end with the material for the mixture of
the food in that part, called peptic (manufactured by the pep-
tic glands), and the other set, called the pyloric glands, add
their secretion as the food advances toward the duodenum,
where a continuation of these pyloric glands seem to merge
into what is termed Bruner's glands. These secretions, it
will be understood, all come from the blood, and are secreted
by and through the direct supervision of the sympathetic
nervous system. The next step in the process of digestion
takes place as the emulsified material passes out of the pyloric
end of the stomach into the duodenum, through which pass-
age the pancreatic and hepatic secretions become mixed. We
are now ready to watch the process of absorption. The food,
up to this point, has been prepared by the admixture of the
various secretions for this last step in the process of entering
into blood. No elimination has occurred. The products are
held in solution—all that will be acted upon by the secretions
—and the product is now in a condition to enter the abdom-
inal lymphatic system through the walls of the small intes-
times, and thence carried through receptacles to the thoracic
duct into the general circulation—first being mixed in the
current in the subclavian vein on the left side of the upper
portion of the chest—thence on into the right side of the
. 88 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
, heart—through the right auricle, and thence through the
: right ventricle into the pulmonary artery, through which into
the lungs. We are now back to the starting-point. All of
this process has gone on through influences started in the
respiratory act by which life is constantly imparted to the
blood through orygenation in the lungs.
This dissertation explains the whole process of circula-
tion of blood and digestion, 'starting with the first forces
brought into requisition from without—orygen.
THE POSITIVE AND THE NEGATIVE FORCES IN THE HUMAN
BODY.
- It is evident that two forces exist in the body, or that
through the action of the nervous system we have two sepa-
rate and distinct influences exercised. The one conveys
influences to or toward the center, called afferent, and the
other carrying influences outward, called efferent nerves.
These terms are alike applicable to blood vessels. The two
sets of nerves are called vaso-dilators and vaso-constrictors,
originating in the bulb of the medulla oblongata. An
irritation or stimulation of the vaso-motor center in the me-
dulla, either directly, indirectly or reflexly, causes an increase of
the blood pressure. This may be done also by stimulating
the spinal cord, and by stimulating the vascular area directly
by means of altered blood. A decrease of blood pressure
may be produced by stimulation of the vaso-motor center in
the medulla, either directly, indirectly or reflexly—directly
by oxygenation; indirectly by impressions descending from
the cerebrum (e.g., as in blushing), and reflexly by stimula-
tion of the depressor nerve, and consequently dilatation of .
vessels in the splanchnic area, and producing inhibition of
the center by stimulation of other sensory nerves; by stimu-
lation of the spinal cord, possibly directly, indirectly and
reflexly; by stimulation of each vascular area directly (e. g.,
; by means of altered blood, or heat). Any increase of press-
PLATE VI.a.-Treatment of the Ears.

• • • • +
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 9I
ure from whatever cause, whether from direct changes in the
blood itself or decrease of central power, has its influence
directly or reflexly on the circulation. -
Independent of these two influences obtained through
the nervous system, we have a positive and a negative force
brought to bear, and which produce a change in the charac-
ter of the secretions according to the positive or negative
influence brought to bear by the special manipulations or
degree of pressure on a part of the body.
THE SCIENCE AS IT IS AT THE PRESENT DATE.
There have been no new nerve centers discovered, no
new tissue has been formed, and only a different way of affect-
ing the system through nerve filaments. We would not
detract one laurel from the brow of the assumed founder of
this method of healing. We can not concede to him all that
he claims, nor that every time a pathological condition is
found, “that it is the result of partial or complete disloca-
tion of a bone.” Neither do we indorse the “make-believe”
style of “setting a bone” every time some sudden “creak” is
heard in manipulations. That there are new ways of adjust-
ing luxations would be naturally expected; but not anything
new has been discovered by Dr. Still, except that the system,
through peculiar though natural manipulations, over nerve
centers and through terminal nerve filaments, should so exer-
cise or produce an influence that would cure disease, or so
change the constituents of the blood by increased circulation,
and through the increased and uninterrupted flow of the
fluids reduce the system to a normal state. This we readily
admit he has the right to claim. This is a grand one, and this
is what we are endeavoring to demonstrate to the readers of
this volume. t &
The science is as easily learned as any other method of
treatment, and the marvel of the method will somewhat mod-
ify in the minds of the people when properly explained as
92 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
'found herein. That disease should be caused by interrupted
circulation has been a known fact for long years—in fact,
since Harvey discovered that the blood circulated. The
methods of treatment, although differing from each other in
method, have had an eye to the “purification of the blood,”
but none seemed to place importance on the manipulatory
process (outside of massage, and that ignorantly performed)
as a means of scientific restoration to health. Dr. Still lays
claim to this discovery, and since a system has evolved from
this thought, and formulated manipulations have been
adopted, and some localities have been found to be more vul-
nerable than others, and each has its particular reflex influence
on others, centers, etc., the study has been, of late, to sys-
tematize the manipulations and the manner of giving them
or performing them, that certain physiological results will
follow. This has been largely accomplished, and we are
largely the “commanders of the situation” as far as disease
is concerned. That there are occasionally a bone or bones
luxated is readily conceded and adjusted, and results caused
thereby changed when adjusted is admitted, but the prin-
ciples of this science are couched in the “freedom of the circu-
lation of the blood and other fluids of the body.” This
accomplished constitutes the sum total of Osteopathy. The
blood carries in it the life and the elements which make up the
new material; and when permitted to circulate undisturbed a
normal state exists, and the nervous system being intact (that
is, free from pressure everywhere), the normal functions are
performed throughout all parts of the body, and health is the
result. To know how to properly adjust the system to itself
is to know how to cure disease of all kinds.
THE CONTROLLING INFLUENCES OF CERTAIN LOCALITIES.
That there are certain topographical centers in and on
the body that, stimulated, seem to result in wonderful
changes, the Osteopath abundantly demonstrates, goes to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 93
prove the possibility of successfully treating diseases without
drugs. We submit a few instances. There are certain local-
ities that we term vulnerable points. Take, for instance, the
cervical ganglia—the upper portion of the neck; here, when
we stimulate the terminal filaments of the vaso-motor nervous
system, there results all over the body a slowing up of the
arterial circulation of the blood. Here, between the third
and fourth cervical vertebrae, we reach filaments that send an
influence to the diaphragm, greatly influencing respiration.
And we here stimulate recurrent nerves that control the
secretion of important glands, that influence muscular and
connective tissue in the cervical regions that, left alone,
results in the various affections of the throat; and down a
little further the spinal accessory is reached, through which
the action of the trapezius and the sterno-mastoidei muscles
are supplied. From the first to the fourth dorsal we reach
important filaments that have much to do in the respiration,
inhalation and expiration processes, the treatment of asthma,
etc., and are not a small factor in treating lung troubles.
At the fourth dorsal it is said that there are nerve filaments
that begin the great splanchnic nervous system, which has so
much to do in regulating stomach troubles, and through these
nerves we reach the stomach, the liver, and in fact all of the
vessels that have to do with the negative forces in the abdom-
inal viscera—hence important to know them. The lesser
splanchnic seems to be greatly concerned in the treatment of
that condition we denominate chills, for it is here at the eighth
dorsal that our principal treatment is directed for intermit-
tents. Then, in the lumbar region, at the second vertebra,
we regulate the action of the genital organs, starting forces
that have lain, perhaps, dormant for months, and that have
yielded to no other means or treatment—correcting same in
a few hours. Through the lower lumbar and the sacral
regions we produce influences that control the pelvis and
lower limbs, regulating actions therein that result in reliev-
ing the pathological conditions that other systems fail to
94 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
affect favorably. Thus we reach the various centers through
certain topographic localities not thought of or known of
by the general practitioner. The strangest and most unac-
countable results imaginable follow these treatments, espe-
cially to those who have looked for cures through a regular
course of medication! To think of curing flux, diarrhea,
chills, asthma, and every other curable disease by the manipu-
lation of the body, stimulating certain localities, strikes the
new beholder with such astonishment that it seems incredible!
A fair trial is all that is necessary to convince the most skep-
tical of its verity, and even more marvelous results. We
intensify this with extreme emphasis. It is the greatest boon
that ever has been offered to the human race for relief and cure of
physical ills—acute or chronic—and all people must know of it!
MISPLACED APPLICATION OF OSTEOPATHY.
The tendency of the tyro in Osteopathy is to extol it
beyond measure, and endeavor to distort it out of all pro-
portion, and assign it offices not at all adaptable to its par-
ticular sphere. The limited judgment seems obscured by the
mental obtuseness of the limited intelligence of the would-be
scientific dispenser of the science, in his fruitless efforts to
apply it to pathological conditions that nothing but the resur-
rection is applicable to. The enthusiast who overestimates
his calling and presumes to imagine that his horizon is all
there is, soon becomes burdened with its limited environ-
ments, and knowing only his landmarks, fails to see the unlim-
ited resources of the great world around his little sphere, and
is sooner or later engulfed in fathomless depths, and lost in
the great labyrinthian regions that revolve around him. If
we could be convinced that we are the great cosmos, the cul-
mination of intelligence emanating from a divine mind, and
that mind permeates and controls every atom in every tissue
in the body, our thoughts would be occupied in learning how
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 95
to harmonize the various elements so that a continuance of
this harmony might be kept up.
That there is a way to approach the citadel of thought,
enwrapped in flesh and integument, experience demonstrates
to be true; for the avenues are so numerous that it would
require almost eight years to count them, one by one, eight
hours a day and fifty a minute! Every one of these avenues
have numerous terminal filaments of nerves permeating all
sides of them, and each impression made on any part of
these tubes, these nerve filaments convey it to the brain,
formulate it into an idea, and that is directed to the citadel
of thought, takes form, and brought into use as occasion
demands, carrying into execution as needed afterwards, to
continue the harmony of every other part of the body. These
thoughts thus formed, constitute the world of thought that
is conveyed through these small tubes, called nerves, that
control, direct and care for every atom that moves in the
channels of this marvelous cosmos—the human body. To
keep up the harmony throughout, and all the time, constitutes
the philosophy and the intelligence couched in the science
called Osteopathy. Wonderful discovery! This whole frame
of ours in every part is made up of marvelously constructed
tubes. Every tube, including the nerves, is controlled by the
sympathetic nervous system, and execution of the will,
whether we are cognizant of it or not, is performed by the
motor system of nerves—these being the executors of will-
power conveyed through the sympathetic nerves. Sensitive
nerves are also servants of the sympathetic, pealing forth their
howlings and complaints whenever impinged upon too
strongly. Everything acting in perfect harmony throughout
this organism of ours, life flows on like a peaceful river; but
when encroachments crowd, when interference of this har-
mony is made, confusion begins; the rallying of the forces
takes place; increased effort ensues, too much pressure
changes the forces, change of tactics occurs, chemical action
96 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ensues, and new relationships cause the whole system to Sym-
pathize, disease results—Pathology.
AN INTELLIGENT APPRECIATION OF THE SCIENCE.
That there are certain “buttons” to touch to produce
results called cures, many are disposed to believe; but that
this is fallacious, and only intended to cover up ignorance,
will be apparent to any intelligent physiologist. That cer-
tain localities are what we call vulnerable points, is conceded,
but that these control the whole organism, we are not ready
to believe. That contraction of muscular fiber pressing upon
nerves or blood vessels influences their functions, we know to
be the fact, and that nerve action takes place at their ends we
also concede, but that touching certain nerve centers, as is
claimed (a thing that is not done), produces results at their
ends, when a sufficient pressure along the lines of these nerves
is made to cut off communication, we most emphatically
repudiate as a notorious misrepresentation of the real facts.
Pressure along the course of nerves controlling certain tissue,
sufficiently hard to interfere with the function of that nerve,
produces disturbance of circulation of the fluids at the said
terminal; separation of motor and sympathetic footlets ensues,
and as a consequence, an increase of fluids takes place, press-
ure is thereby increased, and surrounding tissues are involved,
a further increase of the disturbance goes on, and thus disor-
organization, decomposition, chemical changes occur; inflam-
mation results. - - -
To endeavor to describe to the intelligent Osteopath any
particular movement to be made in all cases, would be like
the routine prescription of the country practitioner, or the
old Thomsonian physician who, when he had given his six
remedies, and patient not cured or dead, would repeat the
same. The science of this system dwells in the realm of rea-
son, and while the former patient might have been relieved
by this or the other particular move, it does not follow that
PLATE VI.b.-Ear Extension Backward.

A DRUGLEss system of HEALING. 99
the same one should be practiced on each and every other.
The movements, to the looker-on, seem exactly the same,
but there is a difference, according to the necessity of the
case, coupled with the intelligence of the operator. If there
be diphtheria in one case and erysipelas in another, the
neck muscles are manipulated seemingly alike—and necessity
in a given case may demand it, but not necessarily. The
same muscles may not be involved, and yet may be; but there
may be complications in the one not in the other, so that
in all cases it should be understood that each particular affec-
tion requires particular stress paid to it. The forces brought
into action by the various manipulations bring about wonder-
ful changes, depending largely upon the nerves involved, and
how applied. -
The specific results contemplated in all manipulations
should be to take off the pressure, so that a free flow of the
fluids through normal channels is effected—then restoration
to a normal condition universally results; normal chemical
changes go on, waste material is dissolved, eliminated, new
tissue replaces the old, nerve forces established, and in the
large majority of instances, health is restored, or started to
be restored—thus, if pressure is kept off, pathological condi-
tions cease. This state of affairs may have resisted all other
known agencies, yet this always succeeds.
ADAPTABILITY A PREREQUISITE TO SUCCESS.
Many who study the philosophy of this science may
understand it, how it ought to be applied, and yet be wholly
unfit to practice it upon any one on account of mechanical
inefficiency, awkwardness, clumsiness. Such individuals
make failures, where one less intelligent as to the understand-
ing of the science or the anatomy of the human system, its
physiology or pathological conditions, excels. Such indi-
viduals need a manipulator. Too much stress can not be
placed upon adaptability, and then a thorough course in the
IOO oSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
training department of that branch of education called move-
Iments—manipulations—and the how to apply them. Hence
applied Osteopathy means a great deal. The failures are on
account of deficiency here, in the large majority of instances,
and yet I would not undervalue a thorough knowledge of the
human system in health as well as disease.
There are certain insignificant pretenders who would
1make-believe that certain fumbling movements, twitting the
body with finger ends, have special effects, marvelous in con-
sequences; they are too insignificantly contemptible to
deserve only the mentioning to expose their ridiculousness.
Osteopathy, understood, is a great big, reasonable, Sensible,
large, ideal method of relieving suffering humanity, and not
a lilliputian, spiritualistic, massage, mental Science or Chris-
tian Science imagination. It is strictly demonstrable, compre-
hensible, rational; standing out in bold relief, unquestionably
effectual, satisfactory wherever known and properly applied.
Because ignorant pretenders use it, practice it, should be no
argument against its value, significance and worth, for what
science has not been abused by mere pretenders and unquali-
fied shysters? Who, in the learned medical ranks, has not
witnessed such in every age? We insist that intelligence and
adaptability are prerequisites to a proper application of this
science, and added to these the mechanical skill of the manipu-
lator, you have the results desired. We would further
emphasize the fact that physical strength is not altogether a
prerequisite to the application of the science of Osteopathy,
for there are many now successfully practicing this science
who are not strong physically. It is remarkable how the
strength of the operator increases as practice in the manipu-
lations is repeated. The strength seems to increase with the
practice, not only in the doctor, but in the manipulated. This
science benefits every one to whom it is applied. What other
system of healing can this be truly said of? (outside of finan-
cial considerations, and then only one side gets the benefit--
and often neither one.) The community may get rid of the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. IOI
subject, which sometimes is a source of great benefit. This
is applicable to medical action usually. Unbridled ignorance
is capable of doing much harm along lines where life is
involved, hence it is better to use a science that is harmless,
and only good comes of it.
THE PEOPLE DEMAND AN INTELLIGENT REASON FOR A
THING.
The confusion existing in the minds of pathologists, as
well as physiologists, about the blood, its circulation, how it
is formed, what it is when formed, shape and size of corpus-
cles (if there are any), seems to be as far from settlement as
the poles, and what is asserted and written about this fluid
goes to prove that it is not understood.
The nervous systems are alike little understood, hence
much of the pathology is only hypothesis, not understood,
and the whole remedial system from the first deviation from a
normal, through all the various stages of pathological
changes that end in articulo mortis, veritas. Along a course
of forty years of close and persistent observation, it has been
my lot to learn that, strictly speaking, medical knowledge is
largely surface, and that largely imaginary. The secret
Source of life has not been discovered, and the search has
been an ineffectual one, resulting in utter disappointment by
the most ardent thinkers along down the ages. All for the
reason that search has been made in the wrong direction—
not where it is, but on barren deserts, lonely valleys, blood-
curdling rocky heights, in dark caves, offensive cess-pools;
and in the mad chase found nothing but a bacteria, an inno-
cent bug, as a cause of disease, and utterly failed to find the
Source of life, or the means to sustain it. A signal and utter
failure! These searchers have sought in vain, because they
Sought in the wrong places—the causa morbi being in the
body itself—pressure, impediment in circulation, caused by
undue pressure. This question solved, and the means of
IO2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
removing it, lets in a flood of light that has never dawned
upon the medical profession up to this blessed hour. It will
be a revelation to those who open their eyes to the facts and
see. That a systematic course of manipulations by an
individual competent to make them, properly apply them to a
person diseased, so changes the whole person that disease or
pain subsides, is the hardest thing for some people to believe
of anything imaginable. Manipulations have usually been
relegated to the massagist as a sort of rubbing process, Serv-
ing as an adjuvant in the cure of diseases—a sort of accom-
paniment of medication, to increase its action somehow or
other, and to either amuse or in some manner aid in amelior-
ating the condition, neither understood by the doctor nor the
manipulator, but applied as a sort of excuse for doing somc-
thing to satisfy the patient. The facts are, much has been
done that way to suffering humanity, and all of the various
so-called means and remedies used to cure the sick have been
suppositions, rather than intelligent knowledge of either the
thing used or the cause to be removed. Jargon, confusion,
ignorance, presumption, and experimentation have char-
acterized the most of the means used in the treatment of the
sick. To present to the reader and the profession some-
thing tangible, reasonable, something that may be relied
upon, is the object of this treatise. To understand this phil-
Osophy and the proper manipulations, panoplies the possessor
with the most certain means ever presented to the world.
THE FORMATION OF MATERIAL FROM THE FOOD INTO
BLOOD.
There are physiological deductions as regards the forma-
tion of the various tissues, the office of the glandular systems,
and how the various parts of the body are formed. There
are certain functions that each and every gland performs, and
from observation we perceive that it is the province of each
and every gland to generate a specific secretion, and that this
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. IO3
secretion has a special mission to perform in the human
economy. That there is a specially arranged structure that
each has, and that in the meshes of these special structures
lies the official power, seems rather far-fetched, in considera-
tion of the functions of the sympathetic nervous system. As
each stage in the process of formation, elimination, etc., pro-
ceeds, from the first introduction of food into the mouth to
the final metabolism of that product, we find special functions
performed in the various departments exactly suited to each
in the physical economy. Notice now, if you please, how we
account for the whole procedure, and we opine that much
light regarding the nervous system will have been thrown
into the workings of each department of the house we live in.
Our theory is, that through the special direction of the sym-
pathetic nervous system, executed by the motor nervous sys-
tem, each particular element is separated or drawn from the
blood, in the various tubes through which the fluids pass,
and that because of its knowledge of how much of this, and
how much of that element is needed in each particular local-
ity, the same is ordered to be drawn from the body of the
blood, and either deposited there, or converted into other or
new compounds by chemical affinity; and if the renewal is to
be made, the elements are placed wherever needed; and if
waste material is to be carried out, it is done; if special com-
pounds are to be used in a particular gland, it is made there
as needed, by the chemical, physiological law inherent in the
physical organism. That when no obstruction is interfering
with the normal circulation of the fluids, and there is no
unnatural pressure on the nervous system each and every
part of the physical organism undergoes the normal processes
of tissue change and elimination. The nervous system
selects from, or manufactures in the salivary glands the kind
of secretion during the process of mastication that is essential
to the preparation of the food for the next step in the process
of digestion; and when the bolus has reached that department
called the stomach, another kind of secretion ushers in and
: Ioa. OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
covers it and mixes with it, and certain changes take place;
and then another step is taken, and we find that additional
glands are brought into requisition to manufacture certain
secretions different from the preceding, and mixed with the
former secretions, with and in the food, and that, in conse-
quence, another constituent is formed—an ingredient that
prepares the contents of the third department—mixture and
compound—to be taken up by a set of tubes called lacteals
Succors, absorbents), and conveys the fluid part of this com-
pound into larger tubes, called receptacles, and then it is con-
veyed through a duct, called the thoracic, into the subclavian
vein; thence it goes to the heart; from thence it is conveyed
into the lungs. Up to this point we have had accession after
accession all along the line, from the time the food was intro-
duced into the mouth until it lands in the heart—not only
the new material, with the various kinds of secretions, bpt the
waste material from every tissue in the body. The interest-
ing part of this work is before us, and we now proceed to fol-
low this fluid on its rounds through its meandering course,
watching each particular element as it is directed and con-
trolled by the nervous system until we shall have seen it again
in the capillaries of the lungs, where we left it. It will be
remembered that the sympathetic nervous system is the chief
factor in this locality (the vagus supplying the lungs), and
here is the workshop, where the beginning of all the tissues
in the body are manufactured, a reinforcement and a renewal
of the elements begin, and it is here that the sifting-out pro-
cess takes place—the exchanges occur—oxygenation begins
—the incineration of waste material and the elimination of
carbonic oxide take place. It will be remembered that there
are over seventy-six millions of small cubic cavities in the
lungs, and that they are separated from each other (and yet
all connected with each other) by a thin membrane; or, rather,
two membranes, and that between each air cell there are small
tubes through which the blood passes—not in the cell, but
on and in the membranes of the sides; and these are denomi-
PLATE VII.-Vibration of Temples and Forehead.


A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. Io'7
nated the air cells. Into these cells the air rushes at every
inhalation, and by a process called endosmose oxygen is forced
through the walls of these cells, on all sides, into the blood,
as it circulates around these cells, oxygenates the blood, and
at each exhalation the carbonic oxide is thrown off, the ven-
ous blood converted into arterial blood, and then, through
the vessels called pulmonary veins, carried back to the heart,
where it enters the left auricle of the heart as pure blood, ready
to start on its mission to renew the waste material of the gen-
eral system. From the left ventricle the blood enters the
aorta, from which arterial trunks receive the blood, carrying
it to every portion of the body. As the blood is ushered on
through these tubes out into the various trunks leading to
every part of the body, a change in the size of these tubes is
perceptibly observable—the tubes become smaller and smaller
until they become microscopic in size, when they lose their
outside coating in the tissue, and become capillaries. Here is
where the interesting part of our science concenters, and the
effects of our system are so brilliantly manifested. As the
warni, pure, vitalized blood passes into these small tubes,
whose caliber is said to be about one-thirty-two hundredth of
an inch in diameter—the connecting link between the ends
of the arterioles and the beginnings of the veins—there is
given off through the walls of these capillaries from the blood,
as it passes through them, the various elements needed to
supply the waste in that immediate vicinity, and the remnant
passes on through the capillaries into the venoles as refuse, or
degenerated blood.
We are loathe to believe that the blood corpuscles pass
out through the walls of the capillaries en masse, as some phy-
Siologists affirm, for this would render confusion in the parts,
and produce chemical changes that would necessarily be
destructive to the tissue into which the said corpuscle entered;
for please to bear in mind the fact that this corpuscle con-
tains all of the elements necessary (if normal) for building up
every tissue in the body, and it is evident that there is not,
Io8 OSTEOPATHY II.LUSTRATED.
in the locality of these capillaries, a complete metamorphosis
having occurred, consequently there is no necessity of all of
the elements in the corpuscle being deposited there, simply
to engender in the part excessive chemical changes to pre-
pare these various elements for elimination.
Now, if the reader will patiently follow us through this
seemingly labyrinthian maze that has so beclouded and bewil-
dered the physiologist, we shall try to make the matter under-
stood—how the body is renewed day by day, and the waste
material is disposed of. The process is interesting, in that it
involves the whole matter of life and death.
It will be remembered that the circulation of the blood
in the arteries is dependent upon the nervous system. This
system is supposed to be the vaso-motor, that controls the
peristalsis, by its influence in the muscular walls of the blood
vessels—from the large orifices of the heart to the ultimate
ramifications of the smaller twigs of the arterioles. Now, as
each blood corpuscle enters the capillary, containing as it
does the elements of nutrition, the sympathetic nerve fila-
ments ending in the capillary direct the kind of element
needed in that particular locality, and the quantity to be
drawn therefrom, and this is done, and here, by the universal
law of chemical affinity. This, or these elements, unite with
other elements already there, outside of the capillary, and
through contact change the structure as demanded—right
there, passing the gas or fluids that are produced by the
change on into the lymphatics, through which the excess or
waste passes, entering into the veins, beyond the capillaries,
with the refuse, the unused elements, whence it is conveyed
back through the veins to the heart, and thence to the lungs,
to again be renewed for its next round through these, or other
parts of the body. And now, as some of this blood passes
into and through certain other renovating apartments—such,
for instance, as the kidneys, the skin—a process of elimina-
tion takes place. All of these changes take place by a direct
communication of mind through the sympathetic nerves, to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. IO9
the motor-end filaments, which execute orders, and the work
is done. This, in brief, is the process that is constantly going
on in the system, and it is the universal order of every depart-
ment in the body. The necessity, therefore, of seeing to it
that every channel, tube and nerve filament be kept free is
apparent to the practitioner, if perfect harmony exists; and if
it does not, it is his duty to be wise enough and know enough
about the workings of these various departments to see to it
that they are set to rights by the proper manipulations that
take off the pressure. -
THE ELEMENTARY CONSTITUENTS OF THE HUMAN BODY.
In nature we have for the cardinal elements, Carbon,
Hydrogen, Oxygen and Nitrogen. Some one or more of these
enter into combination with the food eaten to make up the
physical structure we call bone, muscle, cartilage, tendon,
etc., and these are so arranged that perfect harmony in a nor-
mal condition exists.
In addition to these four cardinal elements we have Sul-
phur, Phosphorus, Chlorine, Calcium, Sodium, Potassium,
Magnesium, Iron, Silicon, Lithium, Manganese, Fluorine.
It is said by physiologists that oxygen enters into the fluids
of the body in a comparatively free state, either in solution
or loosely combined. Nitrogen is found dissolved in the
fluids, and hydrogen occurs as a product of decomposition in
the alimentary canal.
These sixteen elements are combined in various propor-
tions in the body, and make up the tissues thereof. The sim-
pler bodies are crystalline, as chloride of sodium and urea;
the more complex, as albumen, are amorphous. Chloride of
soda and urea pass out of the body, after crystallization,
through the excretory organs, the albuminoids being better
suited to form the solids. They are divided into the follow-
ing classes: I. Inorganic Compounds; II. Organic Crystal-
, line Salts, or the Urea Group; III. Carbo-Hydrates, or
I IO OSTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Sugars; IV. Hydro-Carbons, or Fats and their allies; V.
Albuminous, or Proteid Compounds; VI. Albuminoid, or
Gelatinous Compounds.
The Inorganic Compounds include water, acids, bases
and Salts. Water forms about seventy per cent. of the whole
body, and is a general solvent, by means of which various
materials may be taken into the body as food, or excreted
from the body.
Acids consist of Hydrochloric, which exists free in the
gastric juice, and in combination with bases in all the tissues
and fluids of the body; Carbonic, with bases in blood, teeth
and bones; Phosphoric, in combination with bases, in the
bones, teeth, corpuscles, brain, etc.; Sulphuric, with bases in
blood, serum and secretions; Hydrofluoric, with bases in
bones and teeth; Silicic, with bases in hair and epidermis.
Bases—Sodium, in all tissues and fluids; Potassium, in
the muscles, red blood corpuscles, nervous tissues, secre-
tions; Ammonium, sparsely in the gastric juice, urine and
saliva; Calcium, in bones and teeth and fluids; Magnesium
accompanies lime. -
The Organic Crystalline bodies are very numerous,
and are found for the most part as the result of the disinte-
gration of albuminous material, and nearly all contain nitro-
gen. The principal members of this group are urea, uric
acid, xanthin, hypoxanthin, hippuric acid, kreatin, kreatinin,
lactic acid, lecithin, neurin, cerebrin, leucin, tyrosin and
cholesterin.
THE NECESSITY-THE ABSOLUTE ESSENTIALITY OF TISSUE
EI,EMENTS IN THE BLOOD.
They bear the same relationship to the body as food does.
Many an Osteopath has been stranded in his efforts to “set a
bone” that was never out, or to adjust a muscle that occupied
its proper relationship to the system, and signally failed to
relieve some chronic ailment that depended upon a lack of
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. III
one or more of these elements that go to make up the mate-
rial of the house we live in. There are others who fail be-
cause of inattention to the habits, environments, etc., of the
patient, manner of eating, time of eating, process of mastica-
tion, proper mixing of the salivary secretions, condition of
the stomach as regards rest, or ability to perform its normal
functions, so as to properly prepare the food for intended use.
It is a singular fact that healthy blood must have all of the
elements in it. The secretions in the mouth coming from the
parotid, submaxillary and sublingual glands are necessary to
dissolve the food and prepare it for the next step in digestion,
as the food itself is to build up the waste that is constantly
going on in the body. Here we have the first manifestation
of the controlling influences of the sympathetic nervous sys-
tem—the power to draw from the blood the alkaline secre-
tions that dissolve food. As we descend into the stomach
through the oesophagus we see another marvelous change in
the character of the secretions—the gastric juices, composed
for the most part of hydrochloric acid. The combination of
the alkaline secretion from the mouth being mixed here in the
stomach, emulsification ensues and the contents of the
stomach being thus prepared, passes on into another division
of the digestive tract, and there meets with another kind of
secretion that is largely alkaline, from the liver and pancreas,
and here the change prepares the food for absorption—that
is, to be ushered on into other apartments, into channels that
lead to receptacles that connect with a duct called thoracic,
that carries the chyle up into and through the thorax, on the
left side, and empties this compound drawn from the food
into the left subclavian vein, through which it enters the heart
(the right side of it), from whence it is conveyed to the lungs,
in which it is brought in contact with the oxygen—one of
the sixteen elements before mentioned, and the only element *
in nature that purifies blood! This process puts to silence
the “Blood Purifiers” so earnestly recommended to be used
by medicine vendors. The human system, remember, is a
II 2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cosmos of itself, and in the normal state has its exact quantity
of elements (in sufficient quantities and exact proportions) to
constitute a healthy organization, and when the proper food
is introduced at proper times, with the proper environments,
it needs no help to perform its normal functions and keep
itself in a healthy condition. We maintain, and shall
endeavor to show, that disease is an unnatural and acquired
state, and that it is due, primarily, to a change in one or more
of the molecules of these elements, or a deficiency or change
in them. Whether this change is brought about by lack of
the proper food or obstruction to the normal circulation,
these must be corrected, or disease will follow.
- HEAT AND COLD.
The influence of these two opposite phenomena must
not be lost sight of in the curriculum of causes of pathological
conditions. It is the property of cold to contract and heat
to expand muscular textures. These diametrically opposite
states are prime factors in the production of many diseases.
They influence the character of the changes that take place
in the system, of these elements, as well as circulation of the
fluids that contain them in solution, and the tissue changes
of the organic substances of the various parts of the body.
Pressure sufficient to produce sluggishness in the flow.
of the blood and other fluids influences change in the nerve
cells, or the magnesium, potassium, calcium, sodium and the
iron phosphates as well as the potassium chlorides, and results
in disturbance of the functions of said nerves. As the nerv-
ous system, especially the sympathetic, controls the action of
the motor nervous system, regulating the caliber of the arte-
rial system, we can readily see that disturbance must necessa-
rily follow; as it is through healthful conditions of the
nervous system all the functions of the body are performed.
The various structures being composed of these elements in
varying proportions, each exercising special functions in the
PLATE VIII.-Stimulation of Supraorbital Nerves.

* ~ • •
A DRUGLEss systEM OF HEALING. 115
physical economy, is it not reasonable to conclude that each
special element has its particular place in the body?
- The connective tissue contains silica, calcium, phosphate;
in elastic tissue and bone surface we have calcium, fluoride,
magnesium, phosphate, and a large proportion of calcium
phosphate in bone cells; the latter is also found in muscle,
nerve, brain and connective tissue. We have in the brain
substance potassium and sodium phosphate. Cartilage and
mucous cells contain the specific material, sodium chloride,
which also exists in all of the fluids of the body. The hair,
nails and skin contain silica, which is also in the connective
tissues covering the bones, and with other substances we have
in the conjunctiva ferric phosphate. The inter-cellular fluids
contain potassium, chloride, sodium and calcium phosphates,
and all the sulphates. Potassium sulphates are also present
in cells. The carbonates are supposed to be without any
influence in the process of new-cell formation.
The process of oxygenation that takes place in the lungs
is supposed to act upon the organic substances of the blood,
removing impurities, and the products of these changes are
the organic materials which form the physical basis of muscle,
nerve, connective tissue and mucous substances. Each of
these substances is the basis of chemical affinity, and thus new
tissue is formed. With the product of new tissue we have,
at the same time, the destruction of the old ones, resulting
from the action of the oxygen on the organic substances
forming their bases. The ultimate results of the union of the
Oxygen with these organic substances are the formation of
urea, uric acid, sulphuric, phosphoric, lactic and carbonic
acids and also water. There are many other members of the
series, not necessary to mention in this connection, as they
are fully detailed in physiology.
Urea, uric acid and sulphuric acid are the result of the
oxidation of the albuminous substances, while phosphoric
acid is produced by the oxidation of lecithin contained in
the nervous tissues, brain, spinal cord and blood corpuscles.
116 s OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Lactic acid results from the fermentation of milk-sugar, and
finally breaks down into carbonic acid and water. Sulphuric
and phosphoric acids unite with the bases of the carbonates,
forming sulphates, and set free carbonic acid. By means of
the presence of sodium phosphate in the system, lactic acid
is decomposed into carbonic acid and water. This element
has the power or property of holding carbonic acid in combi-
nation, fixing it, and does this in the proportion of two parts
of carbonic acid to one of phosphoric acid which it contains.
This combination is carried to the lungs, and there, by the
action of oxygen from the inhaled air, the carbonic acid is set
free from its loose union with sodium phosphate, and ex-
changed for oxygen in the process of exhalation. Uric acid
is kept in the blood in solution, by the presence of sodium
phosphate, and is eliminated as such by the kidneys. When
this acid loses its solubility from lack of sodium phosphate,
it combines with the basis of sodium carbonate, and forms
urate of sodium, which is insoluble. When this is deposited
around joints it gives rise to gout and acute articular rheuma-
tism. Sodium phosphate serves to saponify fats, or probably
emulsify them. This salt can also take up albumen, besides
the above-named acid. Albumen is said to behave itself like
an acid. By reason of the property of taking up albumen
the sodium phosphate can carry on resorption of pathogenic
deposits of albuminous substances, hence so useful in scrofu-
lous swellings, glandular enlargements, lupus and incipient
tuberculosis, etc.
A disturbance of the molecules of sodium sulphate in the
inter-cellular fluids may be followed, according to its dura-
tion or extent, as well as its location, by a retarded removal
of the water of oxidation and dissolved or suspended matters.
This implies a consequent liability to bilious vomitings, ery-
sipelas, diabetes, etc.
- It is interesting to know that sodium sulphate and
sodium chloride act in opposite ways. While the former (the
sulphate) removes from the tissues the water, according to
A DRUGLEss systEM OF HEALING. I 17
the process just described, the muriate (the common salt)
enters the tissues, dissolved in the water from the blood
plasma, in order that the requisite degree of moisture proper
for each tissue may be maintained. The final products of
the organic substances are urea, carbonic acid and water,
through the process of oxidation. These, with the salts set
free, leave the tissues, and thereby give place to less fully
oxidized organic bodies, which in turn finally undergo the
same metamorphosis. The products of this retrograde tissue
change are conveyed through the lymphatics, the connective
tissue and veins to the gall bladder, lungs, kidneys, bladder,
and skin, and are thereby removed from the organism with
the excretions, such as the urine, perspiration, feces, etc. -
The above detailing of the action and uses of these tissue
elements are surely worthy our careful consideration if we
regard health as essential to our happiness.
THE VALUE OF THE TIssue ELEMENTs considerED. .
Though these are in no sense medicines, yet their impor-
tance will be apparent to the physiologist, to the pathologist,
when it is understood that they constitute the entire physical
organism, and that without them we could not, as we are;
exist. In consideration of this fact, we would invite the
attention of the pathologist to the role due them in endeavor:
ing to restore the afflicted to health. Whatever else is indi-
cated in the treatment, these should not be overlooked. .
Barring surgery, we are satisfied that due regard to the
supplying of these elements when needed, and the proper
adjustment of the system to itself, osteopathically, will be
sufficient to cure all curable pathological conditions, that are
curable at all by any means now known. In Osteopathy we
have the means of promoting the circulation of the blood and
other fluids of the body in and through their normal channels,
and of uniting positive and negative forces which determine
the neutralization or the modification of the acids and the
I 18 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
alkalines of the system in their actions in the human body, the
adjustment of muscular fiber, bones, tendons, etc., and keep-
ing up a normal circulation of the fluids to and from all parts
of the body. The proper coordination of the system with
itself means a great deal when it comes to restoration from
any and all forms of disease. The addition, the introduction
into the system, of the proper elements that are efficient, and
the removal of those in excess, surely should be duly consid-
ered. These, properly attended to, constitute all that is
necessary for any one afflicted with any known pathological
condition. This is not only our experience, but seems to be
the only rational means necessary to cure our ills. Surgery
should have its proper place in the curriculum of remedies,
when needed.
It may seem strange to some that we regard medicines
as superfluous in the cure of disease, of any sort, name or
nature, but upon due consideration of the foregoing there can
be but one conclusion, and that is, that they are foreign sub-
stances—not needed. If we have everything in the system
needed, all of the elements, and the circulation perfect, we do
not even need the tissue elements, but in case of disturbance
in the circulation of some or all of the fluids, the indications
are to take off the pressure. The system has a very unique
way of converting its various elements into whatever new
ingredient needed, when there are no restrictions placed upon
it in the way of undue pressure. The pressure, anywhere,
is the thing for the Osteopath to remove, and let nature per-
form its wonderful processes in its own peculiar way. The
how to do this work is the object of this book to explain.
This is the gospel of healing.
The different inorganic salts may be classified as follows:
Calcium phosphate, Calcium sulphate, Calcium fluoride, Fer-
ric phosphate, Potassium chloride, Potassium phosphate,
Potassium sulphate, Magnesium phosphate, Sodium chloride,
Sodium phosphate, Sodium sulphate, and Silica. These com-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. II9
bine with Carbon, Hydrogen, Oxygen and Nitrogen to form
the different elements, and are the essentials of them.
Do NOT conFOUND THESE ELEMENTs witH MEDICINEs.
The constant changes that go on in the system, bringing
to the surface effete matter, to be thrown out through the
skin, the large quantity of blood that is flowing into the heart
and lungs every breath we breathe, the double capillary action
of the liver, the manufacture of the various secretions by the
glandular organs of the body, the changes that the blood
undergoes in the various capillaries, as it gives off the chem-
ical constituents necessary to supply the waste of tissue in
their immediate circle, and then the various degenerative tis-
sue metamorphoses constantly presenteverywhere, the tearing
down and building up of every tissue in the body, constitute
phenomena that are indeed marvelous to contemplate; yet all
these actions are being performed whether we wake or sleep,
and are all made in accordance with perfect precision in every
department, provided no obstacles interfere with the circula-
tion of the fluids. The very moment there is interruption,
hindrance, sluggishness, stasis anywhere, there are necessarily
chemical changes, retrograde metamorphosis ensues, and con-
tinues until new material is formed, or breaking down of the
tissue results. Hence, the importance of a perfectly free and
incessant onward movement of the fluids throughout every
department. As the sympathetic nervous system has com-
plete control of every atomic cell, being distributed to each
and every tissue, capillary, tube, lymphatic vessel, gland, blood
vessel, muscular fiber, etc., throughout the body, and controls
and directs motion and sensation, tissue building, elimination,
waste and repair, it becomes a matter of no small importance
to recognize its freedom from pressure all along the lines of
its course from origin to termination. The motor and sen-
sory nerves occupy a secondary or subordinate sphere in the
physical economy, being only servants, messengers, as it were,
120 OSTEOPATHIY. ILLUSTRATED.
to carry out or execute orders from the sympathetic nervous
system. In our philosophy of the action of the nervous sys-
tem, we may cross the opinions of established authority, and
introduce an entirely new phase regarding the cause of dis-
ease, but they who follow me through to a legitimate con-
clusion, will find that my philosophy must be true, in order
to prove the science of Osteopathy to be founded upon rational
principles. A hap-hazard theory of a science, unscientifically
and unreasonably presented, would justly receive condemna-
tion, ridicule and unfavorable criticism, hence our premedita-
tion, long study, experience, practice along these lines to
demonstrate every possibility, probability, and show to the
reader, in clear and unmistakable terms, that its claims are not
only exceedingly and intensely interesting, but practically
true.
THE HUMAN SYSTEM As A MACHINE!
From the foregoing it would seem unfitting to call the
human system a machine. That term, originated in ignor-
ance, has been perpetuated in ignorance and used inappro-
priately in reference to the human body without regard to its
components. There is no semblance or resemblance to an
inert machine, that has neither sense nor motion—simply
moved by mechanical force. This body of ours is a part of
Diety itself, “made in the image of God,” “a little lower than
the angels, crowned with glory and honor.” The Ruler over
all things terrestrial, everything subject to him. Machine, eh?
: ..." FREEDOM OF CIRCULATION ESSENTIAL.
* . The freedom of the circulation of the blood and other
fluids is essential to the health of the body, or its restoration
when diseased. . . . . - •,
* The normal circulation may be defined as that condition
which is natural. The blood is usually recognized as the cir-
culating fluid in the body throughout the arterial, venous and
capillary systems, furnishing every part with life (for it is said
|
PLATE IX.a.—Vibration of Sides of Nares.
|

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I 23
that “The life is in the blood”), vigor and motion, and from
which is drawn all of the various elements that go to make up
the tissue that manifests “the life.” To properly comprehend
these wonderful phenomena, volumes have been written by
the wisest and most learned in the sciences of anatomy, phys-
iology and histology, and ages have been occupied in the
research, and speculations thountain high have been made,
yet the search continues, each investigator seemingly adding
some new theory thereto. -
Since the discovery of the circulation of the blood by
Harvey, there have been many theories advanced in a fruit-
less effort to harmonize the various systems of practice, so
that the blood in some way would be influenced thereby, and
theory after theory has been advanced as to how the blood
might be purified; one claiming that this, and the other that
that remedy would surely do it; and the craze has raged so
vehemently that competitors have arisen who have asserted
their compound as the sine qua non, and the poor victims of
disease have had to test the efficacy of each and every one of
these competitors' compounds, until legions have doubtless
been consigned to premature tombs, and whited sepulchers
now mark the resting places of failures of their “pet notions.”
Whilst all admit that, to be healthy, the blood should be puri-
fied, yet all seem to be at sea as to how this may be done.
There is a uniformity of sentiment that circulation somehow
influences purification, hence they claim that this or that
compound increases circulation, “therefore purifies the fluid
circulated.” Various methods suggested have been tried,
medicines of every kind and potency, singly and compounded,
for the purpose of changing the materies morbi of this “life
fluid” of the human race.
Why the addition of a foreign substance into the system
to “purify” blood ever obtained a footing in the mind of any
man, is the strangest thing imaginable! That drugs (medi-
cines) have a pathogenetic effect is conceded without argu-
ment, but that they are essential to our recovery from disease
I 24 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
is questionable. That some of them arrest tissue change,
others stimulate, others narcotize, blister and purge, seems
too patent to dispute. It is not the non-action of medicines
that our system opposes, but the action—the too much action
—often doing harm instead of the good intended. If it were
a certainty, if it were harmless, so that any one could use it
as they will finally use Osteopathy, so as to benefit everybody,
we would say use it, but we have tried medicines of all schools,
and our experience is what many others have had—disap-
pointment, anxiety, death following in their wake too often,
when, had we known Osteopathy, many a poor victim who
succumbed to the use of drugs in the vain hope of recovery
might have lived many years longer than they did—and espe-
cially children, whose “summer complaints” carried them off
by the thousands, when a moment’s treatment by one under-
standing the principles of Osteopathy would have cured.
That much more is claimed for Osteopathy than it is pos-
sible to verify does not lessen our faith in its efficacy, nor does
it intimidate us in our search for every good it is capable of
accomplishing. That it fills a niche unfilled by anything else
the unprejudiced will readily concede. That there is scarcely
a condition pathological that it may not safely, beneficially,
be applied in, my experience has verified, and a proper appli-
cation of its principles will do more for any given case than
people unacquainted with it, are willing to concede. That it
is a “cure-all,” we make no such a claim for it, and yet, like
water, it fits into, and its influences are so far-reaching that it
seems to us indispensable, its necessities standing out in bold
relief at every pore in the physical economy. Think of a
means that completely controls circulation and the forces in
the body so completely as to change the action of the alimen-
tary canal to one of alkali and an acid at a single move of the
body, or change the abnormal flow of the watery portions of
the blood from the mucous membrane of the intestinal canal
to a normal flow at one movement of the body. Are not such
agencies worthy the highest commendation?
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I25
To understand the nerve influences going on in the body
at all times, and to know of certain functions being influenced
by the stimulation of certain sympathetic filaments, leashes,
bundles, or nerve terminals, disease, pain, and often death
itself brought to life (or what would shortly end in death)!
Colic, flux, diarrhea, hemorrhage, croup, and diphtheria,
scarlet fever, meningitis and heart trouble—all of these have
been cured through osteopathic treatment, after being pro-
nounced incurable by other systems represented by their lead-
ing representatives and teachers. Should such a science be
spurned, maligned, misrepresented, simply because of ignor-
ance and prejudice?
If there were no merit in this system, it would have had
its day long before now. That there is merit in it is demon-
strated by thousands having been cured by it. It is not any
longer an experiment, but a proven success, worthy the high-
est commendation, and receiving the approval of the brightest
minds in America, and of some of the leading lights in the
medical profession in some of the great centers of this coun-
try. That it is often practiced and represented by persons
whose intellects are mediocre, successfully, beyond the ability
of medical skill to cope with, is a palpable demonstration of its
superior merit in the minds of those “who will see.” When
this book is studied and the manipulations properly mastered,
the philosophy correctly understood, many an invalid now
environed with hopeless forebodings, will rejoice that help
may be obtained. This science has come to stay. It will not
down. The combined and untiring forces of every opposition
only brighten its already luminous pathway, giving it impetus
and strength every time its benign influence is felt by some
poor, afflicted, abandoned mortal, whose forlorn, hopeless
wailing had died away in the distance. It only needs to be
known to be appreciated, adopted, patronized, recommended.
I26 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
MUSCULAR CONTRACTION.
There seems to be a prevailing notion among Osteopaths
that a “bone out of joint,” an “atlas out of place,” or a “dislo-
cated hip,” is the cause of all the trouble, and a large per cent.
of the ridicule this science receives is simply due to ungainly,
grotesque, ignorant, commonplace expressions that have
been carried from mouth to lip; and the literature that has
been sent out through the advertising sheets, styled journals,
has not tended to raise the reputation of the science much in
the estimation of scientific and thinking people. This science
is worthy a better showing, and it is to be hoped that when it
is properly presented, the mysteriousness lifted from it, and
the scientific, anatomical, physiological facts that environ it
lead the people up to know that it is plain, simple, common
sense and scientific truth, worthy the thought of the brightest
minds of this or any other age, it will be welcomed as a great
boon to all people; then the honorable medical professions will
adopt it, use it, indorse it.
The great fundamental principles upon which the science
rests are comprehensible. “Pressure anywhere impeding the
normal flow of the fluids,” is the motto of Osteopathy. This
pressure, as it is denominated, occurs in many ways. The
most common cause of the interruption of the freedom of the
flow of the fluids is cold. It is a known law, recognized every-
where, that cold contracts and heat expands. This law is
recognized by all philosophers, mechanics, artisans, machin-
ists, and everybody who observes. To the osteopathic man-
ipulator this law becomes his polar star, for it is known by
him that the contraction of muscular fiber, that impediment
to circulation, sets in at once as a result of the lowering of the
temperature of the body, and as the cold increases or con-
tinues, the muscular contraction continues, or paralysis of
the nerves ensues; and the undue relaxation allows infiltra-
tion of the fluids in the parts involved, resulting finally in
disorganization, degeneration, destruction.
The circulation of the blood occupies from thirty to forty-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 127
six seconds in making its round through the system, and if
from any cause the onward flow is impeded, chemical changes
ensue, decomposition or disintegration, irritation, inflamma-
tory products or new material incompatible to normal action
results, and the consequences are disease. This change is
commonly recognized as the “materies morbi” of the blood.
A sluggish or impeded circulation often results in a precipi-
tate of some one or more of the acids, and that condition fol-
lows which we denominate rheumatism. This usually occurs
in the neighborhood of the capillaries. If there are obstruc-
tions to the outflow of the glandular system, we have results
according to the special office the gland occupies in the phys-
ical economy. If in the salivary glands, the throat suffers
therefrom; if the thyroid, it enlarges; if the thymus, diph-
theria, croup, and a host of other children's diseases are likely
to ensue. If there is impediment in any of the smaller veins
in the sub-mucous membranes, we have catarrh; if in the skin,
eruptions follow.
OBSTRUCTION PRODUCES DISEASE.
If there is pressure or congestion of blood or other fluids
on the corium of the brain, in the region of the fissure of
Rolando, paralysis ensues, demonstrating the fact that motor
nerves have their origin in the cortical substance of the brain.
It is strange that so small an area involved will produce such
an extent of mischief so remotely. It is definitely demon-
strated now that certain areas in the corium have special con-
trol of special localities in and over the body. For instance,
when an area posterior to the upper end of the fissure of
Rolando is congested, it produces paralysis of both lower
limbs. Other localities are affected in like manner from the
pressure on the corium in different parts of the head, demon-
strating our theory that all nerves have their origin in the
brain. For special cortical motor areas the reader is referred
I28 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to his Anatomy or to works on the nervous system (Ranney
is authority). g *.
Whether obstructions occur as a result of changes in the
weather, direct cold, or to continuous exposure of the body,
or any part of it, to a lower temperature than normal, or to
direct pressure, such as bandages, tight lacing, over-crowded
vessels, impediment due to lack of fluidity of the blood, paraly-
sis of nerves controlling the circulation in any or many parts
of the body, any one or all of these causes may be and are the
cause or causes of the pathological conditions that afflict man-
kind. Our whole theory has its origin, support, conclusion,
on this idea, this fundamental and unheard-of cause of disease,
and perhaps unthought-of by other diagnosticians. And
while we would not desire to appear dogmatic in this regard,
we firmly believe that all pathological conditions are traceable
to obstructed circulation somewhere in the system, and that
removed, the patient has a better opportunity of recovery
than from the possible influence of medication. It surely
seems more rational to take off the pressure producing the
pain of a morbid condition, than to impose more labor, to
care for some other foreign substance that has no earthly rela-
tionship with the system, and can not possibly have, with the
idea of the necessity involved in the premises. It is like goad-
ing an already overburdened animal, or pressing the head of
a drowning man under water to keep him from death! Oh, if
we could induce the doctors to think! -
Undue irritation of a nerve produces pain, if a sensory
nerve; increased action, if a motor nerve; an impairment of
function, if a sympathetic nerve, or nerve ending in a part.
This may be done by contraction of muscular fiber, or muscu-
lar contracture may be induced by irritation of the nerve
through the sympathetic filaments, and nerve waste may go
on to the destruction of the body, without perceptible sensa-
tion or pain. Undue contracture may have either of two in-
fluences—one that of preventing flow to a part; or, secondly,
flow from a part. In the one case nutrition is cut off; in the
PLATE IX.b.—Stimulation of Lacus Lachrymales.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I31
other, destruction or impairment of function, due to decom-
position of elements pent up, which undergo decomposition
for the want of action or circulation. Hence the impor-
tance of keeping free the circulation throughout the whole
system.
FULL, DEEP INSPIRATIONS.
This is a therapeutic agent of vast importance, not only
as a means of expanding the chest muscles, aiding in the puri-
cation of the blood in the lungs, and thereby removing many
impurities therein through the exhalation that constitutes a
part of this exercise, but it is a means of relieving many heart
affections, supposed to be organic, when in fact they are sim-
ply functional troubles. Melancholia, sleeplessness, indiges-
tion, bad colds, chilliness, insipient tuberculosis, and all other
conditions dependent upon the proper use of the chest mus-
cles are greatly relieved, and often cured by this means.
There are many of our manipulations made expressly to ex-
pand these muscles, as well as to expand the lungs, and thereby
oxygenate the blood. Remember that “the blood is the life
of man,” and that to retain its vitalizing influence nature has
provided a positive means of accomplishing its purifications,
and it must be done in its own way, or diseases follow. The
proper way to fill the lungs is to close the mouth, draw in air,
fill the lungs to their fullest capacity, easily, steadily, holding
it in the lungs a few seconds at first, increasing the time be-
tween taking it in and expelling it from the lungs from thirty
to fifty seconds, letting the air be expelled through the nostrils
gradually. This exercise should be taken at intervals of two
to three hours during the day, six or eight such deep inspira-
tions at a sitting. At first the effort will be somewhat ex-
haustive, but resting a little while and renewing the effort will
surely bring its rewards. The reparation of the system will
soon be noticed, and malnutrition and impaired assimilation
will be greatly improved, if not restored. This practice not
only expands the lung tissue, fills the air cells, but it strength-
I32. OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ens the respiratory muscles and deepens the chest capacity.
The nervous system will be strengthened and made more firm,
the blood and tissues generally will be enriched, and the lia-
bility to take cold lessened. When it is known that there are
many persons who scarcely ever utilize all of their lungs, and
that the upper lobes under the clavicles are little if at all used,
and that this apex portion is weak, respiration Scarcely per-
ceptible, the upper portion of the chest walls flattened on both
sides, digestion feeble—that such persons may be transformed
into strong, rugged, round-chested, symmetrically propor-
tioned bodies—this exercise will take rank as one of the very
best means of preventing many, very many diseases.
There is more in this practice than the ordinary people,
and even the physicians, have thought of, and its importance
will be enhanced when its benefits are properly understood,
realized. This may be said, that a systematic attention to the
right sort of breathing constitutes the larger part of hygienic
measures necessary to good health, happiness, longevity and
the restoration from many of the ills of the flesh that now are
to be witnessed everywhere. The exhausting efforts of daily
life are usually due to lack of lung expansion, due to lowering
of the vitality of the blood, for want of oxygen. The proper
expansion of the lungs in all directions is essential, and this
may only be had by due attention to breathing. Constant
physical exercise in lifting tends to draw the muscles down,
while deep, full inspirations expand in all directions—lungs,
chest and muscles as well.
DEFINITIONS.
DISEASE.
Disease is any departure in the system from a normal
condition, or standard of the structure or office of any part
of the body. It is termed Organic, when associated with an
organic change in the normal structure, and Functional when
simply the office is disturbed, and no change is perceived in
the structure of the part.
PATHOLOGY.
Pathology explains the origin, cause, structural changes,
history, morbid conditions, etc. Study of individual diseases
constitutes special pathology. The nomenclature consists in
naming the diseases, and this is usually intended to define the
locality and condition involved, as well as name of structure
implicated.
ETIOLOGY.
This is generally applied to the subdivision of general
pathology which treats of the causes of disease.
HISTOLOGY.
As this has to do in the treating of the minute anatomy
of the system, miscroscopically, it is not of much use to the
general practitioner, and should be studied by the physician
separately.
SYMPTOMATOLOGY.
This is a term that signifies “signs of disease.” A careful
study seems necessary. The symptoms of morbid changes
vary according to intensity of or character of the alterations
in a part and the structure involved. The evidences of
changes manifest themselves by special signs or symptoms,
and are objective when seen by the observer, as in redness,
(133)
I34 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
swelling, temperature, mobility, etc., and subjective when
known or felt by the person afflicted, such as numbness, pain,
vertigo, nausea, etc. The study of this subject is the most
interesting of any to the practitioner, for a knowledge of the
symptoms renders certain in his mind the character of the dis-
ease and the locality, as well as the means to be employed in
the treatment of it. The complications, sequelae, etc., should
pe considered, for they often have to do in the regulating of
the kind and character of the treatment to be instituted.
DIAGNOSIS.
This is the science of discerning the nature and character
of the affection, the exact comprehension of the case, origin,
seat, nature of morbid conditions. -
PROGNOSIS.
To prognose a disease is the ability to tell its probable
ending, and this can be done only by long experience and
observation from clinical cases. Prognosis depends largely,
sometimes, on the nature of the means employed in the treat-
ment. Many diseases that were thought to be incurable in
former years, by certain methods, are now treated successfully
'by others, so that our prognosis depends largely upon the
means employed in the treatment.
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.
When it is known that the nerves are the media through
which all motion, sensation, as well as sympathy, throughout
every organ and tissue in the body, are communicated, and a
complete supervision of the manufacture, selection of all of
the material that enters into the structure of every element,
the direction of distribution, building up, tearing down and
eliminating at the proper time, place, through the proper
channels, their importance will be apparent.
That there are various opinions regarding the nervous
system is conceded. That many theories are published, rep-
utable, standard authorities testify. That the medical profes-
sion begins to believe that nervousness has its origin in or
connected with the nervous system, volumes published abun-
dantly exemplify. That we have a nervous system is no
longer a mooted question, but from what has already been
written and said about the especial offices these nerves per-
form or what the nature of their performances are, seemingly
little is understood.
Anatomists tell us that we have twelve pair of cranial
nerves, which have their origin inside of the cranium, and a
spinal classification which originates in the medulla and ex-
tends through the foramen magnum down the spinal column.
The distribution of nerves is pretty fairly shown by all of the
works on anatomy of to-day, and physiologists have done well
in describing their special official character.
The question now arises, what has this to do with Oste-
opathy? We answer, much every way, for we design to show
that this science is based solely on nervous influence, and that
without due regard to the nervous system but little may be
accomplished in our understanding of, or the consequences of,
(135)
I36 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Osteopathic manipulations, or disease, its cause, treatment
required, where to apply it, or anything about it. More de-
volves on an understanding of the action of the nervous sys-
tem than the “luxation of the atlas.” It has been a question
with me since my attention has been called to investigate the
nervous system, whether our physiologists have not come to
hasty conclusions about how the nervous system controls.
Looking over various authors regarding this matter, we find
that all are of the opinion that the cranial nerves originate in
the head. There is no difference as to the origin of the spinal
nerves starting from the medulla oblongata, but there seems
to be confusion as regards how sensation, motion and sym-
pathy are carried on. The most of them assert that nerves
branch, and that these branches have separate offices to per-
form, and that fibers run to certain localities, form ganglia,
and from these ganglia new influences are generated, new
nerve fibers originate, and are thus regarded throughout the
whole system; and that because a nerve terminates in the
tongue it must necessarily be a nerve of feeling. From long
observation we have come to the conclusion that, to make out
a rational system of nerve distribution, the literature on this
subject should be worded differently, or entirely rewritten.
Not wishing to appear presumptuous or egotistic, but
somewhat original on the plan of distribution, control and
origin of the nervous system, I make this startling and en-
tirely new assertion: All nerves originate in the brain. I
assert this as an axiomatic, foregone conclusion, for the fol-
lowing reasons: First, the nervous system consists of bundles
of fibers, composed of the same substance as that from which
they originate—similar in structure as the brain itself—includ-
ing its coverings, arachnoid, pia mater, dura mater, etc.
These fibers convey intelligence to the parts to which, and in
which they are distributed, and only influence at their ends,
and through their footlets or terminals. Each motor and
sensory nerve coming from its origin in the brain from what-
ever locality, ends with a sympathetic footlet, and through
PLATE X.—Vibration of Facial Muscles.



A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I 39
this sympathetic fiber intelligence is communicated, direction
is given there, impulse received, execution of the order at once
ensues. To make this matter plainer, suppose the submaxil-
lary gland should be required to generate a secretion to
moisten the mouth—the mucous membrane there—and to
mix with the food; what action does the nervous system per-
form? In the divine economy regarding the human system
certain glands manufacture certain kinds of secretions, and
others manufacture other sorts of secretion; all of which go
through their normal outlets, to be appropriated accordingly.
Now that perfect order may be had in this particular gland, it
must be superintended by mind, and we will suppose that this
mental influence is conveyed through the sympathetic nerves,
as they of themselves have no sense, either of feeling or
motion; the thought, starting at the origin of the line of com-
munication, is transmitted to the farthest end of the line, and
there ending in a footlet directly in contact with a motor foot-
let—one of the servants of the sympathetic—the executor of
orders from the sympathetic; and through a laboratory of
wonderfully complex construction, through which the blood
passes, there is required to be manufactured a certain chem-
ical (alkaline, for instance). This sympathetic nerve superin-
tends the selection of the basic principles from the blood that
make up this compound, and then sees to it that every detail
is carried out, so that a perfect adaptation to the purpose
intended is consummated. Who is ready to assert that all
this comes by accident?—especially when the same thing
occurs in every other department in the manufacture of every
other organic substance the whole lifetime of the person
whose body this sympathetic nervous system controls?
The nerves should not be understood as starting from
ganglia or plexuses, for that would be admitting that each
ganglion would be a nerve center, and this would make con-
fusion worse confounded all over the system. While it is said
by Dr. Watts that “The Lord works in mysterious ways His
wonders to perform,” we find that all of His ways are accord-
I4O OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ing to the very strictest order, carried out to perfection in
every detail. To assert that we have twelve nervous systems
in the head, and thirty-one separate nervous systems in the
spinal cord, and a chain of them in the abdomen, would not
comport with facts, nor be at all consistent with reason.
It is said by all of the authorities examined, anatomists
and physiologists, that the nerves have “branches.” A more
inconsistent idea could not be advanced, when we take into
consideration that all nerves influence action at their termin-
als, and that a direct line of communication must be had from
origin to terminus before any execution can be effected. To
understand this matter fully, we will suppose—and that it is a
fact—that nerve fibers originate in the brain as separate and
distinct lines of communication for a special and distinct pur-
pose, to connect with terminals of other fibers, which also
start in a nerve center in the brain, and these separate fibers
end in every tissue in the body, not being disjointed, relayed,
resupplied in ganglion, but each fiber has a separate and dis-
tinct office to perform in the human economy, directed by a
Divine Mind, whose control is ever omnipresent—everywhere
in the body, seeing that every detail of every order is carried
out to exact precision. Starting at the corium we have fibers
terminating in the tissues all along the course of the line, like
a bundle of fine thread or hairs of different lengths, cut off
along the wisp, as it were, and the longer ends continuing to
the farthest-off recesses of the body. This is easily under-
stood when it is shown that a congestion of the corium on the
top of the brain receiving an extra supply of blood from a
bruise, paralysis is instantaneously produced on the opposite
side of the body clear down to the end of the hallux. Each
and every chemical change that takes place in the system
everywhere, of every kind and character, is the result of nerv-
ous action, or mind acting through it. This we under-
stand to be the physiological action of the nervous system,
and, regardless of our will or nil, awake or asleep, is essential
to our physical well-being. These facts understood, furnish
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I4I
a whole lot of information in the direction of our comprehen-
sion of what disease is and how it is produced. The cir-
culation of the blood, containing the inorganic elements in
solution, is not only controlled by the Sympathetic Nervous
System in the larger vessels leading from the heart,
by controlling the peristalsis of the muscular walls,
but into the finer arterioles and on into the capillaries, and
mysteriously selects from it, while passing through the capil-
laries, such elements as are essential to the building up of
material in the immediate vicinity of the capillaries, but mar-
shals the waste material in due order and directs its onward
course through the lymphatics on and into the veins beyond
the capillaries, to be carried back to the heart, but continues
its superintendence over the elements thus drawn from the
blood in the capillaries, placing each atom in its proper place,
so that the whole system is renewed at all times and all places
at the proper time, everywhere in the body. The sympa-
thetic nervous system is the great one that presides over
all the functions in the body. It is called “sympathetic”
because of its intimate relationship with every other part of
the body. It superintends and energizes all of the processes
of growth, repair, tissue building, respiration, circulation, and
the elimination of the waste material from the tissues.
“It is the sleepless sentinel who stands at the gates of life
as long as we live, even a hundred years, and never sleeps for
a single moment, night or day. Nothing short of lethal doses
of narcotic or anaesthetic drugs can wrap it round in slumber
robes and stretch it on its dreamy couch. It never sleeps but
once, and that eternally. It is that body servant of yours who
never deserts you nor quits your service night nor day, for a
single moment, while you live; a friend that truly sticketh
closer than a brother, watching every heart-throb and every
breath you draw. It is that butler of yours who, without or—
ders from you, looks after the nourishment of every bone,
muscle, nerve and tissue of your body, and provides you with
every well-spring of thought and emotion. It is that deft
I42 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
artisan who oils every joint in your frame, and keeps it from
cracking and rasping with friction and loss of mobility; who
lubricates all of the surface of the body, internal and external,
so that it does not dry up and crack to pieces, nor drip with
excessive unction. It is that faithful servant who without
murmuring pumps your breath and blood for you through the
long hours of the night while you sleep, and through the busy
hours of the day, when you are too busy to think of breath or
blood. It is that janitor of the temple of your soul who keeps
up the fires in your bodily frame and maintains 98% degrees
of temperature throughout every department of the ‘house
not made with hands,’ through summer's heat and winter's
cold, whether you live in the tropics or ‘on Greenland's icy
mountains.’ It is that cunning servitor who always stands
at the window of your eye and opens and closes the iridescent
curtain of the iris so as to let in just so much light as to enable
you, in the glare of noon or the shadows of twilight, to see
with comfort and pleasure all the beauties of the world around
you. It is that faithful warden who stands at the gateway of
your stomach and reports instantly to the brain whether you,
in your ignorance or stupidity, put into your mouth a deli-
cious fruit or a corrosive poison. It is that cunning mechan-
ician who sees to it always that your blood, as it courses
furiously through its channels, is composed of so many white
and so many red corpuscles, and that each corpuscle carries
with it so much lime, sulphur, phosphorus, carbon, oxygen,
hydrogen, and nitrogen, and all of the other primal elements
of your body in exact proportions, and sees to it, when they
each lay down their burdens at the gateway of life, each atom
thus carried into the economy by unerring selection, is built
up into frame and wall and member and tissue of your body,
always renewing life in the midst of death throughout the
citadel of your being. And that same wise warden looks to it
thatevery corpuscle oratom, on its return journey through other
channels, is loaded with worn-out and effete materials, to be
carried out of the great temple of life, to again mingle with
A DRUGLESS systEM of HEALING. I43
the clods of the valley. This nerve is the invincible defender
of the fortress, who, amid the havoc of shot and shell, of
saber stroke and leaden ball, the shock and concussion of col-
lision, the delirium of typhoid and the wreck of insanity, still
guards and protects and repairs the breached fortifications of
life. Through all the infinite vicissitudes of life the great
Sympathetic is still our best earthly friend and benefactor.
It is the great clock in the temples tower that calls for every
passing change of life, wound up to run a hundred years; and
as it ticks your allotted time, it marks the age of speechless,
puling infancy, when you can neither understand nor tell your
own wants; it measures off your youth and strikes the hour
of manhood; it calls you to the mystery and mating time of
love; it rings the dinner bell each day of healthy life and calls
the hour of sleep and rest; it changes the epoch of gray hairs
and slower gait, of waning vision, of shrunken shanks and
biceps; it sets your voice in piping tones to prating of the
times that were, the deeds of former days, and youthful prow-
ess, and when those deeds are told, you sigh and say, “Ah, me,
I am growing old.’ And then, some day, when ripe and
ready for the change, it rings the curtain down and closes up
your stage from mortal gaze, and as one who quits a tenement
long kept, and gives it over to worms and mould and dust, to
cobwebs, bats and flies, its wheels turn slowly round, the ham-
1mer fails to strike; the hours are tolled, and this same friend
goes out from long control to terminate a long career, lies
down itself and goes to sleep—that sleep that knows no wak-
ing. Then swift decay comes and covers all with mould, and
orders with dispatch assimilation with the clods that heap the
valley, and leaves you there, with time, the elements and God.
Who can comprehend its greatness, its countless capabilities,
the vastness of its service, or the infinitude of mind that
planned and constructed it?”
The above but feebly outlines the vastness of the func-
tions of the sympathetic part of the nervous system. Open-
ing the avenues a little wider, starting with the first impulse
I44 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
noticeable in the functions of the cranial nerves, we perceive
the sense of Smell, then of motion, sight, feeling, tasting, see-
ing, hearing, all being special senses. These are marvelously
wonderful. Then to trace the process of digestion, absorption,
assimilation, manufacture of new material, the removal of the
old, the chemical changes that are constantly going on in the
whole body, opens to us a field that expands as we enter wider
and wider, and this subject becomes the more interesting
when the causes and the cure of disease are considered. Os-
teopaths claim that when all of the fluids are freely, normally
circulating through their proper channels, all of the muscles
are in their normal condition, and all of the nerves are free
from pressure, health is the condition experienced.
THE VASO-MOTOR NERVE CENTERS.
It is said that such a thing exists in man, and to have
its origin in the medulla. The exact center is supposed to be
slightly above the calamus scriptorius. Recent observations
concede to this set of nerves the power to control innervation
of blood vessels, and that there are in this system afferent as
well as efferent fibers. It is also said that the afferent set irri-
tated excite or depress the activity of this center, and in a re-
flex way cause contraction or dilatation of the blood vessels.
We are informed by anatomists on this subject that on irrita-
tion or stimulation of these filaments atonic contraction of
the walls of the blood vessels occurs, and we are also informed
that irritation of any sensory nerve of or in the body results in
general contraction of the blood vessels, and that there soon
occurs a relaxation of the walls of the vessels in the immediate
vicinity of the parts irritated, that this activity is perceptibly
decreased when the pneumogastric nerve is irritated.
That two actions occur or are the result of stimulation of
the vaso-motor nerves generally is not yet thoroughly settled.
The vaso-motor and the vaso-constrictor fibers both occupy-
PLATE XI.-The Divulsion of the Nares.

* * r * *
*.
*
*
&
ș
！
*
• ſ
~ & …
•
» . ' •
**
4 *
ș•
+§ ł •








A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF IIEALING. I47
ing the same sheath may be, but that one set of fibers carry
two sorts of influences does not comport with observation.
That the sympathetic nerves are all vaso-motor we incline to
believe, because they surely control all action in every part of
the body. That some points are more vulnerable than others
is conceded. That there are certain fibers which terminate
around the great openings of the heart and control its action
and all of the blood vessels, the circulation therein, is true;
but do not other sympathetic nerves end in other important
structures and control them? When it is understood that all
motion in the body, when controlled at all, is controlled by
the sympathetic nervous system, we shall not be greater stick-
1ers for a vaso-motor nerve center than we shall be, or ought
to be, for a brachial plexus. The important practical point
for consideration by the practitioner is, that we influence ac-
tion in the blood vessels by stimulating the surface, skin
and deeper structures in the neck, in the region of the occiput,
and down at the sides of the spinous processes for three or
four inches, embracing what we term the cervical plexus, or
the ganglia along the sides of the neck. A steady pressure
with thumb and fingers influences circulation. The degree
of pressure governs results. A slight pressure stimulates, a
hard pressure inhibits, slows heart's action, lessens irritation,
or it ceases, and fever subsides by pressure in this region for
a few moments. That these filaments convey influences to
the heart and thence to the muscular walls of all of the blood
vessels, seems to be a fairly well established fact. This is an-
other step in advance of the use of a febrifuge in the way of
medicine, and is used by the Osteopath successfully in treat-
ing fevers of the highest temperature and of the most malig-
nant type. Strange indeed that we should be so slow to learn
that the means for our own, as well as that of our neighbor's
welfare are always within our grasp, if we only knew it!
148 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
NERVE CENTERS.
In the treatment of diseases osteopathically, it is claimed
by many (ignorant, of course, of the fact) that certain nerve
centers—for instance, those that control action in a vital
organ—are reached or stimulated directly by contact along
the spine or back of the neck, and therefore osteopathic treat-
ment “consists in treating nerve centers.” A more erroneous
statement could not be made. It is wholly devoid of truth.
When it is an established fact that all nerves have their origin
in the calvarium, the assertion that we reach nerve centers
by manipulations, directly, is too palpably untrue for ordinary
intellect to entertain. That certain definite results fol-
low the manipulations of the body in different localities, in the
various methods used by Osteopaths, is true, but why? Not
on account of the treatment or stimulation of nerve centers.
We exercise influences that we have no conceptions of in our
manipulations, but that certain results follow certain manipu-
lations is often demonstrated, but how they are brought about
in the system is as obscure as the sun at midnight. Anatomy of
recent years has taught us that nerves convey influences from
a given center to a periphery, and that they in some way con-
trol action, sensation and sympathy. Observation confirms
this notion or fact. Osteopaths are founding a system of
healing on the basis of nerve influence, and investigation be-
comes interesting along this line, for “our craft is in danger”
if it should be proven, and mysterious drug action will be
abandoned, and reliance will be no longer had on them.
Starting at the base of the occiput, then, we begin our
treatment of all diseases, for the simple reason that disease is
the result of disturbed action of the source of vitality—that
vitality is “in the blood,” and here, at the base of the brain,
in the cervical region, we find terminal nerve filaments that, if
stimulated, control the circulation of the vital fluid—the
blood. The blood containing all of the inorganic elements
from which is drawn the substance that makes organized tis-
sue, it is essential that the unorganized elements be carried to
- * -
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I49
the various parts of the body needing said elements, and as
they are only carried there in the blood, and that through
arteries, and that the action of the walls of these vessels wholly
depends upon nerve influence, it becomes apparent to the
observer that it is essential to know how to influence nerve
action. -
The sympathetic nervous system superintends and, as we
contend, controls every action in the body through the motor
nervous system. The union of these two at their terminals
constitutes a quorum—the sympathetic directs, the motor
executes. Therefore, in order to carry on any process in the
body, these two nerve terminals must have connection with
each other. A modified or retarded suggestion by the sym-
pathetic, and a sluggish execution of the order by the motor
nervous system, produce all of the pathological disturbances
known as disease. This will explain to the pathologist much
that has heretofore been conjecture. These premises are
self-evident. It is said that certain secretions are manufac-
tured in certain glands by the sympathetic nerves; but has any
one explained how it is done? It requires two forces in nature
to accomplish anything.
THE ROLE THAT THE SPINAL systEM occupies IN THE
TREATMENT.
The spinal cord is not merely a channel to and from the
brain, but regionally there are certain ºndowments that be-
come of primary importance to the Osteopath. After leaving
three or four of the cervical vertebrae, as we descend, every
portion becomes a source of great importance. There are
regions that, being influenced, reflect that influence in such a
way as to demonstrate the supreme control of the portions
of the body corresponding to the distribution of nerves
emerging from the spinal regions. These important starting
points in the treatment of disease determine results. Disease
in parts supplied by spinal nerves may generally be located by
I5O ostEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the presence of tender spots along the spine in the locality of
the emergence of the nerves leading to and supplying the
parts pathologically concerned; hence become an index
thereto. In the distribution of the various filaments there-
from we have another evidence of unvarying uniformity of
supreme supervision of the house we live in. Through these
filaments, beginning at the foramina in or along the spinal col-
umn on either side, and inducing proper stimulation, we have
learned, starts up new life in the parts supplied by these
nerves, and diseases thought to be incurable by other means
disappear.
The thirty-one pair of nerves that emerge from the spinal
column exercise influences little understood by the large ma-
jority of people, and, we opine, by the medical world. From
the three or four upper dorsal and the four 19Wer cervical
regions, starts out a force from the brain that invigorates the
entire man, starting into activity vital organs, and perpetuat-
ing their action beyond human computation or imagination.
The various seats of the energies of the whole man seem to,
and do, come out of these foramina. For convenience and
practicability therapeutically, we prefer to divide the spinal
column into six grand divisions, to-wit: The Cervical, Bra-
chial, Dorsal, Lumbar, Sacral, Coccygeal; the Cervical em-
bracing the four upper vertebrae; the Brachial three lower
cervical and first dorsal; the Dorsal the first dorsal and includ-
ing the twelfth; the Lumbar the five lumbar vertebrae; the
Sacral all of the sacrum; and the Coccygeal, the last, including
the last set of ganglia on the inner side of the coccyx, called
the ganglion of impar. With these divisions we have to do in
the treatment of diseases of all forms and conditions, and
through these various divisions we exercise influences that
result in such marvelous cures as astonish the world. To
study and to know the distribution and special functions of
these spinal nerves qualify us to practice the healing art with
a certainty not heretofore reached by any other method.
Whether influences start from the pressure directly ap-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I51
plied near these foramina, or through the terminal filaments
terminating in the integument, or through the muscular con-
traction on the corium of the nerves, or whether directly
through the ends of the sympathetic nerves to the brain, start-
ing forces from it we may never know certainly, but that
changes do take place through this method, abundance of
evidence accumulates.
THE GENERAL, OUTLINE OF SPINAL NERVE INFLUENCE.
It is an accepted theory that nerves coming out of the
foramina on either side of the spinal canal, through the fora-
mina, are spinal nerves. These claim our attention here.
The reader, if he is interested in the treatment of disease by
this method, may be assured that surprises will often occur in
his application of these treatments. The results of this treat-
ment come through stimulation of nerve filaments which con-
trol the circulation of the fluids, the manufacture of organic
material out of the inorganic substances held in solution in
the blood, the elimination of the waste, and the building up
process in every tissue in the body.
These we understand to be the sympathetic nerve fila-
ments—not nerve centers. The learned Prof. E. H. Pratt, of
Orificial Surgery fame, of Chicago, Illinois, demonstrated,
years ago, that nerve waste resulted from muscular contrac-
tion or cicatricial impingement on sympathetic nerve termin-
als; and has very largely revolutionized the thought of the
advanced thinkers and actors in the surgical world, demon-
strating his theory by years of successful operations to relieve
pressure. And while he recommends the use of other means
than ours, the object is the same, and results show the cor-
rectness of the conclusion that the sympathetic nervous sys-
tem controls when not forestalled.
It was long thought that the “dislocation of a rib” was
responsible for all the mischief, or a “dislocated hip,” or a
“slipped vertebra,” had much to do in producing disease of
#52 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
all kinds; but the intelligent in the ranks of Osteopathy are
ready to concede the causes to other sources, and now it is a
pretty well settled fact that, dislocation does not play such a
role in the production of disease as formerly. Some signs
begin to indicate a practical, physiological disturbance as the
general factor in producing many of the ills that “flesh is heir
to,” and that a bone does not have to be “set” in every case
that comes to us for treatment. The world surely “do
move.” - .
“Theories about this and that cause of disease have been
advanced, adopted; learned intelligencies of all Schools have
written great volumes to elucidate them, and time has shown
their fallacy, and many remain as spectral ghosts to haunt
mankind which in time will share a like fate. The masses
bear the ills rather than fly to others they know not of. The
education of the masses is the hardest work—the most diffi-
cult task to do, for it is with the people these new systems
have to do, and the proper presentation of plausibility for their
rejecting the old and adopting the new, is a herculean task.
Solomon said a long time ago that “there is nothing new
under the sun,” and for fear somebody should rise up and
present something new, the people, with one consent, decide
not to investigate, for fear Solomon might be found to be mis-
taken. -
The reader need not lose any nerve force on this propo-
sition, for we have nothing new under the sun–for this has
always been under the sun. Since Adam first exercised the
prerogative of mobility, and demonstrated that locomotion
could be made with his shanks and biceps, our system has had
a place in the Divine as well as human economy.
It is not a matter of concern with us about reaching nerve
centers directly, for these are inside of the brain, and inap-
proachable by direct contact; but that influence is conveyed
from the terminals to centers there can be no doubt. When
it is understood that nervous influence is exercised at the ends
of the nerves, we may readily see that there is reason in stimu-
PLATE XII.-Manipulation of Muscles of the Neck.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I55
lating nerve terminals. That there is a sudden change of the
secretions in certain organs through the stimulation of nerves
along the spine there is abundant proof. We reach the stom-
ach, through the splanchnics by stimulating the dorsal
region in the neighborhood posterior to the stomach,
neutralizing an excessive acidity instantaneously, and
relieve colic. We influence the terminals of the sympa-
thetic filaments along the spine in the region of the twelfth
dorsal vertebra, and exercise an influence over the secretions
of the kidneys. We irritate or stimulate the lumbar region
about the second lumbar vertebra, and an influence is exerted
in the genital organs. These are some of the examples which
fully demonstrate our philosophy of cure. Take, for instance,
a case of excessive secretion of urine: we possess the ability
to regulate, by simply stimulating certain portions of the
lumbar terminal nerves, in a certain locality, beginning at the
right place, and following up the stimulation in the proper
direction. All other excessive secretions are controlled the
same way. Nervous influence is the proper influence to bring
to bear in the cure of all diseases. The nerves themselves are
controlled by other nerves, and the smallest imaginable mole-
cule of every atomic cell is under the direct influence of the
sympathetic nervous system, and when we properly under-
stand how to utilize it, direct it, relieve it of any and all abnor-
malities—in a word, know when its functions are interfered
with, where, and know, too, how to right it, disease is simply
under our control. The marvel of marvels is, how does the
nervous system perform such wonderful things? To the stu-
dent of nature who accepts demonstrations as proof, it can be
readily shown that intelligence must permeate every tissue in
the body in order to look after the building up, repairing the
waste, taking care of the worn-out material, and looking after
every department as needed, in such wonderful precision; and
that this mind must have a perfect system about it or con-
fusion worse confounded would soon end in chaos. It takes
just so many elements to constitute the human system, and
I56 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
these must be in exact proportion, and be held in solution
during their passage through the various channels, and
must give off exactly so much of this and so much of that par-
ticular element at the proper time and place, in order to main-
tain the weight, constituents and office of the various organs
at all times, in all altitudes, countries and climates—and hence
mind must be a prime factor in the business; and we insist that
these nerve channels are the media through which this mind
executes its will. If the communication is free from start to
ending, the functions are properly performed; but if inter-
rupted, intercepted, confusion reigns, and the degree is always
in proportion to the quantity and quality of the obstacle or
obstacles to be overcome. Hence our motto, “Take Off the
Pressure.” -
NERVE FORCE.
There is much said about Nerve Force. What is nerve
force? It surely seems to be some inherent power in the
nerve that is exercised by the nerve itself. That we have any
nerve force is an assertion without proof, or even the sem-
blance of truth. There is an expression equally as meaning-
less—Nerve Waste. What does that mean, if not the wasting
of the nerve itself? There are so many terms used that con-
fuse the mind, meaningless terms, that we are often at a loss
to know what is meant by them. The best way to express
anything is to state exact facts. What is nerve force? What
is nerve waste? When we properly understand that nerves
are only the channel through which force is conveyed, and
that force is the result of chemical changes, and that chemical
changes are the result of mixing chemical elements, we shall
begin to imagine what the term “nerve force” signifies. Cut
off the supply of the material that constitutes force, and you
have a waste. Where does this supply come from? From
the food eaten. These forces, then, come from the food
eaten, chemically changed during the process of digestion,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I57
assimilation, circulation. The circulation embraces general
and special circulation, mixture and admixture, combination
and recombination in every department in the physical organ-
ism, and organizes and disorganizes, renewing and changing
forces constantly. The little tubes we call nerves are only the
conductors of the intelligences carried on everywhere in the
body at all times. The arterial set of tubes carry the material
outward, distributing the material to the remotest confines of
the various parts of the body, and the other tubes, called the
venous system, carry it back to the great center—the heart,
constantly, so that these conditions called waste and supply
go on all the time. You may now understand what is meant
by nerve force, or nerve waste. Freedom of the circulation
means building up, impeded circulation means tearing down
—retrograde metamorphosis. There is no force in a nerve
any more than there is in a bone. The medium through
which a force is conveyed is not the force. To say that we
lose nerve force is to say we lose all force in the body, or some
force. Does it occur to the reader that the letting down of
the system in any degree or the rousing of it in any way is the
result of the chemical changes that take place in the elements?
If that is not understood, the comprehension of the meaning
of disease has not dawned upon the mind of the reader. We
assume that this body is a cosmos—a world within itself—
of the world chemically, materially, so far as our bodies are
concerned, and that our spiritual man is only an inhabitant
endowed with personal, entire control of it, and that these
tubes called sympathetic nerves are the connecting links that
unite every department with the central station, and that
through these various tubes is communicated, in a normal
state, the intelligence needed everywhere in the body, to all of
the material carried there through the arteries, even to the
regulating the caliber of them.
The manufacture of the various fluids in the different
parts of the body is superintended by the intelligence con-
veyed through these nerve tubes, and we are wont to call this
158 osteoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
intelligence nerve force. These minute tubes, filaments, orig-
inate in the brain, are connected with the minutest portions of
every tissue in our body. How intelligence reaches the var-
ious parts of the body through these tubes we may never
comprehend, but that it does is not now questioned by phy-
siologists. How this element called Neurin is manufactured,
we can not tell, neither do we know how sulphur is generated
in the muscular fiber, yet analysis has demonstrated that to be
a fact. That the channels through which we are said to re-
ceive intelligence are five is a pretty well understood fact;
but how is it deposited in or upon the tablets of the brain,
subject to our demand for use, is a mystery to us all. Some-
thing from without finds its lodgment through these avenues
that we call thought—intelligence; this, we are taught to be-
lieve, is thought—knowledge, intelligence. That is what we
assume is the power within the physical organism that con-
trols every department we call the body, through these organs
we denominate nerves. Cut off the communication anywhere
along the lines of their distribution, or abridge their sphere of
action by change of structure in their chemical constituency,
and you have what is denominated disease. Muscular fiber
may be affected in the same way; so may any other tissue
in the body be thus changed; and the change in the molecules
of any element produces a change in every other part of the
system, because the system is a unit—a cosmos. These
changes result as a consequence of sluggish or impeded circu-
lation of the fluids of the body anywhere, in any and every
structure. The chemical changes resulting from decomposi-
tion of blood cells, as they are termed, are in proportion or
exact ratio to the tissue involved, parts affected, locality and
organ involved. In some instances we have fever as a result,
in others a paralysis, in others a constipation, and in some
others a diarrhoea, in another insanity. The nomenclature of
disease is, and always has been misleading, and the treatment
Seems to have had reference more to the name than to the
real pathological condition. The comprehension of the phil-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I59
osophy and the true state of the case, as taught in this book,
according to the real facts involved in the science, reveals
causes as they are, and not after some hypothesis, and at the
same time states fairly and fully the means whereby the causes
may be removed. There are no clear-cut, comprehensive
methods to be relied upon in the various systems purported
to be remedial, but in most cases a “try potency,” and if that
doesn't do, try again. There are many remedies that have
had their influences, and doubtless ofttimes seemed to satisfy
both the doctor and patient—at least something was being
done, that no doubt relieving the condition satisfied. We are
not trying to disprove the efficacy of other systems, but to
show up our own. The superiority of our system is the sub-
ject under discussion, and we expect to prove it to the satis-
faction of every reasonable minded reader—as a drugless
system of healing. - - - -
- The metabolism and anabolism, as results of chemical
changes due to the intelligence conveyed through the sympa-
thetic nerves, are instances of the Divine mind—the omnipo-
tence and omnipresence of an overruling Director that is ever
superintending all His works in righteousness everywhere.
To think of chemical changes going on everywhere in our
body all the time, directed by an unseen, unfelt power, is in-
deed marvelous to contemplate. The same sort of mysterious
change goes on all of the time in all this beautiful world we
live in, and in all things in the world—in everything. It is
simply an effort, or an action, on the part of the Osteopath to
remove whatever obtrudes itself in the way of these agencies
which keep up these marvelous and mysterious changes that,
in a normal condition, produce results seemingly so opposite,
and yet so harmonious that there is harmony everywhere, and
yet a constant building up and tearing down of the material
that constitutes bone, muscle, ligament, cartilage, hair, nails,
skin, nerve, artery, vein, and gland, and all of the other tissues
of this body of ours. To assume the prerogative of being able
to n-end the ways of Deity is surely most presumptuous on
16o OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the part of the created. It is not the object of this book to
explain the author's theological views, but to show that there
is something that we call Deity that we recognize as supreme,
and that wisdom manifests itself in the direction of each
atomic cell in the body. That this organism, this wonderfully
marvelous structure, is a machine, as some would have us
believe, does not comport with facts. If we could but lift
this Science from environments, out of the association of
ignorant pretenders, whose sole aim in life is to mystify, to rel-
egate its discovery to some unlettered, ignorant “witch of
Endor,” or some spiritualistic medium, who claims control of
Some Dutch-Indian spirit of modern times, or perchance in
the Olympiad days of long ago, and that it has come on down
the ages, touching and enlightening the minds of an occa-
sional “mediumistic forecaster,” and that within a very few
years past it was discovered that “dislocation of bones”
caused all the pathological discrepancies that flesh is heir to:
The principles belonging to this science are physiological,
anatomical, easily understood, taught, and rational, and need
no mysterious mantle to obscure its meaning or cover up
its scientific results. To say that all of it is discovered is to
deny science, literature, philosophy, progress in knowledge.
To say that it, under its present status of development, can
not be improved, or a better manner of applying it improved
upon, is unreasonable, untrue.
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM AS A GUIDE TO DIAGNOSIS.
Beginning at the atlas—the junction of the occiput with
the neck—we learn that we may start influences by manipu-
lations that determine pathological conditions elsewhere, and
that through a proper stimulation of terminal nerves we may
control the action of various vital organs almost at will, de-
pending largely on our knowledge of the nervous system.
Here we impress the vaso-motor nervous system which seems
to exercise such a marvelous influence over the peristalsis of
PLATE XIII.-Raising of the Clavicles on Table.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I63.
-blood vessels, starting influences at the orifices of the heart,
... and thence along the muscular fiber of all of the arteries in
every part of the body, completely controlling the caliber
of the same, their peristalsis, the quantity and flow of all of the
fluids in every department of Our body; said to exercise two
separate and distinct influences—afferent and efferent,
conveying these to and from the heart; somehow influ-
encing the whole system in such a manner as to convey intel-
ligences to the brain of the exact status of every part, pain,
pleasure, joy or Sorrow, rejoicing or grief, health or disease.
This is the most marvelous phenomenon imaginable. While
it is supposed to be situated in what is called the cervical gan-
glia, experience has partially demonstrated, at least, that such
an influence may be produced or achieved all along the spinal
column, clear down to the last ganglia, at the lower end of
the coccyx. Recognizing the all-important fact in this sys-
tem, a complete supervision of the nervous system by this
system called the sympathetic, and understanding that the
filaments of this set of nerves begin in the calvarium and end
everywhere in and on the surface of the body, controlling all
action, motion and sensation, we can readily understand in a
measure how we effect motion through these filaments (for
we do not reach nerve centers directly in our manipulations).
At the base of the brain, on the posterior aspect of the upper
portion of the cervical region, there are collected together.
a greater number of sympathetic nerve filaments than in any
other locality reachable with the hand or fingers, hence this
becomes our vulnerable point, and here we start impressions
that seem to control motor influences in every other; and,
having learned this, we utilize this salient locality, and begin
our treatments here. This division of the spinal nerve is
recognized as the Vaso-Motor Nerve Center. It embraces
four vertebral spaces—from the base of the skull to the lower
margin of the fourth cervical vertebra. The next important
division, beginning at the fourth cervical vertebra, and em-
bracing all that part of the cervical region as far down as and
I64 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
including the first dorsal, is what is commonly recog-
nized as the Brachial Plexus. From this point down the dor-
Sal region, including the twelfth dorsal vertebra, we have the
Dorsal Plexus. Continuing from the lower margin of the
twelfth along down the column to the upper end of the sac-
rum is embraced what is termed the Lumbar Plexus. The
Sacral Plexus, of course, embraces the whole length of the
Sacrum to the coccyx. The Coccygeal Plexus, situated on
the inside of the coccyx, is called the ganglion of impar. The
importance of these divisions will appear in due time, later on.
CONSIDERATIONS EXTRAORDINARY.
The division of the nervous system, especially the spinal,
into groups of plexuses, only serves the purpose of locality of
distribution, assumed origin and effect of a stimulation in this
or that particular locality somewhere else, or at some particu-
lar exit of a spinal nerve, or the particular cluster of sympa-
thetic or other filaments. The main consideration that we
desire to emphasize above all others is the control exercised
by the sympathetic nervous system, whose filaments terminate
everywhere in the system, and that influences are exerted at
the ends of these nerves, and that these are executed through
the motor nervous system and the sensory nervous system.
The motor nervous system executes, as it were, the orders of
the sympathetic; and the sensory nervous system feels impres-
sions, and these impressions are conveyed to the headquarters
through the sympathetic nervous system. Recognizing
these principles, we are guided in our conclusions in reference
to the condition or conditions of various parts of the body.
There are no sensations without impression—pressure or
contact at the ends of nerves. Knowing the origin, course
and ending of a nerve, and knowing the office of a nerve, our
diagnosis of conditions in the parts supplied thereby becomes
clear to our vision. The nerves penetrating through muscles
have no influence on that muscle, but the influence is exer-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I65
cised by the nerves ending in the muscle. Understanding
this fact, our diagnosis should be clear as to the nerves in-
volved in a given pathological condition. And as the nerv-
ous system controls the circulation of the fluids, it may be
seen that, should interference in the normal action or office
of the nerves distributed to certain localities be made, the
results could be fairly calculated. If, for instance, cold should
contract muscular fibers through which a trunk or bundle of
nerve fibers passed, impinging upon it so as to interrupt its
normal action, the influence would be felt at the end of its
distribution, and if a motor nerve, motion in the part to which
it was distributed to a greater or less extent would be dis-
turbed. If a sensory nerve, sensation would share a like
effect; and if a sympathetic, there would be impairment of
the function of both motor and sensory, for all action, as
well as all sensation, is under the control of the sympathetic,
If the communication at the ends of the nerves is cut off, fail-
ure of the execution of function ensues. To regard the nerv-
ous system in any other light, confusion involves our every
effort to treat pathological conditions. For instance, sup-
pose we recognize any nerve passing out of the spinal cord
as one nerve, then, after it penetrates the muscular tissue a
short distance, it divides, one branch terminating in one mus-
cle and another in some other muscle (instance, the Anterior
Thoracic). Would it not seem that the same origin is the
common sense view to entertain? Our anatomists tell us that
one branch arises from the outer cord and another from the
inner cord. Suppose, now, that pain is found in the pector-
alis major, our manipulations would be directed to the press-
ure on the branch that supplies the pectoralis muscle. There
would be no use or propriety in our treatment of the branch
that comes from a different locality, and that supplies another
muscle. There is such a world of confusion in the knowledge
of the distribution of the nerves, the branch idea, and the Sup-
ply of tissue through which nerves pass, that no correct
conclusion is arrived at as to pathological conditions, under-
166 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
standing of causes, or manner of treatment required. When
it is understood that every filament, wherever distributed, has
its origin in the brain, goes to a certain place, exercises a par-
ticular function, and that at the end of that nerve; and that
every other nerve does the same thing, being distinct in iden-
tity, whether emerging through one foramen with a thousand
or a million of other nerves, every one representing a distinct
appointment, and filling a place in the animal economy, and
there ends—the influence of pressure may be better under-
stood. The nerves that supply one muscle do not supply
another—never. If the reader gets this idea into the mind,
Osteopathy will have some meaning to it. Otherwise it will
present the same jargon to his mind as the medicine theories
do. We recognize the fact that nerves originating in the
corium may end anywhere along the line of the course pur-
sued, whether it be the side of an artery or in the tissue at the
remotest point of the body under or in the skin of the
hallux.
There are, it will be understood, twelve places of origin
in the brain for nerves, and each and every fiber has its
distinct origin and ending—with no branches. We do not
regard the nervous system as having branches, nor originating
in ganglia, nor anastomosing. Everything in and controlling
the physical organism has mind to superintend its every part,
and that mind acts in harmony with itself in all other things,
and until it is demonstrated that something else than nerves
conveys through them the intelligence of a Divine Mind, I
shall insist upon the truth of the statement made regarding
the origin and distribution of the conductors of this intelli-
gence. Take, for instance, the renal splanchnic nerve: Stim-
ulation of sympathetic nerve filaments, reached at the twelfth
dorsal vertebra, increased action of the kidneys ensues. Take
the lower lumbar nerves: Stimulation of them upward lessens
the irritability of the neck of the bladder. Special nerves con-
trol certain tissue, and certain individual localities. Certain
filaments of the pneumogastric nerves control certain results
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 167
or generate certain Secretions in the walls of the stomach,
and certain others oversee the elimination of that secretion at
particular suggestions or impulses—and so it is everywhere in
the system. If this were not the case, pray tell how all of the
elements are so perfectly manufactured in all of the glandular
systems, and certain chemical constituents are removed from
the blood in certain organs and certain others in other glands?
In the salivary glands we have alkaline Secretions formed, in
the liver we have an alkaline, but in the stomach wall we have
an acid secretion. These things do not happen. It is an
every-moment occurrence from youth to old age.
It should be no trouble for the reader now to compre-
hend the philosophy of the cause of disease. Recognizing the
fact that influences of intelligence are cut off anywhere
along the line from beginning to terminus, being the only
channel of communication, is it not plain that action beyond
the cut-off is nil? The contraction of muscular fiber, direct
pressure from without, or an immediate or gradual accumu-
lation of blood or other fluids around the nerve or at the
terminal, interferes with the function of the said nerve, and if
a bundle of them in the same way, the effect is the same. And
now, as it is the province of the sympathetic nervous system
to control selection, assimilation, etc., and as this system con-
trols circulation in the capillaries, as the blood passes through
these tubes, there is the proper amount of and number of the
elements drawn therefrom to supply the demand at that par-
ticular place so as to build up waste or worn-out tissue, and
at the same time direct the elimination of the material that has
served its purpose in the physical economy, through the lym-
phatic tubes into the venoles or veins beyond the capillaries,
thence to be conveyed back to the heart, and from there to the
lungs for renovation. This constant round goes on in every
part of the body all the time, in a normal condition. This is
what we mean by a physiological condition—when there is
no obstruction, anywhere, undue pressure, contracture of mus-
cular fiber or paralysis of nerve centers so as to arrest nerve
I68 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
action. The philosophy involved in the circulatory appar-
atus, the nervous system that controls it, its anatomy and its
physiology, make it easy to comprehend how pathological
conditions are changed by manipulations, and the necessity
of understanding what normal action is, so as to be able to
correct abnormal conditions when they occur.
It is a notorious fact that somehow, through nerve influ-
ence, there are maintained in the system two antagonizing ele-
ments—the Positive and the Negative—and that these are
generated in certain parts of the system for special and dis-
tinct purposes, and that when the union of these poles takes
place, the current established, neutrality occurs, and the ex-
cess of the acid or the alkali so changed as to reinstate normal
action in the parts disturbed or exercised thereby. Whether
the scientific world has observed such a condition in the sys-
tem or not, we have not seen an account of it, but that it is so
our observations in numerous instances have abundantly
demonstrated. We have an example in point in the patho-
logical condition called colic. The excessive acid in the
stomach contracts the muscular fibers so as to compress the
sensitive nerves in the stomach walls, hence pain. This
excessive acidity is due to incoordination of the pneumogas-
tric nervous system and the splanchnic nervous system, one
generating acid and the other alkaline secretions. Proper
pressure—stimulation of the sympathetic filaments on the
sides of the spinous processes over the splanchnics—corrects
the acidity. Colic is instantaneously relieved by the proper
manipulation in the splanchnic region. -
THE ORDER OF THE SPINAL NERVES.
The First Cervical supplies the rectus lateralis, rectus
capitis, anticus, posticus, sterno-hyoid, sterno-thyroid.
The Second and Third Cervicals supply the sterno-mas-
toid, trapezius, scaleni and neck, Omo-hyoid and diaphragm.
The sensations at the back of neck to vertex, occipitalis major,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I69
minor, auricularis magnus, superficialis colli, and supraclav-
icular. r
The Fourth Cervical supplies the diaphragm, deltoid,
biceps, coraco-brachialis, supinator longus, rhomboid, supra
and infraspinatus. The sensations from the fourth cervical to
the second dorsal, reflected to the eye, on irritation of the
muscles of the neck, anterior surface of the shoulder, outer
arm, Supraclavicular, circumflex, external musculo-cutaneus,
and cutaneous nerve terminals. º *
The Fifth Cervical supplies the deltoid, biceps, coraco-
brachialis, brachialis anticus, supinator longus, Supinator
brevis, deep muscles of the shoulder blade, rhomboid, teres
minor, clavicular part of the pectoralis, and Serratus magnus.
The sensations are at back of shoulder and arm, outer side of
arm and forearm to the wrist (subclavicular, circumflex, ex-
ternal cutaneous, posterior spinal branches).
The Sixth Cervical supplies the deltoid, biceps, brachialis
anticus, subscapular, clavicular portion of the pectoralis, Ser-
ratus magnus, triceps, pronators, rhomboid and latissimus
dorsi. Reflex sensations from the fifth and sixth, that go to
the triceps, affect also the elbow, producing extension of the
forearm. That portion including the sixth to the eighth cer-
vical supplies the posterior portion of the hand, and causes
extension of hand. •
The Seventh Cervical supplies the long head of the tri-
ceps, extensors of wrist and fingers, pronators of wrist, flexors
of the wrist, subscapular, pectoralis (costal part), serratus
magnus, latissimus dorsi, and teres major; causes closure of
wrist and fingers. It is distributed to the hand, palm of the
thumb, index and one-half of the middle finger, through inter-
nal cutaneous, radial, median and posterior spinal nerves.
The Eighth Cervical supplies the triceps (long head),
flexors of the wrist and fingers, and the intrinsic hand mus-
cles. Through the internal cutaneous and ulnar, the hand,
back and palm, and inner border of the forearm.
The First Dorsal supplies the extensors of the thumb,
I7O OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
intrinsic hand muscles, thenar and hypothenar muscles, and
the sensations are chiefly on the inner side of forearm to near
the axilla, through the internal cutaneous, and lesser internal
cutaneous or nerve of Wrisberg. -
The Second Dorsal sends sensations to inner side of arm,
near and in axilla, through the intercosto-humeral.
The Second to Twelfth Dorsal supplies muscles of the
back and abdomen, erector spinae. The Fourth to Seventh
Dorsal supplies the epigastric region, and from the sev-
enth to the eleventh the abdominal region. There are vaso-
motor centers from the second dorsal to the second lumbar
region. The skin of the chest and abdomen, in bands, run-
ning around and downward, correspond to spinal nerves.
The upper gluteal region is supplied by the intercostals and
dorsal posterior nerves—with sensations.
The First Lumbar nerve goes to the cremasteric, with
third lumbar supplying the inner side of the thighs, and the
Second Lumbar supplies the vastus internus muscle, and with
the first, through the ilio-hypogastric and ilio-inguinal, sup-
plies the skin over the groin, and the second supplies the
outer, upper and front of the thigh, through the genito-crural
and external cutaneous.
The Third Lumbar and the Fourth supply the sartorius
flexors of the thigh, extensors of the knee, and abductors of
the thigh, and through the gluteal send sensations to the front
and side of the thigh (outside), and inner side of the foot and
leg through the internal cutaneous and long saphenous and
obturator.
The Fifth Lumbar supplies the outward rotators, flexors
of knee and ankle, peronei muscles and extensors of the toes,
and through the external popliteal, external saphenous, mus-
culo-cutaneus and plantar exerts an influence in these parts.
The First and Second Sacral supply the calf muscles,
glutei, peronei, extensors of the ankle and small muscles of
the foot; reflexes to the plantar region come from the fifth
lumbar, and second sacral reflex influences to the back of
PLATE XIV.a.—Arm Movement, Patient on Table.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I73
buttock, side of leg and ankle, sole of the foot and dorsum of
foot.
The Third, Fourth and Fifth Sacral send filaments to the
perineal, muscles of the bladder, rectum and external genital,
and are supposed to be the genital center, vesical center and
anal center, sending to these parts the small sciatic, pudic,
inferior hemorrhoidal and inferior pudendal.
The above is all that the anatomies and physiologists
teach op this important system, so far as reflexes are con-
cerned, and Origin of the nervous system that controls and
regulates sensation and reflexion.
The Osteopathic practice includes all these, but has
advanced greatly in regard to the controlling influence the
nervous system exerts, and does not regard simply the reflexes
so much as the controlling influences of the sympathetic
nervous system, in Superintending and directing repair and
waste, and its supreme control over every tissue in our body.
What therapeutical benefit are the sensations in the cure of
disease? The thing to do is to remove abnormal obstruc-
tions and permit normal and uninterrupted action throughout
every department, and regard reflexes as simply the influences
brought about as suggestions and declarations of the sensory
nervous system as to its impingements, etc., in the great econ-
omy of nerve influence. Our interest as Osteopaths depends
Solely upon the knowledge of the sympathetic nerves.
CERVICAL AND DORSAL NERVES.
The first cervical nerve and the second cervical ganglion
embrace the spinal, cervical plexus, hypoglossus, and the
glosso-pharyngeal.
Between the second and the third cervical vertebrae we
have the anastomosis (apparent) of the superior cervical
ganglia, with first cervical pair.
Between the second and third cervical vertebrae we have
the superior cervical ganglia, connecting with the third, the
I74 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
pharyngeal and carotid filaments (branches) of the superior
cervical ganglion, pharyngeal and inter-carotid plexus. “
At the second, embracing the second, third and fourth to
the fifth, we have the vaso-motor ganglia, which control the
circulation. -
At the third cervical begin the phrenic ganglia, embrac-
ing the fourth and fifth cervical; and between the third and
fourth we have the pharyngeal and inter-carotid plexus and
the laryngeal branches, the right pneumogastric and the
vagus. -
At the fourth cervical we have the phrenic, the superior
cardiac nerves, cervical plexus, and communicating fibers
(branches) to the superior and middle cervical ganglia. A
communicating branch or filament from the fourth cervical
unites (apparently in the same sheath) with the fifth to
begin the brachial plexus. A set of nerves from the fourth
connects the cervical with the brachial, and it is supposed
that the vaso-motor takes in the cervical from the second to
the seventh.
Between the fifth and sixth cervical we have the cardiac
plexus. Between the sixth and seventh we have the inferior
cervical ganglia, embracing the sixth and seventh.
At the first dorsal we have the center for the lungs—the
thoracic ganglia of the sympathetic nerves.
- At the second dorsal we have the cardiac plexus and the
nerve center for the ciliary plexus of nerves that control the
ciliary muscles.
At the fourth, the ganglia that control the pyloric end of
the stomach—and some intercostal nerves and vessels.
Between the fifth and sixth we have the pulmonary veins
and the vaso-motor to the arm.
At the fourth and fifth dorsal vertebrae we have the cen-
ter of abdominal brain (going to it).
The center that controls heat, chills, etc., is at the eighth
dorsal, taking in the seventh, eighth and ninth dorsal for
chills.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I75
Between the eighth and ninth, the Oesophagus, right
pneumogastric and vagus nerves.
At the ninth dorsal we control fever. Between the ninth
and tenth we control the blood supply to the ovaries.
At the tenth dorsal we treat for pain in ovaries.
At the eleventh and twelfth dorsals we have the renal
splanchnics, and treat there for the diaphragm, the kidneys,
liver, diarrhea and flux. For these affections treat up from
the Sacro-lumbar junction. Also for nocturnal enuresis and
hydrosis.
At first lumbar we have the renal plexus. At the second
the Spermatic plexus. From the second lumbar to the fourth
lumbar we have the pelvic plexus, and at the second the par-
turient plexus. At the fourth we have the defecation ganglia,
that control the action of the lower bowels. The center of
the pelvic brain is at the fifth lumbar. At the fourth is the
superior aortic plexus.
The fifth is the hypogastric plexus, and controls the vena
cava inferior.
The third sacral controls the sphincter of the bladder (?).
The fourth sacral, the vagina, relaxing it.
The fifth sacral controls the levator ani muscle and exter-
nal sphincter muscle. - - -
The above is what they teach at the American School of
Osteopathy. - e
On the following pages we reproduce diagrams and class-
ifications of the nervous system, as outlined by S. O. L.
Potter, M.D.
176 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE SPINAL NERVES, 3.1 PAIRS.
8 CERVICAL, 12 DORSAL, 5 LUMBAR, 5 SAGRAL, 1 CocCYGEAL.
N. B.-Read from the Black Type outwards to left and right.
to muscles and ( Eact. Br. }Pot T. DIV g Each |*. DIVISION, to
skin of back. & Int. Br. * ' (Spinal Nerve Plexuses, etc.
divides into j
Brs. (3) to Recti cap. Muscles.
Post. Div. Of 2d N. 1st Cervi | 2d Cerv. N.
€f VC,
Post. M. of head, etc. Post { ANT. J. Commun’g | Vagus N.
Sub-occipital
Complexus Muscle. DIV. DIV. Brs. to ) Hypogl. N.
Skin of occiput. Sup. Cerv. Gang.
Br. to Occip-atloid artic’n.
Splenius.
Cerv. ascendens.
Transv.-colli. JEact. ...” | Fil. to Sterno-mast. M.
Trach-mastoid. Supplying 2d Asc. Br. to 1st Cerv. N.
POST. ſº ANT.
Complexus. Div. VC ical p.ſ. Dese. Br. to 8d Cerv. N.
to 1st Cerv. N ſe €f Vee " | Fil. to Commun.Noni N.
O ISU Uer V. N. tº , º ºf , º, e. &
Skin of Occiput. Int. Br. Or Occipitalis Minor Nerve.
Auricular. great Occip.
Alwric. Magnus.
Splenius. Ascen. J Superf. Cervical.
Cerv. ascend. JEact. Br. JBr. W. Br. to 2d Cerv, N.
Trans. colli. ſ. supplies 3d JBr. to Spinal-ac.
Trach t POST. ical ANT.
I’ſ Cºl-1118,815. * / DIV. º: Vſ ſpiv. Fil. to 4th Nerve.
Integument Int. Br. €f Ves JDescen Fil. to Lev. ang, scap.
of...ciput. to supply ' ( Supra-clavicular.
Pr. Fit. to Com. Noni.N.
Fil. to Phrenic N.
Fil. to 3d Cery. Nerve.
Fil. to 5th Cerv. N.
Fil. to Phrenic N.
Nerve, ** \rii, to scalenus medius.
Fil. to Supra-clavic. N.
Muscles of the back: º: } 4th Cervical l ANT.
Anterior Superficial Br Ascending Set (5) to head and shoulder.
ſo ) Descending Set (3) Sternal, Clavic. Acrom.
Branches
Of Cervical * Communi- *.
1st Cerv. N. Cating to Ypogl.
Plexus. Symp.
2d Cerv. N. Muscular
Internal Set. se
3d Cerv. N. COMMUNIC. NONI NERVE.
4th Cerv. N. Deep Branches. PHRENIC NERVE.
External Set. ( Muscular (4).
} Comm’g to Spinal-acc. N.
THE SPINAL NERVES.
Cervical Plexus. -
Stezza! Claviczzzz'
Jºromzad
SCALEN US MEDłuS AND
LEVATOR ANGUL1 SCAPULAE
THE CERV to AL IS COVERED BY THE STERNO-CLEIDO - MASTOID M USCLE.
THIS PLEXU S I LIES UPON THE | } MUSCLES.

178 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE BRACHIAL PLEXUS.
Ant. Diva
5th
Cervical
Nerve.
Ant. DiV. \
6th OUTER
Cervical CORD.
Nerve.
Ant. Div.
7th ſº
Cervical . *.
Plexus.
Nerve.
Ant. Div)
8th
Cervical
Nerve. V INNER
Ant. Div. CoRD./
1st
DOrSal
Nerve. )

|Post. Thoracic N. or } to
Serrat.
Ez. Respiratory N. of Bell Imag.
Supra-spinatus.
Supra-scapular, to } Infra-spinatus.
Shoulder-joint.
Rhomboidei (5,6,Cerv.)
Subclavius (5,6, Cerv.)
Muscular, to (Scaleni (6, 7, Cerv.)
Long. colli (6, 7, Cerv.)
Lev.ang. Scap.(5,Oerv.)
\Br. to Phrenic Nerve.
ſoºn |
CORD.
JBr. to Posterior Cord Of Plexus.
Eacternal Ant. Thoracic, to Pect. major.
Muscular.
JEacternal, or Anterior.
Musculo-Cutanews. V Posterior.
Articular.
Median Nerve (outer head)
\
Scaleni (8, Cerv.)
Muscular, to {º. colli (8, Cerv.)
Above Clavicle.
Br. to Posterior Cord Of Plexus.
INNER Int. Amt. Thoracic,to Pectoral muscles.
Corp. l Internal Cutaneous.
Lesser Int. Cutan. (N. of Wrisberg).
Median Nerve (inner head).
Ulmar Nerve.
1st Subscapular, to Subscap. M.
26. Subscapular, to Lat. dorsi.
3d Scapular, to Teres major.
Circumfleac, to Deltoid and skin.
roºrºº: Muscular.
ORID,
\ Cutaneous.
Musculo-Spiral. Radial.
Post. Interosseus.
THE SPINAL NERVEs
Brachial Plexus
3.7%ree ſub- .Wérves.
2 Internal.Mºnt Zhoraetc.
NY Zazerztal-cuzaneous
Zakrer/internačcwtartrous
THE BRACHIAL PExusis
IN THE NECK AND THE Axius,
lying BErween THEANHERIOR
AND MIDDLESCALENſ MūSCLES
Aſ FiRST, THEN BELOW THE
SUBCLAVIUS AND UPON THE 1:
SERRATION OF THE SERRATUS
MAGNUS AND SUBSCAPULARIS,
If |S 0M 80TH STDES OF AND
BEHIND THE AXILLARY ARTERY
IRItszºº PORTION, EXTERNAL
THEREIJIN ITS 13:PORTION.



I8O OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
NERVES OF THE UPPER ExtREMITY.
TERMINAL BRANCHES OF THE BRACHIAL PLEXUS. ... --
(1) ExTERNAL ANTERIoR THoRACIC, to Pectoralis major.
ſ Coraco-brachialis,
Muscular, to K Biceps.
- - t Brachialis anticus.
ſ Skin of forearm (front)
Anterior Br. $ Skin of ball of thumb.
. (2) EXTERNAL or Joins Radial Nerve.
MUSCULO-
CUTANEUs. Skin of forearm (back).
Posterior Br. - Joins Radial Nerve.
Joins Ext. Cutan. Branch of
Musculo-spiral. N.
\ Articular Br. to { Elbow joint.
Pronator radii teres.
Flex. carpi rad.
ſ Muscular, to 3 Palm. longus.
Flex. subl. digit.
|
Flex. long. poll. -
Flex. prof. digit. (Ext. 34).
Pronat. quadrat.
Anterior
Interosseous, to
Palºma/r Skin of palm.
Cutaneous. } Skin of ball of thumb.
(3) MEDIAN.
to Abduct. poll.
to Opponens poll.
JEacternal Br. to Flex. brev. poll.
Digital, to thumb.
Digital, to 1st finger.
Digital, to contiguous sides
\ of index, middle and ring
. Internal Br. fingers,
Filaments to two outer Lum-
bricales.
|
• <！----‘Kiſuonxg loddneuſ. Jo seaſoN pue
N*$'nxò leſ TeſųQējgſ
<A?，?» «maeuq a?aratoſ./../o Ay~）.�
|- -，§.’ ºmoonivajoz，^\\
Ņ■|È（~~~~***（Zºº）
A ''S\$ºà>
|-SASŪſae
|§.\“??>≡
N\
THE SPINAL NERVEs.
***~~~~）;2 '2777=
1. Tº
_■º
！?！！??
¿¿?%
>->-377ut。43;
•*.%%%
�
ºè%ș%%%
ẠLae//º
§（3%„^%！)
„%
（）.gº！%ſ" %ņzºzowº-vºooº
<>/*/
<！--…gºº„? .9
*4„noſtº”），
*…ºx,●¿Q…sº�%�·
ººrwao，456ă „º%&g'º
Polter.del





I82 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ſ
ſ (4) INTERNAL ANTERIOR THORACIC, to both Pectoral muscles.
(5) INTERNAL CUTANEOUS. ſ 4nterior Br. to skin of forearm, inner side.
\ Posterior Br. to skin of forearm, inner side.
Is Often wanting, Intercosto-hum-
(8) LESSER INTERNAL CUTANEOUS. eral taking its place, to posterior
(N. of Wrisberg.) surface of lower third of skin of
8,III).
Articular, . . . . to Elbow-joint.
Flex. carp. ulnaris.
. | M. lar, . . . . e
ſ g ?/3C7//07" e to { Flex. prof. dig. (inner half).
$–
3 | Palmar Cutaneous. } Skin of front of wrist and palm
5 - of hand.
fr;
g | Dorsal Cutaneous. } Skin of back of wrist and one
H and a half fingers.
\ (7) ULNAR.
Articular, . . . . to Wrist-joint.
Superficial Brs. to } Palmaris brevis. -
rö Skin of one and a half fingers.
º
# Muscles of little finger.
: InterO.S.Sel.
" | Deep Brs. . . . . to K 2 inner Lumbricales.
Adduc. pollicis.
Flex. brev. poll. (inner head).
i.#|
/ (8) SUBSCAPULAR. . .
\
2d Long, to Latiss. dorsi.
} 1st Upper, to Subscapular muscle.
3d Lower, to Teres major.
Deltoid.
S jor Br. to
ſ Supert } Skin of Shoulder.
(9) CIRCUMFLEX. . .
\ Inferior Br. . to
*
Deltoid (post.).
{ Teres minor.
Skin of shoulder.
Triceps, Anconeus.
Brach. anticus.
Supin. long.
Ext. Carpi. Tad. long.
ſ Muscular, . . to
Cutaneous, . to Skin of arm.
JEacternal Br. to Skin. Of thumb.
(10) MUSCULO- RADIAL. Skin. Of three and a
SPIRAL. . . \Internal Br. to { half fingers on ra-
dial side of dorsum.
to all muscles on back of fore-
arm, except Anconeus, Sup.
long. and Ext. Carpi. radi-
alis long.
Filaments to wrist-joints.
POSTERIOR
\ INTERoss Eous.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 183
THE DORSAL NERVES.
N. B.-Read from the Black Types outwards to left and right.
TranSV. colli. | Muscular. Intercos.
Longis. dorsi. Tri. Ster.
Trachelo-mast. Ext. Brs)
Levat. costar. l—s to > Each Skin. Of
Sacro-lumbal. }={ Chest
Accessorius. E | 6 Upper | ANT. Div. Lateral Breast
ge Thoracic Cwtaneous. 9
E \ Dorsal de
3 Intercostals. y
ſh- Nerves. Back.
Semi-sp. dorsi Imt. Brs.
Multif. Spinae. } to / Anter? Skin of
Skin of back. * \ ºu, } Chest,
& Breast.
Intercos.
* Muscular.
Same as above. | Eact. Brs. } Abdom. M.
Skin. On back. : | Each ANT, DIV.
- a 6 Lower or gº Iloiteral Skin of
5- Dorsal Thoracico- Cut Abdomen,
3 \ abdominal weous. ( etc.
Same as above. ; Int. Brs. § { Nerves | Intercostals.
No br. to skin. Recti. M.
* Anterior { sºn o
Cutaneous.
Abdomen.
184 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE LUMBAR AND SACRAL NERVES.
/
Q
An 3 Nos.
External Branch | . 1st Ant. 1, 2, 3,
sending filaments | # Lumbar. Div.) Comm. Br.
to the Erector ź to 2d Lum-
spinae and
Intertransversales | } Nos. s
muscles, and the # 12d Ant. 3, 4, 5, ((1) Ilio-hypogas-
skin of the gluteal || Lambar. Div.) Comm. Br. trie. .
region, posteriorly. 2 to 3d Lum. 3 (2) Ilio-inguinal.
5 8 (3) Genito-crural.
CŞ FC | (4) Eact. Cutaneous.
QD Pl,
: '3d Part of ; (5) Ant. Crural.
à fºLum *. c., |3|º obturator.
An 3 j afe \t º 7". § (7) Accessory
UD \to um. [...; Obturator
Internal Branch, P. (when present)
sending filaments | Q ! Part of \ p º
to the Multifid. *—t 5, 6, 7
3 3 v3 - 9
spine, and skin |E 4th - Ant. Lumbo-
over Vertebræ of º f Lumbar. A Div. Sacral
spinal column. ; | Cord,
\# J to 5th Lum./
H
* Joins the
# | 5th Ant. Lwºmbo-
A? § f Lumb • Div. Sacral -
External Branch, # J Cord.
forming loop on 2.
sacrum and great 3. | º
Sac-Sciat. lig. to dº *
Supply skin 3. 3 } “, ral. }*. Sacral Cord -
glutei. ‘5 - and 3 (1) Super. Gluteal.
A 2d Sacral. § (2) Muscular Brs.
à 2d à | (3) Small Sciatic.
: Ant. W. Joins with * \ (4) Great Sciatic.
2 Sacra). Div. 1st Sacral. 5 (5) Pudic.
An 3 3 l (6) Articular.
sy- JOinS with
Eacternal Branch, #
to Multifidus spine |F lad {* 2d Sacral
and back part of | 1. j Sacral. Div.) and part
(the two lower Sg
nerves). § Pr. to Plex-
à 4th Ant.] us, Visc. Brs.
* Sacral. º Mus. Brs., |
\;= Fil. to 5th.
Are below the A Post. ) 5th Ant. Br. to skin of coccyx.
º | } DiY { Br. to Coccygeus M.
• W Sacral. " ' Br. to Coccygeus Nerve.
join together
in loops over.
back of sac-
rum, sending Post. \ Ant.
filaments Div. !coccygeal.) º
to Skin.
Multif. spinae, | Div
A delicate filament, going to skin,
Over coccyx.
•ązaeraer ſozumºvozā-ºgæ marr??ou.3°urnaou?-razza?7zaīīīīīą7%„№gººgººſae
• • -*7°Z，----�\ _zvā7ā777777Z，<g3è*«,
Lºzū№======#ā777āsāõ7NQNº
ºkºŹŹ=īJavorarã-。™Sº,N -· ، R
:ſí=\，A46: *…ºae-
viſāºveza，…） ſā`
¿º
zaſadº
's 22x22/72242229
THE SPINAL NERVES.
—y—
'87/X2/7/242/1727
*$3$1\X0I&I
Teroes º requin T
Đų). Jo $9ųQuDeJºſ. Jo uoſ!mqſJĮSIGI
| 494.22，7zºsta， ș.ae/~uraſſº
Potter, del







I86 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE BRANCHES
FROM THE 7 GREAT THUNKS OF THE LUMBAR PLEXUS.
Iliac, to skin of gluteal region.
(1} LLIO-HYPogláSºc . . . } Hypogastric, to skin of that region.
to Internal Oblique Muscle.
() ILIO-INGUINAL . . . . to skin of upper and inner thigh, scrotum, penis.
(3) GENITO-CEURAL - } Genital, to Cremaster, scrotum, round ligament.
Crwral, to skin of upper and front thigh.
Amt. Br. to skin of anterior and outer thigh,
above knee.
Post. Br. to skin of posterior and outer thigh,
above knee.
(4) EXTERNAL CUTANEOUS .
to Sartorius, and skin of tul-
Mid. Cutaneous. { terior thigh above knee.
Eact. Br. to skin, lateral Or
ſ Ant. knee.
Div. 3 +* * * Post. Br. to skin of inner
thigh and leg.
(5) ANTERIOR to skin of knee and of front
CRURAL. U Long Saphenous. and inner leg and foot.
Muscular Brs. to muscles on front of thigh all
POSt. but two.
S Div. Articular Brs. (2) to capsules of knee- and hip-
joints.
Articular Brs. to hip-joint.
Muscular Brs. to Adductors, Gracilis and I’ec-
A mt. tineus.
• Br. Anastomotic Brs. with Inter. Cutan. and Int.
Saphenous.
(6) OBTURATOR .
* Post Articular Brs. to knee-joint. --
". Muscular Brs. to Adduc, mag. and Obturator
}*. externus.
Muscular Br. to Pectineus.
(7) ACCE O Articular Br. to hip-joint. Occasionally
SSORY OETURATOR. . Cutaneous Br. to skin of thigh present.
and leg.
The Lumbar Plexus lies in the substance of the Psoas muscle, in front of the
tranverse processes of the lumbar vertebrae.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 187
DISTRIBUTION OF THE BRANCHES OF THE
SACRAL PLEXUS.
Sup. Br. to the Gluteus medius and minimus.
Inf. Br. } to the Gluteus medius and minimus.
(1) SUPERIOR GLUTEAL, . . .
* to the Tensor vaginae femoris.
Pyriformis, Obturator internus, the two Gem-
(2) MUSCULAR BRANCHES, to { elli, and the Quadratus femoris muscles.
(3) ARTICULAR BRANCHES, to the hip-joint.
Gluteus maximus muscle.
ſ Inf. Gluteal, . {: of side of penis, or vulva.
Skin of upper and inner thigh, and of
(4) SMALL SCIATIC. & Inf. Pudendal, } Scrotum. Or labium.
Ascending, to Skin over Glutei.
\ Cutaneous, . {º: to Skin of posterior thigh.
ſ Articular, . . to the hip-joint.
Adductus magnus, Biceps.
Muscular, to . {::::::::::::: Semi-tendinosus.
(5) GREAT SCIATIC.
ExTERNAL POPLITEAL or PERONE.A.L. W. Terminal Branches.
W. INTERNAL POPLITEAL NERVE. (See page 190.)
to Skin of anus, scrotum,
Superficial Prince, penis and labia, and the
Sphincter ani muscle.
ſ Perimeal, |
Muscular, to perineal muscles.
ſ to Sphincter ani muscle.
(6) PUDIC, . . . . Inferior Hemorrhoidal, \ to Skin of anal region.
\. Dorsal of Penis, ;: of dorsum of penis.
Br. to Corpora cavernosa.
The Sacral Plexus lies in the pelvis upon the Pyriformis muscle, and is
covered by the Pelvic fascia, and the Sciatic and Pudic arteries.
I88 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE SYMPATHETIC NERVOUS SYSTEM.
On the Anterior Communicating Artery.
Ganglion of Ribes. { In it begins the double chain of gangliated cords
enumerated below.
Some to Pneumogastric, Glossopharyn-
geal and Hypoglossal Nerves.
JEacternal JEact Br. forms Carotid PleX.
JBranches º | Int. Br. forms Cavernous
to join the Superior * * * Plex, along. Int, carotid
Sup. Brs.
1st, 2d, Cervical Artery.
3d, 4th Gangſion. Anterior Branches, to Plexus on Ext. Carotid Artery.
Cervical ( Pharyngeal, to Pharyngeal Plexus.
Nerves. Int. Bºrs Superior Cardiac Nerve, to Cardiac. Plex-
º e us, goes to Deep Pl. On right side, to
Superficial Pl. on left side of body.
JEact. Brs. to ſ Middle | Filaments along Inf. Thyroid Art. to
5th and 6th g Thyroid body and Larynx.
Cervical Cervical Imt. Brs. | Mid. Cardiac Nerve, to Deep Cardiac
Nerves, i Ganglion. ( Plexus.
JEact. Brs. to g Filaments along Vertebral Art. to crani-
#... s. ſ Interior Int. Brs ll Ill.
Cervical Cervical e e Inf. Cardiac Nerve, to Deep Cardiac
Nerves. Ganglion. Plexus.
Upper 5th or 6th to Aorta and Vertebral
Column.
- 2d, 3d and 4th to Post. Pulmonary Plexus.
Ext. Brs. to ſ 12th Y ººth from the 3d Splanchnic Nerve,
* Porsal { Thoracic ; Int. Prs. 6th-10th, Great Splanchnic, to Semi-
€I’Vee G g
anglia. lunar Gang.
- 10th-11th, Small Splanchnic, to Coeliac
Plexus. -
12th, Smallest Splanchnic, to Renal
\ Plexus.
Lumbar Lumbar . Hºrs.
Nerves. Ganglia.
JEact. Bºrs. to 4th |
| Int Some to Hypogastric Plexus.
{ Some to Aorta Plexus.
JEact. Brs. to 4th |
Sacral Sacral Int. Hrs. } to Pelvic Plexus.
Nerves. g ſ to Plexus of Middle Sacral Artery.
Ganglia.
Coccygeal
G. or | In which ends the double chain of gangliated cords
•? & enumerated above, and called The Sympathetic
Ganglion Nervous System.
Impar. J
lvic
Rüş
2:
§#########№№Tº№
Œœ#= \， []§=
∞
sººs=~~~=
//Guſ?: 2
/*/60/76 /
Cerebro-Spinal and Sympathetic Nervous Systems.





I90 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE NERVES OF THE LEG AND FOOT.
[TERMINAL BRANCHEs of THE GREAT Sora TIC.]
ſº Articular (8), distributed to the knee-joint.
(2) Cutaneous (2 or 8), to skin of leg, exteriorly and posteriorly.
Front muscles of leg.
ſ Muscular, to { Peroneus tertius.
EXTERNAL (3) ANTERIOR Eacternal Bºr Extensor brevis digitorum.
PopLITEAL TIBIAL. 3. 700, e Tarsal articulations.
Or
PERo NEAL
NERVE.
Skin of contiguous sides of great
U Internal Br. { and 2d toes.
r Muscular, to } Peroneus longus and brevis.
Skin, outer side of foot and
ankle.
\":::::::. A Pºternal Br. skin, contiguous sides 8d, 4th
ge and 5th toes.
Skin, inner side of foot and
ankle.
| Internal Br. Skin, contiguous sides 2d and 3d
toes and inner side of great toe.
/ (1) Articular (8), to knee-joint.
(2) Muscular, to Gastrocnemius, Plantaris, Soleus and Popliteus.
Formed by a filament from each of the
(3) ExT. SAPHENOUS, Popliteal nerves, to skin of outer side
of the foot and little toe.
POPLITEAL
NERVE.
Flexor longus pollicis, Flexor
(Muscular, to longus digitorum. Tibialis
posticus.
INTERNAL |
Plantar Cutaneous, to skin of heel and sole.
Digital, to skin, 8% inner toes.
POSTERIOR Internal Muscular, to flexors, etc.
TIBIAL. Plantar. Articular, to tarsus.
Cutaneous, to sole of foot.
Muscular, to Flexor accessorius
Swper- to 1%. Outer toes.
Eacternal . l, Flexor brevis min. dig.
Plantar. * | 4th Interosseous.
Deep Br. | 3d and 4th Lumbric.
| Best of Interossei.
GENERAL AND SPECIAL TREATMENT
GENERAL, TREATMENT.
Beginning at the back of the neck, raising the neck up
with the hands, fingers meeting near spinous processes on
either side of vertebrae, with top of head against operator,
springing neck as shown in Plate No. I., then dropping hands
on either side of neck, proceed to roll head from side to side,
using the fingers alternately against side of neck, moving and
manipulating all of the muscles on the posterior aspect of
neck up and down the sides of neck for several successive
moves; then placing one hand under neck, the ends of fingers
reaching across back of neck to under and posterior side of
the mastoid process, the other hand gently curved around the
chin, pull gently with both hands until there is a perceptible
moving of the whole body upwards; then, holding taut the
hands in position named, turn head toward fingers of hand
under neck, pressing upward with ends of fingers on neck; still
holding neck taut, turn head back to former straight position
with the body, then let go both hands; change position of
hands so as to turn head in other direction same way. Then
holding the finger ends all in a bunch near spinous processes,
against back of neck, make several vibratory moves with both
hands at the same time, jerking up and down with both hands,
fingers pressing on sides of neck, well back near spines, mov-
ing up and down the neck as moves are made. Then place
the ends of one or two fingers in angle of jaws, direct patient
to open the mouth widely, and operator pulls fingers upward
behind angle of jaws tightly, and as patient closes mouth and
jaws lets go. This is not painful, except fingers are held taut
while the jaws are being closed, which should not be done.
Then, with finger ends closed in a bunch, with pulp ends
(191) • *
I92 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
placed on temples, vibrate rapidly all around in and on tem-
ples for several successive rapid movements, dropping thumbs
on forehead at the same time and rapidly rotating over every
part of the forehead. That done, drop thumbs on either side
of the nose, pull them upward and outward, crossing the
supraorbital notch, ending that move on the forehead above
superciliary ridge; then place the thumbs at lower outer
angles of nostrils on either side, pressing gently, follow angle
of malar bones downward and outward two or three times,
winding up that movement with vibratory movements on
side of face, and on either side of nose, and finally placing
thumb on one side and spread-out fingers of hand on
side of nose, index finger and the end of the thumb
placed deeply in inner canthus of eye, pressing on
the papillae, and holding thumb and finger so as not to
squeeze together hard, nor to spread apart, with a sudden
downward pressure make finger and thumb ends press upon
inside of canthus on lachrymal sack, so as to stimulate nerves
and blood vessels. This done, place one hand on forehead of
patient standing at the side of the table, with the fingers of
other hand cupped slightly, ends close to spinous processes,
with a pushing of head from and a pulling of fingers toward
operator, letting fingers accommodate themselves to the side
of neck in such a way as to apparently pull the skin, with the
muscles, from their moorings, as the head is pushed in the
opposite direction. Manipulate all of one side of the neck
thusly, then treat other in the same way.
The clavicles deserve our next attention. They should
be raised or pressed outward at every treatment, as the con-
traction of the various chest muscles—contraction of-draws
them downward, so as to unduly press upon important ves-
sels and nerves, prominent of which are the jugular veins,
which convey the blood from head and neck to the heart. To
raise clavicles and stretch muscular fibers involved is impor-
tant, and to do so requires a little skill and dexterity on the
part of the operator. The easiest and surest method is to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I93
stand at the side of the patient, his arm lying at the side of the
body, the operator taking hold of the arm at the elbow with
left hand applied on under side of, and at the lower end of
humerus, in such a position as to push the whole arm upwards,
close to the side of patient, far enough to displace the clavicles
upward enough for operator to place fingers of other hand
between clavicle and first rib, and with a firm hold, presses the
arm outward and upward to a right angle of the body, gently
pulling on the fingers, with which hold the clavicle from body.
Care should be had as to how much pressure should be used,
not to overstretch the attachments at one sitting. Now the
patient is to turn on either side; the operator, on side of table
facing patient, well up toward and opposite shoulders, takes
hold of the wrist with one hand, placing the fingers, gently
curved, on the side of dorsal vertebrae (upper side of them,
next to Operator), then, with arm extended to the side of the
head, assuming an easy position along side of the head, a
simultaneous move of both arms is to be made, the sudden
pressure of the pulp ends of the fingers of the hand against
the back is to be made, and at the same instant the arm is to
be extended, and the arm and fingers against the back are to
be held taut while the extended arm is thrust or brought
downwards with a sudden, rapid move over arm of operator;
then, drawn back as before, and the fingers moved down the
back an inch or two, repeating this move until the spine is
treated as far as to tenth or twelfth dorsal. Then the other
side is to be treated in like manner. Then the patient is to
lie on the back, and the lower limbs manipulated in the fol-
lowing manner: Let the operator, standing at the side of the
table, with patient on back, take hold of the leg with one hand,
just below the knee, flex the leg on the thigh, place fingers
against loin in such a manner as to press firmly, then press
the limb toward abdomen, knee pointing toward the chin,
and with an upward, outward motion of the leg and knee
manage to press the body over on the ends of the fingers,
which are placed on the back, as aforesaid; and continue this
I94 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
move several times, bringing the fingers on the back down-
ward an inch or two each rotary move made by the leg, com-
ing down with the fingers about half way between the ischium
and great trochanter, and then go up to same place on lum-
bar, and repeat the moves. This frees the muscular system
in the region of the hips, and is the treatment for sciatica—
one of them. The leg should be flexed upon the thigh and
the thigh on the abdomen moderately two or more times, so
as to stretch the muscles and increase the flow of blood, taking
off the pressure from the deeper veins of the thigh. While at
this part of the body, and as a continuation of the general
treatment, let the operator take hold of the leg at or just
below the knee, flexing it toward the abdomen, with the fin-
gers of the other hand placed near the center of the anterior
part of the thigh, one or two inches below the angle (Pou-
part's ligament), holding fingers moderately tight against
thigh at that place; with the hand holding the knee push the
whole limb upwards, gently rolling it outward, and at the
same time pulling the skin and deeper structures outward (in
the femoral region), opening the Saphenous vein, so as to let
the venous blood return to the femoral, thence to the iliac
veins. Then, still holding the knee with one hand, place the
half-closed fingers of the other hand near the knee, on under
side, so as to pull the muscles as the hand on the knee pushes
the knee the other way—toward the other leg. The muscles
of the inside of the thigh may be moved from the knee to the
thigh this way, and all of these muscles should be moved in
this, or any other manner best suited to the circumstances and
the mood of the operator and the comfort of the patient. The
other limb should be treated in the same manner. Now your
patient is ready to be placed upon the face, unless the liver
needs attention. If so, treatment may be done while on back,
as directed elsewhere. The patient lying on the stomach, or
face downward, the operator may treat the back in either or
all of the following ways: Getting up on the table on one
knee and other foot on the table, at the side of the patient,
A DRUGLEss systEM of HEALING. 195
taking hold of the ankle of opposite limb with one hand, the
other hand placed on opposite side of the spinous processes,
heel of hand against muscles, raise leg, gently pulling it
toward the back, forming a curve, at the same time pressing
against the back, beginning about the middle of the back; let
each move be made complete, letting the foot down each time,
and repeat this move a number of times, moving the hand
down the back its width each move until all of the lumbar
and sacral regions are treated. The same moves may be
made with the finger and thumb embracing each side of the
spinous processes, covering same territory or region of the
back. This should be repeated on the other side, with other
limb as well, being careful not to spring the back too strongly,
so as to do harm. The springing or sudden pressure with the
fingers on the sides of the spinous processes may now be
made along down the spine, from the first to last dorsal and
lumbar vertebrae, with sudden, springy motion with both
hands, followed up by the rotary movements upward and out-
ward, beginning at the shoulders or the sacrum, depending on
results the operator desires. This will be referred to in the
body of the book. This constitutes the general treatment
while the patient is on the table. The various movements
that are to be made while the patient is sitting up may be
made at same sitting, if needed.
SPECIAL MOVES FOR SPECIFIC RESULTs.
During the general treatment, regard should be had for
special ailments. Many of the various conditions or patho-
logical conditions of various parts of the body may be reme-
died or treated while the patient is on the table and during
the administration of the general treatment; such as the
treatment for eye affections, ear and throat, lungs, heart, asth-
matic, pleuritic, liver, spleen, diarrhoea, flux, womb and bowel
troubles. The choice of positions is not so essential as the
correct application of manipulations, the proper pressure in
196 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the various parts of the body, the intensity or non-intensity of
the treatment. These should vary according to the condi-
tion, stage of disease, susceptibility of patient to the handling
the various parts of the body. These things should be largely
governed by our knowledge of the condition of the
patient, which is a matter of no small consequence
to both patient and operator. The treatments should
be varied according to circumstances. Some patients
should be treated as often as every day, others three
times a week, and some twice a week, others only occa-
sionally. Many pathological conditions yield at one treat-
ment; others require longer or shorter courses of treatment.
There is a prevailing idea with some that Osteopathic treat-
ment is so marvelous in its results that all diseases succumb
thereto at once, because a few conditions are so suddenly
relieved thereby. Regarding Osteopathy as a wonderful
means of treating the body for the various pathological condi-
tions that we often find in it, there should be the necessary
amount of common Sense used as to its applicability in any
given case, just the same as in every other system
of healing, and we should not lose sight of the stub-
born fact “that man is born to die” some time, and
that some diseases, especially some stages of some diseases,
are invulnerable, yield to no sort of treatment. Our means
seem the most rational of any that we know, and have a
greater range of applicability than any other; and Osteopathy
possesses such varied resources that it stands alone as regards
versatility, positive effectuality in many instances that almost
approaches the miraculous (a little short of the Divine power
itself), and being natural, can justly be classed in this category
—rightly understood and applied. The opposition to its use
is justly attributed to a want of understanding of it on the
part of the people, as well as the doctors. It, like every other
measure of merit, is working its way along the lines
of approval, and growing in interest and favor wherever
its benign influence is felt, so that it will be fully
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. I97
recognized in due time without the acts of public
approval through legislative bodies, for the cured will
tell it everywhere, and the benefits will not be “hidden
under a bushel,” but blazoned forth like the genial rays of the
great shining orb, the Sun, at noonday, gladdening the hearts
of the people, sick and well, wherever known. This is no
dreamy prognostication, for it is already able to walk alone,
and soon to lay aside its Swaddling garments and don robes
more elaborate and more attractive. All it needs is to be
properly understood and rightly applied, and it opens up the
flood-gates of life and lets the vital fluids run in their wonted,
normal channels—then life flows on as a river.
GENERAL, TREATMENT NECESSARY.
There are some manipulators (Osteopaths) who regard
certain moves for local affections sufficient, and hastily make
these moves, and move the patient at once, having done but
little, if any, good for the patient. Rest assured that when an
operator does so, he is either ignorant of the conditions gov-
erning the case, or indifferent as regards the consequences of
treatment, or both. In order that Osteopathy receive the
approval of the people, honest, intelligent manipulators
should administer it. The automaton who has only learned
a few moves, relieved a few pains, is illy prepared to become a
competitor or a rival of medical practitioners in any com-
munity, after the people learn the caliber of his intellectuality.
The very words of such an individual indicate his ability, his
knowledge of the human system, and as was said to one many ſº
centuries ago: “Out of thine own mouth will I condemn
thee.” Any new science must have intelligent expounders
and thoroughly posted representatives, honest, upright dem-
onstrators of the truths of the science. The extraordinary
superiority of this science can be made to stand out in bold
relief when properly presented by the right sort of intelli-
gences, men or women, or both. A knowledge of the medical
198 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Sciences is not an essential prerequisite to a knowledge of this
Science, but the operator should have a fair knowledge of
anatomy, physiology and pathology. Knowing these three
divisions, including the knowledge of normal or abnormal
structure, as well as the offices or functions of the various
organs of the body, and being versed in Osteopathy, he or she
is prepared to adjust the system to itself much better, more
easily, Surely, satisfactorily than has been done by other sys-
tems, including medical, massage, Swedish movement, et al.
The reader will not be misled by our assertions into the idea
that we ignore surgery or the tissue elements. Our position
as regards the tissue elements may be seen elsewhere in this
work. We would emphasize our estimate of the necessity
of practitioners of this science being honest in understanding
it, honest in applying it, and honest in stating what may rea-
Sonably be expected of its application in relieving the afflicted.
Whilst our object in writing this book is to make plain and
comprehensible the science, so that the ordinarily intelligent
may thoroughly comprehend its philosophy, we would not be
understood as willing to relegate its use wholly to that class
of practitioners, for we are satisfied that the medical profession,
with ordinary mechanical skill, with their general knowledge
of pathology, will be the better able to utilize it to greater and
much better advantage, and are further satisfied that persons
about to learn this science with anatomy, physiology and
pathology before mentioned, will concede our right to that
opinion, and go to some school of their choice, where the
other sciences are thoroughly taught, and learn them, whether
they ever have occasion to use them or not. It pays to know
what the other fellow knows, so as, should occasion require it,
to know how to use intelligent argument. Be posted!
PLATE XIV. b.-Continued Arm Movement.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2O I
y
SPECIAL TREATMENT.
While the illustrations in the body of this book represent
almost all of the manipulations requisite for the treatment of
all sorts of ailments, in that they explain how to free the circu-
lation and to take off the pressure, yet we would add a few
remarks in reference to special treatments. It will not be
necessary to go through with all of the manipulations at one
sitting, and the operator must exercise his or her own judg-
ment in regard to what treatment is required in any particular
pathological condition. The thorough treatment of the mus-
cles of the neck will be required most generally in all condi-
tions found anywhere; for here we start to free the vital fluid
that is often the cause of disease in other parts of the body;
for here are the beginnings of cervical influences that, if not
free, are exercised in other parts of the body. Here we find
the cervical ganglia, which distribute fibrillae to many impor-
tant organs, and life's forces are modified very largely by the
conditions found here. The brachial plexuses are found here,
and the office of the nerves coming from this portion of the
neck is more frequently interfered with here than at their dis-
tributed portions. The pneumogastric and phrenic nerves
are reached here, as well as the spinal accessory, and here we
have to do in opening the gates of important veins that, being
partially or completely closed by muscular contractions, im-
pede the return of blood to the heart, causing catarrh, head-
ache, eye, ear, throat and nasal congestions. The directions
for the treatment of the neck will be found to be important in
all cases where freedom of circulation is involved, and to stim-
ulate other parts through nerves passing through this part of
the body to others, and very frequently a pain or a diseased
part may be relieved by simply knowing its nerve supply and
lifting the pressure from it in the cervical or brachial region.
If we could write in glittering letters of flame, so as to
emphasize the motto, “Take Off the Pressure” everywhere,
2O2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the reader would understand the importance of our philoso-
phy being carried out. This is all there is in Osteopathy, and
all there is in the treatment and the cure of all curable dis-
eases. To repeat each move to be made under the different
names of disease is to presume the operator is incompetent to
comprehend a direction once given. We wish it distinctly
junderstood that we reach all parts of the physical man
through the organic nervous system, and we do this by the
stimulation of terminal nerve filaments. At the same time
there is an influence had in the direction of adjustment of the
System to itself, in cases of luxations, either from contractions
of muscular fibers or direct violence. These must be looked
after, and righted, whether at once or repeatedly manipulated,
depending on conditions.
There will necessarily have to be frequent references to
illustrations of moves, so as to make familiar the means used
to accomplish certain results, and familiarize the reader or
student with the various manipulations necessary to accom-
plish his purpose. *
After freeing all of the muscles in the cervical and bra-
chial regions, respect is to be had regarding the clavicles.
They should be raised so as to take off the pressure of impor-
tant blood vessels and nerves, and especially the venous sys-
tem, for here all of the diseases that affect the head and throat
most generally originate. All headaches, mouth, throat,
chest and arm troubles, as well as heart and lungs, must be
influenced by treatment here. Diseases of eyes and ears, in
fact, of all above the clavicles, are caused by impediment to the
return circulation of blood through the jugulars. The blood
and the lymphatic fluids accumulating in the cervical region
press upon the terminal filaments of the sympathetic nerves in
this locality, preventing their action, their connection with the
terminal footlets of the motor nervous system; action ceases,
fluids accumulate, chemical changes at once set in, the pent-
up poisons increase, and every evil possible ensues; whereas, if
these veins had not been unduly pressed upon, and the blood.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2O3
had been allowed to pursue its normal course undisturbed,
no evil would have occurred. The very moment the pressure
is removed, amelioration begins. This is the marvel of this
Science: simply to know how to remove the pressure does
the work, if done.
We go on down the spinal column, lifting off the press-
ure, stimulating terminal nerve filaments, using the bones as
our levers and the body as a weight, and our hands, thumbs
and fingers as the fulcrums in lifting off the pressure and ad-
justing the system to itself, seeing to it that every bone, mus-
cle, nerve and tendon are in proper condition and performing
their natural function in the whole body. We find contracture
of the chest muscles, as well as the intercostals, interfering
with venous circulation, and that requires our attention, all
along the dorsal region, and as they are especially concerned
in the respiration, and respiration is necessary to the purifica-
tion of the blood as it passes through the lungs, we must
keep pressure off here, or take it off when existing here. We
begin to understand the use of arms as levers to remove the
pressure. Hence our instructions in regard to how to move
the arms, where to hold them, when and how to manipulate
them in the treatment of all diseases of the chest, embracing
heart, lungs, liver, spleen, stomach and viscera.
As we descend into the lumbar region, we find important
points which demand our most careful and special attention,
for here, right at the junction of the twelfth dorsal and first
lumbar, are fibers that, stimulated, reach the kidneys and cor-
rect many pathological conditions that other means fail to do.
The second lumbar vertebral ganglia are important in that
there are nerve fibers reached here that control the genital
organs and the muscular tissue on the thighs and legs. Pro-
ceeding downward to the next, or third lumbar, we reach
filaments that control the gluteal region, and continuing down
to the fourth and fifth, we reach regions of vital importance
to the patient in the treatment of diseases of the pelvic viscera,
and affections of the leg muscles.
2O4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Each and every department of our body is supplied with
nerve filaments that come from the brain, and we can only
influence them through sympathetic filaments, so that it
becomes a matter of great interest to the manipulator to
regard proper starting points if good is to come of the treat-
ment. A haphazard sort of manipulation may result in bene-
fit, but it is better to know how to do the work intelligently,
then we have the satisfaction of commanding the situation.
The correct knowledge of how to make these moves we call
Osteopathic manipulations becomes vitally interesting when
important pathological conditions involving the life or death
of the patient are considered. Much depends on the know-
ledge of the manipulator, and the how he does it, to produce
the changes that are imminent in certain stages of some dis-
eases favorably. Our battle ground, then, is the whole man.
The freedom from the enthraldom of pressure everywhere is
the work of the Osteopath. The hands, fingers and arms
execute his will power in every given case, and his knowledge
influences his will power correctly or incorrectly, as his under-
standing is of the conditions and means of relief he possesses.
The effect of manipulations depends largely on how they
are done. *
The hardness or softness of the muscular tissue has much
to do in results, for some are affected easily, requiring light
treatments, which would be injurious if more strength were
applied, whereas some stand strong, vigorous treatments.
Then again, due regard must be had as to time the treatments
shall continue, whether for chronic or acute affections, the
frequency of, nature of disease, its duration, character,
whether it involve one or more organs, vessels, and how con-
ditions of tissue involved are at the time. The demand for
the exercise of good judgment is as great in...this science as in
others, and it is presumable that the manipulator shall have
studied anatomy and physiology, and whatever else enters
into a knowledge of the human system, ere he goes to work at
this science as a manipulator, to be successful. Results may
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2O5
follow these treatments, done as recommended, and help may
be necessary at once, and this would justify any one qualified
to render it, but we surely would recommend careful study of
the human system before a general practice of this system be
entered on by any one. It is not necessary that long years of
study of the sciences should precede the practice of this
science, but it is essential to know this to successfully prac-
tice. This book will teach all that is discovered in Oste-
opathy up to this date. We are not presumptuous enough to
recommend our book as a text-book, but verily believe that
in it will be found all that is known of the science in its appli-
cation to all diseases. -
VARIOUS MOVEMENTS IN DIFFEREN'T PATHOLOGICAL CON-
DITIONs.
The many manipulations described and shown in plates
might be greatly multiplied, but these serve to elucidate the
principal ones necessary to the successful treatment of almost
every pathological condition known. .
The practical common sense of the operator in the appli-
cation of the manipulations to the end desired, or object to be
attained, is an anticipated desideratum that is as essential as
the various moves are in the removal of obstructions needed
in the treatment of patients diseased with any and all sorts of
ailments, and in the different parts of the body.
There are many similar conditions in many named patho-
logical states that should receive similar treatment, and the
reader of these pages will often wonder why one or more
plates are referred to for treating diseases differently named.
This will appear quite plausible when it is considered that ob-
structions to the circulation cause very different results. It
would take volumes to explain why this is so with all of the
various pathological conditions with which humanity is
afflicted. To make it plain, we would offer the following
explanation, which will be sufficient to elucidate the matter
2O6 osteoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of similar manipulations for different diseases. Sore throat
and diphtheria—these are supposed to be different patholog-
ical conditions, both involving the same region (the throat),
and yet the same throat treatment is used in the one as in the
other, varying only in time, pressure used, and vessels to be
manipulated, which to the observer seems to be the same
treatment. Scarlet fever and erysipelas are other examples
seemingly treated alike, resulting differently, because the
pathological conditions vary, yet the very same blood vessels
are involved in one as in the other. Our treatment is not the
treatment of the name of a disease, but the condition of the
part affected.
The Osteopath regards disease as the result of obstruc-
tion, and the obstruction removed, removes the cause, what-
ever the name of the pathological condition may be. Treat
John as you would James, if both have the same condition,
regardless of their names. The treatment may embrace more
of the system in the one case than the other, because other
organs may be involved, requiring different manipulations.
Obstructions anywhere in the system produce effects accord-
ing to structure involved, and due regard must be had to this
matter, or the Osteopath runs into the same state as most
other practitioners do—that of a “Routinist.” Each and
every move made starts forces that are effectual for good or
ill, depending largely on locality, structures involved, etc.
The Osteopath has learned when, where and how to apply
these forces to produce such marvelous effects as are often
the result of his “magic touch,” as is at times ascribed to him.
There are vulnerable points in our systems, which, if attacked
or properly influenced, make us ecstatic or lull us to sleep,
produce pain or relief.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2O7
TABLE FOR CONVENIENT TREATMENT.
The table should be solid, heavy enough to hold any
weight desirable, made of good, sound timber. It should be
thirty inches high at one end, twenty-six at the other, twenty-
six to thirty inches wide, and covered with a good three-inch
mattress, or upholstered, with an elevated pillow-like promi-
nence at the highest end, for the head of the patient to rest on
while being treated. All this should be covered with good
oil-cloth or pantasot. Oil-cloth is more satisfactory, as it is
easier kept clean and does not mark so easily. The table may
be level—twenty-six inches high—provided with a hinge joint
about two feet at one end, and provided with a ratchet half-
circular (notched brass casting), so as to raise the head to any
elevation desirable. (This will cost a couple of dollars more,
but it is convenient for use in every way.) As it is necessary
in the treatment of some chronic cases to get up on the table,
it is proper to have a good, strong, wide table, and we would
advise one that is substantial.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS AS TO MANIPULA-
TIONS.
It is said that “there is no excellence without great
labor,” and that if anything is “worth doing, it is worth well
doing,” and it is most emphatically so in Osteopathy. The
manipulator should be thorough in every treatment for every
affection, for the manipulations have to do in starting forces
that change the conditions radically in the parts manipulated
as well as in the parts to which the nerves are distributed.
In nearly all treatments we start to treat the cervical region,
for this locality is the nearest the starting point of all of the
forces in the body, and here the gateway to every other
department in the physical economy opens, and here we have
more to do in controlling nerve force, regulating the circula-
208 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
tion of the fluids of the body, and removing obstructions that
interfere with the return circulation from the brain to the
heart. The manipulation of all of the muscles of the neck
should be thoroughly done, beginning lightly, and gradually
stirring up and moving not only the superficial, but all of the
deeper structure on all sides of the neck until all are rendered
normal, as nearly as may be at one sitting. This done, prop-
erly, the vaso-motor nerves as well in the upper and posterior
portion of the cervical region properly stimulated, and the
neck and spine stretched and neck adjusted in the act of
stretching, and then the clavicles raised, the congestion
begins at once to give way, and the life-forces start up, and
already the patient begins to improve. It is not necessary to
be rash in any of these manipulations, but persistence and
patience, with carefulness, bring about results that are almost
universally satisfactory. All of the various throat affections
yield to this sort of treatment without fail, if properly done,
and pent-up fluids that are producing pressure that prevents
the nervous system from performing normal functions, pass
on through normal channels; the pain, redness and swelling
cease and relief is at once secured; whereas, medicating for
such conditions fails to give relief, from the fact that relief
comes from taking off the pressure. Whatever condition of
an abnormal character is found to exist in this region, relief
may come readily by the careful, thorough manipulations, as
directed for this part of the body. -
The whole cause of disease in every part of the body
being obstructed circulation, the treatment rationally resolves
itself into a restoration of the circulation to a normal condition.
Results can not but be satisfactory when this is done. The
trouble is, the people have been so used to depending on
medication that they won't see any other way. It makes no
difference how many failures they have seen or experienced,
no other way seems right to them, and many are so prejudiced
against using means different from what they have been
accustomed to, they would rather risk its evil consequences
PLATE XV.-Treatment of Back of the Neck.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2 II
than resort to means that compromise their prejudices, or
turn them from beaten paths, however glowing the promise
of better results. Prejudice will be overcome in time to con-
vince some that now live of the truths of the philosophy we
now teach.
DISLOCATION OF BONE–CAUSE OF.
There is a great deal said about dislocations of the bones
of the human system, and a passing by that subject in this
book would be considered osteopathically non-professional
and unfair, therefore I would most respectfully call attention
to the subject and endeavor to explain what Osteopaths (who
know Osteopathy) mean by “dislocation of a bone.” When
it is considered that all muscular fiber is elastic, to a greater
or less extent, and that the bones are held in place by liga-
mentous structure, and that muscles are generally attached
to the ligamentous structure (and that to the bone or bones),
it will be readily understood that the contraction of the mus-
cular fibers renders taut the ligamentous structure; and in case
a particular portion of the muscular fiber attached to the side
or the end of a small bone, a rib or a flimsy joint, or even one
of the strong muscles, contracting, draw a large joint out of,
or partly out of place, and the end of the bone press unduly
on a nerve or blood vessel, the results may be imagined—
pain, paralysis, or pressure on a vein, artery or a lymphatic, or
numerous fibers of either, the morbid results may be easily
conjectured. This condition is often seen when the facts
become apparent to the physician that such a state of affairs
is possible. But the profession are wont to ridicule the idea
of a dislocation of a bone, unless it is clear out on the side of
the body or lifted entirely from its fellow, and becomes promi-
nently apparent to even a distant observer! The prejudiced
do not see anything only in their “own way.” We respect-
2 I 2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
fully ask a careful consideration of this subject, without favor
or affection. Let facts be the ruling element in this discus-
sion and results will be satisfactory. Those who assert that
dislocations can not occur gradually, will please account for
spinal curvature on any other principle. That a gradual
shrinking of muscular fiber causes most all spinal curvatures,
the observations of experts demonstrate to be true. If a
back bone can be drawn sidewise, why can not a delicate,
fibrous, surface articulation (as, for instance, a rib) undergo
that sort of a transformation? These are so palpable that no
one need be misled in the matter. Every bone in the body
may be distorted, and its normal relationship distorted. This
being the case, there is truth in the assertion that “A partial
or complete dislocation of a bone or muscle is largely respon-
sible for many of the pathological conditions that flesh is heir
to,” and “becomes a prominent factor in their production.”
It will yet be acknowledged that muscular contracture is
largely responsible for the numerous interferences of circula-
tion of blood and other fluids of the body, and the large
majority of the pains that humanity endures. We feel
assured that right here is the starting point of pathologi-
cal conditions that demand our most serious and careful con-
sideration. It not infrequently happens in the experience of
Osteopathic practice that simply on the adjustment of a rib,
and that, too, of one that has escaped the notice of eminent
surgeons, by a slight movement, all pain at once ceases. This
is most strikingly seen in functional affections of the heart,
in the raising of the clavicle, stopping the whole trouble
instantaneously! -
EXAMINATIONS.
When it is desirable to make a thorough examination, a
state of nudity will be the condition most suitable, although
that is not absolutely necessary; a thin garment worn is admis-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2 I3
sible, and will not interfere with manual examinations. Begin
with the neck, and examine whether all the cervical vertebrae
are in line, whether one or more bones are distorted, whether
one or more muscles are drawn or contracted, producing pain,
drawing across important bloodvessels, nerves or lymphatics,
or whether unnatural mobility is perceptible; whether the
clavicles are drawn down by the contracture of the subclav-
icular muscles; whether the ends of clavicles are properly ar-
ticulated; whether the arms are equally poised, and whether
the spinous processes are in line; whether the ribs are smooth
and regularly arranged, at equal distances from each other,
and not drawn together on intercostal veins, that empty their
blood into the vena azigos veins; or whether the ribs are not
unduly pressing upon the pleura or lungs, liver, spleen or
stomach. Look to the condition of the diaphragm, whether
the lower portions of the chest walls are normal, or whether
they are contracted. See to it that each muscle and bone is
in proper order and relationship with every other one. Exam-
ine the joints of the lower limbs from the hips down to the last
phalanx of the halluxes. Find out the true state of your case
if you would satisfy fully the demands and render the assist-
ance required in all cases. This sort of an examination would
convince many a skeptic of the truths of this science, and that
many distortions exist that have not been seen by the Ordinary
doctors of the day. “There are many things true, Horatio,
that have not been dreamed of.”
The physical diagnosis of the whole man should be
known—and not simply the organs. It will be understood
that many of the so-called pathological conditions attributed
to disturbance of the intestinal viscera—liver, lungs, heart,
stomach, spleen, intestines—have their origin in some remote
part of the body, due to partial or complete luxation of bone,
the contracture of muscular fiber, that has not been noticed
at all by the attending physician, so that, when corrected by
the Osteopath, all of the trouble ceases. To properly adjust
the system to itself is essential in all pathological conditions.
2I4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
We urgently recommend a careful examination of all the
possible probabilities of luxations, ere a conclusion is reached
or determined. These things observed may save much un-
necessary suffering and delay in bringing about the necessary
relief to save life. These points are important to understand,
and after a little experience it will be found that there is much
more to consider than at first it would seem possible to find,
and a proper adjustment of the system to itself, occasionally,
prevents many an ache, and cures many a pathological affec-
tion that has resisted the efforts of other doctors persistently.
Hence this knowledge will be found useful and fill a niche
not otherwise filled.
DIETETICS.
While it is said that “what is meat for one is another's
poison,” it would seem that a book would be deficient without
something being said about diet; therefore, we are constrained
to say that a very large per cent. of the ills of the flesh are
due to the manner and time of eating, rather than what is
eaten. The “stuffing process” every few hours, or the “piece-
meal” habits of adults and children, and the manner of pre-
paring food, are all subjects deserving careful consideration;
then, the manner of eating is of the greatest importance of all.
The food should always be thoroughly cooked. It should
be thoroughly masticated, and the stomach should be duly
rested before it becomes the receptacle for food. No food
should be eaten between meals. Eating should be considered
a means of regenerating exhausted nerve and tissue waste,
rather than simply a gratification of the taste. To get pleas-
ure out of eating, it must be done leisurely, for it is the taste
that affords enjoyment, not the idea of how much can be
crowded down the throat into the stomach; then eat slowly,
to enjoy the food while it is passing through the gate-way
to the regions beyond. It is always better to leave off one
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2 I5
meal from the regular habit of most people, preferably break-
fast, then dinner will be relished, digested, for the recuperative
powers of the secretions will have been rested, food will be
assimilated, appropriated, and the nervous system restored to
normal activity, and vigor will take the place of exhaustion
and sluggishness. The mental faculties will be clearer, and
nature will reassert itself throughout all of its domain in the
whole body, including every tissue therein, and many a dis-
ease pronounced hopeless will begin to wane and finally fade
away into buoyant health. The “fad” advertisements for
“anti-fat treatments” will find no place for those who are wont
to take on “adipose,” but every man and woman will be nat-
ural. Then, in the case of acute illness, as long as the tongue
is coated, the taste is unnatural, foul, do not allow a morsel of
food into the stomach until natural appetite demands it, which
will be when the tongue cleans off, and then disease will have
ceased, and food will be relished, assimilated, appropriated.
REGARDING FOOD DURING SICKNESS.
To suggest a change in the programme of diet from what
has been the custom during illness at once excites criticism.
To properly appreciate the importance of food, we should first
know the condition of the system as regards ability to assimi-
late it. To introduce food into a stomach that is sick, unable
to digest it, seems insulting to the digestive apparatus, even
to a common observer; but to one pretending to know the
conditions necessary to its digestion, assimilation, would seem
superfluous. That patients have been fed to death in an effort
on the part of their friends, and often at the suggestions of
the physician, abundant evidence could be furnished; hence
to arrest or checkmate the sin of “over-feeding” hereafter, we
write the following: Do not feed your patient until the dis-
ease is cured, in all acute affections; and in all chronic affec-
tions be sure to give the digestive organs rest at least four-
teen to eighteen hours during the twenty-four, if you would
216 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cure them of their diseases. A rest of a day or two by your
chronics will be fraught with wonderful results in favor of
recovery. To do without breakfast, drinking plenty of water,
either hot or cold, will produce a favorable change for the
good of the patient in restoring energy to the digestive
organs. The patient will not starve by any means as long as
the tongue is coated, and when that cleans off, there will be
a natural demand for food that will be the most satisfying,
perhaps, that the patient ever experienced. The mouth will
fairly “water for what the system needs.” Remember that
“nature makes no mistakes.” To crowd the stomach or im-
pose labor upon or in it when unable to perform it, would
be called cruel in us if applied to any other tired, run-down,
worn-out laborer, wouldn’t it?
In cases of acute disease, the system goes on a strike, as
it were, and the laborers at rest; no “designs on the Trestle
Board,” and all is confusion—it’s “high twelve,” and the sun
is at meridian height; the confusion reigns Supreme, and to
interfere results at times in death. If we did but know that
the digestive organs were powerless to do duty when disease
has sway, we would surely act in accordance with reason, let
them be until they recuperate their lost power. The whole
system is a unit, and when one part is out of gear, all is dis-
turbance. Settle the commotion first, then it can eat its meat
“with gladness, and with singleness of purpose,” to build up
more vital fluid.
Remember that acute as well as chronic diseases lose their
grip when the digestive organs are let alone until there are
demanded in the system more rations to replenish the waste.
Let nature assert herself in her own way. The tongue will
clean off and the mouth will become moist, and the stomach
will receive the food with a relish, long before the period of
starvation sets in. Give the patient plenty of water, suited to
the conditions. One glass of water for every ten or twelve
pounds of flesh (or weight) every day, will satisfy the de-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 2 I'7
mands, whether in summer's heat or winter's cold. This
quantity is sufficient to hold in solution the inorganic material
and wash away the debris.
SUGGESTIVE THERAPEUTICs.
While it is not my province to enter into the subject
fully, but only to give it passing notice, yet we would wish to
emphasize the fact in the mind of the reader with an
earnest desire to give relief to his patients in every way indi-
cated, that as there are many conditions of the mind culmin-
ating in real pathological affections, to know how to lead the
mind out of the channel or channels that generate as well as
perpetuate disease, it behooves the practitioner to study how
to most successfully accomplish that object, with credit to
himself and justly to his patient. We urgently request the
reader to perfectly familiarize himself with the fundamental
laws of psychic phenomena and suggestive therapeutics, by
reading and studying such authors as Hudson, Bernheim,
Moll, Tuke, Tukey, Cocke, Sextus, Colville, Notzing, Kraft-
Ebing, Wetterstrand, and last, but not least, “Suggestion,”
by Dr. George C. Pitzer, 3955 Belle Place, St. Louis, Mis-
souri. No man is thoroughly qualified to treat disease with-
out a fair knowledge of this subject. It makes a completely
rounded-up whole of the healer. Study the subject.
Remember that suggestion moves the busy world we live in;
it moves the complicated cosmos called man. It is the
prime mover of all things, and to know mind is to “know
thyself,” to know how to direct others in the right way. The
magnitude of Suggestion may be compared to a boundless
ocean of unfathomable depth, unsearchable in entirety; but
brought en rapport with healthy thoughts, right ideas pre-
sented from proper motives, it produces marvelous results,
satisfactory and healing in their influence, creating within the
body every change for good or ill, “For as a man thinketh,
so is he.”
ORIFICIAL SURGERY.
THE ORIFICIAL PHILOSOPHY,
Osteopathy is greatly aided in many instances by the use
of the orificial work. Whether instruments are used to
divulse the sphincters or not, the necessity of such work is
often essential. To expect to cure diseases of long standing
without flushing the capillaries is oftentimes futile, and while
this may be done by repeated manipulations, it is not known
generally by the Osteopath that taking off the pressure of the
terminal filaments in the sphincter muscles is paramount to
everything else, when needed. That this work is marvel-
ously successful at times, the accumulated experiences of hun-
dreds of the best orificialists in the country have abundantly
demonstrated.
That there are those who would presume to assume that
all there is in the healing art centers in Osteopathy, it would
not require the straining of a point to establish. Narrow-
minded people, those who know only a little of what they
pretend to, and nothing of some things that others know,
will necessarily be self-conceited, circumscribed, and ready to
rise up and oppose everything that does not seemingly come
under the purview of their restricted horizon; but the exper-
ienced investigator, the philanthropist, who feels an interest
in the advancement and welfare of the race, willingly goes to
work to “sort out the good, and throw the bad away.” If
orificial work were merely an experiment, it might be plaus-
ibly rejected, but it is not that now, but the rich fruitage of a
sound, philosophic, proven principle, whose adoption and
practice by the greatest minds of this age demonstrate it to
be the most effectual means of relief, and the only thing to do
in many conditions to afford relief. No rational investigator
(218)
XVI.-The Flux and Diarrhea—Movement for.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 22 I
who desires to benefit mankind is willing to drop one arrow
from his quiver of accumulated, proven facts; but whatever
of good he sees anywhere, is willing to give it a place in his
armamentarium, for use when needed.
There are cases which will not recover with Osteopathic
treatment alone in its present developed state; hence to ignore
adjuvants which, if used, carry out the same principle of
“taking off the pressure,” relieving bound-down nerve fila-
ments, and removing excrescences, constrictions, overcoming
undue contractions, would be to refuse aid when in need.
The medical profession opposed the orificial philosophy for a
time, and even men of the “same craft” fought the promul-
gator (Professor Pratt) until the demonstrations of the truth
of the philosophy were apparent everywhere, and in almost
every instance where used forced its use into their practice,
until now, the scientific, “up-to-date” practitioner of every
school recognizes the utility of the philosophy. It is not a
struggle for some theoretical hypothesis, but a welling-up of
a great truth that stands out in letters written with a pen
of fire, forcibly inviting recognition. It is the sine qua non in
many cases; instance, phymosis, cicatricial formations, espe-
cially in cervix uteri; bound-down clitoris, papillae, pockets,
fissure and fistula, and the best possible means of divulsion
of sphincters, and flushing the capillaries, relieving constipa-
tion; of taking off the pressure of all terminal filaments
involved in reflexes from sphincter muscles, and removing
sources of irritation.
When it is known that “all diseases of a chronic char-
acter manifest themselves at the mouths of organs,” the
philosophy of orificial surgery will become interesting.
Professor E. H. Pratt, of Chicago, Illinois, lays down a
few principles in reference to this science, or the philosophy
of this science, that have stood the test without refutation for
a decade and a half, which ought to be proof of its merit.
We here quote what he says after four years of experi-
ment, and after hearing the successful results of over one
222 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
thousand well attested cases in a great variety of chronic
ailments that had stood the fire of a great many sorts
of treatment, medication, etc., to no benefit, and these results
show a percentage of recoveries that is truly astonishing (81
per cent.), and it will be remembered, cases abandoned as
incurables at that. Here is what Professor Pratt enunciates:
“The work of orificial surgery involves the removal of all
sources of irritation and the securing of normal tension for
all sphincters. It would take a volume to properly describe
this work in detail, and do the subject justice. The work can
have no rival, as it is only recommended in cases in which
other measures have failed, and instead of being frowned
down without proper investigation, deserves a fair trial. It
discloses many things which before were not understood, or
at least appreciated. For instance: First—The irritation of
an organ starts at its mouth. Enlarge the proposition, and
you have the thought that bodily nerve waste in general
begins at the openings of the body. Second—The smooth-
ing of rough orifices, and the securing of proper dilatation of
all sphincters, guarding them, immediately and permanently
(So far as material things can be permanent), improve capil-
lary circulation in general, and hence in particular. Third—
That in consequence of the increased reactive powers, in cases
where the work, unaided, is sufficient to restore perfect
health, the properly prescribed remedial measures will now
produce their hoped-for results, and recovery will be possible.
(This is said in reference to medication.) Fourth—The reac-
tion from orificial work is usually immediate, but may be
delayed in certain conditions, for several weeks. Fifth–The
patient's sensations are not a safe guide to the existence of
these irritations. Sixth—The work on the sexual organs
(sexual system) is ineffective, and oftentimes harmful, if rectal
irritation be not first corrected. Seventh—That complete
orificial work is essential to success; i. e., must include all
the orifices, and be prosecuted at intervals, until each and all
of them are in a normal state. Eighth—That by this work
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 223
as a basis, fully four-fifths of the cases that are now abandoned
as incurable are found to be easily, surely and permanently
relieved. Ninth—That the condition of the sympathetic
nerve power has more to do with the health and happiness of
the human body than is usually supposed. Tenth—That the
amount of local trouble present furnishes no index to the
nerve waste involved, or to the necessity for the work, or to
the beneficial effects to be expected from it. Eleventh—
That the central principle (of orificial irritation as a predis-
posing factor in chronic diseases generally) has stood well a
continuous and active test, public and private, in hundreds
of cases, and by hundreds of doctors, for the last three years
(this, it will be remembered, was written in 1888 or '89), and
no protest has ever been uttered against it, and that the
improvement, as experience multiplies, has been confined
to methods of carrying it out, and not to any change in the
principle itself.
“Such, in brief, is a condensed presentation of this vast
subject of the philosophy and its scope. Its successes are
marvelously brilliant and numerous; its failures are many
times due to incompetent, incomplete work and its unfor-
tunate use in cases too desperate to be saved by anything
short of a resurrection day. It is not a foe to any other meas-
ure of healing, but is a help to all of them. As is usual in all
human endeavors, those who have opposed its investigation
most violently are those who know the least about it, and
were least fitted to speak on the subject.” We further quote
him, reporting some important facts worth knowing:
“Bring me an individual with clean lips and nostrils; a
palate of proper length and tonsils unobtruding; a rectum
that presents neither piles, prolapsus, papillae, pockets, fissure
nor fistula; an individual whose sexual orifices are smooth and
free from all irritation; if a man, his foreskin must be free, the
frenum of proper length, the urethral passage normal in size,
especially in its prostatic portion; if a woman, her hymen
must be pale and atrophied, her urethra void of caruncula and
©
224 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ulceration, her internal and external ores uteri reasonably
patulous, and without undue sensitiveness: bring me such an
individual, and I will point to the same individual and show
you a human being whose digestion is good, whose sleep is
Sweet and restful, whose capillary circulation is superb, whose
very existence is a source of uninterrupted delight. Such
men and women maintain a steady poise of mind and body;
they live to the fullness of time, and, unless removed by acci-
dent, their dissolution takes place on the principle of the ‘one-
hoss Shay.’ They settle down peacefully and slowly into
their last sleep, because their time-piece is run down.”
“On the other hand, introduce to me a mortal suffering
with passive congestion in various parts, whose blood finds
its lazy way back to the heart by slow stages, because the
peristaltic action of the arteries has tired out, a person whose
vitality is low, and whose poor, enfeebled body begins to be
a prey of inherited or acquired derangements, consumption,
scrofula, or organic derangements of whatever form they
1may have; show me such an individual (and they are as numer-
ous as withered leaves in autumn), and I will stake the repu-
tation of this idea that I shall be able, without straining a
point, to find legitimate fault with the condition of some one
or more of the orifices of the body.” -
“In all pathological conditions, surgical or medical,
which linger persistently in spite of all efforts at removal,
from the delicate derangements of the brain substance that
induce insanity and the various forms of neurasthenia, to the
great variety of morbid changes repeatedly found in coarser
structures of the body, there will invariably be found more or
less irritation of the rectum, or the orifices of the sexual sys-
tem, or both.” .
All truth has had to fight its way through crucifixion
and resurrection before it became immortal. When the pro-
fession, or the laity, learn what orificial philosophy means,
the opposition will cease. Osteopaths will resort to it when
needed (which is oftener than some are willing to admit); and
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 225.
more use will be made of it. There are a few of the minor
measures that the Osteopath is of right entitled to; such as the
divulsion of the sphincters, the reduction of enlarged pros-
tates, straightening the coccyx, and irritation of the clitoris,
to produce reflexes in parturition. *
The surgical part of carrying out the orificial philosophy
will only demand his attention as a matter of curiosity, until
he shall have donned the role of surgeon, or becomes a gen-
eral practitioner in the common acceptation of the term “phy-
sician.”
It will be necessarily a matter of interest to him when, in
some cases, he sees a hanging fire of the disease of his patient
for long months of laborious effort to relieve, succumb kindly
to a very simple orificial interference. Then his eyes will be
widely opened to the necessities of the uses of this marvelous
philosophy.
These two sciences seem necessarily inseparably related
to each other in practice, and the one is incomplete without
the other. Those who do not yet understand or know of
Orificial Surgery, we would respectfully refer to Prof.
E. H. Pratt, M.D., LL.D., the first to propound to the world
the philosophy of Orificial Surgery, its necessities, uses, appli-
cation, etc. Osteopathy and Orificial Surgery are comple-
mentary sciences, and should be used, one to aid the other.
The practitioner will learn the former from this book and the
latter through its founder, Professor Pratt. Knowing the
principles involved in each gives double assurance of compe-
tency to cope with pathological disturbances of all kinds.
It will be of vital importance to the Osteopath to know
that, in the use of the Bivalve (an instrument used to divulse
the sphincters) the capillaries are flushed. Universal warmth
ensues at once, all over the body, a regulation of the circula-
tion is at once discoverable, the veins become filled, are
more active, the lymph has entered the veins, the circula-
tion increases, and new life is started everywhere in the sys-
tem. This means of starting up dormant forces can not be
226 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
too highly extolled. Resort to the use of this wonderful
capillary flusher should be had when indicated, and intelli-
gently applied, it will invariably be followed by beneficial
results. -
It is not the province of this volume to enter into all of
the orificial philosophy, but what has already been said ought
to be enough to excite the reader's interest.
THE GARMENTS TO BE WORN DURING OSTEOPA-
THIC TREATMENT.
To give thorough, satisfactory treatment, the patient
should have on a single garment and that large enough to be
loose-fitting, something like the pajamus, and the ladies might
have an additional loose gown. It is not necessary that exposure
be made of either sex in the application of Osteopathy, but the
comfort of the patient is desired as well as that of the operator.
This advice especially applies to patients who receive a number
of treatments in order. In all cases the fewer the garments, the
more effectual the treatment. §
The object is to have all the muscles free, and the limbs per-
fectly movable. While the various plates shown in this book
are taken with most of the clothing on, yet we would insist, for
satisfactory results, that the patient use a separate garment while
being treated.
REDUCING DISLOCATIONS.
We do not desire to enter into a long dissertation on this
subject. We simply call attention to the more common dis-
locations that will demand the attention of the Osteopath
in his practice, and he should know how to treat them intelli-
gently.
DISLOCATIONS OF THE ELBOW JOINT.
This joint may be dislocated in five directions: -
First—Both bones backward, marked strongly by alter-
ations in the form of the joint and loss of motion; and there is
considerable projection posteriorally by the ulna and the
radius; on each side of the olecranon there is a hollow; the
hand and arm are in a state of supination, and can not be
turned prone. -
Second—Lateral dislocation of both bones of the fore-
arm; ulna thrown on either the internal or external condyle.
There is increased width and great distortion of joint, and
the forearm is flexed and pronated. In the dislocations out-
ward, the radius forms a prominent swelling, and in dislo-
cations inward there is marked and elongated projection on
the inner side of the joint.
Third—The third dislocation is where the ulna is thrown
backward. The deformity is very great; the forearm and
arm are twisted inward, and the olecranon projects consid-
erably. The forearm can not be extended, nor bent to more
than a right angle. -
Fourth—The radius is thrown forward into the hollow
above the external condyle of the humerus. The forearm in
this dislocation is slightly bent, but can not be brought to a
(227)
228 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
right angle. The hand is between pronation and supination.
Fifth—The radius may be thrown backward. This is
seldom or rarely ever seen.
THE TREATMENT.
- “. The first, second and third dislocations may be reduced
in the following manner: Seat the patient on a chair; then
take hold of the wrist; put the knee on inner side of the elbow
joint, bend the arm, and at the same time make pressure upon
dislocated bones, so as to separate the coracoid process of
the ulna from the posterior fossa of the humerus. And while
the pressure is forcibly kept up by the knee, the arm is grad-
ually bent, and the bones will slip into their places.
In the fourth dislocation the hand should be turned
supine, the forearm bent, extension made from the hand, not
including the ulna in the hold.
In the fifth dislocation gentle pressure and extension will
succeed in reducing it. -
DISLOCATIONS OF THE SHOULDER JOINT.
The humerus may be dislocated in four directions:
Downward into the axilla—most common of all dislocations
of this joint; the symptoms being, lengthening of arm, a hol-
low is felt under the acromion, the shoulder flattened exter-
nally, the elbow sticks out from the side and can not be made
to touch the ribs, the head can be felt in the axilla, and the
hand can not be placed on the opposite shoulder, as in a nor-
mal condition. The second dislocation is forward and
beneath the clavicle, upon the second rib, the coracoid process
being felt on the outside of head of humerus. The symptoms
of this dislocation are: The arm is slightly shortened, elbow
projects backward, the acromion seems pointed, the depres-
sion of the deltoid is more considerable than in the preceding
dislocation. The third dislocation is backward on dorsum of
scapula, beneath spine, where the head of the bone is easily
-
XVII.-Showing Flexion of Lower Limb.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 23.I
felt, and will be discovered to follow the movement of the
elbow when located, in the movement of arm. The fourth
dislocation is only partial, usually that of a pressing forward
against the coracoid process. The symptoms are a projec-
tion of the acromion and hollow under it, while the head of
the bone is prominent in front, and may be felt to move on
rotating the elbow. If the hand of the injured side is placed
upon the sound shoulder, the patient will be unable to bring
his elbow to his side, and if the elbow is brought to the side,
his hand can not remain on the shoulder.
THE TREATMENT.
There are many methods of reducing these luxations,
such as extension, heel in axilla, knee in axilla, the use of a
towel, what is termed the perpendicular method, Kocher's
method, etc. The following are sufficient for all practical
purposes to operator.
The simple extension method is made as follows: Pass
a towel around the chest, under the arm and across above the
shoulder, so as to firmly fix the scapula; another towel is
fastened in a loop around the arm of patient above the elbow;
extension is then made by an assistant, the operator manipu-
lating joint. This is done while patient is sitting erect on a
chair or stool. When the extension is made for a short time
the operator may easily reduce the dislocation with but little
if any pain to patient. The reduction is best made while the
knee is used as a fulcrum, as more steadiness may be secured
thereby.
The second or heel in axilla process is generally pre-
ferable. Place the patient on a table, or the floor, on a cush-
ion or mattress, soft pad in axilla, a strong towel looped
around arm above elbow, long enough to slip over shoulder
of operator, the heel in axilla, using counter extension with
the towel until the head of humerus is in place to slip in, then
use arm as a lever, pushing the head into place, upward and
outward, and at the same time pulling the limb downward
and a little forward by means of the towel that is secured
232 - OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
around the arm above the elbow; extension being best made
this way.
Knee in axilla method: The patient is seated in a chair,
and the operator places one knee in the axilla, resting foot
on a chair or stool, puts his hand on the shoulder so as to
steady the scapula and shoulder joint, with the other depresses
the elbow over the knee, and presses head of bone into place
with hand.
Reduction by the perpendicular method: Place the
patient on a low chair or a couch, and then raise the arm
perpendicularly by the side of the body, or head more prop-
erly, at the same time fixing the acromion, and make gentle
traction, replacing head of bone by turning arm in a semi-
turn either way, so as to place the head of bone in socket or
junction with head of scapula. If but little force is required,
the arm may be taken in one hand, gently stretching it
upward, and steady the acromion with the other. Should
more force be required, an assistant may steady the shoulder,
and the operator may use his foot against acromion. When
the bone is felt to slip into its place, the arm must be brought
down to the side, while the head of the bone is held outward
by the hand in the axilla.
Kocher's method: The forearm is flexed on the arm,
then turned outward as far away from the chest as possible;
the elbow is then carried well forward and upward. Rotate
the arm inward and lower the elbow, when the head of the
bone will probably fall into place. This may be done without
using an anesthetic.
The extension used in any dislocation forward must be
made downward and backward at the same time. For dislo-
cation backward, the extension must be made forward.
After reduction, a small pad may be placed in the axilla, and
the arm and the shoulder held in a sling until all soreness
subsides; the roller held by a bandage, and the joint held
quietly.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 233
DISLOCATIONS OF THE HIP JOINT,
Of these there are four: Upward on the dorsum of ilium,
downward into the thyroid foramen, backward and upward
into the ischiatic notch, and forward and upward on the body
of the pubes.
The first (upward on dorsum of ilium) happens more
frequently than any others of the hip joint. The symptoms
are: There is at once perceived a difference in the length of
the limb, change from a normal position, toes turned inward,
diminished motion and a flattening of hip. The toes rest on
the tarsus of opposite foot; the knee and foot are turned
inward; the knee slightly advanced to front and resting on
other leg (thigh), above the knee of its fellow; the limb one or
two inches shorter than the other, and legs inseparable.
The second dislocation—into the thyroid foramen: The
dislocated limb is two inches longer than the other one, and
in those thin in flesh the head of the bone may be felt on
pressure. There is usually flattening on side of hip, and the
body is bent forward. The toes point to the ground, and the
foot may be turned either outward or inward.
In the third dislocation—backward into the sciatic notch:
The head of the bone is resting on the pyriformis muscle.
The limb is from one-half to one inch shorter than the other
one. The toe rests on the ball of the great toe on the other
foot. The knee and foot are turned inward; the toe touches
the ground, not the heel, when standing. Not much flexion
or rotation of the limb can be made. -
The fourth dislocation—on the pubes: The limb is
shorter than the other; knee and foot are turned outward, and
can not be rotated inward; the head of the thigh bone is
readily felt on the pubes. -
THE TREATMENT.
These dislocations may be reduced by manipulations.
They may not be easily done, except in recent luxations, and
usually require several attempts to do. The muscular con-
234 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
tractures due to putting them on an undue strain are difficult
to overcome after a time elapses after dislocation.
I. Dislocation upward on dorsum of ilium.—To reduce
this dislocation we use the limbs as levers, the trochanters
as fulcrums, by which the head of the femur may be slipped
into place. The knee must be bent on the thigh and the
thigh on the abdomen or pelvis; the operator, grasping the
ankle with one hand and the knee with the other, causes the
thigh to perform circumduction movements toward abduc-
tion, finishing with a rotary movement of the femoral axis,
when the head of the femur will probably slip into place. The
limb may be reduced frequently and more easily by placing
the ankle of the dislocated limb across the knee of the other
limb, the patient sitting on a stool or chair, knee flexed, plac-
ing one hand at the hip joint, putting the breast on the knee,
pressing it down to a right angle, and with the hand holding
the ankle, patient relaxing as much as possible, operator
suddenly jerks the leg off the knee against his side, and the
joint goes in place. Professor Bigelow recommends that the
thigh be flexed with a little inward rotation, producing inver-
sion of the toes, and then the thigh should be abducted, cir-
cumducted, and at the same time rotated outward. This has
been described in the directions—“lift up, bend out, roll out.”
2. For the Dislocation Downward.—Rotation inward
of the flexed and slightly abducted thigh upon the fulcrum of
the Y-shaped ligament.
3. The Dislocation Backward.—Dr. Bigelow reduces
this dislocation by circumduction of the flexed thigh inward,
so as to unlock the head of the femur, and then abducts and
everts the limb with an outward jerk.
4. Dislocation on the Pubes.—Flexion, combined with
abduction, may be tried. If not successful, abduct thigh
backward and downward, placing hand against head of femur,
pressing it downward under rami of pubes, then abduct with
flexion, suddenly jerking limb downward and outward.
These luxations should be thoroughly studied before
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 235
beginning to operate on them. Frequent and oft-repeated
attempts at reduction, may result in inflammation, and the
proper diagnosis of conditions, location, muscles involved,
should be duly considered before undertaking to manipulate.
It may be objectionable to some to use pulleys, but in
some instances it will be found easier on patient and operator
to do so. The luxation on pubes is one of the most difficult
to reduce, and the operator will find that the pulley will be
of immense service in its reduction. Extension and counter-
extension may be made so gradually as to produce but little
if any pain, and the reduction may be made by simply a
slight pressure on head of bone. If the pulley is used, care
should be taken to use well-padded bands in the groin and
around the limb, and the pulley should be manipulated with
a crank, so as to completely govern its action, being particular
to use only enough force to let the head of the femur pass
the edge of the acetabulum—not to increase the existing
laceration of the capsular ligament around head of joint.
With the proper care, nearly all of these dislocations may
be reduced, making many a lame person leap for joy. There
is no propriety in letting these dislocations go on for years,
for they may all be set, if taken in time. Osteopathy has
gained most of its laurels in setting “hip joints.” Many
a case that has gone to an Osteopath with lameness, limping
and using crutches, has gone away without them, leaping and
clapping his hands and vociferating with all the thankfulness
imaginable. Study your cases, and manipulate the parts
until sufficient relaxation of the muscular structure warrants
any attempt to set, then try it. Keep trying until it is accom-
plished.
DISLOCATIONS OF THE KNEE.
The knee is often dislocated, and there are four ways it
may be out of place, to-wit: First, Inward—The tibia pro-
jecting on the inner side of the joint, and the condyle of the
femur resting on the external semilunar cartilage. The sec-
236 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ond dislocation is where the tibia is thrown on the outer side
of the joint, the condyle of the femur being placed on the
inner semilunar cartilage. The third dislocation—the tibia
is dislocated forward. The fourth dislocation is when the
tibia is luxated backward. Symptoms obvious, and easily
recognized.
THE TREATMENT.
Each of these dislocations may be quite easily reduced
by extension and counter-extension. The great tendency in
the injuries of the knee is to take on inflammation, and it will
be important to enjoin absolute rest after injuries to the knee
(of any character whatever) until all soreness has subsided.
In the adjustment of the toes and fingers, gentle exten-
sion and pressure are all that is necessary to be done. The
same may be said of the wrist.
Bunions are caused by dislocation of the third joint of the
great toe, and cured by setting the joint and keeping it in
place by cotton pressed between it and second toe. Repeti-
tion of the setting will be required to keep it in place in some
CaSeS. -
For further information regarding luxations consult the
large works on Surgery. -
FEVERS AND THEIR TREATMENT.
FEVERS.
The phenomena in the body characterized by a rise of
temperature, increased circulation of the blood, marked tissue
change to a greater or less degree, disturbance in the secre-
tions, mental excitement or depression.
The causes of fever are a mooted question. Many the
ories are advocated, but the most plausible seems to be that
of central disturbance near the corpus striatum, due to blood
pressure. The cause of the blood pressure is as much a
mooted question as the cause of fever.
As all heat is due to molecular change or friction, or
chemical changes, it is very reasonable to attribute the cause
of fever to bi-chemical changes, causing increased molecular
action. It is not our purpose to argue this question, but sub-
mit the above for consideration.
It is a fairly well settled fact that certain stimuli to the
vaso-motor filaments along the sides of the upper cervix
Ordinarily modify the circulation and regulate it, and
reduce fever. Inasmuch as the vaso-motor nerves control
the peristalsis of the muscles surrounding the arteries, regu-
lating the size of the caliber, and these nerves are the end
filaments that we stimulate, it follows that the regulation of
the circulation of the blood is through the said filaments, but
recessarily starting from the center or starting place of said
filaments. Some have supposed that the heat disturbing or
regulating center is near the corpus striatum. Be that as it
may, impeded circulation may be rationally responsible for
the increase of temperature we denominate fever, the dis-
turbance originating from pressure due to contraction of mus-
cular fiber, which was due to excessive or undue irritation of
(237) -
238 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
terminal nerve filaments; cold, contracting down on end
nerves, or poisons introduced into the system, irritating nerve
centers or paralyzing them. The normal temperature is said
to be 98% degrees. In fevers it may rise to Ioff-7 degrees,
or even higher, and the tissue waste is in proportion to the
temperature and the duration. The disordered secretions are
usually manifest by the deficiency in quantity, the dryness of
the tongue, clamminess of mucous membrane, thirst, high-
colored urine and constipation.
GENERAL, TREATMENT OF FEVERS.
The first indication would seem to be the reduction of
the temperature. The reader will please to bear in mind that
fever is not a disease—only a symptom. Inasmuch as the
Osteopath uses no medicine, it becomes a matter of great
interest to know how he is going to reduce the fever. Time-
honored and long-cherished habits demand a plausible reason
for discarding medicines in this instance. Doctors have had
recourse to aconite, veratrum, antifebrin, antipyrine, Spiritus
nitri dulcis, etc., for long years, and for any one to pretend
to say that fever could be reduced without the use of Some
one or all of these agencies elicits intense criticism. To
appear on the arena as a physician without medicine or pre-
scription blank, and pretend to possess power and knowledge
sufficient to control the temperature of the one possessed of
a fever, seems the height of presumption by the medical fra-
ternity, and they are ready to denounce such a pretender as
a fit subject for an insane asylum. Notwithstanding the
announcement by them of the fact of fever being caused by
a disturbance of the nervous system, they are unwilling to
acknowledge that a regulation of the action of the nervous
System will cure fever—unless, perchance, it comes as a result
of medication. What singular beings we are! -
These are the means the Osteopath uses to reduce fever.
It matters not what name the fever is dubbed with, whether


... • • • • • • •* * * ,<-~:：~~~~ -… • • • ~~~~*, ** * * · · r ~ ~º ~º

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 24I
typhoid, typhus, Scarlet, dengue, yellow, cerebro-spinal,
enteric, intermittent or erysipelatous, the Osteopath has but
one remedy—that is, Take Off the Pressure. This cures all
manner of disease. The general treatment to restore the
general circulation over the whole body is to be remembered,
and the proper pressure on the sides of the cervical vertebrae
(from the base of the skull), the occiput, down the neck for a
space of three or four vertebrae on the terminal filaments of
the vaso-motor nerves in that region, from two to five min-
utes, regulates the action of the peristalsis of the arteries per-
fectly, satisfactorily. The pressure should be made lightly at
first, gradually increasing the pressure to a sense of a little
uneasiness, and holding the fingers steadily there for a longer
or a shorter time. This results in a remarkable lowering of
the temperature, and starts the perspiration in every pore in
the body. It does it, too, without injury to the patient. This
is the universal treatment for all fevers. Care should be
exercised that too much pressure be avoided, for in some dis-
eases there is a liability of a return of fever, and if the former
pressure has produced Soreness in that region, it makes it
painful and unpleasant for subsequent manipulations; hence
due care should be exercised.
The Osteopath has recourse also to the natural fluid of
the body, to-wit: Water. As water constitutes about sev-
enty per cent. of the human body, it is essential that it be kept
supplied. Water is the most complete solvent of the ele-
ments of the body components known, hence should not be
lost sight of. A disturbance in the system, remember, is
caused by molecular changes, and these changes are largely
due to precipitation, coagulation of the albuminoids for lack
of the solvent, water. The necessity of this fluid becomes a
matter of eminent importance, hence it should be furnished.
The fever patient then, should have this supplied at short
intervals in quantities varying according to demands, thirst,
etc. The warm bath is also at times essential. Directions
for bathing should be followed as described elsewhere. -
242 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
In all fevers the friction is caused by decomposition of
the elements. Decomposition may ensue from two causes:
The one being due to disturbance of nerve centers, producing
paralysis of nerve filaments all along the line to their termin-
als, and the other from pressure somewhere along the course
of the nerve—in or on its surface, or at its terminal. Either
of these causes produces a like result. The stimulus at the
center may be due to direct pressure on the center, or by
reflex influences from pressure, or from poisons introduced
into the system and absorbed, more than the system has
power to eliminate. Here is a clincher and a hard nut to
crack, for the medicine man to solve and dispose of satis-
factorily. The use of water, as the reader may now under-
stand, becomes a matter of urgent necessity in all cases of
fever. The temperature of the bath should be about 8o
degrees at the start, and after being in it for a few moments,
cold water should be gradually added, and the effects upon
the patient carefully observed. When the surface begins to
turn moderately turgid, blue, the effect is produced that is
needed for the time. Take the patient out of the bath now
and remove the cloths or sheet used, wrap in a dry sheet or
blanket, place in bed and exclude the air from the body until
reaction ensues, or the patient has had a refreshing sleep.
The fever is now measurably lessened by this process. The
body should be dried, after due allowance of time has elapsed,
from all accumulations of perspiration, and the clothing
changed to clean, dry, well aired spreads; the patient
instructed to take deep, long inhalations of air (through the
nostrils), retaining air as long as is comfortably possible, and
go through a half a dozen or more of such exercises at once—
or at one sitting, as it is termed. This should be done every
bath, and the bath should be repeated from every three or
four hours to once or twice a day until the fever is cured. All
this time let the patient have no victuals, fruits, nor any food
of any sort until the tongue cleans off, and food is called for.
The patient will do that. Don't be uneasy about the patient
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 243
starving. You sit by and wait until nature asserts herself.
Then it is time for you to move in that direction. What
would you think of the sense or the judgment of a man
driving a horse, tired, worn down by a heavy draft, up a steep
hill, pulling all his exhausted strength would allow, and
strained to do that, and the driver (the doctor or nurse in this
case) were to add more weight, and lash the beast to make
him increase the effort to pull the weight? Would you toler-
ate such a manifestation of abuse—of downright cruelty?
You say no. Then make the application! Take Off the
Pressure if you would cure anything in the form of disease.
See? -
The above principles embrace the treatment of all fevers,
and to be successful you should lay aside your prejudices (if
you have any) and treat every case on similar principles, and
something like the course marked out.
It is said by one author, in treating fever, “Don’t starve a
fever”—and after giving the pathology showing that the
system could not assimilate food, demonstrated his utter
incompetency to decide the matter physiologically. If the
system is not capable of assimilating food, why tax the diges–
tive organs with work it can not do? And if it manages to
automatically go through the process, without the proper
mixtures of the secretions necessary to be taken up and con-
verted into assimilable material, where is the reason for it?
We then lay this maxim down as universally applicable: Do
not feed any fever. When the tongue is coated, every tissue
in the body is deficient of power to work—run down and
closed up all of the workshops, lain down to rest—what sense
is there in shoveling in more debris? Wait until nature calls
for help (food); then, and not till then, is it proper to feed a
fevered patient. That will then be when the system no longer
has fever. Your patient will not starve! The whole nervous
force has turned its attention to renovating the system of its
poisons, and you need not, under any circumstances, under-
take to change the order of things. The already accumulated
244 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
nerve substance will not decrease in its effort to clean up the
house that has not a comfortable apartment in it. You stand
off, hands off. Remember that nature is now master of the
situation; she is asserting her prerogative, and she will per-
form her labor, if left alone, perfectly; and if you will sit by
and watch her wisdom in sweeping and garnishing her apart-
ments, you will learn a lesson you never knew before.
“Well,” one says, “what are you going to do for your
patient? Are you going to sit and let your patient starve?”
“Who ever heard of such a cruel wretch?” “Won’t let his
patient have anything to eat, eh?” “Here waste is reducing
the flesh every day, and not a mouthful of food has that poor,
sick boy had for six or eight hours.” “Poor thing! He is
almost starved ' Why, since I come to think about it, he
hasn't had a mouthful of food for twenty-four hours! Ain't
that awful? Starve! Doesn’t that look like it?” This is about
the sort of expressions that will confront the sensible physi-
cian while he is watching his patient. But we opine that if
our directions are followed, medicines all thrown to the cess-
pool, all food withheld, and the proper nursing afforded, your
patient will come out of his sickness in a much shorter time,
stronger, recuperate in half the time, and be better every way,
less mentally beclouded, brighter intellect, and sooner fit for
doing duties devolving upon him or her! Don't feed your
fever patient!
The fever is only a symptom, and not a disease. Where
is the trouble? What produces the fever? We regard fever
as a result of chemical changes in the elements—friction of
the molecules, due, in many instances, to capillary disturb-
ance, resulting in congestion, or hyperaemia (which means too
much blood in parts). Decomposition (tissue metamor-
phoses of a degenerative character) takes place, friction
ensues, heat is the result. .
It is pretty fairly well settled now, that the circulation of
the blood in the arteries is controlled by stimulation of the
cervical vertebrae at the upper and back portions, as well as
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 245
other vulnerable spinal localities, and that when this is effected
we become masters of the situation. All treatment for all
sorts of increased temperature should be wisely directed to
these localities—never lost sight of. For any and all degrees
of temperature, for all of the so-called fevers, whether from
a slight cold to a burning Scarlet or a raging typhoid, the
neck is the first place to look to and to begin to treat the
patient. Gentleness can not be too urgently enjoined at
first. Here is the throttle-valve that controls the moving of
“the world,” the cosmos, and it is important that the degree
of pressure on the lever be cautiously heeded!
The patient should have a comfortable resting place,
provided with pleasant surroundings, plenty of light, pure
air, and of the proper temperature (ranging from 65 degrees
to 70 degrees). The body should have its quota of pure
water, and at short intervals, and of a temperature suitable to
the condition or desire of the patient. If there ever is a time
to use water for “salvation,” not of the spiritual man, but of
the physical, now is the auspicious time, the use of which is
the essential thing—internally, externally, and I might
reasonably insist eternally, so far as the fever term continues.
The temperature of the water is a matter to be duly looked to
—to be considered. It is a strange peculiarity in nature that
she selects the things suitable in all instances, if allowed to
dictate for herself. The motto should be: According to
condition of the patient. The bathing in water of the whole
body is a question that requires much judgment on the part
of the nurse, as regards the time to remain in it, the tempera-
ture of the bath, and the intervals that should elapse between
baths. The temperature of the body, the stage of the malady,
the strength of the patient, and the effects of the bath on the
temperature, should be the suggesting factors in this matter.
It should be remembered that the reduction of the tempera-
ture depends upon the removal of the sources of friction that
causes the fever. During the bath there is absorbed into the
system a considerable quantity of water; this, being the most .
246 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
diffusible stimulant, nature accepts with delight as a solvent—
a harmless solvent of all of the elements in the body. The
indications in cases of fever become apparent to the physician
as well as to all other practically common-sense individuals
(pardon the expression and the applicability). At any rate,
use water. Give the patient water—pure water—a little at
a time, but give it often. Do you know that water puts out
fire, and that it contains two parts of oxygen?—the very
thing that purifies blood; and a demand for this element is
loud and persistent as long as heat continues? Use water,
then, in all fevers. The evaporation of the water is causing
the fever. Supply it, and the fever is cured. This is the way
to feed the patient—starve the fever—drown it.
TYPHUS FEVER.
Synonyms: Jail fever, ship fever, and contagious.
This is an acute, infectious, epidemic, febrile state; comes
on suddenly, producing great depression of the vital forces,
characterized by a peculiarly sickening odor, eruption of a
measly character all over the body, except on the face, and
presenting a deep, dusky flush, and a glazed appearance of
the skin; pupils contracted and eyes flushed. There is
extreme tenderness of the shin bones, muscular soreness,
extreme prostration, vertigo, tremors and subsultus, and most
generally attended with constipation (this is the peculiar
characteristic), with the eruption like measles, except on the
face. -
The symptoms of this fever simulate cerebro-spinal
fever very closely, only that the rigidity of the muscles of the
neck are more pronounced in cerebro-spinal fevers. The
complications may be pneumonia, swollen parotid glands.
The mortality ranges from five to thirty per cent.
THE TREATMENT.
The neck muscles should receive our special attention.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 247
The evidences of capillary congestion are marked in the mot-
tled skin and eruption. Manipulate the neck and spinal mus-
cles thoroughly, profoundly; lift the clavicle, stretch the neck,
and rotate it; elevate the chest and stimulate spinal muscles
by rotary vibrations upwards and outward; also treat in like
manner (the rotary manipulations of the hand) over liver,
stomach and bowels. In fact, the whole system needs a gen-
eral treatment, being careful not to use too strong force.
The vaso-motor region will demand attention to reduce the
fever. r
The moderately warm bath will be indicated as often as
once a day, stimulating the skin by dashing cold water on the
body after coming out of the bath. Use water clysters daily,
and give pure water to drink every half to one hour in mod-
erate quantities. Use nothing in the way of food until the
system is in a condition to assimilate it.
Notwithstanding the extreme prostration, food is not
indicated. Get rid of the poison, relieve the congestion,
start up the circulation, arouse the nerve forces, wash out the
debris, and then the system will call for what it needs. To
break the spell that holds the mind enchained—the craze to
feed the sick—is what we desire to emphasize.
RELAPSING FEVER.
This is a sort of a bilious typhoid famine, febris recur-
rens, spirallum fever, self-limited disease, lasting about six
days, and said to be contagious and epidemic.
After it has lasted about that time it suddenly or grad-
ually subsides into a remission, to be again followed by
another attack similar in character, but associated with an
alteration of the structure in the viscera (which is said to con-
tain micro-organisms—the spirilli of Obermeyer. (Wonder
why he turned them loose in that particular fever?)
It is said that the cause of this particular affection is
contagion. Specific It is also stated that “it acquires its
248 - OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
greater activity from filthy, crowded and unhealthy popula-
tions, amid which it prevails.” The beast that causes this
disease is a regular “corker,” but he is only seen in the minut-
est form (and that in the blood) after the fever has set in.
During the “fever” he is a minute screw-shaped beast, spiral
in fortn; hence the appellation we dub him with, “a regular
corker.” It is said also that the spleen is covered with a fresh
fibrinous exudation—that the corpuscles present a mottled
appearance; that its pulp is more or less softened, swollen,
and malpighian bodies are perceptibly enlarged; and the liver
and kidneys are swollen, enlarged, congested.
The characteristic symptoms: There are no premoni-
tions. This fever comes on suddenly, and the fever will rise
to IO2 degrees to IO4 degrees, and continue high for several
days, with rather a weak pulse, headache, sick or nausea, vom-
iting, and lancinating pains in the limbs and muscles, espe-
cially the calves of the legs, followed by fullness, pressure and
more or less pain in right hypochondrium. This may be due
to swelling of the liver and spleen. Jaundice is a frequent
accompaniment and of frequent occurrence. The seventh
day the crisis comes—the fever ends; and about the fourteenth
day the symptoms return, but generally in a milder form,
and continues about four or five days, when slow con-
valescence begins. Emaciation considerable, and relapses
may be repeated several times.
The medicine doctors give quinine, although they
acknowledge that it has no power to prevent the relapses.
Their treatment is largely expectant! The use of morphine
takes precedence here (for pain), and the carbolic acid, cerii
oxalas, ferrum, and quininia. They acknowledge that they
do no good in this disease, yet the patient must take his medi-
cine! Having had much experience with this fever, we readily
understand why medicine does no good. I did not under-
stand why the medicines failed to cure it when I formerly
treated so many cases in the southern, hot climate; but do
now, and this is the very reason that I am writing out a
PLATE XIX. —Vibratory Movement of Knee and Hip Joint.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 25 I
rational system of treatment that will cure, or be the means,
if practiced, of taking off the pressure and letting nature right
herself. Remember our text: Take off the obstruction that
produces the lesion, and disease no longer exists. Pathology
means pain. Pressure produces pain; therefore take it off,
if you would cure your pathological conditions at all times
and everywhere. º
THE TREATMENT.
It will be remembered that fever is only a symptom, and
not a disease, and the question arises, always, What is to
treat? The cause or the symptoms? If the bug is the cause
of this fever, as asserted by pathologists (or at least supposed
to be the cause), why make so much delay in arresting his rav-
ages? Then why give quinine? Why give carbolic acid, or
why give anything? We protest against the whole bug the-
ory of disease, and regard no such harmless creature as pro-
ductive of results attributed to him, hypothetically, or really,
or probably. The materies morbi causing infectious disease
results from the capillary or venous obstruction or obstruc-
tions somewhere in the body. All pain has its origin in blood
stasis, causing pressure on terminal nerve filaments, severing
the connecting terminals. Tissue degenerative metamor-
phoses result; materies morbi manifests itself; a nidus is
formed; catalysis contaminates; decomposition ensues; infec-
‘tions come in as a result of chemical changes; the blood
becomes contaminated, and whatever the elementary constit-
uents of the secretions be in the particular part where the
stasis occurs, in its transition from one chemical to another,
the results are accordingly. -
This organism of ours is the most complicated chemical
laboratory that divine thought ever created, and even receives
impressions from the thought of the individual which at once
produce chemical changes that restore the possessor to life
and health, or send their wailing and depressing influences
through every tissue in the body, changing them to mor-
bidity, which results in death itself. The delicacy of this
252 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
human structure is inconceivably delicate and impression-
able. A change of the whole career of man is often the result
of a whisper, because the thought therein turns the whole tide
of life. Then how important it is to know how to start the
proper forces in the system to control the movements of the
fluids that contain the life of man! Osteopathy understood
is a leverage that moves the world, and its benign influence
will spread from sea to sea, and the far-off isles will clap their
hands for very joy when its marvelous possibilities are
fully comprehended. The medical profession, with its com-
bined wisdom, should possess such a leverage as this to com-
bat with the arch enemy, disease. The simple truth along
any line of thought seems to be the last, the slowest and most
difficult to comprehend and accept of all things. Every
conceivable excuse that the heart of man can devise seems to
be called forth as a justification of their opposition and rejec-
tion! We need not repeat this proposition, for it has floated
on the very surface of history adown the ages, and is con-
stantly verified; and I opine the Psalmist uttered truth when
he said, “All men are liars”—the legitimate fruit of the seed
sown. The truth, however, is mighty, and will eventually
prevail.
The Oseopathic treatment for relapsing fever, then, is
the same as for typhoid fever.
CEREBRO-SPINAL MENINGITIS.
This is regarded as a malignant, epidemic affection, char-
acterized by suddenness of attack, severe headache, vomiting,
Severe and painful contraction of the muscles of the back of
the neck and spine, delirium, disorders of the special senses,
coma, stupor, and a spotted purpuric eruption under the
skin, showing symptoms of decided congestion. These
lesions are found along the meninges of the spinal cord in
post-mortems. . .
The cause seems to be unknown. The micro-organism
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 253
seems to exercise considerable influence in its production, so
said by some authors. The bacillus theorists have not dis-
covered the means of entrance of the “critter” as yet, and
they are in doubt whether he is going to produce spotted
fever, erysipelas or pneumonia in his peregrinations through
the system. To make such ado about a bug seems altogether
out of proportion to the facts in the case. It is also strange
that this “bug” should have a peculiar predilection for the
young. The attacks come on suddenly, even while the little
one is in the height of glee, and on the street, suddenly pros-
trated, without any premonitions whatever. Strange bug
that!
The causes of this pathological condition seem to be
wholly wrapped in mystery. The unfruitful search for out-
side causes and influences leaves the profession halting and
guessing what might be, and failing to find what is the cause.
To give remedies under such circumstances seems the height
of folly. To “beat the air” seems to hold out the idea that
enemies infest the very air we breathe, and call forth our
whole man in physical array to fight effects—and the pro-
fession claim to be the arbiters of the health of the people!
While there are many circumstances in the environments that
tend to contribute to the production of diseases, yet these
should not center in some peculiar “bug,” and then assume
that it has produced the changes in the system that manifest
the various symptoms found in pathological conditions, and
then theoretically assume that the treatment of symptoms is
the proper guide to govern practice. Where is the trouble
in this affection? This is the thing to settle. Remove that,
and health comes back and resumes its throne. Take Off the
Pressure. This is the universal remedy!
Capillary congestion is the sole cause of this affection.
Arrest of circulation of the blood and other fluids of the body
—decomposition—change of chemical elementary constitu-
ents—the materies morbi resulting from these decomposing
elements, caused by the inhalation of the poisoned atmos-
254 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
phere, from telluric and atmospheric changes. The lesion is
in the meninges of the brain and the spinal cord. Remove
the obstruction and the effects cease at once! Do not wait
on the uncertainties of presumptive medication.
The drug that the profession relies the most on, opium,
arrests all tissue change, and only tends to increase the speed
of the patient to the realms of “kingdom come.” This blunts
all sensibilities, and the doctor rejoices in the idea that this is
the salutary remedy. To the Osteopath this seems the
height of stupidity and ignorance of the proper method of
relieving the afflicted of the cause of the trouble—congestion.
It is said that there are three groups—the common, the
fulminant and the abortive. The common begins with a
chill, severe headache, nausea, vomiting, vertigo, and a sense
of extreme weakness, and within a short time the muscles of
the back become rigid, painful on moving the head or neck,
retraction to the extent of oposthonos ensues, extreme rest-
lessness, hyperesthesia, cramps in the muscles (especially of
the legs); spasmodic twitchings occur, and frequently spasms
and delirium. Added to these symptoms there are intoler-
ance of light, blindness (sometimes sudden), more or less
deafness, loss of smell and taste. The temperature and pulse
are irregular. Much else might be said of this form of the
disease. There is another form that is called the fulminant
form, ushered in by a severe chill, great depression, followed
soon by a collapse, into which the patient sinks and never
reacts therefrom. The abortive form is not so severe, and
may not be pronounced only in some respects during the
course of an epidemic; that is, different in type only and
point of severity. The prescribed remedies of the Regular
School of medicine are opium, quinine, ergota and iodide of
potassium, tar plasters and cold compresses.
THE TREATMENT.
The Osteopathic treatment is similar to that of typhus
fever, with special attention to the vaso-motor area and all
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 255
along down the spine—taking off the pressure all along the
line, and everywhere. Reflexes are prominent character-
istics in this disease, and special regard to the sphincter mus-
cles must be had. The pressure must be taken off the
sympathetic nerve filaments; arouse the secretions, unite the
forces at once, or disintegration soon sets in, and the lesions
become sources of materies morbi of a malignant type. Use
plenty of water, internally and externally. No food to
depress the already exhausted digestive organs. Let the
patient have rest of body and mind, and only treat enough
to take off the pressure, then let patient rest. A crowding
of the stomach, or the administration of opium, is surely
uncalled for. To relieve the excessive pains, take off the
pressure, start the forces to moving out the debris. Do not
wait until special symptoms develop. Remove the cause (the
obstructed circulation of the fluids of the body), and you
cure your disease, or it gets well itself. •
Fortunately for the people, this disease is not a frequent
visitor; but when it does appear, it leaves a trace behind—
not only carries off many, but leaves the balance in a condi-
tion that death would better have occurred to its victims
—crippled, blind, deaf, or demented! Horrible state to con-
template! When Osteopathy is properly applied, such results
will cease. The cure should be as readily effected as that
for diphtheria or scarlet fever, typhus or typhoid fevers, and
this is true of many other affections thought to be incurable.
The re-establishment of nerve force takes place when the
pressure is removed. The almost universal pressure will be
found in the jugulars and cervical muscles.
LA GRIPPE—INFLUENZA.
Synonym: Epidemic catarrhal fever.
This is an acute, infectious, sporadic, epidemic fever,
usually accompanied with more or less inflammation of the
lungs, and always affects the nervous system intensely, pro-
256 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ducing extreme prostration, out of all proportion to the
seeming severity of the fever. -
The causes are said to be various. A specific bacillus
is thought to be the cause by some. Others suppose it is
induced by soil, climate, atmospheric changes. We are not
going to stop here to argue the bug theory of disease.
The symptoms of the affection are as varied as the causes
assigned by pathologists, as regards variations and intensity,
from the slightest illness to the most grave, often ending
fatally. The onset is usually sudden, beginning with a chill,
lasting a longer or a shorter time, then fever sets in, reaching
as high as IO3 degrees, with a rapid, soft pulse, shooting pains
in the muscles, over the eyes, frontal sinuses, chilliness down
the spine, hoarseness, with more or less pain, deafness, run-
ning at the nose (thin watery secretion at first), eyes watery,
a dry, irritative cough, affecting the bronchial mucous mem-
brane; the tongue has a brownish, nasty fur on it; loss of
appetite, pains in the bowels, especially in the epigastric
region; nausea, vomiting, and often a diarrhea. There is
more or less melancholia, extreme debility, tenderness of the
skin; dullness of intellect is common.
The duration ordinarily is about four days to seven days.
Relapses frequently occur. One attack seems to render the
subject extremely susceptible to other attacks, and it is a
good deal as the Irishman said of his case, when he had La
Grippe: “He was sick six wakes afther he got well.”
The complications are usually those of a bronchial or
pneumonic character, leaving the patient with a severe,
hoarse, harsh cough. Headache is a common sequela; neu-
ralgia, enlargement of the glandular system, especially the
lymphatic glands. Many cases of consumption date their
origin to an attack of La Grippe. The prognosis depends
to a great degree upon the strength of the person attacked,
and the kind of treatment. The extreme prostration of the
patient is the prominent characteristic symptom. Its sudden
onset is likewise a source of differentiation from a bad cold.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 257
THE TREATMENT.
All of the symptoms of this disease point to a cerebro-
spinal nervous affection. The excessive disturbance of the
whole intestinal tract and the severe muscular pain indicate
a disturbance of the sensory and the sympathetic nerves. The
equilibrium of these forces (or conductors of forces) is dis-
turbed. Atmospheric influences, cold, have produced capil-
lary congestion in the posterior terminal filaments; hyperes-
thesia ensues; capillary congestion results from stenosis of
the capillaries; decomposition of the blood ensues, and the
absorbed poisonous materies morbi, mistaken for the bacillus,
produces extreme prostration, vomiting, diarrhea, etc. Now
what is the indication?
In this affection the spine must receive our special atten-
tion, pressing steadily for two to five minutes on the upper
cervical and then the brachial, dorsal, lumbar and sacral.
regions once or twice a day. The neck should be thoroughly
treated, and a general and thorough manipulation should be
given, but more especially the spine and chest should receive
attention. The chest and heart treatment, raising the clav-
icles, stretching the cervical vertebrae, and the whole spine,
takes off the pressure, and the treatment of the spine strikes
at the root of the whole difficulty. If properly treated, the
pain is at once relieved, and no bad consequences follow. To
free circulation is the prime object in this affection. Watch
complications and meet them promptly by appropriate treat-
ment. Let the patient use plenty of water, bathing, drinking
it, and ablute the spine once or twice a day at least. Keep
special watch of the glandular system, the heart and lungs,
free the circulation; treat the twelfth dorsal to energize the
kidneys. Elimination must be looked to especially in this,
and all poisonous infections—an exchange of excesses for
normal commodities should be surely made.
The proper stimulation of the spine relieves the pros-
trating symptoms as well as the congestion. Restoration
should be rapid, if no food is allowed until the secretions are
258 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
restored to a healthy condition. The thing the Osteopath
will have to contend with will be the prejudice of the masses.
The old way is so thoroughly fixed in the mind that no other
way seems to them the right thing to do. The idea of curing
such an affection with manipulations seems to be the height
of ridiculousness and absurdity. It is our experience
that these manipulations act like magic in this affection,
frequently aborting the whole process at once, and if not, so
modifying it that the patient is free from pain, weakness and
lung or bowel complications, which in other treatment is not
satisfactory. If a fever is allowed to run its course, what is
the use of medication? The fever should be cured by remov-
ing the congestion, which is done by the manipulations indi-
cated. The treatment should not be automatic, nor should
the practitioner of this science become an automaton if he
wishes to succeed.
CONTINUED FEVERS.
All fevers that continue with a steady progress, increas-
ing gradually or persistently, without either a too decided rise
or fall, are called continued fevers. Simple continued fever
may be of short duration, and may be mild in character, and
present no marked malignancy or perceptible lesions, and
yet be fatal. So continued fevers should receive special atten-
tion during their prodromal or forming stage, for lesions may
lurk somewhere in the system without pain.
The causes of fever: It is said by pathologists that
fevers are caused by fatigue, exposure, atmospheric or sudden
changes of temperature, excesses in eating, excitement, vio-
lent exercise, miasmatic influences, etc.
The symptoms: In the continued fever, the onset is
usually abrupt, with a feeling of lassitude; then a chilliness
or a decided chill; then a rise of the temperature of the body,
pulse rapid and tense, headache, skin dry and hot, thirst,
coated tongue, costiveness, scanty, high-colored urine, some-
PLA're XX.–Showing Adduction of Thigh.





A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 261
times nausea, vomiting, and in children there may be con-
vulsions.
The duration varies from a few hours to several days.
The temperature within a short time will reach as high as Iog
degrees, or even higher. This may continue for a day or
two, and then there appears a condition called “a crisis.”
This is an abrupt termination, usually with some critical dis-
charge, and it may continue without any special change, only
a gradual falling, and terminate in a normal condition. There
appears usually, as the fever subsides, herpes on the lips and
around the nostrils. This is recognized as a termination of
the fever.
THE TREATMENT.
An important thing is rest in bed. Relieve the contents
of the colon of any accumulated feces by non-irritating clys-
ters, such as warm water, followed by the constipation treat-
ment, if necessary. Bathe the body all over (in a bath is the
preferable way) every three hours to every twenty-four hours,
as directed for general treatment of fevers. Frequent spong-
ing of the body is admissible at any time. Warm water is
preferable usually. If there are pains in the abdominal vis-
cera, use cloths or towels wrung out of warm or as hot water
as the patient can bear, applied to the abdomen, covering the
whole of the bowels; then cover all with a dry towel, and
repeat this process as often as the cloth becomes a little cool
or too dry, until all pain and fever subside. Give no food of
any kind. Let the patient have water at short intervals, say
every half hour, either hot or cold. Stimulate the vaSO-
motor region gently from five to ten minutes, as often as
desirable to regulate the action of the circulation, stimulating
down the spine gently on either side of the spinous process
every four to six hours, and see to it that all obstructions to
the circulation of the blood in the neck are looked after.
262 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
TYPHOID FEVER.
This affection goes by several names, and on account of
its affecting the whole system, it is hard to miscall it. The
common appellations it goes by are: Enteric fever, gastric,
nervous, mesenteric, autumnal, typhus. It is said to be acute,
Self-limited, due to specific poison, and comes on gradually,
usually with nose-bleed, dull headache, stupor, mild to raving
delirium, red tongue, gradually turning brown, cracked
Sordes on the teeth and gums, abdominal tenderness, diar-
rhea being also an early symptom, tympanitis, Soreness and
gurgling in right iliac region, rapid prostration; patient
inclines to want to lie on the back, with knees drawn up.
The lesions are always present in this fever, and they are
found in Peyer's patches and the solitary glands. The var-
ious stages of this inflammatory process are: First, the infil-
tration, hardening, ulcerative, cicatrization. The spleen
enlarges, and every gland and tissue in the body become
involved and share in the effects of the lesions. The
Symptoms of the different stages need not be enumerated,
for the variations only consist of increased and intense per-
Sistence of what have been enumerated, on up to the end of
the fourth week, in severe cases; varying in mild cases, and
simulating a mild attack of intermittent fever. The tem-
perature varies from IOI degrees to IO4 degrees during the
twenty-four hours, assuming a regularity peculiar to that
fever, and simulating remittent fever. The prostration
increases as the fever varies, the perspiration is profuse, stupor
persistent, especially during the fever; the tongue is intensely
dry, hard and cracked, frequently bleeding; the brown sordes
is thick, tenacious; pulse rapid, feeble; respirations shallow,
quick; the secretions scanty and retained, and contain albu-
men; the stools are voided involuntarily; bedsores develop,
and at this stage the patient usually succumbs—dies.
The medical profession has paid particular attention to
this fever, and the almost universal verdict is: “You can’t do
anything to mitigate it; only good nursing.” It seems that
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 263
their whole interest is centered in watching its ravages, and
portraying its symptomatology, rather than to remove the
cause that keeps up the lesion. To assume that this affection
is caused by a bacillus, and sit by and watch that bug perform
its destructive ravages without endeavoring to arrest him, try
him, condemn him and execute him, is to be favoring a
1eutrality that is unwarrantable. It certainly does seem that
something ought to be done to arrest the ravages of this
disease, whether caused by a bug or resulting from the poi-
sonous effects of the decomposed products of animal and
vegetable matter combined.
This is another of the nervous prostration effects, and
our attention should be directed to a restoration of the nerve
power by removing the accumulated debris that feeds this
virus—that enervates nerve power. All lesions anywhere
in the body are the result of pressure somewhere, either at the
Origin, along the line, or at the end of nerves where they exer-
'cise their influence on the capillaries, preventing that influ-
ence in full or partially. Congestion at once results. The
pent-up blood not passing on into the veins, or the
waste material prevented from entering the lymphatics, on
account of inability or deficient nerve force (and especially
the motor filaments), results in lesion, and decomposition
begins. The consequent effects of this poisonous product
being resorbed into the tissues, thence carried to and enter-
ing into the blood, manifest themselves in every tissue.
During the prodromic stage is the time to arrest the whole
trouble. Take Off the Pressure before the mischief ensues.
This can not always be done, nor is an opportunity always
afforded, because the patient does not always know what is
producing the indisposition that culminates later in the
typhoid state, so that the physician is not called in until the
ravages have become prominent and the lesion is doing its
destructive work. - -
At this place we take the liberty of presenting the work-
ings of the two forces that constantly play a part in the wel-
264 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
fare of the human body. These understood, will aid us
greatly in our treatment of all diseases of an inflammatory or
destructive character, resulting from lesions. The Positive
and the Negative forces are manifest through certain nerves,
and these properly stimulated produce effects in the parts of
the body where terminal fibers are distributed. We demon-
strate our position and verify results almost positively in the
Osteopathic treatment for pains in the stomach. It is cer-
tainly proven that the Positive Pole of a galvanic battery,
exercised through a needle introduced into the flesh, produces
contraction of tissue, and that the Negative Pole of the same
battery breaks down or destroys tissue. These facts lead us
to the conclusion that the same sort of influence is exerted
in the human body, and our experiments and application of
the science of Osteopathy have abundantly demonstrated
these facts. That the Spinal Nervous System exercises Nega-
tive influences, and the Pneumogastric Nerves produce the
Positive influences, results fully corroborate. These facts
constantly held in mind, our treatments result as we deem
best, provided intelligence is the chief factor exercised—(and
not automatism).
The pains anywhere in the body are due to “pressure.”
Whether this pressure be due to irritation of the nerves that
supply muscular fiber, causing contraction upon nerves, or to
partial paralysis of end nerve fiber by the accumulation of
blood or waste material pressing on surrounding parts, the
results are the same—decomposition ensues. If simply
enough irritation is made to produce contraction on sensory
end filaments, pain is the result. This force is conducted
usually through sensory nerves, directed to the parts, because
of the separation of the motor filaments from the sympathetic
‘end filaments. Coordination of the nervous system must
‘be had everywhere to produce harmony. If pressure is taken
off, this state of affairs exists, and health results. If the
accumulated precipitant, due to stagnation, and arresting
peristalsis, remains in the tissue in the immediate vicinity of
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 265
the capillaries and paralyzed nerve filaments, is not removed,
decomposition ensues, friction takes place, fever is the result.
The fever (heat) evaporates the watery portions of the blood,
the carbonic oxide increases, and deoxygenation of the blood
becomes responsible for the results. To be healthy, the blood
must be regularly oxygenated; to receive oxygen, it must
circulate to the lungs and skin. We recognize the locality of
the lesion generally by the pain in typhoid fever, it being a
prominent symptom, especially in the right iliac fossa. This
condition is an early indication of its presence. The whole
intestinal tract becomes involved, from the foul tongue to the
fecal discharges from the bowels. The upper portion of the
alimentary tract seems to be directly under the Positive influ-
ence down as far as the stomach, and the balance of the course
is under the Negative influence. The one produces contrac-
tion of the muscular system, therefore a sense of tightness,
contracture, impediment in the circulation of the blood,
stupor as a result, headache, feebleness and Soreness of mus-
cles, a drawn expression, secretions lessened, tongue dry
and cracked; and in the lower half of the body the
reverse—especially in the lumen of the intestines; a
relaxed state, secondarily at least; discharges from
bowels, a breaking-down of the mucous membrane of the
ilium, and in fatal cases, perforation. It seems to present a
condition of disconnection of the two poles, and as both of
these forces are controlled by the organic nerves, it becomes
apparent that there is a failure of connection of the end fila-
ments of these, one set being separated from the others, and
disparagement is the consequence. Therefore, to right the
trouble, a proper union must take place. Our means of
bringing about this desirable consummation, that harmony
shall once more reign, and order come out of confusion, are at
hand. The connection is established through the spinal
nerves—the splanchnics very largely. But to reach a condi-
tion that these nerves may exercise their wonted influence,
the pressure must be removed—the debris must be removed
266 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
—then connection can be established. The supply of water
should be furnished, ingesta should cease until the accu-
mulated rubbish is removed, and the receptacles prepared for
taking care of it; and this is done satisfactorily with the supply
of water furnished to the system in the right manner, remem-
bering that about 70 per cent. of the whole body is water, and
that that commodity has been evaporated by the heat (the
fever), and the elementary substances held in solution by the
water have precipitated, become incompatible, non-assimil-
able, and must be resolved and the waste tissue washed out,
So that connection to end nerve filaments can be re-estab-
lished; then the forces are normal, action begins—normal
action—which is nature's own method of surmounting the
difficulties resulting from congestion.
THE TREATMENT.
The manipulations should begin at the vaso-motor
center, or at least as near to it as possible (and that is at the
back and upper portion of the neck), holding the fingers
firmly there from two to five minutes, and then stretching
the neck by placing one of the hands on back of neck and
the other under the chin; make gentle traction, then a rotary
movement each way from a normal position; then move all
of the muscles of the neck carefully, deeply and effectually,
lifting them from their moorings; then raise the clavicles,
stretching all of the chest and intercostal muscles, using
vibratory movements over the abdomen, stomach, liver,
spleen and pancreas. Turn patient on the side, raise the arm,
pressing fingers of other hand against the sides of spinous
processes, and while extending the arm, use pressure upwards
and outward along the spine, on down as far as the twelfth
on either side. Manipulate lumbar region, using vibrations
freely. This should be done daily, or perhaps twice each day,
provided care be taken to treat mildly. The tympanitis
should be relieved by warm water injections into the bowels,
and by hot applications in the form of towels or cloths wrung
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 267
out in hot water and placed on abdomen. Water shbuld be
administered to the patient (to drink) in small quantities,
every half to one hour. Frequent sponge bathing should be
used. The whole body should be bathed in water of a tem-
perature of 80 degrees from ten to fifteen minutes, every three
to twenty-four hours, and the head wrapped in a wet towel
while bathing; the patient should then be wrapped in a
dry sheet or thin blanket, placed in bed, and allowed to rest
and sleep. These measures should be repeated daily as long
as there is any fever. Give no food nor fruits of any kind
until the tongue cleans off and becomes normal, and the
patient calls for food. Then is time enough. Do not be
uneasy about starving your patient. This is the proper
course. If there is too much action of the bowels, press the
knuckles against the left side of the twelfth dorsal vertebra
for five minutes, steadily, firmly, bending shoulders back-
ward, or stretching the leg backward, with thumb on left
side of the vertebra named. This course of treatment will
be eminently satisfactory in its results, and the mortality need
not be anything, if treatment is begun in any reasonable time.
YELLOW FEVER.
Synonyms: Yellow Jack, bilious malignant fever, black
vomit. -
This is an acute, infectious disease, paroxysmal, and
usually divided into three stages: The Febrile, the Remission
and the Relapse (or the collapse), characterized by violent
fever and yellowness of the skin of the whole surface, and
“black coffee-ground vomit.” It seems to be a specific
poison, raging in the Southern States, at high temperatures.
It is not due to malarial poison, usually prevalent dur-
ing the summer months. In some places in the South it is
never absent, and in other localities it comes periodically.
Neither age, sex, race, nor social conditions show any prefer-
ence to the disease. The peculiarities of the disease may not
268 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
be uninteresting to know, therefore we here present some of
the pathological symptoms: The skin assumes a yellowish,
lemon-colored appearance; the blood seems to be dissolved
to a greater or less degree; heart seems to be softened, the
stomach veins deeply engorged; mucous membrane seems to
peel off, and the excreta present the appearance of coffee
grounds, consisting really of blood and mucus, epithelial
cells and debris. The intestines take on a similar condition.
The liver is yellow, and fatty degeneration of the cells is
a frequent accompaniment. The kidneys assume a granular
degeneration, but there do not seem to be any morbid or
pathological changes in the spleen. The pulse runs high,
and the temperature rises from IO4 to IO6 degrees in a few
hours. Severe neuralgic pains in the head, limbs, stomach,
back and joints; the patient is extremely restless, delirious;
urine scanty, acid, high colored, and contains albumen, and
has a peculiar odor (as well as the whole body), never to be
mistaken after once inhaling it.
The Regular School of medicine regards the disease as
“self-limited,” and the only way to arrest its progress is in
one or all of the three following ways: “Isolation, disinfec-
tion and depopulation.” The Homeopaths have not said so
much, but regard it as a curable affection. The question is,
What has the Osteopath got to say about the treatment for
this disease? To retire from the conflict and acknowledge
defeat before a fight is the characteristic of cowardice. To
even pretend to acknowledge that “there is no cure in Oste-
opathy for it,” is a concession unworthy a great science.
What is the matter that Osteopathy is not applicable to it, as
well as to any other known condition due to capillary con-
gestion? Think of a physician in the conflict with an enemy
of mankind, and pleading inability to help because he has
no knowledge of what to use, or how to use it if he had it,
then to say: “No remedy in Osteopathy for it.” What is
Osteopathy for? What is disease? What produces disease?
What is the matter in yellow fever that Osteopathy, properly
PLA'th. XXI. —Conclusion of Movement Shown on Plate XX.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 27I
and intelligently applied, will not relieve it? We say it will
cure it, therefore we earnestly recommend it. The depopu-
lation measure seems to be the most probable measure con-
templated, judging from the Regular way of treating it.
They utterly fail to adapt means to ends, or this writer is most
egregiously ignorant of natural cause and effect—purgation,
vomiting, diaphoretics and diuretics!
THE TREATMENT.
In the treatment of yellow fever it will be noticed that
there is a diffusion of bile through the whole system, produc-
ing extreme yellowness of the skin. This state exists every-
where in every tissue in the body where blood can flow. The
shortness of breath indicates chest contracture and dia-
phragmatic irritation—capillary congestion everywhere in the
body—a congestion of the portal system and liver, as well as
the breathing apparatus. The first thing to be done in the
case is to relieve the capillary congestion. Begin with the
vaso-motor nervous system, holding fingers on either side of
spinous processes from three to five minutes, then gently
stretch the neck, and manipulate all of the muscles of the
neck; raise the arms, treating along down the back on both
sides of the spines, clear down to the sacro-lumbar junction;
springing the back by pulling the limbs backward, one at a
time, patient lying on the side, manipulate the lower limbs;
and then, with patient lying on the back, raise clavicles,
stretch the arms up strongly, and at the same time press the
fingers along the sides of the spines from first dorsum to the
tenth (general treatment process). Now, with patient lying
on the back, manipulate in a gentle manner the liver, stomach
and all of the abdomen in a vibratory manner for a few
moments. The treatment should occupy at least twenty
minutes, and should be done gently, yet thoroughly, twice
each day. The patient should receive frequent ablutions and
baths, together with plenty of water to drink at short inter-
vals, and supplied with the ferric phosphate and sodium phos-
phate, these two elements being deficient in cases with this
272 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
affection. The one supplies homoglobin and the other regu-
lates the eliminative process. As in all fevers, do not feed
your patient until the organs of digestion are ready to digest
and assimilate and the tongue cleans off. Treat the spine
in the splanchnic region at least twice daily; in fact, from the
third to the tenth surely. The spine will be necessary to
look after at frequent intervals, for the sickness of stomach,
vomiting and diarrhea will require special treatment occa-
sionally. With these general suggestions to the intelligent
Osteopath there ought to be no difficulty in relieving any case
of yellow fever. The vaso-motor area should be mildly
treated when indicated from a too rapid or a too slow or any
irregularity of the heart's action, and the vibratory move-
ments along the dorsum and region of the liver. If you do
not feed your patient, with the above directions followed, you
will restore him to health by the treatment suggested. We
have been thus particular and specific on account of there
going forth from an Osteopathic writer the annunciation,
“There is no cure for it in Osteopathy.” Rest assured there
is. Osteopathy is applicable to all pathological conditions,
and that, too, with more certainty of relief than any other
treatment—properly and intelligently applied. The more
you know of it, the more confidence you will have.
INTERMITTENT FEVER.
This is regarded as ague, chills and fever, Swamp fever,
or malarial fever.
It is characterized by a cold, a hot, and a Sweating stage,
the phenomena observing a successive regularity, according
to the type, and having a complete intermission, varying in
the length of time from a daily paroxysm to several varieties
of characteristics. The tertian, or every day; the quartan,
occurring the first and fourth days; the octan, or that occur-
ring every week or eighth day; the duplicated quotidian, two
paroxysms every second day; the double tertian, daily par-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 273
oxysm, but more severe every second day; the dumb or
masked ague, an irregularity, and presenting peculiar phe-
nomena. All ages and sexes are liable to this affection.
The causes are attributed to a peculiar bacillus malaria
from the low-lying atmosphere in swamp and marshy districts.
There are numerous varieties of these bacilli! The period of
incubation of this disease varies from a few days to several
weeks. This is another fruitless search for a bug! It is
strange that this malarial bug—the ague producer—vanishes
into thin air at the presence of an Osteopath! A slight move
of the spine in a certain direction, in a particular manner,
Scatters this beast, and he leaves his lurking place as com-
pletely as if he were a soldier under marching orders. All is
quiet and Serene as a May morning at the presence of the
manipulator. Singular, isn't it? -
Symptoms: Each paroxysm has three stages—the cold,
hot and sweating. The cold stage begins with prodromes,
lassitude, yawning, headache, nausea, followed by the chill;
the teeth chatter, skin turns pale, nails and lips blue, and the
surface rough; the appearance of goose flesh is a prominent
peculiarity, and great thirst (in some cases), with a rise of
temperature to 104 degrees. The chill may last from a few
moments to one or more hours, and the hot stage is gradually
ushered in as the shivering ceases, which is usually accom-
panied with a continued rise in temperature, reaching as high
as Iof degrees in some cases, and with children to IO7
degrees, and accompanied with spasms. The pulse now
becomes full, headache and nausea increase, intense thirst,
dry, flushed skin, scanty urine, sleepy, indifferent drowsiness
settles down over the whole person, and this stage continues
from one to three or four hours, when the sweating stage is
ushered in gradually, beginning at the forehead and spreading
over the entire body. The fever lessens, coming down to a
normal temperature, and a general feeling of comfort returns
until the next paroxysm. This paroxysm may come on the
next day, but the tertian type is the most common; and there
274 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
may be an intermission of one day, when the patient will feel
comfortable and revel in the hope that he will not have a
return; but all at once he begins to yawn and stretch, cold,
chilly sensations creep up his spine, the feet and hands and
nose get cold, the lips turn blue, ears and face pale, eyes
become somewhat glassy looking, and he soon settles down
to a season of “shaking,” characteristic of this kind of fever.
It is useless to state that the almost universal remedy for
this affection is quinine. The resort to quinine is the almost
universal custom; and yet it often fails to do what is desired.
It seems to be the most successful in those forms char-
acterized by the three distinct stages. Given in two- to four-
grain doses, every two hours, until as much as twenty grains
are taken, beginning long enough before the next expected
chill to have taken the last dose of the quinine one or two
hours before the expected chill. The quinine is to be
repeated the fourth, seventh, fourteenth, twenty-first and
twenty-eighth days, from two to four doses each day, as men-
tioned. Months are sometimes passed before the victim has
immunity from this affection under the use of the very best
selected remedy, or remedies.
The Osteopath neither gives the quinine nor protracts
his case. The cure is effected at once, generally in one treat-
ment. This silences all objection to this science with the
suffering victim of chills (and the long dosing with quinine).
Sometimes this fever assumes a pernicious type; when
the whole system becomes purple, the lungs become con-
gested; in fact, the whole body becomes so, accompanied with
Severe pains in the lumbar region and abdomen, with
delirium, severe headache, stupor, drowsiness, and sinking
prostration coming on rapidly, when it is known as a “sink-
ing chill.” These are extremely dangerous types of the
malarial fevers, and are regarded with fear. The intermittent
fever is the bane of some districts, and about the only sickness.
It seems to come on after all of the summer’s work is over,
and the farmer has begun his period of rest from his sum-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 275
mer's labors. About two weeks elapse, and the chills set in,
and frequently the whole fall months are passed with chills,
then merge into Some other type, such as typhoid or pneu-
monia, due to general exhaustion from long sickness.
THE TREATMENT.
This should embrace the whole person, beginning at the
cervical region, moving the muscles thereof thoroughly,
strongly, deeply; stretching the neck with rotation, and rais-
ing clavicles; raising arms; manipulating spine all the way
down, pressing hard and for some time, from the fourth
dorsal to the ninth, raising arms and pushing back the chest
therewith strongly, requiring deep, full inspirations at the
same time; treating the liver, spleen and abdomen thoroughly
by vibrations and manipulations, stirring them up thor-
oughly; then, lastly, holding the fingers on the vaso-motor
region from two to five minutes; then pulling the arms back-
ward, with the knee against the back, two to four times, end-
ing with the pressure at the eighth dorsal. This treatment,
begun half an hour before a paroxysm, usually arrests it at
once. Two or three treatments cure the worst cases.
REMITTENT FEVER.
Synonyms: Bilious fever, bilious remittent, marsh fever,
typho-malaria.
This is a paroxysmal fever, with exacerbations and remis-
sions, in which the temperature is constantly above normal.
It has a moderately cold and an intensely hot stage, but the
cold stage does not recur at each recurrence of the hot stage.
There is usually an intense hot stage, with violent headache,
gastric trouble, irritability, often vomiting. There is scarcely
observed any sweating stage. -
The cause is attributed to the presence of micro-vege-
table organism, the generic species of which seems to be a
little in doubt. º
276 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The symptoms: During the cold stage there is a mod-
erate chill, the temperature rising one or two degrees, the
tongue slightly coated, headache, pains through the body,
and sick, oppressed feeling in the epigastrium. During the
hot stage there is persistent vomiting; thickly furred tongue,
pulse full, rapid, flushed face, injected eyes, severe headache,
pains in limbs, loins, hurried respirations, temperature rising
to IO4 degrees, or even to IO6 degrees; the bowels costive,
stools tarry and very offensive, the urine scanty and highly
colored, with uric acid present; the skin becomes yellow, and
delirium is a common accompaniment. The sweating stage
comes on in from six to twenty-four hours, when all of the
above symptoms somewhat abate, or greatly modify, and
slight sweating occurs, and the temperature may go down to
IOO degrees, or as low as 99 degrees. This state may last a
longer or a shorter period, called the stage of remission.
After from two to eight hours the symptoms recur, gen-
erally minus the chill. This in turn is followed by a remis-
sion. These paroxysms go on for a period of from Seven to
fourteen days, but sometimes the fever ceases to remit; then
it becomes continuous, simulating typhoid fever; then it is
called typho-malarial fever.
It is said that this fever can be positively diagnosed by
an examination of the blood, finding therein the bacillus
malaria, and that as soon as this is gotten rid of, or eliminated,
the fever subsides. As is the usual custom, quinine is the
sheet-anchor in this fever. If some process could be discov-
ered to open the gate and drive the bug out, what a saving of
suffering to the patient!
THE TREATMENT.
This should consist of stimulating the vaso-motor area,
the manipulations of neck muscles, freeing the chest muscles,
and a thorough spinal treatment, and especially the splanchnic
region. The bath and sponging the whole body at frequent
and indicated periods may be done, and clysters of warm
Water and hot applications over abdomen and around loins
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 277
will be found soothing to the patient. Drinking water at
frequent intervals should be particularly observed, remember-
ing that in all fevers the per cent. of water in the blood is
lessened by evaporation, and it must be supplied to hold in
solution the poisons. Then the freedom of the circulation of
the fluids restores the equilibrium.
PERNICIOUS FEVER.
Synonym: Malignant intermittent fever.
This is a malignant, destructive malarial fever, which
may be intermittent or remittent in form, characterized by
intense congestion of one or more internal organs, together
with interference of the functions of innervation. -
There are several varieties of this fever: The Gastro-
enteric, producing intense nausea, vomiting, purging, tenes-
mus, burning in stomach, intense thirst, cold feet, cold
extremities, shrunken features, and a general and intense
depression of all of the vital forces. This condition may last
from a half an hour to several hours, when an intermission
or a remission occurs. There is also a Thoracic variety, char-
acterized by intense congestion of the lungs, with violent
dyspnoea, gasping for breath, fifty or sixty respirations per
minute, oppressed cough, frequent, weak pulse, cold surface,
and distressed-looking features. Then there is a Cerebral
variety, characterized by intense congestion of the brain,
effusion sometimes of serum into the ventricles, violent delir-
ium, followed by stupor, coma, slow, full pulse; flushed or
livid surface of the whole body. There is also a Hemorrhagic
variety, called the yellow disease. It is followed by nausea,
vomiting, dyspnoea, severe pains in the region of the liver
and kidneys, bloody urine, yellow surface of whole body.
There is also what is termed an Algid form, characterized by
intense coldness of surface of the whole body, with a tempera-
ture internally of IO4 degrees to IO7 degrees, with a cold and
clammy perspiration, cold breath, voice feeble, indistinct;
278 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
pulse slow, feeble, almost imperceptible at the wrist; and yet,
with all these symptoms the mind remains clear and distinct,
while the countenance looks death-like in appearance. This
fever may last from a few hours to a few days. It is intensely
malignant, and the subject rarely survives a third attack. It
is a lamentable fact that all varieties are unfavorable, unless it
can be controlled before the second paroxysm. The mor-
tality is about 15 per cent. This fever is the most dreaded
of all except the “Yellow Jack,” and is equally as fatal.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment usually instituted is of a character that
seems more like an attempt to obscure still further the inner
workings of the malignancy of the affection. When it is
manifest that important organs are paralyzed from conges-
tion, to give opiates that still further arrest tissue change and
impede circulation, seems altogether wrong, destructive, and
uncalled for. The perniciousness is wholly due to the imped-
iment to the circulation. This is due to overstimulation of
nerve centers from poisonous malarial influences. The res-
toration of the circulation is the all-important thing, and the
thing that must be effected before recovery can pos-
sibly be expected. When it is understood that the splanch-
nics are intercepted from performing their functions, thus
causing the congestion of the internal vital organs, the indi-
cations for treatment will become apparent. The spinal
nerves control motion—the lack of motion causes the whole
trouble; this can only be brought about through the spinal
nerves. Then, beginning at the vaso-motor area, hold the
fingers here until a regularity of the pulse ensues. After the
vaso-motor area has been duly attended to, manipulate the
neck muscles thoroughly, and attend to the elevation of the
chest muscles, clavicle, arms, and the opening of the gateways
from the brain—the jugulars; then pay special attention to
the spine, all the way down, in the usual manner, giving spe-
cial attention to the kidneys area. The thorough manipula-
tions of the liver, spleen, and abdominal viscera should receive
PLATE XXII. –Showing Abduction of the Thigh.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 281
a good share of vibratory, regularly-applied attention, and a
general treatment instituted as often as circumstances indicate
and the patient is able to endure, remembering that in this
condition, more than in any other form of fever, circulation is
important, and without it recovery can not take place. The
free use of water enemata should be one part of the pro-
gramme, and water should be given the patient frequently as
a drink. The sickness at the stomach may be overcome by
treatment at the fourth to the eighth dorsal vertebra, stretch-
ing the right arm upward strongly at the time, lowering
fingers each time the arm is raised and lowered, uniting the
positive and negative forces. All of the rubbing should be
from extremities toward the heart. Hemaspasia of lower
limbs should not be lost sight of in this condition, and should
not be neglected when a condition presents demanding its
application. The sickness at the stomach should be over-
come by the stimulation of the splanchnics. The vagi termi-
nals may be reached about the fourth to the eighth dorsal,
and more easily and effectually on the left side, as the left
are more active and respond easies. The nerve influence
obtained here controls Auerbach's Ganglion, a set of fibrillae
in both the circular and longitudinal muscular fibers of the
stomach, as well as intestines. The splanchnics uniting with
the pneumogastric, forming the posterior portion of the solar
plexus, control the action, sensation and motion, as well as
reflexion of the intestinal viscera, and being reached through
sympathetic filaments along the sides of the dorsal vertebrae,
the peristalses that arise through irritation of the vagi, any-
where along the line, from the fauces to the ends of their
remotest terminals, are controllable by stimulation of the
dorsal region named.
To obtain the results at once, take hold of the left arm,
stretch it out, pulling it up strongly above the head with one
hand, and with the fingers of the other placed along the sides
of the spinous processes, pressing moderately hard with ends
of fingers, push the arm gently backward, pressing at the
282 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
same time with the fingers on the back as aforesaid, and let
the arm be pushed downward over the arm of operator sud-
denly. This may be repeated one or more times, but usually
once accomplishes the purpose. This treatment is applicable
in all cases of vomiting from irritation of the fauces or along
down the alimentary canal. The pressure with finger ends,
raising body gently, at the same time without the raising of
the hand, will frequently do the work.
ERUPTIVE FEVERS.
These all have a period of incubation, characterized by
more or less fever preceding their eruptive stage, each with
its own peculiarity. The period of childhood is most com-
mon for these fevers to occur in. They usually occur but
once in the same subject. Their origin seems to be still
wrapped in mystery—undetermined.
SCARLET FEVER–SCARLATINA.
This is an acute, self-limited, contagious, infectious dis-
ease, usually of childhood. High temperature, rapid pulse,
diffused scarlet eruption, terminating in desoluamation of the
skin, mouth and throat, and affecting, more or less, the
nervous system. . It is an inflammatory condition of the skin
—a dermatitis. The cause is supposed to be a specific poison,
highly contagious. There are three varieties of the affection:
Simplex, Anginosa and Maligna. In the mild cases the fever
is trifling. *
The onset is decidedly sudden, ushered in with a chill,
pain in the throat, and followed by high fever, running up to
IO5 degrees, with rapid pulse (I IO to 140 per minute), and at
the end of twenty-four hours a scarlet rash appears on the
neck and chest, spreading over the entire body rapidly, and
in a few hours the eruption presents a spotted appearance,
with normal skin between the scarlet spots. When the erup-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 283
tion occurs there is a burning Sensation of heat on the sur-
face, the throat becomes painful, a catarrhal exudation ensues,
and a difficulty of deglutition supervenes; the tongue is furred
and later dry and red, with prominent papillae, of a “straw-
berry hue”; headache, great restlessness, and in some cases
delirium and spasms; diarrhea is quite common. On the
fourth or fifth day the fever declines, and the sixth to the
eighth day desoluamation begins, continuing for two or three
weeks. Convalescence is nearly always slow, emaciation
marked, and the sequelae dreaded, as it affects the whole
System, leaving in some cases a sore throat, otorrhea, chronic
diarrhea, subacute rheumatism, chorea, endocarditis, pleu-
ritis, acute Bright's disease, and cutaneous dropsy, as well as
general anasarca.
The treatment of this affection and the success follow-
ing Osteopathic treatment has been the most satisfactory of
any ever known, and if it would not cure anything else, it
deserves to be crowned with a golden wreath, filled with
costly jewels of the most precious kind. It has surely dem-
onstrated itself as the most efficacious measure ever tried for
this affection.
THE TREATMENT.
The manipulations should be made carefully, thoroughly.
Begin with the vaso-motor nervous system, holding the
fingers there firmly from two to five minutes. This regulates
the arterial circulation of the blood. Now begin at the sides
of the neck, manipulate all of the muscles gently, deeply,
thoroughly, raising the clavicles so as to free the neck veins,
that all of the lymphatics may empty themselves into the
jugulars; raise the arms successively, treating the spine on
either side of the processes, as low as the lumbar vertebrae;
then hold the hands on either side of the spines of the lumbar
vertebrae, fingers pressing close to spines; raise gently the
loins, letting the head and feet barely touch the bed, holding
the body thus suspended for a moment. This corrects the
bowel trouble at once. The vaso-motor area is to be looked
284 osteoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to and fever subdued by gentle pressure here occasionally.
Manipulate all of the muscles of the neck thoroughly, begin-
ning up close under the chin and agle of the jaws, occasion-
ally stretching the neck, but being careful about rotation
often, remembering that children should not have too much
stretching and rotating of the neck. The outward movement
of the spinal muscles should be made, and the rotary vibra-
tion movements used on the back from the region of the
scapula all along down the back, and on the chest and abdo-
men. Frequent bathing in warm water, afterward wrapping
patient in dry blanket or sheet, and anointing the whole body
with olive oil, rubbing the body in a rotary vibratory motion,
with the hand moistened with the oil, answers a double pur-
pose. In this, as in all fevers, do not be anxious about feed-
ing your patient. Nature will assert itself when the tongue
cleans off and the glandular system has recuperated from the
nervous shock; then, and not till then, is it proper to indulge
in food of any sort whatever. Use water internally and
externally, as suggested in other fevers.
This treatment is applicable in all of the eruptive fevers
and throat affections. The philosophy of all Osteopathic
treatment is to remove the pressure, and the means to accom-
plish this depends upon the indications in each individual
case, and should not have to be suggested to the intelligent
Osteopath in every form of disease, but should suggest itself
to him in all cases and under all circumstances, as presented.
The object to accomplish in all cases is to take off the press-
ure. No trouble exists or can possibly ensue where this is
done. Remember that stagnation or stasis of blood pro-
duces chemical changes that result in pathological conditions
that we denominate disease. Disease is the very thing we are
called upon to cure. “How is it cured?” should be constantly
thought, and the “how to do so.” is to take off the pressure,
wherever it is, and in the best manper, and as rapidly as the
nature of the case will permit. Do not stand by, like the
Frenchman, for an introduction, or a suggestion to do the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 285
work. Go at it with a determination to accomplish it, intelli-
gently, and do it. If you do not know what to do, when, or
how to do it, step down and out, and send for somebody who
does. Don't let your patient die on account of your impu-
dence, stupidity and ignorance. Osteopathy means some-
thing. It means relief to the afflicted in the hands of sensible
and intelligent manipulators. None others should tamper
with disease that demands an intelligent familiarity of the
science. This book will enlighten very one who
studies it on all the means and measures necessary to success-
fully combat all manner of diseases, whether acute or chronic.
We right conditions, but do not treat disease. Take off the
pressure everywhere under all circumstances. That is
enough.
MEASLES, SMALLPOX,
VAccINATION, VARICELLA, ERYSIPELAs, DENGUE.
These should receive almost the identical treatment,
with the addition in smallpox of the sulphate of soda and the
bitartrate of potassium. The excessive action of the Nega-
tive element calls for the use of the additional acid, and should
be supplied because of a disturbance of the molecules of the
sodium sulphates, hence the breaking-down of the skin. Give
the patient an acidulous drink all of the time in smallpox, and
do a large portion of the treatment along the dorsal region,
especially in the region of the splanchnics, to normally con-
bine the Positive and Negative forces, neutralize the exces-
sive alkalinity of the blood that is breaking down the integu-
mentary tissues. The application constantly of castor oil to
the surfaces exposed to the air, should be strictly attended to,
to prevent pitting, from the suppurative stage on. Acidulous
baths are strongly indicated in suppurative diseases of the
skin. When it is known that the two poles of the human
battery control the acid and alkaline substances of the tissues,
and that the one contracts tissue and the other dissolves it.
286 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
their uses and the manner of controlling them will become
apparent in the restoration of these diseases, as well as all
others. We reach these poles, or regulate their action,
through the organic nervous system, producing the condi-
tions desired at will. -
ACUTE GENERAL DISEASES.
PAROTIDITIS.
SYNONYMS. Parotitis; mumps.
DEFINITION. An acute specific infectious inflammation
of one or both parotid and other salivary glands and the sur-
rounding connective tissue, with a very strong tendency to
migrate into the mammae or testes; characterized by pain,
swelling, and disordered function of the glands. -
CAUSEs. A specific poison. Contagious. Occurs in
epidemics, although isolated cases are seen. Males more
liable than females. The most common ages between, five
years and puberty. As a rule, it occurs but once in the same
individual.
The period of incubation is from two to three weeks.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. There is inflammation of
one or both parotid glands, and in severe epidemics the cellu-
lar tissue pervading the gland is involved.
The catarrhal inflammation begins in the gland ducts and
rapidly extends to the gland proper. There are congestion,
swelling, and an infiltration of serous fluid, with more or less
infiltration of the adjacent tissues. The swelling may sud-
denly reach an enormous size and as suddenly decline, the
gland returning to its normal condition, or, rarely, an abscess
results, with partial or complete destruction of the gland.
Occasionally the submaxillary gland is involved, also the
mammae and testes. -
Metastatic parotiditis occurs secondary to severe blood-
poisoning, as in pyaemia, typhoid or typhus fevers, or diph-
theria. The usual termination of secondary parotiditis is by
suppuration and destruction of gland structure.
SyMPTOMs. The onset is rather sudden, by malaise,
(287)
288 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
chill, fever, IOI-IO3 deg. F., quick pulse, headache, dry skin,
scanty urine, followed within a day or two by stiffness at the
jaw, swelling of the parotid and other salivary glands, pain
increased by moving the jaws, with general oedema of the
affected side of the face, at times the skin being reddened.
Salivation is frequent, and occasionally deafness occurs.
The swelling and other glandular symptoms subside
about the sixth or seventh day, to be followed by restoration
to health, or, what is more common, the involvement of the
opposite gland. t
At any time during the disease metastasis to the
mammae, ovaries, or testes is apt to occur, when the symp-
toms peculiar to such affections will be added. It has been
noted that a continuance of the temperature after the decline
of the parotid symptoms has begun, usually is significant of
metastasis. It is claimed that the involvement of other
organs during the course of mumps is not an example of
metastasis, but is a true transfer of the disease.
DIAGNOSIs. An error seems impossible.
PROGNoSIs. Simple mumps, favorable; the chief danger
being from the altered function of the mammae, ovary, or
testes after metastasis.
THE TREATMENT.
It seems singular that Osteopathy should come into
requisition when pathologists inform us that this is a self-
limited disease; but, like all other pathological conditions,
capillary congestion here results in disease. The removal of
the obstructions cures the disease. The proper method of
treatment, then, is to manipulate close up under the angle of
the jaw, and relieve all contracture in muscles in that region;
then stretch the neck, as directed elsewhere, twisting it at the
same time, and then manipulate all of the muscles of the neck,
raise the clavicles, arms, chest; stimulate the vaso-motor area.
The glands are easily relieved of their contents, and will be
rapidly disengorged by manipulating them as directed for a
PLAth. XXIII. —Conclusion of Abduction ofthigh.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 29I
few moments; removing Soreness gradually by the beginning
of manipulations at the outer edge of the Soreness. In this
affection, general treatment should be had every day, and the
disease may be reduced to a minimum, and by avoiding
exposure to cold, no danger of metastasis. Should that
occur, follow up treatment. Gentle treatment daily, or twice
a day, relieves and shortens the disease and mitigates the
suffering greatly. -
DIPHTHERIA.
SYNoNYMS. Putrid sore throat; malignant ulcerous
sore throat; malignant quinsy; membranous angina. -
DEFINITION. An acute, specific, constitutional disease,
both epidemic and contagious, beginning by an affection of
the throat, characterized by a local exudation and glandular
enlargements; attended with fever, great prostration of the
vital powers, and albuminuria, and having for its sequelae
various paralyses.
CAUSEs. A specific germ, the Klebs-Loeffler bacillus.
It is pre-eminently a disease of childhood. It is apt to recur
in those who have once been affected. All conditions of bad
hygiene increase its virulence and diffusion, although the
chief cause of its spread is contagion.
The poison exists in the exudation and secretions of the
fauces and saliva, but not in the breath, and floats in the
atmosphere at a considerable distance from the patient. The
virus adheres to the clothing, the bedding, the furniture, and
the room which the patient occupied.
The period of incubation is from three to five days.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The diphtheritic inflamma-
tion differs from either the croupous or catarrhal form, in that
the exudation is not only upon, but also within, the substance
of the mucous membrane.
At first there is redness, which may begin in any part of
the throat, associated with swelling and an increased Secretion
292 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of viscid mucus. The redness spreads over the entire mucous
surface, when the exudation makes its appearance. The
deposit may commence from one or several points, such as
one tonsil, the soft palate, or the back of the fauces, which,
however, speedily extend and coalesce, forming extensive
patches, or cover uniformly the entire surface.
The patches are of variable thickness, which is increased
by successive layers being formed underneath.
The color is usually gray, white, or slightly yellow, but
may be brownish or blackish, the consistence ranging from
“cream to wash leather.”
On removing the membrane, which is accomplished with
more or less difficulty, a raw, bleeding surface is exposed,
and at times an ulcer, which is speedily covered with a fresh
deposit.
If the exudation separate itself, it is either not renewed at
all or only in thinner films.
The exudation or membrane, examined by the micro-
Scope, is composed of fibrin, pus corpuscles, epithelial granular
cells, and the Klebs-Loeffler bacillus and other pathogenic
bacteria.
If the larynx, trachea, or nasal mucous membranes par-
ticipate in the disease, the croupous and not the diphtheritic
form of inflammation occurs.
The lymphatic glands of the neck, whose vessels origi-
nate in the faucial tissues, are enlarged and inflamed, and con-
tain large numbers of bacteria, probably originating as the
result of decomposition.
The muscular tissue of the heart becomes soft, is easily
torn, and its fibrillae are far advanced in granular degener-
ation. Ulcerative endocarditis has been frequently observed.
The kidneys undergo a granular degeneration in severe
attacks. -
The blood undergoes alteration, being black and fluid.
SYMPTOMs. Following the law of contagious diseases,
the symptoms vary in intensity in different cases, the promi-
A DRUGLEss system of HEALING. 293
nent symptoms being often disproportionate to the gravity of
the attack. -
The invasion may be mild, with rigors succeeded by
moderate fever, headache, languor, loss of appetite, stiffness
of the neck, tenderness about the angles of the jaw, or slight
soreness of the throat.
In other cases the invasion is more abrupt and severe,
with chilliness followed by great febrile reaction, Iog deg.
to IO5 deg. F., pain in the ear, aching of the limbs, loss of
strength, painful deglutition, and swelling of the neck, com-
pelling the patient to take to bed from the onset.
The appetite is poor, the tongue slightly coated, some-
times more or less exudation appearing upon it, the bowels
being either regular or slightly relaxed. The pulse, at first
full and strong, soon becomes either rapid or slow, but com-
pressible. The urine is scanty, high-colored, and contains
albumen. -
The local symptoms in the majority of cases are asso-
ciated with the throat. The patient complains of a frequent
and persistent desire to hawk, in order to clear the throat.
On inspection, the fauces are seen red and Swollen, and more
or less covered with the diphtheritic exudation; sometimes
the tonsils and uvula are greatly swollen and spotted with
exudation. In severe cases, more or less ulceration or
sloughing may be observed. Not infrequently fragments of
exudation, the false membrane, are expectorated, with par-
ticles of the ulcerated tissues, having an offensive odor, which
is transmitted to the breath. The lymphatic glands of the
neck are enlarged and tender, and in severe cases the tissues
of the neck are greatly tumefied. -
Extension to the nasal cavities causes a sanious and
offensive discharge from the nose, with attacks of epistaxis.
Extension to the larynx is indicated by hoarseness or
complete loss of voice, croupy cough, and obstructive dysp-
noea, which often becomes urgent, the breathing being noisy
and stridulous, and subject to paroxysmal exacerbations. If
294 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the inflammation extend to the bronchi, the breathing
becomes still more embarrassed.
DURATION. Ranges from two to fourteen days, an aver-
age being about nine days, although complications and
Sequelae may prolong its course.
Relapses are not uncommon.
SEQUELE. Those who recover from a severe attack
remain often for weeks with a pale and cachectic appearance,
due to profound blood alteration.
Paralysis is a common sequela, following the mild as
often as the severe attacks. Usually not occurring until the
patient seems fully convalescent.
Pharyngeal paralysis is most common, causing difficulty
or inability of deglutition, fluids regurgitating through the
11OSC.
Cardiac paralysis, bradycardia, is not infrequent, the pul-
sations descending to 60, 50, 40, and even to 20 per minute.
Heart failure and fatal syncope may occur at any time during
the disease. -
Diphtheritic paralysis may affect the motor muscles of
the eye, causing strabismus; the muscles of one side, hemi-
plegia; of the legs, paraplegia; and of the bladder, leading to
retention of urine or difficulty in voiding it.
Multiple neuritis, with the attending loss of power, is a
rare sequela.
Sensation is also diminished in the paralyzed parts.
DIAGNosis. From follicular ulceration of the tonsils,
which is frequently termed diphtheria, by the slight or absent
systemic symptoms, the ulcerated condition being limited
to the tonsils, but often one, and the absence of glandular
enlargement, and following palsies.
From pharyngitis, by the absence of exudation and loss
of faucial tissue and constitutional symptoms.
From scarlatina, by the presence of the eruption and
the absence of membrane in the fauces. The association of
scarlatina and diphtheria must not be forgotten.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 295
From membranous croup, by the difference in the con-
stitutional symptoms; croup appears sporadically and is not
contagious, diphtheria being highly contagious, and fre-
quently occurs in epidemics; in diphtheria of the larynx, the
depression is clearly that of blood-poisoning, while in croup
the depression is in proportion to the mechanical obstruction
of the respiration by the membranous exudation. The
pathology of croup is simple and easy of investigation; diph-
theria is obscure in its etiology and progress. The temper-
ature record of croup is a high one until carbonic acid poison-
ing is imminent from the mechanical obstruction to respira-
tion, while in diphtheria, the tendency to a decline in the
temperature after the fourth day is nearly characteristic,
regardless of the amount of laryngeal obstruction. In croup
the pharynx contains no membrane, and is but slightly, if at
all, inflamed, and associated trouble in the nose is of the
rarest occurrence, the very reverse obtaining in diphtheria.
In croup the laryngeal symptoms are from the onset, while
in laryngeal diphtheria the pharyngeal symptoms almost
always precede. In croup glandular involvement is a clinical
novelty, as are subsequent palsies, while glandular involve-
ment and various palsies are the rule in diphtheria. Albu-
minuria is the rule in diphtheria, seldom occurring in croup.
PROGNoSIs. Always grave, but more so in children than
in adults. Its gravity, in the majority of cases, is propor-
tionate to the local symptoms. The average mortality is
about ten per cent.
Favorable indications are, moderate fever, strength
slightly impaired, a good constitution, and moderate exu-
dation. “e
Unfavorable indications are, high fever, great depression,
spreading exudation, great swelling of the cervical glands,
large amount of albumen, extension to the larynx and nasal
mucous membranes, hemorrhages from the fauces and nose,
and an epidemic character. -
296 - OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT.
The neck should be thoroughly treated in this affection,
beginning the treatment by stretching the neck. With one
hand under the chin, the other on the occiput, pull gently till
the body is seen to move, then rotate from side to side while
elongated, then stretch without rotation, then go right on
with the general treatment, treating thoroughly close up
under the chin; then place finger in the mouth, press gently
all around the inside of the mouth on the fauces, the palm of
finger toward and on the mucous membrane, and remove the
membrane, if loose. Raise the clavicles, chest muscles and
arms; and general manipulations should be given to equalize
circulation. Treat the vaso-motor area by pressure several
moments. This regulates the arterial circulation of the
blood, lessens the fever, promotes ease, rest. Treatment
should be given every six to eight hours, and the disease
yields, even the most malignant type, in a very few days'
treatment. The nerves that control the action of the mucous
membrane of the throat and the glandular system on either
side of the neck, demand special attention, from the back
and sides of the neck, and high up and close around under the
jaw. Careful, gentle, easy manipulations result most satis-
factorily, and do not produce pain in patient. If Osteopathy
relieved nothing else, its worth in this affection can not be
estimated. It is magical. The judgment of the manipulator
should be exercised in regard to the length of time and how
often treatments should be made. Also use the tissue ele-
ments Potas, chlor. and Sodium chlor.
RHEUM ATISM.
Notwithstanding all that has been said, written and
experienced and heard of noted cures, baths, springs, climates,
altitudes, and localities, about causes and cures of this affec-
tion, it remains for an Osteopath to present to the world the
cause of it—Impeded Capillary Blood Circulation.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 297
At first thought it would seem improbable, but there is
no possible argument against it. When the blood circulates
in the capillaries properly, the normal functions of all of the
blood-making material are properly performed, and a due
proportion of all of the elements is kept up in every part, nor-
mal blood is manufactured. That condition keeps up in
regular order from year to year through the whole round of
years from the age of puling infancy to that of distorted
Shanks and biceps. A reference to the article on the Tissue
Elements elsewhere in this book will inform the reader that
these are the constituents of our physical organism; that
these are largely the results of combination and manufacture
from the food, after its introduction into the system, as the
process of digestion is going on; that if there is a deficiency
of material in the food, so that these normal elements can not
be manufactured, confusion results; for to be healthy, these
elements must be in the blood, for the blood is the fluid from
which all of the tissues of the body are directly manufactured
or nourished, and by means of the material therein the meta-
bolism of the tissues that, no longer necessary, are to be elimi-
nated or removed from the body. The specific gravity of
normal blood is from I.O55 to I.O62, so say our physiologists,
and from this fluid every tissue in the body draws its nour-
ishment. Without certain elements in the blood, elimination
of the waste material can not take place, so that we at once
perceive the necessity of their presence in the blood. If these
waste materials can not be, or are not eliminated, they must
accumulate. If that waste be unconverted into fluid, precipi-
tation ensues. That precipitant produces effects according
to the nature of its constituents and according to the tissue in
which the precipitant exists. The precipitation only ensues
as a result of impeded circulation. It will be remembered
that circulation is the principal manifestation of life, and is as
essential as life itself, for without it life ceases to be manifest
in the physical organism. It will be remembered that every
tissue in the body has its special and exact proportion of
298 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
chemical elements, and that these are renewed and changed
and exchanged for new material every moment of time
throughout the whole of life, and that mind (divine mind)
through the nervous system directs every change that is made
in every department; that mind created the body out of the
material it had made; gathered up such material from the
great world, and placed every atomic cell in line; made it in
such a way as that it would renew its forces in regular order
out of the same material from age to age; placed in the most
elevated realm of that body a watch that sees to it that every
department shall perform its allotted labor, and that, as each
department exchanges commodities, every other shall share
in the profit or loss, the pleasure or pain, the good or the evil.
It is a known fact that precipitation only takes place in
a state of rest—quietude. All acids precipitate into their
peculiarly shaped crystals while the fluid from which they are
formed is in a state of absolute rest. This rest, when applied
to the circulation of the fluids of our body, results from arrest
of onward flow of the fluids through their normal channels.
The precipitate is also dependent upon the presence or
absence of some one or more of the chemical elements in the
solution—the fluid. All chemical changes take place in con-
sequence of the added or diminished equivalent of the other
material. Results are always proportioned to causes and cir-
cumstances controlling them. The variety of chemical
changes that take place in the system may be imagined when
we consider the number of molecules and their atomic com-
position. Remember that heat and cold effect chemical
results, as well as the presence or absence of chemical con-
stituents or equivalents.
Now, in rheumatism we have a disturbance caused by
the precipitation of acid crystals of lactic acid, due largely to
lack of sodium phosphate. The role that this salt exercises
in the human economy is well described by Moleschott and
Schusler. They state that it “largely consists of the catalysis
of lactic acid in the blood, thus purifying that fluid from its
PLATE XXIV.-The Method of Treating the Saphenous Vein.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 3OI
effete product of muscular function, which transforms stored
glycogen into the acid. The liver is the prime and master
laboratory of the animal body. It is essential to both the
nitrogenous and the hydro-carbonaceous transformations, to
the renewal and the depuration of the blood, to the produc-
tion of glycogen and grape sugar from the starchy and sac-
charine food, and to the higher oxidation of uric acid, and
other effete tissue principles, into urea, ready for elimination
by the kidney, and by bile-formation contributes to the
intestinal work. When inert this organ fails of this exten-
sive function; when overactive, it exceeds it, and overproduc-
tion appears, with symptomatic effects. These functions are
principally due to cell-action. There are two classes of
functional or parenchymatous cells: the biliary, spread out as
epithelium in the capillary branches of the ducts, in intimate
relation with the vessels of the liver; and likewise with the
remaining set of functional cells, viz., those of the hepatic
acini, also lying in intimate relation to the blood vessels and
to the biliary capillaries, with their glandular epithelium.
This double duty belongs to the large cells of the acini, viz.,
the formation of glycogen and the formation of uric acid. In
addition, the old red blood corpuscles are here in the liver,
but in the portal system of veins now become capillary in the
acini, are finally disintegrated, and the new-formed globules
perfected. All of these varied functions, separate as they
are, undoubtedly assist each other, furnishing necessary
chemical changes, etc. The glycogen is believed to be
mainly carried away in the blood current, to be stored in the
muscular tissues, furnishing the motor energy thereto, and
being chemically split into two parts of lactic acid. This acid
aids in later vital functions of the body, and is at last trans-
formed into carbonic acid and water, while circulating in the
blood. This transformation takes place through the pres-
ence in the blood of the soda phosphate, and by a catalytic
action of this salt. Any deficiency in this prevents this chem-
ical change, and the lactic acid remains as such. An acid
3O2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
state of the system now prevails; rheumatism, dyspepsia,
intestinal troubles, etc., ensue. This acid state ceases and
the consequences subside when the sodium phosphate is pres-
ent or introduced into the system in proper quantities.”
THE TREATMENT.
Our treatment, then, for rheumatism should be directed
to the promotion of the circulation of the fluids of the body—
onward. Then natural chemical changes take place. The
sympathetic nerves control normal changes when not inter-
fered with; when the communication from origin to termina-
tion of fibrilla is not intercepted. This obstruction is usually
the result of lowering temperature on the surface (on the
skin), causing contraction, thus mechanically squeezing ter-
minal nerve filaments, modifying their functions, producing
sluggish capillary peristalsis. Precipitation of acid crystals
ensues; these pierce the sensory, terminal footlets; pain
ensues, an intimation that interruption of circulation exists
there, and calls for aid, or announces thereby that something
is wrong. Now this is the simplest of the simple things to
understand: Obstructed Circulation causes Rheumatism.
The obstruction removed, the normal circulation continued,
brings about a normal state—cures rheumatism. Whenever
the proper elements are supplied, and the obstructions
removed, disease of every form ceases. Health is the normal
state when every organ is performing its natural function, and
it will do that when the conditions are favorable. We have
stated them.
Our general treatment, applied from once to three times
a week for chronic ailments, is fraught with satisfactory
results in the large majority of cases. To undertake to cure
rheumatism without the circulation of the blood, or without
the normal elements of the blood, would be the very height of
nonsense; and to introduce a medicine into the body to pro-
mote absorption of deposits without a possibility of it being
carried there through the blood, would be equivalent to try-
ing to live without air, or breathe without lungs.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 3O3
ACUTE ARTICULAR RHEUMATISM.
SYNONYMs. Rheumatic fever; inflammatory rheuma-
t1Sm.
DEFINITION. A constitutional disease, characterized by
fever, inflammation in and around the joints, occurring in
succession, and a great tendency to inflammation of either the
endocardium or pericardium.
CAUSEs. The predisposing causes are inherited ten-
dency, Scarlatina, and the puerperal state.
The exciting causes are exposure to cold and chilling of
the body. Rheumatism rarely occurs before seven or after
fifty years. The liability to the disease is increased by having
had an attack.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The blood contains an
excess of lactic acid. The joints bear the brunt of the attack;
the synovial membrane is reddened, the vascularity of the
synovial fringes is increased; so with the synovial fluid, which
is thinner, of a reddish color, containing some gelatinous
coagula of fibrin, and under the microscope, nucleated cells,
ordinary pus cells being rarely seen.
The swelling visible from the affected part depends
mostly on inflammatory oedema of the connective tissue
around the joint.
The pain is probably due, in all cases, to stretching of
and pressure on the elements of the tissues by the dilated
capillaries and the inflammatory oedema. For the changes
which ensue when the endo- and pericardium are attacked,
the reader is referred to the sections on those diseases.
SYMPTOMs. Begins suddenly, generally at night, with
a chill or chilliness, pain and stiffness in the joints, loss of
appetite, at times nausea and vomiting, followed by fever, the
temperature soon reaching IO2 degrees F. to IO4 degrees,
in rare cases 108 degrees to I IO degrees (the hyperpyrexia),
the pulse seldom exceeding 95, great thirst, profuse acid
Sweats, scanty, high-colored, acid urine, at times showing
traces of albumen, the bowels constipated. The fever con-
3O4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
tinues throughout the attack, showing marked remissions.
Delirium is absent, except the hyperpyrexia occur. Sleep is
prevented by the pain and the profuse perspirations. The
strength is moderately well preserved. .
The skin is often covered with an eruption of miliaria
rubra, red papules, and miliariae alba, the result of irritation
at the orifices of the sweat glands, from the excessive perspir-
ation. -
The local phenomena are pain, tenderness, increased
heat, swelling, and redness of one or more joints; if but one
joint, it is termed monoarthritis; if more than one, polyarth-
ritis. Pain is aggravated by motion and pressure. Swelling
is most apparent in those joints not covered with muscle,
to-wit: knee, wrist, elbow, ankle, and the hands and feet,
and is proportionate to the acuteness of the attack. The
inflammation may abruptly cease at one or more joints, and
as suddenly attack others.
The disease is extremely irregular as regards the number
of joints affected, although the local manifestations are con-
trolled by an important pathological law, to-wit: the law of
parallelism. Corresponding joints are often affected
together, and when not, the different affected joints are either
on one side of the body, or those on both sides which are
analogous, as the knee, elbow, wrist, ankle, hip, and shoulder,
are attacked together.
CoMPLICATIONs. Pericarditis, endocarditis, myocar-
ditis, cerebral endarteritis, bronchitis, pneumonitis, pleuritis.
DURATION. The duration of acute rheumatism is gov-
erned entirely by the presence or absence of complications.
Uncomplicated cases recover in from thirteen to twenty-one
days, although they may be prolonged to five or six weeks.
Relapses are frequent.
DIAGNoSIs. A typical case can not be mistaken for any
other disease, but cases running a subacute course may be
mistaken for acute rheumatoid arthritis, gonorrhoeal rheu-
matism, or pyaemia.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 305
Acute rheumatoid arthritis attacks one joint at a time
and becomes permanent, has slight, if any, fever, no sweats or
cardiac lesions.
Gonorrhoeal rheumatism is associated with a gleety dis-
charge, or follows the sudden cessation of an acute or sub-
acute gonorrhoeal discharge, attacks either the ankle or wrist
only, is slowly influenced by treatment, and lacks the febrile
phenomena.
Pyaemia is usually manifested at a single joint at the
time, and is followed by suppuration, and all the symptoms of
hectic fever.
PROGNoSIs. Recovery is the rule in uncomplicated
cases, the mortality being about three per cent. When death
occurs it usually depends upon hyperpyrexia, cardiac com-
plication, or cerebral endarteritis.
THE TREATMENT.
The general treatment, as far as possible, should be insti-
tuted, approaching the manipulation of the particular joint
or joints affected cautiously. The neck, spine, shoulders,
clavicles, chest muscles, and vaso-motor area should not be
lost sight of. The kneading of the parts mostly complained
of is essential, but the soreness is frequently so great that
even the approach of the doctor toward patient is resisted
with intensified horror by patient. Begin where there is
no or but slight Soreness. Go slow, deal gently, approach
cautiously, and if you are a good coaxer, you will have your
patient easy in half an hour—up, walking about; but if you
are a “rough” manipulator, that patient will turn you off
and go to gulping down medicine, or have it injected hypo-
dermically to get ease, and your cake is dough. Remember
that venous obstructions cause the lymph to remain in the
tissues, and pressure upon the sensory terminal nerve fila-
ments produces the pain; hence a sensible regard for these
end filaments may be had by lifting off the pressure. And
this can be done by beginning around the edges of the painful
spot. Remove contraction of muscles by opening the veins
306. OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
at their junction with larger veins, and cause a vis-a-fronte
force to pump the venous blood back, and drain the lymph.
channels, emptying them into the veins. Treatment should
be made daily. -
MUSCULAR RHEUMATISM.
SYNONYMs. According to location, to-wit: cephalo-
dynia; lumbago; torticollis; pleurodynia.
DEFINITION. An affection of the voluntary muscles,
inflammatory in character, either acute or chronic; char-
acterized by pain, tenderness, and stiffness of the affected
muscles. It is never complicated with cardiac disease. *
CAUSEs. A disease of adult life. One attack predis-
poses to another. Almost always due to cold or damp, or
direct draught of cold air. Gout increases the tendency to
attacks.
PATHoLogical. ANATOMY. The true nature of muscu-
lar rheumatism is not yet determined. Virchow suggests a
“hyperaemia of, and scanty serous exudation between, the
muscular striae, and in chronic cases inflammatory prolifera-
tion of the connective tissue.” - -
SYMPTOMs. The first attack is generally acute. Onset
rather sudden, with pain in the affected muscles, with slight
tenderness, and considerable stiffness and difficulty of move-
ment, by which also the pain is increased.
The suffering may be severe and constant, or only on
motion. Spasm of the affected muscles may occur. Object-
ive symptoms are wanting, except it is evident that the
patient keeps the affected muscles as quiet as possible. Fever
is absent. The pain may prevent sleep.
Duration, acute form, about one week. Chronic
returns frequently, and finally becomes constant and aggra-
vated when the weather is damp.
VARIETIES. It may affect any or all of the voluntary
muscles, but its most frequent and important varieties are:—
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 307
I. Cephalodynia. Situated in the occipito-frontal mus-
cles. Distinguished from neuralgia of the trifacial, or occi-
pital nerve, by pain on both sides of the head, excited or
aggravated by the movements of the muscle and by absence
of disseminated points of tenderness.
The muscles of the eye may be affected, and movements
of that organ excite pain. If the temporal and masseter
muscles are attacked, mastication excites pain.
2. Torticollis. Wry neck, or stiff neck. Situated in
the sterno-mastoid muscles. Generally limited to one side
of the neck, toward which side the head is twisted, great pain
being excited on attempting to turn to the opposite side.
Rheumatism of the muscles of the back of the neck, cervi-
codynia, may be mistaken for occipital neuralgia.
3. Pleurodynia. Situated in the thoracic muscles, and
may be mistaken for pleuritis, or intercostal neuralgia, from
which it is differentiated by the absence of the diagnostic
features of each. Pain is excited by forced breathing, cough-
ing and sneezing. - - - -
4. Lumbodynia or lumbago. Situated in the mass of
muscles and fasciae which occupy the lumbar region. Most
common variety. Usually affects both sides. It may set in
rapidly and become very severe. Motion of any kind aggra-
vates the pain, often becoming very sharp or stabbing in
character. It is sometimes complicated with acute Sciatica,
when the suffering is agonizing. * -
DIAGNoSIs. The different varieties may be mistaken
for any of the following ailments, to-wit: trifacial, occipital,
or intercostal neuralgia, pains of progressive muscular
atrophy, neuritis, syphilis, metallic poisons, or painful affec-
tions of the loins, arising from calculi or gravel in the kidney.
A careful examination of the history is usually sufficient
to arrive at a correct diagnosis.
ºsk PROGNOSIS. Difficult to eradicate, and in chronic cases
to ameliorate, but is not dangerous to life. Death never
results.
308 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT.
The same as for acute articular rheumatism. The prin-
ciple is the same, the cause is the same—why not treat the
same way?
The treatment for the wry neck consists in so manipu-
lating the muscles of the neck that the capillaries shall be
emptied. That is done by first stimulating the vaso-motor
area, then put the muscles of the neck and spine on a stretch
in the usual way; then manipulate the muscles, especially the
sterno-cleido-mastoidei muscle, thoroughly, and lift the chin,
with elbow under it-(curved around the chin as shown in
plate), pressing the head backward on the fingers of the other
hand at the back of the neck, lifting and rotating and press-
ing at the same time. Go over all of the muscles involved in
the affection at one sitting, occupying from twenty to thirty
minutes. Treat slowly, thoroughly, and repeat the treatment
every twelve to forty-eight hours. Have patient avoid sud-
den changes of temperature, for this is the cause of contrac-
ture of muscular fiber, and obstruction of venous circulation,
and nerve pressure. This course of treatment cures in a
month or two the worst cases, often relieving them at once.
RHEUMATOID ARTHRITIS.
SYNoNYMS. Arthritis deformans; rheumatic gout.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the joints, accom-
panied with but slight fever, without suppuration; progres-
sive in character, causing nearly symmetrical enlargement and
deformity of various articulations.
CAUSEs. More common in females than in males, and
in the weak and anaemic. Among the causes are bad hygiene,
exposure, prolonged lactation, frequent pregnancies, meno-
pause, grief, tubercular diathesis, and following attacks of
articular rheumatism. º
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. It is not rheumatism, as the
f the Adductors.
1011 O
—The Manipulat
XXV.
-
H
-
PLAT

• * * *

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 3 II
blood contains no lactic acid. It is not gout, as uric acid is
not found in the blood, nor urate of sodium in the joints.
At first rheumatoid arthritis is attended with hyper-
aemia of the affected synovial membrane, and increase of the
synovial fluid. Soon the capsular ligament becomes irregu-
larly thickened, the synovial fluid decreasing. If the process
continue, the internal ligament is destroyed, thus allowing
dislocation to occur. The inter-articular fibro-cartilages
ulcerate and disappear, as do the cartilages covering the ends
of the bone, the ends of the bones becoming smooth and
eburnated, and often greatly enlarged.
SYMPTOMs. Either acute or chronic, the latter most
CO111111O11. º
Acute form involves several joints at the same time, and
is attended with slight pyrexia.
Chronic form slowly involves one joint, which seemingly
Soon recovers, and is attacked again, and may never recover,
but grows progressively worse.
The joint slowly enlarges, is painful, movement exciting
neuralgic pains along the limb. Soon the articulation
becomes rigid or slightly movable after prolonged attempts.
Redness and tenderness are wanting. Crepitation is distinct
after ulceration has destroyed the cartilage.
The hands are first involved, the disease spreading sym-
metrically from articulation to articulation, until in severe
cases every joint is deformed.
DIAGNoSIs. Chronic articular rheumatism is often con-
founded with rheumatoid arthritis; but the former lacks the
marked structural changes and the progressive involvement
of joint after joint. -
Gout differs from rheumatoid arthritis by the presence of
deposits of urate of sodium in the joints, the ears, tips of fin-
gers, and the bursae over the olecranon process of the elbow,
the presence of uric acid in the blood, and the decided history
of acute paroxysms. º
Gonorrhoeal rheumatism, so-called, has symptoms akin
3I2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to rheumatoid arthritis, but the history of urethral suppura-
tion clears up the diagnosis.
Paralysis agitans, when pronounced, might be con-
founded with rheumatoid arthritis, if the examination were
limited to the joints; but the whole history, such as the
tremor, the gait, etc., should prevent error.
PROGNOSIs. If early treatment be instituted, the dis-
ease may be held in abeyance for several years. After
pronounced structural changes have begun, the malady is
incurable, although it may remain stationary for a long time.
THE TREATMENT.
General treatment must be given as in rheumatic articu-
lar affections. -
The special manipulations should have reference to open-
ing up the outlets—the veins, the lymphatic tubes—and
relieving the pressure by the various manipulations according
to special indications in given cases. These conditions are
greatly relieved by persistent treatment.
GOUT.
SYNoNYMs. Podagra, gout in the foot; chiragra, the
hand; gonagra, the knee.
DEFINITION. A constitutional disease, usually inherited:
characterized by the sudden occurrence of a paroxysm of
severe pain and swelling in one of the smaller joints—the
great toe usually—with the presence of uric acid in the blood,
and the deposit of the urate of sodium in the structure of the
joint. *
CAUSEs. Predisposing; inherited, male more than
female—women after menopause. -
Exciting; malt liquor and wine drinking; large con-
sumption of animal food; lead poisoning; winter season.
When inherited tendency, may begin early in life; when
acquired tendency, after thirty-five years.
*
A DRUGLEss systEM OF HEALING. 3I3
The pathological cause consists in the presence of an
excess of uric acid in the blood, in the form of urate of
Sodium. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Gout is characterized by
the deposit of urate of sodium from the blood into the struc-
ture of joints and tissues that are not very vascular. The
deposit is associated with signs of inflammation, to-wit:
hyperaemia, redness of the surface, with swelling and effusion
in and around the affected joint. The surfaces of the joint
are incrusted with chalk-like masses, consisting of urates,
which become greater with each attack, finally causing great
deformity.
The deposit usually begins in the metatarso-phalangeal
joint of the great toe, but other and many joints are soon
affected. -
The deposits may also be found in the knuckles, eyelids,
and cartilages of the ear.
“Crystals of urate of soda are deposited in the tubules
and intratubular tissues” of the kidneys—“gouty kidney”—
and may be seen by the naked eye, the kidneys becoming
small, granular and fibrous. -
Hypertrophy of the left ventricle and of the arteries,
ending in atheromatous changes, are results of gout.
SYMPTOMs. Acute gout is rare in the United States.
It occurs in paroxysms; one year's interval between the first
and second attack; six months usually between the second
and third, after which it may occur at any time. -
Prodromes usually precede the paroxysm for several
days, to-wit: acid dyspepsia, constipation, headache, and
lassitude.
The paroxysm begins suddenly, between midnight and
2 A. M., with acute pain in the ball of the great toe, which
becomes red, hot, swollen, and so sensitive that the slightest
touch can not be borne. -
- The veins are filled, the foot, ankle and leg swollen, and
the limb the seat of sudden spasmodic contractions, which
3I4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
increase the suffering; slight relief is afforded by elevating
the limb. Associated with the local symptoms are chill,
fever, quickened pulse, thirst, coated tongue, constipation,
and Scanty, acid, high-colored urine, which deposits, on cool-
ing, a heavy brickdust sediment.
Towards daylight the symptoms ameliorate, to return
again at Sundown, the severity gradually lessening, until the
fourth or fifth day, when convalescence is established, the
patient, as a rule, feeling better than before the attack.
Chronic Gout.—Either the result of acute attacks or with
a greater number of joints being attacked.
The paroxysms occur at any time, but develop slowly,
with less pronounced local and general symptoms. Deposits
are noticed, the joints becoming hard, knobby, and often dis-
torted. The deposits or chalk-stones (urate of sodium)
occur about the joints, tendons and bursae, and helix of the
€3.17.
DIAGNOSIS. An error can not occur if the history of the
case can be obtained, to-wit: hereditary tendency, age, sex
(females rare, until menopause), mode of living, character of
symptoms, and presence of the characteristic deposits.
PROGNoSIs. Acute gout rarely fatal; is prone to return,
but much depending upon the mode of living. -
Chronic gout decidedly shortens life. The most serious
signs are those indicating advanced renal disease, with non-
elimination of uric acid. Gout influences unfavorably the
prognosis from acute diseases or injuries.
THE TREATMENT.
Gout, like rheumatism, is due to lack of Negative or
splanchnic nerve force—an excess of Positive nerve force,
hence an acid condition of the blood. This acid condition is
the result of stasis, hence the precipitation of acid crystals.
The disturbance of certain molecules, such as sodium phos-
phate, sodium sulphate, chloride, and magnesium phosphates,
that are generally deficient in the blood, hence positive force
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 3H5
increased, negative decreased. General treatment is essential
to cure a gouty diathesis, and the disease yields to proper,
continued treatment. -
Sometimes the elements have to be supplied, but when
the circulation is properly established, are not needed. Give
full general treatment three times a week. -
DIABETES MELLITUS.
SYNoNYMs. Glycosuria; melituria.
DEFINITION. A chronic affection characterized by the
constant presence of grape sugar in the urine, an excessive
urinary discharge, and the progressive loss of flesh and
strength. , *. -
CAUSEs. Most common in males. Occurs at all ages,
but most frequently between twenty-five and fifty years. It
is often hereditary. Disorders of the nervous, hepatic and
renal systems. Excessive use of farinaceous food and malt
liquors. Sexual excesses. -
The exact pathology of diabetes mellitus differs in differ-
ent cases, and in the present state of knowledge no exclusive
view can be adopted. Still, there are reasons for believing
that, in a large proportion of cases, the nervous system is
primarily at fault, though the character of the lesions may
differ. - -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. None peculiar to diabetes
are yet recognized.
Hyperaemia and hypertrophy of the liver and kidneys are
generally present, the result of increased functional activity.
The changes in the lungs peculiar to phthisis are often
found in very chronic cases.
The changes in the nervous system are not fully deter-
mined. -
SYMPtoMs. Clinically, cases differ greatly in their
course and severity; one class presenting slight symptoms
and a chronic course; another class having marked local and
316 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
constitutional symptoms and running an acute course. The
symptoms of a typical case may be arranged under the fol-
lowing heads:— -
Urinary Organs and Urine.—Micturition more frequent
and the urine increased in quantity. Pain over the region of
the kidneys. .
The quantity of urine may amount to 4, 8, 12, 20 or 30
pints in twenty-four hours. It is usually pale, clear, and
watery, having a sweetish taste and odor, the specific gravity
ranging from 1.025 to 1.050. It ferments rapidly, if kept in
a warm place. It yields grape sugar to the usual tests, the
amount present varying from an ounce to two pounds in the
twenty-four hours.
The urea and uric acid are increased. Albumen may be
present.
The increased passage of a large quantity of saccharine
urine causes a constant itching, burning and uneasy sensa-
tion at the prepuce, along the urethra, and at the neck of the
bladder; in females, itching and eczema of the vulva are com-
mon; in children, incontinence of urine is frequent.
Digestive Organs.—An almost constant symptom is
thirst, with a dry and parched condition of the mouth. At
times the appetite is excessive, again absent. The breath
may have a sweetish odor, the tongue irritable, red, and often
cracked. Dyspepsia symptoms are common, and occasion-
ally vomiting. The bowels are constipated, the stools pale
and dry. At times diarrhea may occur.
The patient complains of feeling very weak, languid, and
of Soreness and pains in the limbs; there is more or less ema-
ciation, a harsh, dry skin, the countenance distressed and
worn.
The mind is often greatly altered; depression of spirits,
decline in firmness of character and moral tone, with irrita-
bility, are present. Sexual inclination and power are demol-
ished. Defects of vision are present.
The blood and various secretions contain sugar.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 3 I?
COMPLICATIONS. Pulmonary phthisis; Bright's disease;
defects of vision from atrophy of the retina or the formation
of a soft cataract; boils and carbuncles, and chronic skin affec-
tions, such as psoriasis and eczema.
CourSE. The clinical history varies in different cases.
In the majority of instances the course is chronic, lasting for
years, the symptoms beginning insidiously, and becoming
progressively worse, with, at times, decided remissions.
Occasionally the disease runs an acute course, death occur-
ring within four or five weeks. -
TERMINATION. The majority of cases ultimately prove
fatal, the symptoms markedly changing, the urine and sugar
diminishing in quantity, the occurrence of albuminuria, dis-
gust for food and drink, and the development of hectic fever
and colliquative diarrhea. -
The fatal result usually arises from gradual exhaustion,
from blood-poisoning, leading to stupor, ending in complete
coma, or occasionally to delirium or convulsions, or from
complications. -
Rarely death occurs suddenly from uraemic convulsions
or uraemic coma.
DIAGNoSIs. Diabetes mellitus only exists when grape
sugar is permanently present in the urine. “It is not the
quantity, but the persistence of sugar which constitutes dia-
betes.” With grape sugar present in the urine, with more
or less increase in the urinary flow, it can be mistaken for no
other affection.
From Bright's disease, by the absence of dropsy, and of
tube casts in the urine; the amount of albumen in the urine
is never so great or constant in diabetes mellitus as in Bright's
disease. -
From diabetes insipidus, by the absence of sugar in the
blood and urine, and the larger quantity of urine voided in
polyuria. - -
Simple glycosuria differs from diabetic glycosuria in
that the amount of sugar in the urine is not constant—at one
3.18 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
time being present, at another absent—the amount of urine
voided is never in excess of health; simple glycosuria is a
disease of the aged; diabetic glycosuria usually appears under
fifty years. Simple glycosuria often results from the inhala-
tion of chloroform, the use of chloral, in the insane, from
excitement, or as one of the results of injuries to the head.
PROGNOSIS. Most unfavorable as regards a cure, it
being fairly questionable if complete recovery has ever
occurred in a typical case. Still, decided amelioration may
take place in the symptoms, and the progress of the malady
be greatly retarded. The younger the patient the more rapid
the fatal termination. -
. . . . THE TREATMENT.
Taking into consideration the fact that diabetes is a
result of many pathological conditions, the treatment
involves treatment for these before a change can be expected
favorable to patient. Our motto is: “Take off the pressure,”
and this is eminently important in this case. The glandular
system, the whole alimentary canal, the brain and spinal
nervous system require to be looked after, hence a general
treatment, all over, should be repeatedly administered every
third day, giving special attention to the spinal region all the
way down, even to end of sacrum. The movement of dorsal
and lumbar muscles, upward and outward, beginning with the
glutaei, working upward, and the pressure with fingers and
thumb on sacral as well as lumbar area, with strong bending
of lumbar region backward, from below upward, and per-
sistent vibratory manipulations on lumbar area for several
moments at each sitting, will be found to be beneficial, sooth-
ing and restorative. Due regard must be had to the general
circulation, the digestive tract, the nerves involved, and espe-
cially those of the sympathetic controlling the secretions.
Any specific directions for treatment of these peculiarly
complicated conditions would be misleading, and the Oste-
opath must remember that wherever incoordination is found
correct it.
PLATE XXVI.-Treating Fibula and Leg Muscles.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 32 I.
DIABETES INSIPIDUS.
SYNoNYMs. Polyuria; polydipsia.
DEFINITION. An affection characterized by the habitual
discharge of a very large quantity of pale, watery urine, free
from albumen and sugar.
CAUSEs. Occasionally hereditary, or diabetes mellitus
may have existed in the parent; more common in children or
young adults; men are more liable than women; injuries and
diseases of the nervous system; exposure to cold; drinking
freely of cold water; fatigue; prolonged debility; malaria;
syphilis.
The probable immediate cause of the excessive flow of
urine consists in dilatation of the renal vessels, the result of
paralysis of their muscular coat, caused by derangement of
innervation, as the condition can be induced experimentally
by irritating a spot in the fourth ventricle, or by section of
portions of the sympathetic nerve.
SYMPTOMs. The affection is characterized by great
thirst, with an increased flow of pale, watery, slightly acid
urine, the amount varying from one to five or six gallons in
the twenty-four hours. The specific gravity ranges from
I.oO1-1.007. Sugar and albumen are absent. Urea and the
other solids are increased. The appetite is voracious, the
bowels are obstinately constipated, and the skin is dry and
harsh. -
The large flow of urine is usually preceded by various
nervous phenomena, as nervousness, irritability, inability to
concentrate the mind, vivid imagination, a failure of memory,
and headache.
Unless the affection is soon arrested great loss of flesh
and strength results. .
DIAGNoSIs. It differs from diabetes mellitus by the
absence of grape sugar in the urine.
From paroxysmal diuresis, by the absence of the
increased urine permanently.
From interstitial nephritis, by the greater amount of
322 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
urinary discharge and the absence of albumen, oedema, and
CastS.
PROGNOSIS. Rather unfavorable as to a radical cure,
unless caused by syphilis. Death rarely is due to the dia-
betes, but to some intercurrent malady that the patient has
been unable to withstand, on account of the weakness pro-
duced by the diabetes.
THE TREATMENT.
That this is strictly due to a nervous condition there can
be no doubt, hence the indication is: Correct the nervous
condition. To do this there should be special attention given
to the spinal nervous system. Inasmuch as the sympathetic
nervous system controls all action through the motor nervous
system, the pressure must be removed from that system of
nerves. This involves the whole organism—every capillary
in the body—and can only be corrected by a general treat-
ment, beginning at the vaso-motor area, and emphasizing
Special parts, especially along the dorsum, embracing renal
splanchnic area, stimulating terminal nerve filaments along
the spine, in our usual, general way, divulsing sphincter mus-
cles, urethral canal, removing all obstructions and sources of
irritation everywhere, and using considerable vibratory man-
ipulation on spine, abdomen, liver, spleen, and pancreas.
Such emphasis should be placed on certain portions of
the body as is demanded, and in the judgment of the operator
seems most appropriate, and there should be persistence in
this course until every source of irritation is removed.
Healthy, pure, arterial blood must be directed to every capil-
lary in the body, and complete restoration of nerve influence
over the manufacture of glandular secretion, and the elimi-
nating organs normalized.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 323
LITHAEMIA.
SYNoNYMs. Lithiasis; uric acid diathesis; half gout.
DEFINITION. A condition in which the fluids of the
body are saturated with nitrogenized waste, in the form of
lithic or uric acid; characterized by marked dyspepsia, various
nervous phenomena, muscular and articular pains, bronchial
catarrh, all or any of these associated with scanty, high-col-
ored, acid urine.
CAUSEs. High living, with little exercise; imperfect
digestion of nitrogenized food; impaired elimination of uric
acid.
PATHology. Not clearly determined. The non-elim-
ination of certain products which have a deleterious influence
upon the nervous system. That uric acid does exist in the
blood is now generally accepted.
SYMPTOMs. Those of dyspepsia associated with irregu-
lar bowels, scanty, high-colored, acid urine, sp. gr. I.O24-
I.O28, containing neither sugar nor albumen, but showing
an increased proportion of urates. Also depressed spirits,
impaired memory, loss of interest in occupation, sleepless
nights, attacks of vertigo, neuralgic pains in the head, and a
constant dread of apoplexy or cerebral disease. Also pains
in the joints, neuralgic in character. If the condition be
allowed to continue, the following organic changes may
result, to-wit: fatty heart; fibroid kidney; enlarged liver, or
changes in the cerebral vessels.
DIAGNOSIS. From gout, by the absence of acute par-
Oxysms and resulting changes in the joints.
PROGNOSIS. If properly recognized and treated, com-
plete recovery will result, although it is a disorder of long
duration.
If not properly treated, develops some one of the organic
diseases mentioned. -
THE TREATMENT.
Inasmuch as the fault seems to be in the organs of elim-
º, 324 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ination, the skin, lungs and kidneys should receive special
attention at our hands. The eliminative power of these
organs is dependent upon the healthful condition of the nerves
that control them, and this healthful condition is dependent
upon normal circulation. It follows as a sequence that to
remedy the defects, there must be restoration of the circula-
tion. To obtain this, the splanchnic nervous system, the
negative pole, must be united to the positive, so the circula-
tion may be complete. The generation of alkali is an essen-
tial element in this case, and the splanchnic nervous system
controls that part of our physical economy; hence the spinal
area demands special attention. Beginning at the vasor
motor area, we give general treatment, carefully stretching
the neck, together with the spinal column, then removing all
the pressure from the contracted muscles in the neck, raising
the clavicles, chest, treating the liver, spleen, bowels, kidneys,
using vibratory manipulations over the lumbar area, bowels
and liver, and treating the lower extremities. We then man-
ipulate the joints in such a manner as to free the circulation,
and take off the pressure generally.
CHOLERA.
SYNoNYMs. Epidemic cholera; Asiatic cholera; malig-
nant cholera; spasmodic cholera.
DEFINITION. An acute, specific, infectious disease, epi-
demic in the majority of, although endemic in other, locali-
ties; characterized by the transudation of serum into the
stomach and intestinal canal, and violent purging of a pecu-
liar, rice-water-like fluid, the persistent vomiting of a similar
material, severe muscular cramps, and a condition of pros-
tration, followed by collapse and death, or of a reaction from
the collapse and the development of the typhoid state (cholera
typhoid).
CAUSEs. A specific poison, the “comma bacillus” of
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 325,
Koch. Cholera is but feebly contagious, in the usual accep-
tation of that word, but it is unquestionably infectious.
The evidence seems conclusive that the cholera stools
are the main, if not the only, channel of infection, and that
the great cause of the propagation of cholera is the contami-
nation, with the cholera stools, of the water used for drinking
purposes. Milk may also be the vehicle by which it spreads.
It is claimed that the bacillus is inert in the intestinal canal
unless the individual is in the “receptive state”—that is, a con-
dition of intestinal catarrh, such as results from eating unripe
fruit, beer and spirit drinking, and indigestible food. It is
also determined that the bacilli are destroyed by acids, and
that if the stomach be normal, cholera will not result. “With
pure water, pure air, pure soil, and pure habits, cholera need
not be feared.”—Hart. -
Little, if any, danger exists from being in the presence
of the affected, although the emanations from the cholera
excreta in the atmosphere may generate the disease if swal-
lowed or inhaled. The dead bodies of cholera subjects appar-
ently possess slight infective property, “the bacteria of
composition,” probably destroying the cholera germs. One
attack does not afford protection against another. -
The period of incubation is short, under a week usually.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. This is, as yet, far from sat-
isfactory. The morbid appearances in the majority of cases
of death from cholera may be thus summarized. The tem-
perature generally rises after death, the body remaining warm
for a considerable time. Rigor mortis rapidly ensues, the
muscular contractions being often so powerful as to displace
and distort the limbs. The skin is mottled and the body
greatly shrunken. The blood is darker in color, thick, viscid,
feebly coagulable, and slightly acid. The arteries are quite
empty of blood; the veins, on the other hand, are distended.
The organs are, as a rule, pale and shrunken. . . . . . -
The stomach and intestinal mucous membranes are con-
gested, and present evidence of extravasation and ecchy-
326 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
moses, or are bleached and pale. The stomach and intestines
usually contain a quantity of whey-like material, having an
alkaline reaction, as well as quantities of cast-off epithelium
and the peculiar bacillus. It is thought by many that the
stripping-off of the epithelium is a post-mortem phenomenon.
The Peyer's solitary and Brunner's glands are usually
enlarged and prominent, and occasionally evidences of ulcer-
ation are apparent in the solitary glands, and sections placed
under the microscope show the “comma bacillus.” The
villi of the mucous membrane, as well as the epithelium of the
small intestines, are stripped off, leaving the basement mem-
brane, for the most part, exposed. The liver is more or less
advanced in fatty degeneration, presenting a somewhat mot-
tled, yellowish discoloration. The kidneys are congested, the
epithelium of the tubules granular and detached from the
basement membrane, blocking up the tubes. Prof. Bartholow
observed in all of his autopsies, “considerable hyperaemia and
dilatation of the vessels of the medulla oblongata. The con-
stancy of this lesion would seem to indicate a relationship
between congestion of the medulla and the cramps.”
SYMPTOMs. In accordance with the law of epidemic
infectious diseases, the onset, course, and character of the
symptoms vary in different cases and at different periods in
the same epidemic.
The disease may either set in suddenly in a patient prev-
iously in good health, or it may follow an attack of rather
severe and persistent typhoid symptoms, develop the so-called
cholera typhoid, which prolongs the recovery for several
weeks. Convalescence is often prolonged and complicated
by the development of severe bed-sores, boils, bronchitis,
pneumonia or parotitis.
SEQUELAE. Suppuration of the parotid gland; painful
tetanic contraction of the flexor muscles of the limbs;
abscesses or ulcers of the limbs; profuse sweats; roseola, ery-
thema, urticaria, and rarely vesicular eruptions. -
DIAGNOSIS. The epidemic character, and rapid spread-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 327
ing, and great mortality of the affection prevent its being
mistaken for any other disease, although isolated cases are
often confounded with cholerine or with cholera morbus, the
points of distinction being few, unless the “comma bacillus”
only be found in the stools of true cholera.
PRocNosis. Very unfavorable, the mortality ranging
from twenty to eighty per cent. The last epidemic in this
country was much milder than former ones. The prognosis
is controlled by the general condition of the patient, the age,
habits, and the development of the algid state; the prognosis
being more favorable in those cases which develop gradually
than in those in which it reaches its acme at a single bound;
the very young or very old, those addicted to the various
excesses and surrounded by unfavorable hygienic conditions,
are more apt to perish than are others.
THE TREATMENT.
This dreaded disease has slain millions, and yet no spe-
cific has been discovered that says: “Thus far shalt thou go,
and no farther.” Cholera is another of that group of affec-
tions resulting from disturbance in the Positive and Negative
forces of the nervous systems, reversing the order of nature,
neutralizing chemical affinities, and letting loose the “dogs of
war” in the physical economy, drowning the tissues and dis-
solving the elements, relaxing the walls of every tube in the
body, and permitting the fluids to escape, until complete
exhaustion ensues; nervous influences are aborted; collapse
closes the avenues, paralysis locks the door, the key becomes
ineffectual, and death closes the physical career of the unfor-
tunate. Cholera is like diarrhea, only an exaggeration of
the same condition, and whether the “cholera bacilli” are
the cause, or only a foreign substance, the treatment is the
same. To unite the forces is the essential thing to do. Neg-
ative influences predominate, relaxation to paralysis of nerve
filaments results; the watery portions of the blood exude in
an inverse manner to a normal condition; watery diarrhea is
328 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
the result. All this is due to lack of communication and con-
tact of terminal filaments of the motor and sympathetic nerve
footlets. The communication is cut off and the splanchnics
become paralyzed. We unite these forces, and restoration
begins at once. Starting at the sacro-lumbar junction, we
treat the spine upward; or, bending the patient by force back-
ward, we press with the knee directly on and over the twelfth
dorsal region, strongly for one to three minutes, and then use
gentle pressure on and against the abdomen for a few
moments; this unites the two forces, and restoration begins
at once. The most marvelous change takes place in the
whole system from this movement and pressure here. The
stream is turned the other way—peristalsis is lessened at once,
and immediate relief ensues. With children, the same results
are accomplished by taking hold of the feet, placing the
patient on the face, putting pressure on either side of the spine
at the lower lumbar area, pressing strongly as the body is
bent firmly backward by the raising of the limbs, and at the
same time pressing with the fingers, fist or knee, in the lum-
bar region—doing so by beginning low down and treating
upward each move as shown in that move elsewhere. Mes-
enteric nerve-stretching has much to do with results. The
quieting influence of confidence enhances a wholesome out-
come mentally in patient. “Fear hath torment” in this dis-
ease, perhaps more than in any other, and as the inspiration
of confidence comes, cessation of the discharges sets in.
Treatment is to be repeated every two to four hours, or as
often as indicated, and quietude every way enjoined. Restor-
ation of splanchnic and pneumogastric forces regulates the
whole difficulty. . . . .
TRICHINOSIS.
SYNoNYMS. Trichinae; Trichina spiralis; “flesh-worm
disease.” - - - -
DEFINITION. A typhoid condition, the result of the
entrance of a parasite—the Trichinae spiralis—into the intes-

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 33 I
tinal canal, and their subsequent migration into the muscular
structure; characterized by severe gastro-intestinal irritation,
severe muscular Soreness, and a low typhoid condition.
CAUSEs. The Trichinae spiralis are introduced into the
human body by eating the infected hog's flesh, either raw or
but imperfectly cooked.
DEscRIPTION. The parasite is found in two forms,
to-wit: intestinal trichina, which is sexually mature, and
muscle trichina, which is sexually immature. The intestinal
trichina is a small, hair-like worm, the male measuring I-18
of an inch, and the female I-8 of an inch in length; the head
is smaller than the rest of the body; the tail of the male has
a bi-lobed prominence, between the divisions of which the
anal opening is placed, and from which a single spiculum can
be protruded; the female has a blunt, rounded tail, the repro-
ductive outlet being situated toward the anterior part of the
body; the Ova are very small, containing embryos being pro-
duced viviparously at the rate of at least one hundred each
week after the entrance of the female into the intestinal canal.
The muscle trichina develops its sexual apparatus after it has
entered the intestinal canal of the host.
The viable embryos discharged from the female are in
a state of motion, and at once migrate from the intestines to
the muscular structure of the individual, and here set up
inflammatory action, they becoming surrounded by a cap-
sule or shell in which they are coiled. After a time, in the
muscle, the trichina undergoes a further change; lime salts
being deposited in and about the capsule and in the parasite
itself, when minute specks of lime are seen distributed
throughout the muscular structure. The development of
the parasite from the period of impregnation up to the time
of sexual maturity is, under favorable conditions, less than
three weeks. Within two days from the ingestion of the
infected pork occurs the maturation of the muscle larvae; in
six days more the birth of embryos occur, and in about two
332 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
weeks the migrating progeny have arrived at their habitat,
the muscular structure.
SYMPTOMs. These depend upon the number of para-
sites in the infected food. According to Dr. Sutton, of Indi-
ana, a piece of pork the size of a cubic inch contained eighty
thousand trichinae. There are three stages described, to-wit:
the intestinal, the migration, and the encapsulation.
Intestinal Stage.—A gastro-intestinal inflammation,
with nausea, vomiting, and watery diarrhea, the severity
depending upon the number of the parasites ingested.
Migration Stage.—A typhoid-like fever, rapid, feeble
pulse, profuse sweats, intense thirst, dry tongue and lips, and
red, swollen face, with soreness and tenderness of the muscu-
lar structure, increased by any muscular act. As a rule the
mind is clear, but decidedly apathetic.
Encapsulation Stage.—If the number of parasites
ingested has been few, recovery may occur in this stage, but
if the number has been large, the gastro-enteritis, fever, and
muscular phenomena are severe, the patient is in a critical
condition, between twenty and fifty per cent. succumbing.
DIAGNOSIS. Unless the physician has some intimation
of the cause, cases are readily mistaken for either ordinary
ileo-colitis or typhoid fever. -
PROGNOSIS. Depends upon the number of trichinae in
the pork eaten. Mortality between twenty and fifty per cent.
THE TREATMENT.
Osler says there is no drug that influences a favorable
result in the migratory stage of this “bug.” The treatment
should be directed especially to the digestive system, and
especially to the liver. Turn in a whole lot of bile on the
“colony,” and do all that is possible to move him out, and
relieve the capillary congestion, so as to keep up a normal
supply of arterial blood everywhere. *
If pork-eaters would have the meat boiled for four hours
at a temperature of over 240 degrees, trichinae would never be
found in the human system.
DISEASES OF THE BLOOD.
ANAEMIA.
SYNoNYMs. Spanaemia; hyperaemia.
DEFINITION. A deficiency of red corpuscles in the blood, or
of its more important constituents, such as albumen and haemo-
globin, or a reduction in the amount of blood as a whole;
characterized by pallor and general weakness.
Oligaemia is a general lessened amount of the blood. Isch-
aemia is a localized anaemia. -
CAUSEs. Predisposing.—Sex; females, pregnancy and
menopause; heredity. Exciting.—Deficient food, air, or sun-
shine; excessive work; mental worry; mental shock; prolonged
and frequent nocturnal emissions; excessive nursing; chronic
intestinal catarrh; Bright's disease; syphilis; cancer.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Post-mortem, the tissues are
thin, shrunken, and bloodless. If the anaemia has been of long
duration, patches of fatty change are seen in the various organs.
The blood has a brighter color, the result of diminution in the
number of red corpuscles and the quantity of the haemoglobin ;
it is thinner than normal, and coagulates slowly and imperfectly,
from diminution of the fibrino-plastic constituent. In health the
blood of an adult contains about five million red corpuscles to
the cubic millimeter (the female adult about half a million less).
The white cells, in health, average about ten thousand to the
cubic millimeter.
SYMPTOMs. Pallor, gums, tongue, ear, and conjunctivae pale.
Muscular weakness, inability for exertion. Deficient appetite
and impaired digestion, attacks of vomiting the result of anaemia
of the medulla oblongata. Quickened respiration, irritable tem-
per, vertigo in the erect position, attacks of swooning, hysteria,
and rarely epilepsy. Irritable heart, with soft systolic basic mur-
murs. Nocturnal emissions in male and deficient menses in
female. Marasmus in children. More or less general oedema
of the eyelids and ankles. Long continued, symptoms of fatty
changes in various organs or gastric ulcer result.
DIAGNOSIS. The symptoms of anaemia are so characteristic
(333)
334. OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
that an error is impossible; the cause of it, however, may be
hidden.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable if treated early. If protracted,
results in more or less general symptoms of fatty degenerations
or ulcer of the stomach.
THE TREATMENT.
This condition being due to malassimilation of food, either
due to lack of one or more elementary constituents, that should
be attended to the first thing. Air and sunshine should be espe-
cially regarded. Deep inhalations should be practiced several
times at a sitting, and repeated every two to four hours during
the day. Strict regard given to hygienic measures and daily
stimulation of the vaso-motor centers, so as to regulate the cir-
culation of the blood left in the system.
The neck muscles should be thoroughly manipulated and
kneaded, all the pressure taken off, stretched as directed, by plac-
ing one hand under the chin, the other at the occiput, pull gently
until the feet are seen to move, then turn face one-eighth of the
angle, then back to straight line with the body; then let go,
change hands and go through the same move. General and thor-
ough, mild, all-over treatment should be made every other day.
Friction along the spine, the vibratory movements on the abdo-
men, over the liver, spleen and kidneys. Examine the outlets of
the body. Remove all undue contraction of sphincter muscles.
See that the normal functions of all of the organs of the body are
performed. Take off all undue pressure everywhere, and your
patient will begin to brighten up, the vital fluids will take on a
normal hue, and vivacity take the place of the pallor so char-
acteristic. This is rational.
PROGRESSIVE PERNICIOUS ANAEMIA.
SYNONYMS. Idiopathic anaemia; anaematosis; essential
anaemia; anaemia of fatty heart.
DEFINITION. A pernicious, progressive form of anaemia, of
unknown cause, usually resisting all treatment, and toward its
termination associated with fever.
CAUSEs. The underlying cause of idiopathic anaemia is not
known. Among the exciting causes may be mentioned, preg-
nancy, syphilis, and great worry.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The blood is scanty and pale,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 335
with diminished red corpuscles, and haemoglobin, showing a very
feeble tendency to coagulate. There is no increase in the white
corpuscles. The marrow in adult bones becomes foetal, red, and
adenoid, and contains microcytes; several other changes have
occurred secondarily in the marrow. Secondary to the anaemia,
the heart, larger arteries, and certain capillary tracts exhibit
circumscribed or diffused fatty degeneration. The liver, spleen,
kidneys and stomach are decidedly anaemic, causing fatty changes
in those organs. The skin may contain petechiae of a purplish
or brownish tint, and internal hemorrhages are not infrequent;
retinal hemorrhage is rarely wanting.
There is not much emaciation, though the pallor is pro-
nounced.
SYMPTOMs. It begins insidiously with increasing languor
and pallor, the muscular weakness compelling the patient to take
his bed. Cardiac palpitation, dyspnoea, attacks of syncope,
oedema, and swelling about the ankles, with petechial spots scat-
tered irregularly over the surface; tenderness over the sternum
and other superficial bones is a frequent symptom. The appetite
is wanting, and nausea and vomiting occur, associated with
marked dyspepsia and persistent diarrhea. As the disease pro-
gresses a remittent form of fever develops, the temperature fre-
quently showing IO2 degrees to IO4 degrees F
Disorders of vision are the result of the retinal hemorrhage.
The cardiae sounds are feeble and associated with soft basic or
anaemic murmurs. The blood shows under the microscope the
changes described in chlorosis, save the red corpuscles may be
reduced to as few as 50,000 to the cubic millimeter.
DIAGNOSIs. Progressive pernicious anaemia is distin-
guished from simple anaemia and chlorosis by the greater severity
of the former. From leucocythemia by the normal-sized spleen
and liver, and the absence of increase in the white corpuscles.
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable as a rule, although recoveries
occur, but relapses frequent. -
TREATMENT. The same as for Anaemia.
LEUCOCYTHEMIA.
SYNoNYMs. Leukaemia; white cell blood; white blood;
anaemia splenica.
DEFINITION. A condition in which there is an enormous
increase in the number of white blood corpuscles, with enlarge-
336 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ment of the lymphatic glands, spleen, and often of the bone mar-
row, viz.: Splenic, lymphatic, or myelogenic, and is characterized
by symptoms of pronounced anaemia. -
CAUSEs. The real cause and nature of the affection is
unknown. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The spleen is increased in size,
density, and firmness; the lymphatic glands all over the body also
enlarge, but are soft to the touch, often fluctuating; the marrow
of the bones changes from its normal rose color to that of a
greenish yellow; the liver also enlarges enormously. The blood
is paler than normal, its specific gravity reduced from 1.055 to
I.O4O or lower, and the white corpuscles increased in number and
in size, the red corpuscles being lessened in number and size.
SYMPTOMs. The onset is insidious and the early progress of
the disease is identical with that of simple anaemia, accompanied
by swelling of the abdomen and a feeling of fullness and pain in
the splenic region, due to the enlargement of that organ. In the
lymphatic variety, enlargement of the glands in the groin, neck,
and axillary region are associated with the great pallor. In the
myelogenic variety, the bones, more particularly the ribs and
sternum, are tender on pressure, the patient developing a waxy
appearance. In each variety the appetite is poor, the digestion
feeble, the bowels loose, the patient easily fatigued, with cardiac
palpitation, and dyspnoea, with Oedema of the eyelids and ankles.
The urine is scanty and of high specific gravity—I.O2O-I.O3O.
Fatal hemorrhages occur near the termination of the disease.
The blood is pale and watery. The white blood corpuscles
are enormously increased in number. The average number of
white corpuscles to the cubic millimeter normally is about IO,OOO.
Cases are recorded in which the number of white corpuscles has
equaled or even exceeded the red blood corpuscles. The size of
the white corpuscles varies in different cases and also in the same
case. The red blood corpuscles are frequently decreased in num-
ber and size
DIAGNoSIs. This should cause but little trouble if enlarged
spleen, lymphatic glands, and tender bones are associated with
great pallor, and the characteristic appearance of the blood as
demonstrated by a “puncture of the finger of the patient and
receiving the blood on a piece of white linen or a lawn hand-
kerchief, and placing by the side of it a similar stain of blood from
a healthy subject. The full color of the latter contrasts strik-
ingly with the stain of the former, which is hardly of a blood
color and translucent.”
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 337
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. The average duration is
between two and three years. Cases of what are termed “acute
leukaemia,” proving fatal in a few months, occur.
THE TREATMENT.
The principal reason that renders this condition fatal is the
failure on the part of the physician to comprehend the situation—
the deficiency of certain elements. The malassimilation of the
food eaten, due in nearly all cases to interference in the circula-
tion of the blood in the glands, causes a deficiency of normal ele-
ments. These must be supplied before recovery can take place.
The circulation of deficient fluids will not right the deficiency.
The elements must be there or the power is deficient in the manu-
facture of them. In all cases the phosphate of lime is lacking
to mature the cells, then the phosphate of iron is lacking, hence
no affinity in the blood for oxygen. There is deficiency of potas-
sium phosphate, hence nervous influence is lacking; and most
generally we find sodium chloride deficient, hence the blood is
thin and watery, and as the motor nervous system is involved
(spinal), we lack sodium phosphate and sodium sulphate, and in
young girls, where the menses are watery, silica is needed. With
these elements supplied, either in the form of food or the potencies
assimilable, and general treatment to arouse the glandular system
to action, stimulate normal circulation and nerve force, this con-
dition may be remedied as well as other affections. Study all
the conditions existing in cases of this sort, and do not become an
automaton. Meet the indications with a due amount of brains,
and you will succeed. General treatment every other day.
HODCRIN'S DISEASE.
SYNoNYMs. Pseudo - leukaemia; pseudo - leucocythaemia;
lymphatic anaemia; lymphadenoma.
DEFINITION. An affection characterized by hypertrophy
of the lymphatic glands in various parts of the body, associated
with marked anaemia.
CAUSE. Venous stasis.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. A hyperplasia of the lymph
glands interfering more or less with their functions. The enlarge-
ment may be confined to one isolated gland, or a number may
be affected in different portions of the body, or a number in one
location may be simultaneously affected, causing a tumor varying
in size from an egg to an orange or even a cocoanut. The spleen
338 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
and liver are involved in two-thirds of the cases. “The marrow
of the long bones may be converted into a rich lymphoid tissue.”
—Osler. The red blood corpuscles are decreased in number and
altered in size and shape; the white blood corpuscles are often
increased in number. -
SYMPTOMs. A slowly developing anaemia with isolated or
diffused enlargement of the lymphatic glands. As the condition
develops, fever of a remittent character occurs, with feeble cardiac
action and shortness of breath. Hemorrhages may occur. The
patient grows progressively worse, with all the associated symp-
toms of deficient blood, death occurring by asthenia.
DIAGNoSIs. A study of the clinical history will prevent
error, as tubercular or scrofulous glands are accompanied with
tubercular changes in the lungs, and do not present the same
blood changes as Hodgkin's disease. e
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. The progress may be slow, but
it is none the less toward a fatal termination.
THE TREATMENT.
As the lymphatic circulation is dependent on venous circula-
tion, the primary indication for relief is in the removal of obstruc-
tions to the venous return blood. Capillary stasis causes press-
ure on the terminal nerve filaments, causing inactivity, or entire
loss of power in the nerves to carry on normal or any function.
The pressure must be removed before health can be restored.
The treatment should be general for this condition, and freedom
of the circulation of the fluids of the entire body should be
regarded as essential. No pathological condition can last long
under our treatment for general circulation of the fluids. Take
off the pressure everywhere. Health results. Beginning at the
neck, treat every organ in the body. Plenty of air and sunshine,
and rest of digestive organs, should not be lost sight of. Lively
company, exercise, systematic bathing, friction of skin and whole-
some, nutritious diet, with plenty of water to drink, six to eight
pints in twenty-four hours. Recommend the non-use of break-
fast, to rest the digestive organs, and no piece-between-meals
allowed.
3.
ADDISON'S DISEASE.
SYNoNYM. Melasma supra-renalis.
DEFINITION. “The bronzed-skin disease.” Thus defined
by Averbeck: “A well-marked constitutional disease, exhibiting
PLA're XXVIII. —Stretching Tendo Achilles.
|-
|-
|

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 34 I
itself locally as a chronic inflammation of the supra-renal cap-
sules, but in its essence consisting in a peculiar anaemic condition,
always tending toward death, which is characterized by intense
development of pigment in the cells of the rete malpighii and in
the epithelium of the mucous membrane of the mouth.”
CAUSEs. Obscure. Tubercle, scrofula, and syphilis have
each been given as the cause.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. A low form of inflammation,
terminating in degeneration of the supra-renal capsule. The
blood is deficient in fibrin and red corpuscles, with a slight
increase of the white corpuscles. Fatty degeneration of the heart
and vessels has been observed in some cases. “The most strik-
ing change during life—the abnormal pigmentation—is due to
the deposition of granular pigment in the cells of the rete mal-
pighii, in the papillary portion of the cutis, and even in the con-
nective tissue corpuscles. No change occurs in the proper struc-
ture of the skin. Similar pigment deposits occur in the mucous
membrane of the mouth, especially along the edges of the teeth.”
“The disease of the supra-renal capsules excites an irritation of
the vaso-motor system—the trophic system—which leads to the
pigmentation.”
SYMPTOMs. The onset of the disease is insidious, with a
feeling of extreme languor, muscular fatigue, asthenia, indiges–
tion, anorexia, dyspnoea, cardiac palpitation, vertigo, melan-
cholia, and excessive drowsiness. The surface is first pale, then
changes to a hue like that of melanaemia, changing to icteroid,
finally resembling the color of a mulatto, and then to a lusterless
bronze. These changes also occur on the mucous membrane of
the lips, tongue, gums, and mouth.
PROGNOSIS. An incurable disease. Duration, a year or two.
TREATMENT. Same as for Leucocythemia. Deficiency of
elements supplied.
HAEMOPHILIA.
SYNoNYMs. Hemorrhagic diathesis; “bleeder's disease.”
DEFINITION. A congenital condition, characterized by a
tendency to uncontrollable hemorrhages, with or without
abrasions. -
CAUSE. Hereditary.
SYMPTOMs. The bleeding appears about the period of first
dentition, and consists of spontaneous hemorrhages from the
mucous membrane of the nose, mouth, lungs, stomach, intestines,
342 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
and genito-urinary passages, or in perfect cases hemorrhages
occur directly from the fingers, toes, lobes of the ears, back of the
hands or arms, without any apparent change in the skin, and
continue in spite of the most powerful means, for days and weeks.
Traumatic hemorrhages occur if an injury of any kind is sus-
tained about the period of the development of the bleeding.
Epistaxis is the most common form of all those named. Attacks
of arthritis with fever occur with haemophilia, resembling acute
rheumatism. As a result of the great loss of blood, the subject
suffers from all the symptoms of profound anaemia.
DIAGNoSIs. It is impossible to confound the “bleeder's dis-
ease” with any other affection. -
PROGNOSIs. Death is the usual termination within a few
weeks from the time of its development, which may not be until
adult life.
THE TREATMENT.
See to it that all venous congestion is removed, venous
closures opened and kept open, and supply the deficiency in the
blood itself—that is, phosphate of iron. The sixth potency is
the strength to use—for weeks, three or four grains at a dose
three or four times a day.
SCORBUTUS.
SYNoNYM. Scurvy.
DEFINITION. A peculiar condition of malnutrition or anae-
mia, gradually developing upon a dietary deficient in fresh vege-
table material; characterized by decided anaemia, debility, mental
lethargy, petechiae, and a swollen and spongy state of the gums,
with a tendency to bleed upon the slightest irritation.
CAUSEs. The disease only occurs when fresh vegetable
nutriment or some appropriate substitute has been for a time
partially or completely withheld. It is held that the diet alone is
not sufficient to cause the disease; the mental factor of depression
of spirits, or in some cases home-sickness (nostalgia), must be .
associated. It is sometimes classed as an infectious disease, due
to a peculiar germ, a view which is gaining ground.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. An undetermined derangement
in the composition of the blood, with diminished proportion of
the potash salts. Spleen enlarged. The tissues are wasted and
present extravasations, due to either one of or the combined
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 343
presence of the following conditions, to-wit: liquid condition of
the blood, allowing it to escape from the vessels, alterations in
the walls of the vessels, or a vaso-motor paralysis.
SYMPTOMs. General weakness, lassitude, indisposition to
either mental or physical exertion. The skin is dry, rough, and
of a muddy pallor, the face pale and bloated. Swelling and
sponginess of the gums, with great tendency to bleed and an
exceedingly offensive breath. Looseness of the teeth, hemor-
rhages from mucous surfaces, and extravasations of blood within
and beneath the skin The lips are pale, which is in striking
contrast to the redness of the gums ; the eyes are sunken and sur-
rounded by dark blue circles. Hemorrhages occur from the
stomach, mouth, bronchial tubes, intestinal canal, and vagina.
The skin is dry and rough, resembling that of a plucked fowl.
GEdema of the face and ankles not infrequent. Depression of the
spirits is characteristic. Palpitation and dyspnoea on exertion.
Urine high-colored, speedily becoming foetid. The patient
usually longs for fresh vegetables and fruits.
CoMPLICATIONs. Dysentery. Scorbutic dysentery is a
frequent complication. It may co-exist with typhoid and typhus
fever.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable, if early and properly treated.
THE TREATMENT.
The cause seems to be due to an excess of chloride of sodium
in the system—an undue action of the Negative forces—hence
the pneumogastric nervous system is at fault. Not enough acid
is generated in the secretions of the stomach. The remedy is to
treat the neck, with special regard to the pneumogastric nerve
along the sides of the anterior aspect of the neck (in the carotid
sheath). Raise the clavicles, arms, chest, and attend to the ven-
ous circulation especially everywhere. The vaso-motor centers
should receive attention. Abstinence from salty bacon, and a
vegetable diet, with free and deep inspirations, full expansion of
the lungs, so as to oxygenate the blood, neutralize the alkalinity
of the blood thereby, equalize the forces, take off the pressure
from all sphincters, and flush the capillaries daily. Drink water
freely. Use no stimulants, not even beer or tobacco. Daily
baths; exercise in open air; sleep in thoroughly aired apart-
ments. Get back to the primitive order of living if possible.
Learn “war no more.”
344 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PURPURA.
SYNONYMs. Haemorrhoea petechialis; morbus maculosus
Werlhofii.
DEFINITION. An acute disease, characterized by purplish
discolorations of the skin, the result of hemorrhages into the
upper layers of the cutis and beneath the epidermis. When the
purpuric spots are tiny, like a pin-point, they are termed pete-
chiae; when larger in size they are termed ecchymoses.
VARIETIES. Purpura simplex; purpura haemorrhagica;
purpura urticans; peliosis rheumatica.
CAUSEs. Not properly understood, a special germ supposed
to be the cause. It may occur at any age, but is especially fre-
quent in children and elderly people. Its occurrence after the
ingestion of certain articles of diet has been observed.
SYMP'roMs. Purpura simplex is the mildest form of the
affection, and is characterized by the sudden appearance of small,
bright red spots—a cutaneous hemorrhage—most commonly on
the legs, associated with slight lassitude, mild febrile reaction, and
aching pains in the limbs. The hue of the spots rapidly fades to
a purplish color and slowly disappears. Relapses are common.
Purpura haemorrhagica has in addition to the eruption of
purpura simplex—the cutaneous hemorrhage—a flow of blood
from the free surface of mucous membranes. The most com-
mon hemorrhage is epistaxis, slight or profuse. Other hemor-
rhages are haematemesis, melaena, haematuria, haemoptysis.
menorrhagia, and also into the substance of the mucous mem-
branes of the palate, cheek, and gums. This variety is associated
with great debility and depression, moderate fever, and disorders
of digestion. Marked anaemia results from the hemorrhages.
Purpura urticans is a combination of urticaria and purpura
simplex. It is characterized by rounded and reddish elevations
of the cuticle, resembling wheals, but which are not accompanied,
like the wheals of urticaria, by any sensation of itching or tingling.
They are usually seated on the legs, thighs, breast, and arms,
and are interspersed with petechiae. They gradually form and
subside within twenty-four or thirty-six hours. Relapses are
frequent. This variety is also associated with malaise, moderate
fever, and pains in the limbs.
Peliosis rheumatica (Schoenlein's disease) is characterized by
multiple arthritis and a purpuric eruption; frequently the arthritic
symptoms are associated with urticaria or with erythema exuda-
tivum. CEdema is often marked, as in the fever, sore throat, and
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 345
general constitutional symptoms. The eruption is sometimes of
vesicles—pemphigoid purpura.
DIAGNoSIs. The purpuric eruption in each variety of the
affection is so characteristic that an error seems impossible.
PROGNoSIs. Purpura simplex and purpura urticans are favr
orable, but relapses are frequent. Purpura haemorrhagica is
always a grave disease, often proving fatal from exhaustion, or
more rarely, from cerebral or pulmonary hemorrhage. Peliosis
rheumatica is often a severe affection, but recovery is the rule.
THE TREATMENT.
There is nothing else indicated in this affection so promi-
nently as freedom of the circulation of the blood, and as the
nervous system that controls the circulation is interfered with
the means we have to relieve this condition are in our own hands,
largely at least. Stimulate the vaso-motor system the first thing;
free muscles of cervix; raise the clavicles, arms, chest; overcome
the sphincters and restore capillary and venous circulation, and
keep the pressure off, and the blood will flow through normal
channels, and no hemorrhage will ensue. Remember that “to
take off the pressure” cures all curable affections. Exercise the
same sense here as is required in all other pathological conditions,
and the same satisfactory results will obtain. -
DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM.
PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS.
PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS is the art of discriminating disease by
means of the eye, the ear, and the touch. The signs thus ascer-
tained are connected with changes or alterations in the form,
density, or condition of the structures within, and are known as
physical signs. “Physical signs are, then, the exponents of phys-
ical conditions, and of nothing more.”—Da Costa.
The method employed in the physical exploration of the
chest are: I. Inspection; 2. Palpation; 3. Mensuration; 4. Per-
cussion; 5. Auscultation; 6. Succussion.
Percussion and auscultation, dealing with sounds, are of the
greatest value, clinically. For the purpose of physical explora-
tion, the chest is mapped off into regions or divisions, as follows:
Anteriorly.—I. Supra-clavicular.—Lying above the upper
edge of the clavicle, usually about an inch in extent. 2. Clavicu-
lar.—Corresponding to the inner two-thirds of the clavicle. 3.
Infra-clavicular.—From the clavicle to the lower border of the
third rib. 4. Mammary.—Between the third and sixth ribs. 5.
Infra-mammary.—Downward from the sixth rib.
Laterally.—I. Axillary.—That portion above the sixth rib.
2. Infra-axillary.—That portion below the sixth rib.
Posteriorly.—I. Supra-clavicular.—That portion above the
scapula. 2. Scapular—That portion covered by the scapula.
3. Inter-scapular.—That portion between the scapulae. 4. Infra-
scapular—That portion below the angle of the scapula.
INSPECTION.
INSPECTION signifies “the act of looking.” Views of the
chest should be taken from the sides and behind as well as from
the front; for which purpose a good light should be obtained,
and the patient be placed in as easy and comfortable a position as
is possible. Inspection reveals the form, size, color, and move-
ments of the chest, as well as the condition of the superficial parts.
(346)
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 347
In health the sides of the chest are for the most part sym-
metrical in form, size, color, and movements, both sides rising
equally during the act of inspiration, and falling equally during
the act of expiration. During the act of inspiration the inter-
costal spaces in the lower two-thirds of the chest become more
hollow, as also do the supra-clavicular fossae. Inspiration is
almost entirely the result of muscular action; expiration, on the
other hand, is chiefly due to the elasticity of the lungs and chest
walls, aided somewhat in forced respiration by muscular action.
The movement of inspiration by inspection is of longer duration
than that of expiration, and the pause between the acts but
momentary. The respiratory movement is visible over the whole
thorax, although in males and in children it is most distinct at the
lower portion (inferior costal breathing), while in the female it is
most distinct at the upper portion of the chest (superior costal
breathing. - -
PALPATION.
By PALPATION is meant the application of the palmar suf-
faces of the hands and fingers to the chest, by which means we
appreciate impressions which are capable of being conveyed by
the sense of touch. The objects of palpation are: I. To give
more accurate information regarding what is revealed by inspec-
tion. 2. To locate spots of Soreness, the density and condition
of tumors, if any be present, the state of the chest walls, the fre-
quency of the breathing, and the action of the heart. 3. To
determine the existence and character of the various kinds of
fremitus (vibrations).
By FREMITUs is understood certain tactile impressions or
vibrations conveyed to the surface of the chest, which are classed
and produced as follows: I. Vocal Fremitus.-Produced by the
act of speaking or crying. 2. Tussive Fremitus-Produced by
the act of coughing; of value especially when the voice is very
weak. 3. Bronchial Fremitus.-Produced by the passage of air
through mucus, blood, or pus, in the bronchial tubes, during
the act of respiration. 4. Friction Fremitus-Produced by the
rubbing together of the roughened surfaces of the pleura.
When the normal chest vibrates lightly, it is termed the nor-
mal vocal fremitus. The vocal fremitus is more distinct upon the
right side toward the apex. If the lung be consolidated (denser),
the vibration is greater and more easily distinguished—the vocal
fremitus is increased. In feeble persons, or when any cause
348 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
interferes with the transmission of the vibrations, the vocal fre-
mitus is diminished or absent.
MENSURATION.
MENSURATION, or measurement of the chest, is of little prac-
tical importance, and hence seldom performed. The only meas-
urement likely to be required is the circular or circumferential,
in different parts of the chest, which is performed with either an
ordinary graduated tape measure or a double tape measure,
made by uniting two tapes in such a manner that they start in
opposite directions from the same point at the mid-spinal line.
The tapes are drawn around each side until they meet at the mid-
sternal line, on a line immediately above the nipple, or on the
level of the sixth rib near its attachment to the cartilage—the
sixth costo-sternal joint—the patient first being directed to effect
a complete expiration, the number of inches noted, and then to .
take a deep inspiration, the increase in inches noted, the differ-
ence between the two giving a rough estimate of the capacity
of the lungs. In right-handed persons the right side is usually
one-half to three-fourths of an inch longer than the left; if larger
than this it is usually the result of some abnormal condition. In
well-developed men the chest measures at the upper part about
thirty-three to thirty-five inches during expiration, and is
increased fully three inches upon inspiration.
PERCUSSION.
PERCUSSION, or “the act of striking,” to ascertain the compo-
sition of structures, affords signs and information of great value
in diagnosis. There are two methods employed, immediate and
mediate. Immediate, or direct percussion, is performed by strik-
ing the thorax directly with the points of the fingers or the palmar
surface of the hand. This method of percussion has been gener-
ally abandoned, as it does not enable the physician to distinguish,
with sufficient correctness, between the various shades of differ-
ence in the pitch or quality of percussion sounds.
Mediate, or indirect percussion, may be practiced in three
different ways, to-wit: I. With the finger of one hand interposed
between the body percussed and the percussing finger. 2. With
the finger acting as a pleximeter and the percussion hammer.
3. With the percussion hammer and the pleximeter.
The first of these modes affords the most correct and ready
information regarding the resistance of the parts percussed. The
skillful use of the fingers is more difficult to acquire than that of
PLATE XXIX. —Treatment of Outside of the Thigh.


A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 35 I
the pleximeter and hammer; but if the examiner has acquired
sufficient skill in its performance, an absolutely accurate result
may be obtained. “He who is skilled in digital percussion will
be able to percuss equally well with the hammer, the inverse of
which does not always hold good.” In addition to being profi-
cient in the technical modus operandi, it is necessary to possess
a sensitive ear, educated to distinguish between the various shades
of the sounds.
When the fingers are employed, it is a matter of choice
whether one or more fingers are used as the pleximeter. Usually
the last phalanx of the first or second fingers of the left hand are
used, the other fingers being raised from the chest, so as not to
interfere with the sound vibrations; they should be applied firmly
and evenly to the surface, thus preventing the slipping of the soft
parts, and also to determine the resistance of the chest walls when
the blow is given. The rounded ends of the first and second fin-
gers of the right hand are used as a hammer, striking the plexi-
meter fingers in such a manner that the nails shall not touch the
skin of the underlying fingers. The force employed varies in
different regions, but usually, for the chest, should be only of
moderate degree. Forcible percussion is of use only when the
sound of deep-seated organs is desired.
The stroke should be made perpendicularly to the surface
and not slanting, as is too often done. The whole movement
should proceed only from the wrist-joint, and ought not to be
too rapid or unequal, or of great force, the fingers being rapidly
withdrawn, so as not to interfere with the vibrations.
THE OBJECTS OF PERCUSSION are to elicit certain sounds,
and the amount of resistance or elasticity of the organs percussed.
The main sounds elicited by percussion are the dull, clear, and
tympanitic. Familiarity with the intensity, character, and pitch
of each of these sounds is essential.
When percussing the healthy chest, the sound obtained is
termed the normal pulmonary resonance. It is of variable inten-
sity, depending upon the force of the stroke employed, and the
amount of adipose and muscular tissues covering the thorax,
and the tension of the chest walls. There is no exact standard
of the normal pulmonary or vesicular resonance, but if the two
sides of the chest are compared, the normal standard of each per-
son is obtained. --
The character is termed pulmonary or clear, as characteristic
of the healthy chest wall. The pitch is always relatively low.
352 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The sounds elicited by percussing a healthy chest are not, how-
ever, alike over all its parts. -
Anteriorly, the portion of lung above the clavicle yields a
sound which becomes somewhat tympanitic as the trachea is
approached. Over the clavicle the sound is clear and pulmonary
at the center of the bone, but at the scapular extremity it is duller,
and toward the sternum it becomes somewhat tympanitic. At
the infra-clavicular region the resonance is clear and distinct, but
little resistance being offered to the percussing finger, and the
sound elicited may be taken as a type of the pulmonary resonance.
In this region, however, a slight disparity exists between the two
sides; on the right side the sound is less clear, shorter, and of a
higher pitch than on the left side. In the mammary region of
the right side the resonance of the lung is not so clear, the sound
being modified by the size of the mamma and the upper border
of the liver. On the left side the heart deadens the sound from
the fourth to the sixth rib, and, in a transverse direction, from
the sternum to the left nipple. This dull sound in the left mam-
mary region is lessened in extent during full inspiration, and in
emphysema, when the lung more completely covers the heart.
In the infra-mammary region on the right side the percussion
note is dull, except during the act of complete inspiration, when
the liver is displaced downward by the inflated lung. In the left
infra-mammary region the sound consists of a mixture of the dull
sound of the heart and spleen, and of the clear sound of the lung,
together with the tympanitic sound of the stomach. Over the
upper part of the sternum—above the third rib-the sound is
slightly tympanitic. Below the third rib, over the sternum, the
sound is dull, due to the presence of the heart and liver.
The position exercises some influence on the results of per-
cussion. More accurate results are obtained when the patient
is standing or sitting than when recumbent. While the front of
the chest is percussed, the arms should hang loosely by the sides;
the hands may be clasped across the top of the head during the
percussion of the axillary region; during the examination of the
back the head must be bent forward and the arms tightly crossed
in front.
On the posterior surface of the chest the sound also varies
according to the part percussed. Over the scapulae the sound is
duller than between these bones or below their inferior angles.
Over the infra-scapular region a clear sound is obtained as far as
the lower border of the tenth rib on the right side, where the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 353
dullness of the liver begins. On the left side, below the angle of
the scapula, the percussion sound is tympanitic if the intestines
are distended, or it may be slightly dull if the spleen be enlarged.
In the axillary region the sound is clear and distinct on each side.
In the infra-axillary region of the right side the sound is duller,
owing to the presence of the liver; at the corresponding situation
on the left side, the sound is clear or tympanitic, from the disten-
tion of the stomach, and at the ninth or tenth rib of the left axil-
lary region dullness and the sense of resistance mark the loca-
tion of the spleen.
The sounds obtained by percussion of the unhealthy or
abnormal chest are as follows: I. Hyper-resonance, or an increase
of the normal pulmonary resonance, is due to the relative increase
in the proportion of air to the solid tissues of the lung, provided
the tension of the chest walls be not altered, occurring in emphy-
sema of the lungs, atrophy of the lungs, or consolidation of the
opposite lung. 2. Dullness or an absence of resonance, due to
the relative increase of solid tissues in proportion to the amount
of air, as seen in the different stages of phthisis, in pneumonia,
pleural effusion, and hydrothorax. The pitch is increased or
heightened in proportion to the diminution of the amount of air
and the increase of the solids. If there be entire want of reson-
ance, the percussion note is said to be flat; if there be a slight
decrease in the resonance of the part, the note is said to be im-
paired. The sense of resistance is greater, the more marked the
consolidation of the lungs and the greater the tension of the
chest walls. 3. Tympanitic, or the drum-like percussion note, is
a non-vesicular sound, having the character elicited by percussing
Over the normal intestines; wherever heard it indicates the pres-
ence of air in conditions similar to that of the intestines, to-wit:
inclosed in walls which are yielding, but neither tense nor very
thick. When elicited over the chest it may be due to the trans-
mitted sound of the distended stomach or colon. It is obtained
over the chest in the pneumothorax, in moderate pleural effusions.
above the level of the liquid, over the seat of cavities in the pul-
monary tissues, and in oedema of the lungs. The tympanitic per-
cussion note differs from the normal pulmonary resonance in
being more ringing in character and of a higher pitch. The
amphoric or metallic sound is in reality a concentrated tympan-
itic sound of high pitch, and denotes a large cavity with firm,
elastic walls. The cracked-pot or cracked-metal sound is another
variety of the tympanitic sound. The condition most commonly
354 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
producing this sound is a cavity in the lung tissue, communicat-
ing with a bronchial tube. It requires for its development a
strong, quick blow of the percussing finger, with the patient's
mouth open. -
Respiratory Percussion.—The percussion sound will vary
greatly with the respiratory movements. If a full inspiration be
taken and percussion performed, then a full expiration taken and
percussion performed, and then the chest percussed during the
normal respiration, slight changes in the character and pitch of
the note are obtained, which otherwise would escape detection.
Prof. Da Costa has designated this method respiratory percus-
sion. -
Auscultatory Percussion.—This method consists in listening
with a stethoscope applied to the thorax, to the sounds elicited
by percussion. “It is a serviceable means of determining with
accuracy the boundaries of various organs, as those of the lungs
or heart, or of the liver or spleen, and yields particularly exact
results when carried out with the double stethoscope.”
AUSCULTATION.
AUSCULTATION, or listening to the sounds produced within
the chest during the act of respiration, coughing, or speaking,
furnishes the most reliable means of studying the condition of the
lungs, and is therefore the most valuable method of discriminat-
ing between the various conditions which may affect the lungs.
Auscultation is either immediate or mediate. It is immedi-
ate when the ear is applied directly to the chest, which may be
either denuded or thinly covered. It is mediate when the sounds
are conducted to the ear by means of a tubular instrument,
termed a stethoscope. For ordinary purposes, immediate or
direct auscultation is sufficient, but when it is desirable to analyze
circumscribed sounds, as in diseases of the heart, or where the
patient objects to this method, on the score of delicacy, or the
auscultator objects, on account of the uncleanliness of the person
examined, the stethoscope is to be preferred. Moreover there are
certain parts of the chest which can only be explored satisfac-
torily by the aid of a stethoscope, and again this instrument has
the additional advantage of intensifying the sound.
In auscultation the following rules, formulated by Prof.
Da Costa, should be observed: “I. Place yourself and your
patient in a position which is the least constrained and permits of
the most accurate application of the ear or stethoscope to the
Surface. Above all, avoid stooping, or having the head too low.
A DRUGLESS system of HEALING. 355
2. Let the chest be bare, or what is better, covered only with a
towel or thin shirt. 3. If a stethoscope be employed, apply
closely to the surface, but abstain from pressing with it. This
may be obviated by steadying the instrument, immediately above
its expanded extremity, between the thumb and the index finger.
4. Examine repeatedly the different portions of the chest, and
compare them with one another while the patient is breathing
quietly. Making him cough, or draw a full breath, is at times
of service: especially the former, when he does not know how to
breathe.” -
Sounds in Health.-If the ear be applied over the larynx or
trachea of a healthy person, a sound is heard with both the act
of inspiration and expiration. Its intensity is variable, its pitch
high, and its quality tubular (to wit: a current of air passing
through a tube—the larynx or trachea). The duration of the
sound during inspiration being somewhat longer than during
expiration. A short pause follows the act of expiration. This
sound is termed the normal laryngeal respiration, and is identical
in character, duration, and pitch, with an important morbid
sound, termed bronchial respiration. -
The sound heard by placing the ear over the lung tissue is
different; it is produced in the very finest bronchial tubes and
air cells by their expansion and contraction, and is termed the
normal vesicular murmur. The inspiratory portion of the sound
is of variable intensity, its pitch is low, its quality soft and breezy,
designated vesicular; its duration is during the entire act of inspir–
ation. The expiratory portion of the sound is not always per-
ceptible; it is of feeble intensity, very low pitch, its character soft
and blowing, and its duration much less than the act of inspira-
tion. It is to be remembered, however, that the vesicular mur-
mur will be found to vary in the different regions on the same
side, and in corresponding regions on the two sides of the chest.
These variations within the range of health are especially impor-
tant, and should be memorized.
Infra-clavicular Region.—The vesicular murmur in this
region on either side is much more distinct than over any other
part of the chest. On the left side the inspiratory sound is of
greater intensity, of lower pitch, and more distinctly vesicular
in quality than that heard upon the right side. On the right side
the expiratory sound is nearly or quite the same length as the
inspiratory sound, and is higher in pitch and more tubular in
quality than the expiratory Sound upon the left side.
356 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Supra-scapular Region.—Owing to the small number of air
vesicles and the large number of bronchial tubes, and their near-
ness to the surface, the respiratory murmur has an intense, high-
pitched, tubular and expiratory quality.
Scapular Region.—Compared with the infra-clavicular
region, the respiratory murmur heard over the scapulae on
either side is more feeble, and the vesicular quality less marked.
Inter-scapular Region.—The murmur in this region differs
from the normal laryngeal breathing only in intensity and dura-
tion. -
Infra-scapular Region.—The murmur in this region very
closely resembles that heard in the left infra-clavicular region.
Mammary and Infra-mammary Regions.—The murmur in
these regions differs from that heard in the infra-clavicular region,
in being of less intensity.
Axillary and Infra-axillary Regions.—The respiratory sound
in the axillary regions is as intense as in any portion of the chest.
In the infra-axillary regions the intensity is less and the pitch
lower.
Voice in Health.-If the ear be applied over the larynx or
trachea of a healthy person, and he be directed to count “twenty-
one, twenty-two, twenty-three,” in a uniform tone and with mod-
erate force, there is perceived a strong resonance, with a sensa-
tion of concussion or shock, and a sense of vibration, thrill, or
fremitus, the voice seeming to be concentrated and near the ear.
Often the articulated words are distinctly transmitted (laryngo-
phony). The sounds thus heard are termed the normal laryn-
geal resonance. -
If the ear or stethoscope be applied over the third rib anter-
iorly, on either side of the chest of a healthy person, and he be
directed to count “twenty-one, twenty-two, twenty-three,” in a
uniform tone, with moderate force, a confused distant hum is
perceived of variable intensity, accompanied with more or less
vibration, thrill, or fremitus, most distinct in adults, but notably
weaker in women than in men. This sound is termed the normal
vocal resonance.
If the ear or stethoscope be applied over the third rib anter-
iorly of a healthy person, and he be directed to whisper, in a uni-
form manner, the words, “twenty-one, twenty-two, twenty-three,”
there is heard a sound corresponding closely in character to the
sound of expiration over the same region during the act of forced
respiration; or, in other words, a feeble, low-pitched, blowing
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 357
sound. This sound is termed the normal bronchial whisper, and
is produced by the air in the bronchial tubes during the act of
respiration.
Sounds in Disease.—The vesicular murmur may undergo, in
disease, changes in its intensity, its rhythm, and in its character.
The intensity of the respiratory murmur may be: 1. Exag-
gerated or increased. 2. Diminished or feeble. 3. Absent or
suppressed. -
ExAGGERATED RESPIRATION differs from the normal vesicu-
lar réspiration only in an increase in the intensity of the respira-
tory sounds. When general over one lung, it will usually indi-
cate deficient action of other parts. In this manner an effusion
compressing the lung, one-sided deposits, obstruction of the
bronchial tubes by secretion, or inflammation of the lung struc-
ture, necessitate a supplementary respiration in a healthy portion
of the same lung or the lung upon the opposite side. From its
resemblance to the loud, strong, quick respiration of young chil-
dren, it has been termed puerile respiration. Exaggerated respir–
ation is therefore to be regarded as indirect evidence of disease
in some portion of the pulmonary tissue.
DIMINISHED RESPIRATION, called also senile respiration, as
being characteristic of old age, is characterized by diminished
intensity and duration of the sound. In the large majority of
instances the inspiration suffers the greatest, the expiratory sound
not diminishing in the same proportion. In asthma, emphysema,
diseases of the larynx and bronchial tubes, pleuritic pain, rheu-
matism or paralysis of the chest walls, or in thickening of the
pleural membrane, we observe superficial or diminished respira-
tion. When one side of the chest is partially filled with fluid, we
may hear a deep-seated but feeble breath sound.
ABSENT OR SUPPRESSED RESPIRATION occurs whenever the
action of the lung is suspended; this may be from external press-
ure, as when the lung is compressed by the presence of fluid or air
in the pleural cavity, or when complete obstruction of the bron-
chial tubes prevents the air from either entering or escaping from
the lungs. - -
The rhythm of the respiratory murmur may be: I. Inter-
rupted or jerky. 2. The interval between inspiration and expira-
tion prolonged. 3. Expiration prolonged. * * -
In health the inspiratory and expiratory sounds are even
and continuous, with a short interval between each act; this may
be altered in disease, and both sounds, especially the inspiratory,
358 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
lave an interrupted or jerky character, termed “cog-wheel respir-
ation.”
The JERKY BREATHING is noted in some spasmodic affections
of the air tubes, in hysteria, the earliest stages of pleurisy, pleu-
rodynia, and the early stages of pulmonary phthisis. It is most
frequently associated with phthisis, due probably to the adhering
to the walls of the finer bronchial tubes of tough mucus, which
obstructs the free entrance and exit of the air; it is usually most
notable under the clavicles.
The INTERVAL BETWEEN INSPIRATION AND ExPIRATION
MAY BE PROLONGED, instead of these two sounds closely succeed-
ing each other. When this occurs the inspiratory sound may be
shortened, or the expiratory sound may be delayed in its com-
mencement. If the inspiratory sound is shortened, it is the result
of consolidation of the lungs; if the expiratory sound is delayed,
it is the result of lessened elasticity of the lung structure, and is
most commonly associated with emphysema. g
PROLONGED ExPIRATION denotes that the air is obstructed
in its exit from the lungs. It may be the result of diminished
elasticity, the result of emphysema, or from the deposit of tuber-
cles, which impair the contractile power of the lungs. If the
former, it is associated with clearness on percussion; if the latter,
however, with impaired resonance on percussion. When pro-
longed expiration is detected at the apex of the lung, and is asso-
ciated with impairment of the normal pulmonary resonance, it is
for the most part the result of a tubercular deposit.
The QUALITY of the respiratory murmur may be: I. Harsh,
termed vesiculo-bronchial respiration. 2. Bronchial. 3. Cav-
ernous. 4. Amphoric.
HARSH RESPIRATION, or, as it is termed by Prof. Da Costa,
vesiculo-bronchial respiration, is that variety in which both the
inspiratory and expiratory sounds have lost their natural soft-
ness. It generally indicates more or less consolidation of lung
tissue. In normal vesicular respiration the sounds produced by
the air expanding the air cells and finer bronchial tubes obscures
the sound produced by the passage of air through the larger
bronchial tubes, the healthy lung being an imperfect conductor
of sound, so that as soon as any portion of the lung becomes
consolidated the vesicular element of the respiratory sound is
diminished, the bronchial element becoming prominent. Harsh
respiration is, then, a union of the vesicular and bronchial sounds,
being a vesicular sound mixed with some of the qualities of a

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 361
bronchial sound, the expiration being prolonged, and tubular in
character. It is present when the bronchial mucous membrane
is swollen, as in the earlier stages of bronchitis; also, in the earlier
stages of phthisis and pneumonia.
BRONCHIAL RESPIRATION is characterized by an entire
absence of all the vesicular quality. Inspiration is of high pitch
and tubular in character; expiration still higher in pitch, of
greater intensity, prolonged and tubular in quality; the two
sounds being separated by a brief interval. The bronchial respir–
ation encountered in disease closely resembles that heard in
health over the larynx or trachea. Whenever bronchial respira-
tion is present where, in health, the normal vesicular murmur
should be heard, it indicates consolidation of the lung structure.
CAVERNOUS RESPIRATION is a variety of the bronchial respir–
ation, at least so far as the quality of the sound is concerned. It
is essentially a blowing sound, yet not always heard during both
the acts of inspiration and expiration, being often only percep-
tible in the one, and in the other mixed with gurgling sounds.
Its pitch is lower than that of ordinary bronchial respiration, and
its character is hollow. For its production there must be a cav-
ity of considerable size in the lung substance, not filled with fluid,
near the surface of the chest walls, cornmunicating with a bron-
chial tube. It is met with most commonly in the last stages
of pulmonary consumption, although hollow spaces of any kind,
from abscesses or dilatation of the bronchial tubes, occasion it.
AMPHORIC RESPIRATION is a blowing respiration, having a
musical or metallic quality. It is a variety of bronchial respira-
tion produced in a large cavity with firm walls, permitting the
reflection of the sound. An imitation of this sound, though only
an imperfect one, is produced by blowing over the mouth of an
empty bottle. The amphoric character is present with both the
acts of inspiration and expiration. Amphoric or metallic respira-
tion is indicative of a large cavity, not common in phthisis, but
much oftener heard at the upper part of a lung compressed by
fluid or air, as in pneumo-hydrothorax.
RALES.
RALEs, or, as they are termed, adventitious sounds, because
they have no analogue in the healthy state, can not be considered
as modifications of the normal respiration. Grouped according
to the anatomical situation in which they are produced, we have:
f
362 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
I. Laryngeal and tracheal rales. 2. Bronchial rales. 3. Vesicu-
lar rales. 4. Cavernous rales. 5. Pleural rales.
RALES may be divided into two groups, according to their
character, to-wit: dry and moist, and may be audible either dur-
ing the act of inspiration or expiration, or during both.
DRY RALES, for the most part are produced by the vibration
of thick fluids which the air can not break up, and which, there-
fore, temporarily lessens the caliber of the bronchial tubes. When
this narrowing exists in the smaller bronchial tubes the resulting
sound is high-pitched or the rale is said to be sibilant or whistling;
when the narrowing exists in the larger bronchial tubes, the rale
is low-pitched, more musical in character, or sonorous. Dry
rales are particularly prone to be dislodged by coughing, and
when they are uninfluenced by the acts of breathing or coughing,
they do not depend upon the presence of secretions, but upon the
narrowing of the air tubes from the pressure of tumors, or from
a thickened fold of mucous membrane, or from a spasmodic con-
traction of the air tubes.
MoIST RALEs are those produced by the air passing through
thin fluids, such as mucus, blood, serum, or pus, during the
respiratory movements. When the fluid exists in the smaller
bronchial tubes, the rales are termed small bubbling, mucous, or
subcrepitant. When the fluid exists in the large bronchial tubes,
the rales are said to be large bubbling or mucous. Moist rales
are not persistent, but vary in intensity, and shift their positions
as the air drives the liquid which occasions them before it, or
during violent attacks of coughing, or after copious expectora-
tion.
LARYNGEAL AND TRACHEAL RALES are those produced within
the larynx and trachea, and may be either moist or dry. The
moist or bubbling sounds, produced when mucus or other
liquids accumulate in this part of the air tubes, frequently occur
in the moribund state, and are then known as the “death rattles.”
When not due to this condition they denote either insensibility
to the presence of liquid, as in stupor or coma, or inability to
remove liquid by the act of expectoration, as in croup or inflam-
mation of these parts in the very feeble. The dry rales produced
within the larynx or trachea are generally caused by spasm of
the glottis, to-wit: laryngismus stridulus, whooping cough or
croup, or from the presence of a foreign body in the part.
BRONCHIAL RALES, resulting from the passage of air through
the thin liquid, occasion bubbling sounds. When the liquid is
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 363
present in the large-sized bronchial tubes, the rales are said to
be large bubbling, or large mucous rales, occurring in acute or
chronic bronchitis. When the liquid is in the smaller bronchial
tubes, the resulting rale is called small bubbling, small mucous, or
subcrepitant, also occurring in acute or chronic bronchitis.
Bronchial rales, due to the narrowing of the tube by its spas-
modic contraction, or to the presence of tough, tenacious mucus,
which is set in vibration by the passage of air through the bron-
chial tubes, are termed dry bronchial rales. Frequently they are
suggestive of certain familiar sounds, such as snoring, cooing,
humming, or wheezing, or they are often musical notes. When
produced in the smaller bronchial tubes, they are termed sibilant,
or high-pitched rales; when produced in the larger bronchial
tubes, they are termed sonorous or low-pitched rales. They prin-
cipally occur in the dry stage of bronchitis, or during an asth-
matic paroxysm.
THE VESICULAR RALE, or, as it is more commonly termed,
the crepitant rale, is produced within the air vesicles or at the
terminal portion of the smaller bronchial tubes. It is to be dis-
tinguished from very fine bubbling sounds, or the subcrepitant
rale. “It is a very fine sound, or rather series of very fine uniform
sounds, occurring in puffs and limited to inspiration.”—Da Costa.
It resembles the noise occasioned by throwing salt on the fire, or
alternately pressing and separating the thumb and finger, moist-
ened with a solution of gum arabic, and held near the ear, or rub-
bing together a lock of dry hair near the ear. The crepitant rale
is produced by the movement of fluid in the air cells in the finest
extremities of the bronchial tubes, or by the forcing open, during
the act of inspiration, of the air cells agglutinated by exuded
lymph. These sounds may be defined as being very fine, dry,
crackling sounds, heard at the end of inspiration. They are
usually present in the first stage of pneumonia, but when limited
to the apices, are significant of the incipient stage of phthisis.
CAVERNOUs RALES, or, as they are commonly termed, gur-
gling rales, are produced in a pulmonary cavity of considerable
size, containing a large amount of liquid communicating freely
with a bronchial tube. The sound is occasioned by the agitation
of the liquid within the cavity, and may be compared to the sound
produced by the boiling of liquid in a flask or large test-tube.
The sound is sometimes high-pitched or musical, whence it has
been termed “amphoric gurgling,” but it is generally low in pitch.
The rale is heard almost exclusively during the act of inspiration,
364 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
and its diagnostic importance relates to the advanced stage of
phthisis.
PLEURAL RALES may be either dry or moist. Dry pleural
rales, or, as they are more commonly termed, friction sounds, are
occasioned when the surfaces of the pleura are covered with a
glutinous substance, preventing the unobstructed movements of
the pleural surfaces upon each other during the respiratory acts,
for in health these movements occasion no sound whatever. The
Sounds are generally interrupted or irregular, occurring during
the act of inspiration or expiration, or during both acts. The
character of the sound is variable, being termed rubbing, grazing,
rasping, grating, or creaking, according to the intensity of the
respiratory acts and the amount of exudation. They are dis-
tinguished by the apparent nearness of the sound to the ear, and
are usually intensified by firm pressure of the stethoscope upon
the chest. When the chest is fixed, especially at the lower two-
thirds, and the ear applied over the seat of the sound, it will be
found to have disappeared. The sound is diagnostic of the first
stage of pleurisy. - :
MoIST FRICTION sounds are produced in the same manner
as those just mentioned, the exudation being softened in char-
acter. This sound is frequently confounded with moist bron-
chial rales, and its discrimination is often only positive by a
careful study of the symptoms and concomitant signs present.
METALLIC TINKLING is a sign of pneumo-hydrothorax with
perforation of the lung, and when found is usually diagnostic of
this affection, although it occurs rarely in cases of phthisis with
a large cavity, the physical conditions for its production being
similar to those in pneumo-hydrothorax, to-wit: a space of con-
siderable size containing air and liquid, the space communicating
with the bronchial tubes. It consists of a series of tinkling
sounds, of high pitch, silvery or metallic in tone, and is very well
imitated by dropping a small marble into a metallic vase. It
occurs irregularly, not being present with every act of breathing,
and may be produced by forced, when not heard during tranquil,
breathing.
Were it not for the location and the absence of concomitant
signs, it might be confounded with tinkling sounds sometimes
produced within the stomach and transverse colon.
THE VOICE IN DISEASE.
THE NorMAL vocal, RESONANCE, as heard over the third rib
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 365
of the chest anteriorly on either side may have its intensity—I.
Diminished or absent. 2. Increased or exaggerated.
Or its resonance may be of the character of 3. Broncho-
phony. 4. Pectoriloquy. 5. AEgophony. 6. Amphoric voice.
THE voCAL RESONANCE MAY BE DIMINISHED OR FEEBLE in
bronchitis with free secretion, pleurisy with effusion, or in com-
plete consolidation of the lung structure and the bronchial tubes.
THE vocal, RESONANCE IS ABSENT in pneumothorax and in pleu-
risy with effusion. ExAGGERATED vocal, RESONANCE differs
from the normal vocal resonance in a slight increase of its den-
sity. It denotes a slight degree of solidification of lung tissue,
and is chiefly of value in the diagnosis of tubercle.
BRONCHOPHONY, or the voice concentrated near the ear,
raised in pitch and in intensity, denotes complete consolidation of
the pulmonary tissue in those parts in which the sound is abnor-
mally present.
PECTORILoquy is complete transmission of the voice to the
ear, the articulated words being distinctly recognized. It has a
close resemblance to the resonance heard over the larynx in
health. Its presence indicates either a pulmonary cavity or more
complete consolidation—in other words, an exaggerated bron-
chophony.
AEGOPHONY is a modification of bronchophony, consisting
in tremulousness of the voice, its character nasal or bleating,
somewhat suggestive of the goat. When heard it may be consid-
ered a sign of pleurisy with slight effusion, or of pleuro-pneu-
monia.
AMPHORIC VOICE, or “the echo,” as it is sometimes called,
is a musical sound, of a somewhat hollow, metallic character, like
that produced by blowing into an empty bottle. It is sometimes
produced in large cavities within the lung, but is especially inci-
dent to pneumothorax.
INCREASED BRONCHIAL WHISPER is a sound in which the
whispered words are abnormally intense, and higher in pitch
than the normal bronchial whisper. It has the same significance
as exaggerated vocal resonance.
SUCCUSSION.
The succussion or splashing sound is pathognomonic of one
affection, namely, pneumo-hydrothorax. It is obtained by jerk-
ing the body of a patient with a quick, somewhat forcible move-
ment, the ear being very near or in contact with the chest. The
sound is like that produced when a small keg, partially filled
5
366 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
with liquid, is shaken. The only liability to error is in confound-
ing this splashing sound with that sometimes produced within
the stomach; but attention to concomitant signs and the symp-
toms will always protect against this error.
ASSOCIATION OF THE PHYSICAL SIGNs (DA costA).
As many of the signs elicited by the various methods of
physical diagnosis depend on the same physical conditions, they
may be studied in groups. The following will be usually found
to be associated:
AUSCULTATION
PERCUSSION. OH" AUSCULTATION VOCAL PHYSICAL
R.ESPIRATION OF VOICE. FREMITUS. CONDITIONS.
Clear. . . . Vesicular Normal vocal Unimpaired. Lung tissue healthy
In Ul I*Intl I Or TeSOD18.Ilce. or nearly so; at any
itS modifica- rate, no increased
tion. density from de-
posits, etc.
Bronchial, Broncho- Increased. Solidificat'n of pul-
Or harsh phony. monary structure.
Dull. . respiration.
Absent respi- Absent voice. Diminished Effusion into pleu-
ration. or absent. ral Sac.
Tympanitic. Cavernous or Uncertain; Uncertain, Increased quantity
feeble, ac- cavernous or mostly di- of air within the
- COrding to diminished. minished. Chest, due to a CaV-
CallS6. ity or to over-dis-
tention of the air
Cells.
Amphoric Amphoric or Amphoric or Mostly dimin- Large cavity with
Or metallic. metallic. metallic. ished. elastic walls.
Cracked Cavernous CaVernous |Uncertain. Generally a cavity
Imetal Sound. respiration. respiration. communicat in
#. a bronchia
U106.
DISEASES OF NASAL PASSAGES.
ACUTE NASAL CATARRH.
SYNoNYMs. Acute rhinitis; acute coryza; “cold in the
head.”
DEFINITION. An acute catarrhal inflammation of the
mucous membrane (pituitary or Schneiderian membrane) lining
the nose and the cavities communicating with it; characterized
by feverishness, feeling of fullness and discomfort in the head,
and attended with discharges of fluid, watery, mucous, or muco-
purulent in character.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hyperaemia of the mucous
membrane, attended with redness, swelling, and deficient secre-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 367
tion. This tumefaction is partly increased by an oedematous
infiltration, causing a quantity of colorless, salty, and very thin
liquid to flow from the nose. The secretion soon assumes the
character of thick, tenacious mucus or muco-pus, due to the
desCuamation of the epithelium of the nasal mucous membrane,
and a copious generation of young cells, the hyperaemia and the
swelling of the membrane diminishing. The respiratory portions
of the nasal fossae are more markedly affected than are the olfac-
tory. Rarely, and then in new-born infants and those affected
with the eruptive fevers, the exudation in the nasal passages is
of a fibrinous nature, somewhat similar to that observed in diph-
theria.
CAUSEs. Atmospherical changes are the most frequent and
influential. Exposure of the neck to a draught of cold air, or of
the feet and ankles to cold and dampness, or changing from a
warm to a cold atmosphere suddenly, are among the most usual
causes. Irritating gases and vapors, dust, certain powders, as
ipecac and tobacco. The scrofulous taint and the rheumatic
diathesis seem to render the mucous membrane susceptible to
frequent attacks. Acute coryza is usually present in the initial
stage of measles and influenza. Epidemic influence occasionally
prevails on an extensive scale. The poison of syphilis and the use
of iodide of potassium not unfrequently act as exciting causes.
At times the catarrh seems to spread to contagion.
SYMPTOMs. “A cold in the head” is usually preceded by a
feeling of lassitude or weariness and more or less frontal head-
ache; then occur irregular chilly sensations in the back, followed
by more or less feverishness and an uncomfortable feeling of dry-
ness in the nares, with a strong inclination to sneeze. This is
soon followed by an abundant watery and saline discharge, which
is continually dripping from the nostrils, or occasions an attack
of sneezing followed by blowing the nose, which relieves the con-
gested and swollen membrane for a few moments. The relief
is temporary, however, the fullness of the head and difficult
obstructed nasal respiration rapidly returning. The anterior
nerves are red and inflamed, and the eyes red and suffused with
tears, through partial or entire closure of the tear ducts. The
discharge soon assumes a purulent character. The voice has a
peculiar tone, rather nasal and muffled in character. Within a
few days the swelling subsides, and secretion lessens, health being
restored in about ten days from the beginning of the attack.
When the attack has almost terminated hard crusts may form
368 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
within the nostrils, either on the septum or turbinated bones,
which are with difficulty expelled by blowing the nose.
CoMPLICATIONS. Irritation and swelling of the upper lip,
from repeated blowing of the nose and the constant contact of
the iritating discharge. Extension of the catarrh to the eth-
moid or splenoid cavities or frontal sinus, causing increased and
severe frontal headache; or to the antrum of Highmore, causing
tenderness over one or both cheeks. Extension to the Eusta-
chian tube and middle ear, causing impaired hearing; or to the
pharynx or larynx, causing cough.
DURATION. In mild cases about one week; severe cases
continue, more or less marked, for two weeks.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable if early and proper treatment be
instituted: if neglected, the catarrh tends to become chronic. In
very young infants, if the catarrh is not rapidly relieved, loss of
flesh and strength occur, from inability to take the breast.
THE TREATMENT.
This affection is wholly due to capillary congestion in the
mucous and submucous membrane (in the lining) of the nose—all
caused by muscular contraction, arresting the return of venous
blood to the heart. The remedy is: Take off the pressure from
the veins, and send the arterial blood onward, and the debris is
dissolved, moved out through the lymphatics into the veins, and
healthy blood takes the place of it, renews life's forces, and health
results. The pressure will usually be found on the jugulars.
Some one or more of the muscles of the neck will be found to
have their fibers contracted, either on the veins themselves,
or on the nerves supplying the muscle through which it passes
to reach the mucous membrane, producing a paralysis of the
nerves supplying the membrane, or closing down on and around
the veins so that the blood in the veins can not return, nor can
the waste material enter the channel of the veins so as to be
removed. In either case the results are the same—capillary and
venous stasis. The remedy at once suggests itself to the Osteo-
path, or to any rational practitioner. The results are just as cer-
tain as that two and two make four. The head, neck, and throat
treatment, raising the clavicles, chest muscles, and stimulating
the vaso-motor area, stretching the neck—in a word, restoring
general circulation, by taking off the pressure from all sympa-
thetic nerve filaments—cures catarrh. Carry out the general
treatment, from the beginning of the first move, as directed on
the neck and throat, being particularly careful to free thoroughly
PLATE YXXI.-Back and Shoulder Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 37 I
all the muscles of the neck, and raise the clavicles, chest, and chest
muscles, stretching the arms upward during deep inhalations as
the fingers are lowered down the spinal column. Due regard is
to be paid to the knee and chest move, and the mucous membrane
treatment in the fauces and the soft palate. The last treatment
is made with the forefinger inserted in the mouth, the palm sur-
face placed just posterior to the last molar tooth region, press
against the posterior border of the soft palate, letting the finger
slide along its border to the opposite side, then back to place of
beginning. The divulsion of the nostrils should be attended to
during the process of treatment. The patient should be
instructed in the manner of breathing at stated intervals and sit-
tings, oxygenating the blood several times a day. The use of
stimulants to be interdicted—all kinds. Treatments every day, or
at least every other day, and a cure may be relied upon in a month
or six weeks, at farthest.
CHRONIC NASAL CATARRH.
SYNONYMs. Chronic rhinitis; chronic coryza.
DEFINITION. A chronic inflammation of the mucous mem-
brane lining the nasal passages, with more or less alteration of
structure; characterized by a sensation of fullness in the nares,
increased secretion, and a perversion of the special sense of smell
and of hearing.
CAUSEs. The result of repeated attacks of the acute variety;
inhalation of irritating vapors and dust; syphilis and scrofula.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The mucous membrane of the
nares is thickened, of a dark red, sometimes grayish color, the
superficial veins dilated and varicose, often forming polypoid
enlargements. In many cases there is ulceration of the structure,
with more or less loss of substance; the secretion is thick, tough,
of a greenish character, and often very foetid; large collections
of dried mucus are often formed upon the turbinated bones and
Septum. -
SYMPTOMs. A feeling of fullness in the nares, increase of the
secretion, the character being thick and greenish, which, drop-
ping posteriorly into the pharynx, causes paroxysms of “hawk-
ing,” which are more marked in the morning immediately after
rising. The special sense of smell is more or less impaired, and
in many cases entirely abolished; the special sense of hearing is
372 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
more or less diminished, from an extension of the inflammation to
the Eustachian tubes; the voice has a peculiar nasal intonation.
An almost constant dull frontal headache, associated with a feel-
ing of weight, showing the extension of the disease to the infundi-
bulum and frontal sinus. Sudden changes of temperature cause
acute exacerbation of these symptoms, when there is superadded
difficult nasal respiration. If ulceration of the nares occur, the
discharge has a foetid odor. This condition is termed ozaena.
From extension of the inflammation to the nasal duct or its
obstruction, the tears flow over the malar eminence (epiphora),
leading to more or less congestion of the eyes.
DIAGNOSIS. Hypertrophy of the turbinated bones and naso-
pharyngeal catarrh are constantly misnamed chronic nasal
catarrh. The rhinoscope readily determines the diagnosis.
PROGNOSIS. Permanent cure is seldom obtained; the dis-
ease being so decidedly chronic and obstinate, the treatment is of
necessity protracted, and the majority of patients tire of it before
a complete cure is effected.
THE TREATMENT.
In chronic catarrhal conditions we find more or less rigidity
in the muscles of the neck. After treating the back of the neck,
stretching the same and rotating the head while the neck is
extended, the angles of the inferior maxillary are thoroughly
manipulated, the ears strongly vibrated, the temples vibrated, the
forehead manipulated, the facial nerve exits from the foramina
duly desensitized and vibrated, and the inner canthi thoroughly
stimulated, the sides of nose duly and strong vibrated, the sphinc-
ters divulsed, and the superior maxillaries duly vibrated; the neck
muscles close up under the angles of the inferior maxillary
should be thoroughly relaxed, pulled, and all the neck muscles
freed from rigidity as much as possible every treatment; then the
clavicles raised, the chest muscles and ribs extended during deep
inspirations, and the neck stretched by taking hold of the back
of the neck with the thumb and fingers of one hand, the other
arm circling under the chin, the chin resting in the bend of the
arm, and with a gentle, steady, upward raise of the whole body,
the fingers on the back of the neck adjust all muscles, bones, etc.,
there as the neck is stretched and gently rotated, and swayed
sidewise, backward and forward. The veins and lymphatics are
thus freed, the congestion relieved, and arterial blood sent in to
supply the place of the waste material, through the capillaries.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 373
DISEASES OF THE MOUTH.
STOMATITIS AND GLOSSITIS.
Catarrhal Stomatitis.-Acute catarrhal inflammation of the
mouth, fauces, tongue.
Apthous Stomatitis.-A fibrinous or croupous exudation of
the follicles of the mouth.
Ulcerative Stomatitis.-Or diphtheritic stomatitis, or sore-
ness of the mouth. -
Tarasitic Stomatitis.-Commonly named Thrush, a disease of
childhood generally.
Glossitis-An inflammation of the parenchyma of the
tongue, either acute or chronic.
Gangrenous Stomatitis.--Or the cancrum oris; noma; water
Call Cer. -
These come under the general treatment for freeing the cir-
culation of the blood vessels and lymphatics of the neck. It will
be found that the jugulars are not carrying back the fluids to the
dumping ground (the heart) for all the debris that accumulates
in the environments of the capillaries and the beginnings of the
lymphatics, and the result of this accumulation is decomposition
of elements and precipitation of incompatible anatomic cells that
should be held in solution in the blood—and would have been
had there been freedom of the circulation. It is not enough that
the capillaries be free, but the channels of all of the vessels return-
ing the fluids back to the heart must be free, and any undue press-
ure on the nervous system supplying any part, however delicate,
produces changes that become factors in pathological conditions.
From these premises it is readily understood what a magnificently
stupendous subject we have under consideration—that of coordi-
nation of every tissue in the body with every other tissue; the
rightful appreciation of which, in the comprehension of its impor-
tance, becomes marvelously interesting. To realize the stupen-
dous fact that our life depends upon the rightful adjustment of
the various parts of the system, and to know how to make these
adjustments, are accomplishments that are not usually attained in
our farthest advanced institutions of classic lore, hence this is a
revelation far in advance of anything realized or thought possible
by the dominant schools outside of the “indicated remedy” or
by some “contraria-curantur” compound introduced into the sys-
374 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
tem with supposed power to lay hold of the “materies morbi” and
hurl it from its lurking place bodily. “Expectation's hollow
dreams” have not been realized, and it has been left for the Osteo-
path to reveal to the world the proper means of accomplishing, in
a large majority of instances, the desired object, and with a cer-
tainty never before known, cure many supposedly incurable affec-
tions. While it is not a “cure-all,” yet it is a multifarious measure
that demands the attention and appreciation of the would-be
healer of diseases.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment of all of the affections named begins in the
vaso-motor nervous area. Freedom of all of the muscles on all
sides of the neck, in the usual way; the raising of the clavicles,
the treatment of the spine, the splanchnics, the liver, in fact the
general treatment, or whatever parts are indicated, will change the
pathology of all—mouth, throat, and stomach troubles—to a
physiological one. Thorough treatment must be made, and
repeated every six to twenty-four hours, occupying fifteen to
twenty minutes.
DISEASES OF THE PHARYNX.
ACUTE CATARRHAL PHARYNGITIS.
SYNCNYMs. Catarrhal tonsillitis; angina catarrhalis; acute
“sore throat.”
DEFINITION. An acute catarrhal inflammation of the
mucous membrane of the tonsils, uvula, soft palate, and pharynx;
characterized by rigors, fever, painful deglutition, coughing, or
constant desire to clear the throat, with a more or less decided
nasal intonation of the voice.
CAUSEs. Exposure to cold and damp; swallowing hot fluids
or food; during the prevalence of scarlatina, measles, erysipelas,
influenza, diphtheria, or variola.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The mucous membrane and
submucous tissues of the uvula, soft palate, fauces, tonsils, and
pharynx are congested, red, and swollen; the secretion is at first
lessened or entirely arrested, later it is increased, but of a thick,
tenacious, opaque character. The swelling is most evident at the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 375
uvula, due to the amount of relaxed submucous tissue, which is
especially thick and long, often resting on the root of the tongue
(“the palate is down”). Frequently one or both tonsils are swol-
len to such an extent that the fauces are completely occluded, and
the condition is mistaken for the graver phlegmonous tonsillitis.
In severe attacks of catarrhal angina, white or grayish-white
membranous masses form in small, irregular, roundish spots on
the reddened mucous membrane of the tonsils, soft palate, and
pharynx, causing the affection to be frequently mistaken for
diphtheria. -
SYMPTOMs. The onset is usually sudden, with rigors, fever,
thirst, headache, loss of appetite, coated tongue, bad taste, foul
breath, dryness in the throat, painful deglutition, and constant
desire to clear the throat, due to the increased length of the
uvula; as the inflammation proceeds the secretions are increased,
the fluid often filling the mouth and also causing a constant desire
to swallow, each act being associated with acute pains. Not
infrequently earache adds to the patient's distress, from extension
of the “catarrh” to the Eustachian tubes and tympanum.
In severe attacks of catarrhal pharyngitis, cases which, from
the intense hyperaemia, have been termed erysipelatous or ery-
thematous pharyngitis, the muscles of the palate are infiltrated
with serum, which greatly interferes with their function. Under
normal conditions the contraction of the muscles of the anterior
half arches of the palate prevents the return of food and drink
into the mouth; while the contraction of the muscles of the pos-
terior half arches, together with the uvula, closes the passage to
the nose; if the function of these muscles be impaired, fluids
would be driven through the nose or back into the mouth by the
contractions of the pharynx in the act of deglutition.
In all affections of the pharynx a nasal tone is pathogno-
monic, especially if the muscles of the half arches are interfered
with.
VARIETIES. Exanthematous Pharyngitis is the form of the
affection complicating the acute infectious diseases, such as scar-
latina, measles, influenza, and smallpox.
Erysipelatous Pharyngitis is the form complicating facial
erysipelas; rarely, however, the affection begins in the pharynx,
spreading to the face and other parts.
Gangrenous Pharyngitis may occur with diphtheria, scar-
latina, erysipelas, smallpox, and typhoid fever. The symptoms
:
:
o
o
e
376 OSTEOPATHY-ILLUSTRATED.
assume a typhoid (depressed) character, the termination being
usually fatal. --
Phlegmonous Pharyngitis is the variety in which is present
an accumulation of pus in the submucous and deeper tissues of
the pharynx, constituting a retro-pharyngeal abscess. This var-
iety of pharyngitis may follow the penetration of a sharp piece of
bone or be secondary to caries of the cervical vertebrae.
Fibrinous Pharyngitis; or, as it is sometimes termed, pseudo-
membranous, is considered with croup and diphtheria, of which
it constitutes a part. -
DIAGNOSIS. On account of the great swelling of the tonsils,
it may be mistaken for acute tonsillitis; but the mild inflammatory
symptoms should prevent the error. Cases with membranous
deposits upon the tonsils, soft palate and pharynx, are no doubt
often misnamed diphtheria: the marked difference in the consti-
tutional symptoms should prevent the error. t
PROGNOSIS. Favorable, the affection terminating in three or
four days by the raising of a quantity of thick, opaque mucus.
THE TREATMENT.
The jugulars are compressed. Venous blood is in the small
pharyngeal veins, the lymph is locked in the channels, decompo-
sition has taken place; changes are going on all the time as a
consequence. The thorough neck treatment as directed for the
other forms of catarrh is the course to pursue in this affection to
cure it. Take off the pressure. These treatments should be
made frequently at the start, endeavoring to abort the conse-
quences; the time between treatments to be governed by the cir-
cumstances attending each individual case. It is a strange matter
with those unacquainted with this system of treatment, that such
malignancies as are witnessed in throat affections yield so quickly
to this treatment properly applied. Every form of malignancy
succumbs to freeing the engorgement. This is far better than the
process of “rotting out” the tissues, resulting in blood-poisoning.
In acute cases the treatment should be very mild, and the
movements should not be too deep at the start. The gradual
removal of the pressure can be done more satisfactorily than with
much force at the start. The amelioration will be witnessed as
the pressure is taken off; and the patient will begin to show signs
of relief at once as the process continues. These treatments
should be repeated according to the emergencies of the case.
This is the only rational means of cure.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 377
ACUTE TONSILLITIS.
SYNONYMS. Amygdalitis; quinsy ; phlegmonous pharyn-
gitis.
DEFINITION. An acute parenchymatous inflammation of
one or both tonsils, with a strong tendency toward suppuration;
characterized by moderate fever, pain in the throat, a constant
desire to relieve the throat, painful and difficult deglutition,
impeded respiration, and more or less muffling of the voice.
CAUSEs. Generally attributed to exposure to cold, but, in
the majority of cases, the exposure is so slight that there must be
a predisposition to the affection; for persons once affected are
particularly prone to repeated attacks upon the slightest exposure,
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. One or both tonsils will be seen,
on inspection, to project from its bed, as a rounded, deep red
body, which may even extend beyond the median line, when they
may entirely occlude the isthmus of the fauces; the half arches
and posterior border of the soft palate are reddened and some-
what swollen. The surface of the tonsils is often covered with
small, yellowish points, which closely resemble patches of false
membrane, but careful inspection will show that they are beneath
the mucous membrane, being only the distended follicles of the
gland. The mucous membrane of the fauces and pharynx is
more or less red and swollen.
SYMPTOMs. Onset more or less sudden, with rigors, rise in
temperature, IO2 degrees to IO4 degrees F., full, frequent pulse,
IOO to I2O, headache, thirst, pain, and swelling at the angle of the
jaw. with a constant desire to clear the throat, difficult and painful
deglutition, from the enlarged tonsils, almost closing the fauces,
when the respiration is more or less impeded; the voice is more
or less muffled, and attempts at phonation increase the pain.
Darting pains along the Eustachian tubes are of frequent occur-
rence, the patient complaining of earache and more or less deaf-
116SS.
If suppuration be imminent, the throat becomes more pain-
ful, the character of the pain throbbing, the febrile phenomena
increase, with more or less depression, the symptoms seeming to
be of great danger, when suddenly, after an effort at vomiting, or
spontaneously, the tonsillar abscess bursts, a quantity of pus
escapes from the mouth, and prompt relief follows.
DURATION. The disease lasts from three to seven days, ter-
minating either by suppuration or the gradual resolution of the
enlarged glands.
378 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
DIAGNOSIS. Tonsillitis can hardly be mistaken for any other
affection if the fauces are inspected.
PROGNOSIS. In the majority of cases the result is favorable,
it very rarely proving fatal, except in children, and only then by
obstructing the respiration, and, at the same time, so seriously
interfering with nutrition that the child's strength fails.
THE TREATMENT.
The general treatment of the neck muscles should be made,
as directed elsewhere. The sides of the neck and under angles
of the lower jaw should receive emphasis in treatment, and the
manipulation directly on the tonsil, using one or more fingers in
the mouth, against the tonsil involved, and the other hand or
fingers should be used as a stay from the other side, outside of
throat. Persist for several moments in that way, and aim to press
the blood out of it into the natural channels (to the veins) after
the veins have been freed under the clavicles and in the neck
muscles. The exercise of proper judgment in this treatment
should reduce these excrescences rapidly, radically. Establish a
free circulation in the various channels involved, and a cure is
effected. The vaso-motor area deserves attention in all cases
where there is fever, and this is the case in the acute form. Take
off the pressure, and nature does the rest. 4.
DISEASES OF THE LARYNX.
ACUTE CATARRHAL LARYNGITIS.
SYNONYMs. Catarrhal laryngitis; “sore throat.”
DEFINITION. An acute catarrhal inflammation of the
mucous membrane of the larynx; characterized by feverishness,
diminished or suppressed voice, painful deglutition, and more or
less difficulty of respiration. .
CAUSES. Atmospherical changes; cold draughts of air,
whether directly inspired or exposure of parts or all of the body to
the same. Cold, wet feet; inhalation of irritating vapors, such as
gas, Smoke, or ammonia; inhalation of dust. Prolonged efforts
at public speaking or singing, or the same efforts under difficul-
ties. In children, from violent fits of coughing.
PLATE XXXII.-Manner of Expanding Diaphragm.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 381.
PATHoLOGICAL ANATOMY. In mild cases there is a transient
congestion (hyperaemia) of the mucous membrane over the
entire, but more commonly circumscribed portions of the larynx,
with more or less swelling and diminished secretion; the mucous
membrane soon returns to its normal condition, the secretion
being slightly increased.
SYMPTOMs. The attack begins rather suddenly with a feel-
ing of dryness, rawness, and tickling, referred to the larynx with
the sensation of the presence of a foreign body in the throat, and
with hoarseness and a disposition to cough. Deglutition causes
pain by the upward movement of the larynx and by the pressure
of the food on the larynx as it passes along the gullet. Attempts
at speaking are attended with more or less distress, and the larynx
is tender on pressure. Coughing, from the onset, of a noisy,
harsh, hoarse, or toneless character, and the act of coughing
attended with a sensation of scratching in the larynx. The first
day or two there is scanty expectoration, but in a short time the
secretion is increased, giving the cough a loose character. In
the early stages the sputa may be slightly streaked with blood.
Rarely a hemorrhage occurs from the mucous membrane of the
larynx. The voice is at first decidedly hoarse, soon followed by
complete aphonia. The respiration is but slightly, if at all,
affected in adults. There may be more or less febrile reaction.
In children the onset is with fever, white coated tongue, frequent
tense pulse, hot skin and flushed face, embarrassed respiration,
the voice hoarse and whispering, with harsh, ringing, croupy
cough, and great restlessness. During the night the child is
subject to suffocative attacks (laryngismus stridulus).
Laryngoscopic Appearances.—These vary with the severity
of the attack and the stage of the inspection. In mild cases, at an
early period, the mucous membrane presents a bright red
"appearance. Severe cases present, in addition to the bright red-
ness, the mucous membrane swollen, to such an extent at times
as to conceal the vocal cords, they appearing only as slender
threads of a reddish tint. At times the mucous membrane pre-
sents the appearance of erosions or ulcerations, due to a desclua-
mation of the epithelium.
DURATION. Usually about one week; if very severe, two or
three weeks may elapse before the larynx returns to its former
condition.
PROGNOSIs. Simple catarrhal laryngitis never terminates
fatally.
382 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT.
When it is remembered that “heat expands and cold con-
tracts,” we can understand why pathological conditions of this
sort exist. The pent-up venous blood decomposes, degenerative
tissue metamorphosis takes place, and the difficulty increases
until the surrounding structures become involved. The pressure
upon the veins on account of muscular contraction closes the
outlet, hence all of the fluids that are wont to go into the veins
remain stationary, chemical changes occur, and inflammation
ensues as a consequence. Nothing has yet been discovered in
other systems of treatment but to give medicines and await
results, which are more or less uncertain, ineffectual, and the
tissue involved continues to break down, and all of the evils enu-
merated are the consequence. If the pressure is kept off, and
removed when on the jugulars, so that an outlet is constantly
present, normal conditions are restored or kept up. When it is
known that our manipulations are all effectual in producing
these results, the prejudice now existing will vanish like frost
before a warm sun's rays. Intelligence along these lines is much
needed. Results demonstrate the truths attempted to be demon-
strated, and as the scales are gradually removed from the per-
ceptives of the physical healers, the philosophy will stand out in
its lucidity as clear as the noon-day sun on a cloudless day. The
treatment of throat affections, then, consists in removing the
obstructions. These are in the veins, due to muscular contrac-
ture. Overcome the contracture, then the fluids pursue their
normal course, and all is soon righted.
It will be seen that the means of taking off the pressure are
scientifically appropriate. Begin by first stretching the muscles
of the neck. This has a direct influence in producing peristalsis
of all of the closed-up channels therein, whether veins, lymphatics
or capillaries, and it also frees communication of nerve influence.
With one hand on the occiput, the other under the chin, gently
extend the neck, and when the body is seen to respond, endwise,
carefully turn the face to about a quarter angle in the direction
the fingers of the hand under the occiput point, and use pressure
on the sides of the cervicals for a moment; then change hands
and repeat the process on the other side of the neck. Then the
angles of the jaws should be manipulated, the ears treated as
directed elsewhere, the temples, forehead, nose, eyes; then give
due attention to the movement of all of the muscles of the throat,
according to the general directions, paying especial attention to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 383
the relaxation of contracted muscular fibers. Raise the clavicles
so as to remove pressure from the jugulars; raise and expand the
ribs and chest muscles, having the patient take deep, full inhala-
tions as each move is directed to this end. The arms become the
levers and the fingers the fulcrum, and the body the weight to be
moved, to effect the freedom of circulation, and the waste material
moves on in normal channels and reaches its destination (the
heart and lungs), and, converted into healthy arterial blood, is sent
back to again renew healthful structure, where needed.
OEDEMATOUS LARYNGITIS.
SYNONYM. CEdema of the glottis.
DEFINITION. An acute inflammation of the mucous mem-
brane of the larynx and that about the glottis, with an infiltration
of the areolar tissues by a serous, sero-purulent, or purulent.
fluid; characterized by obstructed or stridulous breathing and
dysphonia or aphonia.
CAUSEs. The result of acute laryngitis; abscess in or about
the throat or tonsils; erysipelas of the face; scarlatina; smallpox;
Bright's disease; syphilis of the larynx. Rare in children.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Infiltration into the loose con-
nective tissue of the ary-epiglottic folds, the glosso-epiglottic liga-
ment, the base of the epiglottis, and the inter-arytenoid space.
If the true vocal cords are inflamed, their color changes, and
instead of appearing white, glistening, and brilliant, they are dull,
grayish-red, or violet-red in patches. If the swelling be the
result of purulent infiltration, the parts affected present a deeply
congested color, with here and there spots of a yellowish hue.
Serous infiltration, sufficient to cause fatal oedema, disap-
pears with death, leaving but slight traces to account for the
formidable symptoms.
SYMPTOMs. The onset is much the same as a simple catar-
rhal laryngitis, with a gradually increasing impediment to the
respiration. The patient experiences the sensation of a foreign
body in the throat, and after a short time a difficulty of breathing,
which ultimately threatens suffocation. The deglutition is ren-
dered difficult owing to the swelling of the epiglottis; the voice,
at first muffled, gradually becomes weaker and weaker, until
finally it is almost extinct; the cough at first is dry and harsh, but
as the infiltration increases it becomes stridulous and suppressed;
384 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
there is no expectoration, except that after great effort to clear
the throat a little frothy mucus is raised. The difficulty of respir-
ation, as the disease progresses, becomes greater and greater, and
the paroxysms of impending suffocation more frequent. The
inspiration is accompanied by a whistling sound characteristic of
the narrow condition of the glottis, the patient sits up in bed, his
mouth open, gasping for breath, his eyes protruding, the whole
body trembling with intense convulsive movements, and after
a time a general cyanosis commences, the face assuming a bluish
hue, all these symptoms continuing for a few moments, when
slight relief occurs, to be again followed by another paroxysm,
in one of which, if nature or art does not afford prompt relief,
death occurs from asphyxia. A physical examination of the
parts may be made by gently pressing the finger into the throat,
when the epiglottis may be felt very much thickened, and the
ary-epiglottic folds may have attained such tumefaction as to
convey to the finger an impression similar to that which is given
by touching the tonsils. •
Laryngoscopic Appearance.—The mucous membrane has a
bright red appearance. The epiglottis has the appearance of a
semi-transparent roll-like body, or it is often merely erect and
tense. It is this condition of the epiglottis which explains the
pain and difficulty in deglutition. Rarely the vocal cords are
infiltrated.
DIAGNOSIs. Any disease which gives rise to dyspnoea may
simulate oedematous laryngitis, but the history of the case,
together with a laryngoscopic examination, will generally furnish
conclusive evidence as to the real nature of the malady.
PROGNoSIS. As a rule, unfavorable. If early and vigorous
treatment be instituted, recovery is possible, but without it death
is the inevitable result, the patient dying asphyxiated. Even
when local measures have removed the obstruction to free respir-
ation, the patient is very likely to perish subsequently from
exhaustion, or blood poisoning, or from pneumonia or other lung
complication. The duration of infiltration of the larynx varies
from a few hours to several days.
THE TREATMENT.
To relieve this affection, nothing succeeds like the manipula-
tions recommended for Acute Laryngeal Catarrhal Inflammation.
The same difficulty exists. The treatment should be made thor-
oughly, carefully, and the sittings should be repeated frequently.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 385
Whenever there is disease anywhere in the system, it becomes
amenable to this treatment, provided the pressure can be taken
off; and this means everything in dealing with all pathological
conditions, and the thing for the physician to do, in any case, is
to apply scientific, effectual means to do so. Results are almost
universally satisfactory. The treatment for sore throats, regard-
less of the name or character, can not be surpassed in satisfactory
efficacy, whether a simple ulcer or a malignant descluamation or
diphtheritic in character. The restoration of normal circulation
always means relief, and in the majority of cases a positive cure.
The prognosis of most cases of pathological conditions in this
book is given from a medical standpoint, and the superiority of
this treatment over the medical, will be apparent as the proper
application of Osteopathy is made. The treatment should be
made with discretion as to a particular routine course, the opera-
tor considering whether the trouble is local, general or specific.
Neutralization of poisons must not be lost sight of, especially
when introduced into the system from contact or infectious virus;
but where poisons generate in the system as a result of decompo-
sition of blood stasis, the remedy is to remove the obstruction.
SPASMODIC LARYNGITIS.
SYNONYMs. Spasmodic croup; false croup; catarrhal croup;
child crowing.
DEFINITION. A catarrhal inflammation of the mucous
membrane of the larynx, associated with temporary spasmodic
contraction of the glottis; characterized by paroxysmal coughing,
difficulty of breathing, and attacks of threatening suffocation.
CAUSEs. Atmospherical changes or “taking cold”; excesses
in eating and drinking; excitement; violent emotion, are all given
as causes for simple croup.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Congestion of the mucous
membrane of the larynx, with slight swelling and deficient secre-
tion, are the only changes that have thus far been noted.
SYMPTOMs. The attack occurs chiefly during the night, the
child on retiring having either its usual health, or perhaps being
a little feverish. After several hours of sleep the child is sud-
denly awakened by a paroxysm of Suffocation, and a dry, harsh,
ringing cough. After half an hour or an hour or two the breath-
ing becomes easier, the cough less “croupy,” the skin is covered
386 , OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
with more or less perspiration, and the child falls asleep. The
next day there is present a cough of a loose character, the respir-
ation being about normal. If no treatment be instituted, the
same phenomena occur on the second night, the child being
apparently well during the second day, the cough being less in
amount; phenomena of a similar character, but of much less
severity, are present the third night, after which the disease
usually disappears. If the symptoms of the first paroxysm con-
tinue pronounced for two or three days, there is a strong proba-
bility that the inflammation may become fibrinous in character,
or that true croup may develop.
DIAGNOSIS. The symptoms are so characteristic that it
seems impossible for the affection to be mistaken for any other
disease. -
PROGNoSIs. Spasmodic or simple croup always terminates
favorably. -
- THE TREATMENT.
There is no one affection that so completely demonstrates
the principles of this science as its application to spasmodic laryn-
gitis. Pressure producing impediment, which results in conges-
tion of blood and other fluids in the larynx. The contracture of
the muscular fibers interfere with the nerve terminals and capil-
lary congestion results. The treatment proper, in this affection,
relieves all trouble in a few moments. Simply the usual neck
treatment is sufficient. Let the blood pursue its uninterrupted
course, and we have no croup. The various remedies recom-
mended by practitioners are not needed in this affection. The
most reasonable thing to do outside of Osteopathy is to apply a
cold, wet compress. That acts mechanically—squeezes the capil-
lary blood vessels, and the fluids therein are permitted to flow
onward. The lymphatics are emptied—the pressure is removed
thereby—so a cure results almost immediately. The manipula-
tion of the muscles of the neck and raising the clavicles do the
work effectually in a few moments.
*. CROUPOUS LARYNGITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Membranous croup; true croup.
DEFINITION. An acute inflammation of the mucous mem-
brane of the larynx, attended with the exudation of a tough secre-
tion—the false membrane—and the occurrence of spasm of the
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 387
glottis; characterized by febrile reaction, frequent ringing cough,
dyspnoea, with loud inspiratory sound, and altered or extinct
voice, showing a strong tendency toward death by asphyxia.
CAUSEs. A disease of childhood, most common in strong,
vigorous, well-nourished males. Certain families present a strong
hereditary tendency. Most common during a humid winter.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Intense hyperaemia of the
mucous membrane of the larynx, associated with swelling,
oedema, and marked redness. There soon appears on the sur-
face of the mucous membrane a grayish pellicle, rapidly coalescing
and becoming thicker—the opaque, false membrane—which dif-
fers in extent, thickness, and adhesiveness in different portions
of the larynx. In all cases the false membrane is found on the
vocal cords and inner surface of the epiglottis. The first exuda-
tion (membrane) softens by the serum which is exuded, and is
then mechanically dislodged by acts of coughing or vomiting, but
is followed by successive deposits upon the mucous membrane.
When the false membrane is detached the mucous membrane of
the larynx is found unaffected, so far as the loss of structure is
concerned. Several successive crops of membrane may occur
after the detachment, or it may entirely cease to form after the
removal of the first exudation.
On microscopical examination the false membrane is found
to be composed of a fine network of fibrillae, holding in their
interstices leucocytes of an albuminous or fibrinous nature. The
false membrane may extend into the pharynx, but especially is it
liable to extend into the trachea and bronchial tubes, and, as the
inflammation extends downward, the character of the exudation
changes from fibrinous to muco-purulent.
SYMPTOMs. The onset of “true croup” is either sudden, by
an attack of spasmodic croup, or it is gradual, as an acute
catarrh of the larynx, rapidly increasing in severity, with a feeling
of heat in the throat, huskiness of the voice, harsh cough, fever,
and thirst, the hoarseness soon becoming marked, and the cough
having a metallic, “croupy” character, rapidly changing to a
stridulous, husky sound; every few minutes the child takes a sud-
den, deep, stridulous inspiration, the voice becoming more and
more husky. Difficulty of breathing now follows, the child is
unable to lie down, or if, exhausted by the efforts at inspiration,
it is quiet for a moment, it soon starts up in fright, breathing
more heavily, with a shrill, whistling inspiration. Soon, from the
narrowing of the glottis, from the presence of the membrane, the
388 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
expiration becomes difficult and noisy, and suffocation seems
imminent from the paroxysmal attacks of spasm of the glottis, the
child tosses wildly about, tears at its throat, as if to remove some
obstacle, the face becoming cyanosed, the alae of the nose work-
ing rapidly, the mouth wide open, the inspiratory efforts gasping,
the body covered with a profuse sweat, and death seems imminent,
when suddenly the spasm is relaxed, air enters the chest, the
breathing becomes somewhat easier, and the child, exhausted and
partially stupefied, drops into a fitful sleep of a few moments’
duration.
The suffocative attacks return at short intervals, or there
occur decided remissions between them, considerable portions of
the false membrane being expelled, allowing the child to fall into
a refreshing sleep.
In those cases which tend to a favorable termination, the
appearance of improvement noted between the suffocative attacks
is maintained, the paroxysms of suffocation becoming less
frequent, expectoration of membrane more marked, the diffi-
culty of breathing lessens, the cough loosening, the voice grad-
ually returning, the fever, which has been more or less high
during the attack, disappearing.
If instead of improvement, the case tends toward a fatal ter-
mination, the suffocative attacks become more frequent, expec-
toration is absent, the voice and cough inaudible, although the
efforts at speaking and coughing are visible, the difficulty of
breathing continues, the respirations becoming more frequent and
shallow, but without whistling and stridor, cyanosis deepens, the
countenance has an indifferent, drowsy, and stupid look, the eyes
dull and nearly closed, with symptoms of depression, the pulse
rapid and weak, the surface covered with a cold, clammy sweat,
the extremities cold, stupor and insensibility more marked, the
child dying of carbonic acid poisoning or asphyxia.
DURATION. The duration of true croup is about one week,
rarely continuing ten days.
DIAGNoSIs. CEdema of the glottis might be mistaken for
croup until the period of the formation of the characteristic mem-
brane. The chief points of distinction from the onset are, how-
ever, absence of fever, paroxysmal attacks of difficult respiration,
followed by a complete return to the normal condition. CEdema
of the glottis is rare in childhood.
PLATE XXXIII.-Showing Manner of Liver Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING.
391
The following are the chief points of difference between
croup and laryngeal diphtheria:
CROUP.
A local disease.
Begins in trachea and extends up.
Exudation never Cutaneous. .
No pain in Swallowing.
No swelling in submaxillary and lym-
phatic glands.
Cough always present and often re-
duced to a mere whistle with a pecu-
liar metallic ring.
Not traceable to bad drainage.
Seldom occurs in adultS.
Neither contagious nor infectious.
A Sthenic disease.
Membrane does not extend to nares.
No symptoms of septicaemia.
No albuminuria.
Neither attended with nor followed by
paralysis. *
Death seldom caused by syncope.
Death due to suffocation.
Absence of a specific germ.
PROGNOSIs.
A very fatal disease.
DIPHTHERIA.
A constitutional disease.
Begins at tonsils and extends down,
Exudation often cutaneous.
Often severe pain in swallowing.
Swelling in submaxillary and lym-
phatic glands.
Seldom much cough, and then only
hoarse.
Often traceable to bad drainage.
Often occurs in adults. -
Both contagious and infectious, both
pefore and after death.
An asthenic disease.
Often extends to nares and many other
parts.
Septicaemia generally present.
Albuminuria frequent.
Paralysis not uncommon.
Death from Syncope common.
Death frequently results from other
C8,U1S6S.
Presence of the Klebs-Loeffler bacillus.
The danger increases in
proportion to the age and feebleness of the child.
Unfavorable symptoms are:
Loud, stridulous inspiratory
and expiratory sounds, laborious and prolonged expiration, de-
pression of the base of the thorax during inspiration, whispering
voice or complete aphonia, congestion of the face and neck,
stupor, weak, rapid, and irregular pulse, cold extremities, and a
cold, clammy perspiration.
Favorable symptoms are: Expectoration of false mem-
brane, decrease of the stridulous respiration, voice changing from
whispering to hoarseness, looseness of the cough, moderation of
the fever, and an improvement in the general condition.
THE TREATMENT.
A thorough general treatment of the neck is first to be insti-
tuted, so as to take off all the pressure in consequence of mus-
cular contraction. To take off the pressure is essential. The
exudation that is filling up the trachea is due to venous obstruc-
tion in the mucous membrane. This obstruction is primarily in
the large veins that empty their contents (or should) into the
jugulars. The clavicles should receive our attention early in the
392 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
manipulatory process. Take off the pressure at the inner ends
of the clavicles—let the channel be clear here; then manipulate
all of the muscles of the neck, gently stretch the neck; use stim-
ulation with the fingers on the vaso-motor area, free the muscles
on the sides and front of the neck, and especially close up under
the lower jaw, as shown elsewhere in plates. The mucous mem-
brane of the mouth and throat should be treated with the finger
of the operator, and by a few moments’ persistency in the treat-
ment the false membrane is loosened, and easily withdrawn.
After it is removed, the patient becomes easy at once, and the
treatment, gently applied, should be made every few hours until
all of the inflammatory process ceases. The clavicles will be
found too low, hence attention to them should receive due notice.
Raise the chest and ribs and muscles strongly, having the patient
take a deep inspiration, if possible, each time the arm is raised,
and the pressure made down the sides of vertebrae, as low as the
eighth dorsal vertebra. Vibratory manipulations should be made
with the hand applied to either side of the neck and over the
trachea, which loosens the false membrane in a short time. Both
arms should be strongly extended above the head, and while the
fingers are pressing on either side of the spinous processes of the
lower cervical and upper dorsal vertebrae, the arms are to be
gently pressed downward and backward, patient either in a
recumbent or sitting posture. The object of this move is to
expand the chest, exhale carbonic oxide and receive oxygen, and
relieve the venous congestion of the intercostals and the venae
azygos major and minor. The vibratory movements on the neck
and bronchi for two to five minutes aid in disseminating the
capillary congestion, the lymphatic secretion, and stimulating the
terminal nerve filaments and relieving the pressure. These
treatments are to be repeated at intervals of four to six hours
until recovery takes place.
It is better for the patient not to eat anything until the tongue
clears off and the throat is restored, and a natural appetite
returns. The salivary glands can not secrete the normal secre-
tion essential to mixture with the food, to promote digestion.
Then why tax the system unnecessarily? It is better not to feed
the patient for the reasons given.
Allow me to call attention right here to the fact that strong
vibration upward and outward over the upper end of the sternum
affords relief, in that it empties the thymus gland, which will be
found engorged in all cases of croup, diphtheria, scarlet fever and
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 393
throat diseases, in persons under twelve years of age. Atmos-
pheric and telluric changes affect this gland. The east wind
influences this gland as well as yeast, deleteriously—congesting
the gland, and so affecting the yeast that it won't rise while the
wind is in that quarter.
LARYNGISMUS STRIDULUS.
SYNoNYMs. Spasm of the glottis; pseudo-croup; Millar's
asthma; thymic asthma; “Kopp's asthma”; tetany.
DEFINITION. A spasm of the muscles of the larynx inner-
vated by the inferior or recurrent laryngeal nerves; characterized
by a sudden development of dyspnoea and the appearance of
deficient oxygenation of the glood. MacKenzie describes it as
“a form of convulsion occurring in ill-nourished infants, char-
acterized by spasmodic action of the abductors of the vocal cords,
and in severe cases by spasm of the diaphragm and intercostal
muscles.”
CAUSEs. Most common in children, the result of teething,
laryngitis, indigestion, scrofula, or other cachexiae. Attacks in
adults are not uncommon. It is often hereditary.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Death the result of spasm of
the glottis is such a very rare occurrence that the changes in the
larynx are illy understood. The mechanism consists in an irri-
tation of the superior laryngeal nerve—the afferent nerve—whose
function it is to supply the mucous lining of the larynx with sensi-
bility, whence is reflected through the inferior laryngeal nerve—
the efferent nerve—the motor influence resulting in the spasm of
laryngeal muscles.
SYMPTOMs. The spasms of the laryngeal muscles is of sud-
den onset, and usually after nightfall. The child may have been
in perfect health, to all appearances, on retiring, or it may have
shown symptoms of catarrh of the upper air passages, or been
suffering from gastro-intestinal or dental irritation. The child
awakes suddenly, coughing in a metallic, resonant tone—the
croupy cough—and with great dyspnoea, with loud, crowing,
stridulous inspirations, the result of narrowing of the larynx from
spasm, with wheezy, stridulous expirations. The entrance of air
is so greatly obstructed that all the accessory muscles of respira-
tion are called into use; the lips and finger nails become blue, the
surface cold, the countenance anxious, and the inferior portion of
394 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the chest is drawn in, instead of being expanded, during inspira-
tion. General convulsions occur at times, during a paroxysm,
also strabismus, and involuntary discharge of the faeces and the
urine. The paroxysm continues from half an hour to an hour
or more, to return after a few hours' sleep or during the follow-
ing night; the cough, during the day, having the croupy char-
acter.
DIAGNoSIs. The non-febrile and distinctly intermittent
nature of the affection differentiates it from croup, and its own
distinctive characters, from all other diseases. The view is gain-
ing that it is a variety of tetany.
PRocNosis. Favorable. Death from suffocation during
the paroxysm may occur in very young children, but it is cer-
tainly a very rare termination.
THE TREATMENT.
The indications are plain. The back of the neck demands
Our first attention, then the vaso-motor nerve area, to regulate
the heart’s action and the sides of the neck and clavicles, to relieve
the phrenic nerve. This, with freedom of the chest muscles and
stretching the arms over the head, and treating down the spine
and overcoming nerve pressure at the lower outlets of the body,
together with repeated general treatment, assures prompt relief.
The recurrent laryngeal filaments, together with the spinal acces-
sory nerves, do much to relieve immediate paroxysm and prevent
its recurrence. -
TUBERCULOUS LARYNGITIS.
SYNONYMs. Laryngeal phthisis; throat consumption.
DEFINITION. An inflammation, tending to ulceration, of the
tissues of the larynx, of tuberculous origin; characterized by pain
on deglutition, cough, weakness of voice, and progressive emacia-
tion, associated with hectic fever.
CAUSEs. An infection of the larynx with the bacillus tuber-
culosis, either from the inspired air or by the sputum. A
depressed state of the system is essential for the action of the
bacilli.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. It is well to remember that all
chronic inflammations of the larynx associated with pulmonary
tuberculosis are not tubercular. Begins with redness of the
mucous membrane, showing scattered tubercles. The tubercles
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 395.
show a strong tendency to cluster, then soften, leaving shallow,
irregular ulcers. The ulcers are covered with a grayish exudate
The mucous tissue round about the ulcers is thickened. The
ulcers may, and generally do, erode the true vocal cords, often
entirely destroying them. The ulcers slowly extend in all direc-
tions, destroying the tissues attacked. The epiglottis may be
entirely destroyed. -
SYMPTOMs. Usually develops secondary to pulmonary
symptoms; rarely it may occur as a primary disease, to be fol-
lowed with tuberculosis of the lungs. The first symptom is a
change in the voice—huskiness; this, associated with symptoms
of ill health, is always a warning to the physician. The husky
voice may proceed until it is but a painful whisper. Gough of an
irritating, painful character, associated with slight expectoration.
Painful and difficult deglutition (dysphagia) is a very constant
and distressing symptom. There is the remitting fever so char-
acteristic of tuberculosis, with night sweats, loss of appetite, loss.
of flesh, and insomnia.
Laryngoscopic examination reveals the characteristic broad,
shallow, irregular, grayish ulcers, with the thickened surrounding
mucous membrane. The vocal cords show infiltration and thick-
ening or ulceration. -
DIAGNOSIS. To discriminate from non-tubercular laryn-
gitis, examine the sputum, and if the specific bacilli are found, the
diagnosis is conclusive.
PROGNOSIs. Unfavorable, so considered.
THE TREATMENT.
Although the medicine administrators prognose this disease
unfavorable, there is much that may be done to ameliorate the
sufferings of the patient, and many times effect a permanent cure.
The impediments in and to the circulation of the blood, the inter-
ference in respiration (a process essential to the purification of the
blood) and in the throat and chest muscles, can be removed, and
the congestion relieved in the mucous membrane. General dys-
crasia due to and resulting from a tuberculous diathesis, demands
perfect freedom of the capillary circulation everywhere, and at
all times, to prevent retrograde tissue metamorphosis, and this
goes farther to destroy the “bacilli tuberculosis,” than all the
Tuberculin ever introduced. Many cases, pronounced tubercu-
lous, properly treated osteopathically, would result in immunity
from that dread disease that now slays its millions.
The more this method is studied, the stronger will its influ-
396 OSTEOPATHIY ILLUSTRATED.
ence be felt and the more appreciated by every one. While noth-
ing but the “crack of doom” will arouse some from their profound
slumbers, there will eventually be such a mighty avalanche of
testimony presented that belief will be the result. There is a
philosophy in this method that seems to be irresistibly impressive
to rational minds. .
Special attention should be given to the removal of the
pressure in the muscles of the neck. The throat should be
thoroughly manipulated and the clavicles raised, the arms used
as levers to liberate all “chest contraction,” giving room for the
lungs to expand—full, deep inspirations enjoined several times
each day; vibratory manipulations along the carotid sheath,
stimulating the cervical and spinal nerves, removing all irritations
from the sphincter muscles; moderate out-door exercise, due
regard to cleanliness of the body, frequent sun-baths; sleep in
airy apartments and let all worry and fretting be abandoned.
Live on that sort of food that will assimilate, eat slowly and thor-
oughly masticate all food, and give the stomach a rest from eat-
ing one meal, preferably breakfast, and with a general Osteo-
pathic, mild treatment, two or three times a week, great comfort sº
may be expected, and many a case saved from a premature fun-
eral. If the uvula is elongated, have it clipped off, so as to
remove that source of pharyngeal irritation. Aim to include in
the clipping of the uvula a small portion of the muscle, then the
elongation will not recur any more. This is essential, to insure
relief from further irritation. Many are excised without this
precaution, and no good results. Remember this.
DISEASES OF ERONCHIAL TUBES.
ACUTE BRONCHITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Bronchial catarrh ; acute bronchial catarrh ;
“cold on the chest.”
DEFINITION. An acute catarrhal inflammation of the bron-
chial tubes of the larger, middle, and third size; characterized by
fever, sub-sternal pain, a feeling of thoracic constriction, oppres-
sion in breathing, and at first scanty, followed by more or less
profuse expectoration. -
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 397
CAUSEs. Most frequent in childhood, especially during the
period of dentition, when there exists a strong tendency to catarrh
of the mucous membranes in general and of the bronchi in par-
ticular. In old age the predisposition again returns. Inhalations
of irritants, such as dust, smoke, and air too hot or too cold.
More common in climates characterized by considerable moisture
of the atmosphere combined with a low temperature, and espe-
cially where there are sudden and marked variations.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. ITyperaemia of the mucous
membrane of the bronchial tubes, manifested by a diffused
redness, swelling, oedema, and diminished secretion; this is fol-
lowed by an increased secretion and overgrowth and descuama-
tion of the epithelial cells, together with a copious generation of
young cells, the expectoration then becoming of a yellowish
color (muco-purulent). As a result of the hyperaemia, rupture
of the capillaries of the mucous membrane frequently occurs,
when the slight expectoration of the first stage is streaked with
blood.
In cases of bronchitis following the exanthemata, or in
scrofulous patients, the bronchial glands participate in the inflam-
mation, they becoming hyperaemic, swollen, and filled with
secretion, and not infrequently the glandular elements undergo a
hyperplasia, and finally the “cheesy” degeneration.
SYMPTOMs. The invasion is usually characterized by the
occurrence of either nasal or laryngeal catarrh, or both, the
patient feeling chilly, followed by flushes of heat, the limbs, joints,
and even the body, are affected with pain of an aching, contused
character, and with a sense of fatigue and want of energy; there
may be a furred tongue, anorexia, and constipation. In nervous,
irritable persons, and in children, there may be slight delirium,
and often in very young children, especially during the period of
dentition, convulsions may usher in an attack. After a day or
two of these initiatory symptoms, those characteristic of bronchial
catarrh develop. Pain is experienced beneath the sternum,
especially toward its upper part, of a raw, burning, or tearing
character, aggravated by a deep inspiration or by coughing; the
pain also radiates toward the sides, following the course of the
primary bronchial tubes. Tenderness over the sternum is often
experienced. Cough from the onset, at first in paroxysms of a
hard, dry character, changing as the disease progresses, and
becoming looser, followed by free expectoration. The expector-
ation at first is small in quantity, almost transparent, frothy, and
398 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
having a salty taste, often streaked with blood. As the disease
progresses, it becomes more abundant, of a yellowish or a green-
ish-yellow color, and of a tenacious consistency. There are pres-
ent slight fever, hot, dry skin, frequent pulse, loss of appetite,
moderate thirst, and constipation. A feeling of languor and
weariness, and often considerable depression, quite out of pro-
portion to the febrile state, are not infrequent.
PERCUSSION. Normal, except in those rare cases in which
the bronchial glands are involved, when irregular spots of dull-
ness can be developed. -
AUscultATION. First stage: The bronchial membrane
being swollen and dry, the respiratory murmur is harsh or vesi-
culo-bronchial in character, associated with diffiused sonorous
and sibilant rales. Second stage: The secretion from the bron-
chial mucous membrane being increased, the respiratory mur-
mur is less harsh in character, but is associated with large and
small moist or bubbling rales. .
DIAGNoSIs. The points of resemblance and difference
between acute bronchitis and other diseases of the chest will be
pointed out when those affections are described. The association
of bronchitis with other diseases must not be forgotten.
PROGNoSIs. Acute bronchitis of the larger tubes usually
terminates in complete resolution within two weeks. In children
and in the aged, the course is more protracted, and the symptoms
more severe, but recovery is the rule. Very aged and feeble per-
sons may succumb, but it is rare.
. THE TREATMENT.
The patient lying on the back, begin treatment by placing
the fingers near together on either side of the cervical spines; pull
gently and at the same time bend the neck forward, the head back-
ward, downward, and press firmly with the ends of the fingers
on the vaso-motor area, and observe to do this without pain to
the patient. While the patient is thus lying on the back, place
one hand at the occiput and the other under the chin, make gen-
tle extension, and while extended, rotate the head to one side
about one-fourth of the circle, then, while extended, turn the head
straight; let the head rest on the table or chair, and change the
hands, and repeat the same move in the same way, observing
to press with the ends of the fingers on the neck just behind and
below the mastoid process as the head is turned in that direction;
then have the patient open the mouth as the finger on either side
presses upward in the area of the ears, then vibrate in the tem-
1011.
PLATE XXXIV.-Manipulation of Bowels for Constipat



A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 4OI
poral region, on the forehead, around the eyes, nose and face,
removing all and every vestige of congestion, then dilate the
nares; then manipulate the muscles of the neck thoroughly,
causing the patient to inhale full inspirations as movements are
made. The essential thing to do in this affection is to afford
sufficient room in the chest to fully expand the lungs. The
pressure of the fingers on the vaso-motor area is necessary to
reduce the fever and regulate arterial blood circulation. These
treatments should be very gentle, especially with children, as
repetitions will be necessary in many cases, and that for some
days. -
CAPILLARY BRONCHITIS.
SYNONYMs. Broncho-pneumonia (?); “suffocative catarrh.”
, DEFINITION. An acute catarrhal inflammation of the
mucous membrane of the terminal bronchial tubes, or bron-
chioles; characterized by fever, impeded and increased respira-
tion, impeded circulation, slight cough and scanty expectoration,
and symptoms of non-aeration of the blood.
CAUSES. Most common in childhood, following exposure to
cold or sudden changes of temperature; occurs also in the aged,
and also complicates measles, whooping cough, or any of the .
debilitating diseases. -
RATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hyperaemia, redness and swell-
ing of the lining membrane of the bronchioles, with the exuda-
tion of a tough, tenacious secretion. In those cases in which the
air cells are not involved in the inflammatory changes, the air
passes, during the act of inspiration, through the secretion, block-
ing the smaller tubes, but is prevented from escaping during the
act of expiration, the secretion in the smaller tubes acting as a
valve; the result is distention of numerous vesicles, producing a
circumscribed or diffused functional emphysema. If the secre-
tion produces complete closure of any of the smaller tubes, the
air previously drawn into the vesicles will be absorbed, causing
collapse (atelectasis).
If the inflammation extends to the alveoli of the lungs, it
produces the condition known as broncho-pneumonia, a frequent
complication in children and feeble elderly people; it is most com-
monly lobular in character, whence the term “lobular pneu-
monia.”
SYMPTOMs. Usually preceded by more or less ordinary
4O2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
bronchitis, followed by rise of temperature, Io2 degrees to Io9
degrees F., increased pulse, difficult and increased respiration,
numbering forty, fifty or sixty in the minute, with paroxysms
in which the dyspnoea is markedly aggravated, when cyanosis
rapidly develops; the tongue is coated, bowels costive, appetite
impaired, restlessness and headache.
The circulation through the lungs is impeded by the dysp-
noea, the pulse becomes feeble and flickering, and there results
general congestion of the venous system, the countenance
becomes livid, the lips and nails blue, the surface cold, and often
covered with a clanumy perspiration, the mind dull, and in children
stupor and convulsions rapidly supervene, the result of the non-
aeration of the blood. The cough is slight, but of a suppressed
character, the expectoration scanty, the patient usually swallow-
ing the sputum. When cyanosis occurs, the cough may almost
entirely cease; expectoration also ceases, death soon following
from apnoea and depression.
PERCUssion. Normal, except over those portions of the
lungs (a bilateral disease) which are in a condition of collapse,
when dullness rapidly develops and may as rapidly disappear,
changing to other portions of the lungs—shifting dullness.
AUSCULTATION. First stage, a feeble, but high-pitched,
respiratory murmur, becomes less distinct and harsh as the dis-
ease progresses. The rales in the first stage are fine whistling,
sibilant, changing in the second stage to fine bubbling or sub-
crepitant rales. The respiratory murmur is absent over the dull
3.TC21.
DIAGNOSIS. There is one point characteristic of capillary
bronchitis—it is a general or bilateral disease. Capillary bron-
chitis is often mistaken for true catarrhal pneumonia, the points of
distinction between which will be pointed out when discussing the
latter affection. a *-
PROGNoSIs. In children, on account of their inability to
expectorate, which tends to rapid collapse of the lungs, and in the
aged, the prognosis is most grave. In the strong and vigorous,
recovery follows prompt and energetic treatment.
THE TREATMENT.
Having a complete description of the affection, its peculiar
characteristics, and a typical case before us, we ought to be able
to see what to do for it. The nerves that accompany the blood
vessels come from the vagi and sympathetic, and these are pressed
upon by the contracted muscular fibers at the back of, and in front
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 403
of the neck. Interference in their action produces capillary stasis,
an interruption of lymph circulation, and congestion of the bron-
chioles is the consequence. The indications are easily seen.
Interference in the motor action of the walls of the alveoli, separ-
ation of the sympathetic and motor footlets, mean inactivity (for
the want of communication), and blood stasis becomes inevitable.
Our course to pursue in such cases is: Take off the pressure.
We do this by stimulating the vaso-motor area, and the sides of
the neck, raising the clavicles, chest walls, relieving the engorge-
ment of intercostales, stretching the neck and vibrating the mus-
cles of the neck and over the upper end of the sternum, and free-
ing the jugular veins, so as to let venous blood return to the
lungs through the heart as fast as nature demands. The livid
countenance and lips, blue nails, etc., show that circulation of the
venous blood is impeded somewhere; and that is in all of the
capillaries in the body—due to pressure on motor area, by mus-
cular contraction. This seems to a medicine prescriber a
strange sort of affairs; but it is nevertheless true, and our man-
ipulations remedy the whole difficulty very readily and satisfac-
torily.
FIBRINOUS BRONCHITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Membranous bronchitis; plastic bronchitis;
diphtheritic bronchitis; croupous bronchitis.
DEFINITION. An acute inflammation of the mucous mem-
brane of the larger and middle-sized bronchial tubes, attended
with an exudation, forming a membraniform layer, which is
closely adherent to the mucous surface; characterized by febrile
reaction, cough, difficult breathing, scanty expectoration, fol-
lowed by the expulsion of the false membrane in the form of
patches or casts.
CAUSEs. Pressure; associated with membranous laryngitis
from extension downward; asthma; emphysema; phthisis; fre-
quently result of exposure to cold or damp, in those of feeble
health or in tuberculosis (?) constitutions.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hyperaemia of the mucous
membrane of the bronchial tubes, associated with swelling and
Oedema, during which the surface is covered with a whitish or
grayish-white, firmly adherent, membranous deposit, cemented
together by a coagulable exudation, and prolonged by rootlets
from its under surface into the bronchial follicles, which sooner
4O4 OSTEOPATH Y ILLUSTRATED.
or later is loosened and detached by suppurative process, and is
expectorated after a violent fit of coughing or vomiting. When
expectorated, the false membrane, as it has been termed, has
either the form of patches or is thrown off entire from the bron-
chial tube, and may be found to consist of casts representing more
or less of the bronchial subdivisions, and presenting an appear-
ance not unlike “boiled macaroni.”
On microscopical examination, the detached membrane
presents fibrillae which characterize fibrin or lymph in other situa-
tions, and if placed in a solution of acetic acid, it becomes greatly
swollen, while ordinary mucus contracts and becomes more
dense if added to the same solution.
SYMPTOMs. There are no symptoms or signs by means of
which this variety of bronchitis can be distinguished from ordi-
nary catarrhal bronchitis, prior to the expectoration of the false
membrane. Expectoration is preceded and accompanied by vio-
lent paroxysms of coughing, and after more or less of the mem-
brane has been raised a muco-purulent expectoration, streaked
with blood, may be present for several days. -
DURATION. The inflammation may be either acute, sub-
acute, or chronic, expectoration of patches or strips of the mem-
brane being repeated at intervals of days, weeks, months, or even
years. -
PROGNoSIs. In adults, favorable, if not associated with
other grave affections, such as phthisis, pneumonia, emphysema.
In young children it may cause obstruction to the respiration,
and not unfrequently proves fatal. *
THE TREATMENT. -
The cause, according to Osteopathy, being pressure, result-
ing in capillary congestion, and that seemingly at a particular
stage and in a particular tissue, the effects manifest themselves in
a fibrinous exudation, a membranous deposit. The only rational
indication is to take off the pressure producing the difficulty. In
all throat affections there will be found a difficulty in the vaso-
motor area, and in the depressed condition of the clavicles, hence
these demand our first attention. The former should be held for
two to five minutes, to regulate the heart’s action, and arteriole
and capillary regularity, then a thorough and careful manipulation
should be given to every organ and tissue involved, the treat-
ment being especially directed to the relief of the large veins,
then the lymphatics; the removal of the pressure from the
nervous system supplying the parts affected. The chest muscles
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 405
should be fully expanded by the means used and recommended
elsewhere in such cases, raising the arms, using pressure all along *
down the dorsal region as the arm is raised and lowered. Due
attention must be paid to the throat, high up, under the lower
jaw, vibrating over the glands, the sides of and front of the neck
along carotid sheaths, stimulating the pneumogastric and phrenic
nerves, stretching the neck in a gentle manner, and rotating the
head carefully, treating the mucous membrane of the mouth and
throat each time the general treatment is given, which should be
at least once a day—more if the case needs it.
CHRONIC BRONCHITIS.
SYNONYMs. Chronic bronchial catarrh; winter cough; sec-
ondary bronchitis. r
DEFINITION. A chronic inflammation of the mucous mem-
brane of the larger and middle-sized bronchial tubes; character-
ized by cough and more or less profuse expectoration, plus, in
many cases, the symptoms of emphysema of the lungs, which is a
frequent complication. Chronic bronchitis may be either pri-
mary or secondary.
CAUSES. Primary, exposure to wet or cold, or the repeated
inhalation of dust, vapors, or other irritants. Secondary, gout,
rheumatism, syphilis, cardiac, renal, or pulmonary diseases, or
alcoholism. *
VARIETIES. I. Mucous catarrh, associated with moderate
expectoration. 2. Bronchorrhoea, profuse expectoration. 3. Dry
catarrh, scanty expectoration. 4. Fetid bronchitis. 5. Bron-
chiectasis, or dilatation of the bronchi.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The mucous membrane of the
bronchial tube is discolored, being of a more or less dull red,
often of a deeply venous hue, mingled with a grayish or brownish
color. These changes may be either in patches or extensively
diffused. The vessels of the mucous membrane are dilated. The
mucous membrane is thickened, resulting in the reduction in the
caliber of the tube and a roughening of its internal surface. The
submucous tissue becomes infiltrated, contracted, and indurated.
. The elastic and muscular coats of the tubes become hypertro-
phied, lose their elasticity, and the cartilages become the seat of
calcareous deposits. As the result of the loss of elasticity and
muscular tone of the tubes they become irregularly dilated,
“bronchial dilatation.” The dilatations may be uniform in char-
406 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
acter, resembling somewhat the fingers of a glove, or they may
be sacculated or globular, forming actual cavities in the bronchial
Structure. º
In the mucous variety the secretion consists of young cells
and mucous corpuscles, having a yellowish color; in the dry
variety the “catarrhe sec” of Laennec, or “dry bronchial irrita-
tion,” the secretion is scanty, tough, semi-transparent, and occurs
in defined globular masses; in bronchorrhoea, which is usually
associated with bronchial dilatation, the secretion is abundant,
greenish yellow in color, and often fetid.
The majority of cases of chronic bronchitis have associated
chronic gastric catarrh.
SYMPTOMs. The most characteristic symptoms of chronic
bronchitis are the cough and expectoration. The cough occurs
at all hours, but is more severe at night and early in the morning.
The cough is not always present. It disappears almost alto-
gether for a time, and then reappears, continuing thus for years.
Coated tongue, disagreeable taste, loss of appetite, impaired
digestion, with eructations of gases, are present in many cases,
due to the chronic gastric catarrh. Unless associated with other
diseases, the general health suffers but little, if at all, constitu-
tional symptoms being present only during acute exacerbations.
Mucous catarrh, or, from its occurring most commonly
during the winter months, “winter cough,” is characterized by
paroxysms of cough, more or less violent, followed by the expec-
toration of a yellowish mucus.
Dry catarrh is characterized by a harsh cough, a feeling of
soreness or rawness under the sternum, and the expectoration of
small globular masses; this variety occurs with emphysema, gout,
rheumatism, and asthma.
Bronchorrhoea, which is associated with bronchial dilatation,
and most common in the elderly, is characterized by paroxysms
of severe coughing, followed by the copious expectoration of
greenish-yellow, often fetid, mucus; the amount expectorated
often amounts to four or five pints in the twenty-four hours.
Fetid bronchitis, often associated with bronchial dilatation,
has an excessively fetid odor of the breath and expectoration.
The decomposition of the secretion may cause gangrene of the
bronchial mucous membrane, and even of the lung structure.
PERCUssion. Unless complicated with other affections, nor-
mal; if bronchial dilatation occur, there are diffused spots of the
tympanitic or amphoric percussion sound, the physical condition
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 4O7
being a circumscribed cavity containing air and communicating
with a bronchial tube.
AUSCULTATION. Harsh or vesiculo-bronchial respiration,
associated with more or less profuse, sonorous, sibilant, and large
and small bubbling rales; in bronchial dilatation, in addition to
the harsh respiration, is found broncho-cavernous breathing,
with large and small gurgling rales. If emphysema complicate
chronic bronchitis, the physical signs are somewhat modified, and
will be pointed out when discussing that affection.
DIAGNOSIS. Make it a rule to always examine the urine in
case of cough, and particularly in case of chronic bronchitis, as
this latter disease is one of the most common complications of
Bright's disease. Incipient phthisis is often confounded with
chronic bronchitis. The diagnosis is not always easy. The
physical signs of chronic bronchitis are more or less diffused
through both lungs, and not, as a rule, associated with failure of
the general health ; while in phthisis, from the onset, there is a
failing health, with a concentration of the physical signs to the
apices. The discovery of the bacillus determines the diagnosis.
PROGNOSIS. It unassociated with disease of the lungs, heart,
or kidneys, chronic bronchitis is never dangerous to life, although
the symptoms are present, more or less, continually, and aggra-
vated upon the least exposure. Rarely is a cure recorded. If
associated with phthisis, emphysema, diseases of the heart or of
the kidneys, the prognosis is governed by these affections. In
turn, it is to be remembered that chronic bronchial catarrh may
lead to emphysema of the lungs, asthma, or to cardiac dilatation.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment for this affection should consist of a general,
all-over treatment, to relieve obstructions in the circulation of the
venous blood everywhere, and a special, careful manipulation
directed to the throat and upper part of the chest. The nerves
distributed along the bronchioles must have the pressure removed
and that is best accomplished by the neck treatment, using all of
the means recommended therefor, which, in the best judgment of
the operator, seemeth proper. The jugular obstruction, caused by
depressed clavicles, the chest contraction, and pressure upon the
phrenics and the nerves that are distributed to the chest muscles,
are to be removed, the patient instructed how to inflate the lungs,
to oxygenate the blood and to maintain an erect attitude of body,
sitting erect, breathing pure air, and to especially care for the
digestive organs, the glandular system, the skin, kidneys and liver.
|
408 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The proper circulation of the blood can only be maintained by
due attention to the lungs. There must be all the room allotted
therefor, by a complete expansion of the chest, and this can not be
done in any other manner than nature has provided—and that is
through the normal action of the chest muscles. These direc-
tions seem adequate for the purpose of understanding what should
be done in all cases.
ASTHMA.
SYNONYMs. Bronchial asthma; spasmodic asthma.
DEFINITION. A paroxysmal, spasmodic contraction of the
muscular layer surrounding the smaller bronchial tubes, and per-
haps associated with a tonic spasm of the diaphragm and more
or less bronchial catarrh; characterized by spasmodic attacks of
distressing expiratory dyspnoea, continuing for several hours,
days, or weeks.
CAUSEs. A true neurosis of the respiratory apparatus. The
result of peripheral or local disturbances in the nervous system.
Chiefly hereditary. A family history of asthma, chorea, or epi-
lepsy. It sometimes is of reflex origin, starting from diseases of
the nasal mucous membrane, explaining the attacks due to inhal-
ation of various substances, as ipecac, turpentine, or irritating
dusts. Climate. Some attacks may be due to a peculiar and
characteristic disease of the bronchial mucous membrane—an
“asthmatic bronchiolitis.” Asthma is more common in men than
in women; in childhood and young adults than those of middle
life and old age; in the well-to-do and wealthy than in the poor.
SYMPTOMs. The onset of a first attack of asthma is abrupt
and sudden, the succeeding attacks being preceded by prodromes,
which the individual rapidly learns to appreciate, to-wit: coryza,
bronchial irritation, thoracic constriction, marked dyspepsia, or
the scanty passage of pale, limpid urine, the “hysterical urine.”
The paroxysm begins, in the majority of instances, in the
early morning hours or during the afternoon, with a feeling of
anguish and constriction in the chest and an intense desire for
air. The breathing is accompanied with loud wheezing, the face
is flushed, at times even cyanosed, and bathed in perspiration, the
eyes staring, the eyeballs protrude, and the muscles of the neck
become prominent as they aid in the effort for air. The dysp-
noea soon becomes so severe that the inspiration is but a gasp,
the lips are pallid, cyanosis deepens, and the patient feels as if
PLATE XXXV.-Showing the Percussion of Bowels.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 4II
death were impending. Owing to the tonic contraction of the
smaller bronchi the air drawn into the alveoli escapes imper-
fectly, resulting in the expiratory dyspnoea, the emphysematous
chest, and the lowered position of the diaphragm. After some
minutes or hours the respiration becomes easier, the air in the
lungs changes, the cyanosis disappears, and gradually the par-
oxysm ceases, the patient feeling exhausted, and the chest
fatigued. During the paroxysm there is a short, dry cough,
becoming looser as the attack subsides. The sputum of asthma
is unique. Early in the paroxysm it is raised with difficulty, and
is in the form of rounded gelatinous masses (“perles” of Laennec).
If these pellets be carefully examined they will be found to con-
sist of moulds of the smaller bronchi, and, under the microscope,
show Leyden's crystals and Curschmann's spirals. After a day
or two the sputum becomes muco-purulent, and the spirals and
crystals are absent.
The duration of an attack varies from one to many hours, or
even days. Instead of single paroxysms, slight remissions may
occur at intervals of one, two, or three hours, to be followed by
exacerbations lasting from four to six hours, continuing for a
week or two, preventing the patient lying down or taking food.
PERCUSSION. During the paroxysm, hyper-resonance over
both lungs, termed vesiculo-tympanitic, the “band-box tone” of
Bamberger, due to the retained air in the alveoli.
AUSCULTATION. First stage feeble or absent vesicular mur-
miur, with prolonged expiration associated with loud wheezing,
whistling, sibilant and sonorous rales; as the paroxysm subsides,
the vesicular breathing becomes more apparent, and is associated
with moist rales. -
PROGNOSIS. In itself asthma is not fatal to life; but if the
paroxysms are frequently repeated there results either emphy-
sema, cardiac dilatation, with subsequent dropsy, or even cerebral
hemorrhage. Attacks of asthma frequently occur as a complica-
tion in emphysema, chronic bronchitis, valvular diseases of the
heart, or Bright's disease.
THE TREATMENT.
In the treatment of this affection due regard is to be had to
the chest muscles and the nerves controlling their action. The
whole group of muscles seems to be involved, spasmodically, and
the lungs are affected the same way. Inhalation is easily made,
but exhalation seems to be the difficulty. Much has been said
and done during the last decade to relieve those afflicted with
412 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
this most distressing affection. There are certain vulnerable
points to consider, in the treatment of asthma. That it is gener-
ally the result of reflex nervous influences, observations abun-
dantly demonstrate. The methods adopted to take away the
source or sources of irritation are legion. The inhalation of vapor
from certain teas, and smoke from certain compounds, has long
been in vogue. Prof. E. H. Pratt has been remarkably success-
ful in relieving many cases orificially—by the dilation and surgical
treatment of the lower outlets of the body. The Osteopath
thinks he has the highest claims, in that his means are so much
easier carried out; to the patient especially, and the results are so
effectual and so immediate that it satisfies him, and there is no
resort to other means by him. Now what are they? The first
thing to understand is, that the sympathetic nervous system
directs and controls all action and sensation in the body, and
when properly known, and its functions comprehended, disease
becomes as easily controlled as an ordinary fire. Begin the
manipulations for a moment or two at the base of the brain, in the
upper cervical area, posteriorly, then strongly raise both arms,
pressing on either side of the spinous processes along down the
back, beginning at the level with the shoulders, pressing there
with the fingers, or with the knee pressed against the back, while
the arms are pulled strongly upward and backward, loosening the
hold and lowering the pressure in the back, for three or four
times, until the upper four or six dorsal vertebrae are passed
with the knee downward. These movements not only stimulate
the nerves of the spine, but raise all the intercostales, give vent
to accumulated secretion in the lungs, assist in exhalation at
once, and if the patient is caused to breathe deeply during these
manipulations, there is an immediate relief experienced. The
general treatment of the whole system should then be given, and
vibratory manipulations briskly and profoundly made over the
entire chest, front and rear, with the hand or hands, for several
minutes. These vibratory movements aid in removing the ob-
structed venous circulation between the ribs and intercostal mus-
cles, taking off the pressure at once. The raising of the clavicles
should be attended to, and stretching the body backward, using
pressure along the sides of spinous processes. This not only
relieves the stasis along the spine, but influences the abdominal
plexuses and aids the circulation of venous blood and lymph in
the viscera. The sphincters at the lower outlets of the body
should be seen to, and pressure removed. Treatments to be
repeated daily, or every two to four days.
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 4 IS
HAY ASTHMA.
SYNONYMS. Hay fever; autumnal catarrh; rose fever; rose
cold.
DEFINITION. An acute, specific, catarrhal inflammation of
the upper air passages, extending to the bronchial tubes, asso-
ciated with spasmodic contraction of their muscular layer occur-
ring at a particular season of the year, characterized by coryza,
croupy or wheezy cough, and a difficult respiration.
CAUSEs. A predisposition, often hereditary, of the nervous
system seems to be a strong etiological factor. Persons in whom
the predisposition exists have attacks excited by the inhalation
of the pollen of grasses, rye, corn, wheat, or roses.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hypertrophy of the inferior
and middle turbinated bones; a peculiar hyperaesthesia of the
mucous membrane covering the inferior and middle turbinated
bones, the middle meatus, the floor of the nose, and that part of
the septum below the limit of the olfactory membrane, is fre-
quently associated with the disease. -
SYMPTOMs. Begins by irritation of the eyes, severe coryza,
with sneezing, a clear, watery, nasal discharge, and congested
Eustachian tubes, rapidly extending to the larynx and bronchial
tubes, when occurs a hoarse, croupy, and wheezing cough, and
difficulty of breathing. The dyspnoea occurs in paroxysms,
which are often as severe as those occurring during a regular
asthmatic attack. There is mild depression of the nervous
system in nearly all attacks. The paroxysms remit after a few
days, returning again for several days or weeks, and again remit-
ting, the bronchial catarrh persisting for a month or more. The
constitutional symptoms are mild, unless complications occur.
CoMPLICATIONs. The affection may extend to the finer
bronchial tubes (capillary bronchitis); congestion or Oedema of
the lungs and pneumonia are not infrequent.
DURATION. Unless a change of climate is resorted to, par-
oxysms of hay fever continue more or less severe for six, eight,
or ten weeks of the year, each year the paroxysms growing more
Severe, -
PROGNoSIS. The affection never proves fatal in itself, but
one or more of the following sequelae may result, to-wit: asthma,
chronic bronchitis, or loss of the special sense of hearing or of
smelling.
4 I4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT.
Hay asthma seems to derive its source of irritation from the
olfactory nerve terminals—in the mucous membrane of the tur-
binated bone. This hypersensitiveness is due to increased
accumulation of blood, that due to muscular contraction of the
neck muscles, closing (or partially so) the jugulars; the blood
and lymph accumulate, swelling, hyperaemia ensues, reflex action
is conveyed to the bronchial tubes, thence to the lungs, the dia-
phragm; sneezing ensues; the liquor sanguinis exudes through
the walls of the ducts; chemical changes result. The removal of
venous obstruction must be effected in all of the veins return-
ing the blood of the head and face to the heart. The head and
neck treatment should be made, vibratory movements on fauces,
in the mouth, on cheeks, inner canthi of eyes, nares, temples,
1meck, angles of lower jaws; raising the clavicles, chest muscles,
ribs, arms, and pressure along the sides of the spine, while the
arms are extended, and deep inspirations made during each arm
movement. Remove all pressure from the sympathetic nerve
filaments in the sphincters. Treatments may be given every
day or two until a cure is effected. These cases will usually
obtain immediate relief, but some require persistent treatment
for several weeks.
WHOOPING COUGH.
SYNONYMS. Hooping cough ; pertussis.
DEFINITION. A convulsive, paroxysmal cough, consisting
of a number of forcible expirations, followed by a series of deep,
loud, sonorous inspirations (the whoop), repeated several times
during each paroxysm, and associated with catarrh of the bron-
chial tubes.
CAUSEs. Chiefly a disease of childhood, one attack gener-
ally removing the susceptibility; contagious; the result of an
unknown poison, perhaps atmospheric, affecting the nervous
system.
PATHOLOGY.. The changes, if any, occurring in the nervous
system are unknown. It is said that “irritation of the internal
branch of the superior laryngeal nerve produces relaxation of
the diaphragm, spasm of the glottis, and a convulsive expiration,
the series of phenomena present in a paroxysm of asthma.”
Hyperaemia of the mucous membrane of the nares, pharynx,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 415
larynx, and bronchial tubes, with diminished secretion, followed
by an increased secretion of a transparent mucus, afterward
becoming purulent, the mucous membrane pale and anaemic.
SYMPTOMs. Divided into three stages, to-wit: catarrhal,
spasmodic, and terminal.
Catarrhal Stage.—Originates in an ordinary naso-laryngo-
bronchial catarrh, with a loose cough. Duration one or two
weeks. t
Spasmodic Stage.—The cough becomes paroxysmal, con-
sisting of a succession of short, rapid expiratory efforts, the face
becoming red, the eyes swollen and protruding, the body bending
forward, and when these expiratory efforts have exhausted the
breath, they are followed by a deep, loud, crowing inspiration—
the whoop; each paroxysm being composed of three such spells,
the last one followed by the expectoration of a small amount of
tough, viscid mucus. The attacks of cough may be so severe
as to cause vomiting, and if the vomiting occur shortly after food
has been taken, the nutrition of the patient will suffer. Profuse
epistaxis is not infrequent. Duration about four weeks.
Terminal Stage.—The paroxysms recur at longer intervals,
are of shorter duration and less intensity, the catarrhal symptoms
being more marked, the expectoration freer. Duration two to
six weeks, often followed by the “cough of habit.” -
CoMPI,ICATIONS. Congestion of the lungs, capillary bron-
chitis, pneumonia, and emphysema, or rarely convulsions, hydro-
cephalus, or apoplexy.
DIAGNOSIS. During the catarrhal stage whooping cough
can not be distinguished from a common cold, but on the
advent of the characteristic whoop the diagnosis is determined.
PROGNOSIs. Depends upon the age and strength of the
patient, the severity of the paroxysms, and the presence or
absence of complications. Ordinary cases, favorable. Moder-
ately severe attacks during infancy are followed by cerebral symp-
toms, while attacks occurring in adults are followed by chest
symptoms.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment should begin with gentle pressure on the vaso-
motor area for a couple of moments, then gently stretch the mus-
cles of the neck, manipulating them from side to side (on both
sides), well up under the chin, being particularly careful to take
the pressure off of the glossopharyngeal and spinal accessory
nerves—the phrenic and pneumogastric. Then raise the clavi-
416 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cle and chest muscles, the intercostales, and pull the arms strongly
upward and backward, while the knee is placed on either side of
the upper dorsal region; or have the patient lock hands above
head, the operator raise the chest muscles by extension of the
arms while the pressure is made between the scapulae, and at
each movement of the arms the fingers pressing the dorsal termi-
nal filaments, lowering the pressure at intervals of one or two
inches each time, and going on down as far as the eighth dorsal.
The several moves to accomplish this object may be instituted as
occasion demands—so that is done. Placing the thumb on one
side of the spine, and using as hard pressure as may be while the
arm is raised and lowered, is an excellent way to relieve the chest
of engorgement. The pharynx should receive attention inside
of the mouth, with the palm of the index finger, occasionally.
The disease may be cut short very much by these and such man-
ipulations as suggest themselves to the manipulator from time
to time. Treatments should be had every day (every other day
at farthest) till relieved.
EMPHYSEM.A.
SYNONYM. Vesicular emphysema.
DEFINITION. Dilatation of, or increase in the size and capa-
city of the air vesicles, characterized by enlargement or distention
of the lungs, difficulty of breathing, especially on exertion, and
associated sooner or later with dilatation of the heart.
CAUSEs. The predisposing cause of emphysema is a heredi-
tary nutritive derangement of the lung structure, often associated
with a rigid enlargement of the thorax. The exciting cause is
the result either of a too forcible and long continued inspiration—
the theory of inspiration; or the excessive mechanical distention
of the vesicular walls by forced expiration—the theory of expira-
tion. But for either of these theories to be operative the lung
structure must be congenitally weak, for if violent respiratory
efforts alone were the essential factor, the disease would be much
more frequent. What is known as vicarious emphysema is a dis-
tention of the air cells of the healthy portion of the lung, some
other part being the seat of consolidation.
Interlobular emphysema is the presence of air in the spaces
between the lobules of the lungs underneath the pulmonary
pleura. -
PATHoLogical. ANATOMY. The situation of vesicular em-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEAL, ING. 417
physema is, in the majority of cases, the superior portions of the
chest, and is more marked on the left side than on the right.
An emphysematous lung feels remarkably soft to the touch,
and upon cutting, a dull creaking sound is barely perceptible. It
is of a pale red color, the vesicular walls are thinner and slighter,
the vesicles are greatly enlarged, sometimes to the size of a pea
or bean, and have an irregular shape, and traversing most of
these large cysts (dilated vesicles) a few delicate bands, the
remains of the lacerated interalveolar septa, are visible. With
the destruction of the septa many of the capillaries are destroyed,
whereby the emphysematous tissue is remarkably bloodless and
dry.
In consequence of the destruction of so many of the capil-
Iaries, the obstruction to the pulmonary circulation becomes so
great that the pulmonary artery and right cavities of the heart are
greatly distended; finally the muscular tissue of the heart under-
goes granular, followed by fatty degeneration. The distention of
the veins results in a general venous stasis, to-wit: nutmeg liver,
congested kidneys, and gastro-intestinal catarrh.
SYMPTOMs. The disease is often not suspected until it is
well developed. The chief symptoms of vesicular emphysema
are difficulty of breathing (dyspnoea), greatly aggravated on exer-
tion, more or less cough, the result from dilatation of the heart,
particularly cyanosis without marked distress. The discomfort
of the patient is often increased by paroxysms of asthma.
INSPECTION. The shoulders are rounded, the intercostal
spaces widened, the vertical diameter elongated, with circum-
scribed prominences between the clavicles and nipples, often
increased by the act of coughing—the peculiar “barrel-shaped”
chest, characteristic of this disease. The character of the respir-
atory movements is marked, there being but slight movement
observed on forcible respiration, the chest having the constant
appearance of a full inspiration. -
PALPATION. The vocal fremitus is diminished, and the
cardiac impulse depressed and nearer to the sternum.
PERCUSSION. The resonance is increased (hyper-resonant)
over all the emphysematous portions, and if the whole lung be
involved, extends to the seventh or eighth rib anteriorly and to
the twelfth rib posteriorly. The hepatic dullness may not begin
until the inferior margin of the ribs is reached; the cardiac dull-
ness is lessened, on account of the emphysematous lung nearly
covering the heart.
418 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
AUSCULTATION. The vesicular murmur is weakened, and in
pronounced cases almost absent. If bronchitis be present, the
inspiratory sound may be rough or sibilant in character, but its
duration is always shortened. Expiration is always prolonged,
and if bronchitis be present, may be associated with more or
less pronounced moist or bubbling rales. The first sound of the
heart is lessened in intensity and duration, the second sound being
sharply accentuated.
DIAGNOSIS. Bronchitis is distinguished from emphysema
by the absence of dyspnoea, hyper-resonance of the chest,
changes in its shape, size and movements, and the disturbance
of the circulation. Spasmodic asthma by the paroxysmal char-
acter of the affection, emphysema being a permanent malady,
with attacks of asthma. Cardiac diseases due to other causes
than emphysema do not have the characteristic physical signs of
that affection.
PROGNOSIS. Vesicular emphysema is essentially a chronic
disease. In itself it rarely proves fatal, but if aggravated, from
any cause, or if associated with frequent or prolonged asthmatic
paroxysms, the cardiac changes are hastened, general dropsy
supervenes, death occurring from exhaustion, or, more com-
monly, as the result of intercurrent attacks of pneumonia.
- THE TREATMENT.
The general treatment is needed in this affection, and espe-
cially the knee and pull-back arm treatment, the sitting erect and
normal breathing. Due attention should be given to the treat-
ment of the phrenics, the pneumogastric and spinal accessory
nerves. Take off the pressure by stimulating the vaso-motor
area, and give special treatment to the brachial region; and watch
the glandular systems and sphincter muscles, and treat them as
indicated. The relief of the jugular pressure aids greatly in
relieving the excessive air in the interlobular spaces. Study the
cases carefully and institute treatment according to the condi-
tions demanded. It may require several weeks’ treatment to
bring about a normal condition.
HAEMOPTYSIS.
SYNoNYMs. Bronchial hemorrhage; broncho-pulmonary
hemorrhage; bronchorrhagia.
DEFINITION. The expectoration of pure or unmixed blood,
usually of a bright red color, following the act of coughing.
PLATE XXXVI.-Showing Vibratory Movement of Viscera.


A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING.. " 42 I
CAUSEs. In the majority of cases, the result of tubercular
deposition in the walls of the minute bronchial arteries; excessive
cardiac action; bronchial congestion; excessive bodily exertion,
straining, lifting, or running; a symptom of haemophilia (“bleed-
er's disease”).
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Haemoptysis rarely causes
death in itself, so that few opportunities for observing post-
mortem appearances are obtained, and when they do occur, the
location of the hemorrhage is seldom found.
The air passages are more or less filled with clotted blood,
the mucous membrane is swollen, and of a dark red color; rarely,
pale and bloodless. The air cells contain blood clots, or are
distended with air, the bronchi being filled with clots, preventing
its escape. Unless the clots are rapidly removed by expectora-
tion or absorption, a secondary inflammation develops around
about them. .
SYMPTOMs. “Spitting of blood” occurs suddenly; rarely, it
is preceded by epistaxis, cardiac palpitation, and some difficulty
of breathing. It begins with a sensation of warmth under the
sternum, tickling in the throat, a sweetish taste in the mouth,
which, when attempting to remove by the act of coughing, a
warm, saltish, bright red, frothy liquid gushes from the mouth
and nose. The quantity of blood raised varies from an ounce to
a pint. The appearance of the blood depresses the individual, he
becoming pale, tremulous, often fainting. The attack may sub-
side within half an hour to several hours, returning for several
days, in the meantime the expectoration being either bloody or
streaked with blood. A slight febrile reaction, with chest pains,
supervenes upon the hemorrhage, the result of the inflammation
at the site of the bleeding, which soon subsides, except where
blood clots develop a secondary pneumonia, which may undergo
the cheesy metamorphosis.
AUSCULTATION. Coarse, bubbling rales are heard in cir-
cumscribed portions of the chest.
DIAGNOSIS. From epistaxis, or hemorrhage from the pos-
terior nares, it is distinguished by the absence of air bubbles and
an-inspection of the fauces and the nasal cavities. sº
Haematemesis, or hemorrhage from the stomach, differs
from haemoptysis in the blood being vomited instead of expector-
ated, of a dark color, clotted, mixed with the acid contents of the
stomach, followed with black, tar-like stools, and the absence
of rales in the chest,
422 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Exceptions to the above occur when the blood from the
lungs is first swallowed and afterward raised by vomiting, or when
the hemorrhage in the stomach is caused by the erosion of a
large artery, the result of ulcer of the stomach; in these cases,
however, the raising of blood is preceded by epigastric pain and
the blood is not frothy.
PROGNOSIS. Haemoptysis in itself rarely terminates fatally,
although causing much depression; the patient rapidly recovers,
unless secondary pneumonia results. In nine cases out of ten it
is the diagnostic sign of phthisis.
THE TREATMENT.
Perfect rest in bed, the head and shoulders elevated, and
perfect quiet, the diet to be bland, and drinks cool, the patient
swallowing small particles of ice. Common salt, dissolved in the
mouth and swallowed, is a popular remedy, and if of no real ben-
efit, serves to occupy the attention of the patient and friends. The
treatment should begin by holding the vaso-motor area for three
to five minutes, and during the last of said pressure, place the
hand on the forehead and counter-press, and with the finger tips
press upward against the under edge of the occiput on either side
of the axis for a moment or two, gently tipping the head back-
ward. The same result may be accomplished with the arm
placed under the chin of the subject, and stretching the neck
upwards and using pressure on the upper back of the neck area.
Then raise the clavicles while the arm is extended (both sides).
See that the jugulars are freed from clavicular pressure; raise
the chest muscles steadily, either one or both sides. The above
treatments, one or all of them, at the one sitting, until relief is
obtained. The subsequent treatments should be especially
directed to taking off the pressure from the parts affected—the
bronchioles—keeping the veins all free around the neck, and
stimulate the dorsal area anteriorly and posteriorly, and on the
sides by arm movements and vibratory manipulations. The
latter will be greatly beneficial if continued for several minutes at
each sitting. The knee and chest treatments should be made
with extreme care and mildness at the first. The element phos-
phate of iron would be a good adjuvant in such conditions, and
for extreme exhaustion, Kalii phos. These elements are lost
when the hemorrhage occurs. General, light treatment should
be given every other day.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 423
DISEASES OF THE LUNGS.
CONGESTION OF THE LUNGs.
SYNONYMs. Pulmonary engorgement; hypostatic conges-
tion. -
DEFINITION. An increase in, or abnormal fullness of, the
capillaries of the air cells; active congestion when the result of an
accelerated circulation; passive congestion when caused by an
impeded outflow from the capillaries.
CAUSES. Active.—Increased cardiac action; over-exertion;
alcoholic excesses; mental excitement; inhalation of cold or hot
air. Passive.—Obstruction to the return circulation. Dilated
heart; valvular diseases; low fevers (hypostatic congestion);
Bright's disease. -
PATHOLOGY. The hyperaemic lung has a bloated, dark red
appearance; its vessels are distended to the uttermost, the tissues
succulent and relaxed; blood flowing freely over the cut surface;
a bloody, frothy liquid is present in the bronchi; and the alveolar
walls are so much swollen that the condensed lung shows scarcely
any indication of its cellular structure, resembling the tissue of
the spleen (splenification).
SYMPTOMs. Active.—Rapidly developing thoracic distress
and difficulty of breathing, flushed face, strong, full pulse, throb-
bing carotids, cardiac palpitation, and congested eyes, with a
short, dry cough, followed by scanty, frothy expectoration,
slightly streaked with blood. Passive.—Developed slowly, with
difficulty of breathing, blueness of the surface, almost continuous
hacking cough, followed by scanty, blood-streaked expectoration.
PERCUssion. The resonance of the lungs slightly dimin-
ished, the quality of the sound being somewhat tympanitic.
AUSCULTATION. The vesicular murmur is diminished and
accompanied with subcrepitant rales. -
DURATION. Active.—Usually from three to five days, ter-
minating either by resolution, hemorrhage, or, rarely, pneu-
monia. The onset may be so severe and overwhelming that
death rapidly supervenes. Passive.—Developed slowly, and is
subject to great variations, depending upon the cause.
DIAGNosrs. Active congestion of the lungs can not be dis-
tinguished from the stage of engorgement of a true pneumonia.
PROGNoSIs. An acute congestion of the lungs may prove
424 osteopathy ILLUSTRATED.
fatal within a few hours, but under prompt treatment it generally
terminates favorably.
THE TREATMENT.
Freedom of the circulation of the blood in the upper portion
of the body should be the first thing to seek. The general
treatment is the proper one to institute. Free the neck muscles
and intercostal muscles of venous pressure. The clavicles are to
be elevated, and the arms drawn strongly upward and backward,
the patient directed to inhale all the air the lungs will conifort-
ably hold as each move is made, to free the chest pressure. The
venae azigos, major and minor, demand attention, hence treat-
ment down the back from the fifth cervical to the eighth dorsal
on both sides of the spine; and pulling of the arms strongly as
permissible without producing pain, should be done, endeavoritig
to remove all the constricture of the chest, to give ample room
for lung expansion. The manipulatory vibrations on the chest
walls assist in removing the intercostal congestion that is holding
the chest muscles and rendering them immobile. Take off the
pressure everywhere, and require systematic exercise in breathing
at stated periods, several times at a sitting, every two to four
hours. In this condition treatment between the shoulders
becomes one of the essentials. Stimulate the diaphragm and
spine, and effect a general liberatién of obstructions all over the
body. Treatments repeated every four to six hours, gently, and
after relief is obtained, as often as required.
OEDEMA OF THE LUNGS.
SYNoNYM. Pulmonary oedema.
DEFINITION. An exudation of serum into the pulmonary
interstitial tissue and the alveoli of the lungs; characterized by
dyspnoea, cough, and a frothy, blood-streaked expectoration.
CAUSEs. Pulmonary oedema is the result of stasis, occur-
ring when the outflow of venous blood in the lung meets an
obstacle that can not be overcome by the right ventricle, as in
cardiac diseases, in which the left ventricle fails. Bright's dis-
ease; alcoholic excesses, causing cardiac depression. Sequelae
to other lung inflammations. -
PATHOI.OGICAL ANATOMY. The lung tissue is swollen, and
does not collapse when the chest is open. The elasticity of the
tissue has disappeared, and it pits upon pressure. If following
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 425
congestion of the lungs, the color is red; if a symptom of a gen-
eral dropsy, its color is pale. On cutting into the oedematous
spots an enormous quantity of albuminous fluid, sometimes clear,
at other times of a red color, mixed more or less with blood, flows
over the cut surface. The liquid is filled with bubbles, is frothy,
from being copiously mixed with air, providing the air cells have
mot been entirely filled with serum, thereby excluding the air.
SYMPTOMs. The pre-eminent symptom is dyspnoea, the
breathing being hurried, labored and rattling, all the accessory
muscles of respiration being called into action. The sense of
oppression and anxiety is extreme. There is also a constant,
harassing, short cough, and the expectoration is a blood-streaked,
frothy mucus. The action of the heart may be tumultuous or
feeble. The face is at first flushed, but as the left ventricle fails,
or if the effusion into the air cells be sufficient to prevent the
entrance of air, symptoms of cyanosis rapidly supervene, the pulse
becoming feeble, the surface cold, the breathing shallow and hur-
ried, the cough suppressed, stupor replacing the restlessness, soon
deepening into coma. -
PERCUSSION. If no other lung disease, the percussion note
is but slightly, if at all, impaired.
AUSCULTATION. The vesicular murmur is lost by the dif-
fused subcrepitant and bubbling rales.
DIAGNOSIS. Acute pneumonia in the earlier stages is the
only condition likely to be confounded with oedema of the lungs,
but as the two diseases progress, the picture of pulmonary
Cedema is so characteristic that it can not be mistaken.
PROGNOSIS. Grave, and particularly if occurring in pneu-
monia, cardiac, or Bright's disease. In the majority of instances
it is a terminal symptom coming on in all forms of acute and
chronic diseases. -
THE TREATMENT.
Every indication points to compression of the chest muscles.
The lungs are compressed perhaps, from a contraction of the pec-
toral and all of the intercostales, sub-claviculae, and more than
likely the muscles of the neck are drawn tightly over the veins of
the neck (the jugulars), hence the indications are to take off the
pressure. Placing one hand at the side of the neck, the fore-
finger free, and three fingers in such a position that, by raising the
arm the fingers are made to press the clavicle outward, and raise
the chest muscles, taking off the pressure and so relieving the
lungs, heart and diaphragm that the patient feels entirely relieved.
426 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
After this the general treatment should be given, beginning at the
neck. It will be found necessary to equalize every particle of the
circulating fluid in the body so as afford opportunity to oxygen-
ate the blood. . -
To stand by and see a person smother to death in order to
observe a phenomenon resulting from pressure is surely repre-
hensible, when we have the ability to afford immediate relief—
Surely unworthy the high position that the physician should occu-
py. There is no indication for medicine. Then, when there is a
means always at hand for relief, why let prejudice close the oppor-
tunity, and witness imminent dissolution and inexpressible agony
while death is encircling its victim 2 Osteopathy proves its effi-
cacy in these cases most satisfactorily, if properly applied.
Repeat general treatment every two to six hours.
CROUPOUS PNEUMONIA.
SYNONYMs. Lobar pneumonia; pneumonitis; fibrinous
pneumonia; pleuro-pneumonia; lung fever; winter fever.
DEFINITION. An acute, infectious, croupous inflammation,
involving the vesicular structure of the lungs, rendering the
alveoli impervious to air; characterized by a severe chill, head-
ache, fever, thoracic pain, dyspnoea, cough, rusty sputum, and
great prostration.
CAUSEs. Croupous pneumonia is an infective disease caused
by the diplococcus pneumoniae of Fraenkel, “which has its seat
of election in, and produces its chief effects on, the lung.” All
ages liable. Males more frequently affected than females. One
attack predisposes to another. Debilitating causes render indi-
viduals more susceptible. Alcoholism is one of the most frequent
predisposing factors. It is most frequent in winter, at times
occurring epidemically, the result of atmospheric conditions; ex-
posure to draughts and cold. Gout, rheumatism, diabetes, and
Bright's disease. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The most frequent seat of
croupous pneumonia is the lower right lobe; the next most fre-
quent seat is the lower left lobe; the next, the upper right lobe,
although in children and the aged this lobe is affected equally as
often as the right lower lobe. The changes are: I. Hyperaemia
(engorgement); 2. Exudation (red hepatization); 3. Resolution
(gray hepatization); or it may undergo purulent transformation
or the development of abscesses (yellow hepatization).
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 427
I. Stage of hyperaemia, or engorgement, consists in the ves-
sels of the alveoli being distended to their utmost, encroaching
upon the cavity of the air vesicle; the lung has a reddish brown
color, is heavier, sinking somewhat lower in water than a normal
lung, and having a slight exudation upon the vesicular surface.
The same changes are perceived in the adjacent bronchioles.
2. Stage of exudation, consists in the exudation of a viscid,
fibrinous fluid, admixed with white and red corpuscles and blood,
which rapidly coagulate, firmly inclosing the corpuscles and
completely filling the alveoli. When the exudation and coagula-
tion are completed, the lung is red, sinks at once when placed in
water, and its elasticity is destroyed. When cut into, the color,
density, and granular appearance so closely resemble the cut
surface of a section of the liver, that Laennec termed it red hepa-
tization. A thin section shows under the microscope, as a rule,
the lancet-shaped diplococcus of Fraenkel, as well as staphylo-
cocci and streptococci.
3. Resolution, or gray hepatization, follows the above con-
dition in the majority of cases, the coagulated albuminous exuda-
tion undergoing liquefaction and absorption, the cellular element
undergoing a fatty degeneration, the greater part being absorbed,
the remainder expelled during acts of expectoration, the alveoli
returning to their normal condition, both as to capacity, function
and elasticity.
If resolution be retarded and portions of the coagulated exu-
dation undergo purulent transformation, changing from a yellow-
ish to a greenish yellow color (yellow hepatization), pus cells are
rapidly formed, the part becoming a granular, fatty mass. The
portions of the lung not undergoing this purulent transformation
retain the reddish color with intermixed yellowish patches, the
lung structure proper remaining intact. The purulent contents
may be ejected in part, the remainder undergoing fatty degener-
ation and finally absorption.
Abscess of the lung may result from the lung structure
becoming involved in the purulent disintegration. Abscesses
may be solitary or in great numbers, which by disintegration of
intervening structure form one or more large abscesses; these
abscesses either terminate fatally, or open into the pleural cavity,
causing empyema and exhaustion, or open into the bronchi and
are expectorated, or an interstitial pneumonia is developed and
the abscess encapsulated in a firm cicatricial tissue.
Gangrene of the lungs may result from blocking up of the
428 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
bronchial or pulmonary arteries by coagula during any stage of
the disease.
The uninflamed portions of the lungs are hyperaemic and
their functional activity is increased. .
Death sometimes results from a general oedema of the unaf-
fected lung, such cases being often erroneously termed “double
pneumonia.”
If inflammation of the pleura be associated with a pneumonia
the so-called pleuro-pneumonia, the changes in the pulmonary
pleura are characteristic. “An uneven, thin, downy-looking
layer of plastic exudation covers its surface. This plastic layer
may conceal the liver brown color of the pneumonic lung. As
the third stage is reached, the opposing surfaces of the pleura
may become agglutinated. The pleuritic changes follow very
closely those which occur within the lung. The cells in the
pleuritic exudation are mainly pus. The pleuritic membrane is
opaque, congested, and ecchymotic. It may become so thick
as to give a dull note on percussion, after resolution is reached.”
Duration of Stages.—Stage of congestion, from one to three
days; stage of exudation, from three to seven days; stage of reso-
lution, from one to three weeks. In severe cases or in the very
young, the aged, or the depressed, the stage of red hepatization
may be fully developed within forty-eight hours.
SYMPTOMs. Begins with a severe and usually protracted
chill (in children often convulsions, adults vomiting), followed
by a rapid rise of temperature, IO3-IO4 degrees F., a strong, full,
but rapid pulse, soon showing evidences of embarrassed cardiac
action from obstructed respiratory circulation, either a dull or
sharp pain near the nipple, aggravated by pressure, breathing, or
coughing, shortness of breath, the inspiration short and superfi-
cial, the expiration accompanied with a moan or grunt, the
number of respirations increasing to 40, 50 or more per minute,
causing interrupted speech, the ratio between pulse and respira-
tion may be I to 2 or more; cough, first short, ringing, and harsh,
soon followed by a scanty, frothy mucus, soon becoming semi-
transparent, viscid, and tenacious, about the second day changing
to the familiar rusty sputum, becoming more copious and of a
yellow color as the disease advances; rarely cases occur with
bloody or blood-streaked sputum during the continuance of the
fever. There are present headache, sleeplessness, rarely delirium,
save in drunkards, epistaxis, flushed countenance, and especially
Over the malar bones is a well-defined mahogany blush; gastric
PLATE XXXVII.-Manner of Treating the Soft Palate.

p ----• • • • • •-* - --• • •* * *----• ·|-
*-
*|-?«»
*
, ！ ，& |-+ |-
<'«. -�
* …»
• ! '-
+» . '
* *· -
|-*��
• .
-4 °. ***→�•|-
-«»»
*ą，
*u
|-* -*'*
•-•**
*'*' ）,-
*�
→|-a.-|-→*-►
- }*ş-
|-|- - -|--» º « *
ș�
«»s.-
*ł º -|-.*
w.**·
**4--
* , ,！»
-'w
<！--«
ș→
-· *，*
+•+--~
|-■→·
* e\*
§ 3*
*.……
wº-i *
ș .|-→|- →
*••-
-, ！- -·
-, ，** *
-ș
- *·*|-!-
±, ！ -|-• ... ！- --··
+& ----* * ** •ș|-
·• ?, ,{|----*.
*. ^tr• * * . --* , ,· ！
→·*· * …«<, **…?►.- ----|--
→•|-'.• •·~
- • • •|-•-*
• ,- •*•
*.* .... *
|- •∞-ſº «· *
--> *!→ ·→·** ,· *∞• |- *
# ！----· -*ſ- +- ı- ſą*
- -‘ –-•,-Ķ-�* • •--
|-* ·-� |--* …
•|--· %• ..·→（ ` ）.• •*- »
-Y»*4·-→s• ! '- -' .
•4• ** -→
-••±·|--





A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 43 I
disturbances and scanty, high-colored urine, with diminished
chlorides, and often albuminuria. From the very onset of the
disease the prostration is of the most serious character. The
above symptoms continue more or less marked until either the
fifth, seventh, ninth, or eleventh day, when a crisis occurs, and
within twenty-four hours convalescence is established, recovery
rapidly following.
Typhoid pneumonia is a term applied to those cases which
are accompanied by signs of extreme prostration, delirium,
tremor, very high temperature, and profuse and prolonged exuda-
tion. They may also terminate by a crisis.
Bilious pneumonia occurs in cases accompanied by conges-
tion of the liver, the result of venous stasis from pulmonary
obstruction or from an accompanying acute catarrhal jaundice.
In malarial districts pneumonia and malaria are often associated,
when jaundice more or less pronounced occurs. Such cases are
termed malarial or intermittent pneumonia.
Alcoholic, or pneumonia of the intemperate, has one very
characteristic symptom, to-wit: early delirium. In pneumonia
generally the mind is clear when all the conditions are unfavor-
able. Pneumonia of the intemperate may begin with symptoms
closely resembling an attack of delirium tremens, cough, expec-
toration, and pain being very slight, or even absent.
If purulent infiltration follow the stage of red hepatization,
instead of the crisis, symptoms of exhaustion occur, with pro-
fuse purulent expectoration, high temperature, severe sweats, the
tongue brown and dry, sordes collecting on the teeth, low delir-
ium, feeble pulse, rapid, rattling breathing, the recovery slow and
convalescence tedious. - e
Pneumonia in the aged or the insane may be latent, coming
on without chill or pain, and with only a slight fever; the cough
and expectoration are slight, physical signs ill-defined and
changeable, and the constitutional symptoms out of all propor-
tion to the amount of lung involved.
INSPECTION. First Stage.—Deficient movement of the
affected side, due to pain. Second Stage.—The healthy side rises
normally, the affected side lagging behind. If both lower lobes
are impervious to air, the diaphragm can not descend and the
epigastrium does not project during inspiration, the breathing
being conducted by the upper part of the chest (superior costal
respiration).
PALPATION. First Stage.—The vocal fremitus more distinct
432 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
than normal. Second Stage.—The vocal fremitus is markedly
exaggerated, except in those rare instances of occlusion of the
bronchi by secretion. The cardiac impulse is felt in the normal
position. *
PERCUSSION. First Stage.—The percussion note is slightly
impaired, indeed, at times having a hollow or tympanitic quality.
Second Stage.—Dullness over the affected parts, with an
increased sense of resistance. .#
AUSCULTATION. First Stage.—Over affected part, feeble
vesicular murmur, associated with the true vesicular or crepitant
(crackling) rale, most distinct during inspiration. Second
Stage.—Harsh, high-pitched, bronchial respiration, at times re-
sembling a to-and-fro metallic sound, except in those rare
instances in which the bronchi are more or less filled with secre-
tion. Bronchophony, or distinctly transmitted voice, at times
pectoriloquy, or distinct transmission of articulated sounds, is
present. Third Stage.—Breathing changing from bronchial to
vesiculo-bronchial, the crepitant (crepitatio redux) rale returning,
and if resolution proceed, the breath sounds are associated with
large and small moist and bubbling rales.
“The morbid phenomena, physical signs, and symptoms of
the malady correspond usually in this manner” (Da Costa):
I. Stage of engorgement Crepitant rale; slight Cough; beginning dysp-
and beginning of percussion dullness. noea and rapidly devel-
exudation. oped fever heat.
II. Stage of solidifieation Percussion dullness; Rusty-colored sput um,
of lung tissue (red bronchial respiration; dyspnoea; cough; high
hepatization). bronchophony. fever with marked even-
ing exacerbations and
morning remissions.
III. Stage of softening Same physical signs as in Chills; prostration, etc.,
(g ray he pati z - second stage unless large purulent or brownish
ation). abscesses have formed. sputum; generally high
temperature.
TERMINATIONs. Asthenic cases recover within two weeks.
When purulent infiltration supervenes, the disease pursues a
tedious course of several weeks’ duration, with a low exhaustive
fever. If death occur during the first or second stages it is
usually the result of a collateral oedema of the uninflamed lung,
or cardiac failure and impaired nerve force. If abscesses occur,
there are exhausting sweats, frequent cough, with a large amount
of yellowish-gray, at times blood-streaked, expectoration. Can-
grene of the lungs is a rare termination; it is associated with
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 433
symptoms of collapse, the expectoration of a blackish, fetid
sputum, and the physical signs of a pulmonary cavity.
DIAGNoSIS. CEdema of the lungs may be confounded with
the first stage of pneumonia, but the subsequent history, its pres–
ence on both sides, and the waterish expectoration and absence
of chill and pain and the physical signs of pneumonia soon deter-
mine the diagnosis. Pleurisy is oftener confounded with pneu-
monia than any other disease, the points of distinction between
which will be pointed out when discussing that affection.
COMPLICATIONS. Acute pleuritis is a frequent complication
of croupous pneumonia, occurring as often as from ten to twen-
ty-five per cent. of cases. The more acute localized pain, the
greater embarassment of respiration, and the usual physical
signs of effusion are the evidences of a pleuro-pneumonia. Capil-
lary bronchitis is a rare but dangerous complication. Pericar-
ditis, rheumatism, and gout are rare complications.
PROGNoSIs. Depends upon the extent of the inflammation,
the dangerous features of croupous pneumonia being cardiac
failure, the result of a myocarditis or of embarrassed respiratory
circulation, and the rapid tissue waste associated with extreme
fever, IoS degrees, resulting in impaired nerve force; double
pneumonia has a very grave prognosis, but it is not nearly so
frequent as was at one time supposed. The co-existence of pleu-
ritis adds to the gravity of the prognosis, although not as fatal as
generally supposed. Pneumonia of drunkards almost invariably
terminates fatally. Typhoid pneumonia, pneumonia of the aged
and in the insane, the so-called bilious pneumonia, purulent infil-
tration, abscesses of the lungs and gangrene, all give a grave
prognosis.
THE TREATMENT.
When the picture of consequences is observed, in the various
stages of this affection, is it not plainly to be seen that venous
circulation stands as the only cause of this affection? Watching
its various stages, until finally purulent infiltration supervenes,
who, with a knowledge of the science of Osteopathy, can but cen-
sure the course usually pursued by the medicine dependents for
relief—when there is not a single effort made to take off the
pressure, that the patient be relieved from this most distressing
condition, and arrest consequences that must, with the pressure
continued, follow P As the contraction tightens down on all of the
nerves that control the circulation, is it any wonder that their
functions should cease, and stasis come to every tube controlled
434 OSTEO PATHY ILLUSTRATED.
thereby ? Every stifled breath and every piercing pain call for
help to lift off the pressure. Instead of that the medicine doctor
pours his mixtures into the stomach, or hypodermically, expect-
ing favorable results, when his poor victim is suffering the very
tortures of the “damned” while trying to live. The stereotyped
routinism of the ages has entailed untold misery and slain more
than famine, pestilence and sword. The idea of taking off the
pressure has not once entered the citadel of thought of the never-
SO-wise-appearing “assisters,” called doctors. It seems like the
minds of men have been surreptitiously inveigled so long that
freedom is obscured. The apparatus (lungs) for manufacturing
pure blood, to build up healthy tissue, is interfered with in the
disease under consideration, and the important thing to be done is
to reinstate their functions. Capillary congestion, due to press-
ure, either on the venous system that carries the blood out of the
lungs, or on the nervous system that controls the peristalsis of
the muscular walls of the blood-vessels, causes the difficulty. The
cerebro-spinal nervous system most likely is where the difficulty
lies. Cold, compressing the muscular fiber around the terminal
filaments in the upper dorsal area, prevents normal reflexes to the
brain, thence through the pneumogastric and the sympathetic to
the lungs, and the contraction of the chest muscles obstructs the
return blood through the veins; hence the carbonic oxide in-
creases, tissue changes ensue, decomposition starts up, poisons
accumulate, the normal action is interfered with, blood accumu-
lates in the capillaries and inter-capillary tissue. CEdema is the
result. The most forcible indication points to “taking off the
pressure.” This is done by following the general directions for
freedom of the circulation. These are simple, and a general
knowledge of the anatomy of the system gives assurance to the
operator that accomplishment is certain in all such cases, where
too much tissue change has not already occurred. We therefore
begin at the vaso-motor area, give thorough general treatment,
using the limbs as levers to lift the weights. Gently stretching
the spinal nervous system by the hands under the chin and at the
occiput accomplishes the object most admirably. All of the
neck manipulations should be carefully, profoundly, thoroughly
made first; the clavicles and arms gently but strongly raised, the
arms extended sidewise and slightly upward as the finger ends are
pressed firmly on the side of the upper dorsal spine, and the
patient induced to deeply inhale at the same time. This tends
to, and does, free the capillary congestion of the lungs, oxygenate
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 435
the blood and increase general circulation. The spine is to be
stimulated by the vibratory sudden moves along each side of the
processes, and lifting upward and outward, the muscular struc-
ture clear down the back. The entire general treatment should
be given as far as possible each time, and treatment may be given
at short intervals until decided amelioration ensues. The manip-
ulations tend to increase the secretions for a short time, and the
expectoration shows activity until the accumulation is expelled.
Where hepatization results beforé osteopathic treatment is ap-
plied, a continuation or the institution of these manipulations soon
removes the difficulty, and air begins to permeate the tissue, re-
generation begins, health results. Foreign substances in the way
of drugs do nothing but load the blood with impurities. The
proper application of the principles of Osteopathy, as indicated
and pointed out, satisfies patient and friends that Osteopathy is
the sine qua non.
CATARRHAL PNEUMONIA.
SYNONYMs. Broncho-pneumonia; lobular pneumonia;
capillary bronchitis (?).
DEFINITION. An acute catarrhal inflammation of the
bronchioles and alveoli of the lungs, characterized by fever,
cough, dyspnoea, copious expectoration, and great depression.
CAUSEs. From an extension of a bronchial catarrh down-
ward; following the eruptive fevers, especially measles; compli-
cating whooping cough. Persons of the rickety or scrofulous
diathesis, in whom there is a greater irritability of the epithelial
elements, are particularly predisposed to this form of pneumonia
on slight exposure; emphysema; diseases of the heart; most fre-
quently seen in childhood and old age. Bacteriological investi-
gations seem to indicate that secondary broncho-pneumonia is
due to more than one germ.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hyperaemia of the mucous
membrane of the bronchi, extending to the connective tissue of
the bronchioles and accompanying arterioles and to the alveoli,
with swelling and succulence of these tissues, accompanied by an
abnormal secretion and an immense production of young cells
from the proliferation of the bronchial and alveolar epithelium,
admixed with a yellowish, creamy, mucoid material, which blocks
up the bronchioles and air cells. The affected parts first have
a reddish-gray, soon changing to a yellowish-gray color, due to
436 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the rapid metamorphosis of the newly developed ceils. If the
fatty change be completed, absorption takes place, and the con-
solidation is removed; if it remain incomplete the cells atrophy,
the little mass becoming caseous, and the disease passes into a
chronic state. The bronchial tubes also participate in the dis-
ease, the walls become thickened, from a hyperplasia of the con-
nective tissue (peri-bronchitis), and their caliber is often dilated.
SYMPTOMs. Catarrhal pneumonia begins as a catarrhal
bronchitis. It may be either acute, subacute, or chronic in its
CO111 Se.
Acute Variety.—Its onset is announced by a gradual rise of
temperature to Io2-103 degrees F., the febrile phenomena assum-
ing a typical remittent character, with rapid, laborious, and shal-
low breathing, as shown by the widely dilated nares and violent
action of all the accessory muscles, while the insufficient disten-
tion of the lungs is shown by the great recession of the lower
part of the chest walls and sinking in of the intercostal spaces.
The inspiration is short and imperfect, the expiration noisy and
prolonged; the pulse is frequent, IOO-I2O or more, and somewhat
compressible; the cough, which, during the bronchitis, was loose,
now becomes short, hacking, dry, and painful, soon followed by
more or less copious muco-purulent expectoration; the appetite
is impaired, bowels somewhat loose, urine scanty, high-colored,
and the surface frequently covered with more or less profuse
perspiration. -
The subacute and chronic varieties have the same general
symptoms, but the duration is longer and the exhaustion greater.
The progress of catarrhal pneumonia is sometimes, although
not often, a very acute one. The disease may prove fatal in a
few days, especially if it attack feeble children; in such the coun-
tenance becomes pale and livid, the lips bluish, the eyes dull, and
a restlessness giving place to apathy, and a continually augmented
somnolence. Resolution, when it occurs, is by lysis, several
weeks elapsing before complete recovery.
PERCUssion. Dullness, scattered in patches, over both
lungs, the intervening healthy lung often giving a more or less
hollow or tympanitic note.
AUSCULTATION. Vesiculo-bronchial breathing, changing to
moist bronchial breathing, associated with small bubbling (sub-
crepitant) rales. As the disease progresses toward resolution,
the rales become larger (large bubbling) and more copious. If
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 437
pneumonic phthisis result, physical signs indicative of that con-
dition are soon evident. $
SEQUELE. Attacks of catarrhal pneumonia complicated
with atelectasis, or collapse of the lobules, when recovery occurs,
are followed by emphysema of the lungs. If the catarrhal
products which fill the alveoli and bronchioles and intervening
connective tissue do not rapidly undergo complete fatty meta-
morphosis and consequent absorption, pneumonic phthisis results.
DIAGNoSIs. Ordinary bronchial catarrh differs from catar-
rhal pneumonia by the absence of dyspnoea, fever, and dullness
on percussion, and the presence of the large bubbling rales, and
also by the subsequent history of the two affections.
Croupous pneumonia is a unilateral disease; catarrhal pneu-
monia is bilateral and diffused over both lungs; the former a
self-limited disease, the latter having no fixed duration.
Acute tuberculosis at its onset is characterized by the pres–
ence of a capillary bronchitis, a differentiation being possible only
by a study of the clinical history and course of the two maladies
and the presence or absence of the tubercular bacilli.
CEdema of the lungs is a bilateral disease associated with a
short, dry cough, and dyspnoea, but lacks the previous catarrhal
history and high temperature of catarrhal pneumonia.
PROGNoSIs. Fully one-half of the cases of true catarrhal
pneumonia terminate fatally. The prognosis must be guarded
in scrofulous or rachitic subjects, or those enfeebled by other
diseases, for unless prompt resolution can be effected, it will
terminate fatally early, or develop pneumonic phthisis. Have
seen cases continuing up and down for eight and ten months, and
finally make a good recovery.
THE TREATMENT.
When it is considered that fully one-half of the cases of this
affection succumb under the ordinary treatment, and ninety per
cent. are cured by proper Osteopathic manipulations, does it not
stand to reason that merit settles the preference for it? We
venture the assertion that not a single case of pneumonia ever
occurred without pressure on some nerve or nerves leading to
and controlling the lung tissue, or interfering with the return
venous circulation. In this affection the same treatment that is
recommended for croupous pneumonia should be made. The
early institution of the treatment will most frequently abort the
disease at once. There is no other means ever used that equals
this process of curing these conditions. Every variety of lung
438 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
affection should receive the treatment indicated, to take off the
pressure and re-establish normal circulation to and from the lungs
and heart, and to stimulate the nerve terminals, and to arrest all
muscular contracture and compression of the chest contents,
including liver, diaphragm and abdominal muscles. The equal-
ization of the circulation must be brought about and maintained
to restore and perpetuate life and health. The general treatment,
then, should be applied in this pathological condition as far as
necessary to accomplish freedom of vessels and nerves and lym-
phatics. All these are accomplished by the application of the
foregoing principles effectually. Treatment should be made
every day, or oftener, should emergencies demand it, partial or
complete. - *
PULMONARY TUBERCULOSIS.
SYNoNYMs. Phthisis pulmonalis; phthisis; consumption;
pneumonic phthisis; tubercular phthisis.
DEFINITION. An infective disease, caused by the bacillus
tuberculosis, the lesions of which are characterized by nodular
bodies called tubercles or diffused infiltrations of tuberculous
tissue which undergo caseation or sclerosis, and may finally ulcer-
ate, or in some situations calcify.—Osler.
CAUSE. It is now generally accepted that all varieties of
pulmonary consumption are due to the active presence of the
bacillus tuberculosis, discovered by Koch in 1881. The lung
tissue must be in a receptive state, as the bacilli may be present
in the respiratory tract without the development of the disease.
Any condition that lowers the tone of the general system renders
the tissues susceptible to the changes produced by the tubercle
bacilli. These will be enumerated in speaking of the clinical
varieties of the disease. -
CLINICAL VARIETIES. I. Acute miliary tuberculosis; 2.
Pneumonic phthisis; 3. Tubercular phthisis; 4. Fibroid phthisis.
I. ACUTE MILIARY TUBERCULOSIS.
SYNONYMs. Acute phthisis; galloping consumption.
DEFINITION. An acute infective febrile affection, due to the
rapid eruption in various parts of the body, but especially in the
lungs, of miliary tubercles; characterized by high fever, rapid
PLATE XXXVIII.-Dorsum, Leg-Extension Treatment.

* * * .



A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 44 I
pulse, hurried respiration, pains in chest, cough, profuse expec-
toration, and rapid prostration.
CAUSEs. In the majority of cases it is the result of an auto-
infection, arising from either an active or latent tuberculosis
focus. Cases develop in which no cause can be assigned. Often
follows measles, whooping-cough, variola, and influenza. Most
common between puberty and middle life.
“That the gray granulation is deposited throughout the body
under the influence of certain conditions of irritation, it is neces-
sary that a peculiar vulnerability of the constitution exist, in
other words, that it be of the scrofulous type.
CLINICAL FORMs. General or typhoid, pulmonary and cere-
bral. The cerebral will be described in the section on nervous
diseases. &
PATHoLocICAL ANATOMY. Pulmonary Form.—“The gray
granulation or miliary tubercle consists of a fine reticulation of
fibers, with a mass of epithelioid cells and granules, and often
having a giant cell for its center.” The deposit is generally over
both lungs and the bronchial tubes, and is followed by hyper-
aemia, increase of secretion, having a viscid and adhesive char-
acter, and the destruction of all the tissue with which it comes in
contact. Deposits also take the place in the brain, pleurae, intes-
tines, peritoneum, and kidneys.
GENERAL OR TYPHOID. Symptoms.-Gradual progressive
weakness, with loss of appetite, dry, clean tongue, costive bowels,
flushed cheeks, fever, irregular in type, and rapid, feeble pulse.
Rarely the temperature reaches Iog degrees F. to IO4 degrees
F., associated with mild delirium. The respirations are increased
with slight or no cough, and little or no expectoration. As the
symptoms continue the prostration increases, cyanosis develops,
the patient growing stupid, gradually deepening into coma and
death. -
Diagnosis.-There are none or so slight local conditions,
the symptoms pointing to an acute general infection, that the
disease is apt to be mistaken for typhoid fever. The points of
difference are, absence of the typical typhoid temperature record,
the characteristic eruption, and the diarrhea.
Prognosis.-Recovery is the rarest termination.
PULMONARY FORM. Symptoms.-The onset is usually sud-
den, with a chill or chilliness, followed by fever, Io2 degrees to 104
degrees F., rapid, dicrotic pulse, I2O-140, cough, with scanty,
glairy sputum, increased respiration, 30-50 per minute, pain in
442 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the chest, hot skin, dry tongue, deranged digestion, and great
prostration, the severity of the symptoms rapidly increasing, with
evidences of cyanosis, the sputum becoming more abundant and
often rusty in color, with more or less frequent attacks of haemop-
tysis, soon followed by headache, vertigo, sleeplessness, often
delirium, coma, and death. If deposits have occurred in the
meninges, or the intestines, symptoms of these affections are
superadded.
PERCUSSION. The percussion resonance is normal until con-
siderable deposits have occurred, when it is either slightly im-
paired or even slightly tympanitic. With the development of
cavities the amphoric percussion note is present.
AUscul.TATION. Vesiculo-bronchial breathing, associated
with large and small, moist or bubbling rales, soon followed by
bronchial and broncho-cavernous breathing, with large and small,
moist and circumscribed gurgling rales.
DURATION. Acute phthisis usually terminates fatally in
from four to twelve weeks. Rarely of several months’ duration.
DIAGNoSIs. Commonly mistaken for typhoid fever with
lung complications, an error that is readily made unless a close
study of the history, symptoms, physical signs, and sputum be
made.
THE TREATMENT.
In the early stages of this affection much may be done by
applying the principles of Osteopathy to the contingencies as they
arise, lifting off the weights that obstruct the breathing and blood
circulation to and from the lungs and throughout the general
system. Treat patient according to indications, and as often as
the circumstances permit. Aim to relieve pressure.
II. PNEUMONIC PHTHISIS.
SYNONYMs. Chronic catarrhal pneumonia; catarrhal
phthisis; caseous pneumonia; caseous phthisis.
DEFINITION. A form of pulmonary consumption character-
ized by the destruction of the pulmonary tissue resulting from the
action of the bacilli, causing the caseation or cheesy degeneration
of inflammatory products in the lungs, and the subsequent soft-
ening and destruction of the caseous matter, with greater or less
destruction of the pulmonary tissue; characterized by hectic
fever, cough, shortness of breath, purulent expectoration, and
more or less rapid prostration.
A DRUGLESS system of HEALING. 443
CAUSEs. The predisposing factor in the etiology of pneu-
monic phthisis is a strumous or Scrofulous diathesis, or a condi-
tion of lowered health, the result of various unfavorable hygienic
influences. The exciting causes are: the irritation produced by
the presence of the bacillus tuberculosis and a catarrhal pneu-
monia in any portion of the lung, but especially at the apex; in-
flammation occurring about a blood clot; inhalation of irritant
particles occurring in certain occupations, to-wit: weavers,
grinders, miners, hatters, millers, cigar-makers, and the like.
Many cases of pneumonic phthisis can be traced to an attack of
influenza a year or so before.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. When a pneumonia terminates
in resolution the inflammatory products are absorbed by first
undergoing a fatty metamorphosis. If the fatty metamorphosis
be incomplete the cells are atrophied and undergo the caseous
degeneration, which consists in the absorption of the watery
parts, the fatty degeneration of the cellular elements, and the
granular disintegration of the fibrinous material, so that
ultimately a soft, solid mass is produced, yellowish in color, hav-
ing the appearance of cheese. The destructive changes are thus
described by Niemeyer: “Cells, the products of inflammation,
accumulate in the alveoli, and minute bronchi crowd upon each
other, becoming densely packed, and thus, by their mutual press-
ure, they bring about their own decay, as well as that of the
lung textures, by interfering with their nutrition, the alveolar
walls being also themselves damaged by the inflammatory pro-
cess.”
The position of the catarrhal pneumonia resulting in the
above changes is usually at the apex, but it may occur at any
portion of the lungs, or a whole lung becomes infiltrated, and
undergoes the cheesy degeneration (phthisis florida).
SYMptoms. Pneumonic phthisis occurs in three forms, the
chronic, the subacute, and the acute. -
Chronic Form.—The origin is rather insidious, the individual
being susceptible to “colds,” or “catarrhs,” on the slightest expos-
ure; gradually a persistent cough, with the expectoration of muco-
pus, is established, each severe cold being accompanied with chill,
fever, pain in the chest, and either slight hemorrhage or blood-
streaked sputa. Finally, the catarrhal symptoms become persist-
ent, with morning chills, evening ſevers, and rather profuse night
sweats, distressing cough, profuse muco-purulent sputa, con-
taining the bacilli, great weakness and exhaustion, loss of appe-
444 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
tite and feeble digestion, the symptoms growing persistently
worse, death occurring from exhaustion after one or two years'
duration. -
Subacute Variety.—History of an acute attack of pneumonia
of one or two weeks’ duration, followed by a decided improve-
ment, but not complete recovery. After a lapse of some weeks
or months, symptoms of pulmonary softening begin, destroying
the lung structure and forming cavities, accompanied by chills,
fever, night sweats, emaciation, cough, muco-purulent and blood-
streaked expectoration containing the bacilli, the patient dying
from exhaustion within a year.
Acute Variety.—The so-called phthisis florida, runs a rapid
course, beginning either as a croupous or catarrhal pneumonia,
involving the whole of one or part of both lungs, associated with
rapid loss of flesh and strength, high but variable temperature,
IO3 degrees to IO5 degrees F., with remissions, profuse night
sweats, shortness of breath, severe cough, profuse, purulent, and
blood-streaked sputa containing the bacilli, loss of appetite, and
feeble digestion, the patient succumbing in a few weeks or months
from exhaustion. .
A decided remission in the local and general symptoms of
the acute variety may occur, the disease afterward pursuing a
more chronic course.
INSPECTION. Shows deficient respiratory movements of the
diseased portion of the lungs. -
PALPATION. Increased vocal fremitus over the consolidated
lung tissue and cavities.
PERCUSSION. The percussion note varies from a slight im-
pairment of the normal note to dullness, and when cavities are
formed, associated with scattered points of the tympanitic or
hollow note. If the cavities communicate with a bronchial tube
the cracked-pot or cracked-metal sound is elicited. If the cavi-
ties are filled with pus the percussion note is dull. If the pus be
expelled, the tympanitic or cracked-pot sound returns.
AUSCULTATION. The vesicular murmur is unimpaired in
those parts free from disease; it is feeble or indistinct if many
bronchioles are obstructed; and is harsh or blowing if the bron-
chioles are narrowed. The inspiratory sound will be jerking, and
the expiratory sound prolonged and blowing when the lung has
lost its elasticity. Associated with the impaired vesicular mur-
mur is a fine, dry, crackling sound (crepitation), appearing at the
end of inspiration. If bronchitis be associated, large and small
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEAL, ING. 445
moist or bubbling rales are also heard during respiration. When
cavities form, either bronchial or broncho-cavernous respiration
is heard, associated with more or less distinct gurgling rales. If
the cavity be free from pus and have rather firm walls, the
breathing is more amphoric in character.
DIAGNOSIs. Catarrhal bronchitis has many points of
resemblance to pneumonic phthisis. The subsequent course of
the latter, with the high temperature, prostration, emaciation,
sputa containing bacilli, and physical signs will prevent error.
Acute fibrinous and catarrhal pneumonia, often after a course
of two or three weeks, show the bacilli and yet are not recognized
as tuberculosis. It is a safe rule of practice to suspect tubercu-
losis and examine daily for the bacilli in all cases of pneumonia
that show the least tendency to linger, and particularly where
there are chills and a remittent temperature record.
PROGNosis. Acute variety, the phthisis florida, usually ter-
minates fatally within a few months.
The subacute and chronic varieties may, under judicious
treatment and favorable hygienic conditions, be arrested, the
caseous matter partly expectorated and partly absorbed, leaving
more or less loss of structure, cicatricial tissue supplying its place,
which after a time contracts, causing more or less retraction of
the chest walls.
Cases not properly treated, either from carelessness or pov-
erty, succumb after a year or two.
THE TREATMENT.
The early and persistent application of these principles cures
many cases, mitigates suffering, and lifts the clouds of despon-
dency from many a sad heart. Living witnesses are numerous,
whose lives are veritable evidences of the efficiency of applied
Osteopathy. Its possibilities are beyond computation, wonder-
ful, always a source of relief, often effectual in curing. Treat-
ment applied every other day, persistently and intelligently,
works wonders in the end. Take courage.
III. TUBERCULAR PHTHISIS.
SYNoNYMs. Tuberculosis; consumption; incipient phthisis;
chronic phthisis; chronic ulcerative phthisis.
DEFINITION. A chronic pulmonary disease caused by the
bacillus tuberculosis, resulting in the deposition of tubercle in the
446 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
lung structure, which in turn undergoes ulceration and softening,
which results in a septic infection, characterized by progressive
failure of health, fever, cough, dyspnoea, emaciation, and exhaus-
tion. -
CAUSES. Hereditary and acquired susceptibility to the
influence of the bacillus tuberculosis. It is questionable if an
individual is born with pulmonary tuberculosis, or makes his
advent with tissues that are a congenial soil for the growth and
ravages of this wide-spread germ. Amongst the acquired causes
are syphilis, alcoholism, chronic nephritis, certain occupations,
and living in damp, overcrowded, dark, and illy ventilated loca-
tions. I)ebility following an attack of influenza predisposes to
the deposition of tubercle.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Tubercle is a grayish-white,
translucent, and semi-solid granulation, about the size of a millet
seed, most commonly deposited in the walls of the bronchioles,
exciting a low form of inflammation, the result of its own death.
The masses of tubercle soon undergo softening (cheesy transfor-
mation); the lung structure is secondarily affected, undergoes
softening, which results in more or less destruction of the tissue,
whence cavities are formed. The inflammation may extend to
the small arteries, causing hemorrhage. The deposit of tubercle
is generally at one of the apices, and “once present in an apex,
the disease usually extends in time to the opposite upper lobe;
but not, as a rule, until the apex of the lower lobe of the lung first
affected has been attacked. Lesions of the base may be primary,
though this is rare.” Depositions may also occur in the brain,
intestines, and liver. The pleura is usually the seat of a chronic
inflammation (dry pleurisy, tubercular), resulting in the oblitera-
tion of the pleural cavity.
SYMPTOMs. The symptoms correspond closely to the stages
of deposition, of softening, septic infection, and of the formation
of cavities. The development is insidious, with increasing dys-
pepsia and anaemia, the loss of appetite, distress after meals, and
feeling of weakness, often misleading the patient and physician for
some time until the occurrence of an irritable heart, a slight, dry
hacking cough, referred to the throat or stomach, scanty, glairy
expectoration, gradual loss of weight, impaired muscular strength,
pallid appearance, and a more or less copious haemoptysis.
Pain, sharp in character, below the clavicles, is often present.
These symptoms are characteristic of the development of the
disease. t
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 447
The beginning of softening is announced by increased cough,
freer expectoration, showing under the microscope the bacilli,
dyspnoea increased on exertion, morning chills, evening fever and
night sweats—the so-called hectic fever, diarrhea, increased ema-
ciation and weakness, the patient, however, continuing very
hopeful.
With the formation of the cavities, the cough is more aggra-
vated, with profuse and purulent expectoration, at times con-
taining yellow striae, the amount depending upon the number and
size of the cavities; haemoptysis is not common at this stage; the
pulse rapid and weak, increased hectic, burning of the soles and
palms, copious night sweats, greater debility and emaciation, with
Oedema of the feet and ankles, denoting failure of the circulation,
death soon following from asthenia, the mind clear and hopeful
to the end. -
INSPECTION. First Stage.—Often shows slight depressions
in the supra-clavicular, and at times in the infra-clavicular
regions. *
PALPATION. Second Stage.—The vocal fremitus is slightly
increased.
PERCUSSION. First Stage.—Slight impairment of the
normal percussion resonance can sometimes be elicited. Second
Stage.—The resonance is impaired, and may be even dull. Third
Stage.—Dullness, with circumscribed spots of the amphoric, or
tympanitic or cracked-pot sound.
AUSCULTATION. First Stage.—Inspiration jerky, expiration
prolonged, the pitch higher than normal, the inspiration asso-
ciated with crackling rales. Second Stage.—Vesiculo-bronchial
breathing, associated with subcrepitant and large and moist or
bubbling rales. Third Stage.—Bronchial, broncho-cavernous,
and cavernous respiration, associated with large and small moist
or bubbling and localized gurgling rales.
Bronchophony in its various degrees is associated with the
second and third stages of tuberculosis.
CoMPLICATIONs. Tubercular diseases of the brain, larynx,
pleura, intestines, and peritoneum; perineal abscess leading to
fistula, endocarditis, and myocarditis.
DIAGNoSIs. The early diagnosis of tubercular phthisis
rests mainly on the history, together with the symptoms and
physical signs. In the first stage it is often mistaken for dys-
pepsia, anaemia, malarial fever, or disease of the heart; if the
bacilli can be found in the sputum the diagnosis is settled.
448 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PROCNOSIS. In the main unfavorable, although under
proper treatment, change of climate and like favorable conditions,
life may be prolonged for years.
TREATMENT. See Fibroid Phthisis.
IV. FIBROID PHTHISIS.
SYNONYMS. Chronic intestinal pneumonia; cirrhosis of the
lungs; Corrigan's disease.
DEFINITION. A hyperplasia (thickening) of the pulmonary
connective tissue, resulting in atrophy and degeneration of the
vesicular structure, associated with bronchial inflammation; char-
acterized by cough, profuse expectoration containing the bacillus
tuberculosis, fever, emaciation, and ultimately death by asthenia.
CAUSEs. Hereditary predisposition; inhalation of irritants
and associated with certain occupations, such as stone clitters,
grinders, etc. Following lobar pneumonia; chronic bronchitis;
alcoholism: syphilis; chronic nephritis.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Thickening of the bronchial
mucous membrane and dilatation of the air tubes; hyperplasia
of the pulmonary connective tissue, resulting in the compression
and consequent destruction of the vesicular structure, which is
assisted by the contraction of the newly formed tissues. Sooner
or later catarrhal pneumonia results, the product undergoing
the cheesy degeneration, cavities being formed, and as a result of
the long continued suppuration, tubercular depositions occur,
hastening the destruction of the lung tissue.
Professor Da Costa has reported a number of cases of
“grinders’ phthisis,” in whose sputum was found the “bacillus
tuberculosis,” and in whose family history there were no traces
of consumption.
SYMPTOMs. The course is chronic, beginning as a bronchial
catarrh, worse in winter, better in summer, when, after several
years, the cough becomes more continuous, the expectoration
freer and muco-purulent, containing the bacillus tuberculosis in
large numbers, hectic fever develops, night sweats, dyspnoea, and
rapid emaciation, soon followed by Oedema of the feet and
ankles, the result of failing circulation, death occurring by
asthenia.
INSPECTION. Depression of the chest walls.
PERCUssion. Impaired resonance, followed by dullness,
º
r
-
->
ºr.
2.
>.
×
-
24
C
C
-
an
-
E
->
-
t
º
-
E
º
E.
C
-
Z.
-
-
rt.
º:
º

*
g
gº
d
#
*
f -
* > ** - - -. - - - - - - • {

A DRUGLEss systEM OF HEALING. 451
with irregular spots of amphoric or tympanitic percussion note
over the points of depression. -
AUscul,TATION. First Stage.—Vesiculo-bronchial, or harsh
respiration associated with large and small, moist or bubbling
rales, followed by bronchial, broncho-cavernous, and cavernous
respiration, with circumscribed gurgling rales.
DIAGNoSIs. Beginning as a bronchial catarrh, slowly pro-
gressing, with the remission of the symptoms during the summer
months, finally becoming progressively worse, the discovery of
the bacilli in the sputum, with the formation of cavities, and
symptoms of asthenia, are the chief points in the diagnosis.
PROGNoSIs. The duration of fibroid phthisis is most pro-
tracted, six to twelve years being the average duration; death,
however, is the inevitable termination. .
Professor Da Costa has records from one hundred deaths
from “grinders’ consumption” whose average life was twelve
years.
* THE TREATMENT.
To presume to assert that Osteopathy in any way favorably
affects tuberculosis at once brings down upon the head of the
manipulator supreme contempt. The habit of taking medicine
(although without a cure) is so deeply rooted in the mind, that to
pretend to benefit anybody otherwise seems the height of supreme
ridiculousness to nearly everybody When it is recognized that
blood “is the life of man,” and that it must be kept up to a normal
and perfect standard, and that this can only be done by uninter-
rupted circulation, and contact with oxygen, and that for the
most part in the lungs, there will not be so much wonder at the
idea of adjustment of the system so to itself as to promote it; and
there will be less opposition manifest along these lines. To keep
up a normal circulation means health, and however prone by
heredity to take on this affection, from undue exposure or other-
wise, a constant regard to the circulation and to the respirations
will be had, and early promotion of these two essentials will ward
off the disease; and when disease is noticed, especially in its early
stages, many cases can be permanently cured, and others greatly
relieved. The whole system should be adjusted to itself as often
as twice or three times a week, and the patient instructed how to
breathe correctly, to live long on earth. The various manipu-
lations recommended to promote and keep up a normal circula-
tion should be repeatedly and scientifically applied, ad libitum.
452 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
DISEASES OF THE PLEURA.
PLEURISY.
SYNONYMs. Pleuritis; “stitch in the side.”
DEFINITION. A fibrinous inflammation of the pleura, either
acute, subacute, or chronic in character, occurring either idio-
pathically or secondarily; characterized by a sharp pain in the
side, a dry cough, dyspnoea, and fever. It may be limited to a
part, or may involve the whole of one or both pleural membranes.
CAUSES. Idiopathic pleuritis is said to be due to cold and
exposure, to injuries of the chest walls, or the result of muscular
exertion. Tuberculosis is the cause of a few acute pleurisies.
Secondary pleuritis occurs during an attack of pneumonia, peri-
carditis, rheumatism, variola, scarlatina, measles, Bright's dis-
ease, or puerperal fever. Chronic pleurisy follows an acute attack
or is the result of tuberculosis, Bright's disease, or alcoholism.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The course pursued by an
inflammation of a serous membrane is hyperaemia followed by
exudation of lymph, the effusion of fluid, its absorption, and the
adhesion of the membranes. The first or dry stage is a hyper-
aemia or diffused irregular redness of the membrane, with little
specks of exudation. The second stage is characterized by the
copious exudation of lymph, more or less completely covering the
membrane, giving it a dull, cloudy, or shaggy appearance. If
the inflammation ceases at this point, it is termed dry pleurisy.
The third, or stage of effusion, is characterized by the pouring out
of a semi-fibrinous liquid, more or less completely filling and
distending the pleural cavity, and floating in the fluid are fibrinous
flocculi, blood, and epithelial cells. Absorption of the fluid and
more or less of the exudative lymph soon occurs, the unabsorbed
portion becoming organized, forming adhesions which obliterate
the pleural cavity. The effusion, if on the right side, pushes the
heart further to the left; if on the left side, the heart is displaced
to the right, the impulse often being seen to the right of the
sternum. The lungs are also compressed and displaced upward
and against the spinal column, and, on removal of the fluid,
expand again, except in cases of chronic pleurisy, when the func-
tional activity of the pulmonary structure is more or less perma-
nently impaired.
Chronic pleurisy results when the fluid is not absorbed or
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 453
when it is effused into the cavity in a slow and insidious manner.
The membrane is irregularly thickened, with firm adhesions,
fluid being found in the meshes; depressions of the thoracic
walls also occur. The fluid may be serum, pus (empyema), or
pus and blood. Openings may form, through which there is a
permanent discharge, either externally (fiistulous empyema) or
into the bronchi, or, rarely, into the bowels.
SYMPTOMs. Acute Variety.—Begins with a chill, followed
by a sharp lancinating pain (stitch) near the nipple or in the
axilla, aggravated by coughing and breathing, associated with
slight tenderness on pressure. The respirations are rapid and
shallow, 30-35 per minute, a short, dry, hacking cough, moderate
fever, compressible pulse, 90-120. With the effusion of liquid
the dyspnoea becomes aggravated, the cough more distressing,
the cardiac action embarrassed, the countenance wearing an
anxious expression, the patient usually lying on the affected side.
With the absorption of the fluid the symptoms gradually
ameliorate, convalescence being more or less rapid.
Subacute Variety.—Begins insidiously after cold, exposure,
and fatigue in those enfeebled. Patients usually complain of a
sense of weariness, shortness of breath, aggravated on exertion,
evening fever, followed by night sweats, short, harassing cough,
none or very scanty sputum; the pulse is small, feeble, but fre-
quent, IOO-12o beats per minute. The characteristic pain in the
side is usually wanting.
Chronic Variety.—Irregular chills, fever, night sweats, dysp-
noea, palpitation, embarrassed circulation, with more or less
prostration. -
INSPECTION. First Stage.—Deficient movement of the
affected side, on account of the pain induced by full breathing.
Second Stage.—Bulging or fullness of the affected side, with
obliteration of the intercostal spaces and displacement of the
cardiac impulse.
PALPATION. Second Stage.—Vocal fremitus feeble or
absent over the site of the effusion, exaggerated above the site
of the fluid. Rarely, fluctuation may be obtained.
PERCUssroN. First Stage.—May be slightly impaired.
Second Stage.—Dullness or even flatness over the site of the effu-
sion; tympanitic percussion note above the fluid.
AUscuſ.TATION. First Stage.—Feeble vesicular murmur
over the affected side, the patient breathing superficially, to pre-
vent the pain; a friction sound, slight and grating or creaking,
454 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
becoming louder as the exudation of lymph increases, limited
usually to the angle of the scapula of the affected side, rarely
heard over the entire side, accompanies the respiratory move-
ments. Second Stage.—Feeble or absent vesicular murmur on
the affected side, depending upon partial or complete compres-
sion of the lungs by the fluid. Above the fluid puerile breathing,
and just at the upper margin of the fluid, a friction sound may be
heard. The vocal resonance is diminished or absent over the
site of the fluid and markedly increased above, aegophony being
present at the upper margin of the fluid. With the absorption
of the fluid the vesicular murmur gradually returns, associated
with a moist friction sound.
DIAGNOSIs. Acute pneumonia is often mistaken for the
effusion stage of pleurisy. The points of distinction are, in pneu-
monia there are the pronounced chill, high fever, characteristic
sputa, bronchial breathing, exaggerated vocal fremitus and reson-
ance, and no displacement of the heart, the reverse occurring in
pleurisy. º
Enlargement of the liver may be mistaken for pleurisy with
effusion, the chief point of distinction being that, in enlargement
of the liver, the superior line of dullness is depressed upon full
inspiration, while in pleurisy with effusion inspiration does not
modify the location of the dullness.
PROGNOSIS. Idiopathic pleurisy usually terminates in recov-
ery within three weeks. Pleurisy the result of constitutional
causes has its prognosis modified by the condition with which it
is associated. Empyema, unless the result of a diathesis, termin-
ates favorably. Double pleurisy is unfavorable. The etiological
factor of tuberculosis must always be borne in mind in making a
prognosis in pleurisy, whether acute or chronic.
THE TREATMENT.
The same as for Asthma, the object being to take off the
pressure. Daily manipulations, or even twice a day in acute
forms, will relieve all the difficulty at once, within a day or two,
and disperse the effusion so as that all further trouble is removed
—arrested. The usual six weeks' suffering is aborted. The
pleura acting as an assistant to expiration, it can be easily under-
stood why breathing is limited to short and quick exhalations,
attended with pain, in infiltrations of this organ. The closure of
the lymph tubes causes accumulation, lessens action of the mus-
cles of respiration, crowds other organs, fills the chest cavity,
holds taut the intercostal muscles, and as the accumulation
A DRUGLEss systEM of HEALING. 455
increases the pain keeps intensifying, until partial paralysis of
sensory and sympathetic nerves ensues. Relaxation allows trans-
fusion and exudation and gradual absorption of fluid. The
remedy with the Osteopath is, take off the pressure and open
up the outlets (the channels that are closed, causing the accumu-
lation), and the effects at once subside—the relief comes at once.
Any objection to this? Why didn't this occur to the physician a
long time ago? Why doesn't it occur to him now? The raising
of the arm on the side of the pain, as STRONGLY as the patient
can well bear, whilst a long and as deep inspiration as possible
for the patient to bear is made, and a strong pressure is made
with the fingers at the side of the spine about the seventh and
eighth dorsal vertebrae, held there a moment, and then quickly
returned to the side, clears out the intercostal spaces of venous
blood, opens the tubes in the pleura itself, relaxes the muscular
fibers of the two walls of the pleura, and disengorgement takes
place as if by magic—the condition is changed, a cure is effected.
One or two treatments usually suffice to clear out the whole of
the obstruction. The general treatment of the upper portion of
the body is well enough to make, for equalization of all the forces
is an essentiality to right the malcondition of the blood and
other fluids involved. In chronic pleurisy a repetition of the
same treatment soon restores the parts to a normal state. These
treatments should be mild, slowly performed, and thoroughly
done, and the results are invariably satisfactory. Every other
day is often enough to treat the patient for chronic pleurisy. The
head, neck, chest and spine should receive particular and special
attention each time. Do not fail to use vibratory manipulations
over the painful parts. Rapid circular vibratory movements are
most effectual.
HYDROTHORAX.
SYNoNYM. Dropsy of the pleura.
DEFINITION. The effusion of the fluid into the pleural cav-
ities (bilateral), the result of a general dropsy from renal or
cardiac disease.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. More or less clear serous fluid
in both pleural sacs, compressing the lung. No signs of inflam-
mation are present.
SYMPTOMs. Following dropsy of the abdomen occurs
, 456 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
dyspnoea, with signs of deficient blood aeration, both lungs being
compressed. #
PALPATION. Absent vocal fremitus over the site of the fluid.
PERCUSSION. Dullness over the site of the fluid.
AUSCULTATION. Absent vesicular murmur over the site of
the fluid.
DIAGNOSIs. Easily determined by association of the symp-
toms with a general dropsy.
PROGNOSIS. Controlled by the cause producing the general
dropsy.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment for the affections causing it is the rational
course to pursue. If the heart is affected, direct attention to it.
If the kidneys are diseased, use the means provided therefor. As
in all cases of dropsy, the effusion comes from obstructed venous
return circulation. That may result from nerve pressure, arrest-
ing capillary circulation, and the watery portions (70 per cent.)
of the blood exuding through the walls of the capillaries; or, if
from engorgement of veins, the broken-down tissue can not
escape through the lymph canals, and the fluid increases, hence
the dropsy of the pleura. The relief may be afforded in two
ways: One by paracentesis thoracis, and the other by general
treatment, to open the outlets through which the fluids normally
escape. The pressure is due to contraction of the chest walls,
and preventing escape from the intercostal veins into the azygos
veins, thus preventing chest expansion, hence closure of outlets—
tubes. The treatment must be directed especially to the respira-
tory muscles, to the ribs, clavicles, neck and spinal and abdominal
muscles. Also see to the veins of the lower limbs (the saphenotis)
and lumbar and sacral nerves, and especially relieve the kidneys,
at the renal splanchnic—the lower splanchnic area, twelfth dorsal.
Institute stated acts of respiration and see to it that all the large
veins are properly relieved of their accumulated contents. The
liver should not be slighted. Frequent bathing of the whole body
with tepid water, to keep the skin healthy, is essential.
The tissue elements should be supplied also. The potass.
chloride is one of the elements needed to aerate the blood. The
sodium sulph. becomes the remedy when the areolar tissue is
involved, and the sodium chloride is indicated where the subcu-
taneous tissue is involved; calcium phos., if from non-assimilation
of food; ferric phos., if from loss of blood; calcium fluoricum, if
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 457
from heart disease, dilatation of cavities; and potass. sulph. after
scarlatina and where there is deficiency of perspiration.
These belong to no system of medication, are not medicines,
but simply elements of the system, which, when deficient, should
be supplied. 9.
It will be found of great importance to know when to supply
these elements, and to be informed on this subject the reader
should study Schussler’s “Biochemic Treatment,” which may be
obtained at almost any Homeopathic pharmacy in the country,
by M. Docetti Walker, M.D.; compiled by Drs. Boericke and
Dewey, San Francisco, California. Luyties’ Hom. Phar. Co.,
306 N. Broadway, St. Louis, Mo., sell it. $1.50.
Our success depends largely on what we know. The physi-
cian's quiver should be full of arrows. This life is one of warfare
with the enemy that has great power, and persistently claims his
victim, and at the last “mows him down.” All are his subjects.
Our time is set. He is the executioner. Be ready.
PNEUMOTHORAX,
SYNONYMS. Air in the pleural cavity; hydropneumothorax.
DEFINITION. The accumulation of air in the pleural cavi-
ties, with the consequent development of inflammation of the
membranes; characterized by sharp pain, followed by rapidly
developing dyspnoea and cough.
CAUSEs. Generally the result of tubercular phthisis, causing
perforation of the pleura. Perforation may take place from the
pleura into the lung, in connection with empyema or abscess of
the chest wall. Direct perforation from without, by laceration
of a fractured rib or severe contusion.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The gas in the pleural cavity
consists of oxygen, carbon anhydride, and nitrogen in variable
proportions. It may fill the pleural sac completely, compressing
the lung, or is sometimes limited by adhesions. The gas tends
to excite inflammation, the resulting effusion being either serous
or purulent.
SYMPTOMs. Symptoms of pneumothorax, the result of per-
foration, are sudden or sharp pain in the side, intense dyspnoea,
attended with symptoms of collapse, coldness of the surface, and ,
cold sweats. These symptoms, in many instances, follow a severe
or violent paroxysm of coughing. In severe cases there is never
458 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
a moment's cessation of the acute pain and distressing dyspnoea,
causing Orthopnoea from the onset until death. -
INSPECTION. Enlargement of the affected side, the inter-
costal spaces being widened and effaced or even bulged out so
that the surface of the chest is smooth. Respiratory movements
of the affected side are diminished or absent.
PERCUSSION. Immediately after the rupture the percussion
note is hyper-resonant, or even tympanitic or amphoric in quality.
If the amount of air in the pleural cavity becomes extreme, there
is dullness on percussion, associated with a feeling of great resist-
ance or density. When effusion of blood occurs, dullness is
observed over the lower part of the chest, hyper-resonant or tym-
panitic percussion note over the upper portions of the chest, these
sounds changing as the patient changes position.
AUscul.TATION. The normal vesicular murmur may be
diminished or absent. The typical amphoric respiratory sound is
heard when the fistula is open, usually associated with a metallic
echo. Metallic tinkling, or the bell sound, is sometimes distinctly
produced by breathing, coughing, or speaking, after the develop-
ment of inflammation of the pleura. The vocal resonance may be
diminished or absent, or, rarely, it may be exaggerated, with a
distinct metallic echo. After the development of inflammation
in the pleura, suddenly shaking the patient gives rise to a splash-
ing sensation, the succussion sound, if both air and fluid are
present in the pleural cavity. t
PROGNoSIs. When occurring as the result of tuberculosis,
the prognosis is extremely unfavorable; rarely, the fistulous open-
ing being inclosed by inflammatory action; the case then becomes
one of chronic pleurisy.
THE TREATMENT.
The first thing to be done is to use the aspirator, to relieve
the pressure. Close up the orifice in which air enters, expand the
chest walls on both sides and use the arm movements, inhalations
and dorsal manipulations to induce absorption of the air. If the
pleura is inflamed, treat the patient as directed for it. The appli-
cation of the principles of Osteopathy is to be studied in all cases,
and skill is required in this, as in all other sciences, to succeed.
The desideratum to achieve lies in removing the pressure, as
every one should understand. Raising the clavicles, arms, ribs,
diaphragm, and the vibratory manipulations over the part affected
result most satisfactorily, generally. The cases are rare, but
when met with, must be met understandingly or censure is sure
to be heaped upon you.
PLATE XL.-Scapula, Dorsum and Shoulder Treatment.

DISEASES OF THE CIRCULATORY
SYSTEM.
The methods employed in making a physical examination
of the heart are: I. Inspection. 2. Palpation. 3. Percussion.
4. Auscultation.
INSPECTION.
INSPECTION indicates the exact point of the cardiac impulse,
and the presence or absence of any abnormal pulsations or any
change in the form of the praecordium. Normally, the impulse
is visible only in the fifth interspace, midway between the left
nipple and the left border of the sternum, its area covering about
one square inch, most distinct in the thin, while often barely seen
in the very fleshy; often displaced downward by full inspiration
and elevated by complete expiration. Disease may alter the
position and area of the impulse. - -
The position of the impulse is moved to the right by left
pleuritic effusions; downward by cardiac hypertrophy or pul-
monary emphysema; upward by a pericardial effusion.
The area of the impulse is changed and enlarged by peri-
cardial adhesions, cardiac dilatation, or hypertrophy.
PALPATION.
PALPATION confirms the observations of inspection, and also
determines the force, frequency, and regularity of the cardiac
impulse. The force of the impulse is diminished by cardiac dila-
tation, fatty and fibroid degenerations of the heart, emphysema,
pericardial effusion, and adynamic diseases. The impulse is
increased by cardiac hypertrophy, during the first stage of endo-
carditis and pericarditis, functional cardiac disturbances and
sthenic inflammations.
PERCUSSION.
PERCUSSION will determine the boundaries of the superficial
and deep cardiac space, the so-called praecordium. It is essential
that the upper, lower, and two lateral boundaries of the pericar-
dial region be memorized, to-wit: superior boundary, the upper
edge of the third rib ; the lower boundary is a horizontal line
passing through the fifth intercostal space; the left lateral boun-
(461)
462 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
dary is about or a little within a vertical line passing through the
nipple, the linea mammalis; and the right lateral boundary is an
imaginary vertical line situated one-half an inch to the right of
the sternum. These boundaries vary somewhat in health, but
are sufficiently accurate for all practical purposes.
The superficial cardiac space represents that portion of the
heart uncovered with lung; it is triangular in form, its apex being
the junction of the lower border of the left third rib with the
sternum, its area not exceeding two inches in any direction. The
superficial space is increased by cardiac hypertrophy, dilatation,
or pericardial effusion. Diminished at the end of full inspiration
or by emphysema.
The deep cardiac space represents that portion of the heart
covered by lung, and extends from the upper border of the third
rib to the lower edge of the fifth interspace, and from half an inch
to the right of the sternum to near the left nipple. It is increased
by hypertrophy or dilatation of the heart, left pleuritic effusion,
and apparently increased by consolidation of the anterior border
of the investing lung.
AUSCULTATION.
AUSCULTATION indicates the character of the normal cardiac
sounds, and the point at which they are heard with greatest
intensity, and should be thoroughly familiarized if abnormal
sounds are to be fully appreciated.
The ear or stethoscope applied to the praecordium distin-
guishes in health two sounds, separated by a momentary silence
—the short pause, and the second sound followed by an interval
of silence—the long pause.
The first sound, corresponding to the contraction of the
heart—the systole—is louder, longer, and of a lower pitch and a
more booming quality than the second sound, and has its point
of greatest intensity at the cardiac apex or a little to the left. It
corresponds closely in time to the pulsations as felt in the carotid
or radial arteries.
The second sound is shorter, weaker, and higher in pitch
than the first sound, and has a clicking or valvular quality, having
its point of greatest intensity at the second right costal cartilage
and a little above, and corresponds to the closure of the aortic
and pulmonary valves. The sound made by the closure of the
tricuspid valves is best isolated at the ensiform cartilage. The
sound made by the closure of the pulmonary valves at the third
left costal cartilage.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 463
The extent of surface over which the cardiac sounds are
heard varies, according to the size of the heart and the condition
of the adjacent organs for transmitting sounds. These sounds
may be altered in intensity, quality, pitch, seat, and rhythm, or
they may be accompanied, preceded, or followed by adventitious
or new sounds, the so-called endocardial or cardiac murmurs.
The intensity is increased by cardiac hypertrophy, irritability of
the heart, or consolidation of adjacent lung structure. The inten-
sity is diminished by cardiac dilatation or degeneration, during
the course of adynamic fevers, emphysematous lung overlapping
the heart, or pericardial effusion.
The quality and pitch of the first sound may be sharp or short
and of higher pitch when the ventricular walls are thin, or have
undergone beginning fibroid change, the valves being normal;
its pitch and quality are also raised during the course of low
fevers. The second sound becomes duller and lower in pitch
when the elasticity of the aorta is diminished or the aortic valves
thickened. Either or both sounds have a more or less metallic
quality in irritable heart and during gaseous distention of the
stomach.
The seat of greatest intensity of the cardiac sounds is changed
by displacement of the heart, pleuritic effusion, pericardial effu-
sion, and abdominal tympanites.
The rhythm is often interrupted by a sudden pause or silence,
the heart missing a beat, or the sounds are irregular, confused
and tumultuous, the result of organic changes in the cardiac
muscle, valves, or orifices; or a reduplication of one or both
sounds of the heart may occur.
The adventitious cardiac sounds or murmurs are of two
kinds, those made external to the heart, as pericardial, exocardial,
or frictional murmurs, and those made within the cardiac cavity,
endocardial murmurs. -
Pericardial murmurs, or friction sounds, are made by the
rubbing upon one another of the roughened surfaces of the peri-
cardial membrane during the early stages of inflammation. The
sounds have a rubbing, creaking, or grating character, and are
differentiated from a pleural friction sound by their being limited
to the praecordium, synchronous with every sound of the heart,
and not influenced by respiration. They are distinguished from
an endocardial murmur by their superficial rubbing, creaking, or
grating character, and by not being transmitted beyond the limits
464 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of the heart, either along the course of the vessels, or to the left
axilla, or back.
Endocardial murmurs are of two kinds, to-wit: organic and
functional.
Functional endocardial or blood murmurs are the result of
changes in the natural constituents of the blood. Their character
is soft, they are heard most distinctly at the base to the left of the
sternum, during the systole, are not transmitted beyond the limits
of the heart, either to the left axilla or the back, and are associated
with general anaemia. .
Organic endocardial murmurs are produced by blood cur-
rents pursuing either a normal or an abnormal direction.
In health there are two direct blood currents upon each side
of the heart, to-wit: the current from the left auricle to the left
ventricle, the mitral direct current; the current from the left ven-
tricle to the aorta, the aortic direct current; the current from the
right auricle to the right ventricle, the tricuspid direct current,
and the current from the right ventricle to the pulmonary artery,
the pulmonic direct current.
When, from disease, the valves are not properly closed, the
blood is allowed to flow back against the direct current, produc-
ing abnormal blood currents, to-wit: when the mitral valve is
incompetent, the blood flows from the left ventricle back into the
left auricle during the cardiac systole, producing the mitral
regurgitant or indirect current; when the aortic valves are incom-
petent, the blood is permitted to flow from the aorta into the left
ventricle during the cardiac diastole, producing the aortic regur-
gitant or indirect current; when the tricuspid valves are incom-
petent, the blood flows from the right ventricle back into the right .
auricle during the systole, producing the tricuspid regurgitant or
indirect current; when the pulmonary valves are incompetent, the
blood flows from the pulmonary artery into the right ventricle,
producing the pulmonic regurgitant or indirect current.
The mitral direct current occurs during the contraction of
the left auricle, or just before the first sound of the heart and
immediately after its second sound. The aortic direct current is
produced by the contraction of the left ventricle, and occurs with
the first sound of the heart. The tricuspid direct current occurs
during the contraction of the right auricle, or just before the first
or immediately after the second sound. The pulmonic direct
current is produced by the contraction of the right ventricle,
occurring during its first sound.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 465
The mitral direct or presystolic murmur occurs before the
first sound of the heart and immediately after the second sound.
It is caused by a narrowing of the mitral orifice, has a blubbering
quality, well imitated by throwing the lips into vibration by the
breath, of a low pitch, and it has its seat of greatest intensity at
the cardiac apex, and is not transmitted to the left axilla or to the
base of the heart.
The mitral regurgitant or systolic murmur occurs with the
first sound of the heart, resulting from the failure of the mitral
valves to close the mitral orifice during the systole, in conse-
quence of which the blood flows back, or regurgitates into the left
auricle. It is usually of a blowing or churning character, and
has its seat of greatest intensity at the cardiac apex, being well
transmitted to the left axilla and inferior angle of the left scapula.
The aortic direct murmur occurs with the first sound of the
heart. It is caused by a narrowing of the aortic orifice, has a
rough or creaking character, is of high pitch, having its seat of
greatest intensity in the second intercostal space, to the right of
the sternum, and is well transmitted over the carotid artery.
The aortic regurgitant murmur occurs with the second sound
of the heart, and is caused by the failure of the aortic valves to
close the aortic orifice during the diastole, permitting the blood
to flow back or regurgitate into the left ventricle. It is usually
of a blowing or churning character and of low pitch, having its
seat of greatest intensity over the base of the heart, and is well
transmitted downward toward or below the cardiac apex. It is
the only organic murmur produced in the left side of the heart
which occurs with the second sound of the heart,
The tricuspid direct murmur occurs before the first sound
of the heart, the result of the failure of the tricuspid valves to close
by a narrowing of the tricuspid orifice, has a blubbering quality,
and is low in pitch, having its seat of greatest intensity near the
ensiform cartilage. This murmur is exceedingly rare.
The tricuspid regurgitant murmur occurs with the first sound
of the heart, the result of the failure of the tricuspid valves to close
the tricuspid orifice during the systole, thus allowing the blood
to flow back or regurgitate into the right auricle. It is usually
of a blowing or soft, churning character, having its seat of greatest
intensify at the ensiform cartilage. This murmur is also very
infrequent, and occurs mostly when the right ventricle is con-
siderably dilated, and without the existence of any valvular dis-
C2S62.
466 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The pulmonic direct murmur occurs with the first sound of
the heart. It is generally connected with congenital lesions. It
occurs at the same instant that the aortic direct murmur occurs,
and is distinguished from the latter by its not being transmitted
into the carotid artery, whereas the aortic direct murmur is always
thus transmitted.
The pulmonary regurgitant murmur occurs, like the aortic
regurgitant murmur, with the second sound of the heart. This
murmur is exceedingly rare, and its presence is only positively
differentiated from the aortic regurgitant murmur by the absence
of aorticlesions and symptoms.
ACUTE PERICARDITIS.
DEFINITION. An acute fibrinous inflammation of the peri-
cardium ; characterized by slight fever, pain, praecordial distress,
and disturbed cardiac action and circulation. If the inflamma-
tion be limited to the parietal or visceral layer, or to a part of
either, it is termed partial or circumscribed pericarditis; if it
involve the whole of both surfaces it is termed general or diffused
pericarditis. The inflammation may be primary or secondary.
CAUSEs. Primary pericarditis is rare, resulting directly
from cold and exposure or injuries. Secondary pericarditis fol-
lows, or is associated with, rheumatism, influenza, scarlatina,
variola, puerperal fever, tuberculosis, septicaemia, Bright's dis-
ease, gout, scurvy, and diabetes. It is frequently associated with
pneumonia and pleuro-pneumonia, particularly in alcoholics.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The same as of serous mem-
branes in other situations. The morbid changes may be seen, as
(I), acute plastic, or dry pericarditis (frequently tubercular), (2),
pericarditis with effusion, sero-fibrinous, hemorrhage, or puru-
lent. -
Hyperaemia of the membrane, most marked on the visceral
layer, followed by the exudation of lymph scattered in irregular
patches, giving it a rough and shaggy appearance (dry pericar-
ditis), followed by the effusion of a sero-fibrinous fluid, with floc-
culi floating in it, and at times mixed with blood. Rarely, the
fluid is purulent.
The fluid and lymph undergo absorption with resulting
adhesions identical with those described under pleurisy.
SYMptoms. Acute pericarditis may be well marked and still
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 467
present none of the characteristic subjective symptoms. It
usually begins with rigors, fever of the remittent type, frequently
nausea and vomiting, praecordial distress, and tenderness, acute
shooting pains, increased by breathing and coughing, dry, sup-
pressed cough, increased cardiac action, and sometimes violent
palpitation. An attack of pericarditis secondary to an existing
disease presents no marked symptoms other than those men-
tioned to indicate its onset. Attacks of nausea and vomiting
Occurring during the course of rheumatism, pneumonia, pleurisy,
and nephritis, should call attention to the heart. Duration of this
early stage from a few hours to a day or two.
Effusion Stage.—The symptoms of this stage are in keeping
with the amount and rapidity of the effusion: praecordial oppres-
sion, tendency to syncope, dyspnoea, sometimes amounting to
Orthopnoea, dysphagia, hiccough, nausea and vomiting, feeble,
irregular pulse, sometimes either melancholia, delirium, or acute
maniacal excitement.
Absorption is generally rapid, the heart remaining “irrita-
ble” for a long time after. If, instead of absorption, the fluid
accumulates, and life is not destroyed, the pericardial sac becomes
dilated, chronic pericarditis resulting.
INSPECTION. Early Stage.—Excited cardiac action is evi-
denced by the impulse. Effusion Stage.—Feeble, undulatory or
absent impulse, its position displaced upward, or, rarely, down-
ward, bulging of the praecordium and protruding abdomen.
PALPATION. Early Stage.—Excited or tumultuous impulse;
pericardial friction fremitus rare. Effusion Stage.—Feeble or
absent impulse, and if present its position is changed.
PERCUSSION. Early Stage.—Normal. Effusion Stage.—
Cardiac dullness enlarged vertically and laterally, and if consid-
erable fluid, of a triangular shape, with the base of the triangle on
a line with the sixth or seventh rib, extending from the right of the
sternum to the left of the left nipple, narrowing as it proceeds
upward to the second rib, or above, which represents the apex of
the triangle. The shape of the dullness is sometimes altered by
changing the position of the patient.
AUSCULTATION. Early Stage.—Excited cardiac action, and
usually a friction sound (exocardial murmur) synchronous with
cardiac sounds and uninfluenced by respiration, but often
increased by pressure with the stethoscope. Effusion Stage.—
Cardiac sounds feeble and deep-seated at the cardiac apex, becom-
ing louder and distinct toward the cardiac base. The friction
468 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
sound is sometimes heard at the cardiac base. If absorption
occur, the above signs gradually give place to the normal, the
friction sound returning, of a churning, or clicking, or grating
character, gradually disappearing. - *
DIAGNOSIS. Endocarditis is often confounded with pericar-
ditis, the points of distinction between which will be pointed out
when discussing that affection. Cardiac hypertrophy or dilata-
tion is sometimes confounded with pericardial effusion, the
differences between which will be pointed out when discussing
those affections. Hydro-pericardium may be mistaken for peri-
cardial effusion; see that affection.
PROGNoSIs. Controlled by the severity of the inflammation,
causes, and coexisting affections. If slight effusion, favorable.
Death has quickly occurred when a large quantity of fluid has
been rapidly effused, the patient being really drowned in his own
fluid. Adherent pericardium is a frequent sequela.
THE TREATMENT.
The results of venous obstruction are seen here as in all
Other parts of the system. The obstruction is usually due to
compression of the upper chest walls, due to contraction of the
pectoral and intercostal muscular fibers, causing contraction of
space for the action of the heart, hence venous obstruction and
engorgement of the covering of the heart—pericardium. The
most wonderful results attend the lifting off of the pressure, as
indicated above—the only thing to do in the case. Such meas-
ures as seem indicated should be instituted, and gently, persist-
ently applied, and relief is at once obtained. The medication used
to promote circulation and to reduce inflammation needs proof
of its efficacy before further trifling with life, waiting on a sup-
posed probability of its curative powers. What else is needed
than to open the channels closed by pressure, and let the pent-up
foreign fluids be carried out, healthy arterial blood come in and
supply the normal elements to build up the waste and repair the
damages sustained? Think of it! Many a “heart failure” is
recorded that need not have been, had Osteopathy been known
and applied. Lift off the pressure. Let circulation proceed.
PLATE XLI.-Spinal Concussion, Knuckle Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. - 47 I
CHRONIC PERICARDITIS.
DEFINITION. A chronic inflammation of the pericardium,
with either distention of the sac, by fluid or adhesions of the peri-
cardium (adherent pericardium); characterized by impaired
cardiac action and disturbances of the circulation.
CAUSEs. Almost always the result of an acute attack.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. If the effusion be absorbed, the
pericardial surfaces are agglutinated by several layers of lymph,
which increase the thickness of the membranes half an inch or
more, and the outer surface of the pericardium becomes adherent
to the chest walls. If the fluid be not absorbed, it may progres-
sively accumulate, distending the sac in all directions, displacing
the diaphragm and interfering with the functions of the surround-
ing viscera, or a low grade of inflammation supervenes, the fluid
becoming purulent, the disease terminating fatally after a variable
period. As much as eight to ten pints of fluid have accumulated
in the sac. -
SYMPTOMs. Praecordial pain and distress, irregular, feeble
cardiac action, dyspnoea aggravated by movement, and disturbed
circulation. An agglutinated pericardium seriously increases the
danger from an attack of any pulmonary inflammation.
INSPECTION. If the effusion be present, bulging of the prae-
cordium and displacement of the impulse. If adhesions are
formed between the pericardial surfaces as well as with the chest
walls, inspection reveals depression of the praecordium, narrow-
ing of the spaces, increased extent but displaced impulse, uninflu-
enced by deep inspiration, and recession of the intercostal spaces
(systolic dimpling) and epigastrium with every systole of the
heart, the result of the adhesions.
PALPATION. If effusion, displaced, feeble or absent impulse;
if adhesions, displaced and tumultuous impulse; occasionally a
pericardial fremitus is distinguished.
PERCUSSION. If effusion, the dullness has more or less the
character described for acute pericarditis. If adhesions, the car-
diac dullness is but slightly modified.
AUSCULTATION. If effusion, cardiac sounds feeble and deep-
seated at the apex, louder and more distinct at the cardiac base.
If adhesions, cardiac sounds are heard with equal distinctness in
their several positions, associated with a rough friction sound
(exocardial murmur).
TREATMENT. Same as for Acute Pericarditis.
472 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
HYDRO-PERICARDIUM.
SYNONYM. Pericardial dropsy.
DEFINITION. The accumulation of water in the pericardial
sac, minus inflammation; characterized by praecordial distress,
disturbed cardiac action, dyspnoea, and dysphagia.
CAUSEs. Usually a part of a general dropsy; Bright's dis-
ease; sudden pneumothorax; pressure of an aneurism or other
mediastina tumor; disease or thrombosis of the cardiac veins.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The fluid may range in quantity
from an ounce to one or two pints, and is of a clear, yellowish or
straw-colored serum, at times turbid or bloody, and of an alkaline
reaction. If the amount of fluid be large the sac is dilated, its
walls thinned by the pressure, and has a sodden appearance.
SYMPTOMs. Dropsy of the pericardium is so generally asso-
ciated with hydrothorax that the symptoms are but an aggrega-
tion of those attending upon that condition, to-wit: disturbed
cardiac action, dyspnoea, dysphagia, dry cough, and feeble circu-
lation. The physical signs are exactly those of the stage of
effusion of pericarditis, minus a friction sound.
DIAGNOSTs. Pericarditis with effusion and hydro-pericar-
dium present nearly the same signs and symptoms, a differentia-
tion being possible only by a history of the case and the symptoms
of the attack.
TREATMENT. Same as for Acute Pericarditis.
ACUTE ENDOCARDITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Valvulitis; exudative endocarditis.
DEFINITION. An acute fibrinous inflammation of the serous
membrane lining the cavity of the heart and forming its valves,
in severe cases the chordae tendineae being involved, resulting in
changes in the valves or orifices of the heart, or both ; character-
ized by cough, dyspnoea, disturbed cardiac action, nausea, vomit-
ing, and more or less marked febrile reaction. Acute endocarditis
occurs in two distinct forms: plastic or simple exudative endo-
carditis; ulcerous or diphtheritic endocarditis.
CAUSEs. Usually secondary to acute articular rheumatism,
pleuritis, pneumonia, pericarditis, Bright's disease, Scarlatina,
influenza, and diphtheria. The association of acute endocarditis
and chorea is frequent. While as yet no specific micro-organism
A DRUGLEss systEM of HEALING. 473
has been discovered, the view is gaining ground that it is a
microbic affection. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Inflammation of the endocar-
dium is usually limited to the left side of the heart after birth,
during foetal life the reverse being the case. The inflammation
is limited or especially marked at the valvular portions of the
endocardium, owing probably to the presence of fibrous tissue
beneath the membrane in these situations, and to the strain which
falls upon the valves during the performance of their functions.
Hyperaemia from congestion of the vessels beneath the
membrane, with considerable swelling of the valves, the result of
an exudation of lymph and serum beneath and on the free sur-
face of the membrane covering the valves and chordae tendineae,
resulting in the roughening of the surfaces and the agglutination
of the mitral valves to each other, and of the aortic segments to
the walls of the aorta, or the proliferation of the endocardial con-
nective tissue, forming the nuclei of the so-called warty excres-
cences or vegetations, their size being increased by the deposition
of fibrin from the blood within the cavities of the heart. These
vegetations may be detached by friction, giving rise to emboli
which may be washed by the blood current to the left side of the
brain, or into the kidneys and the spleen.
In the ulcerative variety a process of softening takes place in
the fibrinous deposits, leading to ulcerations and perforations.
SYMPTOMs. The affection is usually masked by the course of
another disease until disturbances of the circulation direct atten-
tion to the heart. The onset is often by increase of temperature,
praecordial distress, short cough, slight dyspnoea, more or less
persistent vomiting, increased cardiac action, often rapid and
tumultuous, with throbbing carotids and noises in the ear. As
the inflammation progresses, the cardiac action and pulse decline
in rapidity, with more or less congestion of the lungs and venous
stasis. 4
AUSCULTATION. Shows a change in the character of the
sounds or the development of murmurs at the various orifices, the
character and points of distinction between which will be pointed
out when discussing valvular diseases of the heart.
DURATION. Between one and three weeks.
D1AGNoSIs. Unless it is a rule of practice to always auscult
the heart, many cases will pass unobserved or undetected. Peri-
carditis is distinguished from endocarditis by the character of the
physical signs. In pericarditis the murmur or friction sound is
474 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
heard with either sound, is near to the ear and influenced by the
pressure of the stethoscope, besides being associated with more or
less alteration in the size and shape of the cardiac dullness, and is
not transmitted, while in endocarditis the murmur takes the place
of, or is associated with, the cardiac sounds, and is transmitted,
with the absence of change or increased dullness on percussion.
If embolism occur, a new set of symptoms develop; embolism of
the kidneys causes sudden, deep-seated lumbar pain, with albu-
minuria and even haematuria; embolism of the brain, sudden
palsies and sudden disturbance of consciousness; of the spleen,
sharp pain and tenderness in the splenic region; of the skin,
petechial or purpuric spots. -
PROGNoSIs. Acute endocarditis is not very dangerous to
life, hence a favorable prognosis may be given; regarding the
ultimate results of valvular lesions, however, the prognosis is
grave.
TREATMENT. The same as for Acute Pericarditis. Use the
treatment that lifts off the pressure, which is the only thing to be
done.
MALIGNANT ENDOCARDITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Ulcerative endocarditis; septic, mycotic, and
diphtheritic endocarditis.
DEFINITION. An acute septic inflammation of the lining
membrane of the heart, with a strong tendency to ulceration;
characterized by depression of the vital forces with more or less
cardiac distress. -
CAUSEs. The specific micro-organism has not yet been
determined. Frequently complicates pneumonia. Associated
with acute rheumatism. Cases have been reported associated
with or following influenza.
PATHoLocICAL ANATOMY. The changes are those of acute
endocarditis up to the development of the thickening of the endo-
cardium lining the valves, and the development of the vegetations.
Instead of the poison spending its force and the chronic condition
obtaining, a process of softening, ulceration, development of
abscess and perforation of leaflets follows, resulting in loss of
structure, general septic infection, and the development of emboli,
which lead to infarctions, with their results in either brain, kidney,
spleen, eye, or skin.
SYMPTOMs. Vary greatly, but always associated with con-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 475
stitutional signs of sepsis—a typhoid state, such as headache,
restlessness, varying delirium, coated, dry tongue, sordes on teeth
and lips, nausea, vomiting, loose or disordered stools, enlarged
spleen, albumen in urine, and an irregular temperature record,
varying from IOO degrees F. to IO4 degrees F., or higher, asso-
ciated with rigors and heavy sweating. The cardiac action is
rapid, irregular, and weak—a compressible pulse. In the notes
of twelve cases observed in the Philadelphia Hospital are the
following symptoms: attacks of prolonged dyspnoea with par-
Oxysms of intensity, or a slightly quickened respiration with par-
Oxysms of dyspnoea occurring every few days. In four cases
the paroxysms occurred three times daily, with respirations
under twenty-five between the paroxysms, for three weeks pre-
ceding death. Usually the respirations are so oppressed that the
recumbent position is impossible for long periods. Another fre-
quent symptom is marked cyanosis, either transient or lasting for
days before the end. A frequent symptom of ulcerative endo-
carditis is a peculiar facies, indicative of a sense of impending
danger, great anxiety, or terror. If embolism occur, there are
superadded symptoms varying with the organ affected. If the
brain, rapidly developing palsies with disorder of consciousness;
if the kidneys, deep-seated lumbar pains with haematuria or dis-
ordered urinary flow; if the spleen, pain and tenderness of the
splenic region, with increase of temperature record.
AUSCULTATION. The booming, muscular, first sound is
superseded by a feeble, irregular cardiac pulsation. Generally, a
murmur may be detected. -
DIAGNOSIs. One of the most difficult. Remembering the
diseases with which malignant endocarditis may occur, and par-
ticularly pneumonia or sepsis, and the dyspnoea, the cyanosis, the
facies, and the temperature record, it may be possible to diagnose
the disease much more frequently than is done.
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. Recovery the rarest termina-
tion.
TREATMENT. Same as for Acute Pericarditis.
CHRONIC ENDOCARDITIS. 4
SYNONYMs. Sclerotic endocarditis; interstitial endocarditis;
chronic valvular disease. -
DEFINITION. Alterations in the cardiac valves or orifices,
rendering the former incapable of properly closing the orifices, or
476 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
causing the narrowed orifice to interrupt the blood current in its
normal movement. The lesions are of two kinds: obstructive
and regurgitant.
A regurgitant lesion, termed also insufficiency, is such change
in the valves as to permit a portion of the blood to flow backward
instead of onward, the true direction of the blood current. An
obstructive lesion, termed also stenosis, is a narrowing of the
orifice, thereby obstructing the onward passage of the blood.
VARIETIES. I. Mitral regurgitation. 2. Aortic regurgita-
tation. 3. Tricuspid regurgitation. 4. Pulmonary regurgita-
tion. 5. Mitral obstruction. 6. Aortic obstruction. 7. Tricus-
pid obstruction. 8. Pulmonic obstruction.
CAUSEs. The great majority of cases are the result of acute
endocarditis following rheumatism, chorea, or the infectious dis-
eases. Chronic endocarditis from the onset is caused by alco-
holism, syphilis, gout, and excessive muscular labor. Chronic
Bright's diseases are also exciting causes. Professor Da Costa
has clearly established the development of aortic disease in early
life by overwork and strain of the heart. In the elderly, chronic
endocarditis is the result of atheromatous or fibroid changes.
MITRAL REGURGITATION.
This form, also termed insufficiency, is the most frequent of
all the varieties. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The most common conditions
observed are more or less contraction and narrowing of the
tongues of the valves, with irregular thickening and rigidity;
atheroma or calcification of the segments; laceration of one or
more segments; adhesion of one or more segments to the inner
surface of the ventricle; thickened and stiffened or rupture of the
chordae tendineae, and also contraction and hardening of the mus-
culi papillaries. As a result of the regurgitation of the blood
into the left auricle, there is dilatation of the auricle, followed by
slight hypertrophy.
SYMPTOMs. Insufficiency of the mitral valves soon leads to
cardiac hypertrophy, to compensate for the diminished amount of
blood sent onward by the ventricular systole. This condition
causes quickened and strong pulse with some shortness of breath
on severe exertion. When the “compensation ruptures” there
occur praecordial distress, cough, dyspnoea, feeble, soft, rapid,
irregular pulse; finally pulmonary congestion, Oedematous limbs
and general cyanosis, the abdominal cavity filled, liver congested,
A DRUGLEss system of HEALING. 477
urine scanty and albuminous, the patient dying “drowned in his
own fluid.”
INSPECTION. Cardiac impulse (apex-beat) displaced to the
left and downward. In children and youths, bulging of the prae-
cordia and increased cardiac impulse.
PALPATION. Displaced cardiac impulse, early stage being
forcible and diffused; as compensation fails, impulse feeble or
absent.
PERCUSSION. Transverse and vertical cardiac dullness in-
creased.
AUSCULTATION. Systolic blowing or churning murmur,
audible in the mitral area, propagated to the apex, left axilla, and
under the angle of the scapula, either occurring with or taking
the place of the first sound of the heart; the second sound being
markedly accentuated.
PROGNoSIs. So long as the compensating hypertrophy can
be maintained the prognosis is not unfavorable; when dilatation
supervenes, however, the patient soon perishes, either from con-
gestion of the lungs or dropsy and exhaustion.
AORTIC REGURGITATION,
Termed also, aortic insufficiency, is next in frequency to mitral
insufficiency.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The valves or segments adhere to
the walls of the aorta, or a segment is lacerated or may be per-
forated, or, more commonly, the segments are shrunken,
deformed, and rigid, permitting the regurgitation of the blood.
These deficiencies in the valves are usually associated with more
or less narrowing of the orifices. The inability of the aortic
valves to close the aortic orifice at the proper moment allows the
blood that should go onward to flow back into the left ventricle,
and the normal flow of blood from the left auricle continuing,
causes overfilling of the ventricle, which results in a dilatation of
its cavity, and the extra effort of the ventricle to empty itself
results in hypertrophy of the walls. In no other condition does
the dilatation and hypertrophy of the cardiac walls reach such a
degree. The older writers named this enormous enlargement
of the heart cor bovinum.
SYMPTOMs. Those of marked hypertrophy, to-wit: forcible
cardiac action, headache, tinnitus aurium, congestion of the face
and eyes, with pulsating vessels, even small ones pulsating that
before were not visible to the eye; pulsations of the retinal vessels
can be recognized with the ophthalmoscope; the receding pulse,
478 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
which is particularly characteristic—forcible impulse but rapidly
declining, called “water-hammer” pulse; also, the “Corrigan
pulse.” When “compensation ruptures,” dyspnoea, cough, cyan-
osis, hepatic enlargement, congestion of the kidneys, with scanty,
albuminous urine, ascites, and dropsy. If mitral insufficiency is
now superadded, general venous stasis and death rapidly occur.
Praecordial pain is usually present in aortic disease. It may be a
sensation of constriction in the cardiac region, or sharp, shooting
pains extending to the arms—anginoidal attacks.
INSPECTION. . Forcible cardiac impulse.
PALPATION. Strong, full cardiac impulse.
PERCUSSION. Cardiac dullness increasing transversely and
vertically.
AUSCULTATION. First Sound.—Forcible. Second Sound.
—Replaced or associated with a churning, rushing, or blowing
murmur of low pitch, distinct at the second right costal cartilage,
but most distinct at the junction of the sternum and the fourth left
costal cartilage, transmitted downward toward and below the
apex.
PROGNOSIS. The one valvular disease most likely to occa-
sion sudden death; still, so long as the compensating hypertrophy
remains intact, compatible with quite an active life.
TRICUSPID REGURGITATION.
PATHoLocICAL ANATOMY. This form of valvular insuffi-
ciency is either associated with right-sided cardiac dilatation from
pulmonary obstruction, or is the result of mitral disease. The
tricuspid orifice is dilated in the majority of cases; occasionally
the segments of the valves are contracted or adherent to the ven-
tricle.
SYMPTOMs. Venous stasis with its various consequences,
and especially pulsation of the jugulars, synchronous with the
cardiac movement, and, finally, general venous pulsation, espe-
cially of the liver, pulmonary congestion, engorgement of the
kidneys, and dropsy. These symptoms are superadded to those
of the affections with which tricuspid insufficiency is always asso-
ciated. -
INSPECTION. Diffused, wavy, cardiac impulse; jugular pul-
sation synchronous with the cardiac movement, uninfluenced by
respiration, also more or less prominent hepatic pulsation. -
PALPATION. The cardiac impulse extended, but feeble.
PERCUSSION. Dullness on percussion, extending to the right
and below the sternum.
PLATE XLII.-Liver, Chest and Side Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 481
AUSCULTATION. The first sound is accompanied by a blow-
ing murmur most intense at the junction of the fourth and fifth
ribs with the sternum, distinct over the xiphoid appendix, becom-
ing feeble or lost in the left axillary region; often associated, how-
ever, with a mitral systolic murmur.
PULMONIC REGURGITATION.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Insufficiency of the pulmonary
valves is of rare occurrence, but when present the changes corre-
spond more or less with those described for aortic regurgitation.
SYMPTOMs. Those of dilatation of the right side of the
heart and consequent pulmonary congestion, to-wit: dyspnoea,
deficient aeration of the blood and cyanosis, distention of the
superficial vessels, palpitation of the heart, praecordial distress,
sudden suffocative attacks, and dropsy.
PERCUSSION. The cardiac dullness extending to the right
of the sternum.
AUSCULTATION. A loud, blowing murmur associated with
the second sound of the heart, most distinct at the junction of the
third left costal cartilage and the sternum.
PROGNOSIS. Death results, sooner or later, from dropsy and
exhaustion. ſº *
MITRAL, OBSTRUCTION.
Mitral obstruction or stenosis is not as frequent as regurgi-
tation, and is very often associated with the latter.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Mitral stenosis is caused by
deposits around the orifice, the result of endocarditis, or else the
segments of the valves are “glued together by their margins,”
leaving but a funnel-shaped opening, the so-called “buttonhole”
mitral valve. Vegetations on the valves lead to more or les
obstruction to the blood-current. .
SYMPTOMs. Hypertrophy of the left auricle results from
obstruction at the mitral orifice, followed in time by dilatation,
the symptoms of stenosis being unobservable until the “compen-
sation ruptures,” or until dilatation becomes excessive, when
occur irregular, small, and feeble pulse, dyspnoea, cough, bron-
chorrhoea the result of bronchial congestion; dilatation of the
right side of the heart, soon leading to general venous stasis,
dropsy, and death.
INSPECTION. Normal until auricular hypertrophy, when an
undulatory impulse is observed over the left auricle.
PALPATION. When cardiac dilatation occurs, a diffused,
482 oSTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
feeble, and irregular cardiac impulse is felt near the xiphoid
appendix. i
AUSCULTATION. First sound normal in character, but often
irregular in rhythm. The second sound normal. A blowing,
sometimes rasping, sound is heard, immediately after the second
sound of the heart ceases, and immediately before the first sound
begins—a presystolic murmur, heard most distinctly in the mitral
area, lessening in intensity toward the cardiac base. The cardiac
Sounds are all more or less enfeebled if cardiac dilatation occur.
PROGNOSIS. The prognosis is controlled by the duration of
the hypertrophy. Under favorable circumstances mitral stenosis
is compatible with a long and rather active life.
AORTIC OBSTRUCTION.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Stenosis of the aortic orifice is
caused by the projection of the valves inward, and their becoming
rigid and thickened, or atheromatous or calcareous, so that they
can not be pressed back by the blood, but remain constantly in
the current of the circulation. Occasionally the valves are cov-
ered with fibrinous masses, the opening into the artery being thus
more or less completely closed, or the segments may be adherent
by their lateral surfaces, leaving a central opening, which may be
so contracted as to permit the passage of only the smallest probe.
SYMPTOMs. Hypertrophy of the left ventricle rapidly super-
venes upon aortic stenosis. The pulse is small, slow, and hard.
The supply of blood to the brain is insufficient in many cases, and
hence attacks of vertigo, syncope, or slight epileptiform seizures
occur; finally, dilatation of the left ventricle and incompetence
of the mitral valve result, with subsequent pulmonary congestion,
dyspnoea, and general venous stasis, the pulse soft and feeble.
PALPATION. Lowered cardiac impulse, strong in the early
stage, feeble when dilatation occurs.
PERCUSSION. The cardiac dullness is increased vertically,
the transverse dullness being slightly affected.
AUscultATION. The first sound replaced or associated with
a harsh, rasping sound, whistling at times, having its greatest
intensity at the junction of the second right costal cartilage with
the sternum, transmitted along the vessels; the murmur may
sometimes be heard a short distance from the patient. Usually
aortic stenosis is associated with more or less acrtic regurgitation,
whence a double murmur occurs, having its greatest intensity at
the base of the heart, the so-called to-and-fro, or see-saw
111111"In 111.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 483
PROGNOSIS. So long as compensation is maintained the con-
dition of the patient is comfortable, if a quiet life be followed.
When the compensation is ruptured, the usual symptoms of
dilatation, venous stasis, and dropsy soon ensue. .
TRICUSPID OBSTRUCTION.
This condition is one of the rarest affections of the heart, and
if it ever does occur with or following an attack of endocarditis,
the anatomical changes are similar to those of mitral obstruction.
This condition soon leads to auricular dilatation; venous stasis
rapidly supervenes, associated with venous pulsations similar to
those described when speaking of tricuspid regurgitation.
PULMONIC OBSTRUCTION.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Always a congenital malady, the
changes consisting in “constriction of the pulmonary artery, un-
closed foramen ovale, unclosed ductus Botalli, stricture at the
ductus Botalli, with hypertrophy of the right cavity and frequent
association with tuberculosis of the lungs.” Hypertrophy of the
right ventricle may ensue, the walls becoming almost as thick as
those upon the left side. Those in whom these congenital defects
in the cardiac structure occur are otherwise weak. Develop
slowly, have flabby tissues, soft bones, and seem poorly nourished.
SYMPTOMs. The hypertrophy wheh often ensues may keep
life apparently comfortable for some time, but sooner or later
“compensation ruptures,” when cough, dyspnoea, cyanosis, and
death occur. * |
PROGNOSIS. The duration of these congenital affections is
short, usually from a few days to a few months; although several
well authenticated cases record a much longer duration.
DIAGNOSIS OF THE VALVULAR DISEASES.
In making a differential diagnosis between the various forms
of valvular disease of the heart, strict attention must be paid to
the points of greatest intensity at which the several murmurs are
heard.
A murmur occurring with or taking the place of the first
sound of the heart—the ventricular systole—heard most distinctly
at the apex, transmitted to the left axilla, and to the inferior angle
of the scapula, signifies mitral regurgitation—a mitral systolic
murmur. A murmur occurring with or taking the place of the
first sound of the heart, with its point of greatest intensity at the
xiphoid appendix, signifies regurgitation at the tricuspid orifice—
tricuspid systolic murmur. A murmur heard with the first sound
484 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
of the heart, high-pitched, rasping or grating in character, with
its point of intensity greatest at the second right costal cartilage,
signifies obstruction at the aortic orifice—an aortic systolic mur-
mur. A murmur heard with the first sound of the heart, soft
in character, with its point of intensity most distinct at the junc-
tion of the third left costal cartilage with the sternum, signifies
obstruction at the pulmonic orifice—a pulmonic systolic murmur.
A murmur occurring immediately after the second sound of the
heart, and immediately before the beginning of the first sound of
the heart, signifies obstruction at the mitral orifice—a presystolic
mitral murmur. A murmur heard with or taking the place of the
second sound of the heart, most distinct at the second costal
cartilage, to the right of the sternum, and well transmitted toward
the apex or below, signifies insufficiency or regurgitation at the
aortic orifice—an aortic regurgitant or diastolic murmur.
Although eight distinct valvular murmurs have been
described as occurring in the heart, those on the right side are of
rare occurrence, and hence of little clinical importance. w
If a murmur be heard with the first sound of the heart, it is
almost certainly acrtic obstructive or mitral regurgitant; and if
heard with the second sound, it is probably acrtic regurgitant.
A presystolic mitral murmur is also of comparatively rare occur-
rence, the force with which the blood passes from the left auricle
into the left ventricle being, under ordinary circumstances, insuf-
ficient to excite sonorous vibrations. -
Functional or anaemic murmurs may be confounded with the
various forms of valvular disease of the heart. The chief points
of distinction between them are, that an anaemic murmur, which
is always heard at the base of the heart, is always systolic in time,
not transmitted away from the heart, and is soft in character, low
in pitch, and of variable intensity, now being heard, now entirely
absent. -
CARDIAC HYPERTROPHY.
DEFINITION. An overgrowth or increase in the muscular
tissue which forms the walls of the heart; characterized by forci-
ble pulse, over-fullness of the arteries, diminished blood in the
veins, and accelerated circulation.
CAUSEs. Obstruction to the outflow of blood, resulting
from valvular disease of the heart; emphysema; Bright's disease;
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 4S5
arterio-fibrosis; functional Over-action; excessive use of tobacco,
tea, coffee, or excessive muscular action. -
VARIETIES. I. Simple hypertrophy, or a simple increase in
the thickness of the cardiac walls. 2. Eccentric hypertrophy,
increase in the cardiac walls and dilatation of the cavities, to-wit:
Dilated hypertrophy. 3. Concentric hypertrophy, increase in the
cardiac walls, with decrease of the cavities, a very rare form.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hypertrophy of the heart is
usually limited to the left side, the ventricles more commonly
than the auricles, the latter dilating. The shape of the heart is
altered by hypertrophy; if the right ventricle, the heart is widened
transversely and the apex blunted; if the left ventricle, the heart is
elongated and, as a rule, the cavity is dilated; if both ventricles
are hypertrophied, the heart has a globular shape. From increase
in weight the heart may sink lower during the recumbent posi-
tion, thereby lessening the area of cardiac dullness, but during the
sitting or upright posture it sinks lower in the chest and to the
left, causing more or less prominence of the abdomen. The
increase in the size of the organ is a true increase or hypertrophy
of the muscular tissue, and not a hyperplasia. The tissue is
firmer and the color brighter and fresher than when the size of the
organ is normal. The cor bovinum of the old writers is an enor-
mous hypertrophy of the heart with dilatation of its cavities.
SYMPTOMs. Depend upon the amount of hypertrophy. The
most common are increased and forcible cardiac action, the
arteries becoming fuller, the veins less full, and the circulation
accelerated, pulsating carotids and aorta, headache, often vertigo,
frequent epistaxis, congestion of the face and eyes, tinnitus
aurium, dyspnoea on exertion, dry cough, restless nights, with
more or less jerking of the limbs, occasional praecordial pains
shooting toward the left axilla, full, firm, bounding pulse, and
pulsations in the superficial arteries.
A sphygmographic tracing shows the line of ascent vertical
and abrupt, but the apex is rounded, and the line of descent is
oblique, unless there is more or less insufficiency of the valves,
INSPECTION. Often fullness or prominence of the praecor-
dium, with distinct impulse.
PALPATION. The impulse is felt one or two intercostal
spaces lower down and to the left, and is stronger and more or
less diffused—the heaving impulse. . . .
PERCUssion. The area of cardiac dullness is increased
vertically and transversely upon the left side of the sternum, unless"
486 ostEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the right ventricle is also hypertrophied, when the cardiac dull-
ness is increased to the right of the sternum.
AUscultATION. If simple hypertrophy without any coex-
isting changes in the valves or orifices, the first sound has a loud
and somewhat metallic quality, the second sound being strongly
accentuated. g
SEQUELE. Cerebral hemorrhage; miliary cerebral aneu-
risms; dilatation of the heart; fatty changes of the cardiac tissue.
DIAGNosis. Hypertrophy of the heart can scarcely be
mistaken for any other disease if a careful study of the physical
signs be made.
PROGNoSIs. When the result of valvular disease, the hyper-
trophy is said to be compensatory. If the result of Bright's
disease, emphysema of lung, or if occurring late in life, or asso-
ciated with atheromatous degeneration of the vessels, the prog-
nosis is unfavorable; when the result of functional over-action in
the strong and robust, a further enlargement can often be pre-
vented by active and persistent treatment.
DILATATION OF THE HEART.
DEFINITION. An increase in the size of one or more of the
cavities of the heart, without any increase or thickening of the
cardiac walls; in fact, the walls are frequently thinner—stretched;
characterized by feebleness of the circulation, terminating in
venous stasis, cyanosis, Oedema, and exhaustion.
CAUSEs. Over-exertion in those of feeble resisting powers,
as youths or soldiers, as first pointed out by Professor Da Costa ;
chronic valvular disease; emphysema; chronic bronchitis; gout;
Bright's disease; alcoholism; syphilis.
VARIETIES. I. Simple dilatation, the cavities being en-
larged, the walls normal. 2. Active dilatation, corresponding to
eccentric hypertrophy; the cavities being enlarged and the walls
increased in thickness, the so-called “dilated hypertrophy.” 3.
Passive dilatation, the cavities being enlarged and the walls
thinned or stretched. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The right side of the heart is far
more frequently involved than the left side. The shape of the
organ is altered, depending on the part affected. The weight of
the organ is, as a rule, increased, as hypertrophy almost always
accompanies or precedes dilatation. t
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 487
The muscular tissue is generally pale, mottled, and softened,
and under the microscope presents evidences of degeneration:
The orifices also participate, and especially the auriculo-ventricu-
lar, resulting in the valves becoming incompetent to close the
orifices, and this latter effect is added to by the removal of the
basis of the papillary muscles a greater distance from the orifice,
in consequence of the extension of the wall. When the auricles
dilate, the large venous trunks opening into them unprotected by
valves commonly participate in the dilatation, and may become
greatly enlarged. The passive congestion of the organs that
follows the feeble circulation produces changes in their structure.
SYMPTOMs. Those associated with enfeebled circulation,
to-wit: feeble pulse, veins distended, arteries emptied; headache,
aggravated by the upright position; attacks of syncope, cough,
with any of the following phenomena of venous congestion: of
the lungs, dyspnoea; liver, jaundice; stomach, dyspepsia; intes-
tines, constipation; kidneys, scanty, often albuminous urine;
brain, dullness of the mind and vertigo, often relieved by a copious
epistaxis; and, finally, dropsy, beginning in the lower extremities,
the patient dying from exhaustion.
Great relief often temporarily follows the above symp-
toms under treatment; sooner or later, however, the venous stasis
produces the final symptoms noted.
Q INSPECTION. Veins of the surface distended and enlarged;
indistinct cardiac impulse, often diffused and wavy; if associated
with tricuspid insufficiency, there is pulsation of the jugular.
PALPATION. Feeble and irregular fluttering but heaving
impulse. .
PERCUSSION. Cardiac dullness extended transversely, and
especially increased on the right side.
AUSCULTATION. If no valvular lesion accompany the dila-
tation, the cardiac sounds are weaker than normal, the first Sounds
having a sharper quality than normal; if accompanied by valvular
lesions, cardiac murmurs are present. -
DIAGNOSIs. Hypertrophy of the heart shows increased
cardiac dullness, and is a disease of powerful cardiac action, while
dilatation is an affection of feeble action associated with dropsy.
Pericardial effusion has many points of resemblance to car-
diac dilatation, but it begins suddenly, associated with some
acute malady; and while the heart sounds are indistinct or feeble
at the apex, they both have their normal qualities at the cardiac
base, while dilatation of the heart has a chronic history, results in
488 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
general venous stasis, the cardiac sounds being of the same inten-
sity over the entire praecordia. +
PROGNOSIS. Unfavorable, death resulting from gradual
exhaustion, or suddenly by cardiac paralysis if there be some
undue excitement.
ACUTE MYOCARDITIS.
SYNONYMs. Carditis; abscess of the heart.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the muscular tissue of the
heart, by extension from an inflamed pericardium or endocar-
dium, or secondary to pyaemia; characterized by pain, feeble cir-
culation, symptoms of blood poisoning, and collapse.
CAUSEs. The result of endocarditis or pericarditis; pyaemia;
typhoid fever; emboli of the coronary arteries.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Discoloration and softening of
the cardiac substance and the infiltration of a sero-sanguineous
fluid, fibrinous exudation and pus, leading to the formation of
abscesses in the muscular structure of the heart.
The disease leads to the formation of either a cardiac aneu-
rism or to rupture of the walls of the heart. If recovery occur,
cicatrices or depressed scars may mark the site of a former
abscess. -
SYMPTOMs. The clinical evidences of inflammation of the
cardiac muscles are very obscure. If, during the course of one of
the maladies mentioned, there are developed praecordial pain,
irregular and feeble cardiac action, cardiac dyspnoea, pyrexia of a
low type, with symptoms of blood poisoning, and a tendency to
collapse, or the symptoms of the so-called typhoid state, myo-
carditis may be suspected.
DIAGNOSIS. The existence of myocarditis can scarcely ever
be anything but a presumption, the signs being all negative rather
than positive. If during the course of rheumatism, pyaemia,
puerperal fever, typhoid fever, pericarditis, or endocarditis, symp-
toms of cardiac failure appear suddenly, associated with signs of
blood poisoning and collapse, inflammation of the cardiac muscle
may be suspected.
PROGNoSIs. The course of acute myocarditis is vary rapid,
death being the usual termination, in from three to five days.
Chronic myocarditis pursues a very latent course.
- -
-
PLATE XLIII.-Manipulation of Spine, Dorsal Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 491
tºº
CHRONIC MYOCARDITIS.
SYNONYMS. Fibroid heart; chronic interstitial myocarditis;
fibrous myocarditis; chronic carditis; cardio-sclerosis.
DEFINITION. A slowly developing hyperplasia of the inter-
stitial connective tissue of the heart, leading to induration of its
substance; characterized by shortness of breath on slight exer-
tion, attacks of tachycardia, praecordial pain, disordered circula-
tion, and vertigo. It is proper to state that many cases present
no symptoms whatever. .
CAUSEs. The most frequent cause is sclerosis of the coro-
nary arteries, leading to imperfect blood supply to the cardiac
muscles. Amongst other frequent causes are diseases of the kid-
neys, alcoholism, excessive use of tobacco, syphilis, secondary to
pericarditis, endocarditis, and acute myocarditis. There is,
undoubtedly, often an inherited predisposition to fibroid changes
in the vessels, in which cases the causes named would act as excit-
ing causes. It is a disease of the aged, save in those instances
resulting from excesses. The old saying, “A man is as old as his
arteries,” is applicable to this disease.
PATHOLOGICAI, ANATOMY. The heart is enlarged and dilat-
ed. The morbid changes may be diffused, or limited to the walls
of the left ventricle, the papillary muscles, and the septum. There
is always more or less atheromatous deposit or changes in the
aorta. All cases show atheroma in one, more, or all of the coro-
nary arteries. Complete closure of one coronary artery, if pro-
duced suddenly, is usually fatal. On section the cardiac wall cuts
with a distinct resistance. The changes in the heart wall are an
“overgrowth of the interfibrillar connective tissue, with develop-
ment of fibrous tissue. These changes may be uniformly distrib-
uted through the substance of the heart when some intoxication,
as by alcohol, or some general disturbance of the cardiac nutri-
tion, has led to the myocardial disease; or they may be seen in
circumscribed areas when embolic or thrombotic occlusion of
branches in the coronary arteries has occasioned anaemic infar-
cation and subsequent sclerosis. In either case the microscope
reveals masses of wavy fibrous tissue between the muscular bun-
dles, and often slow degeneration or atrophy of the fibers them-
selves.” (Pepper.) The terminal branches of the coronary
arteries are narrowed and sclerotic to the point of obliteration,
particularly in cases resulting from syphilis.
“Aneurism of the heart is, commonly due to localized cardio-
sclerosis. The inelastic fibrous tissue gradually gives way before
492 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the intracardial pressure, and saccular dilatation results.”
(Pepper.)
Atheromatous changes are often found in other than the
coronary vessels, particularly the aorta. Various degenerative
changes occur in other organs, the result of disturbed circulatory
action.
SYMPTOMs. The great majority of patients having chronic
myocarditis present no symptoms until an extra cardiac effort is
called for. An early symptom is breathlessness on slight exer-
tion, with either cardiac palpitation or a feeble, irregular pulse.
Anginal attacks (cardiac pain) or a sensation of constriction or
pressure over the praecordia are frequent, often following some
exertion or an attack of indigestion. The pulse-rate is decreased
in number in cases which present no other symptom. A frequent
symptom is syncope, coming without warning or after sudden
exertion, the result of sudden failure of the cerebral circulation.
Amongst other periodical symptoms are cardiac asthma, pseudo-
apoplectic attacks, hepatic, gastric, and nephritic disorders.
As the fibroid changes progress, there develops progressive
weakness, dyspnoea, insomnia, disordered digestion, and cerebral
weakness, often showing itself as mania, delusional attacks, or
dementia.
PERCUSSION. Increased praecordial dullness is usually
present, due to the dilated hypertrophy.
AUSCULTATION. The first sound of the heart is valvular in
character, the booming or muscular quality having disappeared.
Murmurs are very frequent, the result of valvular disease. A
very characteristic point is the irregularity in rhythm and in force,
one contraction being fairly forcible, another weak or feeble, and
SO O11.
DIAGNOSIS. A proper appreciation of chronic myocarditis
is one of the most important questions in clinical medicine. The
term Heart Failure is the opprobium of the profession, and yet
chronic myocarditis is one of the great causes of cardiac failure
during the prevalence of some over-exertion, in acute pneumonia,
typhoid fever, and other like diseases. The points of value in
arriving at a diagnosis are: a careful study of the first sound
of the heart at the apex; the character of murmurs if present, the
condition of the arteries, the dyspnoea, the feeble, irregular pulse
in patients past fifty years, and the occurrence of anginal attacks
after exertion or mental worry.
PROGNoSIs. Ths is controlled by the habits of the patient.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 493
The disease is incurable, but life may be fairly comfortable for
many years if care be exercised.
FATTY HEART.
SYNONYMS. Fatty degeneration of the heart; chronic myo-
carditis.
DEFINITION. A change in the muscular fibers of the heart,
in which the transverse striae are replaced by granules and
globules of fat; characterized by feeble cardiac action, venous
stasis, and dyspnoea.
CAUSES. Impaired nutrition in the elderly; prolonged
anaemia; chronic gout; alcoholism; phosphorus poisoning; can-
cer; tuberculosis and scrofula; diseases of the coronary arteries.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The distinction must be made
between a deposit of fatty tissue upon or around the heart, and
the degeneration of its muscular tissue.
The fatty metamorphosis may affect the whole organ, or the
entire ventricular walls, or be limited to portions of them. If the
degeneration be marked, the color is yellowish, the tissues soft
and easily torn, and to the touch have a greasy feeling, oil being
yielded on pressure. -
The microscopic changes are characteristic. The striae of
the muscle are easily rendered indistinct by fat and oil globules,
gradually becoming more and more obscured, and finally disap-
pearing altogether, the fibers being replaced by fat granules.
SYMPTOMs. Those of weak heart, anaemia of organs, and
venous stasis, to-wit: feeble, irregular, but slow 'cardiac action,
compressible pulse, praecordial distress, often aggravated by
attacks of angina pectoris; dyspnoea, aggravated on exertion,
with anaemia of the various organs from the feeble propulsive
power; if of brain, vertigo, swooning, or pseudo-epileptic attacks,
especially marked on suddenly rising from a recumbent position ;
if of lungs, dry, hacking cough ; if of gastro-intestinal tract, dys-
pepsia and constipation; if of kidneys, scanty urine, at times
albuminous; and finally dropsy, beginning in the lower extremi-
ties.
A formidable symptom, causing much inconvenience as well
as alarm to the patient, is what he will term his constant “sigh-
ing,” the Cheyne-Stokes breathing—“A pause in the breathing, a
complete suspension of the respiratory acts for a period of time
494 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
(during which breathing might occur several times in the normal
manner), then the resumption of respiration very feebly and
slowly, and a gradual and progressive increase in the number and
depth of respirations until the maximum is reached, and then
again a gradual and progressive diminution, in the same order, in
the number and depth of the respirations, until another pause
occurs”—the “oscillating respiration.” -
Concomitant symptoms are atheromatous changes in the
vessels, and the arcus senilis.
PALPATION. Weak cardiac impulse.
PERCUSSION. Not markedly changed unless preceded by
enlargement of the heart
AUSCULTATION. First sound feeble, toneless, almost inaudi-
ble, the second sound being normal, unless changes in the valves
are present.
DIAGNOSIS. Feeble cardiac sounds, with slow pulse, attacks
of cardiac asthma or Cheyne-Stokes breathing, with evidences
of arcus senilis, make the diagnosis very certain. The question
of fibroid heart must always be considered. -
PROGNoSIs. Incurable, the affections pursuing a more or
less chronic course. Life may be prolonged at times by treat-
ment, but death finally results from exhaustion, or suddenly, from
cardiac paralysis or rupture of the heart.
PALPITATION OF THE HEART.
SYNoNYM. Irritable heart.
DEFINITION. A functional disturbance of the heart, char-
acterized by increasing frequency of its movements, and more or
less irregularity of the rhythm, with a strong tendency toward
hypertrophy.
CAUSEs. Over-exertion, “the heart strain” of Da Costa ;
dyspepsia; uterine diseases; excesses in tea, coffee, tobacco, alco-
hol, or venery; moral and emotional causes, grief, anxiety, and
fear.
SYMPTOMs. Usually palpitation of the heart has a sudden
onset after some one of the causes mentioned, praecordial oppres–
sion or pain, rapid, tumultuous beating, the impulse being visible
through the patient's clothing, dyspnoea, anxiety, and a sense of
choking or fullness in the throat, the recumbent position impos-
sible, vertigo, faintness, flashes of light, the pulse full and strong
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 495
or feeble, the face flushed or pale, the patient having a feeling of
anxiety with a sense of impending danger and fear of sudden
death. These attacks are paroxysmal, lasting from a few mo-
ments to several hours, or a day, the patient often voiding a large
quantity of limpid urine after the paroxysm has subsided, when
there is a strong tendency to sleep.
DIAGNOSIS. Irritability of the heart is differentiated from the
various forms of cardiac disease by the absence of all the physical
signs mentioned as occurring in those conditions.
PROGNoSIS. If early and properly treated, favorable.
TACHYCARDIA.
SYNONYMs. Rapid heart; quick heart; paroxysmal rapid
heart.
DEFINITION. Paroxysmal rapid cardiac action minus or
with subjective symptoms, the result of excessive cardiac rapidity.
CAUSEs. Tachycardia is one of the “crises” of cerebral or
spinal diseases. Menopause. Neuritis of the pneumogastric
nerve; chronic myocarditis; neurasthenia; chronic gastritis;
excessive use of tobacco. - -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. No characteristic lesions. There
may be paralysis of the inhibitory fibers of the vagus, an irritation
of the accelerators of the sympathetic, or reflex action from some
lesion in the cardiac wall or elsewhere.
SYMPTOMs. The paroxysm is sudden in its onset, with or
without “warnings”—if these latter, they are in the shape of
vertigo, ringing in the ears, and a sense of impending danger.
The cardiac action is increased to 150, 175, 200, rarely 250 beats
per minute. The pulse is small, weak, easily compressible, and
often irregular. The respiration is slightly increased; rarely
there is dyspnoea. The surface is at first pale, but soon becomes
flushed. The expression is anxious and denotes suffering. There
is a feeling of praecordial constriction, with more or less smoth-
ering. Rarely, there are no subjective symptoms. The dura-
tion is from a few minutes, to hours, or days.
AUSCULTATION. The first sound is clear and ringing, but
not strong and booming. The second sound is weak and lacks
the valvular quality of the normal. A murmur is often heard at
the apex.
DIAGNoSIs. The differentiation between tachycardia and
496 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
palpitation is to be made, as also the rapid heart of valvular dis-
ease and of irritable heart. The chief point is that in tachycardia
the attack is paroxysmal, and the number of pulsations exceeds
the rapid heart of other conditions.
PROGNOSIS. As a rule, it is an unfavorable symptom of some
central lesion. If it develops in patients suffering from chronic
myocarditis or atheroma of vessels, the fatal result may be
sudden.
BRADY CARDIA.
SYNoNYM. Brachycardia.
DEFINITION. A paroxysmal or permanent slowness in the
cardiac action.
CAUSEs. Often associated with organic nervous diseases.
It is a symptom of such cardiac diseases as fibroid and fatty heart
and atheroma of the coronary arteries. It frequently occurs
during convalescence from infectious diseases, such as diphtheria,
pneumonia, typhoid fever, erysipelas, and rheumatism; uraemia,
lead poisoning, anaemia, and chronic alcoholism are often causes.
SYMPTOMs. Slow action of the heart is the chief symptom,
varying from 50, 40, 30, 20, to IO or 8 beats per minute. The
pulse is weak, small and slow. As results of the slow cardiac
action are vertigo, noises in the ears, syncopal attacks, and rarely
convulsions. The onset may be either sudden or follow “warn-
ings.” -
AUSCULTATION. The first sound is soft and feeble, and often
the second sound is not heard. As a rule, with reduction in the
number of contractions is an increase in their force; this not
obtaining in bradycardia determines its central origin.
DIAGNOSIs. A feeble cardiac contraction, with less than
fifty beats per minute, determines the diagnosis.
PROGNoSIs. Sudden death a very frequent termination.
The cause controls the prognosis.
ARRFIYTHMIA.
SYNoNYMs. Arrhythmia cordis; irregularity of the pulse.
DEFINITION. A lack of cardiac rhythm, or irregularity in
the cardiac pulsations. It is a symptom rather than a disease.
CAUSEs. Valvular diseases; myocardial diseases; cardiac
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 497
dilated hypertrophy; atheroma of coronary arteries and aorta;
excessive use of tobacco, tea, coffee; flatulent dyspepsia. Neu-
rasthenia, hysteria, and melancholia.
SYMPTOMs. An irregularity in cardiac action, either in the
rhythm or the regularity in the force of the beats, or an inter-
mission in the cardiac contractions. The sphygmograph gives
the exact condition of the cardiac pulsations and should always
be used in cardiac diseases. Other symptoms that may be pres-
ent are due to the condition producing the arrhythmia.
DIAGNOSIS. An examination of the pulse, auscultation of
the heart, and the use of the sphygmograph determine the
arrhythmia.
PROGNOSIS. Depends upon the cause. In functional cases
favorable, in organic cases unfavorable.
ANGINA PECTORIS.
SYNoNYM. Neuralgia of the heart. -
DEFINITION. Paroxysms in which there occur sharp cardiac
pains, extending usually into the left shoulder and down the left
arm, accompanied by a feeling of constriction of the thorax and
a strong fear of impending death. - -
CAUSES. Depending upon the variety, whether of nervous
or organic origin. Often hereditary; associated with chronic
cardiac changes, as diseases of the coronary arteries or calcifica-
tion of the valves; the excessive use of tobacco; syphilis; accord-
ing to Trousseau, it is a form of masked epilepsy, and may
alternate with true epileptic attacks; often associated with
hysteria.
PATHOLOGICAI, ANATOMY. A disease of the arteries, ossi-
fication and occasionally obliteration of the cardiac arteries, pro-
ducing ischaemia.
“The pathological changes which stand in a causative relation
to the attacks are those of the cardiac plexus of the phrenic and
of the pneumogastric nerves. Pressure of enlarged lymphatics,
inflammation of parts of the cardiac plexus, with changes in the
coronary arteries, seem to be most constant.” -
SYMPTOMs. A paroxysmal affection, the attacks occurring
irregularly ; in the interval entire absence of symptoms, or the
symptoms of the organic disease causing the paroxysms.
“The patient suddenly sits up in his bed; with a cry of horror
498 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
indicates the sense of pain at the praecordium. The pain is of
great intensity, but is of a cold and sickening character; the chest
is fixed, the breathing quickened, and the hand placed over the
praecordia finds that the heart’s action is slight and enfeebled.
The face wears a look of horror, pale and slightly leadened; a
cold sweat breaks out upon the forehead; worse than the pain is
the feeling of fearful sickness and depression. The poor patient
gasps, ‘I shall die! I shall die!’ and sometimes his short but con-
centrated sufferings in a few moments end in death. The attack
ends suddenly with vomiting, or great flow of urine.”
The unpleasant sensations of these patients during an attack
and the nervous disorder associated with it, slowly bring about a
mental change. They are depressed and gloomy, sometimes
suicidal, and often developing epilepsy. -
Attacks of angina in nervous women and children, the
hysterical or pseudo-anginal attacks, come on gradually with
distention of the abdomen, eructations of gas, excessive restless-
ness, flushed face, irritable pulse, diffused praecordial pain, and
general hysterical phenomena.
DIAGNosis. The points to be remembered are that the
attacks are always paroxysmal, the patient having a sense of cold-
ness, and frequently a cold sweat, the heart's action not increased,
the chest fixed, and the breathing slow.
PROCNoSIs. True angina pectoris is unfavorable, the
patient, sooner or later, either succumbing during the paroxysm
or from exhaustion, the result of the cardiac changes.
Pseudo-angina is always favorable.
ARTERIO-SCLEROSIS.
SYNONYMs. Atheroma; arterio-capillary fibrosis (Gull and
Sutton); endocarditis chronica deformans (Virchow).
DEFINITION. An overgrowth of the connective tissue of the
arteries followed with calcareous deposits. The changes may
extend to the capillaries and veins. As a result of the impairment
of the arterial circulation occur fibroid degenerations in other
Organs, resulting in loss of elasticity in the walls of the vessels,
increase of arterial tension, narrowing of the caliber of smaller
arteries, and impairment of the nutrition of the organs supplied.
CAUSEs. Old age, alcoholism, syphilis, lead-poisoning, dia-
betes, malaria, rheumatism. Heredity is a predisposing factor in
. . . . . .
| || ~ ~ || .
|- （~~~~| . |
PLATE XLIV.-Arm Extension, Upright Treatment.

�
{
3
}
• •
kv ,
*** ·,









A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 5or
some cases. Chronic nephritis. More common in men than in
WOII le11. *
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The atheromatous changes are
most frequent in the aorta. Other arteries affected are the coro-
nary, the radial, ulnar, brachial, iliac, femoral, and the arteries of
the brain. - - - -
The internal surface of the affected vessels is irregularly
thickened with either gelatinous and translucent, or dense and
fibrous, or calcareous deposits or products. If the calcification
is extensive, the vessel is changed into a hard, stiff tube. Often
the surface of the thickening or deposit is destroyed, presenting
the so-called “Atheromatous ulcers,” which may be covered with
masses of thrombus. -
The above changes are the result of inflammatory change in
the intima of the affected vessel. This appears three or four times
as thick as normal, due to the swelling of its elements, the new
growth of connective tissue, and the deposit of round cells. Fatty.
degeneration of the inflammatory products results. -
The result of the changes in the arteries is a loss of their
elasticity, thus hindering the propulsion of the blood current and
raising the arterial tension, leading to hypertrophy of the left
ventricle. The changes finally affecting the coronary arteries
lead to changes in the myocardium. If the intima of the smaller
vessels be involved the blood supply to the organs supplied is
lessened, resulting in disturbance of their nutrition. •
SYMPTOMs. Not always apparent. The symptoms vary
with the arteries involved, and the organs whose blood supply is
lessened or cut off. Cardiac hypertrophy from the increased re-
sistance to the arterial circulation. The peripheral arteries
involved in the atheromatous changes can be determined by pal-
pation, they having a hard, bony feeling, much like whip-cord.
Attacks of vertigo, pseudo-apoplectic attacks, or spells of uncon-
sciousness in the aged or those having superficial hardened.
arteries are generally due to changes in the cerebral vessels.
Evidences of myocarditis and angina pectoris point to atheroma
of the aorta and coronary arteries. Gangrene of the extremities
in the old—senile gangrene—point to atheroma or thrombi, the
result of the fibrosis. - * , - 3.
PALPATION. Hard, superficial arteries, those at the wrist
feeling like a string of beads, pulsating. The cardiac impulse is .
forcible in the early stages. . . . . . . . . " . . . . .
I s
| Q J 1 i.
* # - - . . ;
. . ; ; ; & ... " . •. - - * * *-** *
5O2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PERCUSSION. Increased praecordial dullness, particularly
over left ventricle.
AUSCULTATION. In the early stages the first sound of the
heart is prolonged, the second sound accentuated over the aortic
cartilage. As the heart dilates and the walls become diseased,
the sound becomes feeble and often irregular and intermittent.
DIAGNOSIS. Only determined by a close study of the various
symptoms and sequelae.
PRocNoSIS. Incurable. .
ANEURISM OF THE AORTA.
VARIETIES. I. Aneurism of the arch of the aorta. 2. Aneu-
rism of the thoracic aorta. 3. Aneurism of the abdominal aorta.
The arch of the aorta is divided by Gray into three parts, the
ascending, the transverse, and the descending. The ascending
portion is two inches in length, arising from the left ventricle, on
a level with the lower border of the left third costal cartilage,
behind the left edge of the sternum. It ascends obliquely upward
to the right to the upper border of the right second costo-sternal
articulation. The transverse portion commences at the upper
border of the right second sternal articulation, and, arching to
the left and forward, passes in front of the trachea and Oesophagus
to the left of the third dorsal vertebra. The descending portion
extends downward to the left side of the fourth dorsal vertebra.
The thoracic aorta extends from the left lower border of the
fourth dorsal vertebra, and ends in front of the body of the
twelfth dorsal vertebra, at the aortic opening in the diaphragm.
The abdominal aorta begins at the aortic opening in the
diaphragm, descends a little to the left side of the vertebral col-
umn, and terminates over the body of the fourth lumbar vertebra,
where it divides into the two common iliac arteries. -
DEFINITION. A circumscribed dilatation of some portion of
the aorta, the result of disease of the vessel wall weakening its
resistance to the blood pressure.
CAUSEs. Those causing arterio-sclerosis are the chief
causes. Exertion is an exciting cause. Aneurisms occur in
early middle life rather than in old age, when the force of the
heart has decreased. More common in men than in women.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. All aneurisms may be divided
into two classes, dissecting and circumscribed.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 5O3
Dissecting Aneurism—false aneurism—is the result of fatty
changes in the internal and middle coats of the artery. The
shape may be sacculated, fusiform, or cylindrical. A disease of
the aged. Circumscribed Aneurism may be true or false, depend-
ing on the rupture of the walls or not. It is a disease of middle
life or under. Most frequent in men, usually a true dilatation.
Syphilis is a most frequent cause.
I. ANEURISM OF THE ARCH.
SYMPTOMs. The onset is usually gradual, with evidences of
arterio-sclerosis and failing health.
Pain, either paroxysmal or constant, is a constant symptom,
with increasing dyspnoea. The difficulty in breathing may be
constant with exacerbations, or it may be remittent. Rarely dys-
phagia occurs. A slight cough from pressure on the laryngeal
nerve with more or less alterations in the voice may be present.
The pupils are dilated or contracted or are irregular, in some
cases due to pressure on the sympathetic nerve. There is a grad-
ual loss of flesh, disorders of the circulation, and a careworn
expression of the face.
INSPECTION. Negative until the appearance of a pulsating
tl1m0r.
PALPATION. A pulsation over the tumor expansive in char-
acter (Corrigan's sign). If the aneurism is situated at the trans-
verse portion of the arch, the left pulse and the left carotid are
smaller and weaker than those on the right side. Tracheal tug-
ging is a diagnostic sign (Page). “Place the patient in the erect
position with his mouth closed and chin elevated to the fullest
extent. Then, on grasping the cricoid cartilage between the
fingers and thumb and making gentle traction upward, the pulsa-
tions of dilated aorta or aneurism, if any exist, will be distinctly
felt, in most cases transmitted through the trachea to the hand.”
PERCUSSION. Dullness, the extent depending on the size of
the tumor. Dullness, other than cardiac, across the sternum is
diagnostic of a mediastinal tumor. -
AUSCULTATION. Over the tumor a murmur or bruit is
usually heard, synchronous with the first sound of the heart. It
is louder than the systole, lower in pitch, and of a blowing char-
aCter.
DIAGNoSIs. If the tumor can be seen or felt, the diagnosis
is made, its location being determined by a study of the physical
S1gns.
5O4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
II. ANEURISM OF THE THORACIC AORTA.
SYMPTOMs. The most constant symptom is deep-seated
thoracic pain, constant or paroxysmal. Dysphagia is a frequent
condition. There is seldom dyspnoea, and ālterations of voice
and pupils do not occur. Physical signs are usually wanting, and
the diagnosis is rarely made during life.
III. ANEURISM OF THE ABDOMINAL, AORTA.
SYMPTOMs. The chief and most constant symptom is pain
at a circumscribed spot in the abdomen, or diffused. Other
symptoms depend upon the location of the aneurism, as they are
the result of pressure. There is a gradual loss of health.
INSPECTION. Usually negative unless the aneurism reach an
enormous size.
PALPATION. A pulsating tumor in the abdomen to the left
of the median line. The pulsation is synchronous with the first
sound of the heart, and is expansile (Corrigan's sign) in char-
acter.
PERCUSSION. Dullness may be elicited if the tumor is large
and the abdomen emaciated. -
AUSCULTATION. Rarely a murmur or bruit is heard, systolic
in time.
DIAGNOSIS. Abdominal aneurism and pulsating abdominal
aorta may be mistaken for each other. The point of difference is,
in the aneurism, the presence of the tumor with an expansile
pulsation, while in pulsating abdominal aorta the beating is like
a pulsating cord, an up-and-down movement, not expansile. The
condition of the patient is also important; aneurism in males, at
middle life, with changes in the vessels; abdominal pulsation
occurring in nervous women or effeminate men.
Tumors located over the abdominal aorta may, give rise to an
apparent pulsation, causing them to be mistaken for an aneurism.
The rule is in all cases of abdominal pulsation to place the patient
in the knee-chest position; if the tumor is aneurismal, the expan-
sile pulsation continues; if not an aneurism but a cancer, impacted
faeces, or other tumor, the pulsation at once ceases.
PROGNoSIs of AORTIC ANEURISMs. Unfavorable. The
duration of life after the development of the aneurism is from one
to four years.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 505
TREATMENT FOR ALL, HEART AFFECTIONS.
The equalization of the circulation throughout the body
should be promoted as much as possible. •
These affections demonstrate the variableness of the symp-
toms according as different nerve filaments are involved, in the
different structures, and yet the removal of the venous obstruc-
tion leaves the channels free to carry off the waste, and makes
room for capillary circulation; that brings in arterial blood to
rebuild the waste tissue, caused by degenerative tissue metamor-
phosis. Keep lifting off the pressure. The treatments should
be applied according to conditions, effects, etc.
The condition recognized as Palpitation (the most common
of all complained of) is relieved almost instantaneously by steadily
and strongly raising the left arm, and lifting the clavicle in the
usual way, and pressing the knee between the scapulae, while
the arms are drawn upward and backward a time or two.
The other affections of the heart require a very special atten-
tion, recognizing the fact that too much or too severe ti eatment
should be avoided, and always to endeavor to do all that is possi-
ble to regulate and equalize the circulation as much as can be
under the circumstances, persistently, repeatedly.
DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS
SYSTEM.
The diseases of the nervous system will be described under
the following named headings:
I. Diseases of the cerebral membranes. 2. Diseases of the
cerebrum. 3. Diseases of the spinal cord. 4. Diseases of the
nerves. 5. General or nutritional diseases. 6. Mental diseases.
DISEASES OF THE CEREERAL
MEMERANES.
PACHYMENINGITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Meningitis; haematoma of the dura mater.
DEFINITION. Inflammation of the dura mater; when the
external layer is primarily involved it is termed pachymeningitis
externa; when the internal layer is primarily involved it is termed
pachymeningitis interna.
CAUSEs. Pachymeningitis externa is a surgical malady, ex-
cited by fractures, penetrating wounds, and other injuries of the
skull.
Pachymeningitis interna is due to blows upon the head, with-
out injury to the skull. A predisposition may be created by
chronic alcoholism, scurvy, Bright's disease and syphilis. Chronic
internal otitis and suppurative inflammation of the orbit may
cause it, also inflammation in the venous sinuses the result of a
thrombus undergoing suppurative changes.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Pachymeningitis Interna—Hy-
peraemia of the membrane, followed by an exudation which
develops into a membranous new formation, containing a great
number of vessels of considerable size, but having very thin walls.
(506)
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 507
Hemorrhages from these new vessels are of frequent occurrence,
which increase the size and thickness of the neo-membrane.
The usual position of the neo-membrane or new formation
is on the upper surface of the hemispheres, extending downward
toward the occipital lobe. The changes in the adjacent portion
of the brain are dependent on the size and thickness of the neo-
membrane. Bartholow observed a case in which the “cyst” was
half an inch in thickness at its thickest part, and it depressed the
hemisphere correspondingly, the convolutions being flattened,
the sulci almost obliterated, and the ventricle lessened one-half in
size. *
In Pachymeningitis syphilitica, the pathological lesion is in
the form of gummatous tumors or masses which may degenerate
and become either cheesy masses or be converted into a purulent
looking fluid. In old age the dura mater becomes thick, carti-
laginous, and of a dull, white color. The sheaths of the arteries
are also thickened. -
SYMPTOMs. Very obscure; principally those of cerebral
pressure. Cases of persistent headache, vertigo, photophobia,
anorexia, insomnia, gradual impairment of intellect and locomo-
tion, followed by delirium, and convulsions and coma, or by
apoplectic attacks and paralysis; in the aged, or those in whom
some one of the causes of the affection are present, an inflamma-
tion of the dura mater may be suspected. Circumscribed painful
oedema behind the ear and less fullness of the jugular of the corre-
sponding side, the phlegmasia alba dolens en miniature of Grie-
singer, are indicative of thrombosis in the transverse sinus, as was
first shown by Virchow. -
DIAGNOSIS. Always problematical, as the symptoms are
masked and so obscure that a positive diagnosis is impossible.
PROGNoSIs. Most unfavorable for either forms, although the
course of the malady is usually slow. Surgical treatment in trau-
matic cases offers some hope.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
ACUTE MENINGITIS.
SYNONYMs. Acute leptomeningitis; cerebral fever; arach-
nitis.
DEFINITION. An acute exudative inflammation of the cere-
bral pia mater and arachnoid membranes, usually limited to the
convexity of the cerebrum; characterized by fever, vomiting,
508 OSTEO PATHY ILLUSTRATED.
headache, delirium, and followed by symptoms of general col-
lapse.
CAUSEs. During the course of the acute infectious dis-
eases; erysipelas; associated with or a sequela of influenza.
Cerebral overwork; prolonged wakefulness; acute alcoholism;
exposure to the sun; disease of the internal ear; secondary to
diseases of serous membranes. Most frequently in early adult
life and in young children, and in males rather than females.
“The micro-organisms found in meningitis are the pneumococ-
cus, streptococcus pyogenes, intracellular diplococcus, the pneu-
mo-bacillus, and a bacillus resembling that of typhoid fever.”
(Dana.) - -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The inflammatory changes may
be limited either to the convexity or to the base of the brain, but
more frequently both portions are involved.
Intense hyperaemia of both membranes, followed by a puru-
lent and fibrinous exudation. The ventricles may be filled with
fluid, compressing and flattening the convolutions.
In twenty-five post-mortem examinations at the Philadelphia
Hospital a meningo-encephalitis was present in fourteen.
SYMPTOMs. Vary according to the stages:– -
Prodromes—Headache, vertigo, cerebral vomiting, more or
less feverishness, continuing from a few hours to one or two days,
when occurs the
Stage of Invasion.—Onset sudden, with chill, high fever, IO3.
degrees to IO4 degrees, pulse IOO-I2O, face flushed, with con-
gested eyes, headache, most intense and continuous, ringing in
the ears, photophobia, vertigo, the nausea aggravated, projectile
vomiting, with delirium. .
Stage of Excitation.—General sensibility of the body
increased, sensitiveness to light, and acuteness of hearing, delir-
ium furious, often resembling mania, continual jerking of the
limbs, oscillations of the eyeballs—nystagmus—twitching of the
muscles, even to the extent of opisthotonos, and in children con-
vulsions. Duration, from one day to a week or two. The finger
drawn across the surface leaves a red line—the tache cerebrale.
Stage of Depression or Collapse.—The patient gradually
becomes more quiet, the delirium subsiding, as well as the mus-
cular agitation; somnolence develops, passing into coma, at times.
temporary consciousness, coma Soon following again; pulse irreg-
ular and slow, fever less; various palsies, to-wit: strabismus,
ptosis, pupils uninfluenced by light, mouth drawn to one side,
- --
PLATE XLV.-Method of Stimulating Vaso-motor Nerves.


A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 5 II
urine and faeces involuntarily discharged. Death following,
either by convulsions or by deepening coma with cyanosis.
DIAGNOSIS. The characteristic symptoms indicating the
existence of acute meningitis are headache, vomiting, fever and
delirium, all developing rather rapidly. The headache is more
persistent, the vomiting not due to gastric trouble. The absence
of any one of the four characteristic symptoms named above does
not prove the absence of meningitis, nor does the combination of
delirium and fever alone determine the presence of meningeal
disease.
Cerebro-spinal fever closely resembles acute meningitis, the
points of distinction between which are the first named occur-
ring epidemically, associated with marked spinal symptoms and
an eruption. Meningitis and abscess of the brain are apt to be
mistaken for each other, the differential diagnosis being pointed
out in that disease.
The cerebral symptoms of rheumatism are differentiated from
idiopathic meningitis by the association of the joint trouble.
Cerebral symptoms of typhoid and typhus fever have a close re-
semblance to idiopathic meningitis, and are only determined by a
study of the clinical history.
In acute uraemia the face is turgid, Oedematous, with puffi-
ness of the eyelids; in meningitis the face is pale and no Oedema;
uraemia has decided albuminuria; it is slight or absent in menin-
gitis; meningitis has chills followed by fever; uraemia has irreg-
.ular temperature record rapidly rising to IO4 degrees F. to IO6
degrees F., and dropping to 99 degrees F., to as rapidly rise again,
and usually associated with convulsions.
In delirium tremens the delirium is a busy one, the patient
imagining persons and animals around him, and is wild in his
gestures and utterances; the temperature is normal or subnormal,
the skin wet and clammy. In meningitis the delirium is mild but
incoherent, the surface is hot and dry, and there are severe
vomiting and headache. -
PROGNoSIs. Not very favorable. If recognized early and
treated, a fair number of recoveries occur, but it usually leaves the
patient subject to attacks of epilepsy or with a persistent head-
ache, and more or less mental impairment.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
5 I2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
TUBERCULAR MENINGITIS.
SYNONYMS. Basilar meningitis; acute hydrocephalus.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the leptomeninges (soft
membranes), most particularly the basal pia mater, attended with
or due to the deposit of gray miliary tubercle; characterized by
gradual decline of the bodily and mental powers.
CAUSEs. Usually a secondary affection, a sequel to tuber-
cular disease of some other organ. Most frequently occurs in
children between two and six years of age, although numerous
cases are reported occurring between twenty and thirty years;
scrofulous diathesis; inherited diathesis. The “gelatinous chil-
dren of albuminous parents,” as the phrase goes, possess a
special susceptibility to tubercular meningitis.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The deposition of tubercle
usually occurs at the base of the brain.
Depositions of grayish-white granules, of a translucent,
somewhat gelatinous appearance—miliary tubercle, are distributed
along the vessels of the pia mater, resulting in inflammation and
the exudation of lymph, with the consequent thickening and
opacity of the membranes. The cerebral tissue is not usually
involved, although on section the lines indicative of blood vessels
are very much increased in number. The ventricles are distended
by a clear, or milky, or even bloody serum. Tubercular deposits
occur in the lungs, intestines, and, at times, in other organs. The
presence of the tubercles alone may give rise to no symptoms
until the exudative products of the resultant inflammation
develop.
SYMPTOMs. The advent is either gradual and insidious, or
with convulsions, in which cases the after progress is rapid.
Prodromes.—The child grows irritable, with loss of appetite,
loss of flesh, swollen abdomen, constipation alternating with diar-
rhea, irregular attacks of feverishness, with attacks of grinding its
teeth during sleep, or sleeplessness. Headache occurs, as shown
by the child, even when at play, suddenly stopping and resting its
head on its hand or on the floor. Duration of this stage is from
one week to a month or two.
Stage of Excitation.—The onset is rather sudden, with obsti-
nate vomiting, severe headache, convulsions, fever, IO2 degrees to
IO3 degrees in the evening, falling to 99 degrees in the morning,
pulse soft and compressible, with irregular rhythm. On drawing
the finger nail lightly over the surface a red line results, “the
cerebral stain” of Trousseau. The symptoms grow progressively
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 5 I3
l
worse with exaltation of the special general senses; the least pinch
or even touch causing exquisite pain; spasmodic movements of
the muscles, with contraction and rigidity, at times opisthotonos.
Duration of this stage is about two weeks.
Stage of Depression.—The result of the pressure of the exu-
dation; the pulse slow and compressible, with irregular rhythm;
temperature depressed; tendency to somnolence alternating with
quiet delirium, mental stupor, continual movement of the fingers,
as in picking up objects; convulsions from time to time, strabis-
mus, oscillation of the eyeballs, followed by intervals of wakeful-
ness, when the headache is excruciating, causing the peculiar,
unearthly shrill cry or shriek, “the hydrocephalic cry,” associated
with contraction of the muscles of the face, as if suffering were
experienced; finally collapse, occurring with the “Cheyne-Stokes”
respiration, the coma deepening, followed by death, convulsions
ending the scene. Duration, from a day or two to two weeks.
DIAGNOSIs. Acute meningitis and tubercular meningitis
have closely analogous symptoms during the stage of excitation,
but the history and clinical course of the two maladies determine
the diagnosis.
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. Usual duration, three or four
weeks after fully developed prodromes. If ushered in by convul-
sions, the duration is shorter.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
DISEASES OF THE CEREBRUM.
CONGESTION OF THE BRAIN.
SYNoNYMs. Cerebral hyperaemia; cerebral congestion.
DEFINITION. An abnormal fullness of the vessels (capil-
laries) of the brain; active, when arterial fullness; passive, when
venous fullness; characterized by headache, vertigo, disorders of
the special senses, and, if hyperaemia be decided, convulsions.
CAUSEs. Active.—Increased cardiac action, the result of
hypertrophy of the left ventricle; general plethora; excesses in
eating and drinking; acute alcoholism; sunstroke; prolonged
mental labor: dininished amount of arterial blood in other parts,
the result of the compression of the abdominal aorta; ligation of
514 ostEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
a large artery, and the suppression of an habitual bleeding hemor-
rhoid are examples. Passive.—Dilatation of the right heart;.
pressure upon the veins returning the cerebral blood.
While congestion of the brain is not so common as was once
supposed, the view that it can not occur is disproven by the results
following the inhalation of a full dose of amyl nitris. The relief
of head symptoms after a free epistaxis and the distress resulting
if it does not occur is another instance.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The post-mortem appearances
are, overloading of the venous sinuses and of the meningeal
vessels, including the finer branches; the pia mater appears vascu-
lar and opaque; the gray matter of the convolutions unduly red;
the convolutions may be compressed and the ventricles con-
tracted, with the displacement of a corresponding amount of
cerebro-spinal fluid. Long continued or repeated congestions
lead to enlargement and tortuosity of all the vessels, a moist and
slimy condition (oedema) of the cerebral substance, and an
increase in the sub-arachnoid fluid.
SYMPTOMs. “Rush of blood to the head” may be gradual or
sudden in its onset, the symptoms aggravated by the recumbent
position. Headache, with paroxysmal neuralgic darts, disorders
of vision and hearing, buzzing in the ears and sparks before the
eyes, contracted pupils, vertigo, blunted intellect, inability to con-
centrate the mind, irritable temper, and curious hallucinations.
The face is red, the eyes congested, and the carotids pulsating.
The sleep is disturbed by dreams and jerkings of the limbs. If
the attack be sudden (apoplectiform), sudden unconsciousness
with muscular relaxation occur. Cerebral hyperaemia in children
often presents alarming symptoms, such as great restless-
ness, insomnia, night terrors, gnashing of the teeth during sleep,
vomiting, contraction of pupils, followed by general convulsions.
Any or all of these symptoms may continue more or less marked
from an hour or two to a day, the child enjoying its usual health,
after a sound sleep, save some fatigue.
PROGNoSIs. Mild cases terminate favorably in a few hours
to a day or two, but show a strong tendency to recur. Severe
cases (apoplectiform) may terminate in health, but usually foretell
cerebral hemorrhage. .
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. ‘5 I5
CEREBRAL ANAEMIA.
DEFINITION. An abnormal decrease in the quantity of
blood in the cerebral vessels; general, when the diminished supply
includes all the vessels; partial, when the diminished supply is
limited in area; characterized by pallor, headache, vertigo, some
loss of power, and, rarely, convulsions.
CAUSES. Partial cerebral anaemia results from obstruction
of a vessel, from embolism or thrombosis. General cerebral
anaemia results from hemorrhages, wasting diseases, during con-
valescence from severe attacks of fevers, sudden shock, feeble
cardiac action, and general anaemia.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The blood in the brain is con-
tained in the arteries, capillaries, and veins. . The functional con-
dition of the brain depends on the quantity and quality of the
blood circulating in the cerebral capillaries. Any decrease in
the normal quantity or impairment in the quality produces the
symptoms of cerebral anaemia. The brain is pale and milky in
color, and on transverse section there are no bloody points; the
ventricles and perivascular lymph spaces are well filled with fluid.
In partial anaemia the local conditions differ somewhat from the
above.
SYMPTOMs. General.—Headache, relieved by the recumbent
position; vertigo, aggravated by exertion; general pallor, and
anaemia, with attacks of fainting; when the general cerebral
anaemia is sudden and decided, convulsions occur. In partial
anaemia, sudden loss of power, of limited muscular area, grad-
ually returning to the normal condition.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable in all cases save those the result of
severe and repeated hemorrhages.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
CEREBRAL, HEMORRFIAGE.
SYNoNYMs. Apoplexy; “a stroke.”
- DEFINITION. The sudden rupture of a cerebral vessel and
escape of blood into the cerebral tissue, causing pressure and
more or less destruction of the brain substance; characterized by
sudden unconsciousness, irregular, noisy respiration, and com-
plete muscular relaxation.
- CAUSEs. Rare under forty years of age. The principal
cause is disease of the vessels—the development of miliary aneu-
516 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
risms, or a chronic endarteritis with an associated cardiac hyper-
trophy; hereditary tendency; Bright's disease; syphilis; alcoholic
and dietary excesses; gout. More frequent in the spring and
autumn.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The most common locations of
cerebral hemorrhage are the internal capsule, corpus striatum,
and thalamus opticus; less common the anterior and middle cere-
bral lobes and the cerebellum; next in frequency the pons and
medulla oblongata; and rarely on the convexity of the brain,
termed meningeal hemorrhage. When the hemorrhage is large,
the blood may break into the ventricles and pass by the iter from
the third to the fourth ventricle. A recent clot is dark in color,
and in consistency a soft, grumous mass, composed of coagulated
blood and brain substance in varying proportions, at whose center
is the opening into the ruptured vessel. The clot excites inflam-
mation around it, resulting in its being encysted, by the develop-
ment of new connective tissue from the neuroglia, and then
gradually absorbed, leaving a cicatrix; or the brain tissue around
the clot softens and degenerates—localized softening.
SYMPTOMs. The attack may occur suddenly as an apoplectic
shock or stroke, or slowly with prodromes or “warnings.”
Prodromes.—Headache, vertigo, transient deafness or blind-
ness, sensation of numbness of the extremities, with local palsies,
together with the constant dread of an attack.
The attack begins with vomiting, followed by either partial or
complete insensibility; respiration slow, irregular, and noisy;
during the inspiration the paralyzed cheek is drawn in, and puffed
out in expiration; pulse slow and full; pupils uninfluenced by
light, the face flushed, the eyes congested and the carotids throb-
bing; the temperature declines below the normal, a degree or
two, but rises within twenty-four hours to IOO-IOI degrees F. In
fatal cases it may rapidly rise to Ioz-Ic8 F. º
The muscular system is profoundly relaxed, and the reflex
movements are abolished. The head and eye deviate, in many
cases, toward the affected side in the brain, or from the paralyzed
side. Rarely convulsions occur. -
Ingravescent apoplexy begins as a mild stroke with a rapid
return to consciousness and power, except, perhaps, of speech.
Headache is present with some one or more local symptoms, and
in a few hours to a few days consciousness gradually becomes
impaired, the loss of power again occurs, the coma deepens, the
patient dying comatose. If the unconsciousness continues longer
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 5 I'7
than twenty-four hours, death is the usual termination, preceded
by pale face, irregular and rapid pulse and respiration, and rise of
temperature.
Reaction obtains in from a half to three hours, consciousness
returning, reflex excitability reviving, associated with headache,
confusion of mind, and more or less paralysis of motion, and
sensibility of one side of the body, termed hemiplegia.
The electro-excitability of the paralyzed parts is preserved.
Recovery may be delayed by inflammatory symptoms, the
temperature rising to IOI-IO4 degrees F., with tonic contractions
(early rigidity) of the paralyzed muscles and severe neuralgic
pains. -
Localization of the lesion of a cerebral hemorrhage is of
great practical importance. -
Capsular hemorrhage, the most frequent, causes loss of con-
sciousness, of sudden or rapid onset, hemiplegia, involving face,
arm, and leg, with motor aphasia if the hemiplegia be on the right
side. There is also a unilateral loss of reflex action, conjugate
deviation of the eyes from the paralyzed side, and unilateral defec-
tive movement with flaccidity of the limbs. -
Cortical hemorrhage, localized unilateral paralysis of the face,
the arm, or the leg, with local convulsions or convulsions that
have a local beginning, or profound unconsciousness.
Centrum ovale hemorrhages resemble the cortical with the
local convulsions. -
Crus-cerebri hemorrhage, loss of consciousness with hemi-
plegia involving the lower half of the face and the limbs, with
paralysis of the third nerve on the opposite side, or the side of the
lesion. The unilateral third nerve symptoms are ptosis, external
strabismus, dilatation of the pupil, and loss of accommodation for
near objects. The paralysis is termed “crossed” or “alternate”
hemiplegia.
Pons hemorrhage causes either general convulsions or irreg-
ular convulsions in the legs, bilateral motor paralysis, bilateral
anaesthesia, either contracted or dilated pupils, embarrassed
respiration, repeated non-gastric vomiting, and high temperature.
If the hemorrhage is large, death is sudden or within a few hours,
and even if small the prognosis is unfavorable.
Ventricular hemorrhages are generally of the ingravescent
variety, and are characterized by a second apoplectic seizure soon
after the first, with extension of the hemiplegic symptoms or a
relaxation of the muscles from one side to both sides of the body.
518 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Cerebellar hemorrhage varies so greatly in the symptoms
that a positive diagnosis can seldom be made.
Meningeal or dural hemorrhage, usually due to a trauma.
Two varieties: I. Infantile meningeal hemorrhage, occurring
during labor. 2. Extra-dural hemorrhage, the result of direct
injury to the head. The infantile variety presents symptoms of
irritation and compression of the cortex, such as convulsions,
general or unilateral, rigidity, opisthonos, and either hemiplegia
or diplegia. The extra dural variety is almost always the result
of fracture or trauma of the skull, resulting in an extravasation of
blood between the dura and the skull from the middle meningeal
artery; the hemorrhage may be on one or both sides. The symp-
toms may develop at once or after some days, and are those of
pressure, hemiplegia, partial or complete, convulsions, impaired
or absent reflexes, dilatation with loss of reaction of pupil of oppo-
site side, stupor gradually deepening into coma and death.
SEQUELAE. Paralysis of the muscles of the face, tongue, body
and extremities of one side, opposite to the location of the hemor-
rhage, termed unilateral paralysis or right or left hemiplegia.
Paralysis of both sides of the body, due to simultaneous hemor-
rhage on both sides, termed bilateral hemiplegia, or diplegia.
Paralysis of one side of the face and the extremities of the
opposite side, due to hemorrhage into the pons Varolii, termed
alternating or crossed paralysis. Occasionally tonic contractions
occur in muscles long paralyzed, termed late rigidity, and is evi-
dence of a secondary degeneration of the nerve fibers. Chronic
movements in paralyzed muscles are termed post-hemiplegic
chorea, due, according to Charcot, to changes in the motor cen-
ters. The mental powers are always more or less permanently
impaired, the patient irritable and emotional, and the same holds
good concerning the memory.
DIAGNOSIs. The diagnosis of the apoplectic seizure is often
one of the most difficult questions in medicine, and yet of the
greatest importance, as the treatment hinges on it. The diagnosis
of the sequelae is comparatively easy.
Insensibility from drink differs from apoplexy in the follow-
ing points, to-wit: insensibility is not so complete, no drawing in
and puffing out of one cheek with respiration, the pulse frequent
instead of slow, the pupils influenced by light; upon raising both
legs no difference is apparent on allowing them to drop ; the eyes
and head are not turned to one side, and lastly, the condition
is ameliorated on the inhalation of ammonia. I have satisfactor-
Plate XLVI.-Extenso-rotary Neck Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 52I
ily used Dr. Von Wedekind's test for temulence, to-wit: “By
simply pressing on the supraorbital notches with a steadily
increasing force you may, with certainty of success, bring an un-
conscious alcoholic to his senses, and thus differentiate between
alcoholic and other comas.”
Opium poisoning differs from apoplexy by the gradual ap-
proach of the coma, and that the patient can be momentarily
aroused, and also by the absence of the heavy stertor of apoplexy.
Uraemia causes a coma that closely resembles apoplexy. A
history of Bright's disease at once clears up the case; again,
uraemic coma is generally preceded by convulsions, a rapid rise
of temperature as shown by the thermometer, often IO4 to Ioë
degrees F., while to the hand the surface appears but little, if at
all, above the normal; the pulse is usually weak with irregular
force, the respirations averaging twenty-five to thirty per minute,
the face having a glossy appearance. -
Cerebral embolism can not always be differentiated from
apoplexy. We may suspect cerebral plugging, if the patient be
young; if he be laboring under acute or chronic cardiac valvular
trouble; if, within brief periods, several incomplete attacks have
occurred before a complete comatose condition obtains; or, if
hemiplegia results with passing or slight unconsciousness; or, if
the phenomena are sooner of later followed by cerebral softening,
as embolism and thrombosis are the most common causes of soft-
ening. -
Syncope or a fainting fit is of sudden onset, but being due to
a failure of the circulation, the pulse is feeble, the face pale, the
respiration quiet, and the duration of unconsciousness short, all
the very opposite of an apoplectic attack.
PROGNosis. If the patient survive the immediate effects of
a cerebral hemorrhage, he is always in danger of a new attack,
since the causes of the original attack still remain. Another
attack or two is the usual course, a fatal termination ultimately
occurring.
The hemiplegia is uncertain; a partial recovery may occur
within a few months, or it may continue for years.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
522 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CEREBRAL THROMBOSIS AND EMBOLISM.
SYNoNYMs. Partial cerebral anaemia; occlusion of cerebral
vessels; cerebral apoplexy (?).
DEFINITION. The occlusion of a cerebral vessel, from the
formation of a thrombus, or the presence of an embolus, thus
causing anaemia of some portion of the brain; characterized by
the gradual—when the result of thrombosis, and the sudden, when
due to embolism—development of headache, vertigo, disorders
of intelligence, with more or less complete insensibility and
paralysis.
CAUSEs. Thrombosis, or the formation of a clot in the vessel
—an ante-mortem coagulation—is almost always the result of
chronic endarteritis, as seen in the aged, together with a showing
and weakening of the blood current. Chronic alcoholism and
syphilis are the usual causes when occurring in young adults.
Emboli, in the great majority of instances, result from an endo-
carditis—cardiac emboli; small particles of the exudation being
carried into the circulation and deposited in the brain. Emboli
may also be derived from aortic aneurism, or syphiloma of the
great vessels.
PATHological, ANATOMY. The cerebral arteries may be
obstructed by emboli or thrombi; the cerebral veins and sinuses
by thrombi only. The changes in the cerebral tissue are those of
anaemia of the part or parts supplied by the occluded vessels.
The subsequent changes depend upon the anatomy of the vessels.
If the obstructed artery has anastomoses, the collateral circulation
is soon established and the brain tissue assumes its normal condi-
tion. If, on the other hand, the occluded vessel be one of
“Cohnheim's terminal arteries”—arteries without anastomoses—
the blood in the whole extent of the occluded vessel coagulates,
thus preventing the backward flow of blood from the surround-
ing capillaries, and so obstructing collateral circulation, whence
the anaemic tissue dies or undergoes necrobiosis, followed by
yellowish-white softening; or, if the vessel beyond the seat of the
occlusion remains pervious, blood flows back through the capil-
laries from the nearest artery or vein; the parts that a short time
before were bloodless now become deeply engorged, the succeed-
ing changes in the vessels permitting diapedesis of the red blood
globules; the tissues which are undergoing disintegration are col-
ored by the red globules, causing the appearance entitled “red
softening,” which after some weeks becomes “yellow softening,”
finally changing to “white softening,” when there is a milky, or
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 523
rather creamy, fluid mixed with masses or particles of broken-
down nerve elements.
The vessel most commonly occluded is the left middle cerebral
artery, which sends branches to the second and third frontal con-
volutions, the anterior and superior portions of the three temporal
convolutions, the island of Reil, the parietal convolutions, part of
the external and all of the internal capsule, the lenticular nucleus,
and most of the corpus striatum—the motor centers.
SYMPTOMs. Two distinct modes of onset: gradual, when the
result of thrombosis; sudden or apoplectic, when due to embolism.
Cerebral Thrombosis.--Most common in the aged. Per-
sistent headache and vertigo, at one time severe and at another
mild. Next, alterations in patient's character; irritable, morose
and despondent, with periods of absent-mindedness, disorders
of vision, and impairment of memory, speech becoming hesitating
and mumbling. Impaired locomotion, the result of the vertigo,
and of muscular weakness and trembling, followed sooner or later
by hemiplegia, which may be preceded by sudden insensibility or
occur gradually, the symptoms slowly proceeding to senile
dementia and death from exhaustion; or, rarely, the symptoms
are not so grave, and partial or complete recovery occurs after
the hemiplegia, from establishment of the “collateral circulation.”
Cerebral Embolism.—The symptoms are sudden, but either
mild or grave in character. -
Mild Variety.—Sudden and severe vertigo, confusion of
mind, muscular twitchings, usually one-sided, and vomiting, fol-
lowed by hemiplegia, most frequently of the right side, the intel-
lect clear but hesitating. After some weeks or months the par-
alysis usually disappears and recovery is complete.
Grave or Apoplectic Variety.—Sudden headache, vertigo,
flushing or pallor of the face, or the patient may utter a sharp cry,
fall to the ground with sudden unconsciousness and complete
muscular relaxation, followed by death, or a gradual return of
consciousness with hemiplegia, which is generally right-sided,
with aphasia, remaining for several weeks or months, or is persist-
ent, the mind remaining normal or enfeebled and the emotional
nature highly excitable and the reason and judgment clouded,
continuing thus for years, or gradually developing into dementia,
exhaustion and death. *
The following are some of the symptoms of “localization” if
particular vessels are blocked: -
Vertebral artery, the left most frequently, which results in
524 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
acute bulbar paralysis from involvement of the nuclei in the
medulla, associated or not with hemiplegia.
Basilar artery, which causes diplegia with bulbar symptoms.
There is rapid rise of temperature. Death follows within a day
or two, or suddenly, if respiratory centers are involved:
Middle cerebral artery is the most frequent seat of embolic or
thrombotic occlusions. The symptoms depend upon the exact
branch involved: if plugged before the central arteries are given
off, the internal capsule is deprived of its blood supply and perma-
nent hemiplegia may follow; if the blocking is in the central
branches the hemiplegia involves the arm and face, and if left side,
aphasia occurs. The individual branches passing to the third
frontal (aphasia), the ascending parietal (hemiplegia, particularly
hand), supra-marginal and angular gyri (word blindness), and the
temporal gyri (word deafness), may be plugged.
DURATION. Thrombosis, essentially an affection of the eld-
erly, has a chronic course. Months and years may be occupied
with the various symptoms until the phenomena of senile demen-
tia develop. Embolism is of sudden onset, and may be followed
by a rapid recovery.
DIAGNOSIS. Thrombosis is associated with changes in the
vessels, the arcus senilis, and other evidences of senile degenera-
tion. -
Embolism may be mistaken for cerebral apoplexy, and while
a positive differentiation can not always be made, the chief point
to be considered is the presence of cardiac murmurs.
PROGNOSIS. Thrombosis is a permanent and progressive
condition in the majority of instances. Recovery is a rare ter-
mination. Embolism may be followed by a perfect recovery.
Usually, however, some evidences of the plugging remain perma-
nently. Death may be the result within a day or two, from the
plugging of a large vessel, the patient never emerging from the
coma. In other cases the patient arouses from the coma, the
hemiplegia with aphasia persisting, and the case pursues the usual
course of localized cerebral softening.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
CEREBRAL ABSCESS.
SYNONYMS. Acute encephalitis; suppurative encephalitis.
DEFINITION. An acute suppurative inflammation of the
brain structure, either localized or diffused, primary or secondary;
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 525
characterized by impairment of intellect, sensation, and
motion.
CAUSEs. Primary cerebral abscess is exceedingly rare.
Pyaemia; glanders; embolus from ulcerative endocarditis. Sec-
ondary cerebral abscesses result from injuries to the cerebral
tissues, to-wit: apoplexy, embolism, thrombosis, and injuries to
the cranial bones. Chronic ear disease; chronic suppuration in
some other portion of the body.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Abscess of the brain affects the
left side more frequently than the right. They are usually en-
cysted or inclosed in a limiting membrane. Abscesses of the
brain may be single or multiple, varying in size from an almond
to an egg. It occupies a limited and well-defined region of the
cerebral tissue, to-wit: either corpora striata, optic thalami, gray
matter of the cortex, the cerebellum, or the white matter of the
hemispheres.
“The initial stage at the site of the abscess is hyperaemia.
Minute extravasations take place (capillary hemorrhages), giving
to the inflamed area a dark, reddish color, whence the term red
softening. Migration of white corpuscles, diapedesis of some red
corpuscles and exudation of serum holding albumen and fiber in
solution, occur simultaneously. The brain tissue, being soft and
easily broken up, is rapidly dissociated and its elements disinte-
grated, and in a short time a soft, pultaceous, red mass results,
which more and more assumes a purulent character, becoming
first reddish-yellow, then yellow or greenish-yellow, ultimately
almost white. The injury caused by an abscess is not limited to
the portion of the brain inflamed, but the neighboring territory
is in the condition of collateral hyperaemia and Oedema.”
(Bartholow.)
SYMPTOMs. A concise description of the symptoms of
abscess of the brain is very difficult, on account of the wide varia-
tions dependent on its location, and also the difficulty of isolating
it from the affections to which it is secondary. The onset varies
according to the cause, although all cases are associated with
headache, irritative fever, vomiting, persistent and spreading
paralysis, convulsions, optic neuritis, mental apathy, delirium, and
coma. If following apoplexy, thrombosis, or emboli, there
occur fever and delirium, the paralysis remaining and spreading
with spasmodic contractions of the affected muscles.
Occasionally cases run a chronic course, the onset rather
insidious; dull, persistent headache, changed disposition, peevish,
526 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
irritable, unreliable, with decline of moral sensibility; easily
fatigued by mental work; inability to stand exertion; memory im-
paired; vertigo; dyspepsia, soon followed by slight palsies, which
progressively increase, becoming general, with involuntary dis-
charges, death following from exhaustion.
Of the focal symptoms, hemiplegia, of incomplete character,
occurs in about one-half of all cases of abscess of the brain. A
very constant symptom of diagnostic value, when hemiplegia is
very marked, is exaggerated knee-jerk with pronounced ankle
clonus. -
DIAGNOSIS. A positive diagnosis is only possible by a close
study of the causes and the clinical history, as the symptoms at
times indicate meningitis and again cerebral tumor.
Purulent meningitis may follow trauma to the brain or
chronic ear disease, making the diagnosis impossible. The chief
points of distinction are, the subacute or chronic course of abscess
(rarely an acute course), slight involvement of cranial nerves,
hemiplegia, and the presence of an active, persistent, unilateral
ankle clonus and exaggerated knee-jerk on paralyzed side.
PROGNoSIs. The usual termination is in death. The course
depends upon the character and extent of the injury, varying
from a few days to several months.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
INTRA-CRANIAL TUMCRS.
SYNoNYM. Cerebral tumors. -
DEFINITION. Tumor of the brain is either a growth in the
cerebral tissue, on the meninges, or in the vessels; characterized
by symptoms of pressure upon the brain structure.
CAUSEs. Injuriès to the head; syphilis; changes in the
vessels; tubercle and cancer; heredity.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The size of tumors vary, and
may become as large as an orange before they will give rise to
symptoms. Tumors of the brain are of various kinds, to-wit:
vascular tumors—aneurisms; parasitic tumors—cysticercus; dia-
thetic tumors—tubercle or syphilis; accidental tumors—glioma.
Whatever the character of the growth, it produces irritation of the
surrounding parts, and by pressure, destruction of the tissues, or
it interferes with the arterial or venous flow.
SYMPTOMs. Those common to tumors in general are, head-
A DRUGLEss systEM OF HEALING. 527
ache, persistent and increasing in intensity, defects of vision, even
blindness, due to an optic neuritis, a very constant symptom;
defects of hearing, taste, and of speech, the result of paresis of the
vocal cords; vertigo, associated with nausea and vomiting; con-
vulsions, epileptiform in character, usually limited to one side of
the body, occurring at regular intervals, or confined to the eyeballs
(nystagmus), or one limb, with no loss of consciousness; palsies,
beginning first as strabismus, ptosis and dilatation of the pupil,
of the facial muscles, paraplegia and general hemiplegia; defects
of sensibility, to-wit: sensations of numbness, and coldness in
the limbs and body. Occasionally disturbances of equilibrium,
manifested by a tendency to go backward or turn to the right or
left; intellectual faculties well preserved until late in the affection,
when the memory becomes impaired or lost for certain articles,
and finally a gradually advancing imbecility.
DIAGNOSIS. Rarely can a positive diagnosis be made. The
following points will aid: long-continued, persistent headache,
without appreciable cause, epileptiform convulsions, unilateral,
without loss of consciousness, difficulty of vision, hearing, and
speech, associated with nausea and vomiting, and local and gen-
eral palsies.
The location of the tumor may be determined by the more or
less pronounced character of certain symptoms. The diagnosis
of the character of the growth can only be determined by a close
study of the history.
According to Herter, “the indications that suggest that the
tumor is a syphilitic growth are as follows: Syphilitic history,
symptoms of irritative disease of cortex rather than destructive,
evidences of rapid growth at the onset, followed by a period of
slow progress or stationary symptoms, gradual improvement
under anti-syphilitic treatment, development between twenty and
forty-five years of age.”
Indications suggesting tubercular growth are: family his-
tory of tuberculosis in some other organ of the patient, rapid
development of symptoms, indications of the growth in the cere-
bellum or in the pons, early appearance of the symptoms, espe-
cially before the tenth year, and history of injury to head.
Indications suggesting sarcoma or cancer are: the presence
of a sarcoma elsewhere and rapidly failing health, with cerebral
tumor symptoms in patient over fifty years.
Indications suggesting glioma: sudden loss of conscious-
ness with exacerbation of all symptoms in the clinical history of
528 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cerebral tumor, cortex irritative symptoms as in syphiloma, devel-
oping under fifty years of age, and the absence of all evidences of
tubercle, syphilis, sarcoma, and cancer.
The focal symptoms of intracranial tumors are so important
in diagnosis that the following summary is given of symptoms
caused by brain tumors: Prefrontal Region.—Mental impair-
ment, pressure in central region, causing aphasia, Jacksonian epi-
lepsy, and disturbances of smell. Central Region.—Motor
aphasia, monoplegia, partial anaesthesia, Jacksonian epilepsy.
Posterior Parietal Region.—Word-blindness, homonymous
hemianopsia, disturbed muscular sense. Corpus Callosum.—Pro-
gressive hemiplegia. Crus Cerebri-Crossed paralyses of Oculo-
motor nerve and limbs. Corpora Quadrigemina.-Oculo-motor
paralyses, reeling gait, possibly blindness and deafness. Pons
and Medulla-Crossed paralyses of face and limbs, or tongue and
limbs. Other lesions in cranial nerves. Cerebellum.—Marked
cerebellar ataxia, vomiting, convulsions, coma. Base, Anterior
Fossa,—Mental enfeeblement, and disturbances of smell and
vision, exophthalmos. Base, Middle Fossa,—Impairment of
vision; hemiplegia; oculo-motor disturbances. Base, Posterior
Fossa,—Trigeminal neuralgia; neuro-paralytic ophthalmia; par-
alyses of the face and tongue; impaired hearing; crossed
paralyses.
Diagnosis Between Cerebral Tumor and Abscess.-Both
may have any or all of the following symptoms: headache, vom-
iting, double optic neuritis, and mental failure. Tumor has in
addition, marked focal symptoms, monoplegia, hemiplegia, par-
alysis of cranial nerves, and marked optic neuritis; the absence of
these favor 'abscess, or if hemiplegia the ankle clonus and knee-
jerk are exaggerated. Fever and rigors point to abscess. The
causes of abscess are very clear, those of tumor often uncertain.
PROGNoSIs. Unless of syphilitic origin, unfavorable; but it
is to be borne in mind that all syphilitic tumors of the brain do not
have a favorable termination.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
APHASIA.
DEFINITION. The inability to use spoken language or give
vocal utterance to ideas. Amnesic Aphasia.--Or loss of the
memory of words by which ideas are expressed. Ataxic Aphasia
—The inability to combine the different parts of the vocal appar-
PLATE XLVII.-Manipulating Muscles of Back of Neck.



A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 531
atus for vocal expression, although the memory of words still
remains, so that the afflicted person can write his ideas intelli-
gently. Agraphia.-The inability to recognize and make the
signs by which ideas are communicated in written language.
Amnesic Agraphia.-The inability to combine the muscular ap-
paratus—“writer's cramp.” Paraphasia.-The mental state in
which the wrong words are used to express the idea. Paragra-
phia.-The state in which wrong or meaningless written signs are
used to express the idea.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The distinction between aphasia
and aphonia must be clearly determined.
Aphasia is not the result of any one specific lesion, but occurs
during the course of several, to-wit: occlusion of certain cere-
bral vessels; cerebral hemorrhage; cerebral abscess or softening;
meningitis; tumors; mental or moral causes; hysteria.
It is now almost definitely determined that lesions of the left
middle cerebral artery, island of Reil, third frontal convolution,
and parts of the corpus striatum, are associated in the production
of aphasia. The lesions are usually upon the left side of the
brain, the aphasia being associated with right hemiplegia.
SYMPTOMs. The degree to which articulate language is
impaired varies from the loss of a few words to complete inability
to communicate ideas. The intellect does not suffer in propor-
tion to the loss of words; for, showing the individual an article,
while he may miscall it, if you call it by name he will recognize it.
This inability to convey thoughts is a source of great mental suf-
fering, in some leading to a suicidal tendency.
A strange clinical fact is the strong tendency to profanity
shown by aphasic patients. -
DIAGNOSIS. Aphonia, or loss of voice, should not be con-
founded with aphasia, or the inability to remember words. Par-
alysis of the tongue, or inability to move this organ, thereby
interfering with articulate language, should not be confounded
with aphasia, which, as a rule, is not associated with paralysis of
the tongue. -
PROGNosis. Controlled entirely by the cause. If the result
of congestion of the brain or a syphilitic tumor, the prognosis is
favorable. If associated with hemiplegia, the clot may undergo
absorption, and recovery follow. If associated with softening of
the brain, however, the disease grows progressively worse.
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
532 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
VERTIGO.
SYNONYM. Dizziness.
DEFINITION. Vertigo or dizziness is a subjective state, in
which the individual affected, or the objects about him, seem to be
in rapid motion either of a rotary, circular, or a to-and-fro char-
acter.
CAUSEs. The etiology of an attack of vertigo depends upon
the particular variety.
Ocular vertigo results from the paresis of one or more of
the ocular muscles, eye-strain, or astigmatism.
Aural or Auditory vertigo, or Meniere's disease, results from
disease of the semicircular canals and cochlea. Meniere's dis-
ease, properly so-called, is a sudden severe vertigo, the result of
either a hemorrhage or a serous or purulent exudation into the
semicircular canals. -
Gastric vertigo is the most common variety, and results from
either stomachic or intestinal dyspepsia, disordered hepatic func-
tion, or constipation. “The mechanism of the vertigo is complex.
There are two factors: one consists in the toxic effect of the im-
perfectly oxidized materials which accumulate in the blood; the
other is reflex. An impression made on the end organs of the
pneumogastric in the stomach is reflected over the sympathetic
ganglia.” (Bartholow.)
Nervous vertigo is associated with migraine, sick or nervous
headache, and is also caused by physical or nervous excesses,
also by the immoderate use of tea, coffee, alcohol, and tobacco.
It is also a result of many of the organic diseases of the brain.
Senile vertigo is the result of the disordered cerebral circula-
tion resulting from changes in the heart and vessels.
SYMPTOMs. In all varieties of vertigo, the symptom of a
sensation of objects moving around the patient, or the patient
moving around objects which remain stationary, is present in
some degree. The attack of giddiness comes on suddenly, with
an indistinctness of vision and slight confusion of the thoughts.
The patient may fall unless he grasps something to steady him-
self. Nausea and vomiting and cardiac palpitation with tinnitus
aurium are often associated with the vertiginous sensations. There
is no loss of consciousness. -
In the ocular vertigo the attack is usually the result of read-
ing, writing, sewing, or other close application of the eyes, the
ordinary symptoms of vertigo being preceded by headache,
nausea, specks before the eyes, and pain in the eyeballs.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 533
In Meniere's disease the vertigo is associated with serious
tinnitus aurium and the vertiginous sensations are of various
forms, such as a see-saw movement, a gyratory motion, right or
left; a vertical whirl, or a sensation of rising and falling like unto
the swell of the ocean. The symptoms are of long duration,
becoming marked in paroxysms. The attack of aggravated ver-
tigo is so sudden and overwhelming at times that the person is
suddenly thrown to the ground as if struck with a blow, associated
with nausea and vomiting. As the condition continues the char-
acter of the individual changes, becoming morose, irritable, and
suspicious. Not all cases of Meniere's disease become permanent,
but it may occur in isolated attacks, the interval being free from
all sensations. .
Gastric vertigo is by far the most frequent variety. Persons
subject to vertigo of this kind live in constant dread of cerebral
disease, which frequently results in true melancholia. The ver-
tiginous sensations usually occur during the course of well-
marked and long-standing stomach and intestinal disorders, such
as pain or oppression after meals, nausea, pyrosis, heartburn, fre-
quent eructations and constipation or rarely diarrhea. The
abdomen is often distended with flatus. Great pain in the nucha
is a very frequent occurrence. The attack may be associated
with either hyperaemia or anaemia of the brain. The symptoms
are not constant, but recur at intervals, sometimes remote, at
others very close on each other.
In nervous vertigo the vertiginous symptoms are usually
associated with more or less irritability of temper, restlessness,
and insomnia. The onset is sudden, after some one of the etio-
logical factors. In megrim there are headache, nausea, and
vomiting. This form of vertigo often precedes or replaces the
epileptic convulsion; it also often precedes softening of the brain.
In senile vertigo the vertiginous symptoms are the result of
anaemia of the brain. The attacks are developed by any exertion,
often by merely assuming the erect posture. There is a swim-
ming sensation in the head, darkness falls on the eyes, with a
sensation of chilliness and prostration.
DIAGNoSIs. The diagnosis of the various forms of vertigo
can only be determined after a close study of the history and
course of attack. The existence of organic cerebral disease
must always be kept in mind in solving any case.
PROGNoSIs. This will be influenced by the variety of the
vertigo. The prognosis is favorable in ocular and gastric vertigo.
534 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Unless the result of organic disease, the prognosis is good in
nervous vertigo. In auricular vertigo the prognosis is fair, but in
genuine Meniere's disease the prognosis is unfavorable, as it is
also in senile vertigo.
TREATMENT. For ocular vertigo, rest for the eyes and prop-
erly adjusted glasses. See General Treatment, etc., especially of
neck and spine.
MIGRAINE.
SYNoNYMs. Megrim; hemicrania; sick headache; bilious
headache; blind headache.
DEFINITION. A unilateral paroxysmal pain in the head, per-
iodical, accompanied with nausea, often vomiting, intolerance of
light and sound and incapability of mental exertion, the brain for
the time being temporarily prostrated and disturbed.
CAUSEs. In the majority of patients the nervous predispo-
sition to migraine is inherited, but whether inherited or acquired,
it commonly develops before the age of thirty.
Among the many exciting causes are disturbances of diges–
tion, irritation of the ovaries or womb, worry, exacting mental
labor, sexual excesses and insufficient sleep, and eye strain. The
causes of many attacks, however, are wrapt in mystery.
SYMPTOMs. Attacks of migraine occur in irregular par-
oxysms, the intervals between being free from pain or nervous
disturbance. For a day or two preceding the paroxysm, it will
be ascertained, on close questioning, that there was a feeling of
fatigue without apparent cause, heaviness over the eyes, with
some flatulency and indigestion. The attack proper is ushered in
by chilliness, nausea, often vomiting, yawning, and general mus-
cular soreness, with intolerance of light and noises in the ears
and incapability for mental exertion and pain of a sharp, shooting
character, of great intensity and persistency, localized most fre-
quently in either the frontal, temporal, or occipital regions of the
left side; at the same time there is tenderness over the whole side
of the head. Rarely the pain is felt on the right-side, and still
more rarely on both sides at the same time. The nausea and
other digestive symptoms may follow the onset of the pain instead
of preceding it. There is more or less disturbance of the circula-
tion, temperature, and secretions of the affected parts. At times
there is a marked contraction of the vessels, when the face is pale,
the eyes shrunken, and the pupils dilated; again, the vessels may
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 535
be dilated, when the face is flushed, the conjunctivae injected and
the pupils contracted. Motion, Sound and light aggravate the
acute suffering.
The attack may continue with more or less intensity from a
few hours to two or three days, the average duration being twen-
ty-four hours.
DIAGNOSIS. The symptoms are so characteristic that an
error seems impossible. It may, however, be confounded with
anaemic headache, hyperaemic headache, dyspeptic or bilious
headache, and neuralgic or rheumatic headache. The pains of
organic brain disease must be excluded.
PROGNoSIs. While few cases of true migraine are perma-
nently cured, the affection is free from danger to life. In a fair
number of cases the susceptibility to attacks declines as the person
advances in years, it being rarely seen after fifty years. “Cases of
migraine of the ophthalmic variety appear to be not rarely fol-
lowed by general paralysis of the insane.” (Herter.)
TREATMENT. See General Treatment for Brain Troubles.
TREATMENT FOR ALL BRAIN TROUBLES.
Whether we consider congestion in the arachnoid or in the
substance of the gray or white matter, or simply a venous con-
gestion that produces megrim, the principles involved in the
treatment are the same. To repeatedly specify the course to pur-
sue in each particular affection would not only presume stupidity
of intellect on the part of the reader, the student of “forces,” who
has traveled thus far with us in the application of this philosophy,
but would increase the size of this volume out of proportion.
The thing to do is plainly stated in other parts of this volume
—Take Off the Pressure! This is to be done in the neck, for the
most part; for failure in emptying the veins causes all the trou-
bles enumerated in the foregoing pages concerning brain trouble,
from a slight headache to a cerebral abscess. To relieve the veins
of engorgement means much.
The Manner of Treatment.
To relieve Common Headache occupies but a moment. It is
accomplished as follows: The patient sitting down, lying down,
or standing up, makes no difference. The operator places the
fingers of both hands on either side of the cervical spines, the
536 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
upper portion, close to the occiput, and covering the vaso-motor
area, with the thumbs on the side of the neck, covering the pneu-
mogastric nerve (in sheath of carotid artery); now press gently
on the neck with the fingers, and at the same instant with the
thumbs press on the nerves above mentioned. Headache ceases.
Sick headache is treated in the same way, but may require
further general treatment—stretching of the neck, manipulating
the muscles of the neck, stimulating the spinal accessory nerve,
raising the clavicles, treating the chest, liver, stomach and bow-
els; in fact, for chronic headaches a general treatment is always
proper to administer.
Aphasia, Every Variety—The treatment should be general,
from the upper cervix to and including every part of the body.
Remember that this affection, like paralysis, is due to extrava-
sation of blood around the terminal footlets of the motor and
sympathetic nerves, separating them, incoordinating communica-
tion of forces, or intelligence, from and through sympathetic to
motor, hence confusion. The rational treatment is, therefore, to
unite the footlets by removing the fluids that separate them. The
proper way is to open the channels of outlet, the veins, let the
venous blood be returned, let the waste material flow through the
lymphatics into the veins, thereby removing pressure and rein-
stating normal conditions. The treatment should begin, then, at
the back of the neck (vaso-motor area), then spring the neck
strongly as recommended in general treatment, stretch the whole
spinal cord, putting one hand at the occiput, the other under the
chin; pull gently until the feet are seen to move, rotate the head
while extension is being made, and at the same time the head is
turned press the fingers of the hand under the neck strongly
against the sides. of the vertebrae, just back of the mastoid pro-
cess. Change hands and repeat the process. Then give general
treatment.
Locomotor Ataxia.-General treatment every other day is re-
quired for months (perhaps years) in long-standing cases. The
higher up the lesion, the lower the effect. The treatment is to be
thorough, freeing all pressure everywhere in the body. The only
way to reach these lesions is through the sympathetic nerves,
reflexly ; and the great trunks coming out of the skull should be
especially looked after. Spinal accessory, pneumogastric and
cervical ganglia on both sides of the neck and clear down the
spinal column, including ganglion impar, as well as those in the
sphincters of the lower outlets of the body, remembering that
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 537
sympathetic nerve filaments exercise a controlling influence all
over the body, and we reach the nerve centers only through the
terminal ends or footlets of nerves. To specify each particular
move seems superfluous, and, should the reader feel at a loss to
know what to do in a particular case or condition, by reference
to illustrations and studying them, the movements necessary in
each indicated case may be readily selected, or the general freat-
ment understood. Attention is always to be directed to the parts
obstructed or structure involved, and how to reach it through
the nervous system or circulatory apparatus easily, for the illus-
trations represent all the movements for the general and special,
practical application of the science in the treatment of diseases.
The general treatments covering the parts affected usually suffice
in any given case. Therapeutic suggestion is a valuable means,
deserving special consideration.
Cerebro-Spinal Ganglia–The reflexes are forcibly illus-
trated in the irritation of the clitoris, sending a thrill all over the
system, and when long irritated, exercises a prostrating influence
upon the whole spinal nervous system. Moderately but firmly
pressed upon, produces great contractive influence upon the
fundus of uterus, producing expulsive parturient pains, both for
delivery of foetus and afterward for disengaging and expelling the
placenta. Contraction on the ends of the sympathetic filaments
in the external uterine sphincter muscle causes sickness at the
stomach. Sudden jerking of cilia (a wisp of) on the mons veneris
immediately arrests uterine, post-partum hemorrhage. These
actions show us some effects the sympathetic nervous system pro-
duces when we know how to use it, or suggest to it what our
desires are, and how to utilize forces that are not found in medi-
cines. These are only a few of the marvelous effects derivable
from this same set of tubes called nerves. If the pressure on these
end filaments produces such marvelous effects, imagine a pressure
on millions of these nerves along the spinal column and over the
whole body, for this same system of influences predominates
everywhere in our bodies, superintending and controlling them
whether we wake or sleep, provided the communication continues
intact. To know how to use this marvelous system correctly,
gives us complete control over disease. .
538 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ALCOHOLISM.
VARIETIES. Acute alcoholism; chronic alcoholism.
SYNONYMs. Acute variety, temulentia; mania-a-potu.
Chronic variety, delirium tremens; dipsomania or oinomania. It
would hardly be correct to consider these terms interchangeable;
they are rather names applied to various conditions due to acute
or chronic alcoholic poisoning.
DEFINITION. Alcoholism is the term used to designate the
physical and mental phenomena induced by the use of alcohol.
Temulentia, meaning drunkenness; mania-a-potu is an acute
mental derangement, occurring in those of strong neurotic ten-
dencies; delirium tremens is an attack of delirium associated with
tremors in persons with the numerous changes resulting from
chronic alcoholism. Delirium tremens results in alcoholics suf-
fering from some form of nephritis, preventing the elimination of
some poison developed from the ingested alcohol. Dipsomania
or oinomania, an alcoholic insanity in which an individual at
longer or shorter intervals has paroxysms of alcoholic desires,
between which he neither wishes nor craves alcohol.
CAUSES. Predisposing causes are influences arising from
unfavorable moral, social, and personal conditions. Heredity.
Exciting causes are the immoderate use of alcoholic beverages, of
which there are three groups: I. Spirits, or distilled liquors. 2.
Wines, or fermented liquors; and, 3. Malt liquors.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Acute Alcoholism.—The brain
is the seat of an active hyperaemia; the mucous membrane of the
stomach and duodenum is markedly injected and covered with a
ropy mucus slightly tinged with blood, and the gastric juice is
altered in quality and quantity. The kidneys are also the seat of
an active hyperaemia.
Chronic Alcoholism.—In this condition of the economy there
are no organs or tissues which do not present morbid changes.
The gastro-intestinal mucous membrane presents the changes of
chronic catarrhal inflammation; the liver, the first organ to
receive the poison after the stomach, presents the changes of con-
gestion, cirrhosis, or fatty degeneration; the kidneys show chronic
congestion, and often the changes are incident to chronic inter-
stitial nephritis. The post-mortem results found in twenty-five
cases of delirium tremens dying in the Philadelphia Hospital,
were fourteen with the changes of interstitial nephritis, eight with
chronic parenchymatous nephritis, and three with fatty kidney;
all showed chronic gastric catarrh and changes in the myocar-
PLATE XLVIII.-Chin-Occipital-Neck Extension.

;
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 54I
dium and the arteries of the heart, brain, and the aorta. The
muscular structure of the heart may undergo fatty degeneration
and the vessels the senile changes of the aged. The brain struc-
ture presents the changes of sclerosis in various stages, and there
may be chronic meningitis and pachymeningitis with haematoma.
The nerves are altered, atrophied, and hardened, and the neu-
roglia, vessels, and ganglion cells of the spinal cord show similar
changes.
SYMPTOMs. Acute alcoholism, resulting from the use of a
large quantity of alcoholic fluid, occurs with symptoms of mild
intoxication, to drunkenness passing to acute delirium and acute
coma. The condition begins with a period of exhilaration, pass-
ing to semi-delirium, and ending in an acute coma, when the
breathing is stertorous, the face bloated and congested, the lips
swollen and purplish, the pupils contracted, the pulse feeble and
slow, the skin cold and clammy, the temperature depressed and
frequently control of sphincters lost. An individual so affected is
said to be “dead drunk.” The cases of ordinary drunkenness do
not often pass beyond the stage of exhilaration, ending in a mild
coma or sleep.
Mania-a-potu-Or acute alcoholic delirium, is the direct
result of alcoholic excess in those engaged in a sudden debauch,
or who have drunk alcoholic beverages very “hard” for a com-
paratively short period. The individuals grow more and more
excitable, lose all desire for food, are unable to sleep, become the
prey of horrible hallucinations—“the horrors”—finally termin-
ating in mania which resembles delirium tremens in all save the
tremor, which is absent.
Chronic Alcoholism.—The condition to which this term has
been given is truly a disease. It is the result of the continued
use of alcoholic beverages until one or more of the morbid
organic changes have occurred. These persons are markedly dys-
peptic, with coated tongue, fetid breath, and early morning vomit-
ing, straining, or retching, attended with much distress. There
is a gradually developing muscular tremor, progressing to the
ataxic gait, and insomnia. The face may either become pallid,
flabby, and bloated, with an imbecile expression, or swollen,
rough, and dusky, with great bladders under the eyes, with yellow
injected conjunctivae. There are headache, vertigo, and attacks of
hallucinations; the memory grows weaker, the judgment less
accurate, the moral sense blunted, and the will power weak and
erratic. These and many other symptoms add to the distress of
542 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the individual, which he attempts to overcome by the use of more
and more of the poison.
Delirium Tremens.—In the majority of instances delirium
results from a prolonged debauch, in an old drinker. It begins
by an increased tremor, insomnia, irritable, excitable manner, fol-
lowed by the characteristic hallucinations and illusions, during
which Snakes and all forms of repulsive reptiles are seen, causing
the most intense horror and abject fear. There also occur illu-
sions of smell and hearing. This marked excitement is followed
by great depression, the skin is cold and clammy, the pulse feeble,
the muscular system weak, the mind in a condition of coma-vigil,
and a febrile condition typhoid in character develops. Uraemic
symptoms soon develop, the temperature suddenly bounding to
IO3, to IO4 or IOS degrees F., with albumen and casts. The ordi-
nary duration of an attack of delirium tremens is about two weeks
in those recovering, although death may occur at any time from
cardiac failure, uraemia, or alcoholic pneumonia. Convalescence
dates from the beginning of refreshing sleep, the patient awak-
ing with a clear mind and desire for food. Should the delirium
subside, but the patient continue to mutter and pick at the bed-
clothing, the tongue become dry and cracked, and the regurgita-
tion of dark brownish and bilious matter occur, the condition is
critical and an early fatal termination may be expected.
Dipsomania or Oinomania is the inherited or acquired men-
tal condition which craves the drinking of intoxicating liquors.
This is a true mental disease. It manifests itself in periodical
attacks of excessive indulgence in alcoholic drinking, or this
symptom of this sad disease may be replaced by other irresistible
desires of an impulsive kind, such as lead to the commission and
repetition of various crimes, the gratification of other depraved
appetites, robbery, or even homicide. Imbecility and dementia
frequently result.
The paroxysms at first occur at long intervals, but gradually
the intervals become shorter and shorter until the individual
entirely surrenders himself to alcoholic and other excesses.
DIAGNOSIs. Profound drunkenness or alcoholic coma may
and often is confounded with apoplectic and uraemic coma. Von
Wedekind suggests the following method for diagnosing drunk-
enness: “By simply pressing on the supraorbital notches with a
steadily increasing force you may, with certainty of success, bring
an unconscious alcoholic to his senses, and thus differentiate be-
tween alcoholic and other comas.” The symptoms of chronic
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 543
alcoholism often bear a close resemblance to the following mala-
dies: general paralysis, disseminated sclerosis, paralysis agitans,
locomotor ataxia, cerebral and spinal softening, epilepsy, demen-
tia chronica, and nervous dyspepsia. -
In individuals whose habits are secret the question of
diagnosis is attended with considerable difficulty. Anstie lays
much stress upon the importance of the following four points,
diagnostic of chronic alcoholism: insomnia, morning vomiting,
muscular tremor, and causeless mental restlessness.
PROGNOSIS. In acute alcoholism the prognosis is good if
the patient is manageable. In chronic alcoholism the organic
changes, the direct result of the alcoholic habit, tend to shorten
life by the production of fatty heart, Bright's disease, insanity,
impotence, epilepsy, melancholia, and organic brain diseases.
The danger in delirium tremens is heart failure or deepening
coma. The association of chronic nephritis with delirium tre-
mens, perhaps its cause, must always be taken into account in
determining a prognosis. Acute lobar pneumonia is a very fatal
complication of all forms of alcoholism.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment for confirmed alcoholism is necessarily a var-
iety treatment, to meet varied indications. Like for the poisonous
effects of opium, the patient should be moved around continu-
ously, or the manipulations made with a view to keep up a rapid
and uninterrupted circulation of the blood. Strong divulsion
of the sphincters sobers the victim at once, and the operator will
immortalize himself in the estimation of some to do so, but there
is either an inborn craving, or a cultivated one, that has a deeper
significance than occasional habit of inebriety. Habit, like an
armed foe, has transformed every tissue into servitude to the
destroyer, and the will power of the victim must be turned in
the opposite direction to make him a sober man. The diseased
morbidity of his stomach should be intelligently looked after,
rested, treated through the cerebro-spinal nervous system until all
right. Non-stimulating diet and no breakfast enjoined. Com-
plete hypnotism and suggestion cures a larger percentage than
anything else. Use it. To sober up a person drunken, press on
the supraorbital nerves.
544 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
HEAT STROKE.
SYNONYMs. Insolation; sunstroke; thermic fever; coup-
de-soliel; heat exhaustion.
DEFINITION. A depression of the vital powers; the result
of exposure to excessive heat. The condition manifests itself
as acute meningitis (rare), heat exhaustion (common), and as
true sunstroke.
CAUSEs. Exposure to the influence of excessive heat, either
to the direct rays of the sun or artificial heat in confined quarters,
or diffused atmospheric heat without proper ventilation. Among
the predisposing causes, which act by lessening the power of the
system to resist the heat. are great bodily fatigue, overcrowding,
and intemperance.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The action of the heat upon the
system is so sudden, and the malady so rapid in its course, that
structural changes have not developed. The left ventricle is
firmly contracted (Wood). The right heart and vessels are
gorged with dark fluid blood. All the tissues and organs of the
body are in a state of great venous congestion. The blood is
dark, thin, and either but feebly alkaline or decidedly acid, and
its power of coagulability is destroyed. The post-mortem rigidity
is early and marked.
SYMPTOMs. Depending upon the variety.
Acute meningitis the result of exposure to heat is similar to
that due to other causes.
Heat exhaustion develops with a rapid feeling of weakness
and prostration, the surface cool, the face pale, the voice weak,
the pulse rapid and feeble, the respiration increased, the vision
growing dim and indistinct, noises develop in the ears, the indi-
vidual overcome, becoming partially, or completely unconscious.
with perhaps convulsions and tremors, and shrunken features.
Sunstroke.—The symptoms, developing suddenly, with or
without prodromata, are, insensibility, with or without delirium,
or convulsions, or paralysis, the surface flushed and hot, the con-
junctivae injected, the breathing either rapid and shallow or
labored and stertorous, the pulse quick and either bounding or
weak, and the temperature in the axilla ranging from IO5 degrees
to IOS degrees, to IIo degrees, with suppression of all glandular
action. Death occurring, the result of asphyxia, or from a slow
failure of respiration and cardiac action.
DIAGNOSIS. It is of great importance, therapeutically, to
distinguish at once between attacks of sunstroke and heat exhaus-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 545
tion. Cases of sunstroke are to be differentiated from cerebral
hemorrhage and alcoholic insensibility, for which purpose the
clinical thermometer is indispensable.
PROGNOSIS. Attacks of heat exhaustion, if properly and
promptly treated, favorable. The prognosis of sunstroke or heat
fever is unfavorable in the majority of cases, death resulting in
from half an hour to several hours. Unfavorable indications are,
increased temperature, cardiac failure, convulsions, absent re-
flexes, followed by complete muscular reláxations. Favorable
indications are, decline in surface heat and axillary or rectal tem-
perature, stronger pulse, increased depth of respirations, restored
reflexes, and return of consciousness.
- THE TREATMENT.
The indications are apparent: Restore capillary circulation
as soon as possible. The bivalve should be brought into requisi-
tion if possible, otherwise use the digits to divulse; then regulate
the action of the circulation by vaso-motor stimulation, then fol-
low up the treatment of spine, strongly extending the arms as the
spine is treated. Use all the measures to establish and continue
circulation, especially in the body. To draw blood from the head
use the hemaspasia process—cording one of the lower limbs—
and hold the venous blood there for half an hour, then remove
the cord, and place it on other limb, same way and time. Induce
vomiting of contents of stomach, if full. Use strong, rapid vibra-
tory movements along the spine and over the abdomen, moving
the muscular tissue profoundly for several moments. The neck
muscles should be thoroughly manipulated, and the clavicles
raised, so as to permit the venous blood to return from the brain.
These measures will be found successful, except caused by alco-
holism—and sometimes then. Remove all obstacles to deep
inspiration and be sure to place the patient in airy quarters.
Oxygen is essential in such cases. Enjoin deep breathing, arti-
ficial if necessary, until recuperation. -
ACUTE HYDROCEPHALUS.
SYNoNYMs. Acquired hydrocephalus; serous apoplexy.
DEFINITION. Strictly speaking, hydrocephalus signifies
water in the brain; but it is here restricted to the presence of a
serous fluid in the arachnoid spaces, in the pia mater, in the ven-
tricles, and in the brain substance (oedema); characterized by the
546 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
more or less sudden development of cerebral excitation, followed
by depression and usually death.
CAUSEs. Most common between the ages of one and five,
although it may occur at any age. “The predominance of the
nervous system in the bodily conformation” is a strong predis-
posing cause. Among the exciting causes are unfavorable
hygienic conditions, dentition, eruptive fevers, blows on the head,
mechanical causes preventing the return of the blood from the
venae Galeni and the right sinus, compression of the jugular vein,
diseases of the right heart, and Bright's disease.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The effusion may be limited to
the ventricles, although there is usually considerable distention of
the subarachnoid spaces and Oedema of the pia mater and neigh-
boring portions of the brain, whence results more or less soften-
ing, especially around the ventricles. The choroid plexus is
hyperaemic, and may be the seat of minute extravasations.
SYMPTOMs. There are three varieties of acute hydroce-
phalus with characteristic symptoms, to-wit: comatose, convul-
sive, and the ordinary.
Comatose.—Known also as “serous apoplexy,” begins
abruptly with the phenomena of apoplexy, the result of the
sudden effusion. The pressure is usually so great on the medulla
oblongata that it ceases to functionate, death resulting in a few
hours, rarely lasting several days. -
Convulsive.-The result of Bright's disease or a general
dropsy, is ushered in with headache, nausea, and vomiting, fol-
lowed in a day or two with convulsions, passing into coma, which
usually terminates fatally, although rarely a remission may pre-
cede death for a day or two. -
Ordinary.—The most common in children, begins with fever-
ishness, headache, vertigo, photophobia, restlessness, nocturnal
delirium, insomnia, twitching, and spasmodic contractions of the
muscles and great hyperaesthesia of the skin. Such symptoms
continue for several days, when convulsions occur, followed by
death, or a continuance of the symptoms, followed by rigidity,
stupor, and death.
y
THE TREATMENT.
In referring to causes, it will be seen that the nervous system
is interfered with, or a predominance is in that direction. This
will generally be found to be reflexly. Something will be found
wrong with the genitals. Referring to the Orificial Surgery
Journal, I find that cases have been successfully treated by the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 547
performance of circumcision. That relieves the reflex irritation
from that source, especially where phymosis exists. This should
be corrected in cases demanded, and no one is excusable for
neglect in this regard. The neck muscles are most generally
involved also, and contracture of the muscular fibers closes the
clavicles down, preventing venous return circulation, hence
accumulation in the brain. Clear out the Scavengers (the veins),
then look for favorable results—not till then. The mild and per-
sistent general treatment every day or two will be rewarded by
favorable results in a larger per cent. of cases generally, than
from other treatment. The spinal system of nerves is to be kept
in normal condition, the renal splanchnic receiving special atten-
tion each treatment. The indications properly heeded, promise
good results if treatment is properly applied. These directions
apply to the chronic congenital as well. Treatment should be
applied every other day, at least.
CONGENITAL HYDROCEPHALUS.
DEFINITION. An excessive accumulation of the cerebro-
spinal fluid—a cerebral dropsy—in the ventricles—internal hydro-
cephalus; or in the meshes of the pia mater—external hydroce-
phalus, or in both—mixed hydrocephalus; characterized by
enlargement of the head and more or less pronounced nervous
phenomena. A disease of infants, or very young children.
CAUSEs. Imperfect or arrested development of the brain or
its membranes. Occurs in the offspring of tubercular, scrofulous,
or syphilitic parents. Inflammatory changes in the ventricles and
ependyma.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Enlargement of the head is the
chief external pathological condition, although there is no con-
stant ratio between the size of the head and the amount of fluid,
the quantity varying from an ounce to a pint or more. The
liquid is transparent, of a straw color, containing a small amount
of albumen and chloride of sodium. If the quantity of fluid be
small the ventricles are simply distended, if the amount be large
the optic thalami and corpus striatum are depressed and flattened,
the roof of the ventricles thinned, and the foramen of Monro is
greatly enlarged. The enlargement of the head may occur
before birth and impede or prevent natural delivery, or the head
may be normal at birth and increase afterward. As enlargement
548 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
progresses the bones are so thinned as to be translucent, the
fontanelles and sutures are widened, the lateral portions of the
cranium project, the forehead bulges out over the eyes, and the
orbital plates are depressed, forcing the eyes outward and down-
ward, producing a variety of exophthalmos; the head has an
irregular, triangular shape, the base of the triangle being the top
of the head. The scalp being stretched by the pressure within,
becomes tense and thin, and but scantily covered with hair, the
veins which ramify in it are unusually prominent and large, and
the entire head is elastic on pressure, from the amount of liquid
beneath.
Hilton, in “Rest and Pain,” says: “In almost every case of
internal hydrocephalus which I have examined after death I
found that this cerebro-spinal opening (between the fourth. ven-
tricle and the spinal canal) was so completely closed
that no cerebro-spinal fluid could escape from the interior of the
brain; and, as the fluid was being constantly secreted, it neces-
sarily accumulated there, and to my mind the occlusion formed
the essential pathological element of internal hydrocephalus.”
SYMPTOMs. The increased size of the head, with the ema-
ciated condition of the child, who seemingly eats well, is what first
attracts the attention. The head appears too heavy, the eyes are
prominent and have a downward direction, the face is devoid of
expression, old and wrinkled, the voice feeble; the mental devel-
opment is not in keeping with the age. When the period for
standing or walking arrives the power is found wanting. The
further history is but a continuation and exaggeration of this,
until convulsions occur, which sooner or later terminate fatally.
The course of congenital hydrocephalus is usually slow, but
progressively worse. The majority terminate within the first
year; cases are recorded, however, of ten and fifteen years’ dura-
tion.
DIAGNoSIS. In rachitis the volume of the head is increased,
due, in part at least, to a deposit of calcareous matter on the
exterior of the cranial bones. Rachitis may be mistaken for
hydrocephalus in cases in which the amount of liquid is small.
The differential diagnosis is based on the shape of the head, round
in rachitis, square or triangular or with prominences in hydroce-
phalus; with the persistent downward direction of the eyes and
the elasticity of the head on pressure.
PROGNosis. Unfavorable. Arrest of progress and even
cures have been reported. Spontaneous cures are reported fol-
PLATE XLIX.-Vibratory Movements, Neck and Back.


A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 55 I
lowing the accidental discharge of the fluid. But such reports
are exceptional. wº
TREATMENT. See treatment for Acute Hydrocephalus.
DISEASES OF THE SPINAL
CORD.
SPINAL HYPERAEMIA.
SYNONYMS. Spinal congestion; plethora spinalis.
DEFINITION. An abnormal fullness of the vessels of the
meninges and cord; active when an arterial hyperaemia; passive
when a venous hyperaemia; characterized by pain in the back,
with more or less pronounced disorders of sensation and loco-
motion.
CAUSES. Cold and exposure; arrested menses; arrest of
habitual hemorrhoidal discharge; malaria; protracted erect pos-
ture; injuries to the back; certain spinal poisons, as strychnina,
picrotoxinum, and alcoholic excesses.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Active.—The post-mortem
appearances are congestion of the meninges and cord, the same
vessels supplying both, with numerous points of extravasation,
due to the rupture of capillary vessels. The spinal fluid is
increased in amount. Passive.—A general bluish discoloration,
Owing to the abnormal fullness of the large anastomising vessels;
the spinal fluid somewhat increased. -
SYMPTOMs. Active.—Dull pain in the dorsal or lumbar
region, shooting into the hips and thighs, persistent and increased
by pressure; tenderness on motion; tingling sensations in the
limbs and feet, and sometimes in the hands and arms; a feeling of
constriction about the abdomen is often present, with rigidity of
the abdominal muscles. Increased reflexes, with disorders of
motility, and when the patient is in the recumbent position, jerk-
ing of the limbs. On attempting to walk it is accomplished with
difficulty, from an incomplete loss of power. If the upper part of
the cord be affected, dyspnoea and palpitation occur. There
often occur painful priapism and frequent nocturnal emissions.
The above symptoms may be followed by a more or less
552 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
©
pronounced temporary depression, the sensation diminished, and
the lower limbs benumbed and heavy, the movements weak.
The electro-contractility is preserved, and in many cases
even increased or exaggerated.
DURATION. From a few hours to several days; if longer,
myelitis may result.
DIAGNOSIS Anaemia causes more or less spinal irritability
and tenderness; but the history, pallor, and general weakness,
unassociated with defects of motility or sensibility, will prevent
error. Spinal meningeal hemorrhage is more sudden in its onset,
its violence, and its range of symptoms. Myelitis and spinal
meningitis have symptoms in common with spinal congestion,
which will be pointed out when discussing those affections.
PROGNOSIS. Favorable, recovery occurring in three or four
days. If the symptoms show a tendency to linger, myelitis, more
or less pronounced, will ensue.
TREATMENT. See Spinal Meningitis.
PACHYMENINGITIS SPINALIS.
SYNoNYMs. Pachymeningitis spinalis interna; hypertrophic
pachymeningitis; pseudo-membranous pachymeningitis.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the inner surface of the
spinal dura mater; characterized by violent pains in the head,
back, shoulder, and arms, followed by contractures and paralyses
of the upper extremities.
CAUSEs. Exposure to cold and damp; alcoholism; syphilis;
gout; injuries. -
PATHologICAL ANATOMY. Hypertrophic pachymeningitis
is characterized by an exudation upon the inner surface of the
dura mater, which gradually solidifies into a layer of compact
connective tissue, which presses upon the spinal cord and nerves,
producing a myelitis and an atrophic neuritis, resulting in
muscular atrophy. The most frequent seat of this form is the
cervical hypertrophic pachymeningitis.
In the pseudo-membranous form a membranous exudation
also occurs, in which large numbers of blood vessels develop and
rupture, the hemorrhagic extravasation forming a cyst—haema-
toma—which causes pressure on the cord and nerves.
SYMPTOMs. The onset is slow and gradual, with irregular
chills and feverishness, violent pains, and stiffness in the head,
neck, shoulders, and arms, continuous but subject to exacerba-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 553
.tions, and associated with a painful constriction of the upper
thorax. Numbness and prickling occur in the arms, more
marked in one than the other. Rarely nausea and vomiting
occur. These symptoms may continue off and on for several
months, the muscles of the painful parts atrophying, followed by
spasmodic contraction, particularly of the hands and wrists,
followed later by paralysis. - -
The paralytic stage develops gradually, with weakness in the
arms, associated with contractures and rigidity. The pain con-
tinues with anaesthesia, hyperaesthesia, and trophic changes.
Later paraplegia with rigidity, exaggerated reflexes, and spinal
epilepsy develop.
The development of tuberculosis and nephritis during the
progress of chronic cerebral and spinal diseases, which are the
immediate cause of death, is a clinical observation.
The electro-contractility is lost.
PROGNoSIs. If early recognized and promptly treated, the
hypertrophic form may be improved. Generally, however, the
prognosis is unfavorable.
TREATMENT. See Spinal Meningitis.
SPINAL MENINGITIS.
SYNoNYM. Leptomeningitis spinalis.
DEFINITION. Inflammation of the arachnoid and pia mater
membranes of the spinal cord, either acute, subacute, or chronic;
characterized by pain in the back, rigidity of the muscles,
disorders of motility and sensibility. It may be acute or
chronic.
CAUSEs. The disease is rare, and is always due to an infec-
tion from tubercle, syphilis, typhoid fever, or septicaemia, or the
result of a traumatism. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Acute.—Hyperaemia of the
membranes, with swelling of the tissues, the result of serous infil-
tration, followed by purulent and fibrinous exudations. The
roots of the spinal nerves are covered with exudation, and are
swollen and soft. The cord proper is more or less congested and
Oedematous. -
Chronic.—Adhesion of the membranes, with more or less
accumulation of fluid, resulting in atrophic degeneration of the
cord from pressure. If the disease is secondary to tubercle, these
554 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
granulations are seen distributed over the pia, arachnoid, and
inner surface of the dura.
SYMPTOMs. There are two stages, the first, the stage of
irritation, the second, the stage of paralysis of motion and sensa-
tion, with atrophy. Although an inflammatory affection, yet
its onset is usually subacute, the febrile reaction being moderate,
with intense boring pain in the back, aggravated by motion,
rigidity of the spine, and a sense of constriction around the body
—"the girdle.” Spasmodic contractions of the muscles inner-
vated by the nerves originating at the seat of the lesion, with
inability to straighten the limbs. If the lower part of the spinal
membranes is the seat, there occur constipation and retention of
urine; if upper part, dysphagia, dyspnoea, and feeble heart.
The muscular contractions are excited or increased by motion,
but uninfluenced by pressure. Reflex movements are not abol-
ished. The rigidity and spasmodic contraction of the muscles
are followed by paralysis, more or less complete, death following
from paralysis of the muscles of respiration. If the inflammation
extend to the medulla, the above symptoms are associated with
disorders of speech, vomiting, and delirium.
Electro-contractility lessened or absent, both as to motility
and sensibility, in the affected parts. te
Chronic form succeeds to the acute or originates spontan-
eously, and presents the same form and order of symptoms—
excitation or irritation, and depression or paralysis.
DIAGNOSIs. The points of importance are deep, boring pain
in the back, aggravated by motion but not by pressure, with
spasmodic contraction of the muscles, followed by paralysis.
Myelitis slight or absence of pain with earlier and more com-
plete paralysis. -
Tetanus may be confounded with spinal meningitis. The
points of distinction are: in the former occur early trismus with
rhythmical spasms excited by irritation of the skin, whereas irri-
tation of the skin does not in spinal meningitis produce muscular
contractions, but movement of the limbs does do so; progres-
sively increasing, and not associated with fever; usually a clear
history of an injury.
PROGNoSIs. Generally unfavorable. Death is either sud-
den, from paralysis of respiration and of the heart, or gradual,
the result of exhaustion. Critical discharges, such as profuse
perspiration, urinary flow, or epistaxis occur, and are followed
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 555
by rapid recovery. Cases recovering may have more or less
pronounced partial or complete paralysis. -
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment for spinal hyperaemia, pachymeningitis and
spinal meningitis is modified according to circumstances, and
applies to all. The important thing to be done is to take off the
pressure from the veins. To do this, results in a removal of the
difficulty—venous closure. The whole man demands our atten-
tion, hence general treatment, using the various manipulations
recommended to restore normal circulation, by establishing capil-
lary circulation, and removal of pressure from the terminal nerve
filaments. The first attention is to be directed to the vaso-motor
nervous system, and then the spine, all the way down. The neck
should be duly stretched, the body extended, the spine stimulated,
chest expanded, intercostals relieved of venous congestion, lower
limbs flexed, rotated, extended, and every manipulation applied,
that is essential to the promotion of freedom of the circulation of
the fluids in veins and lymphatics. This takes off the pressure
from the nerves, reaction ensues at once, the difficulty is arrested,
and health restored. Treatments should be repeated daily or
oftener, or at longer intervals, according to indications. Pro-
moting a free circulation all over the body is the thing to do.
Use the means indicated.
-à-
ACUTE MYELITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Acute or general diffuse myelitis; transverse
myelitis; softening of the cord. t
DEFINITION. An inflammation affecting the substance of
the spinal cord, which may be limited to the gray or white matter,
and involve the whole or isolated portions of the cord. When
the gray matter alone is inflamed, it is termed central myelitis;
when the white matter and the meninges, it is termed cortical
myelitis; it may be ascending, descending, or transverse in its
extension. The disease is characterized by more or less sudden
and complete loss of motion and sensation.
CAUSEs. Following spinal meningitis; exposure to cold and
damp; injuries to the vertebrae; prolonged functional activity of
- the cord; typhus fever; rheumatism; syphilis; puerperal fever, or,
556 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
during the course of the exanthemata, arsenical or mercurial
poisoning. o - r
PATHoLOGICAL ANATOMY. Intense hyperaemia of the sub-
stance of the cord, with extravasations, giving the tissues a red-
dish-brown or chocolate tint, and also serous transudations,
resulting in softening of the structure of the cord, the color
changing to yellow and white, the nerve elements undergoing
fatty degeneration, presenting the appearance and consistency
of cream. The membranes also undergo more or less change.
SYMPTOMs. The severity of the symptoms depends upon
the extent and location of the inflammation. The onset is usually
sudden, with a chill, fever, Io9 degrees, frequent pulse, with
alterations in sensibility and motility, to-wit: pain in the back,
aggravated by touch and by heat and cold, with sensations of
formication (“pins and needles”), the limb feeling as if asleep,
or else complete anaesthesia, associated with severe neuralgic
pains. -
The distinction between anaesthesia (insensibility to touch),
and analgesia (insensibility to pain) must be clearly determined.
A sensation of constriction around the body and limbs, as if
encircled by a tight cord, “the girdle pains”; rapidly developing
paraplegia, complete in a few hours, with involuntary discharges.
The reflex functions are usually abolished, as seen by attempting
to cause movement of the limbs by tickling the feet or by striking
the patella tendon; rarely are they diminished, very rarely exag-
gerated. The temperature of the affected limbs is lowered three
or four degrees. Sloughs and bed-sores and muscular atrophy
result if the anterior cornua—the trophic centers—are affected.
The above symptoms of loss of motion and sensibility with
rectal and vesical paralysis, are associated with more or less pro-
nounced vomiting, hepatic disorders, irregularity of the heart,
dyspnoea, dysphagia, apnoea, and painful priapisms. The urine
is markedly alkaline in reaction, finally developing cystitis.
Among the late manifestations are shooting pains and spasmodic
twitching or contractions of one or all of the muscles of the
paralyzed parts. -
The electro-contractility is abolished in the paralyzed parts.
DIAGNOSIS. Acute spinal meningitis is distinguished from
acute myelitis by severe pains, increased by pressure, with mus-
cular contractions increased by motion, followed by paralysis
much less profound than the paraplegia of myelitis; in spinal
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 557
meningitis there exists cutaneous and muscular hyperaesthesia,
which is absent in myelitis.
Congestion of the spinal cord is characterized by the mild
character and short duration of all the symptoms.
Hemorrhage in the spinal canal is abrupt with irritative
symptoms, slight paralysis, preserved reflexes and electro-con-
tractility.
The principal diagnostic points of acute myelitis are the
“girdle” around the limbs or body, rapid and complete paraple-
gia, loss of sensation, lowered temperature in the affected parts,
early and persistent sloughing (bed-sores), and alkaline urine or
cystitis.
Hysterical paraplegia shows no trophic changes, no altered
reflexes, slight atrophy, irregular anaesthesia, and the presence
of the stigmata of hysteria.
Lithaemic paraesthesia, tingling and numbness of fingers
and toes, might lead to error if the cerebral symptoms of lithaemia
are overlooked.
The diagnosis of the location of the lesion is made by a study
of the height of the anaesthesia, the skin reflexes, and the distri-
bution and extent of the paralysis.
PROGNOSIS. Varies according to the location of the lesion
and completeness of the symptoms.
If the paralysis is of the ascending variety, death occurs
within a few days, from paralysis of the muscles of respiration.
If the trophic centers are affected, there occur bed-sores,
intense pyelo-nephritis and cystitis and changes in the joints;
death from exhaustion in several weeks.
Central myelitis, or inflammation of the gray matter, is rapid
in its progress, death occurring in a week or two.
The morbid process may be arrested and the general health
restored, but some spinal symptoms will persist.
THE TREATMENT.
When the effects are considered, the cause is easily imagined
—venous congestion. This congestion is due to the contraction
of the muscular fibers, drawing fascia, perhaps capsular liga-
mentous tissue, taut across the nerves leading to the spinal cord,
lessening or abridging or destroying nervous communication to
the cord; hence paralysis of the connective tissue around and
of the walls of the veins, hence extravasation of blood, hence
pressure. The very nature of the results demonstrates this fact.
558 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The results of the application of Osteopathic principles prove the
correctness of this assertion. The extensiveness of the lesion at”
the various sections of the spinal ganglia is seen in effects on cer-
tain muscles supplied by the various nerves from it—supplying
said muscles. The knowledge of the origin, distribution, and
places of exit from the spinous foramina becomes a matter of
much moment in the correct application of the principles of this
science, manipulatory at least. It will be a stunner to the gen-
eral practitioner to contemplate the probabilities of a possible
benefit through the application of these principles to such a ter-
rible state of affairs as we find in such cases The applications
prove alike successful in all the forms of paralysis known to exist.
The more recent, the more potent for relief. We would state
here: That venous obstruction relieved, myelitis ceases. The
treatment given by the ordinary medical man sustains about as
much relationship to cause and effect as tying a vein to stop
arterial hemorrhage. It will invariably be found that failure to
return the blood from the head through the internal jugular veins
is the direct cause of the congestion that produces the pressure
that results in the lesion—the extravasation—pressing upon the
origin of nerves that supply certain muscles. Remember that.
The treatment must be directed to the place of obstruction
—in the neck veins first. Then the pressure must be removed
all the way along the lines of the various nerves from origin to
termination. This takes off the pressure, lifts the weight from
the venous walls, permits return circulation to the heart, lungs,
where oxygenation takes place, renewal of the vital forces and
a normal arterial supply. The treatment, then, should begin at
the occiput. It should be continued all the way down the spinal
column, every manipulation recommended in general treatment
for the whole system used, and special regard to the proper inhal-
ation of pure air, as well as due regard to the restfulness of the
digestive tract, avoiding overcrowding the stomach. Rest is
especially enjoined until amelioration ensues. Treatments
applied systematically and intelligently at intervals of from a few
hours to two days will be rewarded, usually, with perfect success.
INFANTILE SPINAL PARALYSIS.
SYNoNYMs. Myelitis of the anterior horns; poliomyelitis
anterior acuta; essential paralysis of children; atrophic paralysis
of children.
PLATE L.-Showing Manipulations of Neck and Throat.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 56I
DEFINITION. A rapidly developed inflammation of the
anterior horns of the gray matter of the cord, Occurring suddenly
in children, at times in adults—acute spinal paralysis of adults—
characterized by mild fever, muscular tremors and twitchings,
and paralysis of groups of muscles.
CAUSEs. Essentially a disease of early life—the second
month to the third or fourth year. The fact of its having
occurred in adults must be borne in mind. Cold and damp; den-
tition (?); injuries to the spine; developed during convalescence
from the acute exanthemata.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The early changes are: medul-
lary hyperaemia, vascular exudation and inflammatory softening,
although the naked eye may not recognize any changes. Micro-
scopical examination reveals inflammatory softening of the
anterior horns of the gray matter. Among other constant
lesions are atrophic degeneration of the multipolar ganglion cells
and of the anterior nerve roots.
The changes noted as occurring in the cord are usually
limited to the dorso-lumbar and cervical enlargements. As a
direct result of the changes in the trophic centers and the nerve
degeneration of the muscular fibers supplied, there ensue changes
in the bones and joints, leading to great deformities.
SYMPTOMs. The onset of the affection varies; it may be
acute, subacute, or chronic; it is usually sudden, with an attack of
mild fever of a remittent type, of a few days’ duration, on recov-
ery from which it is noticed that the child is paralyzed. Rarely
the paralysis may be preceded by convulsions. The paralysis
may affect both arms and both legs, the legs alone, or only one
of the four extremities; it may, but very rarely, be a hemiplegia.
As a rule, however, the leg suffers more frequently than the arm;
in paralysis of the leg the muscles below the knee suffer more
severely than those above. The bladder and rectum are not
affected, or if so, only temporarily, nor can anaesthesia or numb-
ness be detected. The temperature of the paralyzed limb is low
and the appearance cyanosed. After a few days there is a slight
improvement in the paralyzed parts, although the muscles show
a rapid wasting, which is progressive until all muscular tissue is
gone.
The reflex movements are impaired or abolished.
The electro-contractility by the faradic current is abolished
in the paralyzed parts. With the galvanic or constant current
the “reactions of degeneration” are developed. To fully under-
562 . OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
stand the meaning of this term a knowledge of the normal elec-
trical reactions is necessary.
The normal formulae for the production of muscular con-
traction in the physiological state are as follows, the strength of
the current being barely capable of causing fair contractions:
First.—The most effective contractions are produced by the
cathode (negative) pole on closing the circuit. Second.—The
second most effective are produced by the anode (positive) pole
on closing the circuit. Third.—The next most effective is by the
anode pole on opening the circuit. Fourth.--Cathode pole con-
tractions on opening circuit are rarely seen in the physiological
State.
The “reactions of degeneration” are shown by any reversal
of the regular formulae, to-wit: if the anodal closure shows
stronger contractions than cathodal closure; still greater degen-
eration is shown if the anodal opening contractions are stronger
than either of the above; and most complete degeneration is
shown by the complete reversal of the normal formulae as shown
by distinct cathodal opening contractions.
SEQUEL.E. Amongst the deformities resulting from the
paralysis are the different forms of talipes. Talipes Equinas.-
The result of paralysis of the antero-external muscular group of
the leg. Equino-Varus-The result of paralysis of the antero-
external muscular group of the leg, together with the adductors
of the foot. Talipes Calcaneus.-The result of paralysis of the
muscles of the calf of the leg. Talipes Cavus.-‘‘Pes cavus”—
characterized by the hollowing of the sole of the foot, with promi-
nence of the instep, the result of paralysis of the calf muscles with
contraction of the long flexor of the toe or the long peroneus—
the foot flexors.
DIAGNOSIS. The recognition of acute poliomyelitis is not
always possible at the onset or during its early days, as localized
paralyses are difficult of detection in children, but immobility
of one leg or arm in children with febrile symptoms or following
convulsions is always an indication of poliomyelitis. After the
initial stage has passed, the presence of paralysis, wasting, pres-
ence of R. D. (reactions of degeneration), loss of reflexes, and the
absence of anaesthesia, render the diagnosis very easy.
Hemiplegia from acute cerebral affections in children can
be distinguished from infantile paralysis by the disorders of intel-
ligence and the special senses, and the perseverance of the normal
electro-contractility.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 563
Paralysis of myelitis occurs in older persons, and is asso-
ciated with disturbances of the genito-urinary organs and
bed-sores. . -
Pseudo-muscular hypertrophy, with paralysis, begins grad-
ually, becoming progressively worse with increase in the size of
the limbs.
PROGNOSIS. More or less paralysis with muscular wasting
always results, although there is no doubt that the extent can be
greatly lessened by early recognition and treatment.
THE TREATMENT.
The same general principles apply here as in every case of
paralysis. Take off and keep off the pressure. Restore normal
blood supply and recovery ensues. There are more cases
cured by the application of these principles than by any other
means ever devised. The freedom of the flow of all of the fluids
to and from the heart, means much—it means health. Follow
the special indications as well as general. It requires time and
patience in the chronic form of these affections. Persist with
confident assurance of final relief. Marvelous consequences
follow these treatments.
CHRONIC PROGRESSIVE BULBAR PARALYSIS.
SYNONYMS. Glosso-labio-laryngeal paralysis; bulbar par-
alysis.
DEFINITION. A chronic degenerative affection of certain
nuclei of the medulla oblongata; characterized by a slowly pro-
gressive bilateral paralysis of the tongue, lips, palate, pharynx,
and larynx, with atrophy of the tongue and lips.
CAUSEs. Obscure. Rare before the fortieth year. Among
many others may be named cold, rheumatism, gout, syphilis, and
injuries about the neck.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. “Degenerative atrophy of the
gray nuclei in the floor of the fourth ventricle; with atrophy and
gray discoloration of the nerve roots from the medulla, especially
of the facial and hypoglossal nerves.” “Atrophy and disappear-
ance of the motor ganglion cells is always to be noted. It may
be the sole lesion.”
“The nerves going to the muscles exhibit sclerosis of the
neurilemma, and the degenerative atrophy is found in the nerve
roots coming from the bulb.”
564 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
SYMPTOMs. The disease begins insidiously. There is first
noticed some difficulty in articulation, from want of precision in
movements of the tongue, particularly in the use of the lingual
consonants, l, n, r, and t, which increases until that organ is com-
pletely paralyzed. The paralysis gradually invades the soft
palate and pharyngeal muscles, causing difficulty in deglutition,
of the orbicularis oris, preventing closure of the lips, of the laryn-
geal muscles interfering with articulation. With the increasing
loss of power in the tongue and lips is also a gradual atrophy of
these muscles. When the disease is fully developed the condi-
tion of the patient is most pitiable indeed; articulation is impaired
or impossible, deglutition interfered with, the lips remaining apart
allowing the saliva to dribble from the mouth, and liquids to
return through the nose if attempts are made to swallow them.
As the malady progresses, the pneumogastric nucleus becomes
involved, resulting in loss of voice, difficulty of respiration, and
cardiac irregularity. The general health gradually suffers from
insufficient nutrition and imperfect respiration, although the mind
is clear until the end. The “reactions of degeneration” are
present.
Besides the chronic bulbar paralysis, there are two acute
forms which give the same symptoms as the chronic cases, only
they develop suddenly, one, the result of hemorrhage into the
medulla, which at the onset has vertigo, vomiting, loss of power
in the limbs, and slight sensory disturbances, all of which disap-
pear, leaving the glosso-labio-laryngeal paralysis; the second
form comes suddenly, with fever, vomiting, and loss of power in
the limbs, soon disappearing, leaving the characteristic bulbar
symptoms; this variety is inflammatory and closely allied to acute
poliomyelitis.
DIAGNOSIs. It can hardly be confounded with any other
malady.
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. The duration is from one to
five years.
THE TREATMENT.
This, like many other affections of the nervous system, is
traceable to muscular contracture in the neck. Long-continued
contractions of the fibers of the trapezius, splenius capitis, the
levator anguli scapulae, and of the scaleni, mitigate the action of
the terminal sympathetic nerve influence, cut off communication
with the motor, and eventually produce paralysis. These con-
tractures interfere also (and have perhaps for years) with the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 565
venous circulation, squeezing down on the recurrent nerve fila-
ments, as well as the spinal accessory and the glosso-pharyngeal
nerves; hence paralysis of the tongue. That the other muscles
(those in front of the neck) are implicated there is no doubt, when
we consider that the venous blood is prevented from returning
through the internal jugulars thereby, and thus press upon the
base and posterior part of the brain. The release from contrac-
ture of all of the muscles of the neck is essential to the cure of the
condition under consideration. The pneumogastric and the
facial nerves need attention in that they affect respiration and the
muscles of the face. The extension of the neck should be care-
fully done, the rotary movement as well; then all the muscles
profoundly manipulated and vibrated on all sides of the neck,
reaching high up under the chin and angles of the jaws, in front
of the ears, on the cheeks, the sides of the nose, divulsing the
nares as well. Continue treatments twenty or thirty minutes,
and as often as every other day. General treatment.
PROGRESSIVE MUSCULAR ATROPHY.
SYNONYMS. Wasting palsy; chronic spinal muscular
atrophy; chronic poliomyelitis; amyotrophic lateral sclerosis.
DEFINITION. A slow, gradual, progressive wasting and
atrophy of certain groups of muscles, with symptoms varying in
accordance with the variations in the pathological anatomy.
CAUSEs. Most frequent in males between twenty-five and
fifty years of age, and in many instances is hereditary. A predis-
posing cause seems to exist in those who habitually use one set of
muscles (muscular strain). Exposure to cold and damp; lead;
Syphilis; injuries to the spinal column. Following such acute
diseases as diplitheria, measles, acute rheumatism, typhoid and
typhus fevers. - - '. * .
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Two theories as to the origin
of the pathological changes are held: one that the initial lesion
is in the cord (Charcot), the other in the muscular interstitial con-
nective tissue (Friedreich). - -
The morbid alterations are of two groups—spinal and mus-
cular. The spinal changes consist in the atrophy and degenera-
tion of the anterior columns, wasting and disappearance of the
multipolar ganglion cells of the anterior horns, with hyperplasia
of the neuroglia; rarely the hyperplasia extends to the latera!
566 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
columns (amyotrophic lateral sclerosis); also wasting, atrophy,
and degeneration of the anterior nerve roots. The muscular
changes consist of a progressive wasting of the muscular tissue,
with increase of the interstitial connective tissue. “The final
result is, that the muscle is converted into a mere fibrous band
with numerous fat-cells, the development of this latter material
taking place outside of the muscular elements and in the newly-
formed connective tissue.” (Bartholow.)
SYMPTOMs. The invasion is gradual, the disease having
been in progress some weeks or months before the patient is
aware of its existence. Wasting begins usually in the hand, the
first dorsal interosseus being the first to be attacked, then the
muscles of the thenar and hypothenar eminence, then the deltoid,
and so on from muscular group to group. Often, however, the
extension is very erratic in its course, jumping from one group
to another at some distance. - -
In the immense majority of cases the disease is permanently
limited to one or a few groups of muscles in the upper, or more
rarely, in the lower extremities. The only muscles not yet
known to be attacked are those of mastication and those that
move the eye-ball (Roberts.)
Fibrillary contraction is an early symptom, continuing more
or less marked so long as any muscular fibers remain. It con-
sists of wave-like movements of the muscles, excited automati-
cally, by draughts of air or percussion. Coincident with the
wasting are loss of power, disorders of sensation, coolness, and
pallor of the surface. -
The natural roundness and contour of the body and limbs
are changed, the bones standing out in unaccustomed distinct-
ness, giving the individual the appearance of a skeleton clothed in
skin. The hand is frequently the seat of a very singular deform-
ity—the “claw-shaped” hand.
The electro-contractility is preserved so long as muscular
fibers remain.
DIAGNOSIs. When wasting palsy is fully developed its
diagnosis is a simple matter. In its early stages a doubt may
exist, but attention to the history, symptoms, and progress will
determine the question. º
Syringomyelia (abnormal dilatation of the central canal of
the spinal cord) often begins with muscular atrophy as a marked
symptom, and may be confounded with wasting palsy, the chief
points of distinction between which are, the loss of power of per-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 567
ceiving heat, or, often, to distinguish between heat and cold, and
the appearance of trophic changes, such as a dusky or purplish
hue of the hands, with a uniform thickness resembling myx-
oedema, the development of blebs and ulcers, and changes in the
nails. Arthropathies are sometimes met with.
PROGNoSIs. Very unfavorable, although the danger to life
is often very remote. The disease may be arrested and remain
stationary for years.
THE TREATMENT.
Place one hand under the occiput, the other under the chin,
extend and gently rotate the head; treat the muscles of the neck
thoroughly, deeply; raise the clavicles, chest, arms, and liberate
the intercostals; treat the sides of the spine from above down-
ward, in dorsal and lumbar regions, manipulate, extend and flex
the lower limbs, and treat profoundly the special muscles in-
volved, using a vibratory manipulation deeply so as to be sure
to empty all the venous blood for the time, freeing the larger
veins, stretching the muscular fiber in all the muscles implicated.
Stimulate the spinal cord by pressure with thumb and fingers,
while the limbs are raised upward or pulled backward, either way,
as directed elsewhere for that purpose. See also that the termi-
nal end filaments are freed in sphincters of the lower outlets of the
body, which aids greatly in promoting capillary circulation in
the whole body. Freedom of circulation of all of the fluids must
be restored before good can result. This can only be done by
the means recommended Osteopathically. Three-fourths of the
trouble may be removed by the carrying-out of the directions for
treating the neck. The brachial plexus (or region) requires spe-
cial and thorough manipulations. All the movements applicable
to the accomplishment of this purpose may be necessary in any
given case. Osteopathy is the sine qua non in all obstructed fluid-
flow in all manner of pathological conditions, effectual when
properly and scientifically applied. Treatment every third day,
gently, thoroughly.
SPINAL SCLEROSIS.
SyNONYM. Duchenne's disease.
DEFINITION. A myelitis; an increase in the connective tis-
sue of the spinal cord, with atrophy of the nerve structure proper.
CAUSEs. Generally a hereditary neuropathic diathesis;
568 OSTEO PATHY ILLUSTRATED.
syphilis; alcoholism; mineral poisons; shock or injuries to the
cord; exposure to cold and wet; mostly occurring between the
ages of thirty-five and fifty-five; males more liable than females.
It is said that railroad enginemen and firemen, as well as con-
ductors and other trainmen, suffer from this and other spinal
diseases by reason of the continual concussion of railway travel.
The freedom from the disease in the negro has been noted by
Mitchell.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The changes in the cord are
gradual in their development and follow a longitudinal instead of
a transverse direction. The form, consistency, and color of the
cord are altered, it being atrophied, indurated, and of a grayish
color. The changes are hyperplasia of the connective tissue,
with granular degeneration, atrophy, and disappearance of the
proper nerve elements. The nerve roots undergo the same
fibroid change. The joints undergo remarkable atrophic degen-
eration—the arthropathies or Charcot joints consisting of an
Osseous hyperplasia, the joint enlarging to an enormous extent.
VARIETIES. I. Lateral sclerosis; 2. Posterior sclerosis, or
locomotor ataxia; 3. Ataxia paraplegia; 4. Cerebro-spinal
sclerosis. -
I. PRIMARY LATERAL SCLEROSIS.
SYNoNYMs. Antero-lateral sclerosis; spasmodic tabes dor-
salis (Charcot); spastic spinal paralysis (Erb).
DEFINITION. A degeneration of the lateral columns of the
cord; characterized by paraplegia, contractures of the muscles,
with exaggerated reflexes.
PATHogENY. The exact morbid condition is still a subject
of discussion. The site of the lesion is the lateral white columns,
in some cases extending to the anterior horn, and involving the
whole length of the cord. The changes consist in an interstitial
hyperplasia of the connective tissue, and an atrophy of the nerve
elements. -
SYMPTOMs. The onset of the disease is very gradual, with
increasing feeling of heaviness and weakness in the limbs, pro-
gressing of a complete paraplegia. There is also jerking and
twitching, with cramps and stiffness of the muscles of the paretic
limbs. . The spasms of the legs gradually increase in extent as
the power lessens, until at last the legs, whenever extended, pass
into a condition of strong extensor spasm, rigidly fixing them to
PLATE LI.-Shoulder and Arm Raising.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 57 I
#
the pelvis, so that the patient lies rigid; if one leg is lifted from
the couch by the observer, the other leg is moved also. The
spasm may be such that the knee can not be passively flexed by
any force that can be applied to it until the spasm has become
less. When flexed the limb is comparatively supple; but if it is
then extended, the spasm instantly returns, making the limb rigid,
and often completing the extension, just as the blade of a knife
opens out under the influence of its spring, “clasp-knife rigidity.”
Occasionally there occur brief flexor spasms, drawing the legs up.
The knee-jerk is greatly exaggerated, and there can also be
developed rectus-clonus and ankle-clonus. The spastic gait is
characteristic, termed by Hammond “the waddle”; the legs drag
behind and are moved forward as a rigid whole, the toes catching
against the ground, the patient showing a tendency to fall for-
ward. Sensation is unaffected. As the morbid process extends
upward the superior extremities suffer in the same manner as
those of the lower. -
Electro-contractility early impaired and gradually declining
until abolished.
DIAGNOSIs. The gradual development of weakness in the
legs, excess of myotatic irritability and spasms with developing
spastic gait render the diagnosis clear. If the symptoms develop
suddenly or acutely, the morbid condition is not of the degener-
ative variety.
PROGNOSIs. Complete recovery rare. If the condition is
early recognized its progress may be held in check for a long
time. -
TREATMENT. See Cerebro-Spinal Sclerosis.
II. LOCOMOTOR ATAXIA.
SYNoNYMs. Posterior spinal sclerosis; tabes dorsalis.
DEFINITION. A chronic degeneration of the posterior col-
umns of the spinal cord and the posterior nerve roots, character-
ized by loss of coordination, neuralgic pains in the limbs, loss of
sensation and reflexes, and visceral and trophic changes.
PATHocFNY. “A progressive destructive process which has
a selective influence on certain tracts in the posterior columns
with their roots and ganglia and to a less extent on the peri-
pheral nerves, particularly the optic. The nerve fibers of the
cord are first involved. Their destruction is not a simple wasting,
but is accompanied with evidence of irritation, such as swelling
572 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
of axis cylinders, and, secondarily, proliferation of connective
tissue and slight congestion.” (Dana.)
SYMPTOMs. Locomotor ataxia may be divided into three
periods: I. Disturbances of sensation; 2. Loss of coordinating
power; 3. Paralysis. The onset of the disease is gradual, by
sharp, darting, electric-like pains in the lower limbs, with dis-
orders of the gastro-intestinal and genito-urinary tracts. Asso-
ciated with the pains is a loss of sensation in the feet, the patient
being unable to distinguish between hard and soft substances in
walking, and, if the upper portion of the spinal cord be affected,
is unable to coordinate the muscles of the fingers sufficiently to
button his clothing. A sensation of formication over the surface,
especially over the lower limbs, and about the waist, the knee,
and the ankle, is present; there is nearly always a feeling of con-
striction about the trunk—the girdle.
Loss of coordination or ataxia, the subject being unable to
walk upon a straight line with his eyes closed, and with difficulty
if his eyes are opened. Inability to preserve the erect position
with the feet close together, the body swaying widely and the
patient falling on standing with closed eyes (Romberg's symp-
tom), and as the malady progresses he throws his feet and legs
in the most grotesque manner. Although the patient is unable
to coordinate the muscles, their power is not lost, for, on being
supported, he can kick or strike with his usual force. .
The sight is early impaired, due to atrophy of the optic
nerve, either double vision or inability to distinguish between
different colors. Very early there is loss of pupil reflex to light,
the reaction to accommodation being present (Argyll-Robertson
symptom). As the disease progresses the sensation becomes
more and more blunted and pain is slowly felt, in cases it being
several minutes until the sticking of a pin is appreciated. A
characteristic sign of the disease is the abolition of the patellar
tendon reflex (Westphal's symptom), as well as other reflexes
in the lower limbs. Loss of the sensation of temperature also
occurs. The electro-contractility is decreased in the affected
limb. General emaciation is marked.
Either early or late in the disease occur disturbances in mic-
turition and loss of sexual power and often desire. There also
occur in a fair number of cases, painless swelling and disinte-
gration of various joints, particularly the knee and elbow—the
tabetic arthropathies, or Charcot joint. .
At any period of the disease peculiar crises, or neuralgic
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 573
attacks occur: if griping pains in stomach with vomiting, gastric
crises; if renal pain or colic with disturbed urinary flow, nephral- .
gic crises; if pain in bladder, vesical crises; if pain in rectum
with hemorrhoids, rectal crises; if severe paroxysm of coughing,
bronchial crises; if constriction of throat with dyspnoea, laryngeal
crises; if cardiac pain and tachycardia, cardiac crises.
Paralysis finally ends the suffering of the patient. There is
generally an entire absence of cerebral phenomena.
DIAGNOSIs. There are three pathognomonic symptoms of
locomotor ataxia whose presence render the diagnosis positive;
they are Westphal's symptom—absence of patellar reflex; Rom-
berg's symptom—swaying of body and inability to maintain erect
position with closed eyes; and the Argyll-Robertson symptom—
loss of pupil reflex to light, but reaction to accommodation
retained. Another important point is the history of syphilis five
to twenty years before. Chronic myelitis is characterized by
paralysis, and the courses of the affections are otherwise so differ-
ent that an error should not occur. Diseases of the cerebellum
present symptoms of disordered coordination, but they are the
result of vertigo, and associated with headache, nausea, and vom-
iting, and neuralgic pains and eye symptoms absent. Paraplegia
is a true paralysis, while sclerosis is not. Neuralgic pain is not a
symptom of paraplegia. Multiple neuritis gives loss of power
with pain, but does not present the three pathognomonic symp-
toms mentioned above. -
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. Few if any recoveries are
recorded, although rarely the progress has been retarded for a
long time. There are some claims of recoveries of locomotor
ataxia in the early stage, but that a cure of a genuine case,
extending to the second stage, is ever effected, seems very ques-
tionable.
TREATMENT. See Cerebro-Spinal Sclerosis.
III. ATAXIC PARAPLEGIA.
SYNoNYMs. Combined lateral and posterior sclerosis;
antero-lateral sclerosis.
DEFINITION. A chronic degeneration of the lateral pyra-
midal tracts and of the posterior columns of the spinal cord;
characterized by gradual developing paraplegia, with ataxia, and
spasms of the limbs. .
574 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CAUSEs. The causes are not so well determined as in other
varieties of spinal sclerosis.
PATHoceNY. A sclerosis of the lateral and posterior col-
umns of the spinal cord. It is to be noted that the posterior
columns show the morbid changes higher up than in locomotor
ataxia—the dorsal rather than the lumbar regions—and that the
root-zone of the postero-external column is much less involved.
Nor do the lateral tracts show the same degree of involvement as
in spastic paraplegia. &
SYMPTOMs. The onset is slow and gradual, with loss of
power in the lower extremities. The muscles involved are par-
ticularly the flexors of the thigh and knee. One leg may be
weaker than the other. There is also ataxia, the patient being
unsteady when standing with feet together, and he tends to fall
if the eyes are at the same time closed. Spasms of the lower
extremity gradually develop and finally become as marked as in
spastic paraplegia. The knee-jerk reflex is increased, quick and
extensive, and rectus and ankle clonus can be developed. The
sexual power is early lost. Incontinence of urine is frequent.
Sensation is unimpaired and neuralgic pains are absent, as are
eye symptoms. -
DIAGNOSIs. The conditions ataxic paraplegia is most liable
to be mistaken for are locomotor ataxia and spastic paraplegia.
The presence of knee-jerk and loss of power in lower extremities
are of value in discriminating from locomotor ataxia. Spastic
paraplegia is not associated with ataxia—indeed, ataxic para-
plegia is spastic paraplegia plus incoordination.
PROGNOSTs. As a rule favorable.
TREATMENT. See Cerebro-Spinal Sclerosis.
IV. CERERRO-SPINAL SCLEROSIS.
SYNoNYMs. Multiple sclerosis of the brain and cord; cere-
bral sclerosis; spinal sclerosis; disseminated sclerosis (Charcot).
DEFINITION. A degenerative disease of the brain and spinal
cord; characterized by pains in the back, disorders of sensation,
loss of coordination, tremor on motion, scanning speech, and
some mental impairment.
PATHoc ENY. The disease consists of the development of
patches of grayish, translucent, tough nodules, varying in size
from a minute microscopical object up to the size of a walnut,
varying in number and widely distributed in the white matter of
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 575
the hemispheres, ventricles, optic thalamus, corpus striatum,
peduncles, pons, and cerebellum, while in the cord they are found
in both the white and gray matter and in the columns. The
deposits are also found in the nerve roots and nerve trunks. The
nodules are composed of the neuroglia, much altered, and a
newly-formed connective tissue. The result of the growth of
the nodules is pressure upon the nerve structure, ending in its
degeneration.
SYMPTOMs. Charcot divides this disseminated sclerosis into
three varieties, depending upon the site of the marked changes,
as the brain, the cord, or a combination of the two. The latter
variety is the more common.
Rarely, the malady is ushered in with apoplectiform symp-
toms, but generally the onset is insidious, with pains more or less
severe in the limbs and back, which are attributed by the patient
to rheumatism. Also a feeling of formication, itching, and burn-
ing in the limbs. Loss of coordination of the hands in writing,
or the feet in walking, or a jerky coordination, followed after a
time by paresis, more or less general, with contracture of the
muscles. Voluntary movements of the paretic limbs develop a
tremor—the shaking tremor—which subsides when the limbs
are at rest—intention tremor, with shaking of head. An early
and frequent condition is nystagmus. The loss of coordination,
with tremor and with contractures of the muscles of the legs, has
given rise to the “waddle” or “hop” gait when walking. There
are also present headache, vertigo, mental impairment, with an
unnatural contentment of the feelings and with the surroundings,
a scanning or slurring speech, disorders of vision and hearing,
sexual disturbances, vesical disorders, gastric and other crises
and often the development of bed-sores. Knee-jerk and muscu-
lar reflexes are exaggerated. The disease is progressive, the
symptoms developing as the various nerve tracts are invaded.
DURATION. Ranges from a year to twenty years, an aver-
age being five or ten years.
DIAGNOSIs. Paralysis agitans may be mistaken for dissem-
inated sclerosis. The chief points in diagnosis: the presence in
paralysis agitans of the fine tremor continually without shaking
of the head, with a peculiar flexion and rigidity of the hand, while
in cerebro-spinal sclerosis the tremor is produced only on move-
ment of the muscle, and is associated with shaking of the head.
Paralysis agitans, a disease of middle life, sclerosis under forty
years. Changes in the voice, speech, and vision are present in
576 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cerebro-spinal sclerosis, but absent in paralysis agitans. Tumor
of the pons or crus is accompanied with wild, jerky incoordina-
tion closely resembling disseminated sclerosis, but tumor also has
headache, optic neuritis, local spasm, and local paralysis. Gen-
eral paralysis of the insane and disseminated sclerosis are fre-
quently confounded, as are locomotor ataxia and primary lateral
sclerosis.
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. The disease slowly but steadily
progresses, chronic nephritis or tuberculosis frequently devel-
oping and causing death.
THE TREATMENT.
Without regard to differentiation in the special manifesta-
tions of the diseased conditions of the cord, under the name of
spinal sclerosis, including primary lateral sclerosis, posterior
sclerosis (locomotor ataxia), ataxic paraplegia, and cerebro-spinal
sclerosis, we would endeavor to impress on the mind of the reader
that every variety of effects characteristic of the pathological
conditions of the spinal cord, under whatsoever name classed,
is the result following obstructed venous circulation. That
removed early and kept removed means a cure of the disease,
arrest of progress, a restoration of health, a normal state.
In the incipiency of these affections there will be observed
an increase of temperature of the head a little above the normal,
and a tendency to contracture of the muscles of the neck, a ten-
derness at the sides of the cervix, all indicative of pressure. This
pressure is the direct result of venous obstruction ; this starts in
the large veins, caused by exposure to lower temperature, damp
atmosphere, producing enervation of nerve force from pressure
on the walls of the nerves, resulting in partial or complete par-
alysis at the ends, hence stasis of blood in capillaries and in
venoles and lymphatics, so that waste material can not escape.
Decomposition ensues, chemical changes take place, and destruc-
tion of the connective tissue is the result. From this picture,
what course suggests itself but to take off the pressure? To
enter into the profundity of these phenomena would not comport
with the present mental status of the profession, and therefore
would be “beating the air,” and the effects nil. We therefore
proceed to demonstrate our philosophy by “works” rather than
spend time in a vain effort to open the eyes of those who “won’t
see” until they “feel the grip” of actual observation.
Our direction for general treatment covers the ground neces-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 577
sary, and we therefore suggest a thorough general treatment,
starting with extension and rotation of the cervix, with thorough
neck manipulations, so as to open all the channels (the veins and
lymphatics) that, obstructed, cause the difficulty under consider-
ation, raising the clavicles, arms, chest muscles, treating the
spine all the way down, manipulating the lower limbs, flexing
and extending them, freeing the circulation all over the body,
equalizing the nerve forces, taking off all pressure according to
directions given for that purpose; and do this repeatedly, at least
three times each week, steadily, persistently, until new tissue can
be formed. -
The Tissue Elements may have to be supplied in some
instances, such as Kali phos., Silicia and Calc. fluoricum. The
reasons for these will be found elsewhere in this work.
DISEASEs OF THE NERVEs.
SIMPLE NEURITIS.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the nerve trunks; char-
acterized by pain and paresis of the parts supplied by the affected
nerve trunk.
CAUSEs. Wounds and injuries or compression of nerves;
cold and damp; syphilis (?); lead.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Hyperaemia, followed by exu-
dation into the nerve sheath and connective tissue, “which
becomes softened and ultimately breaks down into a diffluent
mass.” Migration of white corpuscles takes place into the neu-
rilemma. Recovery may occur before destruction of the nerve
elements is produced, absorption of the exudation occurring.
“It is important to note that when inflammation occurs in a nerve
it may extend from the point first diseased upward (neuritis
ascendens), or downward (neuritis descendens).”
SYMPTOMs. The onset may be accompanied with febrile
reaction. The most decided symptom is pain along the course of
the nerve trunk and its peripheral distribution, of a burning,
tingling, tearing, intense character, increased by pressure or
motion. If the affected nerve be a mixed one—sensory and
motor—spasmodic contractions and muscular cramps occur, fol-
lowed by impaired motion, terminating in paresis of the muscles
578 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
innervated by the affected trunk. If the inflammation proceed to
destruction of the nerve trunk, wasting and degeneration of the
muscular tissue ensues. Various trophic changes also occur,
such as cutaneous eruptions, and clubbing of the nails.
The electro-contractility is impaired or lost.
DIAGNOSIS. Myalgia or muscular pain is not associated
with paralysis, nor does the pain follow the course of a nerve
trunk.
Neuralgia has the pain, but, as a rule, not the tenderness of
neuritis.
PROGNoSIs. Generally favorable, with proper treatment.
TREATMENT. See Multiple Neuritis for treatment.
MULTIPLE NEURITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Polyneuritis; peripheral neuritis; disseminated
neuritis; degenerative neuritis; pseudo-tabes; alcoholic paralysis;
beri-beri (Brazil and India); kakke (Japan).
DEFINITION. A parenchymatous inflammation of a number
of symmetrical nerves, simultaneous or in rapid succession;
characterized by pain, numbness, loss of power, or ataxia, with
muscular atrophy. Mental symptoms are often associated.
CAUSEs. Alcoholism; syphilis; malaria; lead, arsenic, or
silver; following diphtheria, typhoid fever, and rheumatism.
Beri-beri and kakke are epidemic varieties of multiple neu-
ritis and the result of a special poison. The probability is that
the various cases named develop in the blood a poison, having a
particular susceptibility or “selective action” for nerve fibers.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. The affection is generally
bilateral and symmetrical. An important characteristic is its
peripheral distribution, the inflammation being most intense at
the extremities of the nerves, lessening progressively toward the
center, usually terminating before the nerve roots are reached.
The inflammatory process affects the nerve fibers primarily and
the sheath and connective tissue secondarily—a parenchymatous
inflammation. The affected muscles are paler and smaller than
normal, the fibers reduced in size and undergoing granular
changes. -
SYMPTOMs. All plans yet suggested for classifying the
varieties of multiple neuritis are imperfect. The onset may be
sudden, even overwhelming, causing rapid death, but is usually
PLATE LII.-Showing How to Strain Elbow Joint.


A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 581
subacute or chronic in its course, the symptoms being
widespread in proportion to the acuteness, intensity, and cause
of the malady. The symptoms may be described under three
forms—a motor, a sensory, and an ataxic form. The motor
form shows motor weakness, chiefly involving the flexors of the
ankles, the extensors of the toes, and the extensors of the wrist
and fingers in the forearms. Inflammation of the anterior
tibial or peroneal nerve in the leg, and the radial branch of
the musculo-spiral in the arm, resulting in the double “wrist-
drop” and “foot-drop” so characteristic of this disease. Any
nerves of the body may be affected, the symptoms varying with
the particular nerves. The sensory form shows pains, tender-
ness, tingling, and numbness, with loss of cutaneous sensibility.
The ataxic form shows incoordination with or without sensory
disturbances, but with loss of the muscular sense. The forms
may all be associated, in greater or less extent, in any one case.
Muscular atrophy begins early and progresses with the
disease. The knee-jerk is feeble or absent. The electro-contrac-
tility is feeble or lost. In alcoholic cases, there may be delirium,
mania, and delusions, associated with tremors.
Trophic changes may occur in the nails, hair, and skin. The
characteristic glossy condition of the skin, with some oedema, is
due to involvement of the vaso-motor nerves. Rarely the vagus,
optic, and laryngeal nerves are involved.
The disease may be ushered in with fever, IoI-103 degrees
F., rapid, feeble pulse, headache, nausea, vomiting, with delirium
or confusion. -
The alcoholic variety affects chiefly all the limbs; the malar-
ial, the legs; diphtheria, the pharyngeal and motors of the eye;
rheumatic, the face; and lead, the arms. -
DIAGNOSIS. In no disease is an early diagnosis so impor-
tant from a therapeutical standpoint. Early treatment may
prevent months of suffering and idleness. -
Since the symptoms of this wide-spread affection have been
properly separated from disease of the spinal cord, with which
they were formerly always associated, the diagnosis is very read-
ily determined. *
PROGNoSIs. As a rule favorable if early and proper treat-
ment be instituted.
THE TREATMENT.
In simple and multiple neuritis we have further demonstra-
tion of the results of the most serious character from undue press-
582 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ure on the tissue, caused by contracture of muscle fibers.
Whether due to over-stimulation of the nerves controlling the
fibers of muscles, or the pressure sufficiently strong to paralyze
the nerves controlling said fibers, the results are stasis of blood
in the vessels, lymph in spaces, thus increasing pressure by the
accumulation of fluids, separating the nerve footlets, cutting off
communication—hence death in the parts, with everything
involved. To repeat the directions for the treatment indicated
seems superfluous. The philosophy holds good everywhere, in
all pathological conditions; the only thing to become familiar
with is the tracing out to a legitimate conclusion the real condi-
tion existing, and remove the pressure. That done, wait on
Dame Nature to perform her accustomed, unerring duties—
rebuild the “waste places.” Whether we find the condition acute
or chronic, the cause is the same, and requires the same means
to remedy—may be a longer course in the latter than the former,
but the removal of the pressure must be done in the one case as
in the other. Persistence in the treatment, intensifying it in
parts needed, lessening in others according to indications, should
not be lost sight of, for amelioration can be obtained in no other
way so surely as this way. The cranial congestion is removed
by freeing the pressure on the neck veins, by relieving muscular
COntracture.
NEURALGIA.
DEFINITION. A disease of the nervous system, manifesting
itself by sudden pain of a sharp and darting character, mostly
unilateral, following the course of the sensory nerves.
CAUSEs. Hereditary; anaemia; malaria; syphilis; metallic
poisons; anxiety; mental exertion; exposure to cold and damp;
injuries of a nerve trunk.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. . The old axiom of neuralgia
being “the cry of the nerves for pure blood” is perhaps only part
of the truth. The changes in the nerve trunks or centers have
not as yet been determined. A fair number of cases present the
changes of neuritis.
VARIETIES. I. Neuralgia of the fifth nerve; 2. Cervico-
occipital neuralgia; 3. Cervico-brachial neuralgia; 4. Dorso-inter-
costal neuralgia; 5. Lumbo-abdominal neuralgia; 6. Sciatica.
NEURAI.GIA OF THE FIFTH NERVE.
SYNoNYMs. Tic-douloureux; Fothergill's disease.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 583
SYMPTOMs. Paroxysmal pain, of a sharp, darting, stabbing
character, most common at points along the course of the supra-
and infra-orbital branches of the fifth nerve of the left side,
and attended with an increased lacrymation. When of any
duration, nutritive changes are observed in the nervous distri-
bution, to-wit: Cedema along the course of the nerve, gray
eyebrows and convulsive twitches of the muscles, termed “tic-
douloureux,” tenderness at the infra- and supra-orbital foramina
as well as along the course of the nerve distribution.
CERVICO-OCCIPITAL, NEURALGIA.
SYMPTOMs. Paroxysmal pain, of a sharp and lancinating, or
deep, heavy, tensive character, along the course of the occipital
nerve upon one or both sides, extending from the vertex, and on
the neck as far down as the clavicle, and upward and forward to
the cheek. May be associated with hyperaesthesia of the skin,
and with cramps in the cervical muscles, and with attacks of
herpes. A sensation of cracking at the nape of the neck is an
annoying symptom in many cases.
CERVICO-BRACHIAL NEURALGIA.
SYMPTOMs. Paroxysmal pain, of a severe, boring, burning,
or tensive character, with sensations of numbness and weakness
of the arm, hand, shoulder, scapula, and mamma, with tenderness
along the cervical plexus. CEdema of the arm and other parts
along the distribution of the cervical plexus occur if the neuralgia
be of long duration, the result of nutritive changes, the limb at
times becoming pale, the skin glossy, dry, and harsh.
DORSO-INTERCOSTAL, NEURALGIA.
SYMPTOMs. Paroxysmal pain of a sharp and lancinating
character, along the fifth and sixth intercostal spaces, often asso-
ciated with the development of herpes, the so-called herpes zoster,
or “shingles.” Tenderness at the points where the nerves emerge
from the intervertebral foramina at the sides of the chest and at
points in front.
LUMBO-ABDOMINAL NEURALGIA.
SYMPTOMs. Paroxysmal pain of a sharp and lancinating,
at times heavy and dull character, following the course of the
ilio-hypogastric nerve, ilio-inguinal and external spermatic nerve,
supplying the integument of the hip, the inner side of the thigh,
the scrotum and labium.
584 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT.
If there is any condition that calls loudly for deep breath-
ing (oxygenation of the blood), neuralgia does. The first
thing to be done in all cases should be to induce deep inspira-
tions. If the patient is lying down, on the back, let the operator
take hold of one arm, draw it strongly up to the side of the head,
stretching all of the intercostals, chest muscles and ribs upward
and outward on either side, placing finger-ends to the sides of
the spinous processes, beginning at the last cervical and extend-
ing down to the eighth dorsal vertebra. Then raise the clavicle,
extend the neck, manipulate the neck muscles; then, lastly, treat
the face, sides of head, and use moderate pressure and vibration
over painful localities for two to five minutes, until relieved. The
treatment should be slowly done, modified according to the sus-
ceptibility of the impressions of the patient, and intensity of
suffering from the affection. The above directions apply to all
neuralgias of the face. The occipital neuralgia may require var-
iations in the treatment as conditions indicate. Intercostal and
lumbar neuralgia succumb to movements of the chest and the
dorsal muscles involved.
SCIATICA.
DEFINITION. A neuritis. Pain following the course of the
sciatic nerve. The sacral plexus is made up of the fourth and
fifth lumbar and the first two pairs of sacral nerves.
SYMPTOMs. Sciatica usually follows an attack of lumbago,
the pain becoming fixed in the sciatic nerve; at times it is a true
neuritis.
The pain is sharp, tearing, shooting, or lancinating in char-
acter, increased upon motion, shooting along the course of the
nerve into the hip, inner side of the thigh, calf of the leg, ankle,
and heel, at one or all of these points, in paroxysms lasting from
a few hours to twenty-four hours or longer. The tactile sensa-
tion in the foot and motility in the limbs are impaired, and if of
long duration, wasting of the limb occurs.
DIAGNOSIs. Rheumatism, so called, is the only condition
likely to be confounded with neuralgia. The history of the
attack, the character of the pain, with its localized spot of tender-
ness, should prevent such an error.
PROGNOSIs. If promptly and properly treated, unless the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 585
result of pressure of an exostosis, aneurism, or other tumor
favorable.
THE TREATMENT.
Sciatica—the dread of most practitioners who depend on
medication—is usually relieved, modified, as well as cured, by
Osteopathic treatments, continued for a reasonable time. The
whole system should be treated down to the seat of the pain, then
the lower limbs demand special attention. Strong flexion of the
limb on the side of the affection is to be made, with the fingers of
one hand pressing on the sides of the spines of the lower lumbar
vertebrae, abducting the limb against the fingers, so as to press
the muscular tissue of the sciatic filaments, and follow the course
of the nerve as far down as possible, between the ischium and the
trochanter as low as the lower portion of the ischium ; then
raise the limb, holding it by the ankle with one hand, and the
other pressing strongly above the knee, endeavoring thereby not
only to stretch the sciatic, but the muscles of the dorsal and lum-
bar regions. This same object may be accomplished by placing
the ankle over the shoulder and both hands locked above the
knee, as shown in illustration elsewhere. All the muscles of the
hip and upper portion of the thigh should be manipulated deeply,
from side to side, opening the saphenous vein, so that the
engorgement of veins may be reduced. The usual treatment of
adducting and abducting and flexing and extending of the lower
limbs should receive due attention. The vibratory dorsal and
lumbar treatment should be used, especially over the lower lum-
bar and gluteal area. Select any means illustrated in this work
for the relief of the patient, using all recommended as indicated
in a given case, to accomplish results. Treatments should be
given every day or every other day, requiring a longer or shorter
time to cure, according to the nature of the case, from one to a
various number, ranging over several weeks. Much benefit may
be assured, and a large number of the very worst cases promised
a certainty of being cured in a few weeks.
FACIAL PARALYSIS.
SYNONYM. Bell's palsy.
DEFINITION. An acute paralysis of the seventh cranial—
the facial nerve, the great motor nerve of the muscles of the face
—the nerve of expression.
586 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CAUSEs. Exposure to a current of cold air against the side
of the face—over the pes anserinus—is the most frequent cause.
Also due to injury or disease of the middle ear. Syphilis. *
SYMPTOMs. The facial nerve supplies the muscles of the
face, the muscles of the external ear, also the stylo-hyoid, pos-
terior belly of the digastric, the platysma, one muscle of the
middle ear, the stapedius, and one palate muscle, the levator
palati; by means of the chorda tympani branch it controls the
secretion of the parotid and submaxillary glands, and, possibly,
the sense of taste. It also furnishes motor power to the azygos
uvulae, the tensor tympani and the tensor palati muscles. The
onset is usually sudden, with tingling of the lips and tongue, and
upon looking into the mirror the patient is surprised by the per-
fectly blank, motionless side of the face; the corner of the mouth
is depressed, the eyelids open, the face drawn toward the well
side, and the patient is unable to expectorate, whistle, or swallow.
Any of the muscles innervated by the nerve may participate in the
paresis.
The electro-contractility is feeble or lost. The reflexes are
abolished.
DIAGNOSIs. Paralysis of the muscles of the face occurs in
hemiplegia; the points of differentiation are the presence of cere-
bral symptoms and the normal reflex excitability. r
Facial palsy with otorrhoea, imperfect hearing, obliquity of
the uvula, and loss of taste, determine its origin within the
aquaeductus Fallopii. It is due to peripheral neuritis if the taste
be normal and the uvula straight. If other, nerves are also in-
volved the origin is central.
PROGNOSIS. Favorable.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment for this affection is necessarily complicated,
and covers a good deal of surface. The aim at first should be to
take off the pressure around the stylo-mastoid foramen (the exit
of the nerve or nerves from the aperture), and from the parotid
gland. The stretching of the muscles of the sides and back of
the neck, and rotary movements, are important, whether the
trouble lies along the line of course after emerging from the
foramen, or whether the trouble begins in the pons, as its sup-
posed origin. The freedom of contracture all along the line is
essential. Whether this be in the tympanic muscle, stylo-mas-
toid foramen, or at its origin, the cause is the same—pressure.
That is the thing to remove, hence overcoming, relaxing the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 587
#
muscular fibers of all of the muscles of the neck, to give freedom
to the venous return blood, is essentially important. Extension
of the neck, rotation gentle, firm and steady, should constitute
the first movement. The freedom of all muscular fibers along
every fibrilla, denominated the facial nerve, must be the order,
and deep inhalations made by the patient at stated intervals, to
oxygenate the blood. Strong and long-continued manipulations
high up under the angles of the lower jaw are needed, pulling the
muscles in various directions, manipulating the parotid glands,
the submaxillary as well as the sublingual glands. In this case,
as in all others, the outlets as well as inlets (the tubes leading in
and out) everywhere, should be normal, then normal action will
exist. Treatments to be repeated every other day.
GENERAL OR NUTRITIONAL
DISEASES.
CHOREA.
SYNoNYMs. St. Vitus' dance; insanity of the muscles.
DEFINITIONs. A functional (?) disorder of the nervous
system; characterized by irregular spasmodic movements of
groups of muscles, with muscular weakness, more or less
approaching paralysis of the affected parts.
CAUSEs. Essentially a disease of childhood; hereditary;
reflex, from dentition, worms, masturbation, or fright; probably
the result of rheumatism in many cases.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. As yet there has been no con-
stant anatomical lesion discovered, the theory of emboli having,
however, many advocates. * e
SYMPTOMs. The onset is usually gradual, the child seem-
ingly grimacing or jerking the arm or hand, as if in imitation,
followed soon by decided irregular jactitations of the muscles of
the face (histrionic spasm), of the eyelids (blepharospasm), eye-
balls (nystagmus), and the shoulder, arm, and hand, finally
extending to the lower extremities, interfering with motility; in
severe cases, inability of self-feeding or of holding anything in
the hands. The speech is often unintelligible, the tongue con-
stantly moving in an irregular manner.
The heart’s action is tumultuous and irregular, associated
588 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
often with a soft, blowing, systolic murmur, most distinct at the
base The muscles are usually quiet during sleep, although this
is not always the case. The mind is somewhat blunted, the tem-
per irritable, the memory impaired. If the irregular muscular
movements are confined to one side of the body, it is termed
hemi-chorea.
DIAGNOSIS. Chorea was confounded with epilepsy until the
points of distinction were pointed out by Sydenham.
Paralysis agitans has general muscular tremor, beginning in
one limb, gradually progressing, uninfluenced by treatment; a
disease of the elderly. Post-hemiplegic chorea is the choreic
movement of a paralyzed limb.
PROGNoSIs. The vast majority of cases recover, but relapses
are very frequent.
w THE TREATMENT.
It will generally be found that accompanying this affection
nerve waste from the genitalia constitutes the largest factor. The
sympathetic nervous system, the terminal filaments, are bound.
When the terminals of the sympathetic and the motor footlets
are separated, “insanity of muscular action” is to be looked for as
a natural sequence. Orificial examination should be attended to,
correcting whatever is needed in the case there, then manipula-
tions Osteopathic will be beneficial. In this day of discov-
ery, advancement, intelligence along the lines of knowledge of
the human system, the practitioner becomes culpable who neg-
lects his duty in this regard. No wonder it is a “disease of child-
hood,” for the ordinary practitioner depends so largely upon the
vis a tergo of his small quiver of one-sidedness in faith and prac-
tice, that a new departure to him is a “shameful violation of the
code,” and deserves immediate excommunication from men or
mortals of the “vile” wretch who would attempt to digress. Take
off the “fig leaf” long enough to learn the condition of the
patient, then a rational treatment may be instituted, unless the
doctor should, after finding “pinched sympathetic nerve fila-
ments,” conclude the efficacy of some “high potency” is adequate
to the emergency, and giving it, await “the time with patience”
for months, and let his patient suffer it out. Such a course is
worse than reprehensible. Carry out the motto—“Take off the
Pressure.” ©
It will be found upon examination that there is more or less
spinal tenderness about the second lumbar vertebra, and at the
sides of the neck at the exit of the spinal accessory as it emerges
PLATE LIII.-Raising Clavicle, Patient Sitting Up.

A DRUGLESS systEM of HEALING. 591
at the posterior border of the sterno-cleido mastoidei. More or
less hyperaesthesia all along the spine is present, and the reflexes
readily induced. The Osteopath will overcome much of the
trouble by a systematic course of rectal divulsions, either with
digits, or, better by far, with a bivalve speculum. Pratt's is a
first-class instrument for that purpose, and every Osteopath
should have one. Many conditions will present themselves
where the use of it will afford perfect satisfaction, not attainable
otherwise. It will assist in taking off the pressure, and do it
effectually, as desired, and arouse latent energies that have slept
for years, perhaps. Its use starts up capillary circulation and
regulates the heart's action, sometimes, better than through the
vaso-motor filaments at the upper cervix. These divulsions may
be repeated at longer or shorter intervals ad libitum, if not too
much at a time—it is a good plan to do so gradually; and in
constipation it is an effectual means, dilating each sitting a little
more, until contracture is overcome and regularity ensues. It
also is needed in many cases where a dormant, relaxed state
exists, re-establishing normal vitality, and restoring the lost
powers in an incredibly short time. Use it.
EPILEPSY.
DEFINITION. A chronic disease, of which the characteris-
tic symptoms are a sudden loss of consciousness, attended with
more or less general convulsions. -
CAUSEs. Heredity; rarely, worry, anxiety, depression, or
fright. Pressure from a tumor at the periphery, or thickening of
the membranes of the brain, causing pressure; dyspepsia (?);
syphilis; uterine diseases. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. There are no constant anatom-
ical lesions, as yet, associated with essential epilepsy.
In “Jacksonian,” “cortical,” or “partial epilepsy,” however,
the “motor cortex” is irritated by disease and there occur tonic
and clonic spasms of the same character as in general epilepsy,
confined to a single arm, or an arm and half the face together,
or may be the entire half of the body. These epileptiform attacks
furnish precise data as to the locality of the lesion; spasms affect-
ing the distribution of the facial nerve point to the lower third of
the central convolution; of the arm, the middle third of the cen-
592 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
tral convolution; of the lower extremity, the upper third of the
central convolution.
VARIETIES. I. Epilepsia gravior, le grand mal; 2. Epilep-
sia mitior, le petit mal. - -
SYMPTOMS. Le grand mal is preceded by a more or less pro-
nounced and curious sensation, the so-called aura epileptica.
The attack proper is sudden, the subject suddenly falling,
with a peculiar cry, loss of consciousness, and pallor of the face,
the body assuming a position of tetanic rigidity, succeeded
after a few moments by more or less pronounced clonic con-
vulsions followed by a coma of several hours’ duration. The sub-
ject awakens with a confused or sheepish expression, with no
knowledge of what has occurred, unless he has injured himself
during the attack, either by the fall, or, what is very common,
has bitten his tongue during the convulsions.
Le petit mal is manifested either by attacks of vertigo, the
consciousness being preserved, or by a passing absent-minded-
ness, either form being associated with slight convulsive phe-
nomena, followed by slight coma or mental confusion of short
duration.
The mental functions are not, as a rule, injured by attacks
of epilepsy, unless they recur very frequently. Indeed, when at
wide intervals, the subject seems relieved by them, “the sudden,
excessive, and rapid discharge of gray matter of some part of
the brain on the muscles,” the so-called “electrical storm,” hav-
ing cleared the cerebral atmosphere. The great majority of epi-
leptics suffer from chronic gastric catarrh, and have at the same
time an inordinate appetite (boulimia); indeed, an attack of glut-
tony may immediately, precede a fit.
DIAGNOSIs. Uraemic convulsions closely resemble an epi-
leptic attack; but the dropsy or general oedema and albuminous
urine, increased temperature, of the former should guard against
error. *
Feigned epilepsy often misleads the most practical expert.
Jacksonian epilepsy begins as a spasm of a limb or some
portion of a limb, and is confined there or may gradually extend
until even a general convulsion occurs.
PROGNoSIs. The vast majority of cases will not recover
under treatment, but have the frequency and severity of the at-
tacks greatly ameliorated, but sooner or later returning with
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 593
their former severity. Cases the result of the various reflex
causes usually recover when the cause is removed.
THE TREATMENT.
Many cases have been radically cured by this treatment.
The treatment is to be directed to the neck first; not that “the
atlas is dislocated” every time, but the contracture of the neck
muscles prevents normal circulation in the brain. The spine needs
special treatment from start to finish, the sphincters relieved
and special attention given to the general circulation. Treat-
ments should be given every other day. The splanchnics are
greatly at fault, and are to be looked after; the renal splanchnic
righted, and the stomach should be rested by doing without
breakfast, and observing not to eat too much at one time. De-
ficiency of neurine substance is supplied by the tissue element
known as Calcarea Phosphoricum. As much as five grains thrice
daily is requisite. A systematic cording of the lower limbs per-
sistently has cured many cases. Hypnotism has also lessened the
attacks in number and severity by Therapeutic Suggestion
during the “profound stage,” after reflexes are corrected. The
intelligent Osteopath will get good results from his treatment,
scientifically applied' three times each week. This, with orificial
surgery where indicated, should satisfy a majority of cases. We
surely commend this treatment to the consideration of those in-
terested, as accomplishing better, more satisfactory results than
any other. Pay special attention to the reflexes. Take off the
pressure everywhere in the body. Set the atlas, if dislocated.
HYSTERIA.
DEFINITION. A nutritional disorder of the nervous system,
of the nature of which it is impossible to speak definitely; char-
acterized by disturbances of the will, reason, imagination, and
the emotions, as well as motor and sensory disturbances.
CAUSEs. A morbid condition confined almost exclusively
to women. Young girls, old maids, widows, and childless mar-
ried women are the most frequent subjects of the disorder. The
paroxysms frequently develop during the menstrual epoch. The
menopause is another frequent period for its manifestation. A
peculiar condition of the nervous system, either inherited or ac-
quired, is responsible for the phenomena of hysteria, the peculiar
594 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
manifestations being excited by the disturbances of either the
sexual, digestive, circulatory, or nervous system. \\
Hypochondriasis, a peculiar mental condition, characterized
by inordinate attention on the part of the patient to some real or
supposed bodily ailment or sensation, a continual introspection,
as seen in males, is a condition much like the hysteria of the
female.
PATHOGENY. Structural alterations have thus far not been
detected in cases of hysteria; it is thus a functional disturbance
of the nervous system. It should, however, be borne in mind
that hysterical manifestations frequently develop during the
prevalence of organic diseases.
SYMPTOMs. These will be considered under the headings
of the hysterical paroxysm, and the hysterical state.
The Hysterical Paroxysm or fit occurs nearly always in the
presence of others, and develops gradually with sighing, mean-
ingless laughter, causeless moaning, nonsensical talking, and
gesticulations, or a condition of fidgets followed with a sensation
of choking dyspnoea, and a ball in the throat—the globus hys-
tericus. These and similar symptoms precede the fit, during
which the unconsciousness is only apparent, the patient being
aware of what is transpiring about her. During the paroxysm
the patients may struggle violently, throwing themselves about,
their thumbs turned in and their hands clenched. Again, spas-
modic movements occur, varying from slight twitching in the
limbs to powerful general convulsive movements, and to almost
tetanic spasms. The paroxysm ends by sighing, laughing, cry-
ing, and yawning, and a sensation of exhaustion. During the
attack it will be noted that the surface and face are normal, show-
ing absence of respiratory embarrassment, the breathing varying
from very quiet to spluttering and gurgling sounds, the pupils
not dilated, the pulse normal, the temperature normal, and ab-
sence of foaming at the mouth and wounding of the tongue.
The Hysterical State is shown by disturbances of the mental
and sensory-motor functions respectively. It may be a perma-
nent condition or occur at intervals with greater or less severity.
Mental Disturbances.—The patients are emotional, erratic,
excitable, impatient, and self-important, showing marked defects
of will and mental power.
Sensory Disturbances.—This is either a condition of exag-
gerated sensibility or hyperaesthesia, as shown by the marked
effects from the slightest irritation and the cutaneous tenderness
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 595
along the spine, or a condition of anaesthesia as shown by the
apparent absence or recognition of pain after severe irritation, or
a perverted sensibility, as shown by the feeling of tingling,
numbness, and formication. Sensibility to heat or cold is often
absent. There is great perversion of the special senses in many
of the cases.
Charcot, referring to the ovarian hyperaesthesia of hysteria,
says: “It is indicated by pain in the lower part of the abdomen,
usually felt on one side, especially on the left, but sometimes on
both, and occupying the extreme limits of the hypogastric
region. It may be extremely acute, the patient not tolerating
the slightest touch; but in other cases pressure is necessary to
bring it out. The ovary may be felt to be tumefied and enlarged.
When the condition is unilateral, it may be accompanied with
hemianaesthesia, paresis, or contracture on the same side as the
Ovarialgia; if it is bilateral, these phenomena also become bilat-
eral. Pressure upon the ovary brings out certain sensations
which constitute the aura hysterica, but firm and systematic
compression has frequently a decisive effect upon the hysterical
convulsive attack, the intensity of which it can diminish, and
even the cessation of which it may sometimes determine, though
it has no effect upon the permanent symptoms of hysteria.”
Motor Disturbances.—These phenomena embrace every
variety of motor disturbance, from exaggerated excitable move-
ments to defective or complete loss of power. With the paralysis
that may occur, neither nutrition nor sensation is constantly
impaired. Hysterical paralysis is liable to frequent and sudden
changes, the loss of power often disappearing suddenly.
Aphonia, from paralysis of the laryngeal muscles, is a frequent
form of paresis. Some hysterical patients refuse to even make
an attempt at speech.
“A curious enlargement of the abdomen is observed some-
times, constituting the so-called phantom tumor. This region
presents a symmetrical prominence in front, often of large size,
with a constriction below the margin of the thorax and above
the pubes. The enlargement is quite smooth and uniform, soft,
very mobile as a whole from side to side, resonant, but variable
on percussion, and not painful. Vaginal examination gives neg-
ative results, and under chloroform the prominence immediately
subsides, returning again as the patient regains consciousness.”
Among the numerous other symptoms that may develop in
596 oSTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
a hysterical patient are disturbances of digestion, circulation,
respiration, and disorders of micturition and menstruation.
Among other phenomena that belong to the hysterical state
are to be mentioned Hystero-epilepsy, a condition of hysteria to
which is superadded the convulsion, epileptic in form; Cata-
lepsy, a condition in which the will seems to be cut off from
certain muscles, and in whatever position the affected member is
placed, it will so remain for an indefinite time; there may or
may not be unconsciousness and loss of sensation; Trance, the
individual lying as if dead, circulation and respiration having
almost ceased; Ecstacy, a condition in which the individual pre-
tends to see visions and acts in a most ridiculous manner.
DIAGNoSIs. The hysterical state is so general in its manifes-
tations that it is to be borne in mind in diagnosing all ailments
occurring in women. The diagnosis is attended with great diffi-
culty, however, and requires the display of all the skill of the
clinician to prevent error.
PROGNoSIs. Death from either a hysterical fit or the hys-
terical state is the rarest of events, if it ever occurs. The ultimate
recovery of a hysterical patient is of frequent occurrence. Mar-
riage has cured many cases, although it can hardly be advised by
the physician. -
THE TREATMENT.
This is another one of the affections resulting from “tight-
ened sphincters,” and relieved by taking off the pressure. The
bivalve is the most effectual source of relief ever devised by mor-
tals. It is always a matter of merciful gratitude that wells up in
my inmost soul toward Professor Pratt for his discoveries of
reflexes and the marvelous uses of the bivalve. I have had uni-
versal success with its use in hysteria. It acts like magic—at
once. The coordination of the nerve force is established and the
patient experiences the most salutary effect. All the foolishness
is at an end (generally at the lower end), and when we take off
the pressure of the internal sphincter there is a “calm and peaceful
rest” comes over the mind of the patient that beggars description.
When I was younger than I am now, it was my painful service to
sit up all night, watching over women whose lives were supposed
“to hang in the balance” and liable to “wink out” momentarily,
with medicine in hand (a la spoon), in readiness to pour down
the victim's throat, through closed, clenched canines, as often as
possible, and the most incongruous compounds that Allopathic
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 597
ingenuity could mix together—“Hoffman's Anodyne,” for
instance; assafoetida, et id omne genus—when, lo! I would succeed
in “curing my patient,” get the honor, and sometimes pay, for it.
But I have lived in a better time, learned a new idea, adopted it,
and it does not require nasty drugs, anxious thoughts, nor impa-
tient waiting. It effectually answers. I could give the reader a
long list of cases that it has been my lot to witness, suffering with
this affection, and narrate many laughable instances associated
therewith. I was called to see a 17-year-old unmarried, beautiful
blonde, living about two miles from my office. It had rained all
the night before; the road was the kind we have in Illinois under
those circumstances. The case was one of an urgent nature—
the girl was thought to be dying, and horse-flesh suffered ere I
got there. I approached the bedside of that bundle of youthful,
marriageable loveliness with feelings of profound caution and
solemnity, carefully felt the pulse, ascertained that death was far
away, and had no sooner let go the wrist than my supposed dead
or dying patient suddenly arose, started for the door, reached it,
plunged forth into the rain, out into the pasture, made direct
headway for a pond of water of considerable area two hundred
yards from the house. She rushed out into the center of the
body of water, where it was at least eighteen inches deep, and as
she got to this particular spot, two young men who had fol-
lowed her, caught her, brought her back to the house, where she
seemed as well reconciled as if nothing had happened. I ordered
a mustard poultice, placed it the whole length of the spine, put
her on a pallet on the floor, and as signs of restlessness began to
appear in my patient, I ordered a clyster of sapo, salt, castor oil
and terebinth, fully a quart, altogether, used. That settled the
difficulty; relaxation of the sphincters ensued. Relief was imme-
diate. Since then I have had many cases, and taught by that
simple lesson, have had no difficulty in relieving every case. The
bivalve saves all the trouble of fixing up and using compounds.
It induces immediate response, satisfactory to patient and doctor.
Properly used, there is not the slightest danger. Some cases are
extremely contracted, and a small bivalve is the kind needed at
the start, then a larger one. Whichever is used, let it be well
oiled, introduced carefully, then, by turning the screw attached
until it is spread out about half an inch, the blades apart, the
handles are gently squeezed, then relaxed ; then spread a little
more, gradually divulsing the sphincter until the patient is
relieved of the spell of hysteria.
598 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
I had a case of this sort in my practice out in Denver, Col.,
that was restored in one minute. Another in Kansas City, Mo.,
who would drop dishes and throw them across the room involun-
tarily, that two or three sittings cured effectively, and more
grateful beings you could scarcely find. Thanks for this mar-
velous discovery—the bivalve.
NEURASTHENIA.
SYNoNYMs. Spinal irritation; nervous prostration; nervous
exhaustion. -
DEFINITION. A debility of the nervous system, causing an
inability or lessened desire to perform or attend to the various
duties or occupations of the individual. Professor Bartholow
describes it as consisting “essentially in an exaggerated suscepti-
bility to bodily impressions and false reasoning thereon.”
CAUSEs. It may result from various chronic diseases; men-
tal worry or emotion; overwork, as “whenever the expenditure
of nerve-force is greater than the daily income, physical bank-
ruptcy sooner or later results.” (Jackson.) Neurotic tempera-
ment; sexual excesses; alcohol; tobacco.
SYMPTOMs. Nervous debility may affect any organ of the
body. It is a condition of nerve-tire or exhaustion, and hence
the nervous energy necessary for functional activity of any par-
ticular organ may be wanting, a fair example being seen in cases
of nervous dyspepsia.
One of the earliest manifestations of nervous exhaustion is
an irritability or weakness of the mental faculties, as shown by
inability to concentrate the thoughts, and efforts to do so causing
headache, vertigo, restlessness, fear, a feeling of weariness and
depression, together with the army of symptoms attendant on
1161 VO11S116SS.
There may be ocular disturbances, cardiac palpitation, cold-
ness of the hands and feet, chilliness followed by flashes of heat,
followed in turn by slight sweating. Patients are troubled with
insomnia, or fatiguing sleep, accompanied with unpleasant
dreams.
In the male there are genito-urinary disorders, with pains in
the back, giving the dread of impotence. In females, painful
menstruation, ovarian irritation, and irritable uterus. -
DIAGNOSIS. It is of importance to determine between a true
PLATE
LIV.-Raising Chest Muscles and Treating Spine.
|

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 6or
nervous exhaustion and nervous debility, the result of organic
disease. A study of the history of the case, together with the
symptoms, should prevent error.
PROGNosis. Unless there be a tendency to mental disor-
ders, the prognosis is good.
THE TREATMENT.
This condition is remediable, so far as the system in general
is concerned, according to the ability to assimilate the lost ele-
ments. Arrest in the first place the waste causing it, then supply
the elements. This is done in various ways—through direct
exhibition per oram, in the form of food. Re-establish the nerve
force by properly stimulating arterial peristalsis and capillary
activity by the manipulations recommended therefor, the vaso-
motor area receiving due attention. Vibratory manipulations
along the spine, stretching the spinal cord gently, liberating all
of the muscles of the body, start up new forces throughout the
system. Do not neglect the orifices of the body (the sphincters)
in these affections. Stimulate the glandular system. If there is
ever a general all-over treatment given, do so in these cases.
Manipulate gently but deeply all of the muscles, stimulate the
spinal area all the way from cervix to coccyx, as patient is able
to bear the treatments—as often as every third day.
Ferrum phos. and Calc. phos. are often indicated. It will
appear plausible to a rational being to supply these elements
when it is known that certain proportions of the sixteen elements
constitute the physical organism, and a deficiency of either one
or more causes disturbance in all the rest. The body is not a
whole body without the elements of which it is composed, and it
requires certain ones to render the rest active and assimilable.
EXOPHTHALMIC GOITRE.
SYNONYMs. Graves' disease; Basedow's disease. •
DEFINITION. A disease of the nervous system; character-
ized by protrusion of the eyeballs, enlargement of the thyroid
gland, dilatation of the arteries, and palpitation of the heart.
CAUSEs. An undemonstrable condition of the nervous
system, either inherited or acquired, is the predisposing cause of
Graves’ disease. Among the exciting causes are anaemia, shock,
fright, chagrin, worry, and reverses of fortune.
It is more common in women than in men.
6O2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PATHoLogical, ANATOMY. “Some structural alterations
have been found, in a majority of cases, in the sympathetic gan-
glia, and especially in the inferior ganglia.” (Bartholow.) The
veins and arteries of the thyroid gland are dilated, the result of a
vaso-motor paralysis. The enlargement of the gland is the result
of the dilated vessels, and a serous infiltration of its tissues, fol-
lowed, if long continued, by hypertrophy. A considerable
increase of fat behind the eyeballs has been observed. In the
majority of cases more or less anaemia exists.
SYMPTOMs. The development of the quaternary of symp-
toms may occur suddenly, the result of some great shock to the
nervous system, but in the majority of instances the symptoms
develop slowly and insidiously, with cardiac palpitation, with par-
oxysms of more marked acceleration, tachycardia, the pulse rate
varying from 90 to I2O, I50, and rarely as high as 200 beats per
minute; soon pulsations of the vessels of the neck and thyroid
gland may be felt and seen. The enlargement of the thyroid
gland—the goitre—appears gradually after the development of
the circulatory disturbances, although rarely it may be the first
symptom observed. The goitre is elastic, rather soft, and has a
thrill similar to an aneurism. The degree of enlargement varies
in different cases, and in none ever attains a very great size. Fol-
lowing the development of the goitre occurs the protrusion of
the eyeball—the exophthalmos—which may be confined to one
eye, but usually occurs in both. Prominence of the eyeball may
be the first symptom observed, but usually it does not develop
until after the appearance of the goitre. The degree of protru-
sion varies from a slight staring expression to a point so great
that the eyelids can not cover the balls. Associated with the
protrusion of the eyeballs is incoordination in the movements of
the eyelids and the eyeball, the sign of Graefe, so that when the
eyes are quickly cast down the eyelids do not follow them, the
Sclerotic being visible below the upper lid. Vision is unimpaired.
Conjunctivitis may arise, the result of the imperfect protection of
the protruding ball by the eyelids.
Associated with the pathognomonic symptoms are nervous-
ness, irritability of temper, headache, insomnia, vertigo, fits of
despondency, aphonia, and cough the result of pressure of the
goitre, disorders of digestion, increase of temperature, anaemia,
and 1oss of flesh. -
DIAGNoSIs. The fully developed disease presents no diffi-
culties in diagnosis, but during its incipiency, before the char-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 603
*
acteristic symptoms have appeared, the disease may be
confounded with such conditions as cardiac disease, neurasthenia,
lithaemia, malaria, or incipient phthisis.
PROGNoSIs. Recovery occurs in a fair number of cases, but
is slow and tedious. The disorders of the circulation lead to
dilated heart in many cases, and ultimately death occurs from
this cause. Relapses are frequent.
THE TREATMENT.
This is another of those affections that manifest motor and
sympathetic separation of terminal filaments. This is caused by
muscular contraction, so that partial paralysis occurs, or infiltra-
tion of blood and lymph in the tissues, separating footlets and
producing the incoordination of forces. -
The treatment consists in gently extending the neck muscles,
with rotary motions of the head, thoroughly manipulating the
face and neck muscles, stimulating the vaso-motor area, re-estab-
lishing nerve connection between the sympathetic and motor
nerves, start the fluids out and regulate the heart's action and
arterial circulation. Open the channels—the veins of the thyroid
—by the same manipulations as recommended for Goitre. Treat
the patient according to indications, as in other affections that
complicate this one. Free the obstructions and take off nerve
pressure repeatedly, every two or three days, and good results
Soon begin, and a rapid amelioration ensues.
Enlarged thyroid gland is the simplest thing to cure in our
practice, usually.
The engorgement in the recent stages is due to obstruction
to the venous blood in the thyroid veins. These may be relieved
by raising the clavicle and then manipulating the gland upward.
sidewise, and pressing the gland in the various ways that knead
the substance of the gland itself, freeing all of the muscles of the
neck thoroughly and keeping the clavicles raised. This should
be done by the thumb of the operator close to the sternal end of
the clavicle, pushing outward as the arm is raised upward and
backward in either of the various ways shown in this work;
steadily holding the clavicle out for a moment greatly facilitates
emptying the venous blood therein. The treatment should be
given every other day. Many cases of recent origin are cured
very soon. Those of long duration, and that have become indur-
ated, require many months’ treatment to effect a cure. The cure
of the latter kind will be more easily effected by the aid and the
6O4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
introduction of the tissue element that has a special affinity for
glandular indurations—Calcarea fluoricum (6x), three or four
grains three times a day. It will be found to be the case with
those troubled with goitre that the clavicles are extremely close
down to the chest walls, preventing venous return circulation, by
pressure of the sternum and the clavicles on the jugulars and
other small veins in that region. Take off the pressure, then
work the blood out of the gland. The thymus gland does not
seem to be involved in goitre. Persons very young are not trou-
bled with goitre; as a rule, those over 12 years old have it.
TETANY.
SYNoNYMs. Tetanilla; intermittent tetanus.
DEFINITION. A succession of tonic, usually bilateral, pain-
ful muscular spasms, occurring at irregular intervals, without loss
of consciousness.
CAUSEs. It has been observed in those having a family his-
tory of nervous disorders.
PATHOLOGY.. The disease is very rare in America.
SYMPTOMs. Tetany is the occurrence of intermittent spasms
in the muscles of the arms, hands, legs, or feet, or rarely the face
and larynx (laryngismus stridulus), associated with pain.
The hands are thrown into a position such as they assume
in writing, or such as is taken by the hand of a midwife; or the
hand may be tightly closed, or one or more fingers may be
cramped. The elbows and shoulders may be, at times, affected.
In the feet the toes are drawn down and the instep upward, like
in equinus. The knees may be cramped or the legs extended.
Any muscles may be involved. Trousseau pointed out that in
those suffering from tetany, pressure upon the affected extremi-
ties at certain points will excite the spasms.
The duration of the spasms varies from a few moments to
several hours, the intervals being from an hour to a day or more.
A certain periodicity is noticed as to the hour of the day or night.
The electro-contractility is increased, as are also the reflexes.
The consciousness is always preserved, although the patients are
very nervous.
DIAGNOSIS. Tetanus and tetany may be confounded, and
yet trismus is rare in the latter, and always present in the former.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable. -
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 605
THE TREATMENT.
The strangest thing we have to contend with in educating
the people is to get them out of their old ways of thinking. It
does not seem to dawn on the minds of Some that any other way
of thinking than “our fathers” thought should be permitted This
age has demonstrated a few facts that would be profitable to con-
sider, even those pertaining to the extent of lessening our suffer-
ings, lightening our burdens and expanding the horizon of our
zenith intellectually, physically and spiritually.
The old way of treating such cases was to further paralyze
the muscular fiber (that which was not affected) in order to pro-
cure harmony in such cases as the one under consideration; but
now we would lift the pressure off of the already spasmodically
paralyzed nervous system and harmonize action that way, with-
out producing a worse condition than found to exist. Truly,
“the world do move.” The spinal nervous system is at fault
in this affection. When righted tetany subsides, as a matter of
course. Beginning at the vaso-motor area, we stimulate all
along the whole course of the spinal column, then remove press-
ure from the sympathetic nerve terminals. The measures recom-
mended to re-establish normal tension everywhere in the body
should be perfectly familiar to the reader at this juncture, and
there should be no difficulty in rightly applying them. Mag-
nesium phosphate introduced in this affection will be found
adapted to conditions admirably. -
TETANUS.
SYNONYMs. Lockjaw; trismus; cephalic tetanus.
DEFINITION. An acute or subacute infective disease, char-
acterized by muscular rigidity, with paroxysms of tonic convul-
sions, the mind remaining clear. Idiopathic tetanus when no
open wound is discoverable. Traumatic tetanus when an open
wound is present. Tetanus neonatorum when it attacks infants.
Lockjaw or trismus when the jaw alone is involved. Cephalic
tetanus when the throat and face are affected.
CAUSEs. The result of a specific bacillus, which usually
gains access to the system through an abrasion.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. In the post-mortem examina-
tions which have been made, no uniform morbid appearance was
discovered, on microscopical examination.
606 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The brain, cord, lungs, and muscles are markedly congested,
and show minute hemorrhages, such as are met with in all cases
of death from convulsions, and which occur chiefly during the
process of death.
In four post-mortem examinations of cases dying from
tetanus, at the Philadelphia Hospital, marked chronic nephritis
was observed. Probably the future may show some connection
between nephritis and tetanus, by which the specific poison is not
eliminated as it might be were the kidneys normal.
SYMPTOMs. The onset is rather sudden, with stiffness of the
jaw, neck, and tongue, and some difficulty in swallowing, which
increases in extent, the stiffness passing down the spinal muscles
to the legs, which are held in a firm spasm.
Gradually tonic spasms develop, which, involving the jaw
muscles, cause “lockjaw”; the face muscles, “risus sardonicus”;
neck and trunk muscles, “opisthotonos”; these tonic convulsions
are associated with intense pain, and the patient suffers the great-
est distress, particularly if the chest muscles are involved.
Usually the febrile reaction is slight, but in many cases IO2
deg. F. to IO4 deg. F. is reached, and in some instances, as death
approaches, 108 deg. F. to 110 deg. F. may occur, rising still
higher after death. The mind remains clear till carbonic acid
poisoning occurs. Usually a wound, not severe, can be found,
the symptoms developing some two weeks after its occurrence.
The tonic spasms are developed by any sources of irritation,
a draught of air, shaking of the bed or floor, suddenly opening
the door of the room, the presence of a visitor, or attempts at
speaking or movement. -
DIAGNOSIS. The symptoms are so characteristic, with the
addition of a history of a wound, that an error seems hardly
probable. -
Tetany in the spasms chiefly affect the extremities, the mus-
cles being free in the interval and trismus a late or very rare
condition.
Strychnine poisoning often closely resembles tetanus, but
there is no beginning trismus and more rapid development of the
symptoms. No history.
Hydrophobia does not have trismus, but respiratory spasm,
excited by attempts at swallowing, with increasing mental symp-
tomS.
PROGNOSIS. Unfavorable. The great majority die.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 607
THE TREATMENT. -
All forms of tetanus are amenable to Osteopathic treatment,
properly applied; but where it is caused by a healed-up wound
from a sharp pointed-instrument( a rusty nail or thorn), it will be
essential to open the wound afresh, take off the pressure there,
and that settles the matter with that case—cures it. All the
manipulations that might be made without the means recom-
mended would prove unavailing. The sudden spasmodic char-
acteristics of tetanus indicate pressure on terminal-end sensory
filamentous footlets. Certain stages in the circulation of the
fluids seem to increase the pressure, and then the spasm super-
venes, lasting until the mechanical effort moves off the pressure,
and then the spasm ceases. The affection seems to follow
wounds of the feet or hands, where numerous tendons, fasciae and
small muscular fibers unite, and where terminal nerves are the
most pressed upon by movements of structure, hence suggestive
of spasmodic action, reflexly. -
The treatment should begin at the back of the neck, the
vaso-nnotor area, then extend the neck gently, remove muscular
tension in the neck muscles, raise the clavicle, treat all the way
down the spine, thoroughly relaxing all of the muscles of the
body, removing all venous obstructions everywhere in the body.
Avoid mental excitement as much as possible. Give general
treatments once or twice daily, if indicated. Remember the
reflexes and terminal nerve filaments in the sphincters.
OCCUPATION NEUROSES.
SYNoNYMs. Professional neuroses; artisans' cramp.
VARIETIES. Writers' cramp;. piano-players' cramp; tele-
graphists’ cramp; violin-players' cramp; dancers' cramp.
DEFINITION. A group of affections of the nervous system,
characterized by the occurrence of spasm (cramp) and pain in
groups of muscles, in consequence of overuse or frequently
repeated muscular acts.
CAUSE. Undetermined. It has been noticed that many
persons suffering from occupation neuroses have a family history
of nervous affections.
SYMPTOMs. The symptoms of any of the varieties named
generally develop gradually and slowly, by a feeling of stiffness
in the used member, the part feels fatigued and heavy, until it is
608 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
impossible to use it, from the occurrence of spasmodic contrac-
tions; pain on using the affected muscles, often associated with
tremor, and in many cases with an actual paralysis. Associated
with the loss of power to follow the usual occupation are nervous-
ness, mental worry, and often depression. There is often the
sensation of prickling and numbness in the crippled member.
The electro-contractility is preserved until the atrophy of
non-use develops.
DIAGNOSIS. Calling to mind the history of the case and its
results, in being limited to one member, the nature of the con- .
dition is evident.
PROGNoSIs. Often unfavorable. Some recoveries are
reported. *
THE TREATMENT.
The neck muscles, the cervical ganglia, and down to the
middle of the dorsum should be treated, stimulating the brachial
area thoroughly, profoundly, several times. The vibratory
manipulation of the muscular system over the upper chest, shoul-
ders and neck and back, and raising the clavicles, arms, ribs, etc.,
attended to in their order, as directed elsewhere for general and
special effects, every day or two, and a cure is to be expected in a
short time. A change in the manner of holding the pen, brush
or instrument, if practicable, will be well to consider.
Our position is that all kinds of paralysis is due to direct
pressure at the origin of, or along the line of the nerve supply-
ing tissue or muscle. The nervous system that originates
motion comes out of vertebral foramina, and is distributed to
every part of the body. Many obstructions are to be found at
their exit from these foramina, through muscular contracture,
and that removed cures the difficulty. A constant pressure
eventually results in permanent paralysis, sometimes denominated
“progressive paralysis.” Q %
PARALYSIS AGITANS.
SYNONYMs. Shaking palsy ; Parkinson's disease.
- DEFINITION. A nervous disease of unknown pathology,
characterized by tremors, progressive loss of power in the affected
muscles, moderate rigidity, with alterations in the gait and at
times mental changes.
-
PLATE LV.-Knee-Chest Expansion Process.

§
&
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 6II
CAUSE. Age seems to be an etiological factor, most cases
developing after fifty years. Most frequent in women.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. No characteristic lesion yet
determined. It being a disease of past middle life, there is prob-
ably an interstitial hyperplasia of some layer of the cortex, from
alterations in the intima of the vessels. .
SYMPTOMs. The onset is gradual, the tremor beginning in
one of the extremities, oftenest the hand and forearm. At first
it can be controlled by the will, for a time at least, and is sus-
pended by voluntary movement. . The disease gradually extends
until an entire side or the upper or lower limbs are involved. The
face and head rarely present tremors, but are not exempt. A
peculiar rigidity of the affected muscles is characteristic of the
advanced stage. “At this stage of the disease the hands are apt
to assume the so-called bread-crumbling position, i. e., the thumb
and the fingers approximate and move restlessly over one
another, as in the act of crumbling bread. There is often a ten-
dency on the patient’s part to go forward—so-called propulsion—
and this is sometimes so marked that if the patient is once started
in a walk forward, his gait becomes more and more rapid, and
he can not stop himself.” (Gray.) The patients are usually rest-
less and annoyed with insomnia. The general health is fair. The
mind is generally retained, although melancholia and mild
dementia have been noted in a few cases.
DIAGNOSIS. Disseminated sclerosis has a tremor, but only
on voluitary movements—intention tremor. There are also scan-
ning speech and ataxic gait, with mental enfeeblement, as shown
by an unnatural contentment with physical condition and sur-
roundings.
Chorea is a tremor, but the movements are general, and
particularly involving the muscles of the face. Again, chorea
is a disease of children and young adults.
PROGNOSIS. Radical cure not seen. Improvement often
results from early treatment. The disease does not tend to
shorten life.
THE TREATMENT.
The general treatment, restoring normal circulation, is the
proper thing, and many cases are greatly benefited and cured if
treatment is had in the early stages. The motor nerves are at
fault, and are to be reached through the spinal column. Treat
the whole length of the spine and restore normal circulation.
612 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
MENTAL DISEASES.
MELANCHOLIA.
SYNoNYMs. Depression of spirits; psychalgia.
DEFINITION. A variety of mental alienation, characterized
by more or less profound depression of the emotions, with either
no marked intellectual disturbance, or the presence of more or
less incoherence, and the association of hallucinations and delu-
sions. The cerebral mechanism developing a condition of Super-
sensitiveness, all impressions are exaggerated, and a state of
abnormal self-consciousness existing.
VARIETIES. Melancholia simplex; melancholia hallucina-
tory; melancholia agitata; melancholia attonita; chronic melan-
cholia.
CAUSEs. Hereditary predisposition. Failing health. Grief.
Domestic and financial worries. Neurasthenia. Menstrual
irregularities, pregnancy, childbirth, or lactation. Climacteric.
Gastric and intestinal irregularities. Alcoholic and sexual
excesses. Organic brain diseases. Religion rarely causes insan-
ity, though it frequently gives color to it. Most common in
females and in the young.
PATHoLocy. The alterations in the nerve structure, under-
lying an attack of melancholia, are undetermined. Anaemia and
sluggish nervous energy are constant phenomena, but are hardly
the only conditions disturbing the cortex.
SYMPTOMs. Melancholia may be the initial stage of mania,
delusional insanity, or paretic dementia, or a stage of folie circu-
laris.
Mental.-The cardial condition is a feeling of depression,
misery, or mental anguish or pain, for which no adequate cause
exists. The onset is usually gradual, with a disposition to neg-
lect duties and self, the patient worrying over a something they
can not explain. The world is dark and gloomy, with a fore-
boding of some awful calamity that is to affect or wreck the
patient or his family. Suspicion, distrust, and often fear of wife,
children, relatives, or friends. Insomnia is a constant and stub-
born symptom. The memory is maintained, and the reasoning
faculties are usually intact, except upon the painful sensations.
wº
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 613
The patient may sit quietly or be restless, according to the char-
acter of the emotions affected. - - r
Physical.—The patient presents either an anxious or a woe-
begone expression. Headache, and particularly a post-cervical
ache, is a very constant symptom. The skin is dry and harsh, the
respirations superficial, the cardiac action slow and feeble; there
are gastric catarrh, constipation, and scanty, high-colored urine.
The tongue is flabby and coated, and the appetite is poor. The
refusal to take food is most characteristic.
Hallucinatory melancholia is an aggravated form of the dis-
ease, where, in addition to the painful mental reflexes, are dis-
tressing hallucinations and illusions, the patient living in a realm
of terror. The attack may be the result of a delusion, but much
more frequently the depression and foreboding give rise to the
delusion. The delusions of melancholia are usually of self-accu-
sation, self-abasement, and justified persecution; the patient feels
that he is being punished for some transgression, imaginary or
Otherwise.
Melanchglia agitata are those sad cases seen in continual
agitations, in which the fearful and distressful thoughts and
imaginations cause wringing of the hands, and prayers beseech-
ing help, with tears flowing down their cheeks, crying out for
assistance and protection. Incoherence and violent impulses are
frequent.
Melancholia attonita, or melancholia with stupor, the
patients seeming to be overwhelmed, sitting mute, motionless,
and expressionless, refusing to assist themselves in any way
whatever, often requiring mechanical feeding. Memory is
usually impaired in this form; attacks of violence may occur.
Chronic melancholia is the continuation of the depression
Over a long period, the individual living in the fear of impending
danger or punishment for supposed acts for months, often with
apparent lucid periods.
Suicidal impulses are present in a fair proportion of cases of
melancholia, and unless there be everlasting vigilance the patient
will succeed in his insane desire. -
DIAGNOSIs. The cases of simple melancholia are readily
determined. Melancholia agitata is frequently mistaken for
acute mania. Melancholia attonita closely resembles acute
dementia, a condition, it is but fair to mention, many alienists
deny the existence of. -
PROGNOSIS. A typical attack of melancholia runs a definite
614 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
course, not unlike the typical course of a fever. Favorable in the
mild cases of all forms not associated with organic disease, and
who have not reached the climacteric. Pronounced cases of
melancholia attonita are more apt to terminate in dementia than
any other variety. - -
THE TREATMENT
In these cases there will seldom be found any changes in the
nerve structure. The incoordination of mental action is the
result of the improper assimilation of the elements, lack of motor
nerve force to execute orders from the sympathetic, hence lack
of proper capillary circulation, and a diminution of normal supply
for the nerves or brain. Trouble in spine—twelfth dorsal.
There is no continuity of force when neurine is not furnished
to direct the thought. Every element must be contained in the
blood, and this blood must permeate every tissue, and it must
have special nerve force executed along the lines and in ganglia
where nerve substance is supplied from the blood in order to
furnish the particular elements used in the manufacture of
neurine. The importance of the unobstructed circulation of the
fluids of the body becomes more impressively apparent the more
we are permitted to see into the structure itself. Mind is the
product, the result of divine creation, and there are certain pro-
cesses that seem to be essential to its establishment, as well as
continuance of action in any sense, and in this case normal sense.
The lifting off of the pressure throughout every part of the
body impresses itself upon our mind as the essential thing to do,
whether we find it in a contracted sphincter, or at the farthest
confines of the sympathetic nerve filamentous structure. Repeat
the process until cured. Osteopathy stands in the front ranks
of remedial agencies.
MANIA.
SYNONYMs. Insanity; madness.
DEFINITION. An intense mental exaltation, with great
excitement, loss of self-control, with, at times, absolute incoher-
ence of speech, and loss of consciousness and memory.
(Clouston.)
A mental condition in which there is an emotional exalta-
tion, accompanied by illusions, hallucinations, delusions, great
mental and physical excitement, and a complete loss of the inhib-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 615
itory power of the will; in acute cases, and frequently in chronic
forms of the disease, there is marked destructiveness and
tendency to violence. (Wood.)
An attack of mania may be acute, subacute, or chronic.
CAUSEs. Inflammation or other organic disease of the brain
or its membranes. Mental shock or strain. Worry—domestic,
moral, or financial. Excesses in alcohol, venery, or tobacco.
Ovarian disease, or menstrual irregularities. Climacteric in
those of nervous disposition. Pregnancy, parturition, or lacta-
tion. Nephritis. Anaemia. Syphilis. Hereditary predispo-
sition.
PATHoLOGY.. There are no constant morbid changes asso-
ciated with mania. In all varieties of acute insanity there exists
vitiated nervous energy or impaired vitality, the result of over-
excitement or over-stimulation, motor disturbance, or auto-
infection, the result of the imperfect elimination of the products of
tissue waste. “There is no reason why a mere dynamical brain
disturbance should not kill and leave no structural trace, any
more than that it should for months abolish judgment, affection,
and memory, and then pass off and leave the brain and all its
functions intact.” (Clouston.)
If death follow acute symptoms, the vessels of the brain and
membranes are engorged, but in the majority of instances the
brain structure is normal.
If death occur in chronic mania, the most frequent change
found will be a thickened and adherent dura mater. As observed,
any form of organic change may be found post-mortem in those
dying of any form of mania.
SYMPTOMs. Acute Mania.-The onset may be abrupt, or
following a period of emotional depression, associated with lassi-
tude, feeling of unrest, disinclination to work, and disorders of
the gastro-intestinal canal, with insomnia and an introspection;
these symptoms are termed the melancholic stage of mania.
The maniacal stage is characterized by loud talking, intense
egotism, violent motions of the limbs and body, great restlessness,
and excitement; the thoughts flow in wonderful freedom and
with amazing rapidity, the condition often resembling the symp-
toms of early alcoholic intoxication; as the condition continues
the patient becomes either sullen, irritable, and angry, offering
violence to those around him, or he becomes garrulous, talking
of his personal affairs, is confidential and communicative to
strangers, often making egotistic offers, passing frequently into
616 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
incoherence of language and action. Sexual passions are fre-
quently exalted, and acts of masturbation practiced. Delusions
are an almost constant symptom, of a superficial or transitory
character, changing with every new appearing mood. The
maniacal patient is sleepless, or may have short naps, at Once
continuing his chatter on awakening.
Any attack may show all of the symptoms mentioned, or
any one or more of them, but the great majority of cases show
intense egotism, loud talking, violent motion of limbs or body,
hurry, excitement, insomnia, incoherence, and incessant noise.
The course of an attack is periods of remissions and exacer-
bations, with nocturnal crises; loss of flesh and mental weakness
are often marked as the attack progresses.
Acute delirious mania, typhomania, is a psychosis of sudden
onset, attended with increased bodily temperature, and marked
by delirium with sensuous hallucinations, marked incoherence,
restlessness, refusal of food, loss of memory, and rapid bodily
wasting, terminating frequently in death.
Mania amenorrhoeal is applied to attacks of mania occur-
ring at the menstrual epoch. Homicidal, suicidal, and various
hysterical impulses are frequent.
Mania-a-potu is an attack of acute delirium, due to alcoholic
excesses in those engaged in a sudden debauch, or who have
drunk heavily and eaten little, for a comparatively short period.
Mania asthenic, in which there is a general anaemia asso-
ciated with neurasthenic symptoms.
Mania Chronic.—A condition of continual mental exalta-
tion, the acute symptoms having continued in a chronic course.
The line that distinguishes between an acute and chronic mania
must always be somewhat arbitrary and unscientific. The dura-
tion of the mania beyond twelve months is usually considered
sufficient to determine the condition, and this is well, as it pre-
cludes the possibility of terming the condition incurable. If the
term chronic mania was restricted to those cases in which,
between the exacerbations of restlessness, excitement and
destructiveness, were evidences of dementia, less confusion would
Occur. .
Mania dancing is a hysterical mental state in which, through
sympathy and imitation, dancing of a most grotesque and extrav-
agant character occurs. Usually epidemic.
4. Mania delusional is the result of fixed delusions, either caus-
ing or associated with the maniacal outbreak.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 617
Mania erotic, erotomania, presents systematized delusions of
an erotic character, not necessarily accompanied by animal sexual
desire. Nymphomania is a morbid, irresistible impulse to satisfy
the sexual appetite, peculiar to the female sex.
Mania epileptica follows an epileptic paroxysm, and is often
of a most violent kind, the maniacal acts being of the most
treacherous and malicious character. -
- Mania hallucinatoria presents visual, auditory, olfactory, and
other sense hallucinations. -
Mania homicidal is any variety of mental disease in which
there is a desire or an attempt on the part of the patient to com-
mit murder. The condition may be the result of delusions that
the persons attacked either are persecuting, or going to kill the
patient, or of the excessive excitement that vents itself in destruc-
tiveness, combativeness, or desire to kill, or there may be a
morbid desire, impulse, or craving to do murder, or the homicidal
act may be unconsciously done during an acute delirium, or a
paretic, or epileptic maniacal impulse.
Morphiomania is the insane craving for the stimulating
action of morphia—a moral insanity.
Mania puerperal is the maniacal outbreak as seen in the
puerperal woman. This is now thought to be of septic origin,
although the mental strain through which the female has been
passing is a predisposing factor. -
Mania recurrent, or chronic mania, with lucid intervals of
longer or shorter duration. Generally of alcoholic origin.
Mania transitoria, or ephemeral mania, is a rare form of
maniacal excitement of sudden onset, violent and decided in
character, accompanied by great insomnia, incoherence, and
more or less complete unconsciousness of familiar surroundings.
The attack as suddenly terminates, the duration being from a few
hours to a few days.
Mania senile is the mental exaltation occurring in persons
with senile arterial changes, or senile cerebral atrophy. Soon
followed by dementia.
A maniacal outbreak may present any one or a number of
the varieties named.
TERMINATIONS OF MANIA. About fifty per centum of acute
manias, not due to organic disease, recover after periods varying
from one month to several years. A fair proportion of cases
make a partial recovery, and are able to return to their work, but
always showing some alteration in character or affection, or
618 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Some eccentricity, or a slight mental weakness. About twenty
per centum of cases terminate in dementia or mental death, and
this is always the fear in each case. Two per centum of cases die,
either the result of exhaustion or from the organic condition
causing or associated with the attack.
PROGNoSIS. The question of recovery, partial or complete,
is always difficult to determine, depending upon the cause, tem-
perament, disposition, education, nationality and the normal
mentality of the individual. Recovery is usually gradual; rarely
sudden restoration occurs. 4.
Favorable indications are: sudden onset, short duration,
youth of patient, absence of fixed delusions, good appetite,
increasing hours of sleep, moderate or no increase in temperature,
pulse, and respiration; no evidences of mental weakness, no par-
alysis or alteration of pupils or articulation, no epilepsy, no
unconsciousness to the calls of nature, and no former attacks.
Unfavorable indications are the opposite of these, and also the
presence of organic brain disease, or a strong hereditary ten-
dency, or the possession of an excitable disposition, or nervous
diathesis.
THE TREATMENT.
The Osteopathic experience along this line of mental pathol-
ogy is somewhat limited, for there has been a peculiarly char-
acteristic dearth in thought manifest, and the intense egotism
of most of those who have heretofore studied the science has
debarred the investigation of other and more salutary
measures. The taxation of mental genius to discover a universal
panacea for these conditions is hardly probable; and even if it
were known, the obtuseness of mentality of those who claim to
be and are recognized as sane precludes adoption. Madness is
kaleidoscopic in manifestations.
Inharmony is apparent. The harmony is severed. How?
The inequality originates from overstimulation of the nerve cen-
ters, or nerve terminals. Reflex action intensified or aborted
accounts for the results. Mental suggestion under peculiar cir-
cumstances produces “mother's markings.” Why not sugges-
tions peripheral, from an undue pressure on the terminal nerve
filaments, exercise an influence that culminates in intense mani-
festation of abnormality?
The experiments of Orificial surgeons demonstrate what we
have said, and our own observation approbates their recorded
conclusions. The genital organs, including the lower outlets,
|
PLATE LVI.-Side of Neck and Shoulder Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 62 I
Sphincter muscles, will be found to exercise marvelous influences
in a large percentage of cases of mania, and these properly
attended to, will greatly lessen the number of victims and cure
cases abandoned by other methods, and by specialists and experts
on nervous diseases. We have seen and treated persons, wild
and insane, successfully by Orificial means, that manipulations
Osteopathically were inadequate to modify even. Whether we
invite the censure of Osteopathic practitioners or not, in our
approval of means not recognized as Osteopathic (but really car-
rying out the principle), we shall take the liberty to recommend
Orificial Surgery wherever indicated, and as a “twin sister” to
Osteopathy, and worthy the most rigid scrutiny, profoundest
investigation and our heartiest approval, when intelligently
applied.
The general and special manipulations to remove obstruc-
tions, take off the pressure, establish nerve force, and coordi-
nate the system with itself, demand our wisest consideration.
Life is far too precious and too short to while it away in
egotistic expostulation or denunciation of the means that relieve
mankind, from whatever source derivable, or where found, or by
whom discovered. Hemaspasia should not be lost sight of for
lessening the blood pressure in the brain, when necessary. Hyp-
notic suggestion is remarkably effective in many mental states,
changing the whole life at once. -
Epileptic Insanity comes under the above treatment, and
may be greatly modified thereby, persistently applied, generally
and locally, as indicated.
EPILEPTIC INSANITY.
DEFINITION. A mental condition caused by or the result
of epilepsy. -
CAUSEs. The careful study of the brain of those dying
having epileptic insanity has failed to determine why some epi-
leptics suffer from any of the insanities and others have their
normal mentality, and another group are better after a convul-
sion.
VARIETIES. Pre-epileptic mania; post-epileptic mania;
dementia epileptica; imbecility with epilepsy.
SYMPTOMs. The mental changes constituting epileptic
622 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
insanity, save in the cases of epilepsy with imbecility or idiocy,
develop after some years of the ordinary epileptic paroxysms.
Pre-epileptic mania has attacks of mania some days or hours
preceding the epileptic convulsion. The patient is morose,
irritable, and threatening, often making homicidal attacks on
those around him, be they friends or foes. Rarely the epileptic
seizure is replaced by various insane, or so-called hysterical acts,
as fits of dancing, laughing, crying, screaming, swearing, or
scolding.
Post-epileptic mania follows the epileptic paroxysm, either
taking the place of the comatose state or following after it. The
maniacal acts during these outbreaks are often of the most des-
perate and impulsive character, many an asylum physician and
attendant carrying scars, the result of attacks of post-epileptic
maniacs.
Epileptic dementia is the terminal mental obliquity resulting
in about thirty per centum of insane epileptics, who do not suc-
cumb before to nephritis or tuberculosis.
Epileptic imbecility is a congenital condition in which the
two conditions are associated.
PROGNoSIs. The great majority of cases of epileptic insan-
ity develop, sooner or later, either nephritis or tuberculosis.
Recovery from epileptic mania is a rare occurrence. Thirty per
centum of epileptic maniacs progress to dementia in from five to
ten years. &
TREATMENT. Apply the general treatment. Intensify
locally—along cervex and spine. -
CIRCULAR INSANITY.
SYNONYM. Folie circulaire.
DEFINITION. A mental disease characterized by regularly
alternating and recurring periods of mental exaltation, depres-
sion, and sanity.
CAUSEs. Hereditary predisposition. The exciting causes
are any of those conditions which depress the brain or general
system.
PATHOLOGY.. There is no characteristic lesion associated
with circular insanity.
SYMPTOMs. Essentially a chronic condition and probably
incurable. The disease usually begins as a melancholia, the
depression being an apathy and torpor rather than a mental pain;
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 623
and suicidal feelings and impulses are rare; this condition is
soon succeeded by a mania, a mental exaltation, with hyperaes-
thesia and exaggeration of nervous functions, the reasoning
power well retained; this is in turn followed by a lucid interval,
often giving promise of recovery, to be sooner or later followed
by another cycle. These periods follow each other with remark-
able regularity, each being of the same duration. Rarely the
various periods are of irregular duration.
The general health is well maintained, the patient gaining in
flesh during the stages of depression and lucidity and losing dur-
ing the period of exaltation. .
DIAGNOSIS. The regularity of the different periods soon
establishes the diagnosis.
PROGNOSIS. Generally incurable.
TREATMENT. See treatment for Mania.
KATATONIA.
SYNONYMS. Alternating insanity; Kahlbaum's insanity.
DEFINITION. A mental disease, characterized by irregular
cyclical symptoms, ranging from melancholia to mania, followed
by stupidity and confusion, with cataleptoid phenomena, followed
by lucidity for a time, recovery, or passing to a dementia.
CAUSEs. Hereditary predisposition. The exciting causes
are usually the result of some excess. Rarely associated with
Organic brain disease. -
PATHOLOGY. No characteristic lesions have been found
associated with katatonia. -
SYMPTOMs. A typical case begins as a melancholia, the
mental depression, uneasiness, and distress followed after a vari-
able period by mania, associated with hallucinations and delu-
sions. This period is followed in turn by a condition of attonita,
or rigidity and immobility, or a cataleptoid paroxysm; any of the
stages may be followed by confusional symptoms, or a true
dementia may develop. During the maniacal stage there is a
tendency, in many cases, to histrionic and sermon-like declama-
tion, or the speech may be of the verbigeration character—that
noisy, incoherent, and meaningless speech seen in many manias,
composed largely of the constant repetition of a few words or
phrases. During the stage of attonita the presence of the so-
called mutism or mutacismus, “a pathological tendency to be
624 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
silent,” may continue for days, weeks, or months, or it may be
interrupted by periods of verbigeration.
The immobility or rigidity so characteristic of a period of
katatonia is frequently alternated with automatic, incessant, and
monotonous movements—the stereotyped movements.
Patients suffering from katatonia often refuse food for days
at a time and then suddenly present symptoms of boulimia.
Vaso-motor and trophic changes are frequent, one of the most
constant being cyanosis of the hands and other peripheral parts.
Haematoma auris, insane ear, or perichondritis auriculae, is fre-
quent. Epileptiform attacks may usher in the disease or occur
during any of its stages.
DIAGNOSIS. It may be diagnosed as melancholia, mania, or
a dementia, depending upon which of the cycles be first observed,
but after being under observation long enough to observe a coin-
plete cycle, the diagnosis is readily determined. Katatonia dif-
fers from circular insanity in the absence of a genuine lucid
interval, and the presence of the stage of attonita and catalepsy.
PROGNoSIs. The disease may continue for a number of
years and recovery follow, but as a rule the prognosis is unfavor-
able. -
TREATMENT. See treatment for Mania.
DELUSIONAL INSANITY.
SYNoNYMs. Delusional mania; delusional melancholia;
primary delusional insanity.
DEFINITION. A mental state, with fixed or partly system-
atized delusions, associated with either brain exaltation or excite-
ment without maniacal acts, or a mental depression, minus the
Somatic symptoms of melancholia. -
“An insane delusion is a belief in something that would be
incredible to sane people of the same class, education, or race as
the person who expresses it, this resulting from diseased working
of the brain convolutions.”
CAUSEs. Cerebral and bodily exhaustion, the result of over-
work, neglect of personal hygiene, or alcoholic, tobacco, drug, or
sexual excesses—a neurasthenia. Impairment of the nervous
centers, the result of fevers or shock. Climacteric period, worry,
and insufficient food.
PATHology. Delusional insanity is a subacute, or chronic
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 625,
condition; death seldom occurring, and when it does, is the result.
of an intercurrent physical malady. In the few such cases in
which post-mortem examinations have been made, the vessels of
the brain were found torpid or dilated—a vaso-motor paresis
causing an imperfect cerebral circulation. - -
SYMPTOMs. Either following an attack of acute mania or
melancholia, but more commonly without either of these condi-
tions, occurs a set delusion or delusions, which, to the patient,
are so real that no amount of argument can dispel his or her
belief. These cases are often classed as manias or melancholias,
but, as they do not run the ordinary course of either of these con-
ditions, they are best classed clinically by themselves. The
acuteness or subacuteness of the attack distinguishes them from
paranoia. The majority of the delusions are of an egotistical
character, but lack the conduct or appearance of the position due
to the character of the delusion. A patient with ragged clothing
will assure you that he is worth millions, and yet sees nothing
inconsistent between his delusion and his personal appearance.
- DIAGNOSIs. Delusional mania and delusional melancholia
are confounded with delusional insanity, the points of distinction
being the absence of severe maniacal and melancholic acts; the
patient simply possesses his insane delusion and may never refer
to it unless questioned. Paranoia or monomania and delusional
insanity have many symptoms in common, but in the former, if
the patient believes he is Christ, he wishes to be so respected,
and considers himself wronged if not so treated, while the delu-
sional patient will say he is Christ and immediately drop the sub-
ject. There are, however, many border-land cases in which
the diagnosis is difficult. -
PROGNosrs. Recovery the rule, although the delusions may
exist for a number of years. Many patients who make a com-
plete recovery will still believe that their delusions were facts.
TREATMENT. See treatment for Mania.
PARANOIA.
SyNONYMs. Monomania; chronic delusional insanity;
reasoning mania; verruecktheit.
DEFINITION. A chronic mental disease characterized by
fixed logical or systematized delusions of persecution, unseen or
impossible agencies, or of self-exaltation, the emotions and mem-
626 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ory being only paroxysmally defective, while, however, the life of
the individual is dominated by the delusions. -
The term paranoia, as it is now commonly used, to cover a
group of insanities which are degenerative in origin, chronic in
course, and characterized by systematized delusions, with little
impairment of the emotional faculties, is not generally accepted as
a synonym for monomania.
CAUSEs. There is generally a hereditary predisposition to
insanity in monomania or paranoia. The exciting cause may be
the result of an acute mania or melancholia, or the result of
alcoholism, or the result of malnutrition in those who have had a
struggle to keep their position in the world. Extreme worry
in individuals, with mental instability. Following primary or
acute delusional insanity.
SYMPTOMs. The course of monomania is essentially
chronic, the delusions becoming perfectly fixed and unchanging
upon one particular subject or set of subjects, which in turn
dominate the life of the individual. The most common char-
acter of these systematized delusions are, delusions of persecution
or suspicion, delusions of exaltation or of pride, and delusions of
unseen agents or influences.
The range these assume are most wide and varied, but
always associated with the ego. The patient is being perse-
cuted not because, as in melancholia, he has committed some sin,
or thinks he has, and deserves punishment, but because the perse-
cutors wish to deprive him of his rights, titles, or estate, or
degrade him or in some way injure him.
DIAGNOSIs. In the diagnosis of monomania there are three
points to ever keep in mind: first, the duration; the fixed, sys-
tematized delusions must have existed for over one year; second,
the absence of symptoms of mania or melancholia; and third,
the presence of systematized delusions affecting the personnel
of the individual.
PROGNOSIs. Monomania is an incurable disease. Unless
tuberculosis develop within a few years, dementia results.
TREATMENT. Symptomatic, and all means that promote
constructive metamorphosis. Suggestive therapeutics. See
treatment for Mania.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 627
DEMENTIA.
SYNoNYM. Acquired feeble-mindedness. I
DEFINITION. A progressive general weakening of the
mind, characterized by a loss of reasoning capacity, a diminution
of feeling, a weakened volitional and inhibitory power, failure of
memory, associated with lack of the power of attention, interest,
and curiosity, in varying degrees, in an individual who at one
time possessed these mental qualities.
FORMS. Dementia acute; dementia alcoholic; dementia
apoplectica; dementia choreica; dementia chronic, or secondary;
dementia epileptica; dementia organic; dementia paralytica;
dementia partial; dementia primary; dementia secondary, sequen-
tial, or chronic; dementia senilis; dementia syphilitica; dementia
toxica. .
CAUSEs. Deficient or feeble mental inheritance; age; ath-
eroma; following mania, melancholia, paranoia, and other forms
of insanity; the result of organic brain conditions; alcoholism;
syphilis; developmental changes; climacteric.
PATHOLOGY. In acute dementia the changes are dynamic.
In the primary dementia there is probably atrophy of certain
cells from overstimulation, the tissues being normally deficient.
In secondary dementia the chief changes are, “alteration in the
size of the vessels, owing to thickening and distention, the thick-
ening being most marked in the deep layers, and in the walls of
the vessels are fatty granules and haematoidin. The perivas-
cular canals are enlarged. The changes in the cells may be
described as deficiency in the number of pyramidal cells, and a
want of distinctness of outline and branches, the nuclei being
larger, but changed in form, and only capable of slight carmine
staining.” In senile dementia there is general atrophy and
degeneration of all the tissues of the brain.
SYMPTOMs. The onset, extent, and variety of the impaired
mentality differ greatly. In some patients the evidences of the
failing mind are seen with the subsidence of the mania, melan-
cholia, or other insanity, or soon after the development of the
particular cause, while in another group of cases the develop-
ment is slow and insidious. The difference in the intensity is
marked; in one case the changes being scarcely noticeable, the
patient being simply less active than before, showing a slight
indifference to his environment, while in others the patients
remain for hours alone, making no effort at movement and with
little or no expression of the face, while another class of cases are
628 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
oblivious to the demands for food or drink, or the calls of nature,
existing “in the darkness of perpetual intellectual and moral
night.” Between these symptoms are all varieties and degrees
of mental enfeeblement. The physical symptoms of dementia
vary with the particular cases, many enjoying the best of health,
eating and sleeping well, while others are always unwell, first one
organ and then another, while another group suffer from chronic
diarrhoea, which finally causes death. Dementia patients seem
predisposed to tuberculosis, nephritis, and apoplexy.
Acute dementia, or “stupor with dementia,” is to be dis-
tinguished from “stupor with melancholia.” The onset is rather
sudden, with or without mania or melancholia, after some brain
or bodily exhaustion, shock, or fright; the patient, a young per-
son, “is horror-stricken, paralyzed in mind, not merely deranged,
not depressed or excited, but deprived of feeling and intellect; his
movements, if there be any, are automatic, but frequently he is
motionless, standing or sitting, staring at vacancy for hours and
days.” (Blandford.) These patients will not converse, and do
not reply to questions, or but slowly, and in monosyllables, and
their faces have a blank expression.
Dementia alcoholic, the mental weakness resulting from
excessive use of alcohol. Inebriety is a form of dementia, there
existing an uncontrollable alcoholic habit, with weakened or
absent will power, and impaired mentality.
Dementia apoplectica, an organic or terminal dementia, due
to the cerebral changes sometimes following a severe apoplectic
seizure. -
Dementa choreica is a feeble-mindedness associated with
chronic chorea, or, in some cases, probably the result of chorea.
Dementia chronic is the designation applied to all forms of
dementia that have existed after one or more years.
Dementia epileptica is the slow mental impairment resulting
from long-continued and frequently occurring epileptic convul-
sions.
Dementia organic, the mental deterioration resulting from
gross organic brain lesions, such as sclerosis, tumor, embolism,
Or trauma.
Dementia paralytica is a synonym for general paralysis of the
insane.
Dementia partial is an incomplete form of dementia, in
which the mental enfeeblement is associated with such a degree
PLATE LVII.--To Raise Clavicle, Arm Leverage.



A 19 RUGLESS SYSTEM - OF HEALING. 63 I
of intelligence and memory that the qualifying term “partial” is
COrrect.
Dementia primary is seen most frequently in the young,
developing slowly and insidiously, without any symptoms of
mania or melancholia, usually in a youth who has given promise of
a bright future, by a slowly progressive indifference to his former
Occupation, studies, or surroundings, with developing careless-
ness and negligence of person and proprieties, no amount of
external stimulus serving to rouse the receding mentality, until
finally the downward course ends in dementia so decided that,
but for the history of the individual, the case would be classed as
congenital.
Dementia secondary, sequential, or chronic, is the most
common variety of mental impairment following mania, melan-
cholia, and other insanities. According to Bevan Lewis, twenty
per centum of manias, and fifteen per centum of melancholias,
become permanent dements.
Dementia senilis, the result of cerebral atrophy, with its
consequent failing mental power. Loss of memory for recent
events is one of the most common symptoms. The disease often
begins as a senile mania, melancholia, or delusional insanity.
Dementia syphilitica is the feeble-mindedness resulting from
cerebral syphilis. This group of patients are always sanguine
and assert they are “all right,” “never sick in my life,” and yet
unable to assist or care for themselves.
Dementia toxica is the mental failure produced by the long-
continued and excessive use of opium, cocaine, and chloral.
Chronic plumbism is also given as a cause. -
DIAGNOSIs. Acute dementia is often misnamed melancholia
with stupor, but if the patient is in the teens the probabilities are
that it is a case of the former, while if past forty it is almost cer-
tainly the latter. *
The distinction between dementia and idiocy or imbecility
must always be determined. Esquirol's graphic description is
well worth remembering: “The dement was a rich man who has
become poor; the idiot, on the contrary, has always been in a
state of want and misery.”
PROGNoSIs. Acute dementia is generally favorable. All
other varieties are incurable. The average lifetime of dements
is placed at about twelve years, the great majority dying of tuber-
culosis, nephritis, or apoplexy.
TREATMENT. See treatment for Mania.
632 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The remarks under the head of Mania apply sometimes very
forcibly to the various stages of insanity. Whatever name is
applied, or however peculiar the manifestations, there is but one
cause in our opinion for the whole trouble—impeded circulation.
In the oncoming ages posterity will discover that man is a
Cosmos, and that within his body the elements of the universe
preside, and a disturbance of the elements changes the character
most wonderfully, producing incoordination mentally as well as
physically. Obstructions to communicating nerve tubules dis-
turb forces, and these are made to exercise themselves in various
ways. The mind is controlled according to suggestions, and
the character of these suggestions governs the results. Mind
travels through the nerve tubules as electricity traverses the
electric wires, they being the media of communication; and
when the wires are crossed confusion reigns. The same thing
occurs when undue pressure prevails anywhere along the line,
and as there are but two things causing the incoordination, to-
wit: muscular contraction or blood stasis, the indications become
apparent. Restore the nerve force or lessen the contracture, or
both, if they exist. This sort of treatment persistently applied
promises all that can be expected.
There are many things to consider in treating persons
afflicted with mental troubles—from the hereditary origin to the
exciting cause, whatever it may be. Judgment must be exer-
cised in all of the cases presenting themselves for treatment.
Some “sin” lies at the door as a cause. Transgression of a
human or a divine law stands up before the victim, speaking in
unmistakable tones that an enemy has done this. Evil habits
must be corrected, the effects of them met and neutralized :
present physical conditions corrected, and a new life started and
lived; environments changed; the pressure taken off and kept off;
new tissues permitted to take the place of the old, worn-out
material; new thoughts, if possible, formed, maintained; dor-
mant forces aroused, and new suggestions given to start new
channels of thought and habits. *
General Osteopathic treatment should be given as often as
three times a week, and these should be as thorough as possible,
arousing every nerve and liberating every pressure in the body.
Orificial Surgery and Suggestive Therapeutics occupy a
prominent place in such cases, and are needed in a great many .
cases. Dementia may be arrested many times by changing the
environments, the influences, and starting up a new life of hope;
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 633
and expectation and desire will strengthen the hope and make it
the governing principle in due time, culminating in love, the
promoter of all life and happiness. 4 ×
sº
GENERAL PARALYSIS.
SYNONYMS. Paralytic dementia; general paresis; general
paralysis of the insane; dementia paralytica; paresis; paretic
dementia. g
- DEFINITION. A subacute, or chronic, degenerative disease
of the brain, sometimes involving the spinal cord; characterized
by alterations in the intellectual and moral character, with the
development of unsystematized ideas of self-importance, or delu-
sions of grandeur, finally merging into dementia (preceded by
either a mania or a melancholia), and the gradual development of
tremor, slurring speech, pupillary changes, ataxia, trophic
changes, and finally paresis.
CAUSES. General paralysis occurs chiefly between thirty
and fifty-five years of age, and in the male more frequently than
in the female. It usually affects the robust, middle-aged indi-
vidual, rapidly destroying all intelligence and judgment, leaving
him to exist, often for months, as a demented human automaton.
Predisposing Causes.—Hereditary; an ambitious over-
straining for prominence, learning, or wealth; forced intellectual
activity in those with imperfect or improper early training; cran-
ial injuries; atheroma.
Exciting Causes.—Alcoholic and sexual excesses; syphilis;
mental and physical overstrain; worry. “In many cases I think
the middle-aged general paralytic is suffering for the sins of his
youth.” (Clouston.) “General paralysis is not a penalty of high
cerebral development, but the expression of a discrepancy—an
inadequacy of some brains to sustain the strain to which the race,
as a whole, is subjected.” (Spitzka.) -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. A condensed description of the
pathological basis of general paralysis is difficult. It may be
described as a chronic diffuse cortical encephalitis. The micro-
scopical changes in the cortex, according to Mendel, as quoted
by Folsom, are as follows:
I. Increase of nuclei and new cell formation, some nuclei
small, some large, and with such varying reactions to coloring
agents as to suggest dissimilarity of origin. The stellate or
634 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
“spider” cells are increased in the upper layer of the cortex,
where some may be normally found, and extend to lower layers,
as is not the case in normal brains; they, too, may be several
times the usual size and also push through the white substance
to the ependyma of the ventricles. Proliferation of neuroglia or
connective tissue, and in time sclerosis of the cortex, which
involves the medullary substance also in a greater or less degree.
2. The larger blood vessels may or may not be atheroma-
tous; in the capillaries there is an increase of nuclei in the walls,
with thickening and hyaloid degeneration.
3. In the nerve cells, the ganglion cells, granular and fatty
degeneration of protoplasm, sclerosis, atrophy:
4. Atrophy and final disappearance of the nerve fibers, not
limited to the cortex and found in other brain diseases also-
senile dementia and epilepsy, for instance.
5. Focal lesions of the most various kinds, and degenerative
changes in the spinal cord, the several forms of sclerosis and
myelitis.
The spinal cord undergoes atrophy, with gray degeneration
in posterior and postero-median columns, and of posterior spinal
nerve roots.
SYMPTOMs. For clinical convenience the disease is divided
into three stages, prodromal, maniacal, rarely melancholic, and
the stage of dementia, although there is seldom a marked division
between each.
Prodromal Stage—May exist unrecognized for months or
longer. It begins by an alteration in the habits and character of
the individual; the patient has spells of irritability and obstinacy,
which will not admit of contradiction or opposition; there is a
general feeling of elation and bien-etre, or egotism shown by the
exalted opinion of his own attainments and importance, and a
great laudation of his family. He becomes boastful, untruthful,
dishonest, and forgetful, neglecting engagements, business, self,
and family. He frequently makes extravagant purchases, and
may waste large sums of money before his condition of irrespon-
sibility is recognized, or may unwittingly resort to dishonest
means to obtain money to squander on new-made friends. In
many instances the patient develops ideas of an enterprising
character, and resorts to all forms of expedients, which, to his
mind, are going to improve his or her family's station and worldly
condition: he determines to change his occupation or business,
or attempts to instruct the authorities in what he conceives
-A DRUGL, ESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 635
*
should be their duties. The moral lapses of paretics are most
frequent during this stage, consisting of acts of theft, drunken-
ness, violent impulses, or indecent assaults, in individuals who
have possessed a good moral character. They become profane
and vulgar, and often resort to sexual excesses. Associated with
any of the above symptoms may be any one or more of the fol-
lowing physical conditions: tremor of the muscles about the
mouth, naso-labial folds, and of the tongue, causing a slight slur
or hesitating speech; alterations in the pupils, or one pupil
becoming somewhat larger than the other; attacks of vertigo, or
epileptiform or apoplectiform seizures; the gastric, intestinal,
hepatic, and nephritic secretions are disturbed, and there may be
headache and insomnia. After a variable duration, continuing
in a mild degree for many months, is ushered in the—
Second, or Maniacal Stage—Which is much the same as a
severe attack of acute mania, plus the physical signs of paresis
and the delusions or ideas of grandeur. The patient is exces-
sively restless, boasting of his great wealth, intentions, prospects,
and influence; one moment the most important of individuals, the
next giving away thousands, and if doubt is expressed as to his
ability to do so, making it millions and often billions, presenting
houses and lands, titles and offices, with unstinted liberality. It
is to be noted that these so-called delusions of the paretic are in
reality conceptions, or an expansive delirium; for when contra-
dicted the patient makes no effort to defend them; and they seem
to be really assertions and reassertions, continuing until incoher-
ency restrains the airy imagination. The patient is sleepless,
noisy, destructive, with attacks of blind, uncalculating violence,
resisting all who attempt to restrain or molest him; the violent
impulses of paretics are similar to the furious excitement of the
post-epileptic maniac. The physical signs are more pronounced,
the characteristic hesitating and slurring speech increases, the
pupillary changes become more marked, the tremor of the tongue
and lips increasing, and spreading to the upper extremities, the
gait ataxic, the patellar reflex increased, or, rarely, diminished,
the sphincter of the bladder disordered, and there often occurs
paralysis of the anal sphincters. During the progress of the
second stage are developed cerebral crises, syncope, petit or
grand mal, apoplectiform attacks, or paralytic seizures. Few
cases but show one or more of these conditions. There also
occur myosis and loss of light reaction, and increased wrist and
636 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
elbow jerks. The maniacal stage is of shorter duration than any
other, and is usually succeeded by the—
Stage of Dementia—The patient presenting all the evidences
of failing mentality, with paralysis, trophic changes, as shown by
the occurrence of bed-sores, cystitis, diarrhoea, and arthropathies,
or Charcot's joints, the patient emaciating rapidly, death closing
the scene within a few months. -
Rarely the maniacal stage is preceded or replaced by a condi-
tion of melancholia with expansive hypochondriacal delusions.
In a few instances a genuine lucid interval has followed either the
prodromal or maniacal stage. The spinal form of general
paresis is fairly frequent, in which symptoms of spinal sclerosis
are added to the mental ataxic phenomena of the usual form.
“Of the many divisions of general paralysis into several
clinical types, all of them naturally more or less arbitrary, I know
no other so satisfactory as Meynert's eight.” (Folsom.)
I. Simple progressive dementia, with the usual motor im-
pairment which accompanies it, but, excepting hypochondriacal
depression, not necessarily exhibiting other mental symptoms
than dementia. -
2. With the expansive delusions and the distinctive motor
disturbances which appear simultaneously and are progressive,
constituting the “classic” form of general paralysis. The mental
state is usually of self-satisfaction and exultation, but there may
be depression.
3. Of the same type as the last, but failing its steadily pro-
gressive character through arrest of the active process. The
remissions, which seldom last so long as a year, raise hopes of
recovery, but still manifest unmistakable impairment of the rea-
soning faculties. The psychic disturbances are much greater
than can be accounted for by the atrophy of the brain alone.
4. Cases in which the characteristic exultation and grand
delusions reach such an astounding height that manifest motor
symptoms are looked for with confidence from day to day, and
yet may not appear even for a year, any slight incoordination
naturally being obscured by the general muscular disturbance.
Meanwhile there may be such an improvement that the patient
leaves the hospital for a while, once, rarely twice, on the respon-
sibility of his family, but to return with marked motor, as well as
mental signs.
5. A very rare form, with alternate symptoms of exaltation
and depression of the type of circular insanity.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEAL, ING. 637
6. With early furious delirium, painful hallucinations, con-
fusion and incoherence somewhat resembling acute delirium.
7. Progressive general paralysis, in which the characteristic
indications appear secondary to other forms of insanity; for
instance, after paranoia or melancholia, first described by
Hoestermann.
8. The combined form, with sclerosis in the whole cerebro-
spinal tract, the symptoms of tabes or spastic paralysis predomi-
nating, according as the posterior or lateral columns of the spinal
cord are chiefly involved. The ascending type, in which the cord
is first affected, is rare. Optic neuritis, ending in atrophy and
paralysis, especially of the ocular muscles, may precede marked
mental symptoms. -
DIAGNOSIs. The development of the following symptoms
removes all difficulties in diagnosis: mental—alteration in char-
acter, loss of memory, defective will power, changed moral sense,
insomnia, violent impulses, melancholia or mania, unsystematized
delusions of expansive character, with an exalted sense of well
being, gradually ending in dementia; physical—hesitating, slur-
ring speech, tremor of the lips, tongue, and upper extremities,
pupillary changes, myosis, loss of light reaction, exaggerated
wrist, elbow, and knee jerk, attacks of syncope, vertigo, epilepti-
form or apoplectiform seizures, ataxia, trophic changes, and
finally paralysis.
Paralytic insanity, or organic dementia, is not the same con-
dition as general paralysis. It is the form of mental failure suc-
ceeding to gross brain lesions, such as apoplexy, tumors, soften-
ing, trauma, and Sclerosis.
PROGNoSIs. Unfavorable. Remissions very, very rarely
OCC111ſ.
THE TREATMENT.
We do not desire to have the reader to understand that when
the condition resulting in tissue, structural changes, has been
reached, that we recommend any treatment, but before the cord
undergoes atrophy we claim that Osteopathic treatment offers
better results than can be derived from any other source known,
for the reason that blood (arterial blood to the parts) is the only
tissue builder and preserver, Nature's own remedy. *
The careful study of the nature of the malady and the stage,
effects and condition of the patient at the time of examination
should be made, and then an intelligent application of the princi-
ples of this science usually results in great good, in that it stays
638 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
its progress in many cases and cures others not gone beyond
human limits—structural changes. As there are all grades of
paralysis, from its simplest to its gravest form, the Osteopath will
be extremely guarded in his prognosis as well as in his promises
to the patient regarding results. Many cases thought to be
incurable are cured, and others which seem easy, not serious
seemingly, are not benefited by treatment. In all cases of par-
alysis the structural conditions determine the consequences.
Wherever arterial blood circulates and nerve pressure can be
removed, the case may be regarded as favorable.
The general treatment should begin at the neck. Extension,
rotation, careful, deep, persistent, long manipulations of the mus-
cles of the neck will be found to be necessary to relax them, and it
sometimes, in some cases, requires months to accomplish this.
In all cases of paralysis, of every form, we find rigidity of the
muscular fibers to exist, especially those of the neck. The same
condition extends all the way down the spine, in the dorsal
region, and a persistent course of manipulations are necessary to
relieve the rigidity. As the neck muscles yield, the others do in
proportion, and amelioration shows itself. The manipulations
require much patience on the part of the operator, for the rigidity
is often intensified by attempts to manipulate, and greatly inter-
fere with movements. A coaxing of the muscles, as well as the
patient, to relax, constitutes a large part of the first few attempts
to treat a patient. We speak especially of cases where the rigor
is predominant, after the paralytic stage is partly changed. The
incoordination is characteristic. Rigidity prevails in some cases,
relaxation in others. Finally general paralysis, and death ends
the scene. Early treatment should be instituted to promise
benefit. Osteopathy promises more than any other treatment,
if begun early and persistently applied, and yet early application
is important. Do not promise to raise the dead with Osteo-
pathy.
|-
ſl.
::-
C
C
|-
O
----
5
"…
.cg
：
...º
，
cae
>
|-
|-
|-
>
|-
ſae
|-
·
|-
^~

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 64I
DISEASES OF THE DIGESTIVE
SYSTEM.
The digestive system embraces the teeth, salivary glands,
stomach, duodenum, liver, pancreas, and small intestines; and
diseases of the digestive system embrace all that pertains to the
digestive tract, and more—for the whole alimentary tract is fre-
quently involved when disease invades any portion of the diges-
tive system, including the nervous system that controls the vari-
ous divisions thereof, and as will be seen in the following divi-
sions named, and the pathological affections treated of under the
various headings, the diseases of the digestive system constitute
a very important part of the diseases that affect mankind. The
treatments, as stipulated under the various headings which follow,
become eminently important to those who would be successful as
Osteopaths in maintaining a standing among scientific healers.
To learn to differentiate between a normal and an abnormal
condition of this system becomes a matter of vast importance
when it is understood that, upon the healthful condition of these
organs depends the proper digestion of the food eaten, as to its
proper conversion thereof into healthy blood; and the importance
intensifies when it is known how much depends upon the manu-
facture of healthy, normal blood, possessing the proper propor-
tion of the elements that constitute the human body. No one
will fail to recognize their importance from an Osteopathic stand-
point. Under the heading “Diseases of the Respiratory
System” will be found the diseases of the digestive organs above
the stomach, so that there is no necessity of a repetition here.
642 - OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
DISEASES OF THE STOMACH.
ATONIC DYSPEPSIA.
This is a functional derangement of the stomach, with either
a deficient secretion of kind or quality of the gastric juice, char-
acterized by disorders of the functions of digestion and assimi-
lation, owing to the sympathetic nerves affected. The character
of the disorder is largely dependent upon the manner of eating
and the state of mind during ingestion; the character of the food;
also, upon the frequency of eating; continuance of the same
diet, or too greasy food. Sedentary habits, worry and fatigue
have much to do with the processes of digestion. .
As the object of this work is to benefit mankind, we would
add that dyspepsia is the result of abuse of the stomach itself. It
is not so much the lack of mastication (for some people never
take time to do that) as it is a lack of rest of the stomach. It is a
muscular organ, and, like all other muscular structures, tires out
from overuse. The secretion manufactured by the salivary
gland is the effect of sympathetic nerve influence, and an essential
ingredient in the process of digestion (an alkaline secretion), and
serves its purpose of mixing with the food, moistening it, pre-
paratory to being conveyed (swallowed) into the stomach. Here
another kind of secretion is encountered—exclusively an acid
secretion. If the former (alkaline) is lacking in quantity, mixed
with the food, and does not to some extent at least neutralize the
acid, the excess of this acid arrests the process of, or fails to per-
form digestion and emulcify the food, so as to be in proper condi-
tion to pass on to the next division of the digestive apparatus,
and increases the stimuli to the acid-secreting nerve filaments,
contracture ensues, and the digestive process is at once arrested.
The whole process of digestion is carried on by nerve influ-
ence. The sympathetic and spinal nervous systems are the fac-
tors involved therein. The solar plexus being made of, or con-
sisting of, the terminal filaments of the two, their actions, com-
bined, carry on all of the processes of this important function—
digestion as well as assimilation of the food. An excessive action
of the par vagus produces an excess of acid secretion. A defi-
cient action of the splanchnics leaves the excess of acid in the
stomach, and a contracture of the walls of the stomach ensues,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 643
and the hydrochloric acid being in excess, solution of the food is
at once arrested. This secretion is directly under the super-
vision of the anterior portion of the solar plexus of nerves that
control the manufacture of the hydrochloric acid. The posterior
portion of the solar plexus being directly under the supervision
of the splanchnic nervous system, and both being essentially con-
cerned in the process of digestion, it is necessary that communi-
cation should be kept up in order that the normal functions be
performed. This short explanation places the matter properly
before the mind of the reader, and gives an idea of how we regard
the treatment of disease as a product of incoordination of the
nervous system. These two nerve forces represent the positive
and the negative forces in the body, and due regard to their
proper union furnishes a key to many a difficult pathological
condition, as well as to the manner of its solution. The use of
artificial solvents—digested alimentation thrust into the stomach
—is a sad discredit to the intelligence of chemists and dietary
manufacturing proprietors, and still more so to the professedly
learned medical fraternity | Whenever it is once known how to
unite these two forces, and that done the whole trouble of
indigestion ceases, the amount of experimentation will cease, and
the manufacture of “prepared foods” will be useless. The larger
percentage of disease has its origin at the very threshold of the
digestive process—in the stomach. *
THE TREATMENT.
As many of the diseases attributed to disordered liver, heart
and kidneys really have their origin in the stomach, and disperse
as soon as the stomach is relieved, it becomes a matter of no small
moment to consider well the true state of the digestive tract.
Our advice, then, is to unite the forces that control the secretions
of the stomach. Usually the difficulty is found to be a faulty
condition of the splanchnic nervous system, and this should
receive our first and special attention. Beginning at the first
and second dorsal vertebrae (to stimulate the pulmonary plexus,
so that the lungs may be actively engaged in their functions), we
proceed down the spine on either side, raising one arm at a time,
or both if an assistant is present; stretch the arm high and
strongly above the head, pressing hard with the fingers of the
other hand on either side of the spinal processes along down the
spine, embracing the whole region of the splanchnic nervous
system, letting the arm be suddenly lowered, each move and each
pressure.
644 - OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
It is an important part of the treatment, that the beginning
should embrace the fourth dorsal, as there seems to be the begin-
ning of the filaments that control the pyloric end of the stomach,
and there is where the peptic glands seem to be the most numer-
ous; and then proceed on down the spine, step by step, as far as
the tenth dorsal vertebra. The patient may be in a sitting or a
reclining posture (no matter which), after which the patient
should lie on the back, and the bowels, liver and stomach should
receive attention. The liver should be manipulated—rotated,
kneaded, diaphragm stretched; then the gentle vibratory move-
ments made, so as to stimulate each and every part of the alimen-
tary tract. The usual flexion and manipulation of the lower
limbs should be made, as well as the treatment of the lower lum-
bar and sacral plexuses of nerves; and, last of all, the vaso-motor
nerve area should receive attention. During this treatment the
patient should receive the vibratory manipulations on either side
of the spine, between the fourth and tenth dorsal region, pressing
the muscles upward and outward at the same time. Then the
tapping manipulations on the abdomen upward, beginning at the
ileo-cecal fossa, following the course of the colon upward to the
hepatic flexure, thence across to the splenic flexure, thence
down to the sigmoid flexure—several times. This increases
peristalsis of the intestinal tract, and cures constipation. The
pressure should be firm and not rapid on the back, in the region
of the great splanchnic nervous system—especially at its begin-
ning (the fourth dorsal), between the fourth and fifth.
It will be understood that during the process of digestion
there is an increased activity in the circulation of the blood
throughout the whole system, as is the case in all general exercise
of the body; and that during this activity of the circulation the
nervous system has a corresponding increase of labor to perform,
directing and selecting, as well as placing, the manufactured
products of the chemical changes. The necessity of perfect free-
dom from pressure will be apparent, therefore the removal of any
such impediment as would interfere with its normal action should
be especially attended to, from the muscles in the neck, which
might interfere with the pneumogastric, splenic or vaso-motor
system, all along the line to the terminal filaments of the sympa-
thetic nervous system in the sphincters in the lower outlets of the
body. These have to do with capillary circulation, and from the
blood in the capillaries are drawn all of the elements that go to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 645
make up the secretions that play such a vital part in the digestive
apparatus. This understood, and practiced, accomplishes the
purpose intended. -
ACUTE GASTRITIS.
An acute and violent inflammation of the mucous, sub-
mucous, as well as the muscular coats of the stomach, with loss
of tissue, accompanied with great pain, loss of appetite, constant
vomiting of blood, streaked or bloody mucus, a weak and col-
lapsed feeling. This state is usually brought on by irritant, cor-
rosive poisons, such as mineral acids, arsenic, corrosive subli-
mate, carbolic acid, copper and caustic potash. Of course, this
condition must receive attention at once, and the proper anti-
dotes should be administered. The removal of as much of the
poison as possible by vomiting, encouraged by demulcents. Oil,
lard, milk, lime water, or whatever is indicated, should be admin-
istered at once. The consequences of such a state are most
always grave. wº
ACUTE GASTRIC CATARRH.
An acute catarrhal inflammation of the mucous membrane
of the stomach; feverishness; loss of appetite; nausea; vomiting;
painful digestion; irregularity of the bowels; sometimes accom-
panied with vertigo; loss of appetite; coated tongue; bad taste
and breath; lessened gastric secretion; alkaline reaction; viscid
mucus; feeling of weight; eructations; urine scanty and contain-
ing lithates.
CHRONIC GASTRIC CATARRH – CHRONIC
DYSPEPSIA.
This is an indigestion, a loss of appetite, burning, tender-
ness, gnawing feeling in the stomach, due to thickening of the
coats of the stomach, resulting from disturbance in the peptic
glands. Dyspepsia is characterized by so many symptoms that it
is hard to enumerate a correct classification, but suffice it to say
that the characteristics are prominent after ingestion of food—
an uneasiness, tenderness, distention after eating. The tongue
is usually heavily coated, a peculiarly disgusting, sickening
*
646 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
uneasiness in the epigastrium, attended with constipation, heart-
burn, retching, cross, irritable, despondent, melancholia, depres-
sion of spirits, hungry, thirsty, nervous, restless, sleepless and
everything out of fix. This disease is associated with so many
chronic ailments that it demands more than a passing notice.
The term dyspepsia “covers a multitude of sins.” There is no
organ in the body that is subjected to a tithe of the abuse the
stomach is, and its complaints are constantly uppermost, and for
this reason every nostrum that the inventive genius of all ages
could conjure or invent has been dumped into it to cure the
dyspepsia. It has not dawned upon the medical profession that
teasing and doctoring that organ is just the thing that ought not
to be done—never! It is like goading an already exhausted
animal, to make it do more than it is able. For conscience' sake,
give the poor stomach rest. It surely needs it badly enough.
Let us study the character of the forces that control it, and adjust
them, then dyspepsia will be readily cured. The cure of diseases
of this organ are as readily effected as those of any other organ,
if we know how. And the Osteopath should know.
As the indigestion of the food produces the most char-
acteristic, distressing symptoms in this disease, attention to the
cause deserves our careful consideration. It may be laid down,
as a rule, that when the stomach is healthy the whole man shares
the same blessing. Dyspepsia is the bane of this age. The
causes are as varied as the material introduced into the stomach,
from the “chewing gum” to the “piece between meals,” and the
stuffing of the infant to stop its crying. The stomach has had
every evil influence brought to bear that could be thought of
(and not thought of), upon it, outside and inside its walls, and
then the possessor would grumble because it could not bear more
abuse. It will be remembered that the stomach is a muscular
organ, supplied with blood vessels, nerves, glands, lymphatics;
that it is subject to the same laws that the rest of the system is;
that it is subject to stimulation, depression, exhaustion, inac-
tivity, and needs rest and recuperation the same as other secre-
tory organs; and that to perform its functions the necessary
supply must be furnished it. This brings us to a consideration
of the nervous system that controls the digestive apparatus. The
great sympathetic orders, the motor executes—the work is done.
But that something may be done, the material to do it with is a
matter of no small consideration in the performance of the func-
tions of this organ, the stomach. The whole alimentary tract is
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 647
one continuous tube, supplied along its course with certain
recuperative forces that furnish the necessary elements to meet
the demands, and the action of the one depends largely upon the
other, for the preparation of the food is the all-important desider-
atum under consideration. The stomach is the important divi-
sion of the alimentary tract that can not be ignored. There are
chemicals generated here that nature especially regards as essen-
tial in the formative process of the blood itself. Here is where
our attention is directed in the building-up process in all dis-
eases. Here the preparation is made for converting food into
blood, and without healthy blood no disease can be cured. Dys-
pepsia itself must be cured by healthy blood. Every tissue in the
body is made from healthy blood, and kept renewed by elements
therefrom. The condition of the organ itself, the mental state
while eating food, and while it is in the stomach, have everything
to do with the digestive functions, and the results are as cause to
effect. The nervous system that is said to control the digestive
tract ends in the organs themselves. That set which controls
the action and secretion of the salivary glands ends in them;
that set that controls the manufacture of the gastric secretions
ends in the walls of the stomach; and this is true of the liver, the
pancreas, the duodenum, of the small intestines, the colon and the
rectum. Each and every division is controlled by nerves that
emerge from certain localities in the spinal cord. Any deficiency
anywhere along the line is directly attributable to some trouble in
the nervous system that controls certain organs in these localities.
Correct these, and normal action ensues.
The Osteopathic treatment of the stomach will be better
understood when it is known that there are two forces to deal
with. The one controls the production or generation of acids,
and the other the alkaline secretions. The excess of the one or
the deficiency of the other (in other words, the supremacy of con-
trol of one set of nervcs) determines the pathological as well
as the physiological condition in the parts, and not only in the
stomach, but in the whole body. If the anterior portion of the
solar plexus predominates, the acids are in excess, and we have a
contracted state of the stomach and the whole internal viscera—
a drawn condition, pain, constipation. If the splanchnic nerves
predominate, the results are accordingly, and disproportion pro-
duces disorder in the whole physical economy. This affords us a
key to the situation, the use of which determines the results of
treatment. Acids contract, alkalies dissolve and disintegrate.
648 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
These two opposites united, neutralize each other. In the human
system they so blend as to regulate the processes in the secre-
tory generative economy that physiological harmony results at
once. The sympathetic nerves direct and the motor execute.
The intelligence that has the prerogative of directing is situated
in the calvarium, and a direct connection is made from every ter-
minal filament at its remotest point to the original center, and
from there the intelligence is conveyed to the terminal filaments
of nerves influenced. Instance: stimulate a bundle of filaments
in one or more of the sphincters of the lower outlets of the body,
and communication is conveyed through nerve filaments to
the origin, thence to the solar plexus, and an irritation of the
stomach at once takes place. Whether this influence is conveyed
directly to the brain, thence down the pneumogastric filaments
terminating in the stomach, is not settled; but, anyway, it gets
there. Thus it is through reflex filaments we reach other parts
of the body, and the brain substance and nerve centers, and
communications are established that set right discrepancies which
have existed for a long or short time. It is thus we relieve pain,
change pathological conditions to physiological, and cure disease.
The changes that occur in the stomach are brought about
Osteopathically through stimulation of the splanchnics, or the
terminal sympathetic filaments, which convey an influence to the
brain, thence to the stomach, and thus change an acid condition
to an alkaline, or neutralize the excess of acids, and vice versa.
Constipation is relieved, colic cured, dyspepsia wanes, digestion
established, new blood-making material produced, and health and
vigor take the place of former emaciation and disease.
THE TREATMENT.
Begin the treatment of this affection at the neck. Free all
of the muscles in all of that region, raise the clavicles, treat the
whole spine on both sides, drawing the arms up taut, and use
steady, slow motions and pressure along the dorsum in the
splanchnic region. The spine should receive thorough treat-
ment all along down its full length (patient being on the side), the
muscles being thoroughly moved upward and outward, and espe-
cially from the fifth to the tenth dorsal vertebrae (on both sides),
then stretch the shoulder up strongly on the right side, pressing
hard about the seventh dorsal on the right side, retracting the arm
suddenly. Do this three times. Turn patient on back, manipu-
lating lower bowels thoroughly for several minutes; spread the
diaphragm, use the rotary movement over the abdominal region,
PLATE LIX.-Throat Treatment for Diphtheria, etc.


A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 651
kneading the bowels carefully and thoroughly, and lift them up
from the iliac fossae as the patient takes a long, deep inhalation.
Repeat these moves and treatments every other day, being fifteen
to thirty minutes at each seance. Enjoin on the patient
strict care in regard to masticating his food thoroughly,
leaving off liquids at meals, and if the patient is excessively cor-
pulent, omit his breakfast. Long, deep inhalations of air should
be rigidly enforced every two to four hours every day. Leave off
all mincing between meals. Let the patient have a glass of water
for every ten pounds of his weight during the twenty-four hours.
Eat and sleep regularly, and it is well to have patient rest at least
an hour after meals, without mental or physical labor. These
directions followed will cure and keep cured the greater percent-
age of stomach troubles denominated dyspepsia.
GASTRIC ULCERS.
Is characterized by constant pain at pit of stomach,
tenderness, vomiting of blood, severe and frequent attacks of
neuralgia. It may be relieved by equalizing the forces, as men-
tioned for treatment of dyspepsia.
GASTRIC CANCER.
This affection is considered as an unfavorable one. No
medication offers any hope. The indications are to supply hydro-
chloric acid. The union of the positive and negative forces offers
more benefit than medication. The dilute hydrochloric acid
given in the water drank, together with the splanchnic nervous
treatment, promises more than all other remedies heretofore
administered, hence we recommend it persistently.
GASTRIC DILATATION.
SYNoNYMs. Gastrectasia; pyloric obstruction; pyloric sten-
Osis.
The abnormal increase in the cavity of the stomach, with the
walls either hypertrophied or decreased in thickness, presents a
peculiar condition for treatment. Indigestion is the pronounced
characteristic symptom, and noisy movements in the abdomen
652 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
a common symptom (borborygmus); regurgitation of partly
digested food is a common condition. An enlargement is per-
ceptible in the pyloric end of the stomach, and extreme tender-
116SS.
THE TREATMENT.
The principal treatment should be confined to the splanchnic
region, and insisting on the non-use of fluids during meals. The
equalization of nerve force being established by taking off the
pressure from the splanchnic and pneumogastric nerves, restores
normal capillary activity to the relaxed muscular fiber, and re-es-
tablishes function. The stretching of the abdominal muscles
increases their elasticity, and the increased circulation in the parts
brings about a physiological condition. Healthy arterial blood,
allowed or permitted to circulate, cures all pathological affections.
It will be found that the secret of all cures is to let in the life
blood—the element that contains the life—into any part dis-
eased. It possesses all the power the mind of man can conceive
of to cure disease. This, then, is the proper thing to do. Give
the overdistended muscular fibers rest, send in the life-giving
fluid, and await results. This is not only theoretically but prac-
tically the only thing indicated. It will be found to be the great-
est aid to the cure of the above disease to leave off eating any sort
of food for several days, giving the stomach absolute rest.
GASTRIC HEMORREHAGE.
SYNONYMS. Hematemesis; gastrorrhagia.
This being only a symptom, it will be proper to ascertain
the cause, then treat the patient accordingly. Vicarious men-
struation at menstrual periods, ulcer of stomach, cancer, scurvy,
purpura, yellow fever, and other affections may cause hemor-
rhage of the stomach. Find it out, and treat accordingly. The
symptoms are a sinking, fainting feeling at pit of stomach, fol-
lowed by ejection of black coagula or coffee-ground appearance
of blood. Sometimes, if the blood passes into the small intes-
tines, it will be voided by stool.
THE TREATMENT.
Water, as hot as the patient can bear to swallow, with the
addition of a little salt, will generally arrest the hemorrhage.
Absolute rest until recuperation takes place. Remove all press-
ure from the stomach, the abdominal and chest muscles, and
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 653
equalize the circulation of arterial blood in the capillaries by stim-
ulating the vaso-motor area and taking off the pressure from the
jugular veins and intercostals in the usual way, lifting the chest
walls by the up-drawn arm and dorsal pressure.
GASTRALGIA.
SYNONYMS. Cardialgia; gastrodynia; stomachic colic;
Spasm of the stomach; neuralgia of the stomach.
The sensory nerves of the stomach seem to be most affected;
that is, they report the pressure, or the presence of abnormality
pressure. The affection is characterized by violent paroxysms
of pain and contractions of the walls of the stomach, and fol-
lowed by feebleness of the heart's action and symptoms of col-
lapse. It is distinguished from other affections by its paroxysmal
character. This affection is usually the result of too much acid-
ity in the stomach itself. That is due to incoordination of the
two forces controlled by the splanchnic and pneumogastric
nervous systems—the fault of non-union of these two sets of
nerves.
THE TREATMENT.
It will be found that the stretching upward of the right arm
strongly, and at the same time pressing the fingers of the other
hand against the side of the spinal processes (on the right side),
and suddenly lowering the arm, will usually be sufficient to relieve
the colic instantly. If the patient is so situated that this move is
inconvenient to apply, stretch the body backward, over the edge
of a table, chair or anything convenient, so as to stretch that part
of the body in the region of the splanchnics strongly backward,
holding the body in that position a moment or so. This does the
work. This will be found to be the most satisfactory treatment
ever devised by anybody. Any measure instituted to accomplish
the pressure and the bending backward is all that need be done.
The expert Osteopath will ever be ready to improvise means to
accomplish the ends desired, on any and all occasions. The
intelligent application of Osteopathy is what is needed if success
be expected, and it generally follows most satisfactorily.
654 g OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
DISEASES OF THE LIVER,
The liver is the largest gland in the body, situated on the
right side of the abdominal cavity, just below the diaphragm, and
constitutes an appendix to the digestive system. Its functions
are peculiar, like all other glands, secreting special constituents.
This organ secretes bile and furnishes a storage for glycogen, and
at a special period of development the production of blood cor-
puscles and their destruction, the formation of large quantities of
urea, the retention and destruction of certain poisonous sub-
stances absorbed from the intestinal tract. It consists of five
lobes—the right, left, the lobus spigelii, the lobus quadratus, and
the lobus caudatus. These are made up of lobules or acini, and
these again of hepatic cells, capillaries, arteries, veins, lymphatics,
and biliary channels, each lobule being surrounded by connective
tissue. The weight of the liver is between fifty and sixty ounces.
It receives its supply of blood from two distinct sources—from
the hepatic artery and the portal system ; while the blood is .
returned from it into the vena cava inferior by the hepatic veins.
The secretion (the bile) is conveyed from it by the hepatic duct,
either directly into the intestine, or, when digestion is going on,
into the cystic duct, and thence into the gall bladder, where it
accumulates until required. The portal vein, hepatic artery and
hepatic duct branch together throughout the liver, while the
hepatic veins and their tributaries run by themselves. The liver
is made up of small, roundish, oval portions, termed lobules, com-
posed of minute branches of the portal vein, hepatic artery,
hepatic duct and hepatic vein, while the interstices are filled by
the liver cells. These cells form the glandular or secreting part
of the liver. The cell substance contains numerous fatty mole-
cules, and possibly some granules of bile-pigment, as well as a
variable amount of glycogen. These cells are held together by a
very delicate sustentacular tissue, continuous with the interlobular
connective tissue. From these small vessels a dense capillary
network is prolonged into the substance of the lobule, and this
network is gradually gathering itself up, as it were, into larger
vessels, converging to a single vein occupying the center of the
lobule, and hence called interlobular. The small interlobular
veins discharge their contents into veins called sublobular, while
these again by their union form the main branches of the hepatic
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 655
veins, which leave the posterior border of the liver, to end, by two
or three principal trunks, in the inferior vena cava, just before
its passage through the diaphragm. The hepatic artery distrib-
utes blood to Glisson's capsule, the walls of the ducts, blood ves-
sels, and other parts of the liver, to rebuild the liver tissue itself
especially; while the portal blood, coming from the portal system,
undergoes a secondary capillary circulation in the liver, from
which the bile is secreted, and, after leaving the secretory cells,
joins the venous blood, the product of the hepatic circulation, and
the bile enters the hepatic duct and is emptied into the duodenum.
The gall bladder is simply a reservoir to hold bile for future
use, for the secretion of bile is constant, while the digestion is
periodical. The manner of its entering the cystic duct is pecu-
liar, yet very simple when understood. The orifice of the hepatic
duct, through which the bile passes from the liver into the ductus
communis choledochus, is narrower than the cystic duct, and
seems closed, except when sufficient pressure behind it forces the
bile through it into the duodenum, and the bile, finding no exit
through it, is forced back up through the cystic duct into the gall
bladder. The bile is forced out of the gall bladder by compres-
sion of the walls of the gall bladder, produced by the contraction
of its coats. The ducts are composed of unstriped muscular tis-
sue, and their contraction is excited by the presence of food in
the duodenum, acting by reflex influence, with sufficient force to
expel the contents of the ducts and gall bladder. It will be read-
ily seen that perfect order must exist, and freedom from unnatural
pressure of these organs must be had in order to produce normal
action of this gland. Our very life depends upon the proper
circulation of the blood in the liver, for without it no bile would
be secreted, and no digestion or new blood would be made as the
product of digestion. For a further knowledge of the anatomy
and functions of this gland we would refer the reader to works on
anatomy and physiology, which treat elaborately thereon. -
The salivary, the gastric, the hepatic and the pancreatic
secretions all constitute the agencies that promote digestion, and
all of these secretions are manufactured through direct action of
the sympathetic nervous system. Each particular element in each
one of these secretions furnishes a part of the great whole that,
without either, would cause imperfect digestion. As all secre-
tions are made from the blood, and the blood is distributed to
every organ and tissue in the body through the capillaries, and
the capillaries are controlled by the sympathetic nervous system,
656 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the importance of perfect freedom of every part of the body from
pressure becomes a matter of necessity. Every discrepancy in
the system, every deviation from a normal state, is due to a
chemical change in the elements, and as these elements are the
product of digestion, and as digestion is the result of nerve force,
it becomes apparent that on a disturbance of the nervous system,
either by undue pressure or stimulation, influences are started
that culminate in the consequences we see from day to day—
physiological and pathological. The proper understanding of
the nervous system furnishes the key to the workings of the
human system for the weal or woe of the human family. The
processes of life constitute an interminable circuit, starting in and
ending in the mind, directed through the sympathetic nervous
system, executed by the motor nervous system. The compre-
hension of these constitutes limitless power over the human body.
CONGESTION OF THE LIVER,
SYNoNYMs. Torpid liver; biliousness.
This is commonly recognized as an abnormal fullness of the
vessels of the liver. The enlargement of the organ is due to the
accumulation of blood therein, and it is termed active when arter-
ial, and passive when venous. The characteristics are fullness
and inactivity, a dull, heavy feeling in the liver itself, accompanied
with derangements of digestion, mental torpor, and sometimes
slight jaundice. In the active congestion there are more or less
heat, habitual constipation, pain in hypochondriac region and
under the right shoulder blade, mental depression; the patient is
generally pessimistic. The liver is enlarged in all directions, and
presses upon other organs in all directions in proportion to the
amount of congestion.
The characteristic symptoms are as follows: A general
malaise, aching of limbs, feverishness, headache, depression of
spirits, the tongue has a yellowish coating on it, a disgust for
food; there may be nausea, vomiting, constipation, high-colored
urine, a feeling of weight and fullness, with soreness in the hepatic
region, with a dull pain extending up into the right shoulder;
slight yellowishness of the sclerotic coat of the eye and skin,
complexion muddy, and symptoms of gastro-intestinal catarrh
are generally present.
The cause is pressure—obstructed circulation. It will be
readily understood that pressure on any of the blood vessels lead-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 657.
ing to, into, or out of the liver, or undue pressure on the solar
plexus of nerves, would result in interference of function, and
then congestion must ensue. The results follow as certainly as
fate. The pressure is to be especially considered, whether it be
on the nerves, blood vessels, lymphatics, ducts or cells. The
minute structure of this organ is such that there is no compensa-
tion for duties not performed. The organ itself must be restored
or the house is divided against itself, and a wreck sooner or later
occurs. It can not perform its functions without the right kind
of blood, and as it is intimately concerned in blood manufacture,
it must not be circumscribed in its functions by environments that
interfere therewith. Congestions of surrounding organs are fac-
tors generally concerned in the production of disturbances in the
functions of this organ, and should receive special attention.
Contraction of the intercostal muscles will be found to exist in a
large proportion of cases. The abdominal muscles may also be
concerned in the same way. Tumors, tight bandages around the
body, constant pressure from any cause, have to do with the
impediment to the proper circulation. All of the circumstances
concerned in each particular case should be duly considered, and
the action in the premises controlled thereby.
THE TREATMENT.
The Osteopathic manipulations to remove congestion are
surely plain enough. -
Our motto in the treatment of the liver is similar to what we
claim to be true for all the organs.
Inasmuch as all pathological conditions are due to undue
pressure somewhere, in, on, or remotely, that arrests the flow of
fluids to and from them, so in diseases of the liver undue pressure
or disconnection of nerve force exists. It is evident that the
indications point with unerring certainty to the necessity of
removing this pressure and set to rights the forces governing
the action of the organ.
We have no faith in the “touching-of-a-button-theory” busi-
ness in the treatment of pathological conditions, for it often hap-
pens that mechanical pressure produces such a state of conges-
tion as to positively separate the forces that normally control the
diseased organ, and then “to touch a button” would produce no
response, and the touch would fail to start the “machinery.”
The philosophy of the Osteopathic system is to “Remove the
Pressure.” To know how to do this is to know Osteopathy, and
results follow that are seemingly marvelous in many instances.
658 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
Whilst we teach that certain nerves control, coordinately, certain
parts of the body, we also teach that nerves coming out of any
particular foramen are not always all the nerves ending in the
anatomically announced tissue or tissues. This indicates that
universal freedom of the whole system is essential to freedom of
a particular part, for the human system is a cosmos, and all con-
trolled by mind; and this mind is conveyed through tubes called
nerves. The various illustrations given in this work, studied,
adopted, practiced, constitute the methods used to “Take Off the
Pressure” everywhere in the body, and should be so thoroughly
understood that a glance at the system in a given pathological
condition should suggest the cause of the pathological condition
and the means of remedying it. There is no guess-work in the
treatment, nor in the probable—yes, almost positive—results,
when scientifically applied, as delineated in this work. There are
certain so-called centers along the spinal column from which
certain nerve filaments emerge through the foramina that surely
exercise positive influences upon other parts of the body, and
certain special results follow as cause and effect, yet why they do
so is the most difficult thing to explain. From these phenomena
has been deduced a supposed science, termed Osteopathy, and
yet, day by day, marvelous discoveries of results occur from the
stimulation of other terminals equally as profound, mysterious
and startling. These results are all along the same lines of this
same process, and only demonstrate that our researches are
rewarded as we advance in the study of this marvelous creature
called man. We surely “are wonderfully and fearfully made.”
The constant application of the study of the coordination of the
forces will eventuate in more marvelous revelations than we have
yet learned, and put us nearer in harmony with ourselves, and
serve to keep us so. -
ABSCESS OF THE LIVER,
This is a circumscribed inflammation or parenchymatous
degeneration of the hepatic cells, resulting in suppuration, single
or double, and recognized by irregular febrile attacks of tender-
ness and symptoms of deranged gastro-hepatic functions, in
which there is in the liver a hyperaemia, a swollen state of the
liver, an effusion of lymph, a degeneration of and softening of the
hepatic cells, the suppuration beginning in points in the lobules
and coalescing; the walls of the abscess consisting of more or
PLATE LX.—Chest and Spinal Cord Extension.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 66I
less changed liver structure. These abscesses usually penetrate
toward the surface and burst into the peritoneum, intestines,
hepatic duct, lungs, gall bladder, stomach, or externally through
the abdominal wall or into the pleura, and after pus is discharged
cicatrices are formed in the tissues involved.
The symptoms are generally very obscure, simulating inter-
mittent or remittent fevers and disorders of the stomach, with
obstinate vomiting, debility, nervous irritability, melancholia,
jaundice, constipation, light stools, and resembling typhoid fevers,
as it is more or less chronic in its stage of progression to a cul-
mination. This condition may be confounded with hydatids of
the liver, but the local pain is usually so characteristic as to pre-
vent such a conclusion. The introduction of a trochar leaves no
doubt as to the condition. These abscesses may also be mistaken
for a cancer, but as a cancerous condition is characterized by
burning sensations, there is no excuse for failing to differentiate.
The prognosis is considered unfavorable in any event, yet
recoveries do occur. When suppuration is present it should be
let out. The pus is greenish yellow, and, if allowed to remain
long, turns to a dark color. The relief is better secured by the
use of a trochar and canula, with drainage tube.
ACUTE YELLOW ATROPHY.
This is so similar a disease that it is often mistaken for
Abscess of the Liver at the beginning, but instead of an increase
in size, it decreases, followed by deep jaundice and profound dis-
turbance of the nervous system, generally terminating in death
in a short time. The symptoms are: There is a prodromic
period, attended with gastro-intestinal catarrh, coated tongue,
yellowish; nausea, vomiting, and tenderness over the epigas-
trium; headache, rapid pulse, slight fever and jaundice, gradually
increasing in intensity, with increasing headache and persistent
insomnia, vomiting of blackish, grumous, bloody, “coffee-
ground” excreta, tarry stools, ecchymotic patches on the skin.
Convulsions ensue, coma, and death.
scLEROSIS OF THE LIVER,
This affection is generally denominated “Hob-nail Liver,”
Gin-drinker's Liver. It consists of interstitial inflammation, or
inflammation of the intervening connective tissue of the liver,
662 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
chronic in its progress, and resulting in induration of the whole
organ, characterized by emaciation, gastro-intestinal catarrh, and
jaundice. The first stage of this affection consists of a hyper-
aemia of the connective tissue, which soon develops into brownish
red connective tissue elements, and the liver increases in size and
density; the cells, being pressed upon, undergo fatty degenera-
tion. The increase in size gives the liver the uneven or nodular
appearance. The portal circulation, as well as the hepatic circu-
lation, is interfered with, obstructed, obliterated, function ceases,
the peritoneum thickens, adhesions are formed, the whole organ
is rendered more or less useless, and if persistent, death soon
closes the scene.
The prognosis of this affection may be briefly stated: It
terminates in death. The stage is usually about one year.
AMYLOID LIVER,
SYNoNYMs. Waxy liver; lardaceous liver; scrofulous liver;
albuminous liver. - .
This is an infiltration into the substance of the liver of albu-
minoid material resembling starch, hence its name, amyloid.
The disease seems to result from a prolonged suppurative process,
more especially of the connective tissue, or of bones. The
enlargement is generally uniform, and presents a translucent
appearance, and has a doughy consistence. The deposits gen-
erally begin in the arterioles and capillaries, which are eventually
closed by the fatty deposits. There are no peculiar symptoms
characteristic of the condition in a systemic sense, differing from
other diseases of the liver. The progress may be rapid or slow,
but the prognosis is generally unfavorable.
CARCINOMA OF THE LIVER,
SYNoNYM. Hepatic cancer.
A peculiar morbid growth, which progressively destroys the
hepatic tissue, characterized by indigestion, emaciation, jaundice,
ascites and terminating in death. It is a disease of advanced life,
and occurs at the age of sixty years or thereabouts; sometimes at
forty, or earlier. The differentiation is peculiar, for there are
general uneasiness, pain, weight, jaundice, ascites, hemorrhage,
feebleness, cold, dry skin, pinched features, dejected, worn expres–
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 663
sion of the countenance. The nodules are tender, and the pains
are of a shooting, burning character; enlargement of the organ—
and this disease always ends in death. -
The conditions described present rather a forlorn prospect
for relief. The medical profession has relied upon medication
for a cure, and, as stated, their conclusions are generally termi-
nated by the patient passing to other climes. Their efforts have
been signal failures. It would seem like presumption for an
Osteopath to make suggestions. It surely would be were it not
that a success is probable in many instances that would be utterly
denied by the medical profession. The promotion of tissue
changes can only take place from the presence of healthy arterial
blood, and as this system offers the only means of sending it to
the parts, if the case is taken in time (before a breaking-down
of the tissue occurs), the chances are better than from any other
agency. •
TREATMENT For AFFECTIONS OF THE LIVER,
When it is considered that all the conditions enumerated
result from capillary congestion, and that this results from
obstructed circulation, it will be readily seen that to cure or arrest
the progress of disease it is essential to remove the pressure
causing the congestion; the tissue changes take place normally
at once, and health in the parts is restored. It can also be most
clearly seen that medicines have no power to exercise, therefore
can not remove the obstructions causing these difficulties. The
first thing to be done in these liver troubles is to start the forces
that are prevented from acting by the presence of either foreign
substances in the capillaries, due to fibrinous precipitation there-
in, or interference of outflow through the veins, caused by exter-
nal pressure. These obstructions must be removed, whatever
they may be, so that a free inflow of normal arterial blood can
be had—so that waste tissue can be gotten rid of. In order to
remove the waste it must be dissolved, and that can not be done
without contact with the fluids drawn from the blood as it passes
through the capillaries; so that a necessity is apparent of promot-
ing the onward flow through the capillaries, that this may be
naturally accomplished. If the blood is obstructed in the arter-
ioles by pressure, the remedy is, remove the pressure causing it;
and if in the veins beyond the capillaries, remove the pressure
there; and if the arrest of the circulation is due to pressure upon
664 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
a nerve or nerves distributed to the parts which control the capil-
lary circulation, take off the pressure from it. This done, and
kept off, health is the inevitable consequence. Many diseased
livers may be cured by this process. Simply the contact of
healthy arterial blood tends to soften down the hepatized tissue,
and the channels (the lymphatics) carry away the excess, and
restoration to a normal condition ensues, the same as is seen in
hepatization of lung tissue in the sequelae of pneumonia.
The learned Osteopath, one skilled in manipulations, can not
fail to comprehend the necessity of starting at the vaso-motor
area and moving all obstructions as found all the way down the
neck, chest and body, through the various means illustrated in
this work, and demonstrated by actual experience to be the
proper course to pursue. The ribs are lifted from their drawn
condition by the proper stretching of the muscular fibers, as
results from manipulations of arms and lower limbs—including
abdominal and dorsal muscles; the liver and abdomen as well,
by mild vibratory movements over the liver itself. Care should
always be had in ascertaining the condition and character of tissue
involved. Too much care can hardly be exercised in the treat-
ment of this organ, for the medical fraternity have had their spe-
cial attention directed to the liver since they learned that mankind
possessed that sort of a commodity, and, as a general thing,
accused that organ of being more or less concerned in all other
pathological conditions of the human system; hence all medica-
tion has been directed toward the liver and the movement of the
bowels.
DISEASEs OF THE BILIARY
PASSAGES.
CATARRHAL. JAUNDICE–ICTERUS.
This is a catarrhal condition of the bile ducts, an inflamma-
tory condition of the mucous membrane of the bile ducts and
duodenum as well, producing derangement of stomach, yellow-
ness of the skin, itching, mental depression and feverishness, and
usually due to eating too frequently or overloading, the stomach
with food or drink, debauch, pressure from any cause, or defi-
g
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 665
ciency of normal secretion or lack of elementary constituents.
SYMPTOMs. A distressed, painful feeling in the epigastrium,
coated tongue, nausea, impaired appetite, looseness of the bowels,
perhaps slight feverishness, eyes yellowish, jaundiced conjunc-
tivae and skin assuming a yellowish cast; the stools are light-
colored or clay-colored, colicky pains in the bowels, urine dark-
colored, heavy and loaded with biliary elements, urates, etc. The
surface of the body is generally cold, the heart's action slow, the
mind depressed, and a perceptible tenderness on pressure of the
epigastrium. The liver is sore to the touch.
THE TREATMENT.
As the liver possesses such important functions in the human
economy, it requires more than an ordinary notice, but as this
disease is due to arrest of function, we do not need to enter
minutely into the anatomical and physiological description of this
organ at this time, but will simply delineate the treatment indi-
cated. That there is some arrest of circulation of the fluids can
not be questioned. All of the ducts become thickened; an arrest
of elimination of elements is apparent, due to arrest of the onward
normal flow of the fluids in the substance of the liver itself; the
solar plexus fails to receive its nerve influence from the splanch-
nics, and confusion reigns supreme. To correct this condition
stimulate the vaso-motor area, including the pneumogastric; lift
all of the pressure off of the neck muscles, raise the clavicles, the
chest muscles, stimulate the dorsal region in the usual manner,
lifting the arm at the same time. Treat the abdomen by vibratory
movements, gently at first, increasing the force gradually; knead
the liver and bowels, and treat the lower limbs thoroughly,
emptying the venous blood by taking off the pressure around the
saphenous veins in both limbs, and move the muscles of the back
thoroughly, upward, outward. Give the colon thorough treat-
ment, beginning at the ilio-caecal area. Treatment should be
thorough, mild and deep, especially in reference to the liver and
abdomen, and should occupy twenty to thirty minutes, at least
every other day. Leave off food until the digestive organs are
restored to a condition that it can be digested. Use plenty of
water at stated and regular intervals, and occasionally flush the
bowels, for apparent reasons: that of diluting poisons and precipi-
tated chemical elements—to promote elimination. Give due
attention to splanchnics.
666 OSTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
BILIARY CALCULI.
This condition is usually characterized by hepatic calculi,
gall stones, hepatic colic, caused by concretion lodged in the
ducts. These concretions originate in the gall bladder, and are
derived from the constituents of the bile itself. Cholesterine is
the chief constituent—crystallized precipitate. These stones are
found, as a rule, in the gall bladder or cystic duct; sometimes in
the liver, though rarely, and in the hepatic duct. These are
manifest by being expelled, or an attempt at expulsion, for their
passage produces extreme pain, piercing, agonizing, in the
region of the gall bladder or ducts, spreading over the abdomen,
right chest and shoulder; the muscles of the abdomen become
cramped and tender, the pulse becomes small and feeble, the skin
cool, cold perspiration stands out all over forehead and body,
anxious face, spasmodic rigors, trembling at times, and convul-
sions are a common accompaniment. These paroxysms continue
until the calculi pass through the duct, which may be several
days, but when the calculi reach the duodenum, perfect relief
ensues suddenly. Restoration rapidly ensues as a rule for that
time. Sometimes, however, jaundice follows the paroxysm, and
should impaction of the calculi take place, perforation, consequent
upon inflammation, ensues, and this is followed by peritonitis, the
calculi being discharged by the intestines, stomach, or may be
through the abdominal walls. -
tº This affection need not be mistaken for anything else if the
proper observation is made. The pains diverge from the hepatic
region, accompanied with nausea and vomiting. The actual
passage of these calculi may be demonstrated by passing the dis-
charges from the bowels through a sieve. There may be several
hundred of these calculi in the gall bladder, and their passage
affords no immunity from future formations.
THE TREATMENT.
The Osteopathic manipulations consist of the usual splanch-
nic and dorsal treatment. The raising of the right arm strongly
upward, lifting the ribs off of the liver, and the firm, gentle knead-
ing of the liver and bowels, should be done, preceded first by a
proper manipulation of the vaso-motor area. Hot applications
to the side and over the hepatic region should be employed to
relax all tissue, followed by manipulating in a careful manner the
liver itself, and that followed by thorough vibratory pressure over
the liver and abdomen. The passage of the gall stones will be
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 667
*
greatly facilitated by these manipulations, and proper treatments
should follow until no more formations of stones occur. This
is the best prophylactic treatment for these secretions.
DISEASES OF THE KIDNEYS
The normal condition of the secretions of the kidneys is
essential to health, and the facilities are so numerous to ascertain
the deviation from that state to abnormal, that the doctor has no
excuse for not knowing the actual condition of this secretion.
The kidneys being the eliminating organs, removing from the
blood such ingredients as are not essential to the welfare of the
whole body, they should be kept in good working order all the
time.
The kidneys are two large glandular organs, situated in the
upper and posterior portion of the abdominal cavity, and are
concerned in the excretion of the urine. They consist of an outer
or cortical substance, and an inner medullary substance. The
medullary substance consists of from 8 to 18 pyramids (the mal-
pighii), the apices of which, the papillae, project into the calices
of the ureters. The pyramids are striated, and in places send ,
narrow projections into the cortex—the medullary rays, or pyra-
mids of Ferrein. Between the pyramids are extensions from the
cortex—the columns of Bertini. The cortex, by the penetration
of the medullary rays into it, is divided into the medulla and
the labyrinth. The secreting structure of the kidneys consists of
long tubes, beginning in an expanded extremity, the capsule of
Bowman, which invests a tuft of blood vessels, the glomeruli, and
constitutes, together with this, a malpighian body; extending
from this is the proximal convoluted tubule, then comes the spiral
tubule, then the loop of Henle, consisting of a descending and
an ascending limb; then the distal convoluted tubule, which ter-
minates in the collecting tubule. The blood vessels of the kid-
neys divide into two sets of branches, one supplying the cortex,
the other the medulla. The secretion is dependent upon the
nerve action controlling the kidney, the healthful condition of
the organ itself, as well as the normal condition of the blood ves-
sels carrying the blood to and from it. The secretion is carried
on by direct control of the sympathetic nervous system, and the
668 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
execution largely depends upon the spinal nervous system, direct
connection being made through the renal splanchnic. The solar
plexus is also an important factor in the secretory process of
this organ.
The Osteopath reaches this organ through a system of
manipulations described elsewhere in this book. Pathological
conditions in general are corrected by a course of stimulation
or desensitization of sympathetic and other nerve terminals, and
reflex action is produced. If there is excessive pressure, by any
means, upon the vaso-motor area, and continued for some time,
an increased action of the kidneys ensues; or if there is undue
nervous excitement mentally, there is increase in the flow of the
watery secretion, but of lower specific gravity, thus demon-
strating to a certainty the nervous influence over the kidneys, as
well as their complete action being under nerve influence, as well
as the amount of blood distributed to the kidneys and the especial
influence over secretion. This nervous influence is largely under
the control of the operator, directed especially to the vaso-motor
area and along the dorsal region in the vicinity of the tenth, elev-
enth and twelfth dorsal spines, on either side. The control of out-
flow is had by treating downward, and excessive outflow by
treating upward. These treatments are duly explained else-
where. . . -
y THE URINE AND Its TESTs.
The normal quantity of this varies from thirty to fifty ounces
daily. An increased action of the sweat glands lessens the
amount accordingly, and so do the various forms of fevers. Cold
weather, on the contrary, other things being equal, increases the
quantity secreted. There is usually less passed during the night
than in the daytime. The normal color is a light amber, due, it
is said, to the presence of urobolin. The color deepens or varies
according to circumstances in pathological conditions. There is
more or less precipitation in normal urine, after standing in a
vessel for a time, owing to the presence of mucus. The normal
reaction is slightly acid, owing to the presence of acid phosphate
of Soda, uric and hippuric acids. After meals it may be neutral
or alkaline. The normal specific gravity varies also, from 1.015
to I.O2O, always low when an increased quantity is passed, and
high when the quantity is diminished. The odor is peculiarly
aromatic, and varies according to the food eaten, smelling of
garlic or onions after eating these vegetables. -
PLATE LXI.-Chest Expansion and Spinal Stimuli.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 671
There are certain organic and inorganic substances held in
solution in the urine. These, of course, are drawn from the
blood. There pass about three to six hundred grains of urea
daily, containing uric acid from 6 to I2 grains; urates of sodium,
ammonium, potassium, calcium and magnesium from 9 to 14
grains; and of phosphates of sodium, etc., from 12 to 45 grains,
and the chlorides of sodium, etc., from 150 to 240 grains daily.
The following methods of testing the urine are regarded as
standard:
I. Quantitative Test for Urea by the Hypobromite of
Sodium (Davy Method.)—Fill a graduated glass tube one-third
full of mercury, and add one-half drachm of the twenty-four
hours' urine; then fill the tube evenly full with a saturated solu-
tion of hypobromite of sodium, and close it immediately with the
thumb; invert the tube and place its open end beneath a saturated
solution of chloride of potassium. The mercury flows out and is
replaced by the solution of salt; nitrogen gas is disengaged from
the urea in the upper part of the tube. Each cubic inch of gas
represents o.645 grain of urea in the half drachm, from which the
amount passed in twenty-four hours may be calculated.
Urifle containing an excess of urates and uric acid on cooling
precipitates them, viz.: “brickdust deposits” in “pot de chambre.”
Heat dissolves them to a certain extent.
II. Test for Urates and Uric Acid by Nitric Acid.—Nitric
acid deprives the soluble neutral urates of their bases, and pro-
duces at first a faint, milky precipitate of amorphous acid urates;
adding more nitric acid, the still less soluble red crystals of uric
acid, resembling cayenne pepper, are deposited. Put a small
quantity of nitric acid in a test tube, and pour the urine carefully
down the sides of the tube upon it, and a zone of yellowish red
uric acid and altered coloring matter will form at their union,
and a dense, milky zone of acid urates above this, which, how-
ever, dissolve upon agitation. (See also Albumen Test.)
III. Quantitative Test for Uric Acid by Nitric Acid.—To
three ounces of the twenty-four hours' urine (after being slightly
acidulated, boiled and filtered while hot) add one-tenth as much
nitric acid; place in a cool place for twenty-four hours, then col-
lect the deposit of uric acid on a weighed filter, wash it thor-
oughly, and dry at 212 deg. F. The increased weight represents
the uric acid in part excreted, approximately.
IV. Test for the Earthy and Alkaline Phosphates by the
Magnesium Fluid.—Heat or liquor potassae increases the
672 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cloudiness caused by earthy calcium and magnesium phosphates.
Acetic or nitric acid clears it by dissolving them. To two ounces
of urine add one-third as much of the following solution: Take
magnesii sulph., ammonii chloridi puri, liquor ammoniae, each
one part; aqua destil., eight parts. If the precipitate has a milky,
cloudy appearance, the quantity of phosphates is normal, and if
creamy, the phosphates are in excess. -
V. Test for the Chlorides by Nitrate of Silver.—To a con-
venient quantity of urine add a small amount of nitric acid, to
prevent the formation of the phosphates and other salts of silver;
filter this, if cloudy; add to this one drop of a solution of nitrate
of silver (I part to 8), and the precipitate of white, cheesy lumps
of chloride of silver denotes that the amount of chlorides are
normal; if, however, only a faint milkiness occurs, the chlorides
are diminished.
VI. Test for Mucus by Acetic Acid and Liquor Iodi. Comp.
—Mucus alone is not visible, but causes cloudiness, from having
entangled mucus or pus corpuscles, epithelium, granules of sodi-
um urate, crystals of oxalate of lime, and uric acid in various
amounts. Add to the urine a little acetic acid, or in addition a
few drops of liquor iodi. comp., when threads and bands of mucin
are made visible. The addition of nitric acid dissolves them.
VII. Test for Albumen by Heat and Nitric Acid.—Slightly
acidulate the urine, if necessary, by addition of nitric or acetic
acid, and boil. This causes a white deposit of coagulated albu-
men, which is not dissolved by nitric acid, unless the acid is in
excess. Nitric acid causes a white deposit of coagulated albu-
men, which is dissolved if a large excess of acid be added. A
delicate test is to put the nitric acid in the tube first, and then
gradually pour the urine down the side of the tube upon it, when
a white zone or ring of coagulated albumen appears. (See Tests
III., IV., XI., XIII.) -
VIII. Test for Albumen by Picric Acid (Saturated, Watery
Solution).-Pour a quantity of urine into a test tube, and add the
picric acid solution, drop by drop, and, as it passes through the
urine it is followed by an opaque white cloud if albumen be pres–
ent. The test is very striking and beautiful. If cloudiness ap-
pear some time after, instead of at the time, it shows nothing.
This test will not detect as small an amount of albumen as heat or
nitric acid.
IX. Nitric-Magnesian Test for Albumen.—The fluid is pre-
pared by mixing one part of pure nitric acid with five parts of a
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 673
saturated solution of the sulphate of magnesium, and filtering.
One drachm of the reagent is poured into a perfectly clean test-
tube; the urine should be allowed to trickle slowly down upon
the fluid; if albumen be present in an amount as small as one one-
hundredth of one per cent., this test will show a compact, dense,
white layer. This is one of the best and most reliable tests for
albumen.
X. Quantitative Test for Albumen (Approximately).-Add
a few drops of nitric acid to a proportion of the urine, and boil it;
set this away for twenty-four hours, and the proportionate depth
of the resulting deposit is the comparative indication, viz.: one-
fourth, one-half, etc. For minute traces of albumen, Millard's
fluid may be used. It is a delicate test, and requires care. The
fluid consists of a glacial carbolic acid (95 per cent.), two
drachms; pure acetic acid, seven drachms; liquor potassae, two
O1111CeS.
XI. Test for Blood by Heat and Nitric Acid.—Heat or nitric
acid causes deposit of albumen, with the coloring matter changed
to a dirty brown. -
XII. Test for Blood by Heat and Caustic Potash (Heller's).
—Heat the urine and add the caustic of potash, and heat again.
The phosphates are thus precipitated, taking with them the col-
oring matter of the blood, which imparts a dirty, yellowish red
color to the sediment viewed by reflected light, and when seen
by transparent light gives a splendid blood-red color. Neither
the coloring matter of the blood nor that of the bile is precipi-
tated with the phosphates, so that coloration of urine which shows
this reaction can not be ascribed to the presence of the latter
pigments. When the quantity of blood in the urine is very
large it is of a dark-brownish red, and after standing forms a
coagulum at the bottom of the vessel. Caution.—Heat or nitric
acid causes coagulation of the albumen in pus.
XIII. Test for Pus by Liquor Potassae.—Add to the urine
an equal volume of liquor potassae (or preferably to its deposit
from standing), and when well mixed a viscid, gelatinous or fluid
mass is formed, which pours like the white of an egg or jelly.
XIV. Test for Bile by “Fuming” or Red Nitric Acid.—
Allow a specimen of urine and a few drops of “red fuming” nitric
acid to gradually intermingle on a porcelain dish, and a “play of
colors,” green, blue, violet, red and yellow, or brown, occurs if
biliary coloring matter be present.
XV. Test for Bile Pigment by Pure Hydrochloric Acid
674 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
(Heller's).-Put into a test tube about 1.6 fluid drachm of pure
hydrochloric acid, and add to it, drop by drop, just sufficient
urine to distinctly color it. The two are mixed. Then drop
down the sides of the test tube pure nitric acid, which will under-
lie the mixture of hydrochloric acid and urine. At the point of
contact between the mixture and the colorless nitric acid a hand-
some “play of colors” appears. If the underlying nitric acid is
now stirred with a glass rod, the set of colors which were super-
imposed upon one another will appear alongside of each other
in the entire mixture, and should be studied by transmitted light.
If the hydrochloric acid, on addition of the biliary urine, is col-
ored reddish yellow, the coloring matter is bilirubin; if it is col-
ored green, it is biliverdin.
XVI. Test for Sugar by Liquor Potassae and Heat
(Moore's).-Add to the urine half its volume of liquor potassae.
(Caution.—This may give a white, flaky precipitate of the earthy
phosphates, which should be removed by filtering.) Now boil.
This causes, first, a yellowish-brown color, becoming darker if
much sugar is present, due to glucic, and finally to melassic acid.
XVII. Test for Sugar by Submitrate of Bismuth, Liquor
Potassae and Heat.—Add to the urine half its volume of liquor
potassae, and then a little bismuth submitrate, shake and thor-
oughly boil. The presence of sugar reduces the salt, and black
metallic bismuth is deposited; or, if but little sugar, a gray
deposit occurs. (Caution.—Albumen must be absent.)
XVIII. Test for Sugar by a Solution of Cupric Sulphate,
Liquor Potassae and Heat (Tromer's).-Add to the urine a few
drops of a solution of cupric sulphate, and then its own volume
of liquor potassae. (Caution.—On first addition a light greenish
precipitate occurs, which, on further addition of the reagent, if
sugar or certain other organic matters are dissolved, becomes a
transparent blue liquid.) Now boil, and a yellowish precipitate
of hydrated cupric suboxide, occurring at once, denotes the pres-
ence of sugar. (Caution.—Albumen must be absent.)
XIX. Quantitative Test for Sugar by Pavy's Solution: To-
wit, Take cupric sulphate, gr. 3 IO; neutral potassic tartrate, gr.
64o; caustic potash, gr. 1,280; distilled water, fl. oz. 20 (keep
corked).-Take of Pavy's Solution, recently prepared, 200 minims
or a multiple of this quantity, and boil in a porcelain dish; while
boiling, add minim by minim, from a measured portion of the
twenty-four hours' urine, and it gives a yellowish precipitate of
hydrated cupric suboxide, if sugar be present. Note carefully
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 675
the gradual disappearance of the blue color, and when completed
(best determined by looking through the margin of the fluid
against the white porcelain dish), from the amount of urine used,
determine the amount of sugar passed daily, the quantity of
uline containing one grain of sugar being just sufficient to
reduce the 200 minims of the cupric solution.
XX. Quantitative Test for Sugar by Fermentation and Spe
cific Gravity.—Take two measured specimens from the twenty-
four hours' urine, and to one add a little yeast. Place each speci-
men in a temperature of 75 deg. to 80 deg. F.; in twenty-four
hours, fermentation having destroyed the sugar in the one con-
taining the yeast, the difference in the specific gravity of the two
specimens expresses the number of grains each ounce of the
urine contained, approximately. :
XXI. Whitney's Reagent (a solution of ammonia-cupric
sulphate)—Volumetric Test Solution for Glucose, from the
Laboratory of Lewis Chemical Company, New York. This is
the most convenient preparation, as well as a most reliable test
for sugar. Full directions on each package. Enough for thirty-
five tests for $1.00, with test-tube pipe and all in a compact form.
Secure this by all means. We have tried it. -
CONGESTION OF THE KIDNEYs.
This means an increased amount of blood in the vessels of
the kidneys; when arterial, it is called active congestion; when
venous, it is called passive congestion, and is characterized by
pain, frequent desire for urination, scanty, high colored, con-
taining albumen or blood. The kidneys are generally enlarged,
increased in weight and redness, showing points of vascularity,
corresponding to the malpighian corpuscles or bodies, and some-
times an ecchymosed condition. A catarrhal condition of the
ducts are usually common, shedding their epithelium.
The causes are generally attributed to “taking cold,” or
from passing some irritating substance from the kidney, such as
turpentine, copaiba, cantharides, nitrate of silver, carbolic acid,
and even chlorate of potash. This occurs also during eruptive
fevers, continued fevers, or injuries of the kidneys—traumatic.
If traumatic or mechanical, and continues for some time, there is
an increase of connective tissue, and consequent induration,
when contraction results, and is generally followed by a disease
known as “Bright’s” Disease of the Kidneys.
676 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
The active variety is characterized by pain in the kidneys,
and over and around, and usually in, the upper lumbar region,
and following down the ureters into the bladder, producing irri-
tability of the bladder, pain in the genitalia, a constant pressing
desire to urinate, but not generally pain during act of urination.
The urine is high colored, and occasionally bloody, with fibrin,
casts and albumen. Constitutional symptoms are, headache,
slight nausea, sometimes vomiting, and a general feeling of un-
easiness and discomfort. If not arrested, inflammation ensues,
with its consequences. The passive form is usually accompanied
with lung or heart trouble, although it may be masked, which
may be followed by a dropsical condition; scanty, high colored
urine, with more or less albumen therein.
THE TREATMENT.
The early recognition of either of the above conditions, with
the proper treatment, results in better satisfaction as to conse-
quences than when discovered after the tissues are broken down.
The renal splanchnic, influenced by manipulations at the twelfth
dorsal area, is the starting point for effective results of Oste-
opathic treatment. It must not be forgotten that all sources of
irritation should be looked after. All sorts of stimulants should
be withdrawn, medication given up, and complete reliance placed
on natural agencies to properly adjust the system to itself. In-
stead of taxation of the digestive system, it should be sparingly
indulged, and due regard had to pure water. The use of the
popular springs’ water for kidney troubles need not be consid-
ered, although may be used if desired by patient, yet there is
nothing better than clear, pure water in any condition of the
system, as it holds the elements in solution, and constitutes about
seventy per cent. of the fluids of the body. A free use of it will
not be amiss. -
The patient should be in a recumbent position, so that access
may be had to the back, and the dorsal muscles should be so
manipulated as to remove all undue contractility. The lumbar
area deserves special attention, for in the region of the twelfth
dorsal we reach terminal filaments that communicate forces to the
kidneys. The pressure should be firm, steady, upward, and out-
ward, and embracing all of the lumbar area, increased by lifting
the limbs and pressing strongly on the sides of the lumbar spines
with thumb and fingers of one hand while raising the limbs, as
directed elsewhere. The patient lying on either side, this treat-
ment may be made by pulling one limb at a time backward, and
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 677
at the same time pressing against the spine in the lumbar region,
letting the pressure be lowered about an inch each pull back of
the limb. These movements should be slowly done. The
kneading and the vibratory movements will be applicable in this
affection. Due regard to the general circulation, and means to .
promote it, should not be neglected. In the chronic form, where
albumen is seen in the urine, due regard should be had to freeing
the venous circulation in the lower extremities. Where there is
hemorrhage, it will be excellent practice to restrain the amount
of pressure of blood in the kidneys by cording the lower limb, on
either side, tight enough to prevent the return of the venous
blood, for half an hour or so every day. Leave the cord on until
the whole limb is filled with blood, and it looks dark and tight,
then suddenly remove the cord and manipulate the limb upwards
until the natural color returns. This relieves pressure of blood
in the kidneys, promotes aeration of the blood in the surface, and
gives other organs rest. This is called the hemaspasia process
of cure. Many chronic and acute affections are relieved thereby,
when properly applied. Rheumatism, epilepsy and paralysis
have been successfully cured thereby. It is a means of “flushing”
capillaries and forcing onward the obstructed flow of blood and
other fluids, when all other means had failed. It is well to have
plenty of arrows in your quiver when enemies are present. The
cording of the arms successively may also be resorted to with
equally satisfactory results. The atrophied condition of limbs
is greatly benefited by the use of hemaspasia.
Study the character of the case, the conditions, necessities,
kind of treatment needed in any given case, and utilize it for the
benefit of the afflicted. It is the business of the physician to cure
his patient, if possible, and he is not discharging his duty in
ignoring any means necessary to the cure of the case, that another
doctor might have used and succeeded. What “might have been
done” comes too late, when death shall have closed the avenues
to the soul. The manipulations alluded to will generally be
sufficient to restore to health the affections of the kidneys, if
resorted to in time, and many a case has been restored when all
other means have been tried and failed to relieve. Osteopathy is
a wonderful means of restoration in such cases.
678 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ACUTE PARENCHYMATOUS NEPHRITIS.
SYNONYM. Bright's Disease. -
This is an acute inflammation of the uriniferous tubes, char-
acterized by scanty, high colored urine, usually smoky colored,
attended with more or less fever, perhaps dropsy, a constant
nervous phenomenon, resulting from uraemic poisoning of the
blood.
The pathological conditions are: engorged, swollen, more or
less vascular condition of the kidneys, with red color of the organ
itself, and in the chronic stage remains red, large, especially the
cortex; the tubules are engorged and filled with epithelium, blood
corpuscles, and fibrin. The capsule becomes easily detached, and
is more opaque than normal.
The symptoms are a gradually developing dropsical condi-
tion, anaemia, dyspnoea, weakness, which, however, usually
begins suddenly. There are generally fever, nausea, and violent
and persistent vomiting, dull pain over and in the kidneys, fol-
lowing the ureters, with frequent desire to urinate; diarrhoea,
skin harsh and dry, pulse quick, tense and full. Very soon
dropsy appears, the eyelids and face become puffy, swollen, and a
general oedema of the extremities ensues, and, if following scar-
latina, there are from the start great pallor and general debility.
The uraemic symptoms may develop any time during the attack.
The urine is of high specific gravity, and looks like the washings
of beef. Albumen is present in large quantities, and the micro-
scope reveals casts of the uriniferous tubules, blood corpuscles,
uric acid, urates, and oxalate crystals, and epithelium. The
duration is usually about four weeks.
The complications may be pericarditis, pleuritis, peritonitis,
pneumonitis, uraemia, retention and decomposition of the urea
in the blood. It affects both kidneys, whereas acute nephritis
may only affect one. The history of the disease reveals the
nature of it, and distinguishes it from that of albuminuria.
The prognosis is usually favorable. The patient should be
enjoined from exercise, taking absolute rest, and abstaining from
food or stimulants. Water should constitute the only drink
used.
THE TREATMENT.
Manipulations from the occiput to the coccyx are needed
once a day, especially in the lower dorsal and the lumbar area,
using slow, steady pressure and movements, as well as move-
PLATE LXII.-To Stretch Chest Muscles and Cord.

*
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 68I
ment of muscles upward and outward, taking off the pressure
from heart and lungs, then using vibratory manipulations over
loin area for several minutes at each treatment. Bending the
spine strongly backward while lying on the side, using fingers as
fulcrums and limb as lever, treat upward from sacro-lumbar
junction. A mild general treatment should be made at least
every day in acute attacks of this affection. The bathing in warm
water, wrapping patient in a blanket, should receive daily atten-
tion in this affection. Put all the work on the skin and lungs
possible. The rest of the kidneys is essential, therefore take off
the pressure. The renal splanchnic is to be suddenly shocked
each treatment, as shown elsewhere in plate. The patient should
have his mind as much as possible removed from his condition.
The dread of Bright's Disease of the Kidneys is not to be thought
of, if avoidable.
PARENCHYMATOUS NEPHRITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Chronic Bright's disease of the kidneys;
croupous nephritis; chronic tubal nephritis; chronic albumi-
nuria; the large, white kidney.
This disease is due to inflammation of the cortical and tubu-
lar structure of the kidneys, and is characterized by albuminous
urine, dropsy and increasing anaemic attacks and acute uraemia.
It rarely occurs after forty.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. A large white, or yellowish
smooth white kidney, usually twice its normal size, and the cap-
sule nowhere adherent to the organ. No appreciable alteration
in the medullary substance, the color being normal. The convo-
luted tubes are irregularly dilated and thickened, and filled with
broken-down granulated epithelium and fibrinous casts, and in
pronounced cases there is fatty degeneration of the tubular epi-
thelium, a migration and multiplication of fatty transformations,
the product of the increased pressure of the veins, especially the
fluid that exudes therefrom. -
SYMPTOMs. It comes on slowly, and is seldom recognized
until the dropsical appearance sets in. This is first noticed under
the eyes and in the face, and extends all over the body, producing
difficulty of breathing, due to accumulation of water in the chest.
The patient becomes pale, debilitated; cardiac palpitation, head-
ache, vertigo, difficult or defective vision; urine scanty, high-
682 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
colored, albuminous, showing under the microscope tube casts
and granular epithelium; fatty degeneration occurs, fatty tube
casts and oil globules increase. Irritable bladder is a very com-
mon accompaniment, and constant. The retinal changes are
peculiarly characteristic. Many cases are easily diagnosticated
by the ophthalmoscope. The changes include the serous swell-
ing of the disc and surrounding retina, hemorrhagic extravasa-
tions, dirty, white splotches, representing fatty degeneration, and
dilatation of the veins and capillaries, with fatty degeneration and
sometimes hyaline thickening of their walls.
The course of the disease is not alike progressively down-
ward, for there will be periods of apparent recoveries, when no
complaint will be made, periods of remission, following very
severe attacks. It is a most treacherous affection, for when the
patient and friends have the most buoyant hope of recovery, all
of a sudden there is an acute uraemia, which results fatally in a
short time. The ordinary treatment has for its object the check-
ing of the waste of albumen by the use of internal medications,
constantly fighting effects, leaving the causes untouched, to un-
dermine the vital forces. This almost universally fails to ame-
liorate or to cure a single case.
- THE TREATMENT.
It is most surely a nervous affection, originating in the
medulla oblongata, due to pressure at the origin of the renal
splanchnic, which emerges from the twelfth dorsal vertebra, but
having its origin in the medulla. Reflex influences only cure this
congestion, and the effects cease. Neither astringents, diuretics,
nor diaphoretics do the work. Opiates arrest tissue change, and
are therefore injurious. Give the kidneys rest. Take off the
pressure and send in healthy arterial blood. This is the only
remedy.
INTERSTITIAL NEPHRITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Sclerosis of the kidneys; contracted kidneys;
small, red kidney; gouty kidney.
This is a chronic process, resulting ultimately in a shrunken
kidney, in which there has been extensive destruction of the
tubular substance and overgrowth of intertubular connective tis-
sue. It is characterized by frequent voiding of large amounts of
pale, albuminous urine of low specific gravity, and disorders of
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 683
the gastro-intestinal, as well as the nervous systems, with a strong
tendency to cardiac hypertrophy and changes in the vessels.
There are cases, however, in which albumen is never found in the
urine. It is a disease of middle life, coming on from forty to
sixty years of age. - -
CAUSEs. This affection is usually the result of long-con-
tinued worry and anxiety. Uric acid in the blood is most gener-
ally the prime cause, and this is due to capillary congestion and
venous obstruction to the return circulation. Alcoholic bever-
ages and the use of drugs and medicines doubtless contribute
their influence to its production, and are largely responsible for
the large increase of this affection. The most common of these
agents are salicylic acid and kindred drugs. -
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. A reduction in size of the kid-
ney, the capsule becoming thickened, opaque and adherent. The
surface of the kidney becomes granular, with cysts of various
sizes, transparent in color, scattered irregularly over the surface.
The tissue becomes tough, shown on section to be resistant; the
cortical substance is thin, caused from atrophy, presenting only
a line or two in thickness, while the connective tissue is greatly
thickened, compressing the tubules into mere threads, and the
glomeruli are grouped together in bunches, due to the wasting
of intermediate tubes. The color varies from a darkish brown to
a yellowish gray, according to the amount of blood in the organ.
The left side of the heart is generally affected, hypertrophied, and
there is generally a hypertrophied condition of the muscular
walls of the arterioles throughout the body, which sooner or later
undergo fatty degeneration. This occurs to a greater or less
extent in every tissue in the body, and sometimes followed by
atrophy, as is a common thing observable in the retinal tissue—
a sclerosis in the nerve-fiber layer, which is commonly denomi-
nated retinitis albuminuria. It is also stated that “ganglionic
centers” undergo fatty degeneration and atrophy.
SYMPTOMs. It is insidious in its approach, there being no
special characteristic, early indicatory symptoms whereby it
can be certainly diagnosed. Cardiac troubles and frequent pass-
ages of urine of a pale color should be looked upon as suspicious
indications of approaching trouble in the kidneys. Albumen may
or may not be present at all times, but there are generally epi-
thelial cells and hyaline casts.
No dropsy occurs, except a slight puffiness under the eyes,
oedema of conjunctivae, and disorders of vision, with forcible
684 . - osteoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cardiac action and high arterial tension. Attacks of vertigo,
headache, disordered vision, epistaxis and dyspeptic conditions,
with progressive anaemia, persistent dyspepsia, occasional vom-
iting, regardless of food; stupor, drowsiness, violent itching of the
skin, tremors, convulsions, epileptic seizures or apoplectic
attacks; the body weight declines, the skin becomes dry and
scurfy, the strength fails, shortness of breath ensues, and the
patient dies of uraemia.
COMPLICATIONS. Bronchitis; pneumonitis; pleuritis; peri-
carditis; cardiac hypertrophy.
This disease of the kidneys is usually a protracted one, and as
it becomes more advanced there are added cardiac distress, dysp-
noea, palpitation and reduplication of the first sound. Dimness
of vision is a characteristic symptom, being the first symptom
recognized generally by the ophthalmoscope. Hemorrhages
into the retina are not infrequent, hence sudden blindness.
Auditory disturbances also occur—ringing in the ears, dizziness,
and more or less deafness. * -
PROGNoSIs. Extremely unfavorable.
THE TREATMENT.
Interstitial nephritis is most likely to be confounded with
parenchymatous nephritis. The difference between the two con-
ditions, pathologically, does not necessitate a difference in the
treatment Osteopathically, as the attention is not to be directed
so much to the changes in the structure, as described, as in the
character of the secretions, and even they do not call for any
material change in the treatment, as all treatment should be
directed to the removal of the pressure, which results in the
peculiar changes in the secretions, depending upon the structure
involved. . -
The operator should insist upon mental quietude, and en-
deavor to promote normal circulation of all the fluids in the body,
remembering that chemical changes take place in the various
tissues of the body according to the nature and peculiarity of the
particular tissue involved; and, as the healthfulness of the struc-
ture depends upon the character of the elements in the arterial
blood, due regard should be had not only to keeping the blood
healthy, but to keeping all the channels free through which said
fluid passes. To give drugs with a view to changing the char-
acter of the tissue through which they pass, as an ingredient of
the blood, is to presume more than is possible, and hence the for-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 685
lorn hope that patients manifest when informed they have
Bright's disease.
The only thing that can be done is to remove the obstruc-
tions to the circulation of all of the fluids in all parts of the body.
Begin at the neck, free the venous system there, take off the
pressure from the nerves involved, then see to it that the chest is
free from all pressure on the breathing apparatus (the lungs);
then regulate the action of the liver, bowels, and see to it that the
skin is performing its natural functions; and take off the pressure
from the nerves that especially control the kidneys. See to it that
care and anxiety are removed from your patient. Keep him quiet
and free from anxiety and worry. Coordinate the nerves forces
—take off the pressure everywhere.
AMYLOID KIDNEY.
SYNoNYMs. Waxy kidney; lardaceous kidney.
These peculiar conditions and names applied to diseased
conditions of this organ seem more or less confusing, yet each
pathological condition has its peculiar characteristics, this one
being an infiltration into, or a degeneration of, the very struc-
ture of the blood vessels, in the connective tissue, of which the
degenerative process results, first, in an increase in size, then an
atrophied condition ensues; the deposits of amyloid substance
take place along the renal vessels, so that on section it presents
a homogeneous mass of a lardaceous appearance; then atrophy
takes place. All these changes are due to pressure.
Many complications are liable to be associated with this dis-
ease, but the prominent perceptible changes take place in all of
the rest of the system. The interference of the functions of this
organ is always attended with more or less grave consequences.
The characteristic symptoms are a general wasting away of
the whole system, oedema of the lower extremities, ascites, with
an increased flow of pale, watery urine of low specific gravity,
most generally containing albumen and hyaline casts, these being
transparent. t
The complications are discernible, as each particular patho-
logical condition shows what structure is involved by the condi-
tion of the urine itself generally. There is a liability of an exces-
sive, persistent diarrhea of a watery character, due to the changes
in the intestinal canal. There is, almost always, in this disease,
686 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
associated with it, some suppurative disease. The differentiation
is made by the history of the case and the peculiar characteristics
of symptoms presented in the various structures involved.
These diagnostic symptoms determine the prognosis largely,
for when the system presents such a degenerative condition as
that mentioned, results are only a question of time. Structural
changes in any secreting or excretory organ can only be regarded
as of a very grave character. The importance of early detection
of the condition, and the proper treatment instituted to restore
to a healthful one, is of the first consideration. The trouble, we
believe, is due to imperfect digestion of carbonaceous material,
due to deficiency of pancreatic secretion, as well as undue and
continuous pressure on the venous system in the kidney or some
vessel carrying the blood from the organ itself.
THE TREATMENT.
The only indication in this case is to remove the obstacle,
and to supply the system with the elements thus destroyed, so as
to restore the equilibrium of forces, due to disturbance of, or defi-
ciency of, the molecules. This can do no good without a proper
restoration of the normal circulation of all of the fluids in the
body, through their natural channels, which is to be effected by
repeatedly removing the pressure and furnishing proper food.
PYELITIS_SUPPURATIVE NEPHRITIS.
This is a suppurative inflammatory condition of the pelvis of
the kidney, due to a catarrhal condition, which is a result of
obstruction of capillary stasis of blood. There are lumbar pains,
irritability of the kidneys and bladder, the urine alkaline, or neu-
tral in reaction, milky in appearance, and if pus has formed, fever
is present and exhaustion rapidly ensues, and pus will be found
in the secretion voided.
Obstruction of the ureters by renal calculi; pressure from a
tumor or the prolonged use of the bromides tend to produce this
condition. It may result from rheumatism or as a sequela of
infectious diseases. The pustular condition is due to the increase
of the alkaline constituents of the blood, due to disturbance by
pressure or otherwise, of the pneumogastric division of the
nervous system. The lack of equalization of forces is the cause
of these disturbances in the connective tissue involved.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 687
THE TREATMENT.
The rational method of treatment is found only in the restor-
ation of coordination of these forces. To lay down any specific
course of manipulations would not be proper, for treatment does
not consist so much in the manipulations of certain parts as it
does in how these are made. Routinism is the bane of all treat-
ment in all schools—automatism. To back down and refuse to
treat a case simply because some one has said “there is no cure
in Osteopathy for it,” shows the deficiency of mentality or prac-
tical application necessary to use the science, or a conces-
sion that it is not adequate to the performance of the object
assigned. If there is no cure for a thing, why say anything
about it? If all diseased structure is due to obstructed circulation,
how to take off the pressure seems to be the sine qua non. Hence
the thing to do is to devise means to take off the pressure. These
pathological conditions would not exist if the physician under-
stood the methods used by Osteopaths, so as to remedy the trou-
ble before the degenerative processes had set in and produced
structural changes that make reparation impossible. There are,
however, many conditions pronounced hopeless by the medical
side of the profession that yield to this system favorably.
ACUTE URAEMIA.
SYNONYMs. Uraemic poisoning; uraemic intoxication;
uraemic coma; uraemic convulsions. - -
DEFINITION. A group of nervous phenomena, which occa-
sionally develop during the course of acute or chronic Bright's
disease, and other maladies, the result of the retention or accu-
mulation in the blood of an excrementitious material, supposed to
be urea, the flow of urine being either normal, lessened, or
increased. -
CAUSES. Suppression of urine, from acute or chronic
Bright's disease, probably more frequent in chronic parenchy-
matous nephritis; cystic, tubular, or cancerous kidney; the puer-
peral state; operations on the uterus, bladder, urethra, or rectum.
SYMPTOMs. Uraemic intoxication is the result of the failure
of the kidneys to perform their normal function of eliminating
some one of all of the poisonous elements of the urine. The tox-
aemia may develop suddenly, by a convulsive seizure followed by
coma, or slowly and gradually. Usually the attack is preceded
688 OSTEOPATH Y ILLUSTRATED. .
by a decrease in the urinary secretion and slight or marked
Oedema in various parts of the body; although it must be borne
in mind that in rare instances, during, or immediately prior to,
the appearance of the uraemic phenomena, the normal urinary
flow has been largely exceeded. The acute outbreak may mani-
fest itself in a variety of ways.
Gastro-Intestinal Variety.—The patient suddenly experiences
attacks of vertigo, pallor of face, nausea and vomiting, with fever,
the temperature varying between IOO and Io.3, pulse tense and
rapid, respiration hurried, and the urine scanty, with low specific
gravity; unless symptoms are promptly relieved convulsions may
occur, followed by coma and death, or drowsiness supervene, fol-
lowed by coma, which is really nothing but a profound sleep.
Rarely an acute maniacal outbreak follows the gastro-intestinal
symptoms.
Convulsive Variety.—Without any appreciable prodromes,
epileptiform convulsions, with or without loss of consciousness.
The convulsions may consist of a single paroxysm, or a succes-
sion of fits may follow orie another at interval of a few minutes
or several hours, the patient in a condition of more or less pro-
found insensibility during the intervals. The fits almost exactly
simulate true epilepsy. In this variety the temperature is high,
from Io9 to IO6 or more, the pulse rapid, with or without tension,
the respirations quickened. Coma followed by death is a very
common ending of this variety of uraemia, or after a profound
sleep of hours the patient gradually recovers his usual health.
Alcoholic excesses are responsible for many of these attacks.
Cerebral Variety, or Uraemic Coma-Develops either grad-
ually, with an increasing drowsiness associated with headache,
and irritability of temper (mild mania). Nausea, vomiting, and
rise of temperature, often reaching IO5, rarely IOZ, with rapid,
full pulse, or the patient may fall suddenly into a condition of
profound coma, the symptoms closely resembling an apoplectic
stroke, except the high temperature. Uraemic coma is always
accompanied with rise of temperature and stertor. “The stertor
is peculiar; it is not the ‘snoring' of apoplexy, but a sharp, hissing
sound, produced by the rush of expired air against the teeth or
hard palate.” (Loomis.) The respirations are accelerated, the
pulse rapid, but minus tension. This variety may suddenly ter-
minate fatally with a convulsion, or a deepening coma with pros-
tration and cold, wet skin, with Oedema of the lungs, or, rarely,
gradual recovery. .
PLATE LXIII.a.-Chest Expansion and Back Treatment.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 691
DIAGNOSIS. Uraemic conditions closely resemble a number
of conditions in which convulsions and coma are prominent
symptoms. Much valuable assistance is obtained in the diag-
nosis by a knowledge of the condition of the kidneys. Always
obtain a specimen of urine at once and subject to an albumen test
at least. - -
Another valuable aid is the temperature record. Acute out-
breaks of uraemia are always associated with a rise of tempera-
ture, the result of the irritation of the heart centers and not due
to an increased arterial pressure.
Cerebral apoplexy may be mistaken for uraemic coma, or the
reverse. The chief points of distinction are, in the latter the
attack is usually in patients suffering from dropsy, and that the
coma is not sudden in its appearance, but is generally preceded
by other nervous phenomena, such as headache, vertigo, dimness
of vision, obstinate vomiting, and convulsions. Again, the urae-
mic stertor is a sharp, hissing sound, while that of apoplexy is
“snoring.” Apoplexy is followed by paralysis; uraemic coma is ,
not.
An epileptic seizure is preceded by the sharp cry and extreme
pallor of the face, the countenance being dusky in uraemic con-
vulsions. -
PROGNoSIs. A very grave condition. The prognosis
depends upon the amount of retained poison, the length of time
it has been retained, and the condition of the organs of elimi-
nation. -
THE TREATMENT.
Regulate the vaso-motor nervous system, then give a gen-
eral treatment, using considerable time in the manipulations
over and in the region of the renal splanchnics, vibratory, and
kneading deeply. Stretch the serrati muscles in the mesentery
plexus of nerves by drawing the body well backward and press-
ing strongly against the sides of spines at the same time. The
treatment should be thoroughly done each time, and not in
haste. These cases require care, as well as thoroughness. The
mesentery circulation is usually at fault, especially the venous.
692 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CYSTITIS.
SYNoNYM. Catarrh of the bladder.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the mucous membrane
lining the urinary bladder, acute or chronic in its course, and of
either a catarrhal, croupous, or diphtheritic character; character-
ized by rigors, moderate fever, hypogastric pain, frequent but
scanty micturition, and severe vesical tenesmus, the urine con-
taining pus (pyuria).
CAUSEs. Acute Variety.—Long retention of urine; foreign
bodies in the bladder, pyelitis; urethritis; blows over the pubes;
myelitis, and secondary to fevers or diphtheria. Chronic Va-
riety.—Following the acute variety; retention the result of en-
larged prostate or a urethral stricture; calculi; gout; chronic
Bright's disease.
PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. In acute catarrhal cystitis there
first ensues hyperaemia of the mucous membrane of the entire or
a portion of the bladder, manifested by redness, swelling, and
oedema; followed by an increased secretion of the small glands at
the base of the bladder, and an increased growth and consequent
desduamation of the vesical epithelium, together with a copious
generation of young cells; if the hyperaemia be decided, rupture
of the capillaries and extravasation of blood occur. If the in-
flammation be intense, suppuration of the submucous connective
tissue may result, and ulceration of the mucous membrane per-
mit the submucous abscesses to empty into the bladder; if of a
croupous or diphtheritic character, the morbid anatomy does not
differ from the same variety of inflammations in other mucous
membranes.
In chronic cystitis “thc mucous membrane is thick, blue-
gray in color, and very tough. Muco-pus and viscid mucus are
formed in large quantities upon its surface. The muscular
wall of the bladder may sometimes be half an inch thick, and the
fasciculi give a ribbed appearance to the internal surface, called
the “columnar bladder.” The hypertrophy of chronic cystitis may
be eccentric or concentric. In some cases diverticuli are formed,
in whose walls are dilated and tortuous veins. In nearly all cases
bacteria are found in abundance.” (Loomis.)
SYMPTOMs. Acute Cystitis-The onset is usually abrupt,
by rigors, slight fever, loss of appetite, sleeplessness, a feeling of
depression; frequent micturition, though the urine is only voided
drop by drop, and its passage followed by distressing vesical
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 693
tenesmus, the result of spasm of the bladder; pain over the pubis
and in the iliac regions, of a dull character, at times becoming
sharp and agonizing. Burning along the urethra adds to the
distress of the patient. The urine is cloudy, of an alkaline reac-
tion, and at times is foetid, the microscope showing epithelium,
pus, and red blood corpuscles.
Chronic Cystitis.-The onset is gradual and insidious, and is
excited by Some obstacle to the evacuation of the urine, such as
stricture, the presence of a stone in the bladder, or enlargement
of the prostate gland. There are present dull pain, frequent but
scanty micturition. The urine is alkaline, containing large
amounts of muco-pus or pus; on standing it deposits a thick,
glairy, viscid sediment, in which, under the microscope, triple
phosphates and large pus corpuscles, extremely regular both in
contents and in shape, may be detected. Although the quantity
of urine voided by the patient is small, yet if immediately after
micturition the catheter is used, several ounces of fetid, cloudy,
alkaline urine may be removed. Patients with chronic cystitis
usually present decided constitutional debility and mental depres-
sion. Severe local pain, emaciation, and occasional bloody urine
indicate ulceration of the vesical mucous membrane.
DIAGNOSIS. Pyelitis has lumbar pains following the course
of the ureters, frequent micturition without the severe vesical
tenesmus; the urine, although cloudy, has an acid or neutral
reaction. .
PROGNOSIs. The acute variety is, as a rule, good, being con-
trolled by the cause. The chronic continues for years, and after
hypertrophy of the bladder is incurable.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment should be directed to the spine, from the
eighth down, including the sacrum, and movement of the dorsal
and lumbar muscles outward and upward; while the patient lies
on the side or stomach there should be strong pressure on either
side of the spines and pulling the limbs backward so as to spring
the spine forward, stimulating the abdominal viscera so as to free
the portal venous circulation; then, with the patient lying on
the back, lower limbs flexed so as to thoroughly relax the abdom-
inal muscles, manipulate the lower abdomen by a kneading pro-
cess, vibrating gently, persistently, thoroughly, for several min-
utes, care being taken to have the bladder emptied before treat- o
ment is begun. The congestion being removed by taking off the
694 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
pressure, let the patient rest. Occasionally wash out the blad-
der with warm water, and repeat the manipulations every day, or
even oftener for a few times; then every other day. The bowels
should be regulated, even if the syringe and warm water have to
be used daily. There should be divulsion of the sphincters with
the bivalve or digits if contracture exists there.
INCONTINENCE OF URINE.
This is a most annoying affection, characterized by inability
to hold the urine, involuntary discharge of urine, usually in chil-
dren, and is most troublesome at night, the patient “flooding the
bed” every night. Some are supposed to do so from habit.
Much anxiety on the part of mothers is exercised to prevent it,
and many physicians have tried to cure the so-called habit. The
affection has but one leading characteristic—“an unconscious
discharge of urine during sleep.” It is confined to child life—
occasionally observed in adult life.
The affection is due to irritation of the sympathetic nerve
filaments that supply the mucous membrane of the urethral canal,
or reflexly from an irritable prepuce, due to phymosis, or pro-
static enlargement. The sacral and hypogastric plexuses of the
nervous system control the bladder and urethra, and as the sep-
aration of the motor, from the sacrum, from the sympathetic,
trings into prominence the sensory, relaxation of the sphincter
urine muscle ensues, and the water runs off without stint or limit
only to the point of completely emptying the bladder. The sacral
plexus area is hyperaesthetic, and when the patient lies on the
back the pressure irritates the terminal sacral filaments, reflex
effects follow, the sphincters relax, and the discharge occurs.
Many have recommended elevation of the hips during sleep, and
the only effect of that is to lessen the pressure.
THE TREATMENT.
The patient being a child, let the operator place it on the
table or bed, face down, take hold of both ankles with one hand,
place the other hand on the sides of the sacrum, with the fingers
and thumb spread or applied to either side of the spinous pro-
cesses of the sacrum, raise the feet, pressing at the same time
against the sacrum, move the feet from side to side, then lower
the feet and limbs to the level of the body; then repeat the same
process, placing the fingers a little higher up the sacrum each
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 695
time the thumb and fingers shall have covered the whole lumbar
region as high up as the last dorsal. Then begin low down on
the sacrum with the fingers, and use rapid vibratory movements
upward, following up and covering the same area. This is most
effectual, and many cases are cured in two or three treatments.
It should be repeated every other day, however, until a perfect
cure is effected.
Where the affection is due to phymosis, circumcision should
be performed, and the urethral canal treated with sounds until all
irritation ceases, and this should be followed up with Osteopathic
treatment as well. The Orificial Surgeon and Osteopath are
alike in many things, and the one is sometimes as essential as the
other. They are agreed in this, therefore ought to “walk
together.”
MOVABLE KIDNEY.
SYNoNYMS. Floating kidney; wandering kidney; ectopia
renis. º *
DEFINITION. A condition of the kidney, either congenital
or acquired, in which the tissues around about the organ are so
lax and the renal vessels so elongated as to permit the kidney to
be moved in certain directions, causing a movable tumor in the
abdomen.
CAUSEs. The kidney is normally held in position by the
layer of peritoneum which is attached to the anterior surface of
its adipose capsule. In movable kidney, the adipose tissue in
which the normal kidney is imbedded partly or wholly disap-
pears. The renal vessels are in many cases abnormally long.
Relaxation of the abdominal walls from pregnancy or other
causes. The use of tight corsets or girdles about the waist; vio-
lence; increased weight of the organ from disease; the pressure
of tumors growing in the neighborhood of the kidney; the trac-
tion of hernias. The condition may be congenital or acquired,
more frequently the latter. It is far more frequent in women than
in men. -
SYMProMs. Floating kidney may and often does exist with-
out any noticeable symptoms, the condition being unknown until
accidentally discovered by the physician while making a physical
examination of the abdomen. As a rule, however, patients ex-
perience a heavy, dragging pain in the abdomen, aggravated when
696 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
walking or standing. There are also present gastro-intestinal
symptoms, more or less constant, with melancholia, aggravated
by the mental anxiety the presence of a tumor in the abdomen
causes the patient, in spite of the assurances of the physician that
it is not a cancer. At times, from some unknown or unrecog-
nized cause, the movable kidney swells and becomes very sensi-
tive to the touch, and migrates a considerable distance from its
normal position. Such an occurrence aggravates all the former
symptoms mentioned. This condition has been ascribed to a
twisting of the ureter and consequent retention of the urine in
the pelvis of the kidney, or to localized peritonitis, or to a partial
strangulation of the kidney from compression or twisting of its
blood-vessels. Hysterical symptoms are frequently observed in
women suffering from wandering kidney.
DIAGNoSIs. The possibility of dislocation of the kidney is
to be recollected in determining the nature of obscure tumors
within the abdomen. The late Prof. Austin Flint based the rec-
ognition of this variety of abdominal tumor on the following
diagnostic points: “It is situated in the hypochondriac region.
It has the size and shape of the normal kidney, and this may be
determinable by palpation, which is most advantageously em-
ployed by placing one hand over the lumbar region and the other
in front on the abdominal walls, and then making counter-press-
ure from one hand to the other. It is generally movable, and in
some cases the organ can be restored to its proper situation.”
Other tumors are to be excluded by the absence of their diagnos-
tic characters.
PROGNoSIs. It is a rare occurrence to have a fatal termi-
nation from movable kidney per se.
THE TREATMENT. *
Inasmuch as there is no attachment, in this condition, to the
peritoneum and the adipose capsule, the indications are to be met.
If a relaxed abdominal wall is permitting depression of the kid-
ney, it must be corrected. If a tumor is causing the trouble, it
must be removed. If extreme tenderness exists, that may be
relieved by removing portal congestion, and then require deep
inhalations, and use upward pressure with both hands, from below
upwards, as exhalation takes place, having the patient lie on the
back, with limbs flexed. Treat dorso-lumbar region thoroughly
three times a week, and especially use pressure about the second
lumbar, as the limbs are strongly pressed or drawn backward,
both at the same time; the patient being recumbent, lying on the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 697
face, the arm of the operator placed under both limbs above the
knees, with the thumb and fingers of one hand pressing the spine,
raise the limbs as strongly against said pressure as the patient can
comfortably endure; hold that position for a moment, then swing
the limbs from side to side two or three times, then lower the
limbs on the table, then repeat said move, each time the fingers
being moved down the spine, clear to the lower end of the sacrum.
These processes should be gone through with three times each
week for several weeks, or even months.
RENAL CALCULI.
SYNONYMs. Nephro-lithiasis; gravel; renal colic.
DEFINITION. Renal calculi are concretions formed by the
precipitation of certain substances from the urine, around some
body or substance acting as a nucleus. Their presence may not
be recognized until one or more attempts to pass along the
ureters, when an attack of renal colic results; or, by irritation,
pyelitis is produced; or, more rarely, they are voided by the urine
without exciting any symptoms. By gravel is meant very small
concretions (sand), which are often passed in the urine in large
numbers.
CAUSEs. Occur at all ages; frequent before the fifth year,
and from five to fifteen. Males are more liable than females. A
special liability seems to exist in some families, but the precise
etiology of calculi is not yet determined.
VARIETIES. I. Uric acid, as calculi and gravel, and espe-
cially associated with the gouty diathesis. 2. Urates, chiefly
urate of ammonium ; nearly always in childhood. 3. Oxalate of
lime or mulberry calculus; characterized by hardness, roughness,
and very dark color. 4. Phosphatic calculi form as frequently
in the bladder as in the kidney, and present a chalky or earthy
appearance. 5. Alternating calculi, consisting of alternate lay-
ers of two or more primary deposits.
ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS. In structure, a urinary calcu-
lus usually consists of a central nucleus, surrounded by the body,
and outside of all there may be a phosphatic crust. The nucleus
may or may not be of the same material as the rest of the stone,
sometimes being 'a foreign body, mucus, or blood. A section
generally shows a stratified arrangement, or it may be partly or
completely radiated.
698 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
SYMPTOMs. The clinical signs are those consequent on the
results of their presence, to-wit: renal hemorrhage, renal con-
gestion, inflammation terminating in abscess, pyelitis or pyelo-
nephritis, cystitis, or renal colic. The symptoms begin abruptly,
by severe, agonizing pain in the lumbar region, following the
ureters into the corresponding groin and thigh. Pain and re-
traction of corresponding testicle; also of glans penis. Face pale
and features pinched, the surface cold and damp. Irritability of
the bladder, the urine passing in drops containing some blood.
So severe is the pain at times that the patient may faint or pass
into unconsciousness, or have a general convulsion. If both
ureters are obstructed, uraemic symptoms will arise. The par-
Oxysm usually terminates suddenly after some minutes or hours,
the stone escaping into the bladder. -
PROGNOSIS. Renal calculus is attended with many dangers.
It may produce extensive disorganization of the kidneys, or its
passage along the ureter may prove fatal. If the stone be very
large, or if more than one, the prognosis is graver. Calculus is
a disease very apt to recur. Renal sand (gravel) and small con-
cretions may, after more or less delay, be voided with the urine.
THE TREATMENT.
The operator will direct most of his attention to the relief of
the pain during the passage of the stone. Cause the patient to
breathe deeply, and as exhalation takes place use efforts to knead
the kidneys so as to favor the onward movement of the calculi.
Occasionally stretch the abdominal muscles by pulling the lower
limb or limbs backward, using considerable pressure from the
last dorsal vertebra, and along down through the lumbar region,
thereby fully stretching the abdominal muscles over the mesen-
tery vessels and nerves, taking the precaution to regulate the
circulation of the blood through the vaso-motors. Relief occurs
as soon as the passage of the calculi is effected. The kneading
of the kidneys will be somewhat painful to the patient, but may
be done by being gentle and seizing the opportunities as the
exhalations take place, as the abdominal muscles are then relaxed.
General treatment should be given at intervals of two or three
days, to promote the normal action of the secretory apparatus,
through normal circulation of the blood, which is the natural
preventive of precipitations in the kidneys.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 701
DISEASES OF THE PERITONEUM.
The peritoneum is the serous membrane lining the interior
of the abdominal cavity and surrounding the viscera contained
in it. Beginning at the diaphragm, two layers proceed to the
liver, then separate to inclose that organ, and open out over it and
meet again on the under side and pass on as the gastrohepatic
omentum, to the lesser curvature of the stomach; and meeting
again at its lesser curvature, these two folds embrace the stom-
ach and meet again at its greater curvature, passing down in
front of the small intestine, forming the greater omentum. They
are then reflected upward as far as the transverse colon, which
they inclose, meeting again at the back of the colon, proceeding to
the spine as the transverse mesocolon. Here the two layers
diverge. The upper ascends in front of the pancreas to the under
surface of the diaphragm, the starting point; the lower is reflected
from the spine, over the small intestines, as the mesentery. From
the root of the mesentery, it passes into the pelvis, invests the
upper part of the rectum, and thence reflects on the bladder,
forming between the two (rectum and bladder) the retrovesical
pouch. In women it is reflected from the rectum to the upper
part of the vagina, and thence over the uterus, from which it
proceeds to the bladder. From the bladder it passes up the an-
terior wall of the abdomen to the diaphragm. It completely
envelops the stomach, liver, spleen, first portion of duodenum, the
jejunum, ileum, transverse colon, sigmoid flexure, the upper part
of the rectum, the uterus, and the ovaries.
PERITONITIS INFLAMMATION.
Inflammation of the peritoneum may be either acute or
chronic. It is characterized by fever, intense pain, tenderness,
tympanitis, vomiting and prostration. It may be limited to any
part, or it may involve the entire membrane. Inflammation of
this membrane, as of all other parts of the system, results from
congestion, or impeded capillary circulation. It may be caused
by severe cold, protracted irritation, pressure or blows upon the
abdomen, penetrating wounds, inflammation of intestines, or
any organ that it covers; perforation of the stomach, intestines,
702 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
gall bladder, urinary bladder, vermiform appendix, or surround-
ing parts; septicaemia, pyaemia, erysipelas, or hernia, or injuries
during parturition. The chonic form may result from tubercu-
losis, scrofula, cancer, albuminuria, sclerosis of liver.
The inflammation is the result of the arrest of the normal
secretions of the membrane—the congestion of the capillaries—
often to the extent of bursting and consequent extravasation of
the tissues. The fibrinous exudation is of a dull and opaque
character, and is adhesive, gluing the parts together. This is the
stage of adhesive inflammation. If an exudation of serous fluid en-
sues, and is poured out into the peritoneal cavity (several gallons
of which may occur), it is termed exudative inflammation. In
this kind of inflammation, if recovery takes place, the fluid is
absorbed, largely, but the unabsorbed portions form adhesions
between the membranes of the different abdominal organs, often
causing deformity of the parts involved. In the local form, where
the inflammation is circumscribed, the same general conditions
ensue, and results are the same, although circumscribed, of
course. The chronic form follows the acute, or is associated with
Bright's disease of the kidneys, sclerosis, scrofula, or tuberculosis.
The membrane may be irregularly thickened or opaque, and ad-
hesion having taken place in various parts restricts their
action, and where encapsulation ensues, pus may form.
SYMPTOMs. Acute Form.—When idiopathic, the onset is
usually sudden, ushered in by a chill of more or less severity and
duration, followed by high fever, wiry pulse and tense, severe
pain of a cutting or boring character, extreme tenderness over
abdomen, so that the slightest touch of the abdomen intensifies
the pain. The knees are flexed, and every effort of the sufferer is
made to relax the abdominal muscles; decubitus ensues, the
patient slips down in bed; intense distension of the abdomen is
present, rigid, tympanitic, from the effusion; the bowels usually
constipated; shortness of breathing, on account of the diaphragm
being crowded up against the lungs, even as high up as the third
or fourth rib, causing compression of lungs and heart, or dis-
placement, and of spleen as well, and liver. Appetite is greatly
impaired, nausea and vomiting are almost a constant feature,
hiccough a not infrequent annoyance on account of the irritation
of the terminal ends of phrenic nerve filaments that end in the
under' surface of the diaphragm. In some cases, with great
inflammatory conditions, the temperature will be less than nor-
mal in the acute form. If from extension of the inflammation,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 703
the pains are gradually increased and all of the symptoms are
magnified; and if from perforation, all of the symptoms of shock
€11S116. ---
Under ordinary conditions and circumstances these symp-
toms continue for several days, then begin to decline, and a
tedious convalescence takes place; or all of the symptoms sud-
denly grow worse, strength fails, surface becomes cold, pulse
more rapid, collapse, with hypocritic face, anxious expression,
pinched features, sunken eyes, drawn upper lip, pupils suddenly
dilate, and death closes the scene.
Chronic Form.—There may be irregular chills, fever, sweats,
distended abdomen, with constipation alternating with diarrhea,
diffused tenderness, localized painful spots and hardness, colicky
pains during digestion of food, gradual or rapid emaciation, dull-
ness of the lower abdomen on percussion, from the presence of
encysted fluid.
Too much care can not be exercised in diagnosing this sort
of inflammation. It is nearly always associated with diseases and
accidents of the abdomen, and should be readily differentiated
from diseases of other tissues or other organs, such as acute gas-
tritis, acute enteritis, rheumatism of abdominal muscles, the biliary
colic or renal colic, all of which have distinctive and peculiar char-
acteristics that need not be mistaken for peritonitis.
THE TREATMENT. .
It will be remembered that the cure of this inflammatory con-
dition must result from a removal of obstructions from the veins
and lymphatics of the peritoneum itself. In acute peritonitis ex-
treme Soreness characterizes the disease, and as a consequence
manipulations should be exceedingly gentle. The amateur will
find that automatic manipulations do not answer his purpose here.
The first step to take should be with a view to removing the
pressure consequent upon the presence of feces in the colon. This
may be accomplished by the free use of warm water from a
fountain syringe, through a long tube or nozzle, passing it, if
possible, beyond the sigmoid flexure, and filling the colon with
the water, letting it remain for a few moments; then letting it pass
off. After the patient rests a few moments, repeat this process.
This not only serves to remove much of the pressure, but starts
up the action of the lymphatics and veins, and the water enters
directly into the tissue, dissolving the precipitated elements and
carrying them off through the veins, thereby decreasing effusion,
relieving tension, and as a consequence lessening pain. This
704 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
should be the first thing done. After removing the pressure in
this way, Osteopathic treatment proper may be instituted. Be-
gin at the vaso-motor area, regulating the peristalsis in the
arteries, then endeavor to unite the forces through the splanch-
nics and pneumogastric nerves, treating the neck muscles, chest,
dorsal and all the intercostales, so as to take off all of the pressure
from the lungs and the chest cavity. The vibratory manipula-
tions over the abdomen should be light, mild and carefully done.
The movement of every muscle, superficial and deep, should be
made, being particular to give the liver due attention, for it is
through it that the portal system must empty its blood; the waste
material must pass off that way also, so that it becomes a matter
of necessity to open the channels that lead into this portal system.
Cording the lower limbs, holding the blood in the veins for thirty
to forty-five minutes, relieves pressure, lessens pain, oxygenates
the blood in the limbs, until room has been made for greater ex-
pansion of lungs, on account of abridgment of action of abdomen
from tenderness. Applied alternately to the other limb, when
possible, will be found absolutely beneficial, especially when the
soreness is so extreme as to inhibit Osteopathic manipulations
over the abdomen. Stretching the arms high above the head
and moving the muscles from the spinous processes, moving the
arm as in treating the splanchnic region in other affections.
These treatments should be repeated as often as every day, or
oftener as conditions of patient demand them. The judgment of
the operator should determine that matter.
As in other intestinal or bowel troubles, do not feed the
patient until the digestive organs are in a condition to assimilate
food. Would any one presume that assimilation would be pos-
sible under the conditions existing as above described 2 Open the
closed-up channels that are holding the foreign material produc-
ing the present difficulty, and the appetite will assert itself in due
time. Then let the patient eat, with judgment, of course. There
will be no starvation, with plenty of water introduced.
DROPSY.
SYNoNYMs. Ascites; dropsy of the abdomen.
DEFINITION. An infiltration of serous fluid into the peri-
toneal cavity, distending the abdominal walls, displacing viscera,
embarrassing respiration, added to the cause producing it. Aside
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 705
from general dropsy there may be dropsy of the kidneys (neph-
ritic), or heart (cardiac).
The principal cause of dropsy is mechanical obstruction of
the portal system, from cirrhosis of the liver, diseases of the heart
or lungs, pressure from tumors, cancer, or impediment to the cir-
culation of venous blood.
PATHOLOGY.. The quantity of fluid in the peritoneal cavity
varies greatly, there being from a few ounces to many gallons;
it is of straw or greenish color, having an alkaline reaction.
The peritoneum becomes thickened, and presents a cloudy, sod-
den appearance, due to long contact with the fluid.
SYMPTOMs. Swelling to a greater or less degree of the
abdomen, and constipation, due usually to pressure of the fluid
upon the sigmoid flexure; scanty urinary secretion, due to press-
ure upon the renal vessels; difficulty of respiration, due to press-
ure upon or against the diaphragm; the umbilicus is forced out-
ward. -
DIAGNOSIS. This is easily formed by palpation, or holding
the hand on one side of the abdomen and tapping with the fin-
gers on the other side of it, when a peculiar wave-like impression
is imparted to the other hand. If the patient stands erect the
fluid tends to precipitate to the lower abdominal region, and per-
cussion reveals a dullness over the site of the swelling, and a
tympanitic sound above the swelling. This may be verified on
the patient changing position. The differentiation may be read-
ily distinguished from ovarian tumor by the history of the case;
and from pregnancy, by the character of the enlargement; and
from the distension of the bladder, by its changeable position;
and from chronic peritonitis, by pain and tenderness, peculiar
thickened abdominal walls, and association with tubercule.
PROGNosts. This is influenced largely by the cause pro-
ducing the obstruction that produced the affection, which will be
greatly influenced by the condition of the organs involved, as
organic diseases of the heart, liver, kidneys, or lungs render it
most unfavorable, while the idiopathic form usually terminates
favorably in a few weeks or less.
THE TREATMENT.
The ordinary treatment for ascites by the medical profession
is by medicines. When these fail, as they generally do, resort
is had to tapping—the use of the trocar or the aspirator. Resort
is generally had to such agencies as produce watery stools, or
that act on the kidneys and skin, called hydragogues and diaphor-
706 ostEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
etics, such as potassii aceta, podophyllin, jalap, digitalis, et id
omne genus. It is evident that the removal of the accumulation of
water should be effected. Acting upon this suggestion, the
physician turns his whole attention to that object, and when it is
removed, as is frequently done, the patient is reduced to such
weakness as to present indications of collapse, and often dies from
simply prostration.
The Osteopathic treatment for dropsy consists of the restor-
ation of the normal circulation of the blood and other fluids of the
organ involved. No pathological condition can possibly exist
in the body when all of its channels, glands, and organs are in a
normal condition, and the fluids are permitted to pass through
them. This is an admitted fact. Now, as all of the processes
of life are carried on through a coordination of the nervous sys-
tem, our first attention should be directed to it. Whatever the
organ involved, it will be found upon careful investigation that
pressure upon the nerves terminating in that organ or tissue is
the prime cause of the dropsy; now the effects extend to other
organs and parts of the body, involving perhaps all of it. The
treatment, then, consists in removing obstructions everywhere.
Start the flow of fluids to moving. This is the only salvation—
“the moving of the waters.” It will be found that this fluid is the
product of waste material confined in the tissues, due to the separ-
ation of the terminal sympathetic and motor nerve filaments, that
is caused by the paralysis of said filaments primarily in some
organ or vessel or gland. Our business is to find these obstruc-
tions and take off the pressure, keep them off by repeated efforts,
and let nature perform its normal functions. We cure nothing.
All we can expect to do is to adjust the system to itself, remove
foreign and unnatural influences, and await effects—results.
The heart and lungs should be freed the first thing. Stimu-
late the vaso-motor area, remove all pressure caused by con-
tracted muscular fibers in the neck; raise the clavicles, raise the
arms successively, stimulate the cervical, brachial, dorsal, lumbar
and sacral regions; vibrate thoroughly the abdomen, knead the
bowels, liver and spleen, arouse general circulation in the lower
extremities. Be sure to see to the venous system, that all
obstructions are removed from them throughout the whole body.
Stimulate the renal splanchnics and lumbar area, moving the
muscles upward and outward from the spines of the vertebrae all
down the back. Unite the splanchnic and pneumogastric ter-
minals, so that these two forces—positive and negative—may
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 707
arrest the degenerative processes going on in the system. An
excess of the alkaline element is predominant in the whole system,
and this is neutralized by the union of the splanchnic and pneu-
mogastric nerves in the solar plexus, effected through proper
manipulations of the dorsal region and the sides of the neck.
General treatment is usually demanded in all cases of ascites,
and special treatment of the organs especially involved. Acidu-
lated drinks will aid in neutralizing the alkaline elements, causing
rapid elimination of the excess of fluids. This should surely
receive our careful consideration. This is the first time that such
an idea was ever suggested as a reason for the use of such an
agent—an acid.
The treatment should occupy twenty to thirty minutes at
each sitting, once a day. The lower dorsal needs due attention.
DISEASES OF THE INTESTINAL
CANAL.
INTESTINAL INDIGESTION.
This may be termed intestinal dyspepsia—really duodenal
indigestion, a failure of the normal secretions that are formed
in the mouth and stomach, due to nervous failure in the salivary
and peptic glandular systems, hence an incomplete formation of
chyme. Not only is the deficiency of the formation in the glands
named, but in the pancreas also, and perhaps in the biliary secre-
tion, as it takes all of the secretions to make chyle. Add to this
condition a complete or partial inactivity of the muscular walls of
the intestines themselves, producing stasis, or lack of intestinal
peristalsis, and we have a condition properly denominated intesti-
nal indigestion, usually characterized by pain and distension and
tympanitis, experienced several hours after meals, producing
anemia and nervousness. The pathologists enumerate as causes:
Imperfect diet, over-eating, use of tobacco; deficient amount of
exercise, too much stimulus; diseases of the stomach, liver, pan-
creas, malaria. Not once saying that the secretions that digest
food are at all concerned in the production. Here is where the
whole trouble lies—nervous exhaustion. If the nervous system
had performed its function, the secretions would have been in
708 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
proper proportion, quantity and quality, and no dyspepsia would
have existed.
SYMPTOMS.–They are legion. The principal are pain, flat-
ulence, borborygma, headache, loss of appetite, pains in the
limbs, with frequent attacks of diarrhea, frequent colic. The
chronic form is characterized by most of these, with increased
marked nervous phenomena, depression of spirits, sleeplessness,
headache, vertigo, ringing or buzzing in ears, cardiac irritability,
numbness, tingling in the extremities, fainting, sometimes epilep-
tiform attacks, harsh, dry skin, urine high-colored, uric acid and
oxalate of lime precipitates, anaemia, emaciation, general distress,
hypochondriacal.
* * * THE TREATMENT.
Begin with the vaso-motor system, holding that area for a
short time, free all of the muscles of the neck, raise the clavicles,
shoulders and chest muscles by raising the arms, and treating the
spine with the fingers as the arm is raised, pulling the muscles
strongly upward and outward at each raise of the arm, as far
down as the twelfth dorsal. Treat both sides the same way; then
have the patient lie on the back, manipulate the liver, stomach
and bowels slowly, thoroughly, deeply, gently, for fifteen or
twenty minutes. Take off all of the pressure everywhere. The
sphincter muscles of the lower bowel will most generally need
attention, and should not be neglected.
The patient lying on the stomach, relaxing all muscles, the
spine should receive special attention all the way down, and espe-
cially in the splanchnic region. The rotary manipulations along
the spine, over the abdomen and liver, should be carefully done.
Flushing the bowels every night, retaining the water, as much as
a quart, will be of great benefit. Full, deep inspirations at stated
periods, and as much as half a dozen inspirations at a sitting,
every two to four hours, will aid in the recovery, the patient
instructed to breathe through the nostrils, with mouth closed.
Permit the moderate use of water, either hot or cold, but the
victuals should not be “washed down” with water at meals, nor
should they be eaten in haste. Thorough mastication is im-
portant. No piece-meals should be indulged in, and if only two
meals a day were eaten it would be better. The diarrhea, when
it occurs, should receive the reverse treatment—from the sacrum
to the first lumbar, springing the lumbar region well back.
The pains in the bowels will be readily relieved by the
splanchnic treatment; that is, raising the right arm high, and
PLATE LXIV—Treating Back, Lying on Couch.

…« • … -：- w

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 7II
pressing steadily, firmly, in the splanchnic region on the right
side of the spinous processes.
The treatments should be done slowly and carefully, occupy-
ing from ten to thirty minutes, as often as every other day at least,
until recovery. These maladies need no medicines. The posi-
tive and negative forces properly united, and all pressure kept
off, are the means of cure that nothing can possibly supersede.
INTESTINAL COLIC.
This is a disease of the alimentary tract, having usually
the same cause as intestinal indigestion, and only differs in char-
acter of paroxysms, being those of an acute pain, seemingly start-
ing at or near the navel. It is relieved by the same kind of treat-
ment (except those pains brought on from taking poisons).
Associated with this affection we may have various sorts of
pain, and in different localities of the abdomen, so that it is essen-
tial that a proper differentiation be had or made regarding the
true state of affairs.
Gastralgia, hepatic colic, nephritic colic, uterine colic, ovar-
ian colic, and inflammatory disorders of the abdomen should have
special attention. So also lead colic, which should receive the
proper antidotal remedies, which are alum and morphia—so
stated on good authority, yet Osteopathy is a more effectual rem-
edy for the colic; then morphia need not be used, but the alum
only. -
THE TREATMENT.
Take hold of the patient's right arm, stretch it strongly up
to the side of the head, and at the same time use pressure with
the fingers of the other hand on the right side of the spinous pro-
cesses from the fourth to the eighth dorsal vertebra, letting the
arm down quickly for a few times, as the fingers are lowered
along the spine. -
If there is other trouble, treat accordingly, as indicated, re-
peating as often as is required. There can be no iron-clad rules
for the operator to follow. It is presumed that the general man-
ipulations are sufficiently understood to qualify the operator to
do whatever should be done in any given condition.
7I2 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CONSTIPATION.
This is a functional inactivity of the intestinal canal—a dor-
mant or lessened peristalsis of the intestines and colon, usually
attributed to biliousness. Yet it is said that a lack of biliary secre-
tion produces constipation. The accusations against the liver are
so numerous and groundless that it would be a great insult to
the reader to even attempt to record them. It is not the liver's
fault that it becomes torpid, nor is it its fault that the bowels do
not get rid of the effete substances called feces. The commonly
attributed causes are as groundless as it is possible to imagine.
Dyspepsia, character of the food, diseases of the stomach, liver,
malaria, lead poisoning, syphilis, have been enumerated as causes.
The prime cause of inactivity or irregularity of action is the fail-
ure to respond to nature's suggestions. The irregularity of the
movements is generally attributable to neglect on the part of the
person. There is a tacit resignation on the part of the intestines
to wait the convenience of the subject until the “next day,” and
thus a habit is formed which, duly cultivated, becomes fixed; then
the patient complains of being constipated. The bowels are then
moved only occasionally, once perhaps every three or four days,
and then with much straining, distress, flushed face and cerebral
congestion; or the bowels may be moved every day, but the stools
are small and hard. These may be changed to partly formed
stools, and retained in the rectum, causing much uneasiness, pain,
vertigo, headache, mental torpor, palpitation of the heart and
abdominal distension. The patient usually indulges the mental
state that unless the bowels move once or more times each day
something dreadful will happen, hence a resort to purgatives is
had, and a habit is formed of moving the bowels therewith, and
no movement occurs without such procedure. In the large ma-
jority of such cases, if the patient would wait, the actions would
come around all right and regular. At any rate, our treatment
will suffice, and no one need be constipated long; but cured of
it and all of its possible consequences, without resorting to
physics. The “regulator pellets,” the “mild laxatives,” and “the
syrup of figs” may then be dispensed with. The evil conse-
quences of these physics are equal to, if not greater, than the con-
stipation.
THE TREATMENT.
While it is said that the “fifth and seventh ribs may be turned
a little,” causing inactivity of the liver, we are not disposed to
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 7I3
believe such a statement as at all consistent with actual facts, and
are not going to attempt to make believe such a thing in order to
make it appear marvelous to cure constipation—“to set a rib,”
or “adjust an atlas,” to take off the pressure (where it does not
exist). Facts shall form the basis of our treatment, as well as the
course to establish Osteopathy. This world has been controlled
by ignorance and deception long enough, so far as treatment of
disease is concerned at least, and in regard to causes as well. It
seems like some are possessed largely of a desire to overstate the
facts, and thus deceive for gain.
It is thought by some that the bile is the natural physic, and
their constant efforts are directed to “acting on the liver” to cure
constipation, as well as every other affection that flesh is heir to,
and nothing seems “orthodox” unless a catharsis comes of it—
in almost all cases. The regular doctor urges “a movement of
the bowels” when his patient has a “malaria,” when he has a
colic, when he has a jaundice, when he has a diarrhea, flux, or is
sick at the stomach. Think of it! The laity have no possible or
even probable idea of the amount of imposition they suffer at the
hands of physicians. Routine prescriptions, ranging from in-
compatible compounds to podophyllum peltatum, are gulped
down the poor deluded victims’ throats until they can’t rest. All
of which in no possible manner benefit the patients or effect a
cure. The indulgence of such things is surely reprehensible,
to say the least of it. These same medicine vendors denounce
nature's own way of doing its own business, and if an Osteopath
cures a case that has “suffered at the hands of many physicians,”
he is denounced as an infamous “quack.” No law is too severe
against him whom they thus stigmatize. The “world do move”
nevertheless, and the “common people” are becoming alive to the
fact that “there is a better way.” -
If it could be understood that peristalsis is the result of
nervous influence, there would be little difficulty in seeing the
philosophy of its necessity, as constipation is due to lack of proper
nerve influence. That there are certain agencies which act by
irritation of the mucous membrane, and some mechanically, is
not questioned, but the normal action is what the Osteopath
designs to establish to cure constipation. The how to accom-
plish that is what follows:
Place the patient on a stool, chair, or any way get-at-able;
take hold of the right wrist, extend the arm upwards, place the
fingers of the left hand against the sides of the spinous processes,
7I4 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
on the right side of the processes, press hard, holding taut, and
suddenly lower the arm; then lower the fingers an inch or so,
and proceed as before, covering the whole splanchnic area, begin-
ning about the fourth dorsal vertebra. The neck should be prop-
erly extended, and the muscles duly manipulated, the clavicles
raised, and the patient being on the back, the liver should receive
treatment as prescribed elsewhere—the bowels kneaded from the
lower right side, from the region of the ileo-cecal locality upwards,
following the course of the ascending colon to the hepatic flexure,
thence across the abdomen, to the left side, embracing the
splenic flexure, thence down to the sigmoid flexure. This
should be done several times, and the gentle tapping of the ends
of fingers should not be lost sight of, nor omitted, following the
same course, vibrating the abdomen for a few moments each
treatment, always following the colon from its commencement to
its ending in the sigmoid flexure, and vibrating in that direction
likewise. The liver should be thoroughly kneaded at the same
treatment, being from fifteen to thirty minutes in giving the treat-
ment. If, upon examination, it be found that the sphincter mus-
cles of the rectum are unduly sensitive and contracted, they
should be divulsed thoroughly. It is a fact most thoroughly
demonstrated, that irritation of the terminal filaments of the sym-
pathetic nerves, by divulsion of the internal sphincter ani muscle
relieves constipation, cures hemorrhoids and assists in curing
more dyspepsia than almost every other method known. It aids
in flushing the capillaries everywhere in the whole body.
The introduction of warm water by the aid of a fountain
syringe is surely commendable, proper and right, even to flushing
the colon two or three times a week. One ordinary glass tum-
bler full of water to every ten pounds weight of body should
be drank daily. Usually too little water is consumed, to be
healthy. Remember that water is at least 70 per cent. of the
fluids of the body, and that in order to hold the soluble material
of the inorganic substances and disorganized material in solution
so that debris may be disintegrated, carried off, ushered into
channels especially set apart for that purpose, there must be a
sufficient amount of water constantly introduced into the body
as it becomes lessened by use or evaporation. These principles
and directions carried out, will be satisfactory to both patient and
doctor.
The manipulation of the first to fourth sacral: We turn the
patient on the face, and move by vibratory movements on either
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 7I 5
side deeply, firmly and persistently for two to five minutes—
stimulating the nerve filaments that are distributed to and in-
fluence the sphincter ani muscles, relaxing them.
Sometimes there is a displacement of the coccyx, which pro-
duces hemorrhoids, constipation and other rectal disorders, which
needs adjustment, and to set it right frequently corrects the whole
difficulty. This is done by anointing the forefinger, introducing
it into the rectum, turning the palmar surface posteriorly, curving
upwards and backwards until the bone is reached, and then place
the fingers and thumb of the other hand on the foramina of the
last two or three sacral vertebrae, using considerable pressure to
antagonize the finger placed on the inside of the rectum against
the coccyx, and adjust it as needed; and when done close the
thumb against the muscles and integument with considerable
force, squeezing the tissue while removing the finger from the
rectum. This stretches the sphincter muscles at the same time,
which is usually found to be essential. This, by the way, is the
Osteopathic treatment for piles (hemorrhoids), which should be
repeated every five days, and will be quite effectual in very many
cases. Rectal plugs are often useful also. It will be found that
an occasional divulsion of the sphincter muscles conduces to a
restoration of many ills that do not down with other treatment.
It takes off the pressure and flushes the capillaries, and does unac-
countable benefit in many ways, frequently curing many chronic
as well as acute disorders. Among the acute disorders may be
named flux. A full divulsion of the bowel (the sphincters) in
case of flux, and an immediate flushing of the lower bowel with
water as warm as can be borne, will invariably cure that affection
in an incredibly short space of time. Our Osteopathic treatment,
however, is so effectual that other means are usually unnecessary
to resort to, or recommend.
CATARRHAL ENTERITIS.
This is placed alongside of bowel complaints, but with the
addition of inflammation. It is a catarrhal inflammation of the
mucous membrane of the bowels, or small intestines, accompanied
with fever, tenderness, pain, and loose discharges therefrom.
The locality involved gives the name to the affection—the duo-
denum being the seat, it is named duodenitis, etc.
It is characterized at first by a hyperaemic condition of the
716 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
mucous membrane and glands, followed or accompanied with
pain, tenderness, swelling, or oedema; increased watery secretion,
proliferation of the epithelium, pealing off of the mucous mem-
brane, resulting in hemorrhage, and then followed by ulceration
of the glands. These changes may involve the whole intestinal
tract, involving Peyer's patches, and be confounded with the dis-
ease recognized as typhoid fever.
CAUSES. Like many other intestinal disorder, it is attrib-
uted to a specific virus, improper food, temperature of summer,
exposure to cold and dampness, foreign substances ingested in
intestines, such as fish bones, hard kernels of fruit, coins, stones,
etc.
The similarity of symptoms in all inflammations of the intes-
tinal tract renders them rather difficult of differentiation, and
diagnosis uncertain, but a careful observer may distinguish this
from typhoid fever by the prodromes in the latter, the gradual rise
in temperature in typhoid fever, and the eruption; the points of
difference in this from dysentery and peritonitis, by the distinct
peculiarities of the two latter affections. The prognosis is gen-
erally favorable.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment consists of thorough manipulations of the
neck, stretching up, with hands at the occiput and under the chin,
turning slightly while extending the neck, raising the clavicles,
gently vibrating the abdomen, lightly at first, continuing the pro-
cess for several moments; then turning the patient on one side,
pressing the thumb and finger on either side of the spine with
one hand, taking hold of the ankle with the other hand, gently
pulling the limb backwards, pressing at the same time along the
sides of the lumbar spines, beginning at the sacro-lumbar junc-
tion, and moving upward about an inch each time the limb is
retracted. The pulling backward must be done very gently, for
the pain will not permit severity. The splanchnic area should
receive special attention next, treating back from the fourth dor-
sal to the tenth, pulling the arm up strongly each move made.
The treatment should occupy about twenty minutes each time,
and be repeated every six to eight hours. Flushing the bowels
and drinking hot water, as directed for typhoid fever, should be
observed strictly. For any fever, treat as directed in the vaso-
motor area three to five minutes.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 717
CROUPOUS ENTERITIS-OR MEMBRANOUS
ENTERITIS. -
This is an inflammation of the mucous membrane of the
intestines, of a croupous character, characterized by a whitish
gray covering of the mucous membrane, firmly adherent and
cemented together, and fastened to the intestine by rootlets
dipping down into the intestinal follicles; characterized also by
feverishness, Soreness and distension of the abdomen, and pains
more severe around the umbilicus, and tenderness, occurring in
paroxysms, continuing for half an hour or so each time, lasting
for a day or two, followed by looseness of the bowels, and each
stool accompanied with tenesmus and severe pain, the stools con-
taining mucus, with or without blood; and generally casts of
mucus, cylindrical, like the mucous membrane of the bowels,
come away in the discharges, leaving a feeling of raw soreness,
although great relief ensues when these shreds or casts are ex-
pelled. This soreness may continue for a day or two afterward.
These paroxysms may occur at intervals of a week or two, or they
may not occur for longer periods—may be not for a year or two.
The stool characterizes it from flux as well as from peritonitis.
It is recognized as a most difficult disease to cure by the regular
medical profession. A diet without fecal-forming material is
recommended. It is said that it is a disease especially confined
to adult life.
The causes are attributed to a peculiar state of the nervous
system. That is singular, surely. What is that peculiar state
of the nervous system P And yet opium and morphine, as well as
hydrargyri chloridum corrosivum and liquor potassium arsenitis
are recommend as prophylactics. Is it any wonder that the peo-
ple are tired of doctoring?
THE TREATMENT.
This disease requires a general treatment, beginning at the
vaso-motor area. Hold it for two to five minutes, and then
manipulate the neck carefully, slowly, deeply, moving all of the
muscles, raising the clavicles, the arms slowly to the side of head,
pressing on the sides of the spinous processes firmly, and down as
far as the tenth dorsal, then treat up from the sacrum to the
twelfth dorsal; then, with patient lying on the back, gently vibrate
with the hand the whole abdomen, beginning low down on the
left side, moving to the right with the hand over the whole body,
easily, slowly and persistently for several minutes; then turn the
718 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
patient on the side, stretch the lower limbs backward, holding the
fingers and thumb against the lower, lateral lumbar spines, mov-
ing the hand upward each time the limb is retracted. Treat the
lower limbs carefully and thoroughly, and especially empty the
Saphenous and other veins of the limb. An all-round general
treatment should be given once a day. Special treatment of the
vaSO-motor and treatment in lumbar area upward, and on abdo-
men by gently kneading and vibratory movements, may be used
every four to six hours. Hot applications to the abdomen will
not be amiss for the Soreness, and hot water injections should be
used once or twice a day. Give no food of any kind until the
tongue cleans off and the patient feels hungry. Let the feeding
go until nature demands it.
DIARRHEA.
This affection is characterized by loose, alvine discharges,
without tenesmus (griping), and generally due to functional or
organic derangement of the digestive organs. It is frequently
an accompaniment of typhoid fever, albuminuria, pyaemia, and
tuberculosis. It is due to nervous shock, mental shock, atmos-
pheric changes, change of diet, water, etc.
It may assume two forms—acute and chronic. There are
recognized four divisions: Feculent Diarrhea, Lienteric Diar-
rhea, Bilious Diarrhea, Chronic Diarrhea. *
Feculent—That variety wherein feculent stools are dis-
charged, attended after a short time with colicky feelings, pains,
flatulency, with frequent desire to stool, and pain, relieved for the
time by the stool. After four or more stools, they become lighter.
This form is most usually the result of overeating, eating too
rapidly, or ingesta of indigestible substances, and frequently from
worms in the intestinal tract.
Lienteric.—This is characterized by frequent discharges of
loose, undigested food—unassimilated food. The stools may
contain mucus, covered with serum and bile, and may be mixed
with undigested food. The peculiar characteristic of this form is
that the patient emaciates rapidly, the irritable undigested food
producing increased peristalsis, and all of the contents of the bow-
els are rapidly evacuated.
Bilious.-In this variety the stools are usually green or yel-
low, and passed with a scalding sensation at the anus, and more
or less griping pains in the abdomen, owing to the excessive
PLATE LXV.-Showing Plate LXIV. Continued.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 721
biliary secretion mixed with the food. These discharges may be
accompanied with or without nausea or vomiting, and any of
them may merge into a chronic form, or frequent attacks of the
acute form assume a chronicity by their frequency and persist-
ency. -
Chronic.—The main peculiarity is the similarity of the stools
to the acute, except the stools may be changed to a pale color and
assume the characteristics of a flux and present dyspeptic symp-
toms. Continual anemic conditions, varied appetite and chronic
dyspeptic conditions are often notable and persistent for years.
THE TREATMENT.
When considered in the light of comparison as regards effi-
cacy in the cure of these affections, the Regular School treatment
stands in about the same relation to the Osteopathic that the
“tallow-dipped candle” does to the modern electric light on a dark
night. Our treatment wholly eclipses any other ever discovered
or known to humanity. If some people even now were to be
told that diarrhea could be cured in five minutes, many cases of it,
with a single treatment, they would at once say it could not be
done, and denounce the proclaimer a fit subject for an insane
asylum. To think of such a boon to humanity—a positive,
proven fact—being spurned by those who “compass sea and land”
to find some specific remedy that will surely cure diarrheal To
pass by this and denounce it as a “fraud.” looks so unreasonable
that we refrain from giving them the castigation they deserve. A
trial—yes, even one correct application—of this science to this
one condition alone will convince the most skeptical of its efficacy.
The very many instances of entire immunity at once places this
at the head of all heretofore known remedies. To think of the
grief and tears of many mothers over the loss of little loved ones,
whose small mounds mark their silent resting places in the lonely
charnel house of the dead, who might have lived many days to
cheer them in their declining years had they been treated Osteo-
pathically The thought of giving relief is that others may be
spared a like fate through the new and natural method of curing
disease | This volume will more than repay the purchaser for the
outlay in the treatment of this one affection. To know how to
relieve it is many times more valuable than a money considera-
tion, even in the “summer complaints of infants.” It will be a
great relief to mothers to be in possession of a remedy that will
cure their babies in so short a time, so easily, and with so little
inconvenience to themselves, and without distress or annoyance
722. osTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to the little one. Then, to know that the treatment is equally as
efficacious for all ages only adds intensity to the interest therein.
While it may be a matter of interest to the manipulator to
ascertain whether there are “slips in the vertebrae” or a “dislo-
cated atlas,” and to find “a cold spot” on the surface somewhere
along the side of the spinal column, yet it will be a more satisfac-
tory desideratum to know that diarrhea can be cured without even
knowing that such are the probable diagnostic signs of the pre-
vailing affection. That is another attempt to wrap the science in
mystery and to egotize self. The facts in the matter are, the
splanchnic and pneumogastric nervous systems are involved in
this affection—and what does the laity know about the solar
plexus or “the abdominal brain” any way? If the reverse current
is turned on, the wheels turn in the opposite direction, and to
know how to turn the “crank” is to know how to direct the force.
In all lienteric troubles there is an excess of negative power.
The alkaline elements predominate, and what is necessary to be
done is to turn on the other current—neutralize the alkalinity.
And inasmuch as pressure below the solar plexus, along the mes-
entery plexus, reverses the motion (reverses the peristalsis), and
that we control precipitation through pressure along the left side
of the lumbar vertebrae, our salient point is at the first and second
lumbar areas. We use pressure there with the hand, knee, or the
fist or fingers, bending the body backward at the same time, hold-
ing it there for a moment or so; we start the forces the other way;
that is, arrest the onward peristalsis at once. After a move or
two backward, with pressure at the point mentioned, the bowel
should be held or gently pressed for a few moments, or manipu-
lated from the left side in the sigmoid flexure region upward very
gently for a few moments. The patient, lying on the back, may
be treated as follows: Standing at the side of the table or bed on
which the patient may be, place the hands on either side of the
spinous processes, at the dorso-lumbar junction; then, pressing
moderately with the finger tips, pulling outward therewith, raise
the body from the bed and hold it suspended, so that the back of
the head and feet only may touch the bed, holding it for a moment
or two, repeating same once or twice, then holding the hand on
the abdomen a short time. This will usually suffice for an attack
of diarrhea. For children, take hold of the back of the neck
with open hand, holding the child so as to secure action, and with
other hand holding the feet, lay the body (back down) across the
knee, resting weight of body on the lumbar region for a moment
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 723
or so. This stretches the mesenteric plexus, through the spinal
sympathetic filaments. The influence is conveyed, action is had
immediately. While it is a demonstrated fact that these manipu-
lations cure, it should not be lost sight of that there may be a
necessity for looking after the spinal vertebrae, and we would not
underrate its importance, yet in many instances the cause of the
affection is not due to a “dislocation of one of the bones of the
spine,” or diarrhea would be continuous in such an event. Our
motto is, “Take off the pressure” everywhere, in the application
of the principles of this science. The nervous system controls
the body, and interference with its action produces pathological
results, and it is our business to see to it that all disturbances
of it be intercepted, so that there be no interference whatever any-
where. The harmonious action of the whole body depends alto-
gether upon the nervous system being free to act in all parts of the
body. The nerves control the manufacture of all of the secre-
tions, the assimilation of the material from the product of the food,
the building up of the waste, and the removal and reformation of
it into new products that go to reconstruct the blood; and a per-
fect coordination is essentially required to promote that har-
mony in the system denominated health.
In severe cases of several days’ standing, where patients are
greatly emaciated, rest in bed is necessary, so that nature may
have time to recuperate her powers properly.
There should be due regard for a restoration of the fluids of
the body that have been wasted, and as water is the essential
solvent of all ingesta, it should be furnished in due proportion and
at stated intervals, compatible with the conditions found.
whether by oral or anal orifice, or both. The water generally
is more suitable hot. As much as will assimilate or be taken up
without irritation or discomfort, should be the guide as to quan-
tity, and the effects watched, in any given case. Food should be
administered according to the state of the digestive organs, but
hot water will usually satisfy the demands of the system until the
tongue cleans off and the salivary glands are ready to secrete the
necessary ingredients to mix with the food.
724 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
SPORADIC CHOLERA-CHOLERA MORBUS.
This is an acute catarrhal inflammation of the stomach and
small intestines. The inflammation involves the mucous mem-
brane, caused by the acrid secretions passing through and out of
the intestine through the mucous membrane. It comes on Sud-
denly, and with severe griping, abdominal pains, followed or
accompanied with loose, watery stools, vomiting, cramping, cold,
clammy perspiration, rapid emaciation, extreme thirst, feeble,
rapid pulse, spasmodic cramping of the muscles of the abdomen
and extremities, with increased prostration, often ending in col-
lapse and death. It is extremely dangerous, baffling the skill of
physicians and uninfluenced by medication. It is more liable to
come on during the later summer months or in autumn, gener-
ally after the patient has been exposed to a cool atmosphere, after
eating fruits, melons or trashy ingesta (a debauch), and usually in
the early morning hours (about 2 o'clock A.M.) On account of
its prevalence some years more than others, it is supposed that
some specific cause induces it, or climatic influences tend to pre-
cipitate such a condition. Be that as it may, the condition of the
person has much to do in its attack. There is no mistaking it for
anything else. It has no uncertain symptoms. It completely
takes possession of the person, like a thief in the night, stealing
upon him at the dead hour of midnight, and grasping him at his
very vitals, throws him into spasmodic muscular convulsions,
rendering nerves and muscle and every tissue in the body wholly
incapable of performing their normal functions. The discharges
at first are the normal feces, but soon the tendency is to a watery
consistency, increasing in whiteness, until finally the “rice-
water” discharges become characteristic of cholera, hence the
name, “cholera morbus.” The patient rapidly loses strength and
the body shrinks; cold, clammy sweat stands on the surface all
over the body; pulse small and feeble; intense thirst is present,
but liquids are ejected as soon as swallowed. A more doleful
and distressed condition can not well be imagined, but this is no
overdrawn description of the facts as they usually occur, often
resulting in death in a few hours. The medical world has taxed
its inventive genius for ages to discover a remedy that would cure
this distressing and marvelously mortal disease, and found no
specific in the way of medication until the Osteopath came upon
the stage of life. If any evidence will convince the people or the
medical fraternity of the efficacy of this system of healing, the cure
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 725
of cholera morbus ought to do so. It is the most complete suc-
cess of anything ever discovered—the quickest, easiest, and there-
fore the best. There is such a similarity in this disease and
Asiatic cholera that there need be nothing added to the descrip-
tion, nor need there be any difference in the treatment. The ten-
dency of the watery portions of the blood to leave the solid con-
stituents exists in both conditions alike, and the chemical affinity
being restored cures the disease. The essential thing to do is to
restore that affinity.
THE TREATMENT.
Place the knee or knees against the sides of the dorsal ver-
tebrae at the junction of the dorso-lumbar vertebrae, take hold of
the patient in such a manner as to bend the upper part of the body
and lower extremities backward as far as the patient can comfort-
ably bear, holding it in that position for a moment or two, and
then let it resume its normal attitude; then repeat the process two
or three times. Afterward place the hand next to the skin, and
on the abdomen, pressing gently thereon for a moment or so,
gradually increasing the pressure as the patient can bear it. This
restores normal action of the bowels at once, arrests peristalsis,
and starts the forces in the other direction. To stop the vomit-
ing, should it not do so with this treatment, take hold of the right
arm, raise it high above the head, pressing on the side of the spine
hard, in the upper splanchnic region. These movements should
be made slowly and steadily, giving the system time to respond
before repetition of the move. The vaso-motor area should
receive special attention in this affection. Treatment of the cer-
vical region is especially recommended to equalize the circulation.
The use of hot water is especially indicated, particularly the flush-
ing of the bowel, having the patient retain it as long as possible.
The introduction of the water through a rectal rubber tube several
inches long is better than by the ordinary syringe nozzle, as desire
to stool is thus avoided. Hot water drank freely will be admis-
sible also. Remember that the stream of water in the system
has run out, and a replenishing is necessary to redissolve the pre-
cipitated molecules of the elements in the blood and tissues.
The splanchnic and pneumogastric nervous systems are the
two prime factors to be considered in the treatment of many
pathological conditions, and in no condition have we such bril-
liant results as in cholera morbus! A union of these two forces
reversing the current, produces the most radical changes that can
726 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
be imagined. Reverse action is at once established, and the flow
reversed, starts the fluids the other way, naturally. The whole
matter lies in the movement of the current, and that depends
upon which way the “crank” is turned (or the crank turns
it). Where does the laugh come in now? The State Boards
and legislative lobbyists, all of them combined, never can
devise or produce a remedy that will be so effectual as is
that of the Osteopath in the prompt cure of cholera morbus.
What benefit is it to delineate minutely the symptoms and patho-
logical changes of a disease and then guess at a remedy? Where
is the use of standing by and watching the course of the destruc-
tive character of a disease and do nothing to arrest its ravages?
That same State Medical Board will cause to be enacted laws
“regulating the practice of medicine,” and measures to arrest
those who are as honestly endeavoring to ameliorate the suffer-
ings of mankind as they pretend to be. What right have State
Boards to select my doctor and dictate the kind of medicine I
shall have thrust down my throat? If I could, I would, with one
fell sweep, abolish in every State such legislative excrescences
and unjust proscriptive enactments, and leave the people the right
of choice.
ENTERO-COLITIS.
An inflammation of the mucous membrane of the lower por-
tion of the ilium and commencement of the colon or large intes-
tine. Ulceration of the intestinal glands takes place if allowed to
run on, and then the affection becomes chronic.
There are usually fever, sickness at stomach and vomiting, a
diarrhea, tenderness and swelling of the whole abdomen, severe
or dull pain and considerable emaciation, due to general breaking
down of the mucous membrane; follicular enlargement, Peyer's
patches tumified and the black points projecting above the
mucous membrane presenting an ulcerated appearance. In the
chronic form an intensification of the hypertrophy involving the
deeper structure ensues, ulcers coalesce, patches of mucus peel off,
leaving the surface down to the submucous coat bare, raw, sore.
This is a disease of children, producing restlessness, fever, thirst,
loss of appetite, nausea, vomiting, semi-fluid stools, frequent,
greenish, sour; attended with large abdomen, much emaciation,
crossness on the part of the child, peevish, and a reduction to early
prostration, and if allowed to run into a chronic form, presents a
A DRUGLESS systEM OF HEALING. 727
sallow, unhealthy skin of loose appearance, it hanging in folds
or drawn tightly over and around the joints, face peaked, abdo-
men large and tender, and several stools day and night, usually
preceded by rumbling in the abdomen, severe pains; a sudden
loud, gushing stool relieves the distress, and the little sufferer
relapses into quietude for some time afterward. Many children
suffer from this affection, and it is regarded as a very serious
condition, and usually proves fatal under the regular method of
treatment by physicians, the child wearing out gradually until
death closes the suffering. The numerous compounds and as-
tringents, and the carefully selected measures, fail to arrest the
disease. Here again we see the magic influence of Osteopathy.
The idea of expecting an astringent to pass through the long
intestinal tube, and the various mixtures of abdominal and intes-
tinal secretions, to the seat of this affection, and affect the parts
involved, seems to us the height of absurdity—and so it is, as
proven by results. Where is the trouble from? What does the
result have to do in the treatment, when the cause still remains—
a separation of the two forces?
THE TREATMENT.
Take hold of the body of the patient on either side of the
spinous processes at the dorso-lumbar junction, with the fingers
of each hand, and raise the patient thus, the whole weight, keep
it suspended for a moment, then let it down; repeat this process
two or three times, and then place the hand on the abdomen
gently, holding steadily, for two to five minutes, then gently man-
ipulate the bowels and use the vibratory rotary movements of the
hands a few moments; then raise the arms, treating from the first
dorsal to the tenth vertebra, raising both hands up on either side
of the head, lowering them each time, replacing the fingers along
down the spine. This stops vomiting. The neck should receive
gentle manipulations, beginning with the vaso-motor area. -
After the stools are checked, it is a matter of much impor-
tance to nourish a patient. It will be remembered that when the
skin hangs in folds, the watery portions of the system are nearly
all evaporated, and the solid constituents of the body are pre-
cipitated. Circulation is therefore sluggish, the skin rough,
scaly, dry and harsh, and soreness still present in the ileo-cecal
region, the surface perhaps raw and exuding a muco-purulent
secretion, and there is need of nourishment. Much judgment is
to be exercised now. Begin with warm, sweetened water. Let
the child drink or nurse it as warm as it can bear, as much as half
728 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
to one pint at a time; let it rest for four to six hours, then repeat
the water. Mucilage of ulmus is the best food for a day or two,
till the ulcers heal. The water is to be continued at intervals for
at least twenty-four hours. Sterilized sweet milk is admissible;
also barley and oatmeal mixed and boiled a long time and
strained, and the serum therefrom given in proper quantities, but
do not feed too much at a time, nor oftener than six hours. Satis-
fy the hunger by using the water. A bath in wheat-bran water
daily will be found an excellent adjuvant to recovery.
It is to be hoped that the case will not run on under Oste-
opathic treatment until inflammation shall have been established,
and the little one emaciated to the extent described above. Then
there will not be so much care needed to raise one from the jaws
of death. The system must have time to reinstate its lost powers,
even after the treatment has united the forces.
CHOLERA INFANTUM.
This is defined as an acute catarrhal inflammation of the
mucous membrane of the stomach and intestines. It usually
comes on in the summer time, and is common with children dur-
ing their first dentition, characterized by colicky pain in bowels
and loose, watery discharges, febrile reaction and prostration.
It comes on Suddenly, with vomiting, purging, pains, fever and
intense thirst, with rapid pulse, child restless, feverish, irritable,
and rapidly runs into extreme prostration; mouth and lips dry,
tongue parched, thirsty, cold, clammy sweat, contracted pupils,
semi-comatose, and rapidly sinking into a low collapsed state.
These characterizations apply to the severe cases, but in milder
cases the picture is not so intense. The prognosis is usually
doubtful. It resembles the cholera morbus in adults, and requires
the same treatment. It is said by one authority that it is caused
by “irritation of the sympathetic nervous system.” The dura-
tion depends upon its severity, constitutional vitality, the char-
acter of the attack, and the treatment.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment consists in bending the body backward gently,
with pressure on either side of the spinous process in the dorso-
lumbar region, or the lifting of the patient up, with the fingers
pressing on the sides of the spinous processes in that locality, or
by taking hold of the child's heels and back of neck, laying it
PLATE LXVI.-Showing How to Extend Pectoral Muscle.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 73I
gº
across the knee, bending it gently backward, so that the weight
of the child shall center on the small of the back—stretching the
mesenteric plexus and the plexuses of the abdomen, and
gently pressing and vibrating slowly over the same for a short
time. This treatment ordinarily cures at once, in a very few
moments. Should subsequent treatments be needed, they should
be given in the same way. For the equalization of the circulation
and reduction of the fever, should there be any, treat the vaso-
motor area a few moments in the usual way. - *
The child should be allowed to nurse as much hot water as
is comfortably borne, sweetened so as to be palatable, instead of
food, until the stomach has time to rest, waiting a reasonable
time after the bowels have become quiet. Let the little patient
rest. The mother is generally too anxious to “keep the little one
from starving to death,” not considering the ordeal the digestive
organs have undergone (exhausted, and needing time to rest).
Then do not permit an already worn-down nerve force to be
imposed upon ere it has a breathing spell. The water is suffi-
cient for dissolving the solid elements consequent upon watery ex-
udation, and to restore their normal solution, so as to permit
return circulation of the molecules necessary to recuperation.
Wait, then. Sterilized milk or the mother’s milk will be the diet
needed, but not too often.
BLOODY FLUX.—ACUTE DYSENTERY.
This is an acute inflammatory condition of the large intes-
tine, either catarrhal, croupous, or ulcerative in character, with
fever, tormina, tenesmus, frequent small, mucous or bloody dis-
charges from bowel. It occurs sporadically, epidemically or en-
demically. '. .
CAUSEs. Sudden atmospheric changes, hot days and cool,
damp nights; errors in diet, drinking ice water when the system
is too hot, or when fatigued; drinking water from wells and cis-
terns that is mixed with precipitants, vegetable decomposition, or
clay, sand or dirt, without filtering, are attributed causes. Flux
generally prevails at a season of drouth, when the springs and
wells are scarce of water, much dust flying in the air, hot days and
cool nights. -
There are several forms of this affection—the Catarrhal,
Diphtheritic, Tropical. It is not considered contagious, but is
infectious. It is characterized by congestion of the mucous
732 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
and the submucous membrane, or tissue of the lower bowel,
colon and rectum. Constipation usually precedes an attack. The
irritation of the mucous membrane by foreign substances may be
regarded as the starting point. It frequently comes from a lodg-
ment of a foreign atom, such as an apple-core, in the mucous folds
of the rectum ; frequent discharges from the use of drastic ca-
thartics; accumulated feces in the region of the sigmoid flexure.
Congestion of ever so small a part of the mucous membrane of
the large intestine may be sufficient cause to produce sloughing
of the mucous membrane and give rise to serious consequences.
The disease usually begins, however, with a diarrhea, loss of appe-
tite, fever, nausea, which continue for two or three days, when the
mucous discharges appear, with the peculiar tormina, tenesmus,
and sick, fainty soreness in the lower bowel, pus and bloody
stools, with severe pains in the hypogastric region, especially pre-
ceding stool and on movement.
THE TREATMENT.
It is stated by one author that “dysentery is one of the four
great epidemic diseases of the world, and in the Tropics it de-
stroys more lives than cholera, and has been more fatal to armies
than powder and shot.” The magnitude of it may in a measure
be imagined. Its various forms signify nothing only as regards
tissue involved, stage of the disease, mildness or severity. The
treatment must be modified and applied according to the individ-
ual circumstances of the case, all things taken into consideration,
whether the catarrhal, amoebic, croupous or chronic, and compli-
cations attending each variety. All cases should be attended to
as early as possible, and the patient should be enjoined to rest
quietly in as nearly a recumbent position as practicable, and to
avoid mental worry, anxiety, fatigue, and exposure, indigestible
food and excesses of all kinds. Keep quiet.
Presuming the patient is reclining on a couch or bed, the
operator begins the manipulations by changing the current of the
nerve wave by pressing hard and firmly in the region of the dorsal
and lumbar junction of the spine, either with the knees or fin-
gers, or, if a person light enough to raise, by placing the fingers
on both sides of the spinous processes in that region, and bending
the spine forward as far as practicable and holding the patient in
that position for one or two moments, then repeating the same
process two or three times. The same end may be accomplished
by holding the clinched fist of the patient under the back at this
region, on the left side of spine, for some minutes, if an adult.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 733
The pressure should be steady, beginning moderately, and grad-
ually intensifying it until relief is had. This treatment may be
done by the patient himself oftentimes, with perfect satisfaction
and assurance of immediate relief.
The gravity of this disease is such that the tendency is to
want to resort to some remedy or compound in the shape of
medicine, notwithstanding its almost universal failure. The
human mind is so molded by habit, it seems so natural to “take
something,” that a resort is had to their old ways. When it is
Once known that Osteopathy, properly applied, cures without
doubt, it will be sought by the afflicted, adopted, used.
In this affection, as in all other acute or chronic diseases,
due regard should be had to the hygienic treatment, diet, etc.
The discharges from the bowels should be removed from the
room at once, the sheets and clothing properly aired, the room
disinfected, and the body kept cleansed by proper bathing, daily,
and the utmost strictness observed in regard to the administra-
tion of water. Hot water will be found the most soothing drink,
and should be given in small quantities, often, satisfying as fast
as possible the waste. Flushing the bowels once a day will be
most soothing.
In further demonstration of the efficacy of taking off the
pressure from the sympathetic nerve filaments, we will add
another treatment that may not come amiss. The sympathetic
nerves, as all nerves do, exercise their influence at their end
bulbs, and as the filaments that terminate in the lower bowel in
this affection are impinged upon, and infiltration of tissue by
serous exudate separates these filaments from the terminal motor
filaments, increasing the congestion of blood by lessening peris-
talsis in the arterial walls, a breaking-down of the tissue ensues as
a consequence of decomposition of the elements in the parts,
The indications are, “Take Off the Pressure.” How is this done
satisfactorily P. We answer, By the bivalve. Divulse the sphinc-
ters gently, thoroughly, almost to paralysis, then inject as hot
water as patient is able to bear, repeating the injection for sev-
eral times at the same sitting, immediately after divulsion; and
lastly, let a pint to three pints remain in the colon, then leave the
patient to rest. This will cure almost every case in all stages of
the disease. It is worthy of the most critical consideration and
thorough trial. It is effectual.
734 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
TYPHILITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Inflammation of the caecum; typhilitis ster-
coralis.
This is an inflammation of the mucous membrane and deeper
structures of the caecum and ascending colon. The painfulness
and tenderness in the right iliac region simulate those in typhoid
fever, but the bowels are usually torpid, constipated, due largely
to mechanical obstruction from accumulation of feces in the
CaCC11111. -
The characteristic symptoms of this affection are, pain, ten-
derness and swelling, with some prominence of abdomen in the
right iliac region, distension of bowels, meteorism; local pain is
peculiarly characteristic. It is very likely to be diagnosed with
the condition called appendicitis, but may be differentiated from
it by the local prominence manifest in the region of the cecal
valve, due to presence of feces therein. While in appendicitis
there are pain, soreness, feeling of weight, tense, prominent abdo-
men and hard swelling in right iliac region, there is not the special
prominence in the locality of the caecum as there is in typhilitis.
Great depression of the vital powers ensues, proportionate to the
tissue involved.
THE TREATMENT.
The patient should be placed on the back, with the hips a
little elevated, and the operator should begin manipulating gently
on the abdomen over the parts affected, vibrating with the open
hand or fingers until the tenderness is somewhat overcome, then
deeper and firmer, so that gentle pressure may be made, begin-
ning in the right iliac fossae, pressing upward, following the
course of the ascending colon, and across the transverse portion,
then down the descending portion, moving the impacted feces
forward, onward, downward. Vibrating over whole abdomen
from right to left, kneading deeply yet gently, for fifteen or twenty
minutes, affords relief at first sitting. The vaso-motor area and
the whole spine are to be treated in the usual way, raising and
stretching the serrati and intercostales, manipulating the liver,
drawing up the abdomen from the iliac fossae as the patient
strongly exhales. The intelligent Osteopath will not fail to
meet the indications promptly. Flushing the abdomen is ur-
gently recommended in such cases, and would better be done
before manipulations begin. The treatment of the splanchnics
should be made first of all the treatments. Gentle treatment,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 735
general, should be given every day until cured. The kneading
process should always be done with much gentleness and care.
Roughness in manipulation is apt to be attended with after in-
flammation. Too much care in this regard can not be exercised
in this or any other inflammatory condition. Toleration comes
from gentleness to begin with. The primary object is to first
remove the pressure from the lumen of the colon, then to take off
the pressure producing the congestion in the walls of the intes-
tine, so as to restore the normal function. These objects are
accomplished by this treatment. It is often a matter of sur-
prise to operator and patient to see the astonishing results of this
treatment, even when other means have failed.
APPENDICITIS.
SYNONYMS. Inflammation of the appendix vermiformis;
perityphilitis.
This is an inflammation of the appendix and connective tissue
around and in the vicinity of the caecum (or localized peritonitis),
eventuating in suppuration, Sloughing or abscess.
The attributable cause of this condition is impaction of the
appendix with a foreign substance in the canal. The symptoms
are a feeling of weight, Soreness and pain in the deep structure of
the right iliac region, frequently accompanied with vomiting, ten-
derness to that extent that the right limb is kept constantly drawn
up, to relax the abdominal muscles, in order to relieve pressure.
The abdomen becomes tense, prominent, hard, tympanitic; a
gradual rise of temperature and pulse, drawn, pinched counte-
nance, indicative of intense suffering. The special tendency of
the disease is to suppurate. Pronounced chills usher in this pro-
cess, and followed soon by high fever and intense pain, throbbing
and great restlessness. It is distinguishable from typhoid fever
by a lack of prodromes; from typhilitis, by absence of colicky
pains, and the tympanitis preceding the presence of the tumor.
As it is expected that the Osteopath will be able to cure this
condition without a surgical operation to remove the offending
member, it ought to be understood that sometimes a case goes
beyond the purview of manipulations, and resort must be had to
the knife; but in the great majority of cases, if taken in time, they
are curable without surgery or surgical interference—a thing that
is perhaps too frequently resorted to. .
736 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT. .
The attempt should be to speedily arrest the inflammatory
process. This usually may be done by the following course of
manipulations: Place the patient on the left side in such a posi-
tion as to relax all of the muscles of the right iliac region, then
begin with the vibratory movements of the fingers, as gently as
possible at first, and gradually manipulating the deeper structure
in that area until toleration is obtained; then have the patient
take long, deep inhalations, while the intestines are gently drawn
upward and out of the iliac fossae; then, continuing the manipu-
lations over the abdomen so as to remove all the sources of
congestion. Next, take hold of the right wrist, and stretch the
muscles' of the right side upward, thoroughly, strongly, and
treat either side of the spine all the way down as the arm is
raised and lowered, giving general treatment as indicated for such
conditions, same as for other general conditions of inflammations
in abdominal region, and be gentle, persistent, patient, thorough.
Hot baths, hot water injection, hot local applications should be
brought into requisition whenever indicated. The colon should
by all means be flushed in this affection. The vaso-motor area
should receive attention to control arterial circulation. Much
depends upon the care of the patient, the gentleness of the manip-
ulations in a case of appendicitis, as well as in all abdominal in-
flammations. No rough, bungling treatment should be indulged
in for a moment. Discretion, caution, are necessary.
Treat the lumbar area thoroughly.
PROCTITIS.—RECTITIS.
SYNoNYMs. Catarrh of the rectum; dysentery.
This means an inflammatory condition of the mucous mem-
brane of the rectum and anus. The symptoms are pain, tenes-
mus, frequent stools of mucus, pus and blood, hardened feces, an
uneasy, burning sensation in the rectum, stools wrapped with
mucus, hard lumps passed with much straining and pain, fre-
quently with prolapsus of mucous membrane at each stool. It is
generally attended with constipation, enlarged prostate in the
male, hemorrhoids, stranguary, and in females with prolapsus of
11tert1S. -
THE TREATMENT.
As in all other cases of inflammation, there has preceded it a
state of congestion, and decomposition of the elements of the
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 737
blood and waste products are the result. The terminal end fila-
ments of the sympathetic and motor nervous system have been
denuded, separated, and an effort on the part of the system is
taking place to restore the breech. The pressure still exists.
What are the indications? Take off the pressure, send in healthy
arterial blood to build up the tissue, furnish it the material. Reg-
ulate the circulation of the blood first. Stimulate the spinal
nerves, the splanchnics, and treat the liver, stomach; manipulate
the abdomen carefully and thoroughly, deeply; divulse the sphinc-
ters gently, strongly, gradually; bathe the parts with water hot
as can be borne, using it freely with a fountain syringe, ten or
twenty minutes at a sitting; then put into the rectum a teaspoon-
ful of bovinine after the bathing, three times a day. Bend back in
lumbar region, gently, over knees, backward as strongly , as
patient can well bear for a couple of minutes once a day. Drink
freely of hot water, rest quietly, breathe deeply several times at a
sitting, and every three hours. Oxygenate the blood. Draw up
the pelvic viscera from the iliac fossae carefully, when the patient
is lying down and limbs flexed. Use gentle vibratory manipula-
‘tions over the abdomen once a day at least. Careful and gentle
divulsion need not be done oftener than every two or three days.
This course will surely relieve the case and cure it in a short
time. No medicines are required.
INTESTINAL OCCLUSION.
SYNoNYMs. Obstruction; strangulation; invagination.
This occurs suddenly or gradually, and is attended with more
or less pain, nausea, vomiting, a constipated condition of the
bowels, and resulting in collapse, and death if not relieved. It has
been attributed to accumulation within the bowel of hardened
feces (an improbable result, truly), foreign bodies, stricture, ulcer-
ation, cicatrices, pressure against the bowel, strangulations, inva-
gination, twisting of intestines.
With more or less suddenness of onset, this condition
assumes grave characteristics. The site of the occlusion can rare-
ly be exactly determined, but the pains gradually become intensi-
fied, tenderness in limited areas over the abdomen, and the ster-
coraceous eructations become characteristic, the abdomen be-
coming intensely hard, pulse rapid, feeble; cold, clammy perspir-
ation all over body, cold extremities, constipated.
738 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
THE TREATMENT.
It would be useless to recommend the ordinary course of
treatment pursued by medical men in this critical situation. It
being a physical displacement, it requires physical manipulations
to restore a normal condition. Under the old way of treatment it
always has been considered a grave condition, but we hope to
render it less so before we dismiss the subject. In the first place,
the earlier the operator is called to see or treat the case, the more
likely the success, or the sooner remedied.
To begin, however, stretch the abdominal muscles strongly
upward, extending both arms strongly above the head, the patient
lying on the back, with hips elevated a few inches higher than the
shoulders, and both limbs flexed on the abdomen, and if possi-
ble, have the patient inhale deeply, retaining the air in the lungs
for a half to one minute, while the arms are being extended.
next, raise one arm strongly above the head, placing the fingers
on the side of the dorsal vertebrae; press strongly, while stretch-
ing arm taut at the side of the head, and let it down rather sud-
denly, still holding the fingers hard against the back at the angles
of the ribs in the splanchnic area. Now, with the patient lying on
the back, with limbs flexed, vibrate carefully, over the abdomen,
gradually increasing the force as much as the patient can bear
without producing pain, and manipulate in the direction of the
ascending colon, following it in its course; then gently knead the
whole bowel, drawing it up from the iliac fossae, and use pressure
along down the lumbar vertebrae and as low down as the last
sacral, lifting all pressure from the nerves along the whole spine.
Press gently on vaso-motor area for three to five minutes. Unite
the two forces through the splanchnics. Lastly, have the
patient lie on the left side and fill from a fountain syringe the
colon full of water as warm as the patient can bear,
and after it is passed out, repeat again, but have patient
retain it as long as practical or possible. This mechani-
cally assists in adjusting intestines. Turning the patient on the
stomach or side and pressing against the lumbar region while the
limb is drawn strongly backward, or away from body, in a circui-
lar-backward move, will be in the line of treatment, and greatly
beneficial in adjusting the position of the abdominal viscera.

• • • • • •
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 74I
INTESTINAL PARASITES.—WORMS.
The recognized varieties are Taenia Solium, Taenia saginata,
Bothriocephalus latus. The taenia solium is the most common
in this country. It is denominated the “armed tapeworm” on
account of a double row of hooklets. The head measures about
one-fortieth of an inch in diameter; head is globular in shape,
slim neck, and gradually increasing in size as it merges into larger
segments resembling gourd seeds, and these segments are joined
together, and each segment contains a male and a female; and it
is said that an ordinary tapeworm has about five million ova.
This variety inhabits the upper portion of the small intestines,
The hooklets are imbedded in the mucous membrane. Their
presence is best determined by segments passed in the feces. It
is thought that they are introduced into the stomach by food or
drink. The taenia solium varies in length from a few feet to
sixty feet or more. It is thought to come from pork, partially
cooked. This variety is termed the cysticercus cellulosus.
The tenia saginata is an unarmed variety, derived from eat-
ing beef, and is termed the cysticercus bovis. The bothrioce-
phalus latus is also unarmed, and is said to be derived from
eating fish.
The symptoms of the presence of tapeworm are not always
clear cut, but their actual presence is determined by segments
being occasionally passed with the stools. There is usually col-
icky pain in the stomach and bowels, inordinate appetite, hunger
for fatty diet, an all-gone feeling at the stomach, emaciation, con-
tinual fainty feeling that food satisfies for a time, emaciation, pal-
pitation, and not infrequently pruritis at anus and nose. Many
of these symptoms are present in disorders of the digestive tract
when no parasites exist. The remedies that remove the one will
remove all varieties. When present; it should certainly be gotten
rid of.
THE TREATMENT.
The first and important thing to do for the removal of these
parasites is to turn in on it the bile. The increased quantity of
bile increases the peristalsis of the intestines, and often causes
the worm to let go his hold, and the movement onward prevents
his reinserting his hooklets in the mucous membrane, and there-
by he passes from the bowel bodily. It requires three or four
days’ treatment of the liver to consummate the desired object.
There are several mechanical means of removing it from the
742 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
intestine, and the choice is immaterial. The Felix mass (or ext.
of male fern) is a popular means. A tea of the pomegranate root-
bark is another means. Pepo Extract is another. Grated cocoa,
eaten in large quantities, with a free use of sweet milk, is another
method used. The active principle of granutum (pellitorine) is
the surest remedy. If a normal circulation of the blood is kept
up, parasites can not remain in the body. It will be found in all
cases that the depression of nerve force exists prior to the exist-
ence of parasites of any kind, and needs righting. Sulphuric
ether or chloroform, in ten-drop doses on sugar, with cathartic,
is effectual.
The taenia solium, after it is a fixture in the intestinal canal, is
only gotten rid of by positively removing “the head.” The bow-
els should be thoroughly cleansed of all the fecal contents by mild
mechanical means, such as Oleum ricina, and fasting for a couple
of days, drinking freely of hot water, Osteopathically stirring up
the liver and stimulating the splanchnic nervous area, and living
on food that is taken up by absorption in the stomach. The
rational treatment (increasing intestinal peristalsis), with the
presence of bile, secures satisfactory results without any other
agencies.
ROUND WORMS.—THREAD WORM.
Other varieties of intestinal parasites are, Ascaris lumbri-
coides and the Oxyuris vermicularis.
The ascaris is the most common variety that affects the
human family. They inhabit the small intestines most fre-
quently, although they are found in the stomach, and may be in
the alimentary tract anywhere—even up in the throat. They
vary in size, but measure from an eighth to a fourth of an inch
in diameter, and are usually ten inches long, numbering in some
cases several hundred in one person—even found in large “knots.”
The oxyuris (or thread worm) is denominated “seat worm,” and
resembles a white thread, and is usually quite small, measuring
about a sixth to a half an inch in length. It inhabits the large
intestine, and especially the rectum, sometimes completely cov-
ering the entire mucous membrane, and migrating to the genital
organs, producing intense itching of the parts. These varieties
are so common that a further description seems superfluous.
Various means have been instituted to get rid of them. Like all
other parasites that infest the human body, there is first a degen-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 743
eration of the tissues of the body, and especially an unhealthy
condition of the intestinal tract, that furnishes a breeding or gen-
erative spot for them before they enter therein, or before their
presence is manifest. Chemical changes in the elementary con-
stituents due to nervous depression result in a compatible resting
place for them in which to live and generate.
THE TREATMENT.
Correct the digestive system. The overtaxed digestive
organs must have rest. This is the first desideratum. Restore
the nerve forces by treatment in the vaso-motor area, the splanch-
nics, along the lumbar areas, and right the torpid liver; arouse
all of the secretions, the glandular organs from the salivary to
the Peyerian follicles, and the lumbricales migrate for other
climes. To remove worms and leave the digestive organs un-
cured, does no good. The vermicide most common and most
effectual in the ascaris variety is Santonine. For the local re-
moval of the thread worm, inject into the bowel or rectum lime
water, from one to four ounces. This destroys them imme-
diately. Then follow that up with salt water; one teaspoonful
of salt to a pint of water is strong enough—effectual. The Oste-
opathic treatment should be used with an eye to restoration of
normal digestive conditions. Then the worms will not be found
to inhabit the intestinal tract.
HEMORREHOIDS.—PILES.
Before considering the pathological condition recognized as
piles, it will be well to consider the venous system of that part
of the body. The rectum derives its blood from the internal
pudic artery, the inferior hemorrhoidal being a branch thereof.
The veins begin at the lower end of the rectum, forming the
superior hemorrhoidal veins, which unite to help form the inferior
mesenteric and the middle and inferior hemorrhoidal, and these
terminate in the internal iliac. The portal and general venous
systems have a free communication by means of the branches
composing this plexus. The hemorrhoidal branches from the in-
ferior mesenteric inosculate with those of the internal iliac, and
thus establish a communication between the portal and
the general venous systems. Besides this anastimosis be-
tween the portal vein and the branches of the vena
cava, other anastimoses between the portal systemic veins
744 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
are formed by the communication—between the gastric
veins, which empty themselves into the vena azygos minor;
between the left renal vein and the veins of the intestines, espe-
cially of the colon and duodenum; between the veins of the round
ligament of the liver and the portal veins; between the superficial
branches of the portal veins of the liver and the phrenic veins.
It is a noted fact that the hemorrhoidal veins gather up all of
the blood distributed there by the arterial system, and either
empty it into the inferior mesenteric or the internal iliac, and any-
thing that obstructs the normal return of the blood in any of the
veins that return the blood from the lower extremities causes a
varicose condition of the limbs. Any obstruction interfering
with the return of blood through the iliac or mesenteric veins
would cause the same or a similar condition in the veins of the
rectum. This is denominated hemorrhoids or piles. Hemor-
rhoids is a varicose condition of the veins of the rectum.
It is necessarily a result of an impingement of the sympa-
thetic nervous system, which is generally due to a pressure
on the return circulation of the venous blood. This may occur
as a result of congestion of other and remote organs—the liver,
the spleen, the colon, the sigmoid flexure; in the latter from the
impaction of feces. Hemorrhoids are sometimes due to the
effects of cathartics. Some agents (such as aloes) have a special
influence in their production, by relaxing the tissue, mucous
membrane and venous walls. Excessive irritation of the sphinc-
ter muscles, and pressure upon the inferior hemorrhoidal plexus
of nerves, produce them. Inflammation or congestion of adja-
cent structures, interfering with the venous return circulation,
may frequently become a factor in the production of hemorrhoids.
Its removal cures the varicosity of the hemorrhoidal veins. Cor-
recting undue sphinctral contraction frees the venous system and
the veins disengorge, the piles cease. Ostopathic treatment saves
many a rectum from surgical interference by taking off the press-
ure that produces hemorrhoids.
THE TREATMENT.
An examination of the rectum should be made with a bivalve
speculum, to ascertain the condition of the parts. If tumors ex-
ist, they will be found either above the internal sphincter muscle,
on the muscle itself, or below, in which latter case there is usually
more or less of knotty, lumpy projection outside of the rectum,
in the form of a bluish colored, round, intensely sensitive, painful,
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 745
hard tumor. This is due to pressure on the vein above, holding
the blood in the vein, dilating it by pressure of the blood within.
Tumors formed between the folds or within the grasp of the
internal sphincter muscle are usually pressed upward or down-
ward, and form large or small tumors, according to the size of
the veins involved; and the tumors formed above are generally
due to pressure in the sigmoid flexure, or lower bowels, or press-
ure in the iliac fossa. The removal of the tissue involved to cure
the piles is like removing the bottom of a vessel to get the con-
tents out. If the pressure is removed, the piles remove them-
selves. There are so many ways for the venous blood to be emp-
tied into the larger channels that it seems scarcely worth while to
suggest a way to the intelligent anatomist, when he understands
the philosophy of Osteopathic manipulations. To open up the
normal channels and let the pent-up congestion flow out is the
province of the Osteopath, and hence surgery is a useless dernier
7"eSSOrf.
If we find the cause to be constipation, the remedy is to cure
the constipation. If the trouble comes from pressure upon the
iliac veins, remove that. If from pressure on the inferior or
superior mesenteric veins, remove that. If from enlargement of
the liver or spleen, attention must be given these organs. Treat-
ment of these organs is given elsewhere.
The ordinary treatment, Osteopathic, is made by the use of
the forefinger, introduced into the rectum, the palmar surface
turned backward, reaching up and backward above the internal
sphincter muscle, and placed on either side of the coccyx, straight-
ening that if necessary, or at least adjusting it to a normal curve,
and using considerable pressure and pulling the muscular struc-
ture on either side of the coccyx sidewise and backward, stretch-
ing the internal sphincter, and pressing on whatever tumors are
found in the rectum, slowly, gently, manipulating them till soft-
ened, and the blood is more or less removed from them—at one
sitting; then gently withdrawing finger, with the thumb clasped
against integument until the finger is drawn out of the rectum.
This treatment should be repeated every three to five days until
cured. By placing the thumb and fingers of the other hand on
the outside of the sacrum and on the sacral nerves, pressing
firmly, a condition of desensitization ensues, and the internal
effects of the treatment become less painful. This treatment is
done without the use of an anaesthetic.
Enlargement of the prostate gland is treated the same way—
746 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
only the palm of the finger is turned forward, and strong manip-
ulations made outward on the sides of the gland, which reduce
it wonderfully, even at one sitting. Use Vaseline as a lubricant
for the fingers. This mixture is appropriate for use on the finger
in the rectum: Pulv. opium, x. grs; tannic acid, xx. grs; vasel-
ine, I ounce; mix. Ç
HERNIA.
SYNoNYMs. Rupture; a break.
This being such a common affection, and so little is done for
it except along the line of “trusses” that we feel constrained to add
in this book new suggestions of the possibility of relieving it by
Osteopathic manipulations. To reduce it when “down,” or to
“replace it” during “strangulation,” is no simple thing to do, until
experience or instruction is had ; so we are inclined to suggest the
following. To reduce it, put the patient on the back, shoulders
lowest if possible, or raise the pelvis, then have the limb flexed on
the side of the rupture, catching hold of the limb as if treating
varicose veins; firmly, gently, strongly flex the leg on the thigh,
thigh on the abdomen, using the fingers of the hand in the groin
to press around the hernia. Flexing a time or two usually re-
duces the hernia. To manipulate to cure the hernia is to be done
by having the patient lie on the back, flex both limbs so as to
relax the abdominal muscles, then knead the several muscles in
such a way as to equalize the tension of their muscular fiber, and
the rent is lessened as each manipulation is made. These should
be made three times each week. Several cases have been cured
by these means—this course. We surely advise all to faithfully
try it. There is no reason that it should not be cured this way.
Relaxation of the muscular fiber, due to straining, produces it;
equalization of the force of retention will restore the condition,
persistently followed. Try it. Free lumbar nerves.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 747.
DISEASES OF THE SKIN
To overcome the prejudice of the people concerning the use
of salves, unguents, lotions and “blood purifiers” is the hardest
task imaginable. -
While the expression regarding spiritual things, “Ye make
void the commandments of God by your traditions,” has stood
out in bold relief for centuries, there are few who draw conso-
lation therefrom by a return to the commandment itself, and obey-
ing it. When foreign substances are in the system, it continually
seeks to rid itself of the annoyance; yet we stand aghast, watch
it wriggle, suffer, exhaust itself in a vain effort, and instead of
attempting to relieve the pressure, add more to it. How foolish !
To make the country tillable, healthy, agriculturally profitable
at the head of streams, to remove the water that dams up, backs
up and covers the area, the rubbish farther down is removed,
giving vent to the water along its course “to the sea,” and then
the utility of the soil is realized in rich harvests of golden grain.
Apply the illustration to the human system: Take off the pressure
across the veins, let the debris be carried out, back to the place
of purification (the lungs), and the same effect is experienced.
The whole philosophy of this science rests upon this principle, and
that it may be carried out is the design of this treatise. Study
every relationship of it to every condition found in the body, and
apply it where applicable, and favorable results may be expected.
The physician's quiver is usually a small one when it comes to
prescribing for the various ills of the physical body. Some have
few, some more remedies, but we venture the assertion that a
larger area of the pathological conditions is attempted to be cov-
ered by a fewer number of remedies, with the ordinary physician,
than are recommended (manipulations) by us to accomplish the
object—remove the cause of trouble (a seemingly patent expres–
sion among doctors).
Whilst there may not be the slightest relationship of the
remedies used by the medicine vendors to the object to be accom-
plished (and it seldom does it), yet the victim from habit gulps
it down without a question or a doubt, thinking the doctor knows
his business, and it is all right. True, isn’t it? But if we show the
“better way” it is regarded as an innovation, an infringement on
748 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
the long-established and time-honored rights of the learned med-
ical profession that calls for summary vengeance at their hands.
We feel assured that this prejudice (for it is nothing else) will
yield as investigation is made. This science will stand all the
criticism that a scrutinizing public sees fit to apply to it, and in
the end stand out in bold relief as the greatest boon that was ever
conferred upon mankind in the way of amelioration from physical
ills! It is not questioned by those who know, and these are not
a few, and the application is universally satisfactory.
DISORDERS OF SECRETION.
SEBORRHOEA.
SYNONYMS. Acne sebacea; pityriasis; tinea furfuracea; dan-
druff.
DEFINITION. A functional disorder of the sebaceous glands
of the skin; characterized by an excessive and abnormal secre-
tion of sebaceous matter, forming upon the skin either as an oily
coating, or in crusts and scales. -
VARIETIES. Seborrhoea oleosa; seborrhoea sicca.
CAUSEs. In newly-born infants an increased secretion of
sebaceous matter—the vernix caseosa—is a physiological pro-
cess. The origin of the disease is for the most part illy under-
stood, anaemia being a factor in many cases.
PATHoLogy. Seborrhoea is a functional derangement of the
glands; if it be allowed to become very chronic, there occurs
atrophy of the glands and follicles.
SYMPTOMs. The affection may occur upon any portion of
the body, its most frequent seat being, however, the scalp (sebor-
rhoea capitis or pityriasis capitis), and next in frequency the face
(seborrhoea faciei). Seborrhoea oleosa appears as an oily, greasy
coating upon the skin, without hyperaemia, and not attended
with itching. The secretion is of an oily character, the quantity
at times being so great as to collect in minute drops of a clear,
yellowish fluid upon the surface.
The most common seat for this variety is the face (sebor-
rhoea faciei), and nose (seborrhoea nasi). Seborrhoea sicca con-
sists in the formation of dry, more or less greasy, masses of scales,
or crusts of a grayish, yellowish, or brownish-yellow color, having

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 75 I
a strong tendency to adhere to the skin, and attended with decid-
ed itching. Occurring upon the scalp—seborrhoea capitis—it is
a frequent source of premature baldness.
DIAGNOSIS. Seborrhoea capitis may be mistaken for dry
eczema, but the former is always a dry disease, while in eczema
moisture has occurred at some period of the affection. The scales
in Seborrhoea are very abundant and pale; in eczema the scales
are scanty and reddish, the parts irritated, infiltrated, and thick-
ened.
Seborrhoea sicca and psoriasis have many points of resem-
blance, whether occurring on the scalp or on the body. In sebor-
rhoea the scales are minute or caked, grayish or yellowish in
color, of an unctuous feel, and usually uniformly diffused. In
psoriasis the scales are very dry, abundant, thick, white, irregu-
larly dispersed, with intervening healthy skin, and the surface
beneath the scales is always reddish and inflamed. The clinical
histories of the diseases are entirely different.
PROGNoSIs. If properly treated, favorable, although the
affection is obstinate to eradicate.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment, Osteopathically, consists of manipulations
that effect a return of blood in the venoles, the waste material in
the lymph spaces, through the larger veins, giving room for new
material along the sides of the capillaries. This relieves the
whole difficulty and restoration ensues. After so treating the
neck, and extending same, raise the clavicles, chest and chest
muscles, so as to give room to expand the lungs, that oxygen
may be permitted to enter therein; make vibratory manipulations
around the scalp or wherever eruption is. This soon starts up
the vital forces and restoration ensues. It is unreasonable to
suppose that an eruption would get well until the cause is
removed—the obstruction.
In children this affection is quite common, and very annoy-
ing indeed. Osteopathy effectually cures it if applied three times
a week, for it removes the condition called stasis, due to venous
engorgement. The veins being the sewers of the system, the
debris must be permitted to move on. Decomposition, the
breaking-down of tissue, results from impeded circulation, and it
must be removed bodily, physically, literally, then a normal con-
dition (health) ensues speedily. Tissue elements may be lacking
sometimes, then the proper one should be supplied, either in food
or in substance. The Kali sulph. is the one in this case.
752 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
COMEDO.
SYNONYMS. Acne punctata nigra; black-heads or worms.
DEFINITION. A disorder of the sebaceous glands; charac-
terized by retention in the excretory ducts of an inspissated secre-
tion which is visible upon the surface as yellowish or whitish pin-
point and pin-head-sized elevations, containing in their center
blackish points.
CAUSES. Among the causes assigned are anaemia; men-
strual disorders, urethral irritations, dyspepsia, and constipation.
PATHOLOGY. Comedo is an affection of the sebaceous
glands and ducts, consisting of an accumulation of serum and
epithelial cells in the glands and follicles, dilating the ducts to
such an extent as to produce the point or elevation upon the
surface. The obstructed gland may relieve itself, or it may con-
tinue distending until a papule is formed. The duct sometimes
contains small hairs, and also the microscopic mite—demodex
folliculorum—having a length of from I-150 to I-75 of an inch,
and breadth of about I-500 of an inch, which was at one time
erroneously supposed to be the cause of the affection.
SYMPTOMs. Essentially a chronic affection, observed for
the most part on the face, neck, chest and back. Each single
elevation or black-head or point is designated a comedo, or if a
number, in the plural, as comedones.
Each comedo is small, varying from a pin-point to a pin-head
in size, having a brownish or blackish appearance, from the dust
or dirt that has adhered to their unctuous surface. If they form
in great numbers upon the face they are disfiguring, giving the
individual the appearance of having had minute grains of powder
implanted in the skin. There are no evidences of inflammation
unless acne is associated, but, on the contrary, the skin has a
dirty, greasy, unwashed appearance. -
DIAGNOSIS. There is no condition resembling comedo, so
that its recognition is easy, unless complicated with acne; but
even then the inflammatory appearance of acne should prevent
a11 error.
PROGNoSIS. Favorable, although often remarkably obstin-
ate.
THE TREATMENT.
Nothing succeeds like success, and there is no success with-
out favorable results of effort. The secretions in this affection
become poisonous from lack of circulation, the deficiency of pan-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 753
creatic secretion, and the over-crowding of the digestive tract
with the fats. The splanchnic nervous system is at fault. The
digestive tract should receive special attention until corrected.
Bathe the face in salt and water (one teaspoonful to a pint of
water) several times a day, and rest the digestive organs from one
meal a day—breakfast is preferable—and the “black-heads” will
soon be exchanged for normal, smooth, healthy skin. The
glandular system acts normally when the pressure is removed and
the normal elements generated in the system, or supplied when
lacking. Proper vibratory manipulations should be made on
the abdomen, over the liver, spleen, pancreas and stomach as
often as three times a week, to cure such cases.
MILIUM.
SYNONYMS. Grutum; tubercula miliaria or sebacea; acute
punctata albida. -
DEFINITION. An accumulation of serum in the sebaceous
glands which are minus their excretory ducts; characterized by
the formation of small, roundish, whitish, sebaceous, non-inflam-
matory elevations, situated immediately beneath the epidermis.
CAUSE. The origin of the affection is nerve pressure of end
fibers.
PATHOLOGY. The sebaceous gland is distended with the
sebum, which is unable to escape, owing to the obliteration of the
duct, nor can the contents be squeezed out, as no sign of aperture
is to be found, the formation being completely inclosed. Rarely
the retained secretion undergoes a metamorphosis into hard, cal-
careous, stone-like masses—sebaceous concretions or cutaneous
calculi. -
SYMPTOMs. Milia may occur upon any portion of the body;
their usual seat, however, is upon the face, forehead, and about
the eyes. They form gradually, are about the size of a millet
seed, of a whitish, pearl, or yellowish color, hard, and of a
rounded shape, giving the sensation to the touch of hard bodies
embedded in the skin. They are not associated with inflamma-
tory symptoms.
DIAGNOSIS. Milium and comedo are somewhat similar in
appearance; the differences are that in milium the sebaceous
gland is distended without an opening, while in comedo the
duct of the gland is always patulous upon the surface. Milium
754 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
usually exists singly, the skin looking normal; while comedo is
more general, the surface having a soiled and greasy appear-
211CC.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable.
TREATMENT. Same as for Comedo.
SEBACEOUS CYST.
SYNoNYMs. Wen; sebaceous tumor; encysted tumor.
DEFINITION. A distension of the sebaceous gland and duct,
with hypertrophy of the walls, which forms a thick, tough sack or
cyst; characterized by the appearance of a firm or soft, more or
less rounded tumor, having its seat in the skin or subcutaneous
connective tissue.
CAUSE. Obstructed capillary circulation.
PATHOLOGY. Hypertrophy of the gland and duct walls, the
result of pressure from the accumulated contents, which consist of
the altered products of the sebaceous secretion.
SYMPTOMs. The development of wens is slow and insidious.
The localities where they are most commonly developed are the
scalp, face, back, and scrotum. - -
The tumors occur singly or in numbers, in size from a pea
to a walnut, or larger, in shape either rounded, flattened, or semi-
globular; in consistency they are either hard or soft, and doughy;
they are freely movable and painless.
DIAGNoSIs. Sebaceous cysts may be confounded with fatty
tumors.
TREATMENT. Excision and careful and thorough dissection
of the cyst. dº
HYPERIDROSIS.
SYNoNYMs. Hydrosis; ephidrosis; excessive sweating.
DEFINITION. A functional disorder of the sweat glands;
characterized by an increased secretion of sweat. The sweating
may be either general or partial.
CAUSEs. Often undetermined; occasionally inherited;
nervous derangements; malaria; diseases of the heart and lungs.
PATHOLOGY. A functional derangement of the sudoriparous
glands, over which the vaso-motor system has control. The
character of the secretion, chemically, may not differ from the
normal.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 755
SYMPTOMs. Universal general sweating, such as occurs dur-
ing the course of pneumonia, rheumatism, tuberculosis, typhoid
and other febrile maladies, can hardly be considered a distinct
affection.
Hyperidrosis may be acute or chronic, the amount slight or
large, being constant or paroxysmal, the extent general or local,
and it may or may not be symmetrical.
Bromidrosis is the designation when the secretion has an
offensive odor.
Chromidrosis is the designation when the fluid poured forth
is variously colored. Uridrosis, when the excretion from the
sweat glands contains the elements of the urine and particularly
urea. Phosphoridrosis, when the perspiration appears luminous
in the dark.
Local hyperidrosis occurs most commonly upon the palms,
soles, axilla, and genitalia.
Hyperidrosis of the palms may be so profuse that the fluid
accumulates and keeps the parts constantly macerated, the wear-
ing of gloves being impossible, for as soon as the parts are wiped
dry they are again bathed in the secretion. Jamieson states that
hyperidrosis of the hands is very common in those who are daily
excessive spirit drinkers.
Hyperidrosis of the soles is a disagreeable and often distress-
ing condition, as the socks and shoes become saturated, and thus
keep the soles constantly bathed, allowing the macerated epider-
mis to peel off, leaving a more tender skin exposed, causing pain
and distress when walking. The maceration of the epidermis,
the secretion about the toes, together with the moisture of the
socks and the soles of the shoes, promote the rapid development
of the bacteria foetidum ; all these together produce a most dis-
agreeable, disgusting, and persistent odor, which is termed bro-
midrosis pedum.
Hyperidrosis of the genitalia attacks males more particularly,
giving rise to a disagreeable, penetrating odor.
The sweating may be limited to one side—unilateral hyperi-
drosis.
PROGNoSIs. The majority of cases are extremely intract-
able; complete recovery is rare in a fair proportion, while some
cases are easily relieved.
. - THE TREATMENT.
4 After the general treatment to promote a free circulation of
the blood, have the patient lie on the stomach, face down, and
756 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
finish up the treatment by vibrating the lumbar area upward from
the sacro-lumbar to the dorso-lumbar region, deeply, firmly,
slowly, for several moments, then use friction along each side of
the spines upwards, with the fingers' ends, several times at one
sitting. This treatment reverses nerve action, changes the condi-
tion and character of the circulation, and cures the case. Some
cases require the Nat. mur. as a tissue-builder, and to supply the
chloride of sodium molecules in the system. The 6x potency is
the most suitable, and used in the form of tablets, trice, daily.
The ordinary assimilable quantity of these triturates is two to four
grains at once. -
ANIDROSIS.
DEFINITION. A functional disorder of the sweat glands;
characterized by a diminished or insufficient secretion of sweat.
CAUSEs. The result of a congenital deficiency of the sweat
glandular apparatus. Local anidrosis may result from injury to
a nerve, during the course of chronic diseases of the skin, as
ichthyosis, eczema, psoriasis, lepra, and elephantiasis arabum.
In rare cases an individual ceases to sweat entirely at times; in
such cases the general health is impaired, and during the hot
season much suffering may ensue.
TREATMENT. Same as for Hyperidrosis.
SUDAMINA.
SYNoNYMs. Sudamen; miliaria crystallina (Hebra).
DEFINITION. A non-inflammatory affection of the sweat
glands; characterized by the rapid development of millet-seed-
sized, translucent, whitish vesicles, in great numbers, upon any
portion of the body.
CAUSEs. A high temperature, causing unusual activity of
the sudoriparous glands.
PATHOLOGY. The glands being excited beyond their capa-
city for normal excretion, the excessive fluid, instead of escaping
upon the surface, from some cause collects between the layers of
the epidermis, in the form of minute, translucent pin-point-sized
vesicles.
SYMPTOMs. Each minute vesicle is distinct, but they exist
in great numbers, very closely resembling drops of free sweat.
They develop rapidly, never coalesce, become puriform, or rup-
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 757
ture. Fresh crops form from time to time. Their duration is
transitory; the fluid is absorbed, the covering of each dries, form-
ing a thin, delicate membrane, which disappears as a slight des-
quamation. *
TREATMENT. Same as for Hyperidrosis.
HYPERAEMIAS OF THE SKIN.
ERYTHEMA SIMPLEX.
DEFINITION. An acute affection of the skin, in which occurs
an abnormal quantity of blood in the dermal vessels; character-
ized by discoloration, which disappears upon pressure, and with
more or less local increase of temperature.
VARIETIES. Idiopathic erythema; symptomatic erythema.
CAUSEs. Idiopathic Erythema-Heat, cold, pressure, fric-
tion, or the contact of irritants, such as mustard, arnica, and dye-
stuffs. Symptomatic erythema occurs most frequently in child-
hood, from diseases of the stomach and intestines; during the
course of the various exanthemata.
SYMPTOMs. A more or less rapidly developed redness of the
skin, varying in color from pink or light red to dark red, which
disappears upon pressure, to rapidly return again. The extent
and form of the congestion vary according to the cause, at times
being as small as a coin and isolated, and again diffused over a
large area. The temperature of the congested part is slightly
above the normal. Slight itching and burning are usually asso-
ciated with the discoloration. -
DIAGNOSIs. Erythema resembles acute dermatitis in color,
but the subjective symptoms of the latter are so decided that an
error should not occur. -
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment demanded in this condition is the vaso-motor,
and general treatment to equalize the normal circulation of the
blood. Give attention to the digestive organs and kidneys.
758 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
INFLAMMATIONS OF THE SKIN.
ECZEMA.
SYNoNYMs. Tetter; salt rheum; scall.
DEFINITION. A non-contagious inflammation of the skin;
characterized by any or all of the results of inflammation, at once,
or in succession, such as erythema, papules, vesicles or pustules,
accompanied by more or less infiltration and itching, terminating
in a serous discharge, with the formation of crusts, or in desgua-
mation. ;
ForMs. Acute; chronic.
VARIETIES. Eczema erythematosum ; eczema vesiculosum ;
papulosum ; eczema pustulosum ; eczema rubrum; eczema squa-
mosum ; eczema fissum; eczema verrucosum ; eczema Sclerosum.
CAUSEs. Eczema attacks persons in all spheres, the rich,
the poor, the infant, or the aged, and males or females. Many
families, especially those having the “catarrhal predisposition or
peculiarity of constitution,” seem more liable; indeed, it appears
probable that a predisposition to eczema may be transmitted from
parent to child. Among the causes suggested are: dentition,
improper food, gastro-intestinal disorders, intestinal parasites,
deficient urinary secretion, the rheumatic and gouty diathesis,
vaccination, prolonged contact of hot fomentations, heat and cold,
and contact with the poison vine (rhus toxicodendron) and poison
tree (rhus venenata). Obstructed circulation and nerve pressure,
usually the splanchnics.
PATHOLOGY. Eczema is a catarrhal inflammation of the
skin—a dermatitis, with superficial serous exudation. There is
first hyperaemia, or congestion of the vessels of the skin—eczema
erythematosum, when uniformly distributed, eczema papulosum,
when the congestion is limited to distinct points. 'The hyperae-
mia is soon followed by a serous exudation. If the superficial
exudation be profuse enough to form small drops, and if the
epidermis possess sufficient resisting power not to give away im-
mediately before it, vesicles form, producing the variety known
as eczema vesiculosum ; if the vesicles contain a large admixture
of young cells, so that if the serum be turbid, yellow, and purulent,
the vesicles become pustules, termed eczema pustulosum ; if the
serous exudation be not sufficient to either elevate or break
through the epidermis, instead of either vesicles or pustules form-
ing there occur dry scales, rising from the reddened skin—eczema
së
|×
cae
|-
<
|-
∞
|-
C
E
C
8
|-N
----
C
|-
.ſº
----
..ºg
|-
.ſº
，
cae
#
|×
|-
|×
|-N
ſae
ſº
·
|-
^~

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 761
f
squamosum. When the exudation is sufficient to detach the epi-
dermis, thus exposing the red and moist corium, it is termed
eczema rubrum.
In chronic eczema the skin is subacutely inflamed; is very
much thickened, hardened, and infiltrated with cells which extend
throughout the entire corium, even into the subcutaneous con-
nective tissue. The papillae are enlarged, and at times may be
distinguished with the naked eye. Pigmentation may take place
in the deep layers of the rete and in the corium, especially about
the vessels.
SYMPTOMs. Eczema is the most common of all cutaneous
affections, with symptoms varying in accordance with the par-
ticular variety of the affection and location, although the general
characteristics of a catarrhal inflammation are present in all;
these are redness, either limited or diffused; heat, of the part
affected; swelling, the result of the serous exudation, giving rise
either to a discharge (weeping), with subsequent crusting, or to
the deposition of plastic material. The most constant, annoying,
and troublesome symptom is the itching, or at times burning,
which varies from that which is simply annoying to that which
is almost unendurable. -
Eczema runs its course either as an acute affection, lasting a
few weeks, not to return, or to return acutely at wide intervals,
or, as is much more frequently the case, it assumes a chronic state,
continuing with more or less variations for months, years, or
even a lifetime. It may appear upon any portion of the body,
or involve the whole integument (eczema universale). The varie-
ties are named in the order which the lesions assume at their
COrnmencement. -
Eczema Erythematosum.—An erythema or redness of the
surface, with a yellow tinge. The size of the macule may be very
small, or quite extensive, with irregular outlines. There may be
slight swelling of the patch, but no discharge occurs unless it be
where two surfaces come into contact (eczema intertrigo), as
about the genitalia. Cases without discharge are covered after a
few days with a thin film of dry, exfoliating epidermis or scale
(eczema squamosum). When a discharge (weeping) or moisture
occurs, it is followed with more or less crusting.
Intense itching is a constant symptom.
Eczema Papulosum, or Lichen Simplex,−This variety of
eczema appears in the form of small, rounded papules, the size of
a pin-head, of bright red, or at times dark red color; they may be
762 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
either discrete or confluent. In some cases all, while in others a
greater or less number, of the papules pass into vesicles and run
much the same course as vesicular eczema. The itching is of the
most intense character, leading to severe scratching, by which the
summits of the papules are torn, causing them to bleed, the blood
forming dark red crusts.
Eczema Vesiculosum—Begins with burning, pain, redness,
and swelling, followed by an immense number of minute vesicles,
either discrete or confluent, rapidly distending with a clear or
yellowish fluid and attended with intense itching. Soon the vesi-
cles rupture, the fluid rapidly diffusing over the surface and dry-
ing into yellowish, honey-like crusts. New crops of vesicles soon
follow, or if subsequent vesications do not occur, the fluid rapidly
diffuses over the excoriated surface, which also, in turn, dries into
large, yellowish crusts. After a variable time the various symp-
toms gradually subside.
Itching is the most prominent subjective symptom, is intense,
and gives rise to an irresistible desire to scratch.
All portions of the body are liable to this variety of eczema,
the most frequent location, however, being the face, and when
occurring in children is commonly known as crusta lactea.
Eczema Pustulosum, or Eczema Impetiginosum.—This
variety usually begins as vesicular eczema, the fluid rapidly
changing to pus. After a short period, during which the pustules
have increased in size, they burst, and the escaped fluid forms
thick, greenish-yellow crusts, which in turn, rapidly dry and fall
off, or crumble away.
The location of the variety is most usually upon the scalp and
face. It is stubborn to treatment. Itching is a prominent symp-
tom.
Eczema Rubrum, or Eczema Madidans—This is a variety
only from a clinical standpoint. It may result from any of the
foregoing varieties. The surface of the skin is inflamed and infil-
trated, red, moist, and weeping, the profuse serum rapidly drying
into thick, yellowish, greenish, or brownish crusts, the color de-
pending upon the character of the fluid, which may be serum,
pus, or blood from the exposed and lacerated corium. The crusts
adhere closely and firmly to the part, and unless removed by
mechanical means, may remain indefinitely, the disease pursuing
its course beneath. Eczema rubrum, or madidans, “then, pre-
sents two appearances—as it occurs with its crust, and as it exists
without this covering. In the one case the skin itself is altogether
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 763
obscured by a dirty, yellowish, or brownish crust; in the other
the skin presents a bright or violaceous red, punctate, wounded
surface, deprived in great part of its epidermis, and exuding a
scanty or profuse, clear or opaque, syrupy, yellowish fluid. Some-
times this is streaked with blood.” The itching and burning are
severe. It may develop upon any portion of the body, but is
most commonly seen upon the legs, particularly in elderly people.
Its course is chronic and increasing in severity.
Eczema Squamosum.—This is also a clinical variety. It
results from erythematous, vesicular, pustular, or papular varie-
ties of the affection, but more particularly the first named. A
typical case presents itself in the form of variously sized and
shaped reddish patches, which are dry, or more or less scaly, the
skin being more or less infiltrated or thickened. Its course is
usually chronic.
Eczema Fissum, or Rimosum.—Another clinical variety.
During the progress of the erythematous, vesicular, or pustular
varieties of eczema, cracks or fissures result when the lesion
occurs upon regions subject to constant motion, such as between
the fingers, toes, and the various joints. At times the fissures are
extensive and deep, and of a bright red color, showing the true
skin, and intensely painful upon motion. Chapped hands are typ-
ical instances of fissured eczema.
Eczema Sclerosum.—This variety of eczema, occurring most
commonly on the palms, soles, and finger tips, is characterized by
hypertrophy of the papillae, showing itself as hard, thickened,
infiltrated, localized patches, which are most apt to crack (eczema
fissum). -
Eczema Verrucosum, or Papillomatosum.—Differs from the
foregoing in that the thickened, infiltrated patch has a warty,
verrucous appearance. Its course is chronic.
Eczema Acutum et Chronicum.—The line which divides
these two conditions is drawn by means of the clinical and patho-
logical features. The course of eczema, in the majority of in-
stances, is chronic. It may be said that so long as the general
inflammatory symptoms are high and the secondary changes
slight, the affection is acute, and that when the process has settled
itself into a definite line of action, continually repeating itself and
e accompanied by secondary changes, it is chronic.
DIAGNOSIs. The many varieties in which eczema manifests
itself render the diagnosis a matter of importance. The follow-
ing characteristic features of eczema are of value in arriving at a
764 osTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
diagnosis: inflammation, swelling and oedema, thickening from
cell infiltration, redness, the discharge of moisture, followed by
crusting, on removal of which a moist surface is presented, and
itching and burning.
Erysipelas may be confounded with erythematous or vesicu-
lar eczema. The points of difference are the fever and other gen-
eral disturbances. The deep-seated inflammation of the skin,
rapidly spreading, with heat, swelling and oedema without moist-
ure, giving the surface a deep red, shining, and tense appearance,
are characteristic of erysipelas and very different from eczema.
Herpes and vesicular eczema bear some resemblance to each
other; herpes zoster is distinguished by the neuralgic pains which
are associated with it, and are never associated with eczema.
The other varieties of herpes occurring about the face and geni-
talia run their course in a few days, while eczema is of much
longer duration, and has a discharge followed by crusting.
Seborrhoea of the scalp and squamous eczema of the same
region closely resemble each other. In eczema, however, the
skin is more or less red, inflamed, and thickened, and the scales
larger, less abundant, and less greasy and drier than seborrhoea.
In eczema the scales are usually seated upon a circumscribed
patch, while in seborrhoea, as a rule, they cover the scalp uni-
formly. Itching occurs with both disorders. The history of the
two affections should be of material aid to render the diagnosis
clear; still, however, in many cases the difficulty is marked. Both
are frequent affections. .
Psoriasis should never be confounded with a typical case of
eczema, but chronic eczema, with infiltrated, inflammatory, scaly
patches, frequently looks very much like psoriasis.
THE TREATMENT.
The various forms of inflammations succumb to the treat-
ment for restoring normal circulation over, in, and throughout
the system. The means recommended should be used, and per-
sistently applied result in amelioration, generally.
The tissue elements sometimes are indicated (the Kali
sulph.), and attention to the terminal end filaments of the sympa-
thetic nerves in the sphincters, the liberation of the obstructed
venous channels, especially under the arms and in the angles of
limbs, at the elbows, knees and at the hips.
The use of chloride of sodium for excessive moisture is indi-
cated. The tissue elements should not be neglected. Certain
food known to excite the skin should be avoided. Due attention
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 765
to cleanliness should be had. The use of salt baths (not strong)
should not be forgotten. All of the varieties are usually amen-
able to general treatment persistently applied three times a week.
URTICARIA.
SYNoNYMs. Hives; nettle-rash.
DEFINITION. An inflammation of the skin characterized by
the development of wheals of a whitish, pinkish, or reddish color,
accompanied by stinging, pricking, and tingling sensations.
CAUSEs. Very frequently the result of sudden surface hyper-
aemia, or rather too rapid circulation through the superficial
capillaries, the result of exposure to heat. Irritants and poison
produce an attack when brought into contact with the skin. Gas-
tric, intestinal, hepatic, nephritic, ovarian, uterine, and bladder
derangements are very frequent causes. Certain medicaments;
malaria; nervous disorders; associated with purpura and rheuma-
tism ; pregnancy; lactation; menopause.
PATHOLOGY. An acute inflammation of the papillary layer
of the skin, characterized by the rapid development of a “wheal”
—a more or less firm elevation—consisting of a circumscribed
collection of a semi-fluid material, the result of a rapid exudation
into the upper layers of the skin. The production of the wheal is
the immediate result of a disturbance of the vaso-motor system,
which is shown by the interference of the circulation in the wheal,
the blood being driven from its center to its periphery, causing
the whitish apex and red areola, so characteristic of the developed
wheal.
SYMPTOMs. An attack of “hives” is characterized by the
sudden development of wheals upon the cutaneous surface, which
usually as suddenly disappear, their site being temporarily marked
by a spot of redness or hyperaemia.
With the appearance of the wheal occur distressing itching,
burning, tingling, crawling, pricking, and stinging sensations, to
relieve which the patient still further irritates, tears, or otherwise
wounds the surface by scratching, whence are often developed
deep-colored, flat, lenticular papules.
Very frequently an attack of “hives” is associated with fever,
headache, and gastric disorder. The “wheals” may appear upon
any portion of the body; their size varies from that of a pea to
that of a walnut or an egg—the “giant wheals”; the number vary-
766 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ing from a very few to being so numerous as to cover the whole
surface of the body. The shape, size, color, and number of the
wheals that may occur in any given case have given rise to a
number of names to designate the lesions. Thus, urticaria annu-
laris occurs in rings; urticaria figurata occurs in spirals; urticaria
vesiculosa has a vesicular development at the summit of the
wheal; urticaria bullosa, a bullous development at the summit;
urticaria papulosa, or lichen urticatus, the wheal and a small
papule are combined; urticaria tuberosa, or giant wheals; urti-
caria hemorrhagica, or purpurta urticaria, a combination of urti-
caria and purpura; urticaria evanida, a rapid appearance and dis-
appearance of the lesion; urticaria perstans, slow disappearance;
urticaria conferta, when the wheals are confluent; urticaria pig-
mentosa, where the wheals are succeeded by pigmentations of
the site, the tints varying from dark brown, greenish yellow, to a
chocolate color; urticaria febrilis, when the wheals are associated
with fever; urticaria ab ingestis, when associated with indiges-
tion.
THE TREATMENT.
The treatment to consider first is the digestive tract, espe-
cially the stomach, and the arrest of the capillary congestion in
portions of superficial capillaries. This is done by increasing the
general circulation by general treatment. All difficulties of this
sort are due to indigestion or a peculiar idiosyncrasis, that of
certain ingesta, and more especially salads, fish, etc.
We have used the third potency of Rhus. tox. in the active,
itching stage. Kali sulph. is a good remedy. The restoration of
general circulation seems to be effectual. Treat the splanchnics
to establish digestion, as directed elsewhere. Take off the press-
ure from nerves.
HERPES.
DEFINITION. An acute inflammation of the skin, character-
ized by the development of one or more groups of vesicles, filled
with a clear serum, occurring for the most part about the face
(herpes facialis) and genitalia (herpes progenitalis).
CAUSEs. Herpes facialis.--During the course of febrile and
nervous disorders; in connection with digestive disorders and
colds. Herpes Progenitalis-The origin is local, from unclean-
liness or friction.
PATHOLOGY. Hebra defines the various forms of herpes as
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 767
“a series of acute cutaneous diseases of cyclical course, marked
by an exudation which collects in drops under the epidermis and
elevates it; forming vesicles which are never solitary, but always
appear in groups.”
SYMPTOMs. The appearance of the vesicles is usually pre-
ceded by a feeling of heat in the region, together with slight
tumefaction or swelling. Rarely the herpetic attack is attended
with malaise and pyrexia. The eruption usually appears in the
form of a small cluster of pin-head to split-pea-sized vesicles, con-
taining a clear fluid, becoming cloudy, afterward puriform, and
dries in small, yellowish or brownish crusts; they are few in num-
ber and may coalesce. They disappear without leaving a scar.
Herpes facialis occur upon any portion of the face, but most
frequently about the lips—herpes labialis. The alae of the nose,
auricles, and the mucous membranes of the mouth and tongue
are frequent locations, in the latter appearing as excoriated
patches from rupture of the vesicles. - -
Herpes Progenitalis—In the male the chief site is the pre-
puce (herpes praeputialis). In the female they are comparatively
rare; but when occurring, it is upon the labia majora and minora
and the skin about the vulva.
This variety is preceded by burning, itching, or neuralgic
pains, accompanied by redness, congestion, and more or less
oedema. The lesion in these parts is likely to be mistaken for one
form or other of venereal disease.
Herpes Gestationis.-A rare affection of the skin occurring
during pregnancy, consisting of erythema, papules, vesicles, and
bullae, attended with intense burning and itching. It may appear
at any time of pregnancy up to the seventh month, and continues
until some time after delivery.
THE TREATMENT.
Everything from a “black cat’s blood” to hydrargyri chloridi
mitis has been used for “shingles.” Nothing is so effectual as
our method of restoring the normal circulation. Arousing the
glandular system to normal action, and connecting the nerve
filaments of the motor and sympathetic nerves, remedies all the
trouble. Chloride of sodium is deficient in the elementary Con-
stituents—use it; arouse the circulation of lymphatics and venous
blood; vibrate the parts around the sides of the pustules, and
finally on them, daily, and then every other day, until entirely
relieved.
768 OSTEOPATHY ILI,USTRATED.
Miliaria, Pemphigus and Impetigo should receive a like
treatment as Herpes, locally and generally.
HERPES ZOSTER.
SYNONYMs. Zono; shingles; a girdle.
DEFINITION. An acute, inflammatory disease; characterized
by the development of groups of firm and distended vesicles situ-
ated upon inflamed bases corresponding to a definite nerve trunk,
and accompanied by more or less severe neuralgic pains.
CAUSEs. The eruption and consequent neuralgic pains are
the immediate result of an inflammation of the ganglia or of the
nerve trunks and branches—a neuritis—probably of the trophic
fibers of the affected part; but the cause producing this condition
is obscure. Among the many that have been suggested are: cold,
injuries to nerves, anemia, and the medicinal use of arsenicum.
PATHoLogy. An inflammation of either the ganglia, the
nerve trunk—probably the trophic system—causing the develop-
ment of vesicles in the lower strata of the rete, with infiltration of
Ser11111. -
SYMProMs. Begins with neuralgic pains, either of the burn-
ing or lightning-like character, with slight febrile phenomena,
followed by the appearance of papulo-vesicles along the tract of
pain; these soon become vesicles situated on bright red, highly-
inflamed bases. The vesicles are about the size of pin-heads, or
perhaps a little larger, usually discrete, although they frequently
coalesce, forming irregular patches, coming in groups until the
third to the fifth or even tenth day, when they gradually dessicate,
and at the end of the second week nothing remains but a slight
scar, which may also disappear after a time or, rarely, is perma-
nent. When the eruption is at its height it is perfect in its ana-
tomical formation, each vesicle being well-shaped and seated on
a bright red, inflamed patch of skin, and distended with a trans-
lucent, yellowish fluid. - .
The eruption is almost invariably confined to one side (uni-
lateral) of the body, although, in rare instances, it is seen upon
both (bilateral) sides. It is usually found upon nerve tracts.
According to the region affected, it is termed zoster capitis, zoster
frontalis, zoster faciei, zoster ophthalmicus, zoster auricularis,
zoster nuchae, zoster brachialis, zoster pectoralis, zoster abdomi-
nalis, zoster femoralis. -
ſå
„€.
|-
:-）
©
|-
£-
©
|-
ſr.
|-
C
----
±
5
E
|-
cae
ſlae
|-
8-
bo
5
±
∞
„r.
?
|×
|×
）
ſae
º
→
|-
）

· * * * * · * * * * * · * * *• • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •ș• • ••••••• • , , , ） → • •. ** * * *~… * … --^----！ →- - -- -- -----
".
}�}
|-* ,-*- ，
ș-
||-|--
·+}
{
|-！ "
�
-- *{
•,， º----• ！« • .---- -- ●- * *«*，&
|--|-u
- ** -
** -ě* * *→. »|-
* +·**--> •-
·• , ， *-·
• ” ’ .: , ， , , , ' •• ,.; •
-° ',± ' ,• .*· *-
•-*8,4 •• *-
' : , ,* · *→{•*ş
'$', '*
·*'.
*
~• **ų ►
*•
ș►�*..*·". .* *- ·�
's، -
�; ·ſą«... *· · ·,�-
*|-& |-→
→-•|-
|-* ;*.|--
•«►- ș
|-** .*-
• -
��→* --+
�-----* •-|-
|- ae**
·•·�→-** <--
-**
►-- «.·
|--x,-· ·ș •• . . **· *- &
* →ș*§-�· ·
→ ;→----* *-|-
-*; : »y ·· •* - .- * , - .. §�…
„* * • •{
�|-*ºr-* →… *
|-& ºº ： ** - * * * _
- |-|-* · · · *-->-* *
... • • •· %-----s.º.× +
… ~|-** • •<; º→
|-șw
ı-· · · · ·&|-
·' .→•+�• • •
* *-*|-
|-*-}--· -
~！’•|- *- ſº
→ • •*ş！-
**…-
, -*•• .·. -- • *,
-•· ** •-»
*- |ו�.*|-* |-•
- ·-. •• ſ• * .-. +→. ***•.*
·* .. ' ） »-• *· · · · · -• !× •
~ . '. ， .*$ . sv , ！-
• • •~* »•-•
|-·£|-
.** …ș, ！■
•|- **
* *-• º -*！（ - .•
|-|-�
· |-*... * *-
|-�|-· *-->→
|- -��
�·- -
«»- --* ' } ）;. *\,
--- . --> -- * ----••• • • • • • •• •• • • • • • * - *«* •*** ^•* •, * *--_- -|-----§ų·
*












A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 771
" . In the very young the eruption may develop and pursue its
course without the neuralgic pains. - - -
DIAGNOSIS. The characteristics of herpes zoster or shin-
gles are usually so well marked that an error in diagnosis should
not occur. The neuralgic pain preceding the eruption and its
development in distinct groups upon inflamed bases following a
nerve tract are so different from the simple herpes of the face, or
genitalia, or from the lesion of eczema. .
PROGNOSIS. Favorable. The affection is self-limited, the
duration being about two weeks. -
TREATMENT. Same as in Herpes, locally and generally.
Give special attention to nerves controlling digestion.
MILIARIA.
SYNONYMs. Lichen tropicus; miliaria rubra; miliaria alba;
prickly heat. •
- DEFINITION. An acute inflammation of the sweat glands;
characterized by the development of discrete, whitish or reddish,
pin-point and millet-seed-sized papules, vesicles, or vesiculo-
papules, productive of prickling, tingling, and burning sensations
of a most aggravated character. . . . ..
CAUSEs. Excessive heat, the result of excessive or tightly-
fitting clothing, or a high external temperature. Most common
in fleshy adults who perspire freely, and in children. Nervous
prostration; severe dyspepsia and general debility seem to pre-
dispose to “prickly heat.”
VARIETIES. Miliaria papulosa; miliaria vesiculosa.
PATHOLOGY. The pathology of the two varieties is the same,
both being inflammatory affections of the sweat glands; in the one
papules, and in the other vesicles develop about the orifices of the
excretory ducts. In either variety there occurs hyperaemia of the
vascular plexus of the sweat glands, followed by slight exudation
about the ducts, giving rise to the minute papules or vesicles,
which remain until the cause has been modified or removed, when
they are rapidly absorbed. i
SYMPTOMs. Miliaria Papulosa—Known as lichen tropicus
and “prickly heat,” is of a sudden onset, with the occurrence of
numerous minute, acuminated bright red papules, about the size
of a pin-head or millet-seed, and but slightly raised above the level
of the skin. The papules are preceded by and accompanied with
772 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
sweating (hyperidrosis), and distressing tingling, pricking, and
burning sensations. If the attack be severe, vesico-papules and
vesicles are freely interspersed among the numerous papules.
Rarely the secretion of sweat is notably diminished.
Miliaria Vesiculosa—In this variety, instead of papules, im-
mense numbers of vesicles develop, of the size of pin-points and
pin-heads, or a whitish (miliaria alba) or yellowish-white color.
The surface from which they rise is of a bright red color, owing to
each vesicle being surrounded by an areola (miliaria rubra). The
vesicles are preceded and accompanied with sweating (hyperi-
drosis) and the most distressing tingling, pricking, and burning
sensations.
Either variety may attack all parts of the body, but the ab-
domen, chest, back, neck and arms are the regions usually in-
vaded.
DURATION. This varies with the cause. It may appear,
fully develop, and disappear in a few hours. In those predisposed
it may continue more or less marked through the entire summer.
DIAGNOSIs. If the cause, nature, and seat of the affection
are taken into consideration, no error should occur.
Eczema papulosum has a resemblance to “prickly heat,” but
the course of the eczema is slow, and the papules are larger, more
elevated, and firmer than those of miliaria papulosa.
TREATMENT. Same as in Herpes, locally and generally.
PEMPHIGUS.
SYNoNYM. Water blisters.
DEFINITION. An inflammatory disease of the skin, either
acute or chronic, characterized by the development of a succes-
sion of rounded, irregular-shaped blebs or bullae, varying in size
from a pea to an egg.
VARIETIES. Pemphigus vulgaris; pemphigus foliaceus.
CAUSEs. Obscure. It is usually associated with a depressed
state of the general system; disorders of menstruation; during
pregnancy.
PATHOLOGY. Hebra thus describes the appearance of the
blebs: “Sometimes a circumscribed, light-red spot appears, per-
haps of the size of a bean or a large coin; this is paler in the cen-
ter, and may even present a tinge of white, indicating the point at
which the bleb is to form, and from which it will spread outward
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 773
over the surrounding skin, and, in fact, is at first a wheal, passing
afterward into a bleb. In other cases the bleb is not preceded
either by a red spot or by a wheal, but begins originally as a small
collection of clear fluid beneath the cuticle. Thus, hyperaemia
of the skin may exist before exudation is poured out, or the latter
may be formed before any congestion of the papillary layer is
discoverable.” - - -
The contents of the blebs or bullae are yellowish or colorless
serum, of a neutral or alkaline reaction; the older the fluid the
more alkaline it becomes. In the late stages of a bleb the fluid
becomes puriform. In rare instances blood is contained in the
bleb (pemphigus hemorrhagicus).
SYMPTOMs. Pemphigus Vulgaris-The onset is slow
(pemphigus chronicus), without constitutional symptoms, or
acute (pemphigus acutus), preceded by febrile reaction. The
lesions are the successive development of blebs, usually from half
a dozen to a dozen, varying in size from a pea to an egg, of a
round or oval shape, their walls distended with a colorless fluid,
the color becoming yellowish or puriform as they grow older.
They develop abruptly from the sound skin, with a definite line of
demarcation, unattended with symptoms of inflammation. A
characteristic phenomenon of the lesion is their successive ap-
pearance; a crop no sooner disappears than another forms,
throughout the course of the affection, each crop running its
course in from three to six or ten days. With the appearance
of the blebs occur itching and burning, usually of a mild char-
acter, although occasionally in a distressing degree (pemphigus
pruriginosus). -
Pemphigus Malignus—Is characterized by the great size and
number of the blebs, which coalesce, rupture, and are succeeded
by excoriated surfaces, which occasionally take on ulcerative
action, the patient’s health being seriously impaired.
Pemphigus Foliaceus—Differs from pemphigus vulgaris in
that the blebs, instead of being distended or tense, are flaccid and
only partially filled with fluid, as they rupture before arriving at
their state of full development. This variety also appears and
disappears in crops. After rupture the fluid immediately dries into
thin whitish flakes, which are detached in quantity, leaving a red,
excoriated surface—the rete and corium. If the affection has
continued for some time, the skin presents the appearance of a
superficial scald. The course of this variety is essentially chronic.
All portions of the body are liable to the lesion, as also the
774 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
mucous membrane of the mouth and the vagina. It is most
common, however, upon the limbs.
DIAGNOSIS. In a typical case no difficulty should be experi-
enced in making a diagnosis. The mere presence of blebs, how-
ever, does not necessarily constitute pemphigus, for it must be
remembered that they are at times developed in other diseases,
as well as by artificial means; the appearance of blebs in crops is
a strong diagnostic point.
PROGNoSIS. The course of the affection is most uncertain,
and relapses are frequent. In arriving at an opinion, the occur-
rence of fatal cases must not be forgotten. e
TREATMENT. Same as in Herpes, locally and generally.
IMPETIGO.
DEFINITION. An acute inflammatory disease, characterized
by the development of one or more discrete, rounded, and ele-
vated, firm pustules, about the size of a pea, unattended with
itching. -
CAUSEs. Occurs for the most part between the ages of
three and ten years, in the well-nourished and healthy. It is not
associated with eczema. It is not contagious.
PATHology. The lesion is a well-formed, typical pustule,
developing abruptly from the surface, containing a whitish-yellow
fluid, pus corpuscles, blood corpuscles, epithelial cells, and cellu-
lar detritis. The abscess or pustule is about the size of a pea,
circumscribed, and superficial.
SYNoNYMs. The affection manifests itself by the develop-
ment of from one or two to a dozen or more distinct pustules,
about the size of a split pea, of a rounded shape, raised above the
surface, with thick walls, of a yellowish or whitish color, Sur-
rounded by a distinct areola, which soon fades, are without a
central depression or umbilication, and unattended with either
itching or burning. -
The affection runs an acute course, usually lasting a couple
of weeks. The pustules, after attaining their full size, remain sta-
tionary for a few days, when they disappear by absorption and
desiccation, the crusts dropping off, displaying a reddish base,
which soon disappears with pigmentation or scar.
The pustules occur on all portions of the body, the most
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 775
frequent locations being the face, hands, fingers, feet, toes and
lower extremities. -
DIAGNOSIS. Impetigo is unassociated with general symp-
toms, and its particular lesion—the pustule—is discrete, points of
importance in the diagnosis.
Eczema pustulosum is also a pustular affection, but the large
number, their disposition to coalesce, their location upon an in-
flammatory base, their rupture and subsequent crusting and itch-
ing, are diagnostic points.
The diagnostic points from ecthyma will be pointed out
when describing that affection.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable. -
TREATMENT. Same as in Herpes, locally and generally.
ECTHYMA.
DEFINITION. An affection of the skin, characterized by the
formation of one or more large, isolated, flat pustules, situated
upon an inflammatory base.
CAUSEs. It is most common among those who live in
squalor and poverty, and in delicate and poorly-nourished chil-
dren. Improper and insufficient diet, want of ventilation, exces-
sive work, and uncleanliness are all prominent causes.
PATHOLOGY.. The lesion is a typical pustular process, severe
but superficial, and not extending beyond the papillary layer of
the corium. The pustule is situated upon a firm and highly-
inflamed base; the number varies from one to a dozen or more.
SYMPTOMs. The disease is, characterized by the develop-
ment of one or more round or oval, yet flat, pustules, about the
size of a pea-bean, attended with moderate heat, burning and pain,
and if the number be large, slight febrile reaction. The pustules
are first yellowish in color, surrounded by a firm and sensitive
bright red areola, the pustule afterward becoming reddish from
the admixture of blood, soon drying into flat crusts of a brown-
ish color. The duration of each pustule is between two and three
weeks, new ones forming until the cause is removed.
The most prominent sites are the thighs, legs, shoulders and
back. *
DIAGNoSIs. Ecthyma and eczema pustulosum have points
of resemblance, but a study of the clinical history of the latter
should prevent error. . . . . . . . . . . . .
776 OST EOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
. Impetigo differs from ecthyma in the size of the pustule and
crust. Ecthyma differs from a boil in not having a central core.
PROGNOSIS. With care and the removal of the cause, recov-
ery is always prompt.
THE TREATMENT.
Besides the general treatment, use local vibratory move-
ments around the pustules. Beginning some distance from the
same, using one finger, circle round the tumor, rapidly, using
considerable pressure, gradually drawing nearer to the sore, and
continue these movements slowly, but kept up for ten or fifteen
minutes, and ending these manipulations on the summit of the
boil or tumor. t
These will be discussed at one sitting if not too far advanced.
If not, the process should be repeated at intervals of twelve to
twenty-four hours. In the case of carbuncles it will be necessary
- to exercise more force and persistency, and if the element of Sil-
icia be used, sixth potency, amelioration will be more rapid, as
connective tissue elements are deficient, and should be admin-
istered.
FURUNCULUS.
SYNoNYMs. Furunculosis; furuncle; boil.
DEFINITION. An acute affection of the skin, characterized
by the occurrence of one or more circumscribed cutaneous or
subcutaneous abscesses (boils), which usually terminate by
necrosis of the central tissue, its subsequent expulsion in the form
of pus or a core, and a resulting cicatrix.
CAUSEs. The result of a depraved condition of the system,
induced by general debility, excessive fatigue, nervous depres-
sion, improper food and exercise, anaemia, diabetes, uraemia, or
the result of local friction, pressure, or contusions.
PATHOLOGY.. The process resulting in a “boil” has its origin
in either a sebaceous gland, a sweat gland, or a piliary follicle,
and never begins in the meshes of the corium. “It begins as a
small, roundish spot, which increases in size until certain dimen-
sions are attained, when it undergoes suppurative change, result-
ing in the formation of a central point or core, composed of the
tissue of the gland in which the furuncle originated, which, to-
gether with the pus, is cast off. It shows no disposition to
become diffuse, being always a circumscribed inflammation.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 777
After the discharge of the core, a cavity of more or less depth
remains, showing the tissues around it to be hard and infiltrated.
After a few days or a week it fills up by granulation, leaving a
cicatrix, which is often permanent. The central point or core,
when thrown off, is composed of a whitish, tough, pultaceous
mass of dead tissue, varying in size with the extent and depth of
the inflammation.” (Duhring.)
Hydro-adenitis, as seen in the axillae, around the nipples,
and about the anus or perineum, differs from the ordinary “boil”
merely in being deeper seated.
SYMPTOMs. “Boils” may occur singly, or more commonly
in crops of two, three, or more, another crop following their
disappearance (furunculosis). -
The abscess begins as a small, rounded, imperfectly defined.
isolated, reddish spot, of a highly inflamed character, painful on
pressure, its size gradually increasing, its central point presenting
evidences of suppuration. It reaches its full development in
about a week, when it consists of a slightly raised, rounded, and
pointed inflammatory swelling with a yellowish point in the cen-
ter—the “core.” Abscesses with no central suppuration or core,
are called “blind boils.” The size of a developed boil varies
from a split pea to a walnut, the color deep red, with a yellow
center, and is surrounded by a slight areola. The pain of a boil
is dull and throbbing, painful on pressure, and is usually worse
at night. The constitutional symptoms are mild or severe,
according to the number and size of the lesions. .
Any portion of the body may be attacked; its preference,
however, is for the face, neck, back, axillae, nipples, buttocks,
anus, perineum and labiae. -
DIAGNOSIs. The characteristics of furuncle are so marked
that an error seems impossible. It may be, however, mistaken
for carbuncle, the differences between which will be pointed out
when discussing that affection,
TREATMENT. Same as for Ecthyma.
CARBUNCULUS.
SYNoNYMs. Carbuncle; anthrax.
DEFINITION. An indurated, more or less circumscribed,
dark red, painful, deep-seated inflammation of the skin and sub-
778 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
cutaneous connective tissue, terminating in a slough and the
subsequent production of a permanent cicatrix.
CAUSEs. Not positively determined. A deep-seated bruise
is a supposed cause. Perhaps, as in furuncle, impairment of the
general health is the important factor. It is generally noted to
occur in middle life and old age, and in men more frequently
than in women. A “specific” cause for anthrax is not an improb-
able discovery.
PATHOLOGY. Although Billroth regards furuncle and car-
buncle as differing only in degree, the explanation of Warren,
of Boston, seems the more probable, he being the first to call the
attention of histologists “to the existence of small columns of
adipose tissue leading from the panniculus adiposus up to the
roots of the lanugo hairs, taking an oblique direction in a line
with the erectores pilorum. The inflammation resulting in sup-
puration of the subcutaneous adipose tissue must either form an
abscess or become diffuse. In phlegmonous erysipelas the latter
condition is observed. But when the inflammation is in the der-
moid texture, the exudates infiltrate the skin and naturally follow
the canals occupied by the ‘columnae adiposae.’ The pressure
thus exerted upon the whole dermoid tissue can not fail to
strangulate the circulation, and thus produce gangrene of the
tissue, even if the exudate be not poisonous enough to destroy
the cells by its presence. It can, by this explanation, be easily
understood why this disease is apt to affect the skin on the nape
of the neck and the back more than on other parts of the body.
At this point the skin is dense, its fibrous element extending deep
into the adipose layer, which is surrounded with strong bands;
hence, the pus confined in such a place, seeking the easiest out-
let, will travel along these miniature adipose canals, producing
the peculiar appearance pathognomonic of carbuncle.” .
SYMPTOMs. Carbuncle is recognized by its peculiar form;
commencing in the lower layers of the cutaneous tissue, it first
resembles somewhat a phlegmon minus its bright redness. At
first it is somewhat rounded, with a strong tendency to the pro-
duction of vesicles on its surface; soon, however, becoming firm,
circular and flat, and raised above the surrounding parts, spread-
ing through the subcutaneous tissue and skin, becoming at
times enormously large, and having a dark red or violaceous
color. As the disease progresses, the pressure results in the soft-
ening of the tissues, the skin becoming gangrenous, breaking
down at numerous points, forming perforations, through which
PLA're LXXI.–Flexing Limb on Thigh and Abdomen.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 781
centers of suppuration appear in different stages of advancement,
either as whitish, fibrous plugs, or as cavities, from which a yel-
lowish, sanious fluid oozes, the surface of the anthrax having a
cribriform appearance, perforated like a sieve. The entire mass
terminates in a slough, which, on being detached, leaves a large,
open, deep ulcer, with firm, everted edges, granulating slowly, a
permanent cicatrix marking the site of the lesion. The develop-
ment of the carbuncle is attended with severe pain, of a deep,
throbbing, and burning character. The constitutional symp-
toms vary with the size, number, and severity of the disease; loss
of appetite, coated tongue, general malaise, and moderate febrile
reaction accompany all cases, to which are added those of septi-
caemia in severe cases.
* The duration is from two to six weeks. Its favorite site is
the back of the neck, shoulders, back, and buttocks. It is usually
single. -
DIAGNOSIS. The disease is distinguished from furuncle by
its great size, its flat form, its course, the multiple points of sup-
puration, and the character of the slough. Also, by the pain; in
furuncle, sensitive and painful to the touch, carbuncle not being
particularly sensitive. Furuncles generally occur in numbers or
in crops; carbuncle is almost always single.
PROGNoSIs. A guarded opinion should always be given, as
death is not infrequent from anthrax, especially in elderly people
with impaired health. The mortality, however, is not so great
as the laity suppose. A great danger is septicaemia, from the
action of the poison on the blood, or the result of secondary
abscesses.
TREATMENT. Same as for Ecthyma.
When called late, and the carbuncle has broken down, the
integument abraded, the local application of pure carbolic acid,
once in twenty-four hours, does much in arresting the progress of
degeneration of tissue. Keep up free circulation and vibratory
movements until cured. Study the tissue side of these affections.
Supply them somehow, either with food or the element prepared
as stated above.
ACNE.
SYNoNYMs. Acne vulgaris; acne disseminata; varus; stone-
pock.
DEFINITION. An inflammation, usually chronic, of the seba-
782 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ceous glands; characterized by the development of papules, tuber-
cles, or pustules, or by a combination of such lesions, usually in
various stages of formation, occurring for the most part upon the
face. - - - -
VARIETIES. Acne papulosa; acne pustulosa; acne artificialis.
CAUSEs. Not always understood, as the affection is fre-
quently associated with apparently the most robust health. A
frequent cause is puberty. Among the other causes observed are
gastro-intestinal disorders, anaemia, chlorosis, uterine disorders,
urethral irritation, scrofula, and the use of large doses of the
bromides and iodides. Acne may exist, alone or be associated
with comedo or seborrhoea. -
PATHOLOGY. An inflammation of the sebaceous gland
structure and surrounding tissues. There first occurs retention .
of the sebaceous secretion, which is soon followed by hyperaemia
and exudation about the glands and in the gland wall (acne papu-
losa), infiltration of the connective tissue (acne tubercula), fol-
lowed by suppuration (acne pustulosa). If the inflammatory
action be severe, destruction of the gland with a resulting cicatrix
OCCU11’S. - - - -
SYMPTOMs. Acne Papulosa or Acne Punctata.-This var-
iety of the affection is the earliest stage of the inflammatory
action, and is usually of short duration, being soon followed by
the development of pus. It is characterized by the occurrence
of pin-head to pea-sized, flat, more or less pointed papules, situ-
ated about the sebaceous follicles, lightish in color, with a minute
central black point, the opening of the sebaceous duct. Pustules
are not infrequently observed scattered among the papules. The
lesion is unaccompanied with either local or constitutional symp-
toms. While the forehead is the most frequent seat for this
variety, they sometimes are seen elsewhere.
Acne Pustulosa-This is the fully developed affection. It
is seen upon the face, neck, shoulders, and back, as pin-head to
pea-sized, rounded or acuminated pustules, seated upon an infil-
trated, reddish base of superficial or deep inflammatory product
(acne indurata). Scattered among the pustules may be seen
numerous papules. There are no constitutional symptoms, nor
is pain complained of unless the pustule be handled.
Acne Artificialis—Is rather a clinical variety, the result,
usually, of large doses of the bromides or iodides, the lesion being
identical with acne pustulosa.
DIAGNOSIS. The lesion is so characteristic, the course so
!
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 783
chronic, and the location so frequently upon the face, that an error
seems impossible if care be exercised. The resemblance of the
papular and pustular syphiloderms must not be mistaken for
3.C116. . • - - 3 * *
PROGNoSIs. Essentially a chronic affection, lasting for a
number of years; but if persistent treatment be employed, recov-
ery will occur. - -
. . THE TREATMENT. -
The chemical changes that take place during the sluggish
peristalsis of the capillaries account for the necessity of institut-
ing means to regulate the circulation of the fluids. Take off the
pressure, not only in the arteries and veins and the lymphatic
tubes, but from the tubes that prevent the outflow of the fluid in
the sebaceous glands. The sameness of the proceedings to estab-
lish normal circulation seems to the looker-on paradoxical, but
the skilled Osteopath perceives the difference necessary to man-
ipulate the different tissues involved, to increase the forces that
promote circulation of all the fluids involved in the case. In the
glandular system undergoing the changes the results are either
from interference in the molecules of the sebaceous system from
lack of elements by deficient salivary secretion being mixed in the
food during the process of mastication, or directly from impedi-
ment in the smaller blood vessels in the integument itself. At-
tention to digestion of food eaten, and the promotion of the
proper, uninterrupted circulation of the blood and other fluids,
restores the skin to a normal state in due time. Healthy blood
restores tissue wherever permitted to flow, provided the sym-
pathetic nervous system is properly connected with the motor
system of nerves. This understood, opens up the phenomena of
the cure of all diseases by removing pressure. The use of weak
salt baths should receive due and careful, persistent attention in
all skin affections.
ACNE ROSACEA.
SYNONYMs. Gutta rosea; gutta rosacea.
DEFINITION. A chronc hyperaemia or inflammatory affec-
tion of the nose and cheeks; characterized by redness, hyper-
trophy of the skin, and dilatation and enlargement of the blood-
vessels supplying the part, and the development of more or less
acne. The nose and cheeks are the most frequent location.
784 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CAUSEs. Not always determined. It occurs in young wo-
men about puberty who are anaemic, or suffer from a general
debility, nervous irritability, or prostration, dyspepsia, or men-
strual irregularities. It often appears during the menopause. In
young males the affection can often be traced to nervous or gen-
eral debility or dyspepsia. The use of spirituous liquors' or of
large amounts of condiments are frequent causes, as is constant
exposure to the weather. It is frequently associated with sebor-
rhoea. - -
PATHOLOGY.. There first occurs blood stasis in the vessels
of the part, producing the undue redness first noticed. As a re-
sult of the stasis, sooner or later the capillaries are dilated and
hypertrophied, and as a result of the interrupted circulation in-
flammation of the sebaceous gland (acne) results, with the devel-
opment of papules and pustules. This constitutes the typical
acne rosacea. The affection may proceed no further, remaining
at this point for years, or, rarely, the pathology of this stage is
exaggerated, the involved tissues all hypertrophying, and the
connective tissue undergoing a true hyperplasia, causing increased
size and abnormal shape of the nose.
SYMPTOMs. The onset of the affection is slow and insidious,
characterized at first by more or less diffused redness of the part,
Ithe color aggravated by water or cold air. If the nose be the
part attacked, it is usually greasy (seborrhoeic), and is apt to be
cool or even cold. This condition may remain for years, but
sooner or later the evidence of dilatation and hypertrophy of the
capillaries is apparent by the more decided and permanent red-
ness, and upon close examination the enlarged minute cutaneous
blood-vessels are seen as delicate or coarse red lines, running
superficially over the skin in an irregular and tortuous course.
Soon are developed upon the hyperaemic and hypertrophied skin
papules (acne papulosa) and pustules (acne pustulosa), their
number never, however, being very great. This constitutes true
acne rosacea. The disease may remain in this state, or, rarely,
the cutaneous tissues are greatly hypertrophied, the blood vessels
enormously dilated, the glands enlarged, and the connective tissue
undergoes hyperplasia, resulting in permanent, dark red, bulky
formations, the shape of the nose being contorted into various
irregular forms. Duhring reports a case in which the nose was
the size of the patient's fist (rhinophyma). The nose and cheeks
are the usual location of the disease, although rarely it involves
the forehead.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 785
DIAGNOSIS. The characteristics of the disease are so
marked, consisting of rosacea—the dilated and hypertrophic
, blood vessels—with papular and pustular acne superadded, that
an error can hardly occur if due care be exercised.
Lupus vulgaris bears some resemblance to acne rosacea, as
it is apt to develop about the face, and especially the nose; but
the papules, tubercles, and pustules of lupus vulgaris soon ulcer-
ate, followed by crusts and cicatrices, which never occur in acne
TOSalC63.
Lupus erythematosus may be confounded with acne rosacea
if it occurs upon the end of the nose; but in the former the skin
is harsh and covered with adherent whitish and yellowish scales
connected with the openings of the sebaceous follicles, which is
never the case in acne rosacea.
Frostbite resembles the first stage of acne rosacea, but the
history of the two conditions soon determines the diagnosis.
PROGNOSIS. Favorable, if treatment be instituted during the
first stage. After hypertrophy has occurred but little can be
accomplished. -
TREATMENT. Same as for Acne.
PSORIASIS.
SYNONYMS. Lepra; alphos; psora; English leprosy.
DEFINITION. A chronic affection of the skin, characterized
by reddish, more or less thickened and elevated, dry, inflamma-
tory, and somewhat wrinkled patches, variable as to size, shape,
and number, and covered with abundant whitish or grayish-col-
ored, imbricated scales. It is not contagious.
SYMPTOMs. Psoriasis begins as small, reddish spots, of the
size of a pin's head, which immediately become covered with
scanty or abundant whitish or grayish, imbricated scales. The
spots gradually increase in diameter, forming patches of various
sizes and shapes.
If one of the scales be detached by means of the finger nail,
it will be found to adhere quite firmly to the skin, and to be about
the thickness of a card-board. If the reddish patch thus made
bare be pinched up between the finger and thumb, and compared
with a similar pinch of the healthy skin, its inflammatory thick-
ening will be discerned. There is no watery discharge at any
time. The skin between the patches is perfectly healthy.
786 osteoPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
While the anatomical lesions are always identical, the erup-
tion assumes such features, as to the size and shape of the patches,
as to give rise to special names. *
DIAGNOSIS. Seborrhoea of the scalp and psoriasis of the
same region frequently are difficult of diagnosis. In the former
the scalp is paler, the scales are finer, smaller, more generally
diffused, of a grayish or yellowish color, and greasy, sebaceous
character. Psoriasis of the scalp is in patches, which are reddish
and infiltrated, and there are almost always patches of the disease
on other parts of the body.
PROGNoSIs. An attack can easily be removed.
THE TREATMENT.
This disease, like all other skin diseases, must be classed as
a result of impeded circulation, and treated accordingly. The
various forms signify no special indication in the treatment, only
in so far as complications accompany the disorders of the various
forms and stages of the skin diseases. The use of the tissue ele-
ments, Chloride of sodium, Kali sulph. and Silicia, and if indur-
ated edges are discovered, Calc. fluoricum, is indicated. A care-
ful study of the offices these tissue elements fill and perform in
the physical economy will explain many pathological persistencies
that are unexplainable on any other hypothesis—that of deficient
co-ordination on account of the absence of the proper elements,
and, per consequence, power to perform normal functions. All
we need to cure any disease is normal constituents and freedom
of the circulation of the blood, and other fluids, as well as nerve
freedom (normal tension) everywhere.
HYPERTROPHIES OF THE SKIN.
LENTIGO.
SYNONYM. Freckles.
DEFINITION. A pigmentary deposit of the skin, character-
ized by irregularly shaped, pin-head, or pea-sized, yellowish,
brownish, or blackish spots, occurring for the most part about
the face and back of the hands.
CAUSE. In the majority of instances exposure to the sun is
the exciting cause. -
PATHOLOGY. In anatomical structure freckles consist of a
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 787
circumscribed, increased amount of normal pigment, differing
from chloasma only in the peculiar form and size of the deposit.
SYMPTOMs. The number of “freckles” varies from a very
few to immense numbers. They occur as brownish or yellowish-
brown, small, roundish, irregular spots, most commonly upon the
face and hands. Rarely the number is very great, and they give
to the skin an uncleanly appearance. They are apt to occur at
all ages, but rarely before the third year. They are unattended
with itching or other subjective symptoms.
PROGNoSIs. Usually favorable. Their course, when left to
themselves, is chronic, lasting for years or a lifetime. They or-
dinarily appear in the summer, fading away as cold weather
approaches, to return the following summer.
THE TREATMENT.
Free the circulation of blood in veinlets daily. Stretch neck
muscles thoroughly from side to side, lifting the pressure from
the jugulars, dilate the nares, and manipulate by vibration every
part of the face; induce deep inspirations; several sittings each
day. Bathe the face with the salt water mentioned elsewhere; at
all times water is used on the face, put salt in the water. Attend
to the digestive tract. In addition, we would recommend Nat.
mur. as a tissue element, 6x, three times daily, to supply element.
CHLOASMA.
SYNONYMs. Liver spots; moth.
DEFINITION. A pigmentary discoloration of the skin, char-
acterized by variously-sized and shaped, more or less defined,
smooth patches, or of a discoloration, yellowish, brownish, or
blackish in color.
CAUSE. The etiology of chloasma depends upon whether
the pigmentation is idiopathic or symptomatic in its occurrence.
Idiopathic chloasma results from the irritation of long-continued
scratching, such as is practiced in severe eczema or pediculosis,
the application of blisters and sinapisms, heat, the direct rays of
the sun, and various medicinal and chemical substances, such as
follows the prolonged use of argentum (argyria). Symptomatic
chloasma occurs in connection with cancer, malaria, tubercu-
losis, disease of the supra-renal capsule (Addison's disease), dis-
ease of the womb, pregnancy (chloasma uterinum), neurotic dis-
turbances, anaemia, and chlorosis.
788 OSTEO PATHY ILLUSTRATED.
PATHOLOGY. The affection is an increased deposit of the
normal pigment having its seat in the mucous layer of the epi-
dermis. The deposition of the pigment is the result of a nervous
derangement, possibly of the trophic system.
SYMPTOMs. Chloasma is simply a discoloration of the skin,
unattended with alteration of the surface. The patches vary in
size and shape; they may be as minute as a coin or as large as the
hand, or much larger, even to a universal discoloration of the
entire surface, and they may be roundish or irregular in outline.
The usual color is yellowish, brownish, or muddy, or even black-
ish (melasma melanoderma).
In Addison's Disease, of a typical character, “the coloration
is brownish, with an olive-greenish or bronze tint, and is general,
although, as a rule, especially pronounced upon regions having
a disposition to normal increase of pigment, as the face, backs
of the hands, axillae, areolae of the nipples, and the genital or-
gans; the hair, also, may become darkened. It may also occur
with or follow other pigmentary changes, as of the hair. Gaskoin
reports a case, occurring in a woman, aged forty-five, where the
patch, situated on the cheek, near the nose, was intensely dark.
It had existed nine years. The color of the hair had, fifteen years
previously, changed from carroty-red to black.
In Argyria, or discoloration of the skin resulting from the
internal use of nitrate of silver, the color is a bluish, bluish-gray,
slate, bronze, or blackish, varying as to the shade. It occurs over
the surface generally, but is more pronounced upon parts ex-
posed, as the face and hands.
Chloasma uterinum occurs most frequently between the ages
of twenty-five and fifty, seldom after the menopause, caused, in
the greater number of instances, by changes, physiological and
pathological, which take place in connection with the uterus. It
is seen in the married and single, although much commoner in
the former. Pregnancy is the most frequent cause, although also
associated with either dysmenorrhoea, chlorosis, anaemia, or hys-
teria.
It is seen in the mildest degree about the eyelids, especially
during the menstrual epoch, as a duskiness or swarthiness of the
complexion, either lasting a few days or being permanent. As
usually encountered, however, chloasma of this variety consists
in the presence of one or several patches, appearing generally
about the forehead or other parts of the face, upon the trunk,
about the nipples, and upon the abdomen. Rarely the entire face

• • • • •~~~*~*~> • • • • • • •
------,
* * * *
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 791
is covered with a discoloration, resembling a mask. Cases are
recorded in which the pigmentary deposit was general, resem-
bling Addison's disease.
DIAGNOSIS. Tinea versicolor and chloasma resemble each
other in the color of the patches, but otherwise they have nothing
in common. Tinea versicolor occurs on the trunk, while chlo-
asma occurs upon the face and about the nipples, and in cases the
result of pregnancy about the umbilicus, except in those com-
paratively rare instances in which the discoloration is diffused.
The patches of chloasma are smooth, those of tinea versicolor
furfuraceous, as can readily be demonstrated by gently scraping
the discoloration with the finger nail.
PROGNoSIs. Unless the result of Addison's disease, the pro-
longed use of argentum, tuberculosis, or cancer, favorable.
, THE TREATMENT. r
Liver spots were formerly supposed to indicate a bilious
condition, and calomel was recommended. Excepting in case
of pregnancy, general treatment offers the best results for this
condition. The restoration of the normal circulation of the fluids
all over and throughout every tissue is the all-important measure
to institute. The proper adjustment of the system to itself is
essential, for all unnatural depositions indicate sluggishness of
circulation, and normal activity of the fluids means a clear, normal
skin, all over the body. The endeavor to cover up abnormalities
under cover of paints or salves, lotions or ointments, is deceptive.
Restore a normal circulation and the cosmetic appearance is sat-
isfactory. Stains from nitrate of silver are not easily removed,
except by time. Salty solutions have a “fading effect” in such
cases. Its use in sore eyes, long continued, colors them brown-
ish yellow. Osteopathy does not change the color of the skin of
the “Ethiopian” nor the leopard’s spots, but it does restore to a
normal condition abnormalities caused by impeded circulation, as
a rule.
Treatments should be given regularly as often as necessary
to induce normal circulation and to establish it. This will gen-
erally require every other day thorough general treatment, pay-
ing especial attention to the vibratory movements over the
surface. -
792 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CALLOSITAS.
SYNONYMS. Tyloma; callus; callosity.
DEFINITION. Callositas, or tyloma, consists in the develop-
ment of a hard or horny, thickened patch of skin, variable in
extent, and of a grayish, yellowish, or brownish color, and unat-
tended with pain. The most frequent location is upon the hands
and feet.
CAUSEs. The result of pressure or friction, as in the case of
the hands of the mechanic, the effect of his tools; or, if upon the
foot, the result of ill-fitting shoes or from long marches. Callo-
sities are also seen upon the fingers of violin, banjo and harp
players. -
PATHOLOGY. A hypertrophy of the horny layer of the skin,
the corium remaining normal. The cells of the epidermis become
so closely packed together as often to simulate horn substance.
SYMPTOMs. Callositas consists in an increase in the thick-
ness of the skin of the affected part, presenting a firm, dense,
more or less circumscribed structure, the extent of hardness
varying considerably, sometimes being horny. The patch of
hardness is generally about the size of a coin, roundish in shape,
and somewhat elevated above the surrounding skin. The color
of the patch may be either grayish, yellowish, or brownish. Cal-
losities are usually upon the palms, fingers, soles and toes,
although other parts, if exposed to the cause, may also be the
seat. At times great pain and discomfort are experienced from
the growth. Occasionally callosities are complicated by hyper-
aemia, fissure, acute inflammation, abscess, erysipelas, and serve
readily as foci for such cutaneous diseases as eczema and psoriasis.
Course. Their formation and development is always slow
and gradual. If the cause be removed, the prognosis is favorable.
CLAVUS.
SYNONYM. Corn.
DEFINITION. A corn is a small, circumscribed, usually flat,
deep-seated hypertrophy of the epidermis, having a horny feel,
projecting slightly from the skin, painful upon pressure, situated,
for the most part, about the toes.
CAUSE. Continued pressure or friction, usually from ill-fit-
ting or tight boots or shoes.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 793
PATHOLOGY. A clavus consists of a circumscribed, exces-
sive hypertrophy of the epidermis of the same character as occurs
in callosity, and of a central portion—the core. The core extends
deeply into the tissues, in the shape of an inverted cone, the base
of the cone being directed outward and appearing upon the
surface as a roundish elevation, its apex resting upon the papil-
lary layer of the corium. The core of a clavus consists of a
whitish, opaque, firm, tenacious body, composed of epidermic
cells, arranged in concentric laminae.
The pain attending the presence of corns results from press-
ure upon the true skin by the hard core causing irritation of the
nerve filaments of the papillae.
Corns existing between two toes are constantly bathed with
the moisture of the part, which macerates and softens the forma-
tion, which thus receives the name of soft corn, in contradistinc-
tion to the hard corn.
SYMPTOMS. Until the growth attains a considerable size no
discomfort, as a rule, is felt. After, however, its depth has
reached the true skin, pain of an intermittent character, aggra-
vated by pressure, is the chief symptom. Corns are often weath-
er-sensitive, being unusually painful before, during, or after the
occurrence of storms, and should, therefore, not be confounded
with gouty or rheumatic deposits below the skin.
THE TREATMENT.
These very annoying excrescences demand more than a pass-
ing notice, and will require sometimes, in some cases, more than
simply a “protective plaster” or loose-fitting shoes. The motto
we advise for special consideration is, Take Off the Pressure.
Soft corns may be dissected without pain by beginning at the
edge and peeling it right down to the normal endothelium, with-
out pain. If that is not done, wrap the phalanx with a soft twine
or yarn string, loosely, just forward or back of the corn, placing
a sufficient number to raise a slight ridge on the toe. Wear this
until cured. Foot-baths in warm water once a day, followed by
the application of castor oil, is frequently a source of much grati-
fication. A patient feels better to have something prospectively
done. A good way to cure corns is to go “bare-footed.” This
effectually takes off the pressure, doesn't it? Set joints by all
IIl CailS.
'794 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
VERRUCA.
SYNoNYM. Wart.
- DEFINITION. A wart consists of a circumscribed hypertro-
phy of the papillary layer, with more or less epidermal accumu-
lation, characterized by the appearance of a hard or soft, rounded,
flat, or acuminated formation, of variable size
VARIETIES. The following varieties have chiefly a descrip-
tive value: verruca vulgaris; verruca plana; verruca filiformis;
verruca digitata; verruca acuminata.
CAUSE. Obscure. The various assigned causes are prob-
ably incapable of producing the affection. -
PATHOLOGY. While the anatomy of warts differs somewhat
according to their variety, in all forms there exists as a basis
of their formation a connective-tissue growth, from which the
papillary hypertrophy takes place. The interior of the growth is
supplied by one or more vascular loops, from which their vitality
is obtained. -
SYMPTOMs. The various forms are so different as to require
a separate description.
Verruca vulgaris, or the ordinary wart, commonly seen on
the hands, consists of a small, circumscribed, elevated growth,
having a broad base seated securely upon the skin. Their con-
sistency is either soft or firm, the surface smooth or rough, the
color that of the surrounding skin, or yellowish, brownish, or even
blackish. They may develop upon any region of the body, but
are most commonly seen upon the hands and fingers.
Verruca plana differs from the vulgaris in being flat and
broad in form, and but slightly raised above the level of the sur-
rounding skin. Their most common location is either on the
back or forehead.
Verruca filiformis assumes the shape of a minute, thin, coni-
cal, or thread-like formation, about an eighth of an inch in
length. The most frequent location is the face, eyelids and neck.
Verruca digitata consists of a slightly elevated, broad forma-
tion, about the size of a split pea, and marked by a number of
digitations coming from its border, giving an appearance, in
marked cases, resembling a crab. Their most frequent site is
upon the scalp.
Verruca acuminata, known also as the pointed wart, the
moist wart, the pointed condyloma, cauliflower excrescence, and
venereal wart, consists of one or more groups of irregularly
shaped elevations, often so closely packed together as to form a
| ● |
||
|-
|№| –
|（~）.
\,\！
Skeleton with Capsular Ligaments.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 797
more or less solid mass of vegetations (verrucae vegetantes).
Their color depends somewhat upon the degree of vascularity,
varying from a pinkish, bright red to a purple color. They occur
for the most part about the genitalia of either sex. Upon the
penis, they usually spring from the glans and the inner surface
of the prepuce; the inner surface of the labia and from the vagina
in the female. They are also seen about the anus, mouth, axillae,
umbilicus, and toes. They may be either moist or dry, according
to their location; about the genitalia, a yellowish, puriform secre-
tion usually covers their surface, due to friction and maceration,
which, owing to the heat of the parts, rapidly decomposes, pro-
ducing a highly offensive, penetrating, and disgusting odor.
Their size varies from that of a pea to that of an almond, an egg,
or even the fist. Their development is rapid, attaining consider-
able size in a few weeks.
PROGNoSIs. Favorable.
THE TREATMENT.
A solution of concentrated acetic acid, one part to five of
water, applied to the wart, on the top, two or three times a day,
removes them imperceptibly—that is, they disappear without
knowing when. Lugol's Solution of Iodine, applied with a tooth-
pick or brush on the crown of the wart, cures in a couple of weeks,
even “seed-warts.” It is said that they are “charmed away” by
some. Some are removed by the pronounced emphatic thera-
peutic suggestion. -
ICHTHYOSIS.
SYNONYMs. Ichthyosis vera; fish-skin disease.
DEFINITION. Ichthyosis is a congenital, chronic deformity
or hypertrophic disease of the skin, characterized by dryness,
harshness, or general scaliness of the skin, or in the outgrowth
of larger masses of a corneous consistency.
VARIETIES. Ichthyosis simplex; ichthyosis hystrix.
CAUSE. Often hereditary, but not in all cases. It is to be
regarded as an affection which is born with the individual,
although it does not usually manifest itself until after the first or
second year of life.
PATHOLOGY. “The diseased—or, better, deformed—skin is
found microscopically to be hypertrophied in various degrees,
according to the development of the malady; the proliferation of
798 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
its elements occurring in the connective tissue, papillae, stratum
corneum, and blood-vessels. In well-marked cases of ichthyosis
hystrix, the elongated papillae are surrounded by dense cones of
the horny layer of the epidermis, more or less concentrically dis-
posed, with sclerosis of the connective tissue and a relatively
unchanged rete. In this last particular the dense plaque of ich-
thyosis differs in texture from the wart.” (Hyde.)
SYMPTOMs. Ichthyosis displays a wide variation in its symp-
toms. In one individual it amounts to but a slight inconvenience,
while in another it may manifest itself in so pronounced a manner
as to be the source of great discomfort and deformity. The two
varieties named represent merely accentuated types of the dis-
order, rare in its fullest development, and, in its slightest, much
more common than is generally believed. A simple dryness and
harshness of the skin, with only slight furfuraceous exfoliation,
is termed xeroderma.
Ichthyosis Simplex—Is the more common variety, consist-
ing of a harsh, dry condition of the whole surface, accompanied
by the production of variously sized and shaped reticulated scales,
either small, thin, and furfuraceous, like bran, or large and thick,
resembling fish scales. Upon the extremities the scales usually
form diamond-shaped or polygonal plates, separated from one
another by furrows or lines, which extend down to the normal
skin. In color the scales are either whitish, grayish, or yellowish,
and often have a silvery or glistening appearance. Rarely the
color is olive green or blackish (ichthyosis nigricans). The
amount of scaling depends upon the age of the patient and the
duration and severity of the disease.
Ichthyosis Hystrix-With or without the development of
the above variety, in this, the hypertrophy of the skin may occur
in circumscribed patches or large areas, consisting of irregularly-
shaped, verrucous, corneous, corrugated, wrinkled, or rugous
masses, usually darker in color than those of the simple variety.
They may occur upon the arms, as solid, warty patches, or upon
the back, in the form of elongated, linear patches. They may
constitute roughened, corrugated, papillary growths, or uneven,
horny, blunt or pointed, spinous, warty formations. In the latter
case the elevations may reach several lines or more, and stand
out from the skin like quills upon the back of a porcupine—hence
the name hystrix. The amount and extent of the hypertrophy
varies; the older the patient, the more highly developed it will
usually be.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 799
Course. Ichthyosis simplex may involve the entire surface
uniformly or appear more marked on the extremities, from the
hips to the ankles and the arms and forearms. The affection is
always worse in winter than in summer, the increased activity of
the sweat glands at this season producing the most beneficial
results. The course of the affection is essentially chronic, con-
tinuing throughout life, now better, now worse. Slight itching
usually occurs.
DIAGNOSIS. The characteristics of the affection are so pecu-
liar that an error in diagnosis is hardly possible. It is to be dis-
tinguished from the inflammatory affections of the skin which
terminate in desguamation by the absence of any history of
inflammation.
PROGNoSIs. While much can be done to alleviate the affec-
tion, the prognosis is unfavorable as regards permanent relief.
- THE TREATMENT.
A careful study of the cell salts essential to a scientific treat-
ment must be made. No manipulations are effectual without the
normal elements exist or are supplied. Congenital deficiencies
may be assimilated. Then we may promise relief. The Kali
sulph. and Sodium chloride are usually the salts needed. This
affection requires much study on the part of the physician, and a
long continued and frequently repeated use of the remedy indi-
cated may be required, together with the various manipulations
recommended, to be of satisfactory results to the patient or the
doctor. The constant exfoliation of “branny scales” are surely
annoying, and these may be largely mitigated by the use of salt-
water baths, and followed up by the use of Olive oil, daily.
PARASITIC DISEASES OF THE SKIN.
TINEA FAVOSA.
SYNoNYMs. Favus; porrigo favosa; honeycombed ring-
worm ; crusted ringworm.
DEFINITION. A contagious affection, characterized by the
development of either discrete or confluent, small, circular, cup-
shaped, pale yellow, friable crusts, usually perforated by hairs.
CAUSE. The presence and growth of a vegetable parasite
known as the Achorion Schoenleinii is the cause of tinea favosa.
It is commoner in children than in adults, attacking the former,
8oo OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
in the first place, either de novo or through direct contagion, and
is from them communicated to adults. It is a disease confined
almost exclusively to the lower classes.
PATHOLOGY. Tinea favosa may have its seat either in the
hair follicles and hair, or upon the surface of the skin or the
nails; the former, however, are the structures most commonly
attacked. - -
It is purely a local affection, due solely to the presence and
growth of the vegetable parasite discovered by Schoenlein, of
Berlin, in 1839, and named after him—Achorion Schoenleinii.
The crusts are made up almost entirely of fungus, which is seen,
upon section, with the naked eye, to be composed of a porous
mass and to possess a pale-yellow or whitish color. Under the
microscope it is seen to consist of both mycelium and spores in
great quantity and in all stages of development.
SYMPTOMs. When the affection attacks the hairs and folli-
cles it is termed tinea favosa pilaris; when the epidermis, tinea
favosa epidermis, and when the nails, tinea favosa unguium.
Rarely all the structures may be attacked at one and the same
time; its usual seat, however, is the scalp. The disease begins
by the development of one or of several pin-head-sized, pale-
yellow crusts, seated about the hair follicles. In about a fort-
night these crusts have increased in size and are umbilicated,
termed the favus cups, are circumscribed, circular in form, and
very slightly elevated above the level of the skin. In their normal
condition they are of a pale-yellow or sulphur-yellow color, but
after a time, from dust and other matters, they become brownish-
or greenish-yellow in color. The number of crusts vary from
very few to immense numbers. The usual size is about that of a
split pea. In tinea favosa pilaris et capitis the affection is often
accompanied with pediculi, while swelling of the glands of the
neck and small abscesses upon the scalp are not uncommon.
The hairs become lusterless, opaque, brittle, and at times split
longitudinally, and from atrophy of the follicles and sebaceous
glands permanent baldness may result. In tinea favosa unguium
the nails become thickened, yellow, opaque, and brittle. The
disease has a peculiar odor, resembling that of mice, or of musty,
stale straw.
DIAGNoSIs. In a recent case the characteristic favus cups,
the pale-yellow color, the odor, and the history of contagion
should render the diagnosis easy. If of long standing, however,
and the favi destroyed by scratching, some doubt may exist;
Lymphatic System.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 8o3
but if a small fragment of a crust be placed upon a glass slide
with a drop of liquor potassae, covered with a thin glass, and
placed under a microscope with a power of from two hundred
and fifty to five hundred diameters, the features of the Achorion
Schoenleinii will determine the affection to be tinea favosa.
PROGNOSIS. Tinea favosa of the epidermis readily responds
to treatment. Tinea favosa pilaris is more obstinate, and if of
long duration may result in baldness. -
THE TREATMENT.
We recognize the fact that a nidus must be formed, con-
ducive to the propagation of the parasite before it takes posses-
sion; hence, wage war with the bug, exterminate him, and rectify
the conditions in the circulation, and we are rid of the bug and
the effects very soon. Local bathing with peroxyde of hydrogen
is indicated where there is pus. Application of campho-phoe-
nique, followed by white vaseline, exterminates the parasite,
usually. These are cleanly, non-coloring ingredients, and are
sufficient. - -
The manipulations to free the return circulation should be
given every other day, and vibratory movements, gently, yet
profoundly, made around the circles, ridding the dermis from
pent-up capillary blood or obstruction in the veins and lymph
tubes. -
TINEA CIRCINATA.
SYNoNYMs. Tinea trichophytina corporis; herpes circina-
tus; ringworm of the body. -
DEFINITION. A contagious, parasitic affection of the skin,
due to the trichophyton fungus; characterized by the develop-
ment of one or more circular or irregularly shaped, variously-
sized, inflammatory, slightly vesicular or squamous patches,
occurring upon the general surface of the body. -
CAUSEs. Ringworm of the body is caused by the presence
of a vegetable parasite discovered by Bazin, in 1854, termed the
trichophyton, the same growth or fungus that produces tinea
tonsurans and tinea sycosis. The affection is highly contagious,
and is frequently communicated from one member of a family to
another, although it has been determined that a certain unknown
condition of the skin is requisite for its development. In children
it is most frequently seen among the weakly and the poorly nour-
804 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ished. In adults it is usually associated with a decline in the
general health.
PATHOLOGY. The fungus is seated between the strata of
the epidermis, more particularly in the superior layers of the rete.
The presence of this foreign body produces the subsequent phe-
nomena—a superficial dermatitis, erythema, exudation, minute
vesiculation, and papulation, and, in the severe grades, tubercles
and pustules. The desguamative symptoms are exfoliative—
nature’s efforts for relief.
SYMPTOMs. Tinea circinata varies greatly in the degree of
its development, from the trivial complaint so often seen in chil-
dren, to the chronic, extensive, and obstinate disease sometimes
seen about the thighs in adults (tinea circinata cruris).
The disease usually begins as a small, reddish, scaly, rounded
or irregularly-shaped spot of papules, which in a very few days
assumes a circular form (ringworm). It continues to increase in
size, the papules often changing to vesicles. A characteristic of
the eruption is its healing in the center as it spreads on the peri-
phery. Occasionally the circles or rings coalesce, forming serpi-
ginous lesions. The usual size of a fully developed ringworm
is about that of a silver quarter of a dollar.
Chronic tinea circinata does not present the characteristic
annular form, but “are usually in the form of single or multiple,
disseminated, small reddish, slightly scaly, ill-defined spots, on a
level with or but slightly raised above the surrounding skin. Not
infrequently they are the size of a small or large finger nail, and
are irregularly shaped, and, as a rule, without line of demar-
cation.” The “eczema marginatum” of Hebra is to be looked
upon as a severe form of tinea circinata.
Tinea circinata cruris, or ringworm of the thighs, a variety
of the “eczema marginatum of Hebra,” is usually complicated
with true eczema, and is a very obstinate, chronic form of the
affection; it is accompanied by severe itching.
Tinea trichophytina unguium is a rare variety. The nails
become opaque, whitish, thickened, and soft and brittle, especially
along their free border. The microscope is essential for a diag-
nosis. Its course is chronic, and it is difficult to cure.
Course. As commonly seen, ringworm is very amenable
to treatment. Occasionally, however, it exhibits great obstin-
acy, showing itself repeatedly in the same region, in the form of
relapses, or manifesting itself from time to time in new localities.
DIAGNOSIS. Tinea circinata may be mistaken for squamous
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 805
or other varieties of eczema, but the circular and often annular
form, the well-defined margin, the slight desquamation, and the
course and history of ringworm should prevent error. Chronic
ringworm is more difficult, however.
TREATMENT. Same as for Tinea Favosa.
TINEA TONSURANS.
SYNONYMS. Tinea tricophytina capitis; herpes tonsurans;
ringworm of the scalp.
DEFINITION. A contagious, parasitic affection of the scalp,
due to the trichophyton fungus; characterized by the development
of circumscribed, vesicular or squamous, more or less bald
patches, showing the hair to be diseased and usually broken off
close to the scalp.
CAUSE. The result of the presence and growth of the same
fungus giving rise to tinea circinata—trichophyton. It is an
affection of childhood, seldom being seen after puberty. It is
highly contagious, and may be communicated from a case of
ringworm of the body.
PATHOLOGY. The parasite originally named “trichophyton
tonsurans” invades the hair, hair follicles, and epidermis of the
scalp, the hair, however, suffering the most severely, becoming
in a short time filled with the growth to such an extent, usually,
as to cause its disintegration and destruction. The hair follicle,
also, becomes distended and prominently raised. The hair shaft
is fractured just above the level of the scalp, and usually presents
a jagged, bristly, stubble-like extremity. The epidermis of the
scalp may either present the changes of minute vesicles and des-
quamation, or, in severe cases, oedema and inflammatory symp-
toms, with fluid exudation (tinea kerion).
SYMPTOMs. Ringworm of the scalp usually begins in the
form of small, circumscribed patches, which soon become the
seat of small vesicles or pustules, which terminate in desoluama-
tion, or of furfuraceous scales. The patches spread rapidly, soon
reaching the size of a silver quarter to that of a silver dollar.
They are circular in form, circumscribed, of a reddish, grayish, or
greenish-yellow color, covered with fine or coarse scales, with the
hairs broken off close to the scalp. The epidermis of the scalp
is more or less raised, and the follicles are prominent, giving the
characteristic appearance of the disease—the goose-skin or
806 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
plucked-fowl appearance. As a result of the loss of hair, bald-
ness, more or less complete, but temporary, exists. Itching,
slight or severe, is a constant symptom.
Ringworm of the face or body (tinea circinata) may compli-
cate tinea tonsurans. Chronic ringworm of the scalp is the same
condition in a more chronic form, having existed for six months
to a year or two.
Tinea kerion is a severe variety of tinea tonsurans, “char-
acterized by oedema, inflammation, and the exudation of a viscid,
glutinous, yellowish secretion from the opening of the hair fol-
licles. When fully developed the patches are yellowish, reddish,
or purplish in color, and are more or less raised, oedematous, and
boggy. They are uneven and honeycomb-like (hence the name
kerion), and studded with yellowish, suppurative points, or, later,
with small cavities or foramina, the openings of the distended
hair follicles, deprived of their hairs, which discharge a mucoid,
honey-like fluid.” The patches are tender, painful, and at times
the seat of itching. The course of the affection is chronic.
DIAGNoSIs. The diagnosis is usually unattended with diffi-
culty, if the characteristic circumscribed vesicular or scaly patches
with stubby hair be present. e
Squamous eczema somewhat resembles tinea tonsurans, but
the hairs are normal in eczema and firmly imbedded in the folli-
cles, while they are almost always stumpy in ringworm, and in
those cases in which they are not broken off, if pulled, they easily
fall out. Ringworm is contagious, eczema is not.
Alopecia areata presents a white, ivory-like bald patch,
devoid of scales, eruption, or hair. Ringworm has the vesicular
or scaly patch, with broken-off hairs.
In any case of doubt the microscope will readily determine
the diagnosis, if “one or two of the short, stumpy hairs should be
placed upon a slide, with a drop of liquor potassae and permitted
to stand a few minutes, when, under a power of two hundred and
fifty diameters the fungus, as well as the lesions of the hair, will
be visible.”
PROGNoSIs. Favorable, although obstinate in chronic cases.
Relapses are of frequent occurrence.
TREATMENT. Same as for Tinea Favosa.
The Muscular System, Action of.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 809
TINEA SYCOSIS.
SYNONYMS. Tinea trichophytina barbae; sycosis parasitica;
barbers’ itch; ringworm of the beard. •
DEFINITION. A contagious, parasitic affection of the hair,
hair-follicles, and subcutaneous tissues of the hairy portion of the
face and neck in the adult male, due to the trichophyton fungus;
characterized by the development of tubercles and pustules.
CAUSEs. Tinea sycosis is the result of the presence and
growth of the same vegetable parasite that causes tinea circin-
ata and tinea tonsurans—trichophyton—which invades the hair
follicle and hair. It is highly contagious, and is said to be
acquired, in most cases, at the hands of the barber (?). It is not
a very common affection. Like the other vegetable growths, it
seems to require some peculiar, unknown condition of the skin
for its development. It may develop from a case of tinea circin-
ata or develop simultaneously with it.
PATHOLOGY.. The parasite finds its way into the hair folli-
cles and attacks the root and shaft of the hair, causing inflamma-
tion, followed by more or less follicular suppuration and general
infiltration of the surrounding tissues. The irritation caused by
the presence of the fungus results in inflammation of the subcu-
taneous connective tissue and the well-known tubercular forma-
tions peculiar to the affection. They are firm, comparatively
painless, and manifest but little disposition to undergo change,
remaining during the presence of the fungus and finally gradually
disappearing without leaving a scar. Under the microscope the
parasite is plainly discernible.
SYMPTOMs. Barbers’ itch begins as an attack of tinea cir-
cinata—as one or more reddish, scaly patches. Soon the red-
ness and desoluamation become more decided, attended with
swelling and induration. The hairs will also be dry, brittle,
inclined to break, and many of them are already loose. The
process rapidly increases, the skin becomes distinctly nodular and
lumpy, and points of pustulation develop about the openings of
the hair follicles. The subcutaneous connective tissue is also
involved, giving rise to thick, firm masses of induration. The
surface has a dark red or purplish color, and is studded with
variously-sized tubercles and pustules. In some instances the
number of tubercles are in excess, while in others the pustules are
more numerous, numbers of them discharging, and are succeeded
by thick crusts, which are often so abundant as to stimulate pus-
8Io OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. p
tular eczema. The hairs are always diseased, and break off, either
in the follicles or just above the level of the surface. Those not
breaking drop out, leaving the region partly or wholly devoid of
hair. The most frequent locations attacked are the chin, neck and
submaxillary region. One or, what is more common, both sides
of the face are involved. -
Itching, burning, pain, and swelling always accompany the
affection, varying in intensity from moderate to very severe.
The course of the affection is usually chronic. Relapses
are frequent, unless most thoroughly eradicated. *
DIAGNOSIS. Sycosis non-parasitica occasions difficulty of
diagnosis at times. The points of difference, however, are usually
so marked that error should not occur. Sycosis non-parasitica
is a chronic, inflammatory, non-contagious affection of the hair
follicles, characterized by the development of papules or pustules,
which are perforated with hairs, the hairs themselves being
unaffected. The upper lip, cheeks, and chin are the parts mostly
involved. If of long duration, some inflammatory thickening
results. In tinea sycosis or sycosis parasitica the skin and sub-
cutaneous connective tissue are extensively involved, as mani-
fested by the induration and formation of the characteristic
tubercles. The upper lip is rarely invaded, the hairs are diseased,
broken off, or loose, and under the microscope reveal the parasite.
Pustular eczema resembles tinea sycosis, with extensive pus-
tulation and crusting. But in the former the hairs are not
involved, nor are the characteristic tubercles present.
TREATMENT. Same as for Tinea Favosa.
TINEA VERSICOLOR.
SYNoNYMs. Pityriasis versicolor; liver-spots.
DEFINITION. A contagious, parasitic affection of the skin,
due to the microsporon furfur; characterized by the occurrence
of variously-sized, irregularly-shaped, dry, slightly furfuraceous,
yellowish spots upon the chest or other portions of the body.
CAUSE. Pityriasis versicolor is the result of the presence
upon the surface of the skin of a vegetable fungus termed micro-
sporon furfur. It is a mildly contagious affection seen after
puberty. It is said to occur most frequently in those suffering
from wasting diseases, particularly phthisis pulmonalis. It is not
connected with any affection of the liver, as supposed by the laity.
PATHology. The fungus permeates the horny layer of the
Muscular System (Front View).

A DRUGLESS systEM of HEALING. 813
epidermis, never the hair or nail, and gives rise to the irregular-
shaped and sized maculae, of a yellowish or brownish color. As
a rule, it gives rise to neither hyperaemia nor inflammatory symp-
tomS. º - -
SYMPTOMs. Tinea versicolor occurs in the form of irregular,
roundish, circumscribed, or reticulated maculae. The spots vary
in size from that of a small silver coin to that of the hand. By
coalescing they often cover a greater portion of the chest, their
most usual site. Upon close inspection the surface of the macu-
lae is seen to be covered with furfuraceous scales, and if the scales
be not visible, scraping with the finger nail will demonstrate their
presence. In color the spots vary from a delicate buff or fawn
shade to a yellowish, deep brown, and, rarely, even blackish hue.
At times mild itching accompanies the eruption.
DIAGNOSIs. The characteristics of the eruption are so dis-
tinct that errors in diagnosis can hardly occur. If any doubt
exist, a few of the scales upon a glass slide, with a drop of liquor
potassae, and covered with a thin glass cover and placed under
a microscope with a power of from two hundred and fifty to five
hundred diameters will readily determine the presence of the
fungus. - -
PROGNoSIs. Favorable.
THE TREATMENT.
This affection and Tinea Sycosis require the same or similar
treatment, and that similar to that recommended for Tinea
Favosa; we refer the reader thereto. The treatment may be
varied by using a weak solution of salt water to cleanse the parts
first. The vibratory manipulations should not be neglected, and
where the hair follicles are affected it suggests more forcibly the
use of the salt baths, and the profound manipulations, after the
larger of the veins have been freed in the neck and jaws. Remem-
ber that venous blood is largely responsible for most of the affec-
tions of mankind.
SCABIES.
SYNONYM. The itch. -
DEFINITION. A contagious, animal parasitic disease of the
skin, due to the acarus or sarcoptes scabiei; characterized by the
formation of cuniculi (burrows), papules, vesicles, and pustules;
followed by excoriations, crusts, and general cutaneous inflam-
mation, and accompanied with itching.
814 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
CAUSE. Contagion. The only cause is the presence of the
animal parasite, the acarus or sarcoptes scabiei. The affection
occurs at all ages and in every walk in life. -
PATHoLOGY. Scabies is an inflammation of the skin with
the development of papules, vesicles, pustules, excoriations, and
subsequent crusting, the result of the ravages of the animal para-
site, together with the irritation produced by the scratching of the
patient. - -
The parasite acarus, or sarcoptes scabiei, is a minute crea-
ture, barely visible to the naked eye as a yellowish-white, rounded
body. The female is the most commonly met with, the males
being said to take no part in causing the affection, and so are
rarely seen. They are said to die in about a week after copula-
tion with the female. The female finds her way by boring
through the horny layer into the mucous layer of the epidermis,
and, being impregnated, begins at once laying the eggs and at
the same time making her burrow. A variable number of eggs
are deposited, usually about a dozen, after which she perishes in
the skin. The ova hatch out in eight or ten days.
SYMPTOMs. Scabies being an artificial dermatitis or
eczema, according to the amount of irritation produced by the
presence of the parasite and the traumatism the result of the
severe scratching of the patient. Immediately upon the arrival of
the mite upon the skin it begins its work of burrowing, and very
soon a burrow or cuniculus is formed, in which the eggs are
deposited, and which also becomes the habitat of the female dur-
ing the remainder of her life. The ova are hatched in about one
week after their deposit, and they at once begin to care for them-
selves and to burrow, resulting in the formation of as many addi-
tional cuniculi as there are active female mites. It is the pres-
ence of these burrowing parasites that constitutes the irritation
resulting in the inflammation of the skin, characterized by the for-
mation of minute papules, vesicles, and pustules, with more or less
inflammatory induration. Add to these the excoriations, scratch
marks, fissures, torn vesicles, and pustules with yellow and bloody
crusts, caused by the scratching, and a picture of the fully devel-
oped disease is seen. #
The burrow, or cuniculus, as it is termed, is formed by the
mite entering and making its way beneath the horny layer of the
epidermis, which is raised, very much as a mole undermines the
ground. It occurs as a slight linear elevation of the epidermis,
varying from a half a line to four or five lines in length, and
The Nervous System, General Distribution of.

"..f.
; ; ; ,





















A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 817
having an irregular or tortuous course. Its color is whitish or
yellowish, speckled here and there with dark dots. At either end
the cuniculus terminates in darkish points, the more prominent
of which represent the parasite.
The papules are the first inflammatory lesion, are numerous,
and of small size, and may be the extent of the disease. The
vesicles are the next stage, varying in size and number, having
an inflamed base, sometimes presenting cunicula upon their sum-
mits. The pustules represent the completion of the inflamma-
tory action, their size and number varying with the severity of
the irritation.
The intense itching, which is worse at night, results in excor-
iations, torn papules, vesicles, and pustules, followed by crustings,
which after a time disguise the characteristic lesions. The
regions of the body attacked are the hands, especially the sides
of the fingers and the folds where they join the hands. After a
time the wrists, penis, and mammae, and around about and upon
the nipples, are invaded. Persons predisposed to eczema have
this affection developed, in addition to the simple dermatitis, by
the ravages of the itch mite.
DIAGNOSIS. A case of scabies seen before irritated by
scratching, presents no difficulty in diagnosis. The presence of
the burrows always suffices for the diagnosis, but these are not
always discoverable. The location of the eruption always points
strongly to scabies. A history of contagion is of value. All
doubt can be set at rest by the aid of the microscope.
PROGNOSIS. Always favorable, relapses only occurring
when the treatment has been imperfectly carried out, or where
the individual has re-contracted the disease.
- THE TREATMENT.
Yes, got it at last. Now how to cure it. Well, prepare your-
self for a fight. Extermination is the only hope of escape for
you from the bug. You are urgently advised to use lavishly, yet
lawfully, of that large commodity promised as a cleanser of, or
a fire-kindler for, a part of the human race in the final wind-up.
It is said to be effectual as a sin-destroyer, then, among the
larger bugs. You try it on these smaller ones. The best, and
therefore the effectual, way to use it is as follows: First prepare
the subject (the person) by a thorough bathing with soap and
water. Dry the skin with a dry towel, then have the whole body
anointed with flour of sulphur mixed in sweet lard until
it is quite thick (pasty), then put on a clean gown, put 'on
818 oSTEoPATHY ILLUSTRATED. . .
clean sheets, clean everything. Next morning bathe with soap
and water; put on clean clothes. Next night bathe again; put on
the sulphur salve. Go through this same procedure three
times and you are cured. Do not put on the clothes first taken
off until fumigated, heated and thoroughly cleansed. The sub-
sequent baths of salt water will repair abraded integument where
the animalcule has made inroads on the skin. Osteopathic man-
ipulations sustain no relationship to this sort of bug. He must
be exterminated.
PEDICULOSIs.
SYMPTOMs. Phthiriasis; morbus pedicularis; lousiness.
DEFINITION. A contagious, animal parasitic disease of the
head, body, or pubes, due to the presence of pediculi and char-
acterized by the wounds inflicted by the parasite, together with
excoriations and scratch marks. *
VARIETIES. Pediculosis capitis; pediculosis corporis; pedi-
culosis pubis. -
CAUSE. The cause is the presence of the parasite, the result
of contagion, direct or indirect. The view of “a spontaneous
generation” of pediculi is not accepted by the great majority of
observers.
PATHOLOGY. The lesion produced by the presence of the
pediculi is a minute hemorrhage, caused by the parasite inserting
its sucking apparatus, or, as it is termed, its haustellum, into a
follicle, and obtaining blood by a process of sucking, and not by
biting, as is generally supposed. The presence of the parasite in
any great numbers brings about a peculiar irritable state of the
skin, which gives rise to an irresistible desire to scratch, as a
consequence of which the surface is markedly excoriated and
lacerated. - -
SYMPTOMs. The symptoms which arise from the presence
of the parasite in different localities are somewhat different, and
call for separate considerations.
Pediculosis Capitis-This variety is caused by the presence
of the pediculosis capitis, or head louse. The ova, or nits, are
readily recognized at a distance. Their favorite seat is the occi-
pital region, either upon the surface of the scalp or upon the hair.
Their presence gives rise to considerable irritation, itching, and
consequent scratching, resulting in the wounding of the scalp,
|-
|- ſ..
|-
- |-
. - -
№， №， №.
№， ， ， ）
№.|×|-
|
|
|
|
}
|×
Distribution of Nerves.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 82 I
with oozing of a serous or purulent fluid mixed with blood, which
soon mats the hair and forms into crusts. In those predisposed
to eczema, the presence of the parasite will give rise to that con-
dition. The general health is usually unaffected by the presence
of the pediculi.
Pediculosis Corporis-This variety of the pediculosis is
caused by the presence of the pediculosis corporis, or body louse,
or more properly termed the pediculus vestimenti, or clothes
louse. Its color, when devoid of blood, is dirty-white or gray-
ish, with a dark line around the margin of its abdomen. Its habi-
tat is the clothing covering the general surface, remaining upon
the skin only long enough to obtain sustenance. The ova are
usually deposited in the seams of the clothing, the lice being
hatched within the week. Occasionally a few of the pediculi
may be observed crawling about the surface, or in the act of
drawing blood. As they move over the surface they give rise to
an intensely disagreeable itching sensation, to relieve which the
patient scratches, which in turn gives rise to the characteristic
lesions of the affection.
The lesions are numerous. The scratch marks are scat-
tered here and there, long and streaked, or in other places
short and jagged, the excoriations and blood crusts varying in
size from a pin-head to a split pea or even larger, with irregularly-
shaped pustules. In addition to the lesions resulting from the
scratching, are seen the primary lesions, consisting of minute red-
dish puncta with slight areolae, the points at which the parasite
has drawn blood. In cases of long standing, a brownish pig-
mentation of the whole skin may result from the long-continued
irritation and scratching. The favorite site of the lesions are the
back, especially about the scapular region, the chest, abdomen,
hips, and thighs.
Pediculosis is seen most commonly among the poorer classes
and especially the middle-aged and elderly.
Pediculosis Pubis-This variety of pediculosis is caused by
the presence of the pediculus pubis, or crab louse. Although
having its seat of predilection about the pubes, it may also infest
the axillae, sternal region in the male, beard, eyebrows, and
even eyelashes. They may be found crawling about the hairs,
but more commonly hugging the surface closely. They infest
adults chiefly, and occasion symptoms similar to those described
in connection with other species. They are usually contracted
through sexual intercourse, although occasionally they are pres-
822 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ent in cases in which they have not been communicated in this
way, and where no explanation as to the mode of contagion can be
suggested. The itching varies from slight to severe.
DIAGNOSIS. When violent itching exists in any case, with-
out marked eruption, the possibility of the presence of pediculi
should always be entertained, and if carefully sought after are
found.
PROGNOSIs. Favorable, if the treatment be thoroughly
carried out. -
THE TREATMENT.
The most effectual treatment for the aforesaid animal is to
supply moderately strong tincture of cocculus indicus (fish ber-
ries) occasionally. There is no trouble about using this, but
do not saturate too much of the scalp at one sitting, and do not
leave it on the hair, to be absorbed into the scalp. Simply moist-
ening the hair and then bathing the scalp shortly afterward is
sufficient. There is no danger, if not used too strong. Simply
dampen the hair. Campho Phoenique is efficacious, locally
applied. -
The Sympathetic Nerve

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 825
EYE DISEASES.
Inasmuch as all inflammatory action is the result of venous
obstruction to the circulation, caused by pressure upon the veins
or lymphatics, there is but one thing to do in every pathological
condition, and that is, to Take Off the Pressure; the process by
which that is done becomes a matter of the first importance.
The results of local medication are to be seen everywhere, for
many are the victims of blindness, malformations, cicatricial con-
tractures, distortions and leucoma. These and many results too
numerous to detail here follow the use of lotion treatment for sore
eyes, applied by ophthalmologists and eye specialists, whether for
dilating the pupil or for reducing inflammation, in acute and
chronic affections. There have been cast off on every commun-
ity one or more victims, whose sight might have served him or
her for a lifetime had no such remedy been used. How many
precipitations of the “sugar of lead” are to be seen even now
all over the country, which are due to a lotion of lead and opium
applied to cure acute sore eyes, due to corneal ulceration, unno-
ticed by the person applying it, or if noticed, who did not know
the results of such a remedy applied to such a condition. Astrin-
gents, disinfectants, soothers, dilators, all sorts of medication,
have been used in every condition that the eye could be afflicted;
have been dropped into the eyes, and some “famous eye salve” has
been rubbed on the lids and put in the “corners of the eyes” to
cure sore eyes, without regard to condition or consequences.
Traveling charlatans have reaped rich harvests off of many a poor
victim because of eye troubles. Chronic trachoma (common
granulated lids) has been the worst abused of any pathological
condition, and with less satisfactory results perhaps of any eye
affection, it being the result of badly treated, acute inflammatory
conditions. Here is where the stimulation remedies have been
dumped in the most frequently. One noted oculist stated to a
class of over a hundred pupils, that he “had treated granulated
lids for over thirty years, and if he had cured a single case, he had
no recollection of it.” Medicines, such as nitrate of silver, have
been dropped into the eyes until they were literally colored a
826 f OSTEOPATHY. ILLUSTRATED.
dingy brown, and had produced atrophy of the tarsal fold, and
yet had not overcome the granulations. Others have had strong
astringents put into the eyes until they became so painful that the
poor victim would refuse to use it longer on account of the pain
produced. We might cite any number of instances of medica-
tion, and results of treatment, that seem utterly inhuman, repul-
sive and ridiculous to the common sensibilities of intelligent peo-
ple. Be it ever to the praise of Osteopathy, that it offers immun-
ity from such abuse. It surely offers a boon to suffering human-
ity in this regard, as well as many others that seem, to the
prejudiced, incredible. Our means of taking off the pressure
comes in good play here, and marvelous results follow, seemingly
superhuman, but reasonable.
TREATMENT FOR ALL EYE AFFECTIONs.
In all cases of inflammation of the eye or any organ in the
body, the indications are visible to the Osteopath. There is an
excess of venous blood there. This blood is prevented from
returning through the veins by contracture of some one or more
muscles, and when the obstruction is removed, the blood flows
from that part naturally, hence the excess of accumulation
ceases, the inflammation subsides, frequently at once.
To accomplish this in cases of inflammation of any kind in
the eye, begin by raising the clavicle. This removes the obstruc-
tion from the larger veins; now begin with the neck muscles,
remove all the rigidity, stiffness, the contracture from all of them,
as has been shown in illustrations for neck treatment; stretch the
neck, with the spinal column, rotating the neck one-fourth round
while extended, then remove the pressure at the angles of the
jaws; treat the ears with the vibratory movements, then the tem-
ples, forehead, inner canthus and papillae of eyes with thumb
and finger, and manipulate the face, especially around the eyes,
inside the bony margins, and move all of the obstructed blood
from the nose, cheeks, around the eyes; divulse the nostrils, and
finally treat the eyelids, as shown elsewhere, by raising the lid
with the thumb and finger of one hand, and introduce a finger
of the other hand under the upper lid, at the outer canthus, clear
into the eye, as far back as the retrotarsal fold, and then bring the
thumb down on the integument of the lid, in juxtaposition to the
fingers—use considerable pressure, as well as stretching the lid;
move the thumb and finger little by little along to the inner
canthus, pressing at each step, until the inner canthus is reached;
then, turning the finger, palmar surface toward the side of the
ºlº
a --
Wººtº --
sº ºwn
Pin- -
| cºnſº *
"Tºº-ººººº.
3. Cº. -
§ cy Phºenic * *
Bººthº -
º - - - - s ---
fºº # / Fºº, -
380 M.Cººl -
= Mºammad -
--- -
FC jºr º'
ă. b ºr º:
ºld Tºcanºn's -
3. º a 3- " - - Jºº.
3. º - º
| Imaºtaºuack - " - -Arcant Agata
3D - nºn-- - - - - *Canding Plex.
º º
D T-cººd *Pleitol Cºnnºt.
sºutrios convºy as:
- -
: ºD
= Esonºtus i
-
F ºn -Illaparam
# º *Lºſtpºulºgisthº
Stºw
- º- ºut-
- - -
# * - - - Fº
- tºº. . Tºanswease Colon
3. nº Nº º Aº º
3. º º - -------
3 nº- ºº “. ss. Sº MEstº
* º -º-º:
2. autº-Anata -ºº: :*
speawatº PLE. - ----
3. Lºncºlex ºn
+. Luº-Ananc is
sº. º. 1 elevise teacher
- Ilu-Matar -
Pººsas a
31sº Renº -
:
n
sympathetic Nerve Centers, to Obtain, from
Peripheral Influences.
The Salient Points of Impression.



























A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 829
nose, use considerable pressure at that point, and when done,
remove the finger at once, suddenly; and then bathe the eyes
with a solution of salt and water—a teaspoonful to the pint of
water. The operator should be sure to well cleanse his own
hands first, then dip the fingers into water before introducing
them into the eyes. Care must always be had regarding the
proper pressure; too hard produces ecchymosis, but moderate
pressure squeezes the fluids onward into their normal channels,
and empties the congested blood therein. -
The treatment for internal eye troubles is the same—empty
the outgoing channels and let in arterial blood. Pterygium,
trachoma, leucoma, blepharitis marginalis, cataract, ulcerated
cornea, iritis—in fact, all the inflammatory processes, acute or
chronic—are treated on this same principle, removing the
obstruction in the blood channels. Let the fluids pass on in their
natural way, then inflammations cease.
In addition to this treatment, Cataract should have the fol-
lowing treatment, to-wit: Place thumb against the eye-ball, press
gently, and thump against the nail with the forefinger—what we
call a snapping against the nail of thumb that is pressed against
the ball of the eye (on the outside of the lid, of course), three of
four times. Treat this way two or three times a week for Cata-
ract. Other treatments should be repeated as often as every four
or five days. -
CATARACT.
A degenerative condition of the crystalline lens, which ren-
ders it opaque, incapable of transmitting the rays of light. It is
called traumatic, when caused by a wound; senile, when resulting
from age. Osteopathic treatment, in the early stages, will be
useful, in some cases making a perceptible improvement in a
short time, if at all. In addition to a thorough neck treatment,
extend the neck and treat the muscular system, so as to remove
contracture, and re-establish normal circulation, so that arterial
blood can reach the media of the eye and build up the waste tissue
and open the channels for the debris (degenerated tissue). This
promises a change therein. There have been some cases cured in
this way. After this treatment, at the same sitting, the operator
must treat the eye itself, manipulating all around it; and then
having the patient close the lid, let the operator put the palm of
his thumb on the outside of the lid, over the eye-ball, so as to
83o OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED. .
gently press thereon, and while doing so use the forefinger of .
the other hand to snap against the thumb nail strongly enough to
jar the whole eye-ball, together with the lens. Three or four
such general and special thumps against the thumb should be
done at intervals of a couple of days. This tends to promote
absorption—a rational means of curing the opacity. Several
weeks may be necessary to suffice, but as cloudiness disappears,
the sittings should be further apart, and the treatment more lightly
applied to the eye.
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 833
OSTEOPATHY IN OBSTETRIC
PRACTICE.
While it is not the province of this book to enter into the
domain of obstetric practice, it would not be doing justice to the
reader to leave out of account the special advantages derivable
from the application of the principles of Osteopathy, as applicable
to females during the stage of confinement. We reach through
the terminal filaments of the sympathetic nervous system in and
around the organ known as the clitoris. By pressure on either
side of the clitoris, with the fingers, so placed as to press on, and
at the same time upward, moderately, hard, firmly, a reflex result
follows, in which contracture of the circular fibers of the fundus
of the uterus ensues, the os dilates, normal propulsive pains
ensue, and labor proceeds naturally; all unnecessary flying pains
cease, and the process becomes one of satisfaction to the par-
turient, rather than a dread. This pressure completely controls
the action as well as the process of labor, and shortens labor, in
many instances, several hours; saves maternal exhaustion; directs
all the forces into the proper channels, prevents lacerations, iner-
tia, prolapsus, evil after-effects, and does away with the mental
forebodings of probable consequences according to other meth-
ods. This pressure removed at any time induces extreme pain,
and tends to retard progress, therefore it should be continued
until labor is fairly well advanced, when, if changed to either side
of the last three or four lumbar vertebral region, the pressure
tends to continue propulsion, terminating in normal rapid deliv-
ery. Support should be given to the perineum while the last
strait is being passed by the fetal head and shoulders. The
pressure as described relaxes the cervix in from one to two
hours completely. This should be done during the first stages
of labor, while the pressure on the lumbar region should be done
during the last stages. The demonstration of the controlling
influence of the nervous system is beautifully and wonderfully
illustrated here, in this, the most dreaded and most sublimely
834 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
interesting period of anxiety in all of the phases of the life of the
mother! If Osteopathy had made no other advances beneficiary
to the human race, this ought to suffice to give it a place in the
highest rank—on the topmost pinnacle of excellence. The means
of soothing the pains of our better part of creation, our loved
ones, in the very act of bringing forth a human being, fraught
with such marvelous possibilities, should claim our most grateful
appreciation. This alone immortalizes the science of Oste-
opathy. It is par excellent!
Practical experience along these lines continues to unfold
the wonderfulness of results obtained through the proper appli-
cation of stimuli to the sympathetic nerves that control every
tissue in the body normally, when properly directed.
Nerve Plexuses—Deeper Structure and Plexuses.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 837
OBESITY CORPULENCE.
This is a matter that concerns many persons now-a-days, and
Some would-be-wise ones are claiming to “antidote fat” by man-
ipulations of the “form divine,” and deceive the poor victim; (fat,
I should say, for he grows “fatter and fatter,” as the manipula-
tions applied to “thin him down” go on.) This subject deserves a
special consideration.
To understand the philosophy of the accumulation of adi-
pose, we must have recourse to the digestive system. Voit and
Pettinkofer in their investigations demonstrated that certain
kinds of foods, such as albuminoids and carbo-hydrates, or food
containing these, tended to a precipitation or an increase of fat,
and that beer-drinkers constitute the larger majority of such
persons, although he recognizes heredity as in some way con-
nected with this tendency. This we can not agree to, for very
frequently persons in the same family become fat, while others
are lean. This condition is doubtless due to the deficiency of
pancreatic secretion, for it is now regarded by physiologists that
this organ is the generator of “fat dissolving material,” and that
by normal action of this gland, with the regularity as to time
and quantity of such food as can be digested properly, the nor-
mal tissues are maintained. Obesity, therefore, may nearly, if
not always, be attributable to either more fatty matter than can
be dissolved (converted into soap), by the alkalinity of the pan-
creatic secretion, or that the drain is too often made on the organ
by too frequent resort to it for secretion to digest “between-
meals luncheons.” When it is known that every organ in our
body is kept up, maintained, regulated, by a proper supply of
blood, and that this blood must contain the proper elements in
due proportion, and that this proportion is largely due to the food
eaten, the time it is taken into the stomach, the ability of the
organs concerned to manufacture food into normal, natural
material, and then consider that the organs of digestion are the
most abused organs in the body, some idea may be had why
obesity on the one hand, and emaciation on the other, are so
838 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
prevalent. A normal digestive apparatus is seldom found. This
organ (the stomach) needs, above all things, rest, then its func-
tions will be properly performed. Digestion will be perfect, dys-
pepsia will cease, obesity cease, and health will be established.
In all cases where obesity exists, give the digestive organs rest,
and obesity will begin to decline. Stop between-meals nibbling,
beer and albuminoids and carbo-hydrates, and let the organs
that manufacture digestive secretions rest, then abnormalities will
be corrected in a natural manner. The crowding of the baby's
stomach is the source of a large per cent. of its ills. The mother
believes that it should be full all the time to make it grow. If it
from any reason has gone four to six hours without its meal–
“Oh, the dear baby is starved to death”; and if it gets sick, noth-
ing is more annoying to a doctor than a constant appeal to him
to know what “to feed the baby.” “Doctor, my baby hasn't had
a mouthful of anything to eat for five hours. Do tell me what
to feed it. It won’t nurse at all.” You have heard such appeals
times without number. Whether the little stomach is in a con-
dition to digest or not, the mother thinks her dear baby will
starve if not fed regularly, hungry or otherwise.
To cure corpulency, Take Off the Pressure. This is our
motto. This is Osteopathy. This is the universal remedy for
all pathological conditions. If you desire to empty a lake, open
the outlet and take off or stop the supply of water above.
The one thing in life, the most desirable to all people, is
health, yet a word of advice that, if taken, will surely bring
about that much-desired consummation, will continue to be
rejected, and death, with its victims, will continue to slay its
millions annually, carry the loved ones away; when, if due atten-
tion were had to the rest that brings peace, long life and happi-
ness, we might not be called to mourn the loss of them so soon.
The human family eats at least one-third more than it ought.
This is the prime cause of most of our ills, premature death, the
majority of our failures, the feeble-mindedness, sin, intemper-
ance, violation of law, and all its evil consequences.
Crowding of the tired, worn-out stomach brings its sure
reward—premature death, by robbing the very organs that pre-
pare the life forces of their time to recuperate, so as to do perfect
work. There are constitutions that bear this tax for long years,
but the same physical body that bears such abuse finally suc-
cumbs thereto, whereas, if properly cared for, length of days
Arterial System.

A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 841
might have been added to bless mankind. Rest the digestive)
organs, then, if you would be healthy.
The digestive organs are crowded with food, the whole sys-
tem is taxed to eliminate the debris, and the mind is clouded,
headache and other disturbances follow in the wake of this almost
universal sin of the race. If it is not time to call a halt, I do not
know why. Habit, like an armed foe, has made slaves of us all,
and the wrecks that lie strewn along the highways point with
warning to us to stop and consider consequences.
To cure obesity, and a large per cent. of sicknesses, rest the
digestive organs—do without at least one meal a day, and break-
fast is the preferable one to leave off. Eat a good, wholesome
dinner and a light supper, and your stomach will have time to
recuperate its overtaxed energies and digest food that is put into
it, provided it be properly mixed with the salivary secretions in
the mouth. Our whole alimentary apparatus is a marvelously
complicated and delicate chemical laboratory, and if each depart-
ment performs its proper function, harmony exists, but if either
division is interfered with, its processes disturbed, harmony
ceases, disease is the invariable result sooner or later.
When we stop eating until a natural demand for food to
supply the waste is manifest, preceded by a due amount of rest
of the digestive organs, digestion will proceed without pain or
distress, and the proper elements will be drawn from the food
to make all of the ingredients that make up normal chyme, and go
into the formation of blood, assisting in producing the succeed-
ing chemical changes necessary to be assimilated, make up and
constitute the secretions in the various parts of the body. It
takes all of the ingredients, from the mouth to the end of the
receptaculum chyli, to make up material for the new blood—to
renew the life forces.
To treat obesity then, successfully, eat the proper food, at
the proper time, giving the system rest; leave off carbo-hydrates
and albuminoids, or beer, ale, or malt. We have seen obesity
reduced thirty-five pounds, to a normal weight, by simply doing
without the breakfast—one meal a day; heart disease cured, dys-
pepsia eradicated, headaches entirely removed, the bowels become
perfectly regular, the torpid liver become natural, simply by giv-
ing the stomach rest. Do without your breakfast if you would be
well.
The salivary glands should be duly exercised by the move-
842 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
ments of mastication, so as to furnish a sufficiency of secretion
to thoroughly mix and moisten the food, so that when it reaches
the stomach it is prepared for the next step in the process—the
mixture with the gastric secretion, which is altogether a differen'
secretion from that drawn from the salivary glands, being alka-
line, whereas the gastric is an acid. The mixture of these secre-
tions with the food takes place in the stomach, and the process
of emulcification goes on here, making a solution and a mixture
preparatory to the next division, which the food is conveyed into,
through the pyloric end of the stomach by a peristalsis, due to
contraction and relaxation of the muscular fibers of the walls of
the stomach. Here, in the duodenum, the food is mixed with the
secretions from the liver and the pancreas, and at once converted
into chyme, and made ready to be absorbed or taken up into the
lymphatic tubes that open from the mucous membrane into the
walls of the small intestines, and conveyed into the receptaculum
chyli, and by peristalsis conveyed on into the thoracic duct—a
tube beginning about opposite the second lumbar vertebra, and
about the size of a common goose quill, passing up through the
aortic opening in the diaphragm; through the right crus, lying to
the right side, and behind the aorta abdominis, lying between the
aorta and the vena azigos major. Opposite the fourth dorsal
vertebra it inclines to the left side and ascends behind the arch of
the aorta on the left side of the oesophagus, and behind the first
portion of the left subclavian artery, to the upper portion of the
thorax. Opposite the seventh cervical vertebra it turns outward
and then curves downward over the subclavian artery, and in
front of the scalenus anticus muscle, so as to form an arch, and
terminates in the left subclavian vein at its angle of junction with
the left internal jugular vein. -
Here we perceive the product of the food begins its mingling
with the blood in the systemic circulation. This chyle and the
return venous blood, containing the waste material, go back to
the heart, entering the right auricle, passing into and out of the
right ventricle into the lungs, distributed through the capillaries
there, giving up its carbonic oxide and receiving oxygen, then
returned to the left side of the heart, entering it through the
left auricle, through which it passes on out into the aorta, and
into the arterial trunks into every part of the body—the blood
being the “life of man.” It now contains all of the elements
from which the system is renewed.
№.
ſºſ，（№.
ſ.
Systemic Circulation of the Blood–Veins and Arteries.





A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 845
We have traced the food from the mouth through the ali-
mentary apparatus, and watched the various stages of progress,
until it has been formed into blood, and now watched its distri-
bution as far as the ends of all of the smaller twigs of the arteries—
into the capillaries. Here is the most interesting phase of our
observations. The manner of renewing the organic portions of
this body and the removal of the waste material claim our special
attention at this point of our investigation and observation, for
it is at this stage of the circulation of the fluids of the body, our
greatest interest is demanded, for the physiologists have all
seemed to leave the subject in the dark.
We shall hope to be pardoned for our seeming intrusion
here, but we can not refrain from venturing a plausible theory
regarding this subject, that, to many, will seem reasonable, if
not true. It is taught by physiologists that in the capillaries
blood corpuscles pass out through the walls and build up tissue.
Taking a retrospect of the office of the sympathetic nervous sys-
tem, we would have the reader understand that right here we see
the most marvelous demonstrations of mind power, thought,
wisdom, manifested more than elsewhere in the body. Sitting on
its throne in the calvarium, sending its small tubes into every
part of the body, countless millions in number; through these,
mind is conveyed, and at the extreme terminals thereof, as the
blood, containing its elements, passes on into and through the
capillaries into the veins, this set of sympathetic filaments select
and draw out from the blood, through the walls of these capil-
laries, this and that particular element needed in that part of the
body, and the rest of the elements go on in the blood, through
the capillary, into the veins beyond, to form the quantity unused,
that makes up the waste material (the refuse) to be made over in
the lungs. As this or that particular element is drawn out of the
blood as it passes through the capillary, to supply the tissue that
has survived the period of usefulness, the gaseous or fluid mate-
terial, the new element drawn out, supplies the waste; the excess,
the broken-down material, is moved on as a fluid or gas into the
open mouths of the lymphatics, through which this waste is
moved into the veins beyond the capillaries, through the sides of
the veins (which are tubes similar to the veins). We recognize
the unerring selection of the proper material in these parts of the
body as going on all the time, with as much precision as the
rising and setting of the sun. Now, suppose from any cause an
846 OSTEOPATHY ILLUSTRATED.
arrest of this process should occur, can we not see that chemical
changes would occur in the parts, new compounds result, and
perhaps poisonous elements formed, a diseased condition set in,
destruction of the tissue ensue, and thus a nidus formed that, ere
its removal, the whole course of nature would be interfered with.
This, in brief, is what we are to regard as undue pressure. Hence
our motto, “Take Off the Pressure,” is apropos.
We hold that any obstruction to the flow of the fluids of the
body, either to or from the heart, causes every pathological con-
dition known to mankind; that removed, cures all diseases that
flesh is heir to. This is a wonderful advance on old theories.
！ №№.
|-
The Alimentary Tract—Digestive Apparatus.

GENERAL INDEX.
PAGE
Abscess, Cerebral. . . . . . . . . . . . 524
“ of Heart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Acne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
“ Punctata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
“ Rosacea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
“ Sebacea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
“ Vulgaris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Addison's Disease. . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ague . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Alcoholism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Anaemia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
“ Cerebral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
“ Progressive Pernicious... 334
Aneurism Of AOrta. . . . . . . . . . . 502
Angina, Pectoris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Anidrosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Aphasia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Apoplexy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Appendicitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Arrhythmia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Arterio-Sclerosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Arthritis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Asthma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Bloody Flux. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Boils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Bradycardia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Brain, Congestion Of... . . . . . . . 513
Brain Troubles, Treatment for 535
Bright’s Disease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Bronchitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
“ Capillary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
“ Chronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
“ Fibrinous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Bunions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Calculi, Biliary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
“ Renal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
CalloSities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Carbuncles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Cataract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Catarrh, Acute Nasal . . . . . . . . . 366
“ Chronic Nasal . . . . . . . . . . . 371
“ Bladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
“ Bronchial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
“ Gastric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
“ Rectum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Catarrhal Enteritis. . . . . . . . . . 715
“ Jaundice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
“ Laryngitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
“ Pneumonia . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Cerebral Hemorrhage. . . . . . . . 515
849
PAGE
Cerebral Embolism...... . . . . . 522
Chloasma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Cholera, Asiatic. . . . . . . . . . . . `... 324
“ Infantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
“ Morbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Chorea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Colic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Congestion, Brain. . . . . . . . . . . . 513
“ Kidneys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
“ Liver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
“ Lungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
“ Spinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Constipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Comedo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Corns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Croup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385, 386
Cystitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Delirium Tremens. . . . . . . . . . . 542
Dementia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Dengue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Diabetes, Insipidus. . . . . . . . . . . 321
“ Mellitus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Diarrhea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Diphtheria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Dislocations—Elbow . . . . . . . . . 227
“ Hip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
“ Knee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
“ Minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
“ Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Dizziness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Dropsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Dysentery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
“ Acute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Dyspepsia, Atonic. . . . . . . . . . . . 642
“ Chronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Ecthyma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
ECZema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Embolism, Cerebral. . . . . . . . . . 522
Emphysema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Endocarditis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . 472
“ Chronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
“ Malignant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Enteritis, Catarrhal. . . . . . . . . . 715
“ Croupous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Entero-Colitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Epilepsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Erysipelas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Erythema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Eye Diseases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
850 OSTEOPATHY
ILLUSTRATED.
PAGE
Fevers, General Treatment of. 238
“ Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
“ Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . 272
“ Lung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
“ Pernicious . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
“ Relapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
“ Remittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
“ Scarlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
“ Typhoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
“ Typhus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
“ Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Freckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Furunculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Gastralgia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Gastric Catarrh.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
“ Dilatation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
“ Hemorrhage . . . . . . . . . . . 652
“ Ulcers and Cancer. . . . . . 651
Glossitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Goitre, Exophthalmic. . . . . . . . 601
Gout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Gravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Haemophilia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Haemoptysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Hay Fever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Headache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Heart Affections, Treatment
for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘. . . . . . . . 505
Heart, Abscess of . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
“ Dilatation Of...... . . . . . . 486
“ Fatty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
“ Neuralgia of . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
“ Palpitation of... . . . . . . . . 494
Heat Stroke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Hemorrhoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Hernia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Herpes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
“ Zoster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Hives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Hodgkin's Disease. . . . . . . . . . . 337
Hydrocephalus, Acute. . . . . . . . 545
“ Congenital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Hydro-Pericardium . . . . . . . . . . 472
Hydrothorax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Hyperaemia, Spinal. . . . . . . . . . 551
Hyperidrosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Hypertrophy, Cardiac. . . . . . . . 484
Hysteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Ichthyosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Impetigo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Incontinence of Urine. . . . . . . . 694
Influenza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Insanity, Alternating......... 623
“ Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
“ Delusional . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
“ Epileptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
PAGE
Intestinal Indigestion. . . . . . . . 707
“ Colic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
“ Occlusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
“ Parasites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.1
Itch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
“ Barber’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Jaundice, Catarrhal. . . . . . . . . . 664
Kidneys, Congestion of . . . . . . . 675
“ Amyloid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
“ Movable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
La Grippe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Laryngismus, Stridulus. . . . . . 393
Laryngitis, Catarrhal. . . . . . . . 378
“ Croupous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
“ Oedematous . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
“ Spasmodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
“ Tubercular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Lentigo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Leucocythemia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Lithaemia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Liver, Abscess of... . . . . . . . . . 658
“ Amyloid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
“ Atrophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
“ Carcinoma of... . . . . . . . . 663
“ Congestion of... . . . . . . . . 656
“ Sclerosis of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
“ Treatment for . . . . . . . . . . 663
Liver Spots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Lockjaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Locomotor Ataxia. . . . . . . . 536, 571
Lousiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Lungs, Oedema. Of... . . . . . . . . . 424
“ Congestion Of... . . . . . . . . . 423
Mania. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Measles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Melancholia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Meningitis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . . 507
“ Cerebro-Spinal . . . . . . . . . 252
“ Spinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
“ Tubercular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Mental Diseases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Migraine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Miliaria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Milium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Monomania. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Mumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Myelitis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Myocarditis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . 488
“ Chronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Nephritis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
“ Interstitial . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
“ Parenchymatous . . . . . . . 681
“ Suppurative . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Nervous Prostration. . . . . . . . . 598
Nettle-Rash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Neuralgia of Heart. . . . . . . . . . 497
A DRUGLESS SYSTEM OF HEALING. 851
. Redbyprºerston 1991
PAGE PAGE
Neuralgia of Stomach........ 653 Salt Rheum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Neurasthenia. . . . . . . . . . ....... 598 Scabies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Neuritis, Simple. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Sciatica. . . . . . . . . . . . . tº º º sº tº e º 'º º 584
Multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Sclerosis, Arterio............. 498
tº e º s e e º 'º º º ºs º ºs e º ſº e º & Gº 607 “ Cerebro-Spinal . . . . . . . . . 574
* * e o ſº e g º e º e º º tº º º ſº e º 'º 837 “ of Kidney. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Oedema of the Lungs. . . . . . . . 551 “ of Liver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Pachymeningitis . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 “ Spinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Spinalis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Scorbutus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Palsy, Shaking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Sebaceous CySt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Wasting . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 565 Seborrhoea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Paralysis, Agitans. . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Shingles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Small POX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Sore Throat. . . . . . . . . . . . . 373, 378
Infantile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Stomatitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 373
Progressive Bulbar. . . . . 563 St. Vitus' Dance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
* * * * * * * * > * * * * * * * * * * g º e 633 Sudamina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
tº dº º ºs º º e º ſº tº º ſº tº e º ºs e e 287 Sunstroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
* e º e e º e º e º 'º º e º e º º e 818 Tachycardia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
tº e º is e º e º e º 'º e º e e º 'º e 772 Tetanus, Intermittent. . . . . . . . 604
Pericarditis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . 466 “ Cephalic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Chronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Tetter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
gº º ºs & e º 'º & e º 'º e º e º 'º is e 701. Thrombosis, Cerebral. . . . . . . . 522
Pharyngitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Tinea, Circinata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * > 438 “ Favosa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
tº e º sº e º 'º e e º 'º e º 'º e º 'º e º e º gº º º 743 “ Sycosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
• * * * * * * * * * * * * c e e s e a e 452 “ Tonsurans . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Pneumonia, Croupous. . . . . . . . 426 “ Versicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
Catarrhal . . . . . . . . tº e º e º ºs 435 Tonsilitis, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Intestinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 “ Catarrhal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Pneumothorax . . . . . . . . ....... 457 Trichinosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Prickly Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 Tuberculosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
* * * c e e º e º ſº e º 'º e e º is e e g 736 Tumors, Intercranial. . . . . . . . . 526
* * * * * * * * * * g g tº e º e e º ºs e 785 Typhilitis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
* * * * * * * * g g g º º ºs e º e º e º 'º 344 Uraemia, Acute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
a * s tº º e º e s is e º e º e º 'º e o e º e 377 Urticaria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Rheumatism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Vertigo . . . . . . . . . . . . tº º e º 'º e º e º ſº 532
Inflammatory . . . . . . . . . . 303 Warts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Muscular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Whooping Cough. . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Ringworm . . . . . . . . . . . ... 799, 803 Worms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.1

252
5 O2O 2 O
i
§§§）
$.
%
ſae
£À
+
¿:
。
！ ±##ſae:
.ğ$ț¢
¿¿.*
23
*+,-,***
*;
¿.*¿¿.*,,.，:;!
&&&&&
§§§§?” №.→·-...' ） ? ?ae
*\，\，\ſ*:）*）&º·-§
¿-§§§§§
¿şț¢
¿??¿?
*
§ §§
§§§§§§
§§
¿?
-£3.
§§§§§
§§§（**） №ºr ！！！
#-·-|-§:&…
šķ --T¿- ··· *
º.ſ.&.----
&&&&
!, ***
ș.
-§§§·§’Aſſºț¢.…. ► | ►·）;§§§-ſae; }--¿?,¿é:
§§§§ §§º ș«;:%- -;*...!-§§.& \;¿?§§§
§.};*:
*{&
****

§Ķ
§§
w：8
§§
§
。*
§§